JP7093754B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "slot machine").

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is performed in which a large number of prizes can be obtained when a winning prize is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won a prize at the starting port. Then, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a hit has been won. At this time, the special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined variable time on a predetermined display. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the above special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won the prize, and the opening / closing member of the large winning opening is operated to increase the number of players. Offers special games that can be awarded the prize of.

JP-A-2017-006393

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is required to suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest .

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest in gaming.

Means 1: A plurality of operation units targeted to be operated by the player,
Judgment means to make a judgment and
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and a privilege granting means.
It is possible to generate an operation permissible display period in which the operation acceptance for the operation unit is permitted , and the image display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted is displayed with periodic changes. An operation permissible display period execution means that can cause a change after reception when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the display period.
Equipped with
As the type of the operation permissible display period, a specific operation permissible display period and a special operation permissible display period are prepared .
In the specific operation permissible display period , there is an operation unit that allows a plurality of operation receptions and is displayed as the image display , and the operation reception is made to the operation unit in the specific operation permissible display period. Then , based on the fact that the operation reception has been made, as one of the changes after the reception, it is possible to hide the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display that imitates the operation unit. And
In the special operation permissible display period, there is an operation unit that allows a plurality of operation receptions and is displayed as the image display, and the operation reception is performed to the operation unit in the special operation permissible display period. And, based on the fact that the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display that imitates the operation unit is not hidden, and the periodic change can be continued. ,
The special operation permissible display period is generated based on the establishment of a special condition, but is generated when the generation condition is satisfied after the production sound of a specific type is made inaudible, and the specific type. There are both cases where the production sound is not inaudible but is output audibly, and the generation condition is satisfied.
moreover,
In the special operation allowable display period, when the previous symbol variation ending at the time when the period occurs is executed in the first variation pattern, the effect sound of the specific type is in an inaudible state. When the previous symbol variation that occurs in the above and ends at the time when the period occurs is executed in the second variation pattern, it occurs in the audible output of the specific type of effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the staging operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the staging operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the staging operation unit from the direction which the central axis of an operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut along the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the staging operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. (A) is a view of the staging operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is sectional drawing which cut at the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board constituting a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit and the like of a payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a payout control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing to output the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S5322). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the said effect symbol variation start process in a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification is terminated, for each type of the notification sound exemplified in FIG. 119. It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword staging operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword staging operation unit. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect pattern selection table in the effect mode which can execute a sword withdrawal effect, (A) an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B). ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided in the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and is (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, (C) the second. Indicates the state of sword withdrawal. It is a vertical sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, and (C) the second sword pulling state. It is a vertical sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the staging display device and the motion transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the staging display device and the motion transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the staging display device and the motion transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button used from various aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button used from various aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button used from various aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for the pseudo-ream production. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the transition example. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button is once enabled without the sword decoration being effective, and then the sword decoration is activated. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the integrated image. It is a figure which shows the display example about the integrated image from the start to the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows the display example about the integrated image from the start to the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows an example about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the variation example about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the variation example about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the variation example about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the variation example about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the variation example about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the variation example about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the variation example about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect which suggests the degree of expectation of an integrated image step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the integrated image. It is a figure which shows the example of the production progress in the valid period that the integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the production progress in the valid period that the integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the production progress in the valid period that the integrated image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 2nd reception acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 1st acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the effect content when the 2nd reception acceptance state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the effect content when the 1st reception acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 4th reception acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 5th reception acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 1st condition is satisfied and the 1st reception period (the 1st reception effect) occurs as a result of determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 2nd condition is satisfied and the 2nd reception period (the second reception effect) occurs as a result of determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the third condition is satisfied and the third reception period (third reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 4th condition is satisfied and the 4th reception period (the 4th reception effect) occurs as a result of determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 5th condition is satisfied and the 5th reception period (the 5th reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the sixth condition is satisfied and the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs as a result of determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 7th condition is satisfied and the 7th reception period (7th reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the 1st reception period (the 1st reception effect) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the 1st reception period (the 1st reception effect) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (the 2nd reception effect) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (the 2nd reception effect) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the 4th reception period (the 4th reception effect) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the 4th reception period (the 4th reception effect) occurs. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the reception period B (reception effect B) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. It is a table which shows the setting example concerning the occurrence condition of the reception period A to D. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the reception period B (reception effect B) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the reception period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the reception period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the reception period D. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the variation pattern in which the reception period E (reception effect E) occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example in the reception period E. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd B reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd B reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3C reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3C reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1E reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display related to the reception period in the 1E reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2E reception period. It is a figure explaining the reception period-related periodicity display in the 2E reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3E reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4E reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display related to the reception period in the 4E reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 4E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 4E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 5th reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6E reception period. It is a figure which shows the modification of the special image display with a periodic change. It is a figure which shows the modification of the special image display with a periodic change. It is a figure which shows the modification of the special image display with a periodic change. It is a figure which shows the basic effect example when a plurality of operation permissible periods occur. It is a figure which shows the basic effect example when a plurality of operation permissible periods occur. It is a figure which shows the basic effect example when a plurality of operation permissible periods occur. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st floor reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 1st floor reception period. It is a figure which shows the directing example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st floor reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd floor reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 2nd floor reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern that the 2nd floor reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern that the 2nd floor reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd floor reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 3rd floor reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern that the 3rd floor reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern that the 3rd floor reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 5th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 7th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 7th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 8th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 8th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 9th floor reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 9th floor reception period.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the 20 to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 having a front-rear outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through port of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and a player according to a game state that is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and changes as a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. The effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and the door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 and the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e. The normal guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. It is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game balls are housed inside. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to be guided to the above, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the payout of the game ball can enhance the interest of the player, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front after being disassembled. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. It is provided with a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper part on the left end side of the front view of the curtain plate member 50 and a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position left and right from the center of the left and right on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Are prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surface of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that a game ball can pass through. The vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and the vertical wall portion 54 bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 and the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. It is provided with a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned in a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs to increase strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has a flat plate shape extending horizontally and a quadrangular outer shape of the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. The flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and the lateral fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, under normal conditions, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 behind the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a conical stand shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca gradually narrows, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the cloaca 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower lateral fixing portions 88 are provided apart from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. To.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for the upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 17B is an outer upper side view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the front end surface having an arc shape, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. Because the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side and the component force F1 face the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). , The moment to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the bearing groove 63 is placed on the main body frame from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the part of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which a game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. It includes a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Lock between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be rotated according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The staging operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball lending / returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details of the effect operation unit 400 will be described later, the large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player and the door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display the effect image. It is equipped with a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, although the details will be described later. It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 having a rectangular shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left end side of the front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the view and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably mounted. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the purpose of the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the tubular handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461). , The upper speaker 573, etc., and the door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrating back and forth on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of protruding pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the flange member 143 and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame are interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144, which urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame, a mounting piece connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The crossguard member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the crossguard member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the crossguard member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the crossguard member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or is pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the front view of the door frame 3 can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. It is provided with a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a conical stand shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The decorative substrate 161 on the left side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 162 on the lower left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protrusion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted at a portion outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 on the lower side of the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protrusion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in a rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flanges that project into the cylinder portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 by screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylinder portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylinder portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners of the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is used for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thereby, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side of the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side of the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the staging operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. 34 (a) is a front view of the staging operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (b) is a right side view of the staging operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and the player can perform a pressing operation and present an effect image to the player. Is.

The staging operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, so that the player can press and operate the operation button 410, and the staging operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 mounted on the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the base unit 430. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b, which are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than the center.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and a main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which are cylindrically projected rearward along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a strip shape and arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outside of the main body portion 413a in the front-rear direction and having a predetermined length along the outer circumference. The base openings 413e (six) extending in the circumferential direction and the base opening 413e and the main body 413a extend forward from the front end in a cylindrical shape, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer peripheral edge abutting on the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against it, it moves backward until the rear end abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 toward the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided with the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A transparent portion whose rear is visible with respect to the outer diameter of 410 is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the staging operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner side of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light radiated forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being decorated with light emission other than the portion targeted for light emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c having a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of attachment portions 416e and the left and right portions of the notch portions 416c are attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the first LEDs 422a. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The decorative substrate 423 on the right side of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 is attached with a weight 424a eccentric to the rotating shaft, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the staging operation unit 400, the cylindrical main body portion 413a rear end side of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire staging operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Action effect of the staging operation unit]
The operation and effect of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. In FIG. 45A, a part of the operation button is cut out in a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and the first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame, or the like is intended to hide the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the staging operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through port 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the overall width of the staging operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The staging operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the staging operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the staging operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the staging operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the staging operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the staging operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the staging operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the staging operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 of the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the staging operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , Projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for staging provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 44, The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation buttons are enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by a player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the staging to operate.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the staging operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. The entire staging operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the staging operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like bending downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the staging operation unit 400 is restricted, and the staging operation unit mounting of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent the staging operation unit 400 or the like from being damaged. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the staging operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the staging operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. Although a gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, the gap on the outer periphery of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is opened from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the staging operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a are separated from each other. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. Since the overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

As described above, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of them emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are emitted and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the left side of the front view of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower front part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It comprises a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) have a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. The reflective surface may be provided by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a front-view circular circular lens portion 532a corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a front-view quadrangular square shape corresponding to the square opening 531a. It is provided with a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is concave rearward in a conical shape in the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole toward the front as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel to the front, and the input light is used. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160). It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in the square lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b divides a plurality of concentric grooves into a plurality of radially extending lines, and then divides the plurality of concentric grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Since the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting the lenses in the radial direction, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly luminescently decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multi-faceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-faceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light that the circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted by the light.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square cylinder shape extending back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U-shape with the front view open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so as to move backward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left. It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535, the lower end of the upper dogleg-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower dogleg-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 has a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are mounted on the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffuser lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffuser lens member 555 so as to cover the left side of the 554 is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and the right are open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left shading member 559 and an impermeable light attached to close the open right side of the right unit left shading member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit and a right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end portion. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As for the reflective surface, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is provided from a reflective material such as metal or resin as well as the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the reflective surface is reflected to the inner surface thereof. It can also be provided by attaching a seal. As will be described later, the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and is a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective vertical wall portion 33.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100, and the decorative substrate 552A on the upper right side of the door frame is the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens unit 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and each of the main body 553a on the right side of the front view. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of notched portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical divisions when the left diffuser lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 553e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f are left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arcuate groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 can be visually recognized. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b, the notch portions 556c which are notched in a square shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a on the right side of the front view. Front view of the main body 556a, the accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and is provided in the vertical direction. On the left side, a plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided so that each input lens portion 556e is arranged in the vertical direction so as to be the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of notches 556c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the right diffuser lens members when the right diffuser lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side close to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body portion 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arcuate groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right side of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and the decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and a rear wall portion. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. It is provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right of the substantially center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided with three sets of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, with a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The shape of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit closes the right opening opened to the right of the left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body portion 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. It can be light-emitting and decorated only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be designated. , Each can be independently luminescently decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each of them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical row on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron composed of a plurality of triangles is vertically arranged in a plurality of rows on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape of a cuboid.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and the multi-faceted decoration is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends vertically shortly and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a large plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be decorated with light emission.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 greatly protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. FIG. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speaker 573s attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear of the cage open and penetrate back and forth at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of (three left and right) slits 574b that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown here, the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the inner periphery of the opening window. The structure is such that an outer peripheral light detection unit 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detection unit 35a, right outer outer light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery thereof is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of the plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the front side of the unit body 271 respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It is provided with a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surface of each of the door frame top unit 570 is moved rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of the quadrangle extending to the left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right directions on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with an opening 574a penetrating back and forth at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in the diagonally extending portion of the portion protruding forward in a trapezoid on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion diagonally extending forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The front surface of the top right decorative portion 574f is formed so as to be located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a modified pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the modified pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front of the door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front of the variable pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light and decorate.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side to the center side. It is composed of a 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It is equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As the interior progresses toward the center, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end side, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused in the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, unevenness of a square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing to the left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 in the top right decorative lens member 580 by means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 via the direct portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a side view substantially square having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting halfway to the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the abbreviation that connects the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a lower wall of a right triangle and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 mounted on the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower parts of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is a partition. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are hollowed out backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the vicinity of both ends in the left-right direction in which the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by means of a plurality of light guide members 578 provided behind the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left-right direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through opening 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed (dish unit). It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 are positioned rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the staging operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the staging operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the staging operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the staging operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the staging operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to display the staging operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move a hand for a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from either side or from the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the staging operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the staging operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and it is an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game ball from the upper plate 321 is discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game ball of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The dish ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outer side of the lower dish opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper plate 321 full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, the door frame 3 arranges the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and also stands the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by reflecting on the right wall portion. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 can be discharged without showing the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so that the main body frame 4 The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand in or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e to the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is doord. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around you.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emission on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island equipment, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the upper door frame top unit 570 of the through opening 111, and also has front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasize it. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the presence of the machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the staging operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided on the lower side and the upper side of the through opening 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration with a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction to the front, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 shows the game board of FIG. 63. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after disassembling. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the gaming board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 has a front component 1000 whose outer circumference is divided into a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game area 5a which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a starting port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first starting port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially vertically from the lower ends, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. In the security recess 1008, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the mounting bosses 1010 and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through port 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is located above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 in the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end in the front view and is opened downward to have a notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch portion 1152 above the notch portion 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel can be mounted between the front component 1000 and the game panel 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the outer side of the game area 5a in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status display 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. The number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round display 1407 composed of three LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface of the front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface of the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lock the lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening opening 1126.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a starting port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first starting port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to a substantially center in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with an acceptable size, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting a game ball.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a. In the state where the side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the axis and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal display mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which a lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached up and down on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable staging units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , Passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes the obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball, by accepting the game ball in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), and the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. As for the suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the combination of the lit LEDs suggests the special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image that is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the lottery special lottery result.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. In the window portion of the door frame 3, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is in the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation buttons 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used in the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button inner decorative portion 432 g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as a light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as a back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the staging operation unit 400 (or the second staging operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped, the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side staging display device 460 overlapped, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with no perspective, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, a decorative member 432 (or a door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), a door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the subscreen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432 g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) with the decoration portion 432g in the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the operation button, it is referred to as the first decorative body. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the position, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with the lens changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side where the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411 is not provided. Through the operation button on the back side, the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration unit 411a is radially arranged. The decoration can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame inside the operation button can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is provided with a decorative portion 432 g inside the second button having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g is provided. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) in the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button lower by the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button, the decorative board 433 on the left side of the operation button, the decorative board 434 on the right side of the operation button, and the operation button are on. In contrast to the direct light emitted from each LED (or LED477a) of the inner decorative substrate 435 and the inner decorative substrate 436 under the operation button, the first button decorative portion 411a is decorated inside the second button. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light-emitting decoration, whereas the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emittingly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted from the outside, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move in a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button do not need to be secured. The side second effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device) 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the outside of the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from feeling frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and at the same time, the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, below the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410 that can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the decoration inside the operation button that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. Since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at the position where the storage tray of the game ball is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see it at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b, which are provided with the part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for illuminating the frame side lens 417. It is provided with an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for light-emitting decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for light-emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative portion. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. The wiring connected to the right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminescent decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration unit 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately emitting the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation-type staging) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, at the time of executing the player participation type effect, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f in which only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f in the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button behind and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be decorated by emitting light through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive into the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can make the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and decorate in a good state, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) inside the operation button is opened from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the operation button. The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be obscured by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emitting decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 is formed in an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light, a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect, the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less bored with various light emission effects, and the player is entertained. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 is extended to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game ball, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate 325b extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends upward to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the gaming ball does not abut on the rear side of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely exhibited. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate main body 325 on the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening). When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can restrict the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and thus the fingertips. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened because the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In this state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), reduce interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A surely restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed such that a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like. After being prepared for the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that has been taken out, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed on the outside of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) that stands out in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine can be seen, the gaming machine different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first expansion portion 325B, and the second expansion portion having the lower plate second region A2 are added to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first expansion unit 325B, and the second expansion unit 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space in the rear part depends on the amount of protrusion to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second) having different amounts of protrusion to the rear. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the staging operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where a large amount of the game ball is loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if a large number of game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game ball is below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to receive the game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided with the lower plate 321 and the lower plate 322, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the game in the lower plate 322 is made difficult for the player. It is possible to prevent the ball from being distracted by making it difficult to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the cushioning portion 322d, it is assumed that the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, it is probable that more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is difficult to see from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c, and the buffer portion 322d, and can be discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to make sure that the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is illusion that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball as in the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the staging unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear as if it greatly protrudes forward, and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging) can be seen. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in a position where the large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is wrapped around to the rear, and the storage amount of the game ball (volume of the lower plate 322) in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, and the game can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by tactile sensation, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. It is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be used. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be installed from the player side. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be made more conspicuous and can strongly attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, the decoration and the staging of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed vertically and vertically, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a feeling like that, and you can let the player concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 that can present effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The interior decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button is attached, and the outside is surrounded by the outer periphery of the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 having a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 having a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412, and protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side first) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. (Ii) It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the button and the 470) is relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a or the like, so that the appearance is prevented from deteriorating, and a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm is prevented. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a cylindrical shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the outside of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) and make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in an inclined state with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the decorative member 432 and the door frame inside the operation button arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, the operation button 410 is made to stand out in the pachinko machine 1 and is of interest to the player. It is possible to make it easy to select the present pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be performed. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque over the entire circumference from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside with a predetermined width is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer circumference has no directionality as compared with the case of having a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect for the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the staging, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 410 by using the staging image and the light emitting staging by the staging display device 460 on the door frame side (second staging display device 460A on the door frame side). By actively participating and entertaining the player in the player participation type production, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. (2) A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the base unit 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or translucent. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable to apply light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, etc. on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). It may be 322, or it may be dented rearward only from the right outer part of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around to the rear of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). You may be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedral shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "With an operating device", "With a rotating body with decoration on the surface", "With a decorative body with decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that follow the concept of the machine with decorations that are three-dimensionally imitated. " A member such as a unit or a panel may be attached, which is provided with a "designed by a seal, printing, etc." Further, the member to be mounted in the mounting space 326j (staging operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be mounted. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is shown with the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a opened forward for mounting the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). The dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, the front surface of such a dish unit cover may be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. desirable.

Further, in the above embodiment, the area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in viewing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided with respect to the circumferential direction. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the staging operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the display device 460A or the like is shown so that the rear member can always be visually recognized, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front-rear (or upper and lower) is specified as a predetermined condition. A configuration having a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible by satisfying the above may be used. Here, as the variable light transmission means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". It becomes opaque or becomes opaque so that the rear side can be seen. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized in a normal state. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen, so that the front member can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member can be shown. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened, so that it is on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of light emission effects and decoration effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, + 5V). A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to a game advanced by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs such as the main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data, and various types. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage is mainly provided.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "built-in main control") that updates a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and inputs a clock signal to the main control MPU 1310a ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function that has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. And, it is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting the various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entered in the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. Further, the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 attached and detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or its predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol display 1405, 1st special hold number display 1404, 2nd special hold number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status display 1401, and round display 1407. do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 2001, 2201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. Circuits are connected via (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec issues a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is provided with BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in microprocessor that stores various control programs including payout control programs that control operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and the 952d. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program is to be paid out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have the reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. And, it is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects the ball-out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 use the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full in the stored game ball is first of the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, whereby the payout control without a reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cc to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). (Specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit) when the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hole. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending / returning display unit 330. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending / returning display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power cutoff process even when the power is cut off. As for various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the operation signal is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and is triggered by the payout control MPU952a from the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay. The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one digit of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for specifying the contents to be displayed by turning on are the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the board 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the device can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, and is used as a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal to output to the CR unit 6 or to convey that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island facility and capable of electrically connecting or electrically disconnecting an alternating current 24 volt (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , The launch control unit 953 that controls the launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. It is equipped with a power supply creating circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 with respect to the first control unit MCG, and is shown in FIG. The effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. While controlling the drawing of the frame-side staging display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour / minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. It is equipped with a volume adjusting volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operating.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emission modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of big hit game states and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e"). It is described as.) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d because the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board to a lamp via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board motor to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal of is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , It is input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system goes out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. It is diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various serials I for peripheral control, centering on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with a built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to independently transfer data between devices without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the input / output devices such as the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decorative drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is reset. Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of a big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as a substrate volume 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying hall clerk and the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game production are notified. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume of the sound can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the sound, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will be in a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are schedule data for sound generation that generates sound effects and the like, and schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. And the game state is instructed (for example, it is instructed to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is an effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object, and Bank0 (1 ms). Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a is used for "(1fr)". Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and the like, since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak or the like is provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decorative drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cia is a detection signal from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Dial created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). It is a storage area in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

In addition, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of Bank0 (1fr), the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of Bank0 (1ms). The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, the peripheral area of the previous time is executed. When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. LED. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. -The DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is generated in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr), and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit is used for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is used to copy at high speed, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in this embodiment, the staging information (1fr) and the staging information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and special effect flags), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is to be backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3". , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. The 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source for control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. To the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and heads toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. And, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f that connects the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input while the circuit is connected so as to transmit. It is equipped with. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display image data used to display at least one selection display item described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal display and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the staging operation unit 400 should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various peripheral control RAMs 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transferred from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a staging display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display is arranged near the lower part of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is used by THine Electronics Inc. for "V-by-One (V-by-One). By adopting a differential communication method called "registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential).
While a serial interface called "Signaling" is used, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes. Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 for the image data for the effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. No peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP1512a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data of the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the staging sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of in the sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplifies to the master volume value, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. ..

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound is simple in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined at the bottom. It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the staging sound is muted, the staging sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the staging sound is proceeding according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound generation forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400). If the setting mode is entered and adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is designed to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period because the muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b draw the character data on the game board side for drawing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the character data on the door frame side in the display area of the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of a difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, it is possible to take noise countermeasures.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side staging transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronization signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit is arranged. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the discharge device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise due to electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise, etc. that has invaded the circuit board.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential 1-pair cable for electrically connecting between a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, Zain Electronics in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Even if it is a mechanism that is not easily affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., the configuration with such hardware alone is due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data in the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side shall be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, the door frame 3 can be opened from the main body frame 4 to remove various wirings, and then the door frame 3 can be removed from the main body frame 4 to maintain the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the board.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are connected to each other. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminals 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. Of the twisted pair cables, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the staging display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is differentially input to a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input, a circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so that the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the staging display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and is serialized in various ways. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image to convey that when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is used. It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side" to convey the problem. Please call the clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. The effect based on the effect can be developed by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa as the date, hour, minute and second information. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information, the input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen of is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, or the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the game board side effect. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. Peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and calendar information and time to specify the date and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minute and second, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, 85%, which is the correction information acquired for this 75%, is further added by 10%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a 1024-step value from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-step value is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player. The notification sound for, etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and are muted. The volume from to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen of is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is set and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. If the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect operation unit 400 is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the staging operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to the desired level, and if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the staging operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, he / she sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The ground (GND) of various boards and the ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a emission control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a via the power supply board 931. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create a direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as “+37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of + 37V to be supplied, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the firing solenoid 682 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d has DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is forwarded by the diode PD0. Current flows toward the positive terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns from the payout control board 951 and again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is obstructed by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by an electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and peripherally via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e supplies + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative board of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared to the case of monitoring the voltage to be applied, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), so that the ripple (alternating current component folded by the voltage) is first removed. Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being connected to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus end of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is used. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. In addition to the signal, the circuit is such that an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal with HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistance MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistance MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded over the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , + 12V is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 24V starts to drop from + 24V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistance MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 12V starts to drop from + 12V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistance MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is released and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is input. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is the same. (The logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D type flip flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal is used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 for monitoring a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is reset. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout power failure warning signal to the payout control board 951 and outputs the peripheral power failure warning signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip flot. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 via the resistor MR 27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR 20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal, is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is wired. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 on the payout control board 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. 70. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. By doing so, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. In, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is one transistor in each of the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal, and the power failure warning signal and peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is delivered to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 951 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 is received as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal indicating that the normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is completed is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main pay ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69 are displayed. Drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310 bb without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 contains a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310ea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistance AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistance for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also to connect the resistance MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistance MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistance MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 has the negative terminal as ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to be the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or a momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is cut off. It is ensured that the signal is received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being missing or missing.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. Therefore, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be disrupted and to prevent the command from being omitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the omission of a command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main circuit serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as the main circuit serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cc. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 1310cc, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt and omits a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly comprises the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will be power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 in the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
In addition to the payout control MPU952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) that outputs a clock signal. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
In the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) while the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 via the resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR 21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame open switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 21 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 22 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input]
The main body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) while the 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR 24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29, PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 24 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 to make the logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which is a state that does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. The payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 kb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal that is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 passes through the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side in 951 and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 834 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the dispenser motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body fails. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage changes, and the signal is used as the RWMCLR signal and is the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn on the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistance PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistance MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn off the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation that the output terminal of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is instructed to perform RAM clear that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the terminal 3 and the terminal 10 which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 has the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869 from the CR unit 6. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to a rental device such as a game ball. An XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, via the terminal board 869. And is output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71 and also to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72, PR76, and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 kb to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. It is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is transmitted to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function as the payer serial data transmission signal. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

The RWMCLR signal, the payout power failure warning signal, the door open signal, the full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) described above are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. In addition to each of the signals 1) and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. It can be output, or the payout motor drive signal can be output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function can output the payout motor drive signal to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to this, for example, the payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout failure warning signal, and the like related to the above are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the jackpot information of the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. Game information signals such as output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer shall perform the number of jackpots in which the round is twice (two-round jackpot). The number of big hits of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of times of big hits in 15 rounds) and the number of big hits. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. It may be difficult to get a big hit for 15 rounds. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting an output signal to a hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 has an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to convey the fact, and the main prize ball number information output signal is various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in is 10 balls, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the state is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to inform that the variation display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The information output signal during the time reduction is a signal indicating that the time reduction state has occurred, and the start opening winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal board 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. It is a signal to convey that, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to count the number of times to count the number of times to perform the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal to notify each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the start port 2004, and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is generated. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, the two-round jackpot information output signal is used. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is red and outputs a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time-saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time-saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time saving state is generated in the pachinko machine 1 when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. At the same time, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time reduction and to grasp the total number of times the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. It is possible to grasp that there is, and it is possible to count the number of times that the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times that the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify every time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having the connector provided in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a row from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is, for example, a game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a big hit of 15 rounds happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, as described above, the number of prize balls information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 as the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. For example, a clerk in the hall checks a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying a game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball jam (also, it occurs in the payout device 830). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball squeeze) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working on the game, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall after the 15-round big hit is completed because the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15 round big hit is finished and the 15 round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of gaming balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the above, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are used. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of gaming balls to be released and the number of balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of staging display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side staging display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, it is restored to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to do so. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , While being transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the difference. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, so that the door is connected. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored from the peripheral control board 1510 in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460. It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

+ 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. 76 is supplied to the VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, and the door. The GND terminal, GND terminal, LVDSGND application paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In a normal operating mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, is abnormal for some reason. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2 which is a damping resistance, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d in order to convey to that effect to the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image is provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 for the door frame side effect. It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is peripheral. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that tells that the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 terminal to the D17 terminal, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal have three video signals (18), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs (bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communication with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out a game ball as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number), and command 10H specifies one prize ball and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is used from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to Command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH wins. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the special figure 2 tuning effect, the jackpot related, the power on, the normal electric role effect related, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 entrainment production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as a status and "** H" as a mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is instructed to end the special drawing 1 tuning effect, and the variable time state designation command is to instruct the probability and the time saving state. The probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state, a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state, and a low probability time saving state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be obtained. In addition to increasing the number of stops displayed compared to the non-time saving state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is longer than that in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state). The second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 entrainment production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end regarding the second special symbol display 1405. For these various commands, the status is "B * H" and the mode is "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number.
) Is assigned (“*” indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command between the rounds starts while the large winning opening 1 is closed (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is the start during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command is used to indicate the start of opening), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command indicates the start of the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the big winning opening 2005), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the time of closing the big winning opening 1 (starting closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005. Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot symbol display command is opened (when the jackpot unit 2100 opens the jackpot 2005). ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is sent. , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named power-on state and power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. In), the information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to specify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the above occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Also sent to.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1402, which are named as the start of the normal map synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command specifies the off, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the gaming state, a low-probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the command for specifying the variable state is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service effect-related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Hit Opening, Solenoid Open Display, and Solenoid Ending. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per drawing is transmitted at the start of the opening per drawing, and the opening display command is sent when the opening is open (a pair of movable pieces are left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed to start, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. This is to instruct the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when the above occurs.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the door is in the closed state. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 is directed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The main body frame opening notification is instructed when the main body frame is opened, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. It is instructed to end the main body frame opening notification when it is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a state of being opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. Set it as a status and set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7 * H" is added to these received commands. Formates the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The formatted frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned "8 * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the execution and main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other categories include start opening winning, variable shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command indicates the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively, and the variable shortening operation end designation command is variable. The state transition from the shortened operation state to the variable shortened non-operation state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is such that 0 to 4 special symbols 2 are held (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on the first special symbol display 1403, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening winning command (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end designation command is sent. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after digesting the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times", and the special symbol 1 storage command changes the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1. When (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start is further performed. It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 2 operation changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays a change in the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for display), and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the number of reserved balls is reduced), the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball is set at the first start port 2002). It is sent when the number of reserved balls has increased after entering the ball), and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation increases (when the number of reserved balls enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls is increased). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, or the second starting opening. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the fact by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 consists of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when out of ball. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, a value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, a value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in stock of 50 or more, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In the case of a ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game balls are repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error clear navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process, which will be described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 69, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of this random number for a small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is used to determine a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece is used to determine the initial value. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 69. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or in the process of turning on the power on the main control side, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total is stored in the main control side power cutoff process (power down). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on the extracted ID code. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed to perform the second operation. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “ It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer set value is set, the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU1310a is reached until the time measured by the main control built-in WDT1310af reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT1310af with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, the timer clear setting value is set. The time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time by the WDT1310af with built-in main control by the time set by the timer set value and starting the time again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC 21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC 22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with its logic as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when the state in which the logic is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is latched as LOW.

Following step S14, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It is in a state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 72, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When there is an input of the power failure warning signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control program, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, this main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "recovery" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK-is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 89 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to input the detection signal input by the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). (Game control side normal operation control means), it is handled as a release switch for canceling error notification due to an error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error generated in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after the lapse of the predetermined time, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S14. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2107, an attacker solenoid 2108, a first special symbol indicator 1403, a second special symbol indicator 1405, and a first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 69. , The second special hold number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power cutoff process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started to be timed, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the power-off processing on the main control side in the power-on processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S28. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power restoration and there is no intention indication by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, the game can be advanced. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power cutoff processing composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff process can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the power of the main control side at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a is used. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeatedly performing the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. By making it impossible to start the time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt process on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one is the part covered by hardware so that the disconnection process is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. In other words, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or a power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 is stepped. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The drive of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and restored according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is issued. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmission to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 start the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. A command to indicate the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be.

Further, for example, a screen (for example, that the movable piece is expanded) telling the second starting port 2004 that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the display (screen to be transmitted to the player) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The movable piece will shift from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is possible, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game the player should play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state shifts to the current state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, the screen showing the number of rounds). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. A screen that tells you that there is a message (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It's a big hit. The big prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big prize opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, in a state where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game returns. When electricity is turned on, a screen telling that the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "movable pieces" The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the screen that conveys the message "The game is being expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start port." It is possible to instruct the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the check sum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on as shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. In these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the recovery time), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving states, high-probability time-saving states, low-probability non-time-saving states, and high-probability non-time-saving states (probability and time-saving states) is restored. It is composed of information indicating whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (for example,). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs after 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the worker of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And a series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is copyrighted. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the signal has been normally received is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. Detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 Detects a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 and a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 69. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and input information. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and the detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 90, which is classified into the other, is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2001, 2, 201, and the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game balls entered in the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 When the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time, respectively, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings will be performed due to the effects of chattering and noise. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 It can increase reliability.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining an initial value for a jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 may be created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls by reading input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area is added, and the number of balls of the added game balls is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command reception process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and a random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. It is determined (determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. A value of 32767 is set, and the value is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit, various commands classified as related to the big hit shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) the large winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2, the figure is shown in the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10. The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the round is performed 15 times. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color, and the lighting signal is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. In addition to storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starting port solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as time-saving and medium-time information output information and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in FIG. 1 related to the synchronization effect and various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 89, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. A big prize is won based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected by various commands classified into commands and big hits. Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric power production, Fig. 90 Various commands classified into notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation) shown in Navi commands and frame status 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310a a to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the power is restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the power-on processing on the main control side shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. , Status, status, which configures the power-on status command, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process of turning on the power of the main control side, and the game information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error generation command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit). ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command when the power is turned on in FIG. It can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value to configure the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. The effect can be displayed in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 92. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on as shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the inspection device of the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the staging control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the staging control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is backed up by Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), are compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), is copied back and used as a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a mismatch), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is also backed up by Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 (SRAM). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the staging control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. The processing of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600, is included.

In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. It lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the staging control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the staging control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the staging control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the staging control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the staging control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmit buffer register of. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to synchronize with 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the staging control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad one byte at a time. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the staging control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. It is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by music and sound effects according to.

Following step S1016, the staging control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time as transmitting, the left side audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the staging control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the staging control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate whether it is an aspect.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the staging control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program includes screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, and sound based on information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, and a large prize opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into, as shown in FIG. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric function production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the staging control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode accompanying the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the game state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the staging control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The saved calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the staging control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. At the same time, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is provided to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the staging control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the staging control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a 1024-step value from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volume 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the staging control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in the Bank 0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and specify the copy from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. All the contents are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is used at high speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and specify the copy from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies the copy to the Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). All copies are made in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 96 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit stationary processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). End this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is executed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since it is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 97. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in a time series constituting the schedule data. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame-decorated drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in 1 byte each, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is also shown in the figure. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511cag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the staging operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 73 are created. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cab by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and use Bank0 (1ms) from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address are copied continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95, various processes related to the above-mentioned effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[16-1--4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the receive buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, a mode in which the status is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a slingshot environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data on the peripheral control unit 1511 side are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is affected by noise and changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and the routine is terminated. This receive command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 75, is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning) is started. It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is started. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example). 1 byte) continuously backed up All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc in succession of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511c as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is used as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts from to the most significant bit B7 bit by bit.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one of the warning processes in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. And, that is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times in the determination of step S1522 that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set in the communication error flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag indicating whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one of the warning processes of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. And, that is, when a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, the number of screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is instructed to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state are performed. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the user is waiting or during the period during which the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating in the customer waiting state (when it is simply in the customer waiting state). It is designed to end this routine as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side staging provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Counting the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT and the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective, and the transmitter and the transmitter. It is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If the value is not reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side directing. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing to. For example, the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU1511a as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is a game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.") Is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform flow processing. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, a decorative design that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the start opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 can be recognized by the player. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reel rotates from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is shown as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit for the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Because the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is output from the data to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the screen generation schedule data is followed. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection with the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. Since the message "There was a problem with the side LCD display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, it tells that the drawing data received from the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 is an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery processing shown in FIG. 102 executed as one processing of the warning processing of step S1024 in the steady processing, the process proceeds to the processing of step S1542 in the same processing, and the communication check counter CC-. When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it has not reached, the process proceeds to the process of step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1). That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be the above does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the signal is reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. The message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed and notified.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side staging provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is a number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is used. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variation display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is information that the player is most interested in the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect and recovering to the correct drawing state. By stopping and displaying the decorative pattern on the right side, the information of the player's greatest interest is drawn.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state. During the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, the LOCKN signal output request data. As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to the control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a problem. The notification image (for example, "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk.") Is controlled by the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to display the effect on the game board side. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The LOCKN signal output request data is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can output the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN. When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side staging. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to inform that the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is started to be transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side staging transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage and eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which conveys that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication problem. The message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk." It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not started and stopped, the communication problem can be resolved.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the staging receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and solving a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is being repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is predetermined. It is possible to stop transmitting the data pattern (SYNC pattern) of the above to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), the game can be made to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 70 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on side process of FIG. 92 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is used. The RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as the RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information regarding the payout, and the main control side power supply of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the turn-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time when the power is turned on) has elapsed, the error generated for the payout device 830 is cleared. As an error canceling signal for this purpose, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is not output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor, but is output to the payout control MPU952a which is a payout control microprocessor. ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on side process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit power is turned on. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 is operated. An error canceling function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor 952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error clearing signal for clearing the generated error. Since it is provided in combination, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error clear function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 has various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a gaming ball driven into the gaming area to manipulate the flowing state of the gaming ball as desired and to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, or the like, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and the production will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310. It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the effect operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the effect.

In particular, in the main control board 1310, a special symbol process process is performed each time the interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning processes are performed. In this first / second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, a process of increasing the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. Will be done.

If the processing flag is 0 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable start process is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of pending hits is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the result of the jackpot determination memorized above and the current gaming state, etc. After determining and setting the stop symbol (such as the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable process is executed. In this variable processing, the timer monitors the variable time determined and set in the variable pattern setting process, and based on the time-out, the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. To stop. After that, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (loss). The process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the type of the winning jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the winning jackpot type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. After updating the game status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for missed reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuation. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined by the reach determination based on the reach random number that the reach is to be performed. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The loss variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. In the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is not performed. , The effect that the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to it, it is possible to appear such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear the variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the movable staging unit 3100 after the backside are executed.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has been shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. 104. (YES in step S5231) on condition that the detection signal by the start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start port 2002), the random number for determining the first big hit is acquired from the above random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233). A second start port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110,
-When the result of the determination processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes the game after opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 is repeated 8 times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R probability variation jackpot", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times to control the 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes after the game is repeated twice is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than left-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handedness is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a jackpot game that is open for a long time of up to 8 rounds. Only the state (generally 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). ), The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained when the big hit is won, such as the big hit game state of 16 rounds open for a long time (about 2000 game balls can be obtained) is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, in order to start such open control of the big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, there is a high probability according to the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high-probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Probability change big hit, 8R Probability change big hit B) is set when the game state is finished, and when the next big hit, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) will be described later. Will be reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is ended, and when the next jackpot is reached. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the big hit after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 described later is performed. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the fluctuation count counter is reset, and is used in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is a thing, and it is updated (for example, count-up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when starting the jackpot game state based on.

If the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set as the process of step S5236. To determine. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the large winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed. Each set process such as the number of times counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, when the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in the pending state does not disappear (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second big hit judgment random number will be performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state), the player only maintains the driving of the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the random numbers for determining the two big hits can be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, the special figure game (symbol variation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). However, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5322).

Now, assuming that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 in the process of step S5231, as shown in FIG. 105. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S5421, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in the process of step S5422 that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to make the state of S5243 to S5245, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, information on the symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) are generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5422, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S5233, the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 106. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, for second jackpot symbol). Random numbers, random numbers for the second variation display pattern) are acquired from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" (step S5252). If it is determined in the process of step S5252 that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above, the following steps S5253 to S5255 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the second special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). The command to be executed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). It should be noted that the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The big hit judgment random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read big hit judgment random number, lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process of the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )

3. 3. Execution corresponding to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 108, first steps S5301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. First-in, first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The shift operation is performed in the mode of First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize is given to the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). .. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start prize to the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display hold is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). ..

After that, as the process of step S5305, the big hit determination process, which is the determination process for the hit or miss of the big hit, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is shown in FIG. If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). The jackpot judgment table for low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high used when the gaming state is high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability. Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332. The first big hit judgment random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value indicating that the first big hit judgment random number of the type is the above loss (big hit probability at low probability; generally). "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the reference big hit judgment table at the time of low probability, 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 65332 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately 1/321).

Further, in the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The above-mentioned first big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the off-determination value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating that the above is lost. The random numbers for determining the second big hit are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). The jackpot judgment value (of the jackpot judgment value) set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number. The number of big hits may be the same and the big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is the same), or the number of big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is different). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the low probability and the big hit judgment table at the high probability may be different (they may be different). ..

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5315). ), Set the jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot (step S5316), and end the jackpot determination process.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been lost, the random number for jackpot determination read out matches the small hit determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won based on the selected jackpot determination table. Whether or not it is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the built-in ROM of the main control, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-time saving state. It is provided with a reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of the above, and a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The above reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, it matches the reach judgment value indicating that all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers do not reach. In this way, it may not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability time reduction state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time saving state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the random number for reach is reached and the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , The reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 111. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B) and reads out the random number for the first jackpot symbol in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. And the selected symbol determination table are compared with each other to determine the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers) for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is displayed. Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other.

In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of the big hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big hit symbol. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. .. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and production contents for each type of jackpot.
1. 1. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. Is controlled by the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state.

2. 2. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the staging display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls the variable display of the special symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or wins a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state. An 8R normal jackpot that performs a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state.

3. 3. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the staging display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 16R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 16R big hit game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state (successful production). ) Is performed, and the effect mode is controlled to indicate that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect was controlled to the high probability time saving state. 16R probability change jackpot

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the staging display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state (failure effect). ) Is performed, and the effect mode is controlled to indicate that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect was controlled to the high probability time saving state. 8R Probability change jackpot B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R big hit game state, it is special. While controlling the variable display of the symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or winning a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), a specific character during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state Performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which the player is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled by the effect mode indicating that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win a prize at the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 Only the variation display is executed, and a big hit (16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

Also, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that opens the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

If the 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, if the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of the next step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol (the mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped) is set. After determining (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol as an mode when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is one of the above lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, missed reach, missed) as the process of step S5337. (May indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the instruction (may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol →. Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to be a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; reach loss. If the design is determined to be out of order, it is determined to be an outlier design without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU1511a makes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit time appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. After the start of the game, the effect display during the big hit game will appear.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 112. If it is (step S5341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag is selected. If is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345) is selected. When (not shown) is selected (step S5346) and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss without performing the reach effect) occurs, the time of the loss occurs. (Not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is used as a random number for jackpot determination (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) and a random number for jackpot symbol (random number for first jackpot symbol, random number for second jackpot symbol). Multiple types are provided for each judgment result based on. Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each random number for the first variable display pattern. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a reads out the variable pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variable pattern tables according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number, and in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the random number for the variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out from this table, the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, the determination process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59. Random numbers for different types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation is executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns have high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

The super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations are increasing. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state even if a loss is finally displayed. Will be able to increase. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, a high-expected advance notice effect, which is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern, appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state are obtained. A fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common with. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the second big hit and the random number for the second symbol and is used to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds or more. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time-saving state. At the same time as urging, the player has secured time for the second starting port 2004 to win the game ball.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) is selected. It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the region directly above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate portion 2003 in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%). The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously accepted (a time saving state in which almost all the game balls driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "about 1/32". It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol coming off based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shows the fluctuation time of the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) extremely. It can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is completed in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so that 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are accepted into the second starting port 2004 one after another, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. ..

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 113, first steps S5371. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process for the variation pattern (step S5282) is set is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the fluctuation time timer is not 0 even though the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the process of steps S5371 and S5372 is performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 114, first steps S5381. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the master control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot gaming state (step S5387). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is set. When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation count counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step). S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the jackpot game in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot B) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the state is in the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) (here). Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) described above determines that the small hit execution flag is set. The small hit game state will be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is regarded as a loss, and the first special symbol process without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394). That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag and the small hit executing flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is played according to the hold status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is the mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5407) for executing a process for controlling the

The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S5402).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the above As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

If it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to put the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols into a new pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the normal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the processing of step S5421, as shown in FIG. 117. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers with variable figures) are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) at the time saving time (not shown). In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), a non-time-saving normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown). Step S5427), the selected normal figure hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 255 types of ordinary random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers were won, and the normal figure is used. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is always won, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. It controls acceptance as much as possible. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to match the judgment value per normal figure indicating that the normal random numbers have been won.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it may match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that all 255 types of normal random numbers have been won per normal number. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal map, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no possible control over the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning. At that time, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. (Ii) The acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol hit as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S5431), while the normal symbol changes when it is determined to be out of order as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and the effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern specification command reception waiting process, effect symbol change start process, effect symbol change process, effect symbol change stop process, jackpot display process , The big hit in-game process, and the big hit end effect process are executed.

Fluctuation pattern specification command reception wait process: During the period from the main control MPU1310a to the reception of the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern, it is applied to the effect (demo effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variable state and the control related to the jackpot is not performed. While performing control, when a fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing.

Staging symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol variation period are determined based on the variation pattern command, and the decorative symbol variation is started based on the determined effect content. To control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol change. Of the fluctuation patterns (effect patterns), most of the "variation patterns stopped by the jackpot symbol (effect pattern)" are prepared in pairs with the "variation pattern stopped by the lost symbol (effect pattern)". By functioning as the same fluctuation pattern (effect pattern), it becomes possible to provide an effect as to whether a jackpot symbol appears or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is described below, when the description is described as "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern", unless otherwise specified, it is stopped by the "big hit symbol". It means both a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and a "predetermined fluctuation pattern stopped by a lost pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)", and as a result of the progress of the production content in the same manner. You will reach a turning point where either the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Processing during effect symbol change: Controls to start various effect contents determined in the effect symbol change start process at each timing during the symbol change period, and when the change time ends, the value of the process flag is set to the effect symbol. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Staging symbol fluctuation stop processing: Controls to stop the fluctuation of decorative symbols based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and when the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is changed to the variable pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

Process during big hit game: Controls various effects during the period when the big hit game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended, etc.) is controlled during the period from the end of the big hit game state to the variable permissible state. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the variable pattern specification command reception.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. It is controlled so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on (variation effect).

The effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variable effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variable effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may try to do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with a part of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (variation effect) is determined in this way, a notice lottery (determination process of the advance notice effect) is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing control (processing during the change of the effect symbol) to make the advance notice effect won in the advance notice lottery appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. It is designed to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on the appearance mode of them as a compoundable possibility.

Conventionally, in such a composite effect, a plurality of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) may be generated and executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing this, it is expected that the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency of executing multiple timer effects while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. , It was considered difficult to fully improve the game entertainment.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" is intended for a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. It is executed as a count effect display from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (preparing, etc.) before starting the count display. Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A) that causes either a relatively disadvantageous effect (low expectation effect) or an advantageous effect (high expectation effect) for the player appears. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, and it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the timer effect on the advance notice side executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the effect target at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the "effect target of the timer effect" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") as the timer effect. Therefore, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the passage of time from the start of counting is displayed up to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count-up or count-down is performed, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (preliminary side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when the user wins the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern determined based on the determination table T1 ( It is possible to execute the timer effect (variable side timer effect) that is built in in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if only the preview side timer effect is executed as the count effect display as "the effect content of the advance notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, by executing it as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command", the expectation level from the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. It will be possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessary addition (addition of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the notice lottery"). For example, if the jackpot expectation when a specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", the jackpot expectation is increased by the combined effect function when the notice side timer effect is further executed. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount, but when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

The degree of expectation of a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern). Basically, the expectation of a big hit as the variation number increases. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variable side timer effect in which the "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 (variation number 9). 10) <Variation number 17 (18) is set. Further, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state is described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself itself. As a result, an effect pattern (count variation pattern) in which the variation side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation notice. It differs from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that. Further, the variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 9 and 10 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 11 and 10. In No. 12, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in A is executed, and in the variable numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. Further, the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variation numbers 19 and 18. In 20, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in B is executed, and in the variable numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-in A and B is executed.

It should be noted that the "conversation notice" is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and is often added with a relatively low expectation. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and the expectation is relatively high. It is a production that often happens (or a production that always has a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-in A, B, the character A operation, B, etc. described later) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the advance notice effect in the character reach, whereas the advance notice is performed in the SP reach. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B, not the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect content (effect pattern) is obtained for a plurality of variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as a variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6) such as shortened fluctuation or normal reach effect with low expectation", the count effect display as the timer effect on the notice side is displayed. While the effect is not won (increasing the premium degree) and the expectation level UP when the notice side timer effect appears is appropriately secured, the variation pattern is "a variation pattern that executes the effect side timer effect (increasing the premium degree). In the case of "variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like count fluctuation patterns)", the fluctuation pattern is of the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, fluctuation) as compared with the case where it is not such a count fluctuation pattern. The ratio corresponding to numbers 1 to 6 etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count fluctuation patterns in which the variable side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0) are prepared. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to individual) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4,7,8,15,16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the variable side timer effect is not executed, and four of them (variation) are prepared. Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variable side timer effect) (count variation pattern), it is more noticeable than the case where the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. The rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (timer effect on the advance notice side) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one staging pattern (variable staging) without unnecessarily increasing the degree of expectation and reducing the frequency of appearance.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern the count fluctuation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. At that time, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in reality, it is a bigger hit than in the case of loss. The effect pattern that has been won in the above can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variable number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the effect content (timer effect on the notice side) will be different. Therefore, among the above-mentioned count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays is high in one effect pattern (variation effect), the type thereof. Depending on the situation, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the advance notice side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which the advancer timer effect is determined by the advance notice lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. It will be possible to make it possible, and by extension, it will be possible to realize the production opportunity of the double timer without unnecessary addition of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is the effect target. The mode of the count display (form, color, etc. of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, in combination with "the ratio of the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect to appear is different depending on which count fluctuation pattern is used", the ease of appearance of the advance notice side timer effect is recognized. You will be able to expect.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), the variable side timer effect (variable side) regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in). The mode of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display) may be different (or at least different from any one), or may be the same (or at least the same as any one). ..

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the timer effect on the advance notice side (count effect display on the advance notice side) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be the effect. It is useful for making the player aware that the timer effect on the advance notice side, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common aspect as the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) having different expectations are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do so.

Further, in order to make it possible to more preferably recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the count display when the advance notice side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable side timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down) different. In such a configuration, even during the period in which the count display is in progress after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and it is relative to the variable side timer effect having a relatively low expectation. It becomes possible to make people interested in which of the timer effects on the advance notice side, which has a high degree of expectation, is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

At this time, in the variable side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed) as the count speed of the advance notice side timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count is displayed in the cut-in) and the mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the notice side timer effect, whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed. It will be possible to add fun by making the difficulty of judgment different. Further, in the variable side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. By displaying it, the count may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to grasp whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and the entertainment of the game will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a count display is performed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the variable side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the variation pattern corresponding to the variation side timer effect is acquired, one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect patterns is determined based on the random number for the effect, etc., and the count display of the variation side timer effect and the advance notice side timer By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed is different. I try to give it some fun

In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach) in which the start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display is different for one fluctuation pattern. Although it was decided to prepare the same effect content), multiple effect patterns (however, the time required for the total count or the time required to digest all counts) of the count display start timing or end timing are different (however, the effect is targeted for the timer effect). The type of effect and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared so as to have a one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to give fun by making it difficult to judge whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. ..

Further, while the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed in the countdown display, if the timer effect on the variable side is executed in the countup display, it is deterministically grasped whether or not the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the game will be greatly improved. Further, while the notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, the variable side timer effect targeting the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the countup display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example, for example). If the variable side timer effect for cut-in) is executed in the countdown display, it will be interesting to make it difficult to judge whether the notice side timer effect is executed or not depending on the effect target. It will be possible to grant.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is set as the effect target for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are set as the effect target. To control. When the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the effect is different between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the rate at which the jackpot expectation is low is set to be high and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display is displayed. I try to make the end timing different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect has a predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different effect is being produced (the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) because the count display of the other is continued while the process ends when It looks like it is. After that, the other count display that has been continued will reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of the effect. Even if it is clarified that the conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for the production by the timer production on the finished side, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for the production ( It is expected that the expectation that the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation will be maintained and the game interest will be improved.

Further, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect in this way, the timing at which the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance notice side timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to make a display corresponding to the end of counting (for example, "count successful!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear separately at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, which are targeted at the "conversation notice" executed as the effect of the variable side or the advance notice side, appear in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the variable side timer effect, as the variable side effect in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display is advanced according to the variable side specific effect that occurs ("count success!", Effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.), in the notice side timer effect, it is related to "conversation notice". The count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("Chance UP!", The timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect), etc.) that occurs as the effect on the notice side. By advancing, different count end correspondence displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is required to be executed without fail when it is targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notices and cut-ins are effects that can be executed in multiple modes with different expectations. Therefore, when the target is the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is relative when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to appear in a mode with high expectation. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable side timer effect and its effect target are obtained only by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect target is always selected in the advance notice lottery. ..

If the conversation notice and the cut-in effect are not targeted for the variable side timer effect, it is determined whether or not the conversation notice and the cut-in effect will appear as the effect content of the notice side in the advance notice lottery described later. It is determined in what mode (a mode with a relatively high expectation or a mode with a low expectation) as the effect content on the side, and the control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination. ..

Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation degree) to the probability change expectation degree when a specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the big hit game state. become.

Next, as the effect pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect) are prepared so as to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the success of the jackpot determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is high, and the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set accordingly. The later it is, the more likely it is that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in this case, among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect pattern set so that the variable side timer effect does not appear is selected.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) that appears during the symbol change is selected in this way, what kind of advance notice effect is given within the execution period of the effect pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in any manner (notice lottery).

FIG. 119 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the staging sound. An example of a sound definition table is shown when the process of outputting only in (say) is realized. In this sound definition table, the definitions of priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. is doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of other notification sounds, the effect sounds, and the like are omitted. As for the staging sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method, it is also possible to use the definition by the automatic channel method for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is a numerical value of the priority. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to the channel X first is given priority, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output after the output of the notification sound is completed. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it means that the output is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 120 is a table showing, for each of the notification sounds exemplified in FIG. 119, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the conditions (cancellation conditions) at which the notification is terminated. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is to make effective use of a single channel X by using as many empty channels as possible. This is a measure to maintain the state and refrain from the subsequent notification sound output.

As shown in FIG. 120, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed). It informs that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"". ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected". On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are continued until the release condition "return on power" is satisfied. It has become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), there is a high possibility that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a fraudulent act due to a slapstick act is performed). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that it is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the big hit game state (the state where the big winning opening is open). Notification sound for notifying that the detection by the winning opening sensor) has been performed (the state where there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning opening to win the game ball) has been performed. 3 (abnormality of winning a prize) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are those. The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo-boo vibration has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example). , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and detected by the vibration sensor 2405 as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps are used. The lighting by is continued until the release condition "returning the power" is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo large prize abnormality has been detected" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "a large prize abnormality has been detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the notification time is set. The loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005 is terminated, whereas in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition "returning power" is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). Further, the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing is a notification sound such as "boo-boo" that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed). A combination of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, when notifying an item belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed), the hall side response to the fraudulent activity rather than specifying which notification type it belongs to. It is important to speed up the initial action of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent acts). Since it is possible to recognize that the situation has been performed), it is expected that the initial response to the fraudulent activity on the Hall side will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to follow the notification sound of "boo-boo" is output, and display is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement for the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame 3 is detected to be open with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618 (there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by opening the door). However, there is a possibility that the door has been opened due to the abnormal response measures taken by the hall side). The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open". ") And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 3 times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong". ), But the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release conditions of "door closure detection (door frame open switch 618 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the "detection that the door frame 3 is closed)" is satisfied.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 (the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2). Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed by opening the main body frame, there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed and this cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified. The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the main body frame opening switch is set as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time of detection by 619 is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, And the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the first notification group. In addition, as for the notification sound that is the target of loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (illegal act). (There is a moderate possibility that the There is.

That is, when notifying a person belonging to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed), while preventing the person playing the proper game from feeling disgusted. It is important to be able to take corrective action on the hall side to some extent quickly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who play proper games will not feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing proper games to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of belonging to the first notification group. It is output when it belongs to the third notification group although it has a different lighting mode from the case where it belongs to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. By notifying by lighting various lamps that are not used, it is expected that the measures for dealing with abnormalities on the hall side will be expedited to some extent.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is provided by the game ball at the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though it is in a non-time saving state. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is performed in a mode that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to the game in the proper mode (left-handed)). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed"). ") And are to be executed respectively. As for the notification time, both the loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full in the game ball (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where it should be removed) is used to provide game guidance for properly advancing the game, although the possibility of fraud is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in a state of power, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition should be set to the same one. It is supposed to be.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "please remove the ball of the lower plate" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and the notification time is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and the game board. Both of the displays in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. ..

However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279 when they are completed in 20 seconds. When the 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds is output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to the channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silence output), and a loop process is performed in which the message sound and the silence data are set and the notification sound for 10 seconds is repeated. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by checking the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed with this assigned to the channel X.

By the way, there may be a silent part in the notification sound (between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, but these are very short to have a "pause". It is clear that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion having a relatively long time (third notification group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent time in between. It will be possible to notify the game guidance without causing disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the priority order is set to be the same for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, it is decided to adopt loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, the "boo-boo" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and the "ping-pong ping-pong" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or it may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and the sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined is created at the time of output. You may then assign it to a channel.

[Game machine equipped with multiple staging operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine provided with the effect operation unit 400 in the plate unit 320, which can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player, has been described. A gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation to operate will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 143. The staging control of the staging operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 121 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 122 is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged in the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side of the front view. The sword effect operation unit 5000 accommodates a sword portion 5011 having a sword blade portion 5011, a handle portion 5012, a sword portion 5013 sandwiched between the sword blade portion 5011 and the handle portion 5012, and a sword portion 5011 of the sword portion 5010. It constitutes a sword decoration body 5001 composed of a sheath portion 5020 capable of being capable of being used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sheath portion 5020 movably provided on the door frame 3 in the left-right direction in the front view. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword pulling direction and the sword delivering direction. The sword portion 5010 is usually in a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword-drawn portion 5011 becomes visible to the player by the sword-pulling operation in the sword-pulling effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the sword-delivering operation by the player and returning to the sword-delivering state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, an opportunity to execute a sword-drawing effect accompanied by movement of the sword-effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001) will be described. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword-drawing effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of a sword-drawing preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. The following is shown, and (B) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown.

The staging patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed without the sword-drawing preparation transition production being performed in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance. Despite this, there are patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed, patterns in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed, and patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 123 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is drawn according to the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for a large hit fluctuation at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for an outlier fluctuation at the time of a miss, and the fluctuations that are advantageous for the player. It is set so that the more the pattern is, the higher the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuations, with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for small hits, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuations. It is executed with a 20% probability. It should be noted that the probability of the variation pattern at the time of the out-of-bounds fluctuation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when the reach effect is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing main effect is drawn according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of variation pattern is the same, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the fluctuation pattern results in an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the fluctuation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for out-of-order fluctuation, there is a higher probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed than in the case where the sword preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of the fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the sword-drawing effect is executed, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern is advantageous for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing effect with the aura member will be executed. Is set to be. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and aura member movement due to sword pulling movement of sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and sword-drawing book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 124, FIG. FIG. 125) and the aura member 5035 are provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described with respect to the case of forming an integral decorative body (FIGS. 126 and 127).

FIG. 124 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state and (B) first. The sword-drawn state and (C) the second sword-drawn state are shown. FIG. 125 is a vertical sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 124 (A), the sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword-delivered state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 124 (B), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling preparation transition effect, only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the sword blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 and can be visually recognized by the player. It becomes the first sword pulling state. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling main production, the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state can function as an operating means capable of accepting the sword-delivering operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the blade pulling operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 124 (A)) to the first sword-drawn state (FIG. 124 (B)). The range of motion is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 125 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 125 (B)) inside the portion 5020 to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (FIG. 124 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates at the maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword-drawn state.

As shown in FIG. 125 (A), the aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011. The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033 and. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and in the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011, respectively.

Further, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 causes the blade portion 5011. The example in which the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state functions as an operating means (not limited to the form in which the maximum operation is performed, but also the form in which the operation is stopped in the middle). ).

FIG. 126 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020, and is a state transition diagram of (A) a sword delivery state, (B) a first sword pulling state, and (C). Shows the second sword withdrawal state. FIG. 127 is a vertical sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in FIGS. 125 and 126 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 126 (A) to 126 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself can move in the left-right direction, it can move in the up-down direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (sword delivery state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword delivery state. ⇔ Operates according to the first sword withdrawal state ⇔ second sword withdrawal state). This makes it possible to combine the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to make it appear as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 127 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely housed state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the enclosure aura member 5036. It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the above, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by a driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in the front view, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is rack right. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form a second sword pulling state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosed aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the range of motion.

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion maintains a relative positional relationship according to the state change (sword delivery state ⇔ first sword extraction state ⇔ second sword extraction state) of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010). An example of merging with 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (coalescing) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state functions as an operating means (not limited to the complete appearance state in which the maximum movement is performed, but the movement is stopped in the middle and appears in the middle. It is only necessary to be able to be in a state with an aura member). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

(Other staging pattern 1 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. 128 to 130 are diagrams illustrating the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state functions as an operating means, and the sword pulling operation by the player is operated and detected. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in the front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state is the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbol forms a reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 128 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 128 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the staging display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the staging display device 1600 in the front view, and a part of the bamboo blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-delivered state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of the princess heading to the back of the blind is displayed (FIG. 128 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is urged to the player to pull out the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small steps in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. May be good. Then, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword pulling operation by the player means an operation of pulling out the sword blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword pulling state, the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, and the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection / notification operation may be an operation in which the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) moves up and down, such as movement or vibration, and an operation different from the own sword pulling operation can be felt through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection / notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle portion 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) is reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body is prevented. Can be done.

In the sword pulling operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player pulls out the sword, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is stationary above the display area without overlapping the display area of the staging display device 1600 (initial stage). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the detached mode "767" (FIG. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 129 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the detection notification operation is terminated. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is placed in the center of the front surface (below the display area) overlapping the display area of the staging display device 1600. Only the hold display area can be dropped and moved so that it can be visually recognized (total fall state) (FIG. 129 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the staging display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body. The 5001 maintains the second sword-drawing state (FIG. 129 (D2)). At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the staging display device 1600 may be provided, for example. By differentiating the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed after that, the expected degree of the lottery result by the princess reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the game profit when it is a winning, etc.) may be suggested. ..

Then, after a predetermined period has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 was put into the second sword pulling state by the sword pulling operation by the player, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the staging display device 1600, the second sword pulling state was reached. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the staging display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 129 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 having good visibility is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed with the blinds removed (Fig. 130 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword pulling operation was performed again, and in the display area of the staging display device 1600, when the result of this variation display is a hit, the hit is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 130 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with a sad princess in the case of the detachment (FIG. 130 (F1) (F2)).

When the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player cannot move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration body 5001, but the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing (FIG. 129 (D3)) of the sword decoration body 5001. If it is held in the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) are progressing. Because it is configured to do so, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. The sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured not to perform a movable effect. You may.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword pulling operation (up and down direction movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction (at the operation position) of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. On the other hand, it can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword pulling operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword pulling operation was performed, increasing the operation value of the player and motivating the player to operate. It is possible to suppress the decline of. In addition, since one operating means can be operated in a stepwise different manner (vertical direction during operation, left-right direction after operation) by the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operating value of the operating means as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

It should be noted that the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is an effect display for the purpose of performing an integrated effect with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (a sword accessory). The operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the staging display device 1600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration operation is performed with the sword decoration body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved so as to be located outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed so as to be displaced to the left (the left end of the frame). Further, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example is a vertical movement (a sword pulling operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. For the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a direction different from the movement direction (here, the vertical direction) at the time of operation by the player (horizontal direction as in this example).

Further, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player is performed, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm it for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the subsequent movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001, and preventing the movable body from being damaged by unnecessary contact. Further, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to let go, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection / notification operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other staging pattern 2 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. 131 to 133 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree that the fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit and the operation of the operation button 410 are performed. As an effect, a pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 are performed will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 131 (A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is started and the player is urged to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 131 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. When the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 131 (N1)), an image suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed (FIG. 132 (N2)). After that, the result of this variation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 132 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expected degree suggestion effect for the variable display during execution, and for example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expected degree (FIG. 132 (N2)). A character that changes the held display may be made to appear.

Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and expanded by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 131 (M1) shows an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a message of the title "sword pulling chance" and the operation explanation "sword is delivered") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 133 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses after the second sword is pulled out and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 133 (M3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the effect based on the result of the variation display this time is performed.

When the result of this variation display is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( FIG. 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative pattern, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the fluctuation display this time is out of order, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped from moving in small steps in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the disconnection (the stop mode “767” of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 133 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001) become possible, and the player can perform the operation button 410. It is not possible to specify the subsequent expansion at the time of manipulating. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation motivation and a decrease in the game interest, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing operation and sword delivery operation) differs between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001). It will be requested from the player based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operating means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Other staging pattern 3 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 138, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 134 to 138 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410. Even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable based on the pressing operation of, and is displayed in the detached mode, it is re-variated from the symbol display of the detached mode and the player is given an operation opportunity again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be explained.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 134 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, the start image of the operation effect). , The message "You can move the movable body with a single button blow") is displayed (Fig. 134 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 134 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. When the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single blow (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) to be moved by the operation. You may do so. If the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is released is an image (decorative pattern) for notifying the jackpot. The stop mode "777", the message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped to move in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 136 (P1). It is developed into a pattern (FIG. 136 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an detached mode (“767”), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the resurrection start image (referred to as "yet") indicating that the variable display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative symbol in the detached mode of FIG. 136 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 136 (P3)), the decorative design is again in the reach state and reduced to the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the center of the screen. An operation valid suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a samurai ally) is displayed (FIG. 136 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 136 (P5)). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the production using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-lit and decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means according to the set effect pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (Katana) is performed. The pattern on which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern on which the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat oozes on the samurai's forehead of the operation valid suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is luminescently decorated (FIG. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is continuously moved in small steps and the operation button 410 is light-lit and decorated, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation for prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 137 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not decorated with light emission when it is operated a necessary number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 137 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed on the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player at the lower right of the screen. As in the case of the above (FIG. 133 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative pattern at this point. Next, the screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again from the fully dropped state and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image notifying the jackpot (a message of the decorative symbol stop mode "777" and "superb") is displayed in the center (FIG. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 137 (R5)).

When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who has closed his eyes in the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp (sword decoration body). (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the form with an aura member (FIG. 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be light-emittingly decorated. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is effective instead of the operation button 410, but at this point, the form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps, the second sword is pulled out and a predetermined period of time elapses, and when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 138 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 137 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 138 (FIG. 138). Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 137 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 138 (Q5)).

In this way, since the expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the expectation is more powerful than the expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. Further, even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 again. Will be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest, which is a concern because the operation effect is monotonous and does not look good.

In addition, although the above-mentioned three examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 are given in FIGS. 128 to 138, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be provided, and the entertainment of the game can be further enhanced.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 139. There are two types of the sword decoration body 5001 up to the above, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member. Here, the sword portion 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle portion 5012. Are provided in two types.

FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a form of the sword decorative body 5001 used for the pseudo-ream effect. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deforming the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 so that the player can change the shape from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the door. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the above-mentioned aura member 5035, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the above-mentioned aura member 5030. FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the forms of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state, and show the step 0 form to the step 3 form in order. The sword decoration body 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the step 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. 124 (A) and 126 (A), and no operation is required for any of the initial components. Shows morphology. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 139 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 expands and moves so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from the inside. show. As shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. Shows morphology. Here, the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form enable the morphological change without putting the sword decorative body 5001 into the second sword pulling state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 capable of accepting operations by the player and the non-moving sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integral decorative body as the operation unit of the operation means, it is possible to provide a more powerful operation means. Can be done.

(Pre-operation suggestion staging using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is operation-effective or the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory), the operation valid period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation valid period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position, and there is a sword decoration body 5001 (from the operation button 410). When the operation is valid, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140 (B)) that generates the operation valid period with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) positioned at the initial position even during the operation valid period. When is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with an operation of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142 (AA1)) in which the operation valid period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Has a 70% probability (including a step-up pattern) that the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 is operation-effective. Hereinafter, an example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
140 and 141 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 during the reach effect by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect which performs the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 140 (A)), the operation button is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operating means of the 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 140 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be effective for operation is generated. Let me. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the initial position, the operation button 410 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the sword decoration body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is operated and enabled, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Let me. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated effectively, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the ratio is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), the operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible.

If an operation on an operation-effective operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) is detected in FIG. 140 (C) or (D) described above, and the result of this variation display becomes a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved to drop from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the staging display device 1600 is notified of the out of order. An image (stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 142 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is effective during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect to be executed. In addition, in FIG. 143, although the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 was once operation-enabled without the sword decoration body 5001 being operation-enabled, and then the sword decoration was performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern which makes the body 5001 operation effective.

As shown in FIG. 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 whose operation is determined to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. It is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps the upper part of the display area of the staging display device 1600 from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be effective for operation is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the suggested position, the sword decoration body 5001 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position. To generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible. Further, even when the operation button 410 is operated effectively, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 is used. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved from the state of being operated at the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) may be moved from the state of operating to the suggested position to the fully dropped state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation on the operation-effective operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 142 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the staging display device 1600 is notified of the out of order. An image (stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggested position, but a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio of the sword decoration body 5001 that is effective for operation is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition from FIG. 142 (AA1) to (AA3) described above before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational effective, the operation button 410 becomes operational once, and then the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 which is determined in advance to be operation-effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) as in FIG. 142 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps (FIG. 143 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (FIG. 143 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 141 is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means. Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 143 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the operation means for which the operation is effective is from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (messages of "chance to pull out a sword" and "a message of a sword to be paid") is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 141) in the above-mentioned second suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that, in the case of FIG. 143 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the operation of the button operation 410 (without the operation promotion effect). It suffices if the player's interest can be directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is effective is generated. ) Can be changed, and the operation means that is effective depending on the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation valid. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142 (AA1)), the sword decoration body 5001 is expected to be high, and the operation validity period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggestion position. Is highly expected to be effective for operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in order to grasp which operation means is effective for operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 141) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are performed from the vertical wiggle movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It can be shown as a production of, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body will be effective, is not limited to this, and the character is shown during the pre-operation suggestion effect. It may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means for which the operation is effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword withdrawal state, but also the operation means for which the operation is effective is moved by vibration or the like. You may do it.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation (or pretended to be valid) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggested position. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to have the expectation that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that the motivation for operation is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 140 (B)), as in the second suggested pattern (FIG. 142 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is viewed from the initial position in front of the display area of the staging display device 1600. It may operate in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper portion, and may be moved in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. After that, when the operation valid period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decoration body 5001 to be effective even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation valid period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Perform the production with a pattern. In the effect period in which a specific effect pattern is executed, a specific effect acceptance period (valid period) in which a specific effect execution condition is satisfied can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific effect acceptance period. And, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege). The degree of expectation for giving a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide another operating means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when the operation button 410 satisfies a specific effect execution condition), this There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the pre-operation effect to which the operation opportunity is given occurs even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for granting the privilege is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for the privilege grant suggested when the operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when the production is in the pre-stage where it has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired effect result (effect result suggesting that the expectation for granting the privilege is high, etc.) does not appear in the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation for another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation-related production. Become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) having such a staging property. If so, it is possible to execute a common operation-related effect (see, for example, FIG. 142 (AA1)) when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least, as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted), at least
-The operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) after the "specific operation-related effect" that can appear even when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first effect mode that generates the valid period (effect acceptance period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) without starting the effect of "specific operation-related effect". A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) to be performed are prepared, and by executing one of the production modes, the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect). It is designed to generate a valid period (directing reception period) that can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period in which the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be accepted. Regardless of whether there is a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for staging, it is common (specific) prior to the occurrence of those periods. ), Since the operation-related effects can be executed, it becomes possible to have an interest in which of the specific operation means and another operation means can accept the effects. By performing the operation while the above is performed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In such a common (specific) operation-related effect, one of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) corresponds to a predetermined time after the effect is started. The production reception period will be generated, but at least when the production is started, which of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) corresponds to the production reception period will occur. Should be kept secret. Further, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) before the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible to indicate whether or not the effect is to be performed (the effect display is displayed), or a plurality of operations are performed within the period after the effect acceptance period occurs, including at the same time as the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) is given the operation opportunity (the effect result display appears), and the operation-related effect is executed until any timing. It can be changed as appropriate.

[Automatic button effect status]
In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and when controlled to this automatic button effect state, When an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the player determines the effect within the effect acceptance period. Even if the operation is not accepted for the effect, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation by the player is accepted for the effect within the effect acceptance period. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect after the operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. As for the automatic effect function, by generating the same effect reception as when the operation was actually performed when this functioned, the process according to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. The same processing as when the production reception was received may be performed without letting it.

In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, effects, settings, and the like may be appropriately combined or used in combination.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. It is possible to set the production state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When the "setting of the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is made. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for a different operation means may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating the operation button 410 once. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, some players want to positively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, and for such a person, the operation button 410 is used. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the automatic button effect state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult for it to be set incorrectly. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed by pressing and holding at least when the effect acceptance period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set and the setting is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change has not been executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol change is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is positioned in the operation state even if the operation state for the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed). The automatic button effect state is canceled only when it is detected (just operated in a single operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that some operation is performed on the operation button 410 means that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the state and returning to the normal staging state at an early stage, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operating means including an operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the jackpot determination when it is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation for the operation button 410. A staging acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (more accurately, a predetermined staging pattern in which a staging reception period is set for a sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Is generated, and even if the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration body 5001) is not received during the production reception period, the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration body 5001) is performed during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the effect is received. According to such a configuration, is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be accepted for the effect, or another operation means (for example, for example). , When the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 164 (AA1), etc.)) as to whether or not the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect is executed, the effect is performed. As a result, no matter which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that such a specific operation-related production can be enjoyed with peace of mind. Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When the operation for the first operating means is not performed within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change for the effect as when the operation for the first operating means is performed. Yes (first automatic staging means),
-When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second side effect acceptance period in which the second operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is set. When it occurs, when the operation for the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation for the second operation means is performed is executed. It is possible (second automatic staging means)
Regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs, the first (1) Automatic processing by the automatic staging means or automatic processing by the second automatic staging means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation target. Regardless of which of the second-side effect reception period set as is within the execution period of the symbol change, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time elapses from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time elapses after the first side effect reception period occurs. The automatic processing by the first automatic staging means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic staging means is executed and when a time different from the specific time elapses after the first side staging reception period occurs. As there are cases, the staging progress may be performed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic staging means would be executed when a specific time elapses after the first side staging reception period occurs, but the timing is different from this. Since the production is accepted and the production is automatically generated after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

It should be noted that when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period than when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The ratio of the production reception period to be performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, the automatic production is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the function, the effect reception period can be generated more frequently while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the frequent occurrence of forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of both the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means is high. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the occurrence rate different between the effect acceptance period for the first operating means and the effect acceptance period for the second operating means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production reception conditions are met within the production reception period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect execution means).
-It is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition based on the operation performed by the player within the production reception period (player operation reception means).
-When the operation by the player is not performed within the production reception period, it is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means). )
However, regarding the specific timing within the production reception period, it is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed from the start of the production reception period. I'm supposed to do it. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player to operate himself / herself will be given before the automatic effect function is activated, and there will be an option to generate an effect reception by the operation by the player. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

In this case, there are cases where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side effect reception period occurs, and cases where the specific time occurs after the first side effect acceptance period occurs. When the effect progress is performed within the symbol variation so that the automatic process by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" is used. Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side staging reception period.

Here, if the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received during the effect acceptance period. , The process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Similarly, during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect reception period for an operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect reception period occurs. Even if the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the period, the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception and the process of canceling the automatic button effect state are executed respectively. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception", the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the effect acceptance period. It will be executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation for the body 5001 is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect). The desire to end the condition) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which a player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific effect state and the operation to allow the operation reception to be performed, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the entertainment interests may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the effect acceptance period related to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button is given an operation opportunity within the effect acceptance period. A process for ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect by performing an operation on the 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 only once (only by operating in a single operation mode). (Processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, so the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the staging state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (setting change to the automatic button effect state or cancellation of the setting of the automatic button effect state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (the state where the symbol change is not executed). , The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, a big hit is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is high. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thereby the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time and maintain the game entertainment. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means are displayed. The automatic button effect state can be set or canceled by operating the 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the sword decoration body 5001 does not need to be operated to the automatic button effect state. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed for the purpose of.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Only when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is received. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration body 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It will be like.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is set, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect even if the pachinko machine 1 is not operated within the effect reception period". In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "effect function", special operation means that are not the target of the "automatic effect function that generates an operation effect without operating during the effect reception period" May further be included. That is, in this case, when the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs when the symbol variation is in the execution state, and the operation for the special operation means is received within the effect acceptance period, the effect is received. The post-operation production according to the production reception suggests the degree of expectation for the big hit. However, even if the situation is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect is accepted appears. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from the effect when the effect is received, it may appear.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period during which the symbol change is in the execution state. Not only when, but also the effect acceptance period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect acceptance period where the expectation is suggested when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated, and the expectation is suggested when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable not to allow this even if there is a production reception period, etc.). That is, if the operation button 410 is operated (operation in a long-pressed manner) while the effect reception period for an operation means different from that of the operation button 410 is within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is generated. In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function that generates the production during operation without operating during the production reception period" is enabled to operate the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410). The effect reception period at the time of operation) may occur without operation, and for a player who is not familiar with such an automatic button effect state, is the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurring, or is the operation button 410? This is because it may be confusing whether the production acceptance period for a different operation means has occurred, and there is a concern that this will reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be possible to execute it as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to preliminarily recognize whether or not the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and it becomes possible to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, the specific image is specified so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which a lightning bolt falls toward a specific area) may be displayed (precursor effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the "specific image suggesting the remaining time" in the hidden state is watched to the place where it will appear in the future. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation by the player is not in time and the specific effect reception period ends. Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game entertainment taste is appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player, but the result of the big hit determination including each of the following explanatory examples Based on the progress of the game or the effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which the state can be set or canceled according to the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "While it is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but it is a big hit game state. The control mode such as "the automatic button effect state is canceled when the state shifts to the high probability time saving state" and "the automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol changes are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as, etc. Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to the automatic button effect state. In this case, the automatic button effect state is not canceled, and the setting / cancellation related to the "automatic button effect state" is applied. Processing itself will disappear.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions may be a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted or after that, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation effect is performed as if the production reception was performed after the production reception period ended. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the middle timing (specific timing) when the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions as in the case of actual operation. At that point (specific timing), the effect acceptance period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation effect will occur even if the operation is not performed when the automatic button effect state is controlled, until the effect reception period ends (effect reception). It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period) so that the post-operation effect corresponding to the function is started. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the post-operation effect is generated by the player's own operation after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to make it feel uneasy when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, it is mistaken that it is controlled to the automatic button effect state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is recognized, and it may not be possible to check the post-operation effect. "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and the post-operation effect may not be confirmed. " You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in sequence, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. It may be used in an appropriate combination.

In explaining each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled. When the effect reception period that can occur is generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared. When a specific valid period related to this is generated while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific valid period. You may do it. According to such a configuration, the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is enhanced (improvement of the effectability by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not work during another effect reception period that is set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions to save the trouble of operation, which makes it possible to enjoy the VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be enhanced. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic effect function from functioning in all of the other effect reception periods set when a specific display effect is not performed, and the automatic effect is automatically produced in at least a part of the effect reception period. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effect will occur when a specific valid period occurs when a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. Further, even when such a specific valid period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production according to this.

Further, as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are prepared.
-If the first specific valid period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first specific valid period occurs. Whereas the function works to terminate the first specific validity period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect.
-If a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific valid period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when the above-mentioned is elapsed, the second specific valid period is terminated, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the end is generated.
-When the third specific valid period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific valid period is controlled even though it is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation until the end of, each process may be performed when a specific effect state is reached, such that the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed cannot appear. According to such a configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is from the time when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function may function when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed. Even if the production acceptance period ends, the above-mentioned automatic production function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-mentioned is described when the second predetermined time elapses. It becomes possible to advance the production with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic production function of the above works or the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. The first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called). When a single operation is performed), the effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

The first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. If this is the case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is provided. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects generated when the effects are received during the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different production contents.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at what timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function functions (which is the effect acceptance period when the effect is accepted). The automatic production function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) showing the remaining time of the production reception period so that it can be recognized (whether there was only time left). It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect with this displayed instead of being hidden at the time point. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period is the first specific valid period (. A relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs, the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses) and the second specific valid period (relatively after the production reception period occurs). It becomes possible to recognize which of the two (the period during which the automatic effect function functions) when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

In this sense, when the first specific valid period (the period during which the automatic staging function functions when the first predetermined time elapses after the staging acceptance period occurs) and the second specific valid period (the period in which the automatic staging function functions) occur. The jackpot expectation is different from when the second predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may be used. As in the case where the function is performed, the "bar display" may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the "bar display" is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. May be good.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be operated within the effect acceptance period (for example, an operation to be operated). In addition to displaying an image display that imitates the means), even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable to. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the operation target suggestion image may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the image is displayed. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific valid period or when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. The operation target suggestion image may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed.

At this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect are both. Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

For example, even in the pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with the above-mentioned automatic effect function, it appears only when a jackpot expectation degree (for example, a jackpot is obtained) as an operation target suggestion image (such as an image imitating an operation means). When a plurality of modes having different modes) in which the post-operation effect is executed are prepared and the operation is accepted by the operation by the player, the operation target is when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the operation reception. If the suggestion image (such as an image of the operation means) is left in the state of being displayed in any of the plurality of modes having different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be obtained. It will be possible to check both at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, when a valid period (effect reception period) in which the image is displayed is generated, the type of the valid period (production reception period) (conditions for generating the validity period and the post-operation effect that occurs when the operation is accepted) The display area is reduced according to the passage of time when the display is performed (the first valid period generated by the satisfaction of the first condition) based on the type of the display. It is desirable that there is a case where the display is not performed (the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition). That is, in the valid period in which the display area is not displayed and the display area is reduced according to the passage of time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much remaining time is allowed for the operation reception, and the valid period. It becomes possible to maintain a feeling of tension within. In addition, "not displaying that the display area of a specific image is reduced with the passage of time" means, for example, that the gauge is usually (first valid period) in such a manner that the display area is reduced with the passage of time. When displaying an image, it can be realized by not displaying the gauge image itself in the second validity period, or by adopting a method of displaying the gauge image but its display area does not decrease with the passage of time. be.

In this regard, when the operation is accepted during the second valid period (when the display area is not reduced with the passage of time), the change according to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, etc.), etc. It is desirable that the simulated image is not hidden but displayed at the time when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect) is started. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the operation was accepted while the image was displayed (before the end of the valid period), and there was a sense of anxiety that "the operation was not accepted in time". Will be able to be removed.

In this case, it should be noted that the display mode (for example, color) of the image before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) according to the operation reception occurs and after the change occurs. (Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the image due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or a lamp emission) occurs. However, in order to suitably obtain such an effect, at least at the time when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the image is maintained in the mode displayed before the operation is accepted, and that the image is not obscured by other images. Therefore, if the image is dynamically displayed during the valid period when the operation reception is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, and other changes caused by the post-operation effect) according to the operation reception. It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when the execution of) is started. On the other hand, if a change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) occurs due to the operation by the player within the first valid period, the change. The image may be hidden in a state where (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or the image may be displayed without being hidden as in the case of the second valid period described above. It is also possible to generate a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation reception in the state.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time" in this way, the imitation image of the operation means to be operated is to be displayed. It is desirable to display the image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With such a configuration, although the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes a first operation means (for example, an operation button 410) and a second operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) as operation means, and the first operation means. There is a case where an operation reception is permitted for the second operation means (effect reception period) and a valid period (effect reception period) where operation reception for the second operation means is permitted. Of these, the first image of the first operating means is displayed during the valid period when the operation reception for the first operating means is permitted, and the second operating means is displayed during the valid period when the operation reception for the second operating means is permitted. The second image that has been imitated is displayed. Further, between the valid period in which the operation reception for the first operation means is permitted and the valid period in which the operation reception for the second operation means is permitted, the jackpot expectation degree (post-operation effect) suggested when the operation reception is performed is performed. The rate at which the mode that appears only at the time of a big hit is executed) is made different. In addition to the valid period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation reception for the first operation means is permitted, the valid period (effect reception period) in which the operation reception for the second operation means is permitted, and the validity period different from these. Further, it may be something that can occur. In this regard, when the operation reception is performed during the valid period (for example, the valid period in which the operation reception for the second operation means is permitted) on the side where the jackpot expectation is high, the change (display change or display change) according to the operation reception is performed. , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as lamp emission), it is desirable that the image (second image) be displayed without being hidden at the time when the execution is started.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 183 (f) described above, for example, the second operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity. Nevertheless, the first operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is kept in the operating state (the operation is performed). Even if the operation is performed on the second operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation is accepted, the player is made to recognize that the production is properly accepted. You will be able to.

In this case, it should be noted that the display mode (for example, color) of the image before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) according to the operation reception occurs and after the change occurs. (Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the image due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or a lamp emission) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the operation is performed at least when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the simulated image is maintained as it was displayed before the reception is made, and that the gauge image is not obscured by other images. Therefore, if the image is dynamically displayed during the valid period when the operation reception is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, and other changes caused by the post-operation effect) according to the operation reception. It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when the execution of) is started. In addition, in order to make the player recognize that the production has been properly received, changes (display change, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation reception are performed by the operation by the player within the first valid period. Even if it occurs, the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) does not hide the image (first image) but changes according to the operation reception while the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs. , Lamp emission, etc.) is desirable.

According to such a configuration, "based on the determination means for making a determination, the effect means for producing an effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and the determination by the determination means to obtain a predetermined result. A privilege giving means that can give a privilege to the player, and a specific operation receiving portion (a specific operation receiving portion that can be displaced between the first position and the second position (operation button 410 that can be displaced between the normal position and the pressed position)). ), A first detection unit capable of detecting a specific operation (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving unit to the second position, and a special operation receiving unit different from the specific operation receiving unit. It is equipped with a second detection unit that can detect a special movement (for example, a sword delivery operation) by a player for (for example, a sword decoration body 5001), and (for example, a post-operation effect that occurs when an effect reception is made). As the production reception period (different types), a plurality of production reception periods including the first production reception period and the second production reception period are prepared, and in the first production reception period, the specific operation receiving unit is modeled. The image is displayed, and the effect reception is performed by the detection by the first detection unit. During the second effect reception period, the special operation receiving unit is displayed and the effect reception is performed. 2 The effect reception is performed by the detection by the detection unit, and even though the special image of the special operation receiving unit is displayed during the second effect reception period, the specific operation by the player is performed. When the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position, the second detection is performed even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion in the second position. The effect reception is performed by the detection by the unit, and the post-operation effect can be executed based on the effect reception. "

Then, in such a configuration, "even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving unit at the second position, the effect reception is performed by the detection by the second detection unit, and the effect is received. At the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the effect reception, by keeping the special image of the special operation receiving part displayed instead of hiding it, it is not the side that accidentally operated it. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation on the proper side.

When the special image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, the post-operation effect is started to be executed with the displayed mode as it is. If the effect is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the image may be left displayed instead of being hidden when the post-operation effect is started, or after the operation. The image may be hidden at the time when the effect is started to be executed.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit is lower than that in the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of operational errors. Therefore, it is suggested that the production reception is permitted or the production reception is permitted when the second production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit occurs. It is desirable to output the reception allowable sound. As a result, the player can recognize that the second staging acceptance period has occurred, and it is expected that operation errors are less likely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or the reception is accepted. A sound that is already in an acceptable state (validity period). In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time that the production reception is allowed and the production reception is in the allowable state, or before the setting time that the production reception is allowed is started. It suggests that the output is started and the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "Pickin", for example.

However, it is suggested that the production reception is permitted or the production reception is permitted even when the first production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit occurs. The reception allowable sound may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable that the mode (tone color, etc.) of the reception allowable sound is different between the case where the first staging reception period occurs and the case where the second staging reception period occurs. Alternatively, in the first production reception period, even if the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is being output, the reception permissible sound in the output state is not terminated and is continued, but the second production reception period In, if the staging reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is being output, it is desirable to end the reception permissible sound in the output state in the middle of the process. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period occurs, or the operation for the specific operation receiving unit and the special operation receiving unit can be easily performed. It will be possible to properly grasp which of the operations for the department was accepted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is reduced with time. (For example, a display in which the display area is finally set to "0") is used to generate a small gauge valid period (effect reception period) that suggests the remaining time for which operation reception is allowed, and the display area is After displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image), the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) is reduced with the passage of time (for example, the display area is finally set to "0"). There is a case where a large gauge valid period (effect reception period) suggesting the remaining time for which operation reception is allowed is generated by performing the display). Then, between the small gauge valid period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge valid period in which the large gauge image is displayed, the jackpot expectation degree suggested when the operation is accepted (only at the jackpot as a post-operation effect). The rate at which the non-appearing aspects are executed) is different (for example, the large gauge validity period has a higher expectation of a big hit). In addition to the small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period, a validity period different from these may be further generated. The small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period may give an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may give an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

In this regard, when the operation is accepted during the large gauge validity period, the change according to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that large gauge images be displayed rather than hidden. In addition, the large gauge image becomes smaller with the passage of time even when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display does not end and this continues. As a result, there was a sense of security that it seemed that a lot of remaining time remained due to the large gauge image being displayed, but after the operation was accepted, whether or not the operation was properly accepted? You will be able to feel anxiety and maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color and post) before and after the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) occurs. The transmittance and the like) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the gauge image may be difficult to see due to other images. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the operation is performed at least when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image is maintained as it was displayed before the reception is made, and that the gauge image is not obscured by other images. On the other hand, if a change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) occurs due to the operation by the player within the small gauge valid period, the change. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or the gauge image (large gauge image) may be hidden as in the case of the large gauge validity period described above. ) May be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) depending on the operation reception may be generated.

In addition, when the large gauge validity period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permissible sound that suggests that the staging reception is in a permissible state or that the staging reception is in a permissible state. .. As a result, the player can recognize that the large gauge validity period has occurred, and can further emphasize the sense of security until the operation is accepted. The "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or the reception is accepted. A sound that is already in an acceptable state (validity period). In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time that the production reception is allowed and the production reception is in the allowable state, or before the setting time that the production reception is allowed is started. It suggests that the output is started and the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "Pickin", for example.

However, even when the small gauge validity period occurs, a reception permissible sound suggesting that the staging reception is permitted or the staging reception is permitted may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable that the mode (tone color, etc.) of the acceptable reception sound differs depending on whether the small gauge valid period occurs or the large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the small gauge valid period, even if the staging reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is being output, the reception permissible sound in the output state is not terminated and is continued, but during the large gauge valid period. If the staging reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is being output, it is desirable to end the reception permissible sound in the output state in the middle of the process. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand whether the small gauge valid period or the large gauge valid period occurs, and the operation reception during the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period can be easily understood. It will be possible to properly grasp which of the operation receptions was performed during the period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only be different in size but also may have different morphologies themselves (such as images that are not similar to each other).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or described later), as described above (or described later), the image is dynamically displaced so as to depict the displacement of the operation receiving portion during the period when the operation reception is permitted. It is to be displayed. In this regard, at the time when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started, the image is not hidden and remains displayed. In this case, the dynamic display of the image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated image described later in which they are integrated.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, "operation reception" means that in addition to detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button, contact with a specific operation receiving portion is detected by a touch sensor. The operation reception may be performed, or the operation reception may be performed by detecting the movement of the player in a specific area in a non-contact manner.

Further, when an effect that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as an "operation system effect", the operation system effect is related to this. It may be performed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) without the effect. However, in this case, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect not related to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and the "other specific effect not related to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is higher than that in the case where the "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are in parallel, the effect is not accepted in the "operation system effect" and the post-operation effect is not executed. However, since "another specific effect that has nothing to do with this" is in the running state, the decline in the game interest can be suppressed, while the "operation system effect" is executed but "another that has nothing to do with this". When the "specific effect" is not executed, if the "operation system effect" does not accept the effect and the post-operation effect is not executed, no effect will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect not related to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are specified. By increasing the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic staging function to function compared to the case where the "staging" is performed in parallel, the game entertainment when the operation system staging occurs can be appropriately maintained. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, the precursory effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, the effect that the operation means to be operated operates, etc. are executed as "operation system effect" or related effect. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the precursor effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable that the effect is executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably a precursor effect) and ends before the end of the effect acceptance period. It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at a high rate, and it becomes possible to provide the effect in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, if the "other specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the precursor effect), the "other specific effect" is performed multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when "another specific effect" is executed is high. It will be possible to give a sense of tension as to whether the production reception period will occur.

Further, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is continuously executed 999 times. Until the 1000th loss change) is reached, an effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the big hit determination may occur with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect acceptance period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function when there is no operation by the player. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss variations are executed). And when the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) that reaches the specific value, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player during the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated and the player operates within the production reception period. It is also possible to execute a process that always generates the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the loss fluctuation reaches a specific value, "the player should be operated every time the staging acceptance period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. Even though I was urged to do so, I couldn't get any results. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions the automatic production function. Since it is realized as a staging effect, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. At this time, in the staging acceptance period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, "operate") that is different from the display image (for example, "operate") that appeared when the number of times reached a specific value (for example, loss fluctuation up to 999 times) during the production reception period. It is desirable to make "If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf" etc.). In addition, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In the (effect pattern), a special display image (for example, "for example," If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf. " It is desirable to execute the process that always generates the effect after the operation.

In addition, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is continuously executed 999 times. The number of remaining fluctuations until the 1000th loss fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, during the symbol change, the first operation is performed until the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches the specific value when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Both the effect acceptance period for the means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. , Only one of the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side may advance the effect so that it cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is preferably suppressed that the staging acceptance period occurs and the expectation is given to itself. You will be able to get it. However, this production example "has achieved some results even though it has urged the player to operate each time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a production that always functions the automatic production function, so it is transient. In order not to have any more expectations, a production acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, for example) is generated. It is desirable not to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur in both the case where it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means among the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). The second effect reception period, in which an operation opportunity is given to the user, cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the effect state is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment of.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Displays an image of the operation means (an operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation target to be operated) (image display means).
-If an operation is performed by the player while the image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means).
-After the production reception period occurs, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing the operation while the image is displayed, the post-operation effect can be executed without receiving the operation by the player (). Automatic production reception means)
However, the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the post-operation effect is executed is different in the "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. It will be possible to generate a post-operation effect.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, a copy image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be operated) is displayed during the effect acceptance period, and the operation target suggestion image is displayed. Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the operation target suggestion image may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the image is displayed. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the image is displayed, or may be emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body. It may be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different expectations, the expectation (image) suggested within the effect acceptance period even when the effect is generated after the operation. Display mode) can be confirmed.

The image that is continuously displayed in this way will be hidden after the post-operation effect is generated. However, what is the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs? The time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden should be different from the case where the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when different times elapse. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a specific time elapses or whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic process when a time different from the specific time elapses. Even if it does not exist, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. ..

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time elapses, and when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time elapses, the big hit is determined. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

In addition, if there is an effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect acceptance period. One of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) can be displayed. ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period, the production reception (automatic production function always functions) is performed and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed, but the low expectation display is displayed. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the effect is not accepted (the automatic effect function is functioning) and the effect is not executed after the operation. That is, if a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the operation is forgotten, the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, which inevitably lowers the game interest, but the low expectations. When the display mode (for example, the blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game interest does not deteriorate so much even if the operation is forgotten, so that the highly expected display mode (for example, the red operation image) appears. If you forget to operate it, the automatic production function must be activated within the production reception period to avoid the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate, but the low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation). If you forget to operate when the image) appears, make sure that the automatic production function does not always function within the production reception period to give you a sense of tension in playing so that you do not forget to operate it. It is expected to raise the awareness of player participation. When not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. It may not be possible to appear. Further, during the effect reception period, any one of three or more display modes may appear.

[Further color rendering for image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (notice effect, etc.) is selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected staging will be provided as a staging with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted. However, as will be described later, the mode of the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is set to be different depending on the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to suggest the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (valid period) that allows the effect reception. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the operation reception effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. Further, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern", the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. However, the low-expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) includes the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable not to do so or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be the effect as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one of the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation is performed. Reception staging (valid period) The staging of the staging itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline until the post-operation staging is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the design effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" corresponding to the variation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the variation pattern (effect pattern) Whether the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of staging sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or channel assignment As mentioned above, various measures are taken, such as making it possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the operation is completed.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the image displayed in the operation reception effect as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image. By doing so, we are trying to improve the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. For such an integrated image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable to display it in both the reception effect (valid period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. Further, it is desirable to replace each of the above-mentioned production examples with one of the integrated images described below to realize the display mode of the illustrated image in order to improve the entertainment of the game. ..

Hereinafter, a case where the image is displayed as an “integrated image” will be described.
First, to explain the "image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception staging includes the "operation receiving part" that receives the operation by the player and the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part. There is a "peripheral decoration part" to decorate. In this respect, the "image" means an image in which the "operation receiving unit" is imitated among such operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by a player, and the "peripheral decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the operation means (effect operation unit 400) exemplified in FIGS. 39 and 40, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decoration portion" is the frame unit 415. Will be equivalent to. Further, in the case of the operating means (sword decoration body 5001) exemplified in FIGS. 124 and 139, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

FIG. 144 shows an "integrated image" displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) is generated for an operation means provided with an "operation receiving unit" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player. It is a figure which shows an example.

In this explanatory example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving portion" on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001. That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detection information is produced (trigger for execution of post-operation effect, etc.). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation unit has a "handle button 5014" capable of operating (moving up and down) with respect to the handle portion 5012 and an operation (moving up and down) with respect to the sheath portion 5020. Two operation receiving portions with a possible "handle portion 5012" will be provided.

FIG. 144 describes an "integrated image" when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 occurs when a predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the example described below including FIG. 144, the "integrated image" when giving an operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 is operated not with the handle button 5014 but with the operation button 410. It may be applied as an "integrated image" when an operation reception effect (valid period) to which an opportunity is given occurs. That is, in this case, the "image of the operation button 410" exemplified in each of the above-mentioned production examples can be replaced with the "integrated image" described below, and in this case, the pattern button 5014 can be replaced. Is not provided and this is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception desk in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). When the effect (valid period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. It is displayed as an integrated image IGa to IGd. In the examples shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not individually prepared as image data, and one image data (integral) in which they are integrated. It is displayed only as a modified image (IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "first effect mode with relatively low expectation" and "relative" are the post-operation effects to be executed when the operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). A plurality of production modes including "a second production mode with a high degree of expectation" are prepared, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). .. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d),
The mode (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 144 (b) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a) in the specific operation reception effect (valid period). When appears, the appearance rate of "the second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 144 (c) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 144 (b) in the specific operation reception effect (valid period). When appears, the appearance rate of "the second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGd) shown in FIG. 144 (d) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 144 (c) in the specific operation reception effect (valid period). Based on the result of the big hit judgment (directing judgment), so that the relationship that the appearance ratio of the "second production mode with relatively high expectation" is higher as the post-operation effect is established when Any one of the simulated images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the valid period only by preparing at least two modes. Further, an embodiment different from the above four embodiments (integrated image IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared embodiments may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operating means (sword decoration 5001,) having an operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400) and
An integrated image display means for displaying an image obtained by imitating an operation receiving portion as an integrated image IGa to IGd integrated with a peripheral decorative image that decorates the periphery of the image.
-It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation by the player is performed while the integrated image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion. The integrated image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated image IGa to IGd).

The details of the "integrated image" shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) will be described separately for each of these modes (integrated image IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated image IGa" shown in FIG. 144 (a) includes a normal button image BMGa and a normal peripheral decorative image SSGa that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the "integrated image IGa", the normal button image BMGa is displayed as "an image of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given". On the other hand, the peripheral decoration image SSGa usually has a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not modeled, and the peripheral edge of the normal button image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, first, even if a plurality of operating means are provided, which of the operating means is given the operating opportunity is determined by the operating means (the operating means to be operated). It is possible to easily recognize by visually recognizing the normal button image BMGa that imitates a part of). Moreover, the normal button image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration part, but a luxurious and large image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable for improving decorativeness and staging (integrated image IGa). ) Will be displayed, so that the staging impact when the normal button image BMGa is displayed will be large, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration part luxurious, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible effect regardless of the shape of the actual peripheral decoration part. become.

In the "integrated image IGa" shown in FIG. 144 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button image BMGa), and the upper surface thereof is represented by a pedestal. It is decorated with a predetermined decoration to warn that it is a high-risk button. As described above, these "pedestals" and "predetermined decorations" have a shape different from that of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGa" according to this embodiment, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from the predetermined maximum value display area when the operation is not accepted within the valid period. It is displayed so that it decreases with the passage of time until it reaches the display area of. That is, in this case, the peripheral decorative image SSGa usually has a function of suggesting the operation means to be operated, and also suggests the remaining time until the state (valid period) in which the operation reception is permitted ends. It will also play a function of suggesting the remaining time.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 144 (a), a section image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is provided. .. The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 144 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed so as to overlap with the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Therefore, the gauge image GG is full. It will be possible to maintain a good game entertainment for the entire period until it becomes empty.

When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the method of displaying the image, a method of displaying the color of the display target area itself with a predetermined decoration by changing the color between the portion with the gauge and the portion without the gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as image data by itself, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of a predetermined decoration in the display target area.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 144 (a), the predetermined decoration (here, “white and black striped pattern”) applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the normal peripheral decoration. Since it is designed so as to straddle other areas in the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decorativeness of the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is more preferably expected that the game interest will be improved when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the “integrated image IGa” is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern button to be operated is used. The 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button image BMGa in the "integrated image IGa". That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared for the button-shaped image BMG, and a normal button-shaped image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. Such a light emitting mode. If is adopted, the mode (expectation degree) as the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by checking the handle button 5014, which is the operation target, without visually recognizing the normal button-shaped image BMG.

Regarding the "button image BMGa (FIG. 144 (a))", the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated does not necessarily have to be accurately copied, and the point is that the operation target is. It suffices if it is displayed with a copying level (deformation, etc.) that can recognize which operation means it is.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 144 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa", and is the same as the button image BMG in which the operation target is imitated. , The peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated image IGb", the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decorative image SSG", but the button image BMG is displayed as the above-mentioned "button image". Instead of "BMGa", it is displayed as a "special button image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 144 (b), the special button image BMGb imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. It is displayed as an image having a shape different from that of the "button image BMGa (FIG. 144 (a))" in which the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is imitated. However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it becomes difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operating means is the operation target when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated image IGa", the "button image BMGa" that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed integrally with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Therefore, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" itself has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this regard, in the "integrated image IGb", the "special button image BMGb" is integrated with such a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and displayed, so that the "special button image" is displayed. Even if the "BMGb" does not properly imitate the operation target, it may be suggested that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target as a whole of the "integrated image IGb". become able to. In order to suitably obtain such an action effect (a function of suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" is an operation means different from the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display when (such as the handle portion 5012) is the operation target.

According to such a configuration, the button image BMG that imitates the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are displayed as an integrated image. It is now possible to display the button image BMG, which is only a part of the image, in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operation means to be operated, which is a more prominent effect. It is expected that the game will be improved by its sexuality and decorativeness.

In the "special button image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 144 (b), the button has a streamlined shape and is depicted in a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa", and is depicted on the top thereof. Words such as "DANGER" are applied. By the appearance of the "special button image BMGb" that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to feel a premium feeling, and the "button image BMGa" has appeared. It is expected that people will instinctively feel that their expectations are higher than they sometimes are.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), even when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGb" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is set. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button image BMGb in the "integrated image IGb". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGc" shown in FIG. 144 (c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa". It is configured as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated image IGc", the button image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button image BMG", but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration". Instead of "image SSGa", it is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in each of the following points.
"The peripheral decorative portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, and the effect display is performed. The peripheral edge of the button image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the device 1600.
A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such an "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144 (c))", any operation means is operated based on the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144 (a))". It is possible to significantly change the shape of the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144 (c))" as a whole without causing a shape change in the "button image BMG" that suggests whether an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a highly flexible decorativeness / directing property by causing a shape change without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144 (c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof is an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144 (a))". It is displayed as. Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144 (a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144 (c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period).

In particular, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144 (c))" according to this embodiment, another member having a special decoration is added to the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa (FIG. 144 (a))". The whole image is displayed as an enlarged image in the form of being expanded. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the degree of expectation is higher than when the "button image BMGa" appears. It is expected that you will instinctively feel the high price.

Further, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144 (c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa (FIG. 144 (a))", but is a gauge image (predetermined image). No change is made in the display target area itself of the GG.

That is, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as a display target area of the gauge image GG, is the display target area or the gauge image only "a part of decoration" or "remaining"? It is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a part having a function of suggesting time. In this regard, the gauges having important functions such as "indicating the remaining time" in the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144 (a))" and the "special peripheral decorative image SSGb (FIG. 144 (c))". Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed and the shape is changed in other parts, the shape can be changed without sacrificing the suggestion function of the remaining time. It will be possible to realize a high degree of freedom in decoration and staging by creating it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), even when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is set. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button image BMGa in the "integrated image IGc". That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target. However, the normal button image BMGa when the "integrated image IGc" is displayed should be displayed in a different color (for example, "green") from when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed. You may do it. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGd" shown in FIG. 144 (d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa". It is configured as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated image IGd", the button image BMG is displayed as a "special button image BMGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal button image BMG". The peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSG".

That is, in the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 144 (d))", the "special button image BMGb" used in the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 144 (b))" and the "integrated image IGc" are used. (FIG. 144 (c)) ”is displayed as an integrated image with the“ special peripheral decoration image SSGb ”. According to such a configuration, the action and effect exerted by the above-mentioned "special button image BMGb" with respect to the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 144 (b))" and the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144 (b))". With respect to c)), not only the effects and effects produced by the above-mentioned "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" can be obtained, but also when the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144 (a))" is used as a reference, Since both the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the expectation is high instinctively.

On the other hand, while both the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG change their modes, the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decorative image SSG. Specific targeting the same post-operation effect when the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144 (a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 144 (d))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is an operation reception effect (valid period) of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the operation target is also set when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGd" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button image BMGb in the "integrated image IGd". That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") from when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed. You may do so. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in a rainbow color.

As shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, and the predetermined operation reception effect (valid period). When is generated, the integrated image IG in which the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, but one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed in one mode. At that time, the other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button image BMG is displayed as a "normal button image BMG", the peripheral decoration image SSG may be displayed as either a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (c)). Further, when the button image BMG is displayed as the "special button image BMGb", the peripheral decorative image SSG can be displayed as either "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" or "special peripheral decorative image SSGb" ( FIGS. 144 (b), (d)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as "normal peripheral decoration image SSG", the button image BMG can be displayed as either "normal button image BMGa" or "special button image BMGb" (. FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (b)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the button image BMG can be displayed as either "normal button image BMGa" or "special button image BMGb" ( FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, when the mode changes, only one side thereof is displayed. Therefore, by looking at one side where the mode has not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that a predetermined operation reception effect (valid period) has occurred regardless of which mode the other side is displayed. However, by looking at the other side where the mode is changing, the degree of expectation can be suitably recognized. It should be noted that the mode of one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may not be changed, and the mode may be changed only on the other side.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, when the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "peripheral decoration image SSG" has a remaining time suggestion function that suggests the remaining time until the state in which the operation reception is permitted ends, and which operation means is the operation target. By displaying it as an integrated image IG integrated with the "button image BMG" that has the suggestive function, it is possible to grasp the remaining time and the operation target and to recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably when the operation reception effect (valid period) is occurring.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The non-display area is included (there is both a part having a remaining time suggestion function and a part having no remaining time suggestion function). That is, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not only for the purpose of suggesting the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), and in the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the "decoration of the button image BMG". Since it is possible to positively adopt a display mode for the purpose of "enhancing the performance", while suggesting the remaining time, the performance when the operation reception effect, which is an important effect, occurs. It will be possible to improve significantly. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said that.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one aspect, the button image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of aspects. However, as an entity, when the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration portion is one aspect, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of embodiments (multiple emission colors). ) Is changed to one of them. Therefore, when the button image BMG is changed, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be copied.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), when the button image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as an entity, the "handle portion 5012", which is the peripheral decorative portion, does not change to any of the plurality of embodiments. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button-shaped image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the aspect of the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration portion, and can perform various depictions preferable for enlivening the staging. The "handle portion 5012", which is a peripheral decorative portion, may be provided so as not to change in a plurality of modes in the first place, such as being non-light emitting.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), there is a case where both modes of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change (FIG. 144 (d)). However, as an entity, it is desirable that both the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change in one aspect when the peripheral decorative portion "handle portion 5012" is one aspect.

Different aspects appear in the peripheral decoration portion "handle portion 5012" depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" or the peripheral decoration image SSG is "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". You may do so. However, the peripheral decoration image SSG has at least a different shape depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is a "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" or the peripheral decoration image SSG is a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", whereas the peripheral decoration portion is In the "handle portion 5012", it is desirable to only cause a mode change (for example, a change in the light emitting mode) that does not accompany the shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration portion so that the shape cannot be changed in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual effect function by the peripheral decoration image SSG.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern image includes the button image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) and the pattern image that imitates the handle portion 5012. TMG is prepared, and the form as the peripheral decorative image SSG is made different depending on which of those images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decorative images SSGa and b that decorate the peripheral edge of the button image BMG cannot be displayed when a different image from the button image BMG is displayed. The decorative image SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a "function suggesting which operation means the operation target is".

If the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the image (button image BMG, pattern image TMG), the form (thickness) of the gauge image (predetermined image) included in the peripheral decoration image as GG. , Length) should also be different. The operation reception effect in which the button image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same fluctuation pattern (select which one occurs depending on the effect determination). It may be an effect that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or different timings. The peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the button image is BMG is not the one that imitates the peripheral decoration part, and the peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when it is the pattern image TMG is the one that imitates the peripheral decoration part. You may. However, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (valid period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other areas in the peripheral decorative image SSG are those areas. A predetermined decoration (here, "striped pattern") straddling the predetermined decoration is applied, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed in an superimposed manner on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Therefore, the gauge image GG is full. It will be possible to maintain a good game entertainment for the entire period until it becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration. In this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Since the number of images will decrease, it will be urged for the player who dislikes the decrease of the predetermined decoration to perform the operation at an early stage.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decorative portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided in the above is not imitated, and the image represents an insubstantial object as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize more flexible decorativeness and directability without being bound by the substance as a gaming machine part.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), at least the peripheral decorative image SSG has a plurality of shapes among the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG. That is, in this case, since it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decorative image SSG expressing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button image BMG, any of the plurality of operating means can be used as the operation target. It will be possible to realize a display with higher color rendering and decorativeness by changing the shape of the integrated image IG while properly suggesting whether or not it is.

As for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the shape may not necessarily be changed when the button image BMG is in one aspect, but only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button-shaped image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG is changed in a form of increasing its size. As will be described later, as a method of such a form change, either a method of increasing the number of objects expressed as an image (number of decorations, etc.) or a plurality of modes having different contour shapes (rectangular parallelepiped, sphere, etc.) It is possible to adopt a method of expanding the target range to be displayed among the objects displayed in the above or the predetermined object expressed as an image. Further, as will be described later, regarding the morphological change of the peripheral decorative image SSG, as a precursory effect, an effect of gradually changing from a form with low expectation to a form with high expectation is executed, and then finally. The operation reception in the operation reception production may be permitted while the changed form is maintained.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed, the gauge image included in the peripheral decorative image SSG ( Predetermined image) The display target area of the GG is not changed (at least the shape is changed) and is displayed as the same form. Therefore, even if the morphology of the peripheral decorative image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the suggestion function of how much time is left, and thus this is the important function. It becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation by the shape change in a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG while holding the above.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned actions and effects is intended to be achieved, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object, and the peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion. It may be displayed as an image of a part.

Further, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period in which operation reception is permitted" such as a predetermined operation reception effect. This encourages the player to operate.

However, in the integrated image IG according to this embodiment, although the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG are displayed. Only one side is dynamically displayed, and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, one side is displayed so that the other side stays in place while contributing to improving the effect when the button effect, which is an important effect, is generated by the dynamic expression. As a result, the integrated image IG is not moved and displayed when viewed as a whole, so that visibility can be suitably ensured.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the button image BMG is dynamically moved so as to depict how the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range. It is displayed, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decorative image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Allows display so that the display area in the display target area is reduced with the passage of time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side of the integrated image IG that secures suitable visibility (peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed). Therefore, while improving the staging when the operation reception staging, which is an important staging, occurs by the dynamic display by the button image BMG, how much time is left for the staging reception. Can be easily recognized.

Further, on the side of the integrated image IG that secures suitable visibility (peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( Predetermined image) The area where GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, in order to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated image IG that secures suitable visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from having an adverse effect on the display target area.

The peripheral decorative image SSG has a region different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG itself, and the button image BMG have a plurality of modes having different expectations. One of the modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), but the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. Moreover, when the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the peripheral decoration image SSG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern in the peripheral decorative image SSG? , Or it may be difficult to grasp whether it has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced due to the difficulty in grasping to what position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced due to the mixture with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. ..

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when at least the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image (within the valid period). In the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is referred to as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the display target area. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image or The display position of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is also displayed so as to be displaced in the same manner.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the valid period ends, the position of the "specific image" even if the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself cannot be recognized as a mere decoration or a suggestion of the remaining time. By checking, you will be able to recognize the remaining time. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that it is not always necessary to display the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation reception is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) at which the operation reception is permitted is started within the predetermined fluctuation pattern has arrived, the effect display device 1600 will use the effect display device 1600. , Integrated image IG and operation promotion images such as "press!" And "down arrow" are displayed.

In this example, the embodiment (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a) is displayed as the integrated image IG, but FIGS. 144 (b) to (d) are based on the result of the effect determination. ) May be displayed. Regardless of which mode the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the specific image different from the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image, or The display of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the aspect described below with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 145 (a), first, in the integrated image IG when the timing is A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full tank mode, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 145 (a), at the timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". The "specific image whose aspect has been partially changed" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, whether or not "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displayed. Just by checking, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the operation reception was permitted (the remaining crotch is decreasing).

However, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is first from timing A0 (start timing of the valid period). Gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the form of "the display area increases by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until the predetermined time (the time required for the entire image of the specific image to finish appearing) elapses. It is displayed in the display target area of.

For example, in the integrated image IG when a little time has passed from the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is shown in FIG. 145 (b). A "specific image TG" as a "specific image" different from the specific image or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed appears to the point where about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is in the stage of increasing with the passage of time.

In the integrated image IG at the timings A2 and A3 where a large amount of time has passed, as shown in FIGS. 145 (c) and 145 (d), "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image or The "specific image TG" as the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is in a situation where the whole picture has already appeared, and the gauge image without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the GG is in a situation of being displaced in the display target area.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is the gauge image (predetermined) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Image) Displayed at or near the end of the GG, and gauge image (predetermined image) Displayed to displace the display position according to the displacement of the end of the GG (in a continuous manner). It has become.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image in which a star-shaped mark is given in a white square space. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. For example, the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a partially changed manner, such as an image in which the image gradually fades over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time is exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends), at least a part (may be all) is not hidden and the display state is maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145 (e), in the integrated image IG when the timing A4 is the end timing of the valid period, the gauge is used. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and about half of the display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends in that state, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated image IG when it is at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, it is most desirable to display so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left, and such a configuration is used. You may try to do it.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed at its display position (in a continuous manner) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, up to what image of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (the gauge image (predetermined image). Predetermined image) It becomes possible to make it ambiguous whether it is GG.

That is, the "specific image TG" is not hidden at the end of the valid period, and the display area of most (more than half or all) is left, but from the player side. When viewed, it also appears to be part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (hidden here) when the valid period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, so that it can be made to appear that the valid period remains longer than it actually is. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left and ends, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after becoming, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area is reduced, and thereby the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 145, at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The "specific image" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is gauged. The image (predetermined image) may be displayed within the display target area of the GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it will be possible to make it look positive as if it were, it will appear as if a longer time than it looks is set as the validity period, and it will be a game entertainment when the validity period occurs. It is expected to improve.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed.

Assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) at which the operation reception is permitted starts within the predetermined fluctuation pattern has arrived, even in the example shown in FIG. 146, the effect display device 1600 may use the effect display device 1600. , Integrated image IG and operation promotion images such as "press!" And "down arrow" are displayed.

Also in this example, the embodiment (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a) is displayed as the integrated image IG, but FIGS. 144 (b) to (1) based on the result of the effect determination. It may be displayed in any of the embodiments shown in d). Regardless of which mode the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the specific image different from the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image, or The display of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" will cause a change in the aspect shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (d) with the passage of time. ..

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 146 (a), in the integrated image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG covers the entire display target area. It is not displayed, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed, respectively. When the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period) is set, only a part of the "specific image TG" may be displayed, but the whole is displayed here. With such a configuration, it seems that the "specific image TG" has a longer time than it looks because it can be made to appear as if it functions as a part of the "gauge image GG". It is possible to make it.

The "specific image TG" according to this example is an image expressing the "eraser", and cannot fit in the area surrounded by the section image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) and other areas (of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , Areas where the mode can change depending on the degree of expectation, etc.). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the "specific image TG" stand out more than the "gauge image GG", and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is left. Be expected.

Further, in this example, when the "specific image TG" is displaced due to the lapse of time from the timing A0 and the timings A2 and A3, the "specific image TG" is shown in FIGS. 146 (b) and 146 (c). The part where "" has passed is changed to a "white area" as if it was erased by an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expression) is reduced by the amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the "specific image TG". Occasionally, the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so the contrast with the "specific image TG" as the boundary becomes conspicuous, suggesting how much time is left. It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction is to be performed. It is desirable that the color appearing in the reduced region is a color not used in the "gauge image GG".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "specific image TG" is one of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG suggesting that the remaining time has disappeared when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). Since it does not function as a part, at least a part (may be all) is not hidden and the display state is maintained even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends). Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146 (d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is “0” in the integrated image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period. The display area of the "specific image TG" is completely left. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends in that state, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, also in this example, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden and a part is left in the integrated image IG when it is at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period. It may be displayed as follows.

Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced (in a continuous manner) according to the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When viewed from the player side, it is possible to obscure how many of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It will be like.

That is, the "specific image TG" is not hidden at the end of the valid period, and the display area of most (more than half or all) is left, but from the player side. When viewed, it also appears to be part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (hidden here) when the valid period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, so that it can be made to appear that the valid period remains longer than it actually is. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left and ends, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after becoming, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area is reduced, and thereby the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are made different from the case of the example shown in FIG. 145, but the same image may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 145, the same image as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 146 may be used. Further, the valid period in which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the embodiment shown in FIG. 145, and the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" in the embodiment shown in FIG. 146. May occur under different conditions from the validity period in which is displayed. In this case, the shape of the integrated image IG itself or at least the display target area of the gauge image GG is different from each other in the effective period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 145 appears and the effective period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 146 appears. It is desirable to make it different.

As described above, the integrated image IG is dynamic during the valid period of the predetermined operation reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 145 (a) to (e) and FIGS. 146 (a) to (d). It can be displayed, which prompts the player to operate it. However, as described above, the button-shaped image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range, whereas the peripheral decoration image SSG is used. Prevents this from being dynamically displayed. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on the side that does not perform such dynamic display, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image) GG is changed, it is easy to recognize how much time is left until the end of the valid period even in the dynamically displayed integrated image IG. You will be able to.

The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" may be displayed as one image data or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the "specific image TG" has a display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" in the display target area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". It is displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when it is reduced, and its display position is displaced according to the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Is displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, it is unclear how many of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to.

Further, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 145 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at the maximum value, and the predetermined time has passed since the operation reception was permitted. Until the elapse (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is compensated for by the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". I am trying to increase. According to such a configuration, it seems that the remaining time suggested by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" does not decrease at the beginning from the start of the valid period until the predetermined time elapses. Since it becomes possible to have a good image, it becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the integrated image IG is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). However, regardless of which of these modes is displayed, the display shapes of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are the same. It is desirable to. Regarding each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG", they may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but a function of suggesting the remaining time is provided. In order to maintain it suitably, it is desirable that even if one aspect of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" is changed, the other aspect is not changed. For example, if it is suggested that the mark attached to the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 145 is not a star shape but a double circle, the degree of expectation is high, a "gauge image (predetermined)". As the "image) GG" is gradually reduced, the degree of expectation (double circle) will gradually become visible, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, at least a part (may be all) of the "specific image TG" is not performed even when the valid period ends without any operation by the player. Changed to maintain the display state without being displayed. However, regarding the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, when the timing A4 arrives without the player performing the operation, the operation reception is internally performed and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output (for example, the operation) are performed. It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which only the sound is output according to the reception). In this case, the timing A4 may be a timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (timing hidden or later), and is of the "specific image TG". It is desirable to set it as the timing of arrival when at least a part of it is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if a situation occurs in which an operation is performed by the player immediately after the operation reception is no longer permitted, even immediately before the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed, " Since the "specific image TG" is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started in response to the operation reception by the player in time. become able to. The "specific image TG" may be displayed even at the time when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, by fading out after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started). Things that are gradually hidden, etc.).

Assuming that the valid period for which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a second condition that is different from the first condition. When the conditions are met, it is possible to generate a second validity period in which automatic reception is not performed. Even in the second valid period, the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof, and the peripheral decorative image SSG is a gauge image (predetermined image). ) The display target area of GG is included. However, within the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG". Is not displayed. Except for the fact that "specific image TG" is not displayed, the integrated image IG displayed within the first valid period and the integrated image IG displayed within the second valid period are displayed as the same image. Can be done.

That is, in the second valid period generated by the fulfillment of the second condition, unlike the first valid period generated by the fulfillment of the first condition, when the set time elapses without being operated by the player, The second validity period ends in such a way that the automatic reception does not function and the post-operation display and / or post-operation sound output is not generated. Therefore, if the display of "specific image TG" is left at the time when the reception for the operation by the player is not allowed, the valid period ends even though the remaining time has not been exhausted. It may cause a misunderstanding as if it was done, and eventually the game entertainment may be reduced. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the "specific image TG" is not displayed for the entire period from the start to the end.

In this case, it is desirable that the length of the set time (time from the acceptance of the operation reception to the end) is different between the first validity period and the second validity period. In addition, it is desirable that the contents of the display change (post-operation display) and the sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when the operation is accepted are different from each other.

Further, in addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, it may be possible to generate a third valid period for which automatic reception is performed (for example, it occurs when the third condition is satisfied). In addition to the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth valid period in which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, it occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied). The point is that the valid period for automatic reception (valid period with different occurrence conditions) includes at least the first valid period in which display and sound processing is performed in the above-mentioned manner, and automatic reception is performed. It suffices that at least the second valid period in which the processing related to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described embodiment is included in the valid period (valid period in which the generation conditions are different from each other).

In addition, the "first validity period" here is
-It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, regardless of whether or not the operation is performed within the valid period.
-It means that the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the valid period regardless of the effect state. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special effect state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of effect states" as the effect state. In addition, if the "second validity period" occurs while the "special production state (automatic reception mode)" is set, either one may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is enabled. (For example, "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the staging state"), which has nothing to do with the configuration related to the technical features described here.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated image IG (peripheral decorative image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated image IG (peripheral decorative image SSG). In the non-linear region of the portion, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced according to the passage of time. According to such a configuration, the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG with the passage of time becomes decorative, so that the remaining time as an effective period is consumed. It will be possible to maintain the entertainment interests of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a gauge image having a predetermined transparency is applied to a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (Predetermined image) GG is displayed on top of this, or gauge image (predetermined image) Since a specific pattern is applied to the GG itself, the gauge image (predetermined image) according to the passage of time. It becomes possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) is applied according to the passage of time. It becomes possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 is referred to as a “first display target area”. When the second display target area has a shape (non-similar shape) different from the specific shape of the non-straight line, and the distance from the start to the end of the reduction of the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without being operated by the player, or by the player. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, while at least there is a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without being performed. May be terminated when the first set time elapses without being operated by the player, but when the second set time elapses without being operated by the player. I try not to end it.

In this regard, the operation target to which the operation opportunity is given by the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. If the (operation receiving unit) is different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. Coupled with being there, it will be possible to encourage people to enjoy the operation reception staging with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed have different operation receiving units. The image will be displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. As for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations between the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in any case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part thereof. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes from each other.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the "non-linear specific shape" and the case of "a different shape (non-similar shape)". In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set for each other, the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are "big hits". It is desirable that the rate at which "aspects suggesting that" appears is different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed have the same set time (first set time). Sometimes it is desirable to be given the opportunity to accept operations regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. When the set time is different, it is desirable to give an opportunity for operation reception regarding different post-operation display and post-operation sound output.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the operation-related display such as "press!" Or "down arrow" is superimposed on the integrated image IG to be combined with the integrated image IG. When I look at these, I try to express more strongly that I am in a situation to operate. However, here, the operation-related display such as "press!" Or "down arrow" may be displayed overlapping with the button image BMG (at any timing of dynamic display) that suggests the target to be operated. It does not overlap with the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image TG that suggests the remaining time.

In such a configuration, operations such as "press!" Or "down arrow" are performed while avoiding important information such as button image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and specific image TG among the integrated image IG. Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated image IG, it becomes possible to strongly urge the player to operate while appropriately transmitting important information. It goes without saying that this is because the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation reception is performed within the valid period as the valid period for which the operation reception is permitted. There are multiple (types) of valid periods with different contents of sound output after operation. The conditions for generating these valid periods are different from each other, and when any of the conditions for occurrence is satisfied, the corresponding type of valid period is generated.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, "specific image TG" is displayed within the valid period of a plurality of types (first valid period). And those in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed within the valid period (second valid period) are included at least. Hereinafter, in this example, these "first validity period" and "second validity period" are referred to as the above-mentioned "first validity period" in which automatic reception is performed and the above-mentioned "second validity period" in which automatic reception is not performed. Although it is described as the same as "validity period of", it may be applied as a different validity period.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when performing a precursory effect (specific display) suggesting that operation reception is permitted, the precursory effect (specific display) is operated and accepted. Is sometimes executed in a form that straddles before and after the occurrence timing of the allowable validity period. According to such a precursor effect (specific display), the valid period will occur while the flashy effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the valid period occurs. become able to.

However, when the precursor effect (specific display) is executed in such an manner, the precursor effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed for the integrated image IG, so that it is integrated when the validity period starts. Even if the simulated image IG is displayed (internal layer display), the part that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (it is not visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursory effect (specific display), it is difficult to visually recognize the portion of the integrated image IG that overlaps with the precursory effect (specific display). In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area under such a situation where visibility is difficult.

That is, in this case, the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the portion that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) disappears, and the entire integrated image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. By the time the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the player's point of view, the valid period (set time). Can give the impression that is substantially shorter.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, "the precursory effect (specific display) is not executed or the precursory effect (specific display) is executed among the plurality of types of valid periods. In the "second valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not decrease at the time when the precursory effect (specific display) is completed", from the occurrence of the second valid period to the end. "Specific image TG" is not displayed at all between. On the other hand, among the valid periods of multiple (types), the gauge image is "when it occurs during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see). (Predetermined image) In the "first valid period in which the display area of the GG is reduced", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first valid period.

According to such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is used in the first valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. It will be possible to make it appear that the display area of the GG has not decreased so much, and the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced, or the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed for the second valid period. When the "specific image TG" is displayed in, for example, in the display mode of FIG. 145, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the valid period occurs, and the valid period occurs. It may be discovered that this does not function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the appearance of the "specific image TG" gradually appears with the passage of time from. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced due to the exaggerated expression of the length of the remaining time, the "specific image TG" is displayed in such a second valid period. It is desirable not to do so in order to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

In addition to the second valid period, "the precursory effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursory effect (specific display) is executed, but the precursory effect (specific display) is executed. ) May be prepared under different generation conditions for a valid period (fifth valid period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not decrease at the end of the first valid period. In addition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases by the time it occurs during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see). The valid period (sixth valid period) "may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned" specific image TG "is displayed at this time may be appropriately set. good. In short, the plurality (types) of valid periods include at least the above-mentioned second valid period in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the above-mentioned first valid period in which the "specific image TG" is displayed. If so, at least when those effective periods occur, the above-mentioned effects will be exhibited in relation to the precursory effect (specific display).

In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 145, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. 146. You may want to do it.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the production when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period.

FIG. 147 (a) shows the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) corresponds to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of reservations is 0. It shows the production situation being performed at.

FIG. 147 (b) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started by the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 147 (a).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 147 (b), it can be seen that the integrated image IG has not yet appeared at least in the staging display device 1600. However, from the time when the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated image IG is internally displayed, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, so that the integration is performed. The entire image IG may be invisible (or difficult to see due to a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation reception is permitted (the validity period starts) from the time when the precursory effect (specific display) is started.

In FIG. 147 (c), the precursory effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 147 (b) has progressed, and the area in which the precursory effect (specific display TH) is displayed has been reduced. A portion that does not overlap with the precursory effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 147 (b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 147 (b) appears, and is shown in FIG. 147 (c). When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the appearance of the situation, is reached, the display (display on the layer process) is executed at least internally. It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 147 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) by overlapping with the precursor effect (specific display TH) that is preferentially displayed. (It is difficult), but the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (progressed). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the precursory effect (specific display TH) is performed so as to straddle the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period is generated is the precursory effect. (Specific display TH) makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize at least a part of the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the valid period is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 147 (c), it is difficult to visually recognize the button-shaped image that imitates the operation target, but the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge is described in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is in a state where it can be recognized that it is a "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 147 (c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the type in which the "specific image TG" is displayed in the first place when the valid period starts ( It is difficult to distinguish whether it is a type (see FIG. 146) or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and gradually appears after that (see FIG. 145). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to detect that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, the type shown in FIG. 146 is used. When adopted, it can be said that it is particularly effective to execute the precursory effect in the above-mentioned manner in order to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

In FIG. 147 (d), as a result of further progress of the precursor staging (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 147 (b), there is no portion overlapping with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). It shows the situation (here, the precursory effect is hidden).

As shown in FIG. 147 (d), when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visually good, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area larger than the actual display area applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is large. It is left behind, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it can be expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursory effect (specific display TH) is completed can be expected.

In FIG. 147 (e), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 147 (e), at least a part (or all of them) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, even if the player does not perform the operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed (FIG. 147). (F).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player operates immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer allowed), the display after the operation is displayed. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the sound output after the operation is performed, the display and the operation after the operation are performed according to the operation reception caused by the operation by the player in time. It will be possible to make it appear as if the wake output has started. In particular, when the precursory effect (preliminary display) is performed in such an manner, the gauge image (predetermined) is reached when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is visually good. Image) The display area of GG has already decreased, and the displacement of "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation by the player will not be in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the display after the operation is displayed with the "specific image TG" displayed. It can be said that it is particularly effective to output the sound after the operation and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Regarding the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 147, there are cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 145 and cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 146. It may be applied to any of the above.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 147, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed on a separate layer, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 147. It was decided to realize the progress of the production in the aspect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the staging progress in the mode shown in FIG. 147 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. The method can also be applied to each of the examples described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 147, the embodiment (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). .. When such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the precursory effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 148 to 150 in order to improve the game entertainment.

FIGS. 148 to 150 are diagrams showing a modified example of the progress of the production when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

FIG. 148 (a) shows a first effect pattern (variation pattern) in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) corresponds to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. It shows the production situation performed at 1600.

FIG. 148 (b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started by the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 148 (a) is being executed. It shows the situation.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect is performed. It functions as a directing effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), " Either the "image shown in FIG. 149 (c)" or the "image shown in FIG. 150 (j)" is displayed, whereby the "normal button image BMG" and the "special button image BMG" are displayed as the button image BMG. It is intended to suggest which of the "button image BMGb" is more likely to appear.

Here, when the "image shown in FIG. 149 (c)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "normal button image BMG" is displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). Will be suggested.

The "image shown in FIG. 149 (c)" according to this example is in a mode (here, translucent) in which the "integrated image IGa" is different from the normal time (the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGa'. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, for the “image shown in FIG. 149 (c)”, the “integrated image IGa” may be displayed in the same mode as shown in FIG. 144 (a). Alternatively, the "normal button image BMGa" may not be integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal time (the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a)) or in the normal time (FIG. 144 (a)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode different from the mode (here, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 149 (c), the "normal button image BMGa" itself shown in FIG. 144 (a) or the "normal button image BMGa" is approximated to the extent that it is reminiscent of it. At least the image BMGa'with the (simulated) outer shape will be displayed. As a result, the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144 (a))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144 (a))" integrated with "image SSGb" occurs.

After the image IGa'(image BMGa') shown in FIG. 149 (c) is displayed, the image IGa'(image BMGa') is not the “integrated image IGa'(FIG. 144 (a))”. , An effect suggesting (reminding) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144 (c))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 149 (d), the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed” with respect to the “image IGa ′ expressing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button image BMGa)”. It is described as a production that gradually brings the image SSGb'" closer. As a result of such an effect, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa')". When the image SSGb'” is added and integrated, a valid period in which the “integrated image IGc (FIG. 144 (c))” appears will occur. On the other hand, "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa (or image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa')". If it is not integrated and is not integrated, a valid period in which the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144 (a))" appears will occur.

FIG. 149 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 149 (d) is performed. There is.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and suggests that operation reception is permitted. It is executed as a production. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "an image IGa'representing an integrated image IGa (or an image BMGa'expressing a normal button image BMGa')". The "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa'( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the "image BMGa') expressing the normal button image BMGa" and the "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 149 (e) progresses, either "the image shown in FIG. 149 (f)" or "the image shown in FIG. 149 (h)" based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situation and image content shown in FIGS. 149 (f) and 149 (h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situation and image content shown in FIG. 147 (c)", and FIG. 149 (e). As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in the above and the display area of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. , A portion that does not overlap with the precursory effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 149 (e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 149 (e) appears, and is the timing shown in FIG. 149 (f) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 149 (h) appears, is displayed at least internally (display on the layer process). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIGS. 149 (f) and 149 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (). It is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period occurs. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG is invisible or difficult to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the valid period is started.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 149 (f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but "normal peripheral decoration image SSG". Since it is in a recognizable state, as a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 (d) and 149 (e), "an image IGa'(or a normal button image BMGa) expressing the integrated image IGa is expressed. It is recognizable that "image BMGa')" has failed to be associated with "image SSGb'representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 149 (g), the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 144 (a)). The whole picture of is to appear. Since the subsequent progress of the production is as described above with reference to FIGS. 147 (d) to 147 (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 149 (h) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decorative image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the "special peripheral decorative image SSGb". As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 149 (d), the "image IGa'representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa')" is replaced with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is recognizable that it succeeded in connecting with the image SSGb'representing. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 149 (i), the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 144 (c)). The whole picture will appear. Subsequent production progress is simply that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 144 (a)) is replaced with the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 144 (c)), and FIGS. 147 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the "image shown in FIG. 150 (j)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). Will be suggested.

The "image shown in FIG. 150 (j)" according to this example is in a mode (here, translucent) in which the "integrated image IGb" is different from the normal time (the mode shown in FIG. 144 (b)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGb'. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, for the “image shown in FIG. 150 (j)”, the “integrated image IGb” may be displayed in the same mode as shown in FIG. 144 (b). Alternatively, the "special button image BMGb" may not be integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 144 (b)) or in the normal time (FIG. 144 (b)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode different from the mode (here, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 150 (j), the "special button image BMGb" itself shown in FIG. 144 (b) or the "special button image BMGb" is approximated to the extent that it is reminiscent of it. An image BMGb'with an outer shape (simulated) will be displayed at least. As a result, the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 144 (b))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 144 (d))" integrated with "image SSGb" occurs.

After the image IGb'(image BMGb') shown in FIG. 150 (j) is displayed, the image IGb'(image BMGb') is not the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 144 (b))". , An effect suggesting (reminding) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 144 (d))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 149 (k), the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". It is described as a production that gradually brings the image SSGb'" closer. As a result of such an effect, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". When the image SSGb'” is added and integrated, a valid period in which the “integrated image IGd (FIG. 144 (d))” appears will occur. On the other hand, "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGb'expressing the integrated image IGb (or image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". If it is not integrated and is not integrated, a valid period in which the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 144 (b))" appears will occur.

FIG. 150 (l) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 150 (k) is performed. There is. Instead of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), it may be executed as a third precursor effect (third specific display) different from this.

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production that suggests that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "an image IGb'representing an integrated image IGb (or an image BMGb'expressing a special button image BMGb)". The "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the "image IGb'expressing the integrated image IGb'( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the "image BMGb') expressing the special button image BMGb" and the "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 150 (l) progresses, either the "image shown in FIG. 150 (m)" or the "image shown in FIG. 150 (o)" is obtained based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situation and image content shown in FIGS. 150 (m) and 150 (o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situation and image content shown in FIG. 147 (c)", and FIG. 150 (l) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in the above and the display area of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. , A part that does not overlap with the precursory effect (specific display) appears, and indicates a situation or image content in which the part is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 150 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 150 (l) appears, and is the timing shown in FIG. 150 (m) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 150 (o) appears, is displayed at least internally (display on the layer process). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIGS. 150 (m) and 150 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (). It is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period occurs. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG is invisible or difficult to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the valid period is started.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 150 (m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but "normal peripheral decoration image SSG". As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 150 (k) and 150 (l), "the image IGb'(or the special button image BMGb) expressing the integrated image IGb was expressed. It is recognizable that "image BMGb')" has failed to be associated with "image SSGb'representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 150 (n), the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 144 (b)). The whole picture will appear. Subsequent production progress is simply that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 144 (a)) is replaced with the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 144 (b)), and FIGS. 147 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 150 (o) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decorative image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb”. As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 150 (k), the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)" is replaced with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is recognizable that it succeeded in connecting with the image SSGb'representing. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 150 (p), the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 144 (d)). The whole picture of is to appear. Subsequent production progress is simply that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 144 (a)) is replaced with the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 144 (d)), and FIGS. 147 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, when FIG. 149 (c) appears, the probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG is set to "0%", but as the button image BMG. The probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 149 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 149 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 150 (m) → (n), ( There is a possibility that the staging progress will be executed in the form of o) → (p).

According to such a configuration, at the time when FIGS. 149 (f) and 149 (h) and FIGS. 150 (m) and 150 (o) appear, it is not possible to determine in which mode the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed. Although it is recognizable, it becomes impossible to recognize in which mode the button-shaped image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is gradually suggested according to the situation related to the progress of the second precursor staging (second specific display TH2), and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. .. In particular, when the button image BMG can suggest any of a plurality of operation means having different operation targets depending on the display mode, the validity period has started and the operation-related expectation is also suggested. In spite of the situation, it becomes impossible to recognize which operation target is, so that the degree of attention to the effect can be significantly improved.

However, even in the situation where FIGS. 149 (f) and 149 (h) and 150 (m) and (o) appear, the button is used in the operation means (operation receiving unit) to be operated by the player. It is desirable to emit light (for example, emit light from the time when the valid period occurs) according to the type displayed as the image BMG. According to such a configuration, a person who has a high motivation to operate and tends to directly see the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the "type displayed as the button image BMG". Therefore, it becomes possible to encourage the player to operate.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 148 (a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIGS. 149 (c) and 150 (j).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, the second precursor staging (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIGS. 149 (d) and 150 (k) may be changed to the situation shown in FIGS. 149 (g), (i), 150 (n), and (p). good. That is, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 149 (d) and FIG. 150 (k) functions as a precursor effect. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be already reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not be reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, the gauge image is in the situation shown in FIGS. 149 (d) and 150 (k). (Predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area.

Further, with respect to the effects of FIGS. 148 to 150, a part thereof may be omitted depending on the mode prepared as the integrated image IG. For example, when the embodiments shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (d) are not prepared as the integrated image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 150. At this time, FIG. 149 (c) may also be omitted.

In addition, in the production of FIGS. 148 to 150, the image BMG'(or the button displacement image BMG itself) expressing the button displacement image BMG before the operation reception is permitted (before the occurrence of the valid period) Good) is displayed (FIG. 149 (d), FIG. 150 (k)), but in that situation (before the occurrence of the valid period), the image BMG'(or the button image BMG) representing the button image BMG). Is not dynamically displayed as if it were displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving part. According to such a configuration, even if the button-shaped image BMG and the image BMG'expressing the button image BMG'are displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the valid period has not yet occurred. By being able to implicitly suggest, the player will be able to concentrate on the production without worrying about the remaining time of the valid period. Since the effect reception is permitted when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, it is difficult or impossible to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). The dynamic display of the button image BMG will be performed.

FIGS. 151 to 155 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the production when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 147 to 150, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor staging (specific display) is hidden is generated. As for the case, an example of the progress of the production was explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 151 to 155, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the precursor effect (specific display) is performed. An example of the progress of the production will be described in the case where the valid period (second valid period) occurs without being overlooked.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment basically performs a predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) when an effective period in which operation reception is permitted occurs. However, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment can execute the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized" within the valid period. Gauge image (predetermined image) GG even if the predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) itself is not performed or the predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) is performed when the valid period occurs in order to make the feature stand out. When the entire display target area of the above is made good for visibility, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not been reduced yet and has reached the maximum value.

Here, as the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", usually (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed when the operation is not performed within the valid period. When the valid period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "the operation is not performed within the valid period, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, at the end of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image GG is not a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. First display mode "is possible. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that a lot of time is left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Becomes aware of the possibility that the valid period will be terminated suddenly, so that the tension during the valid period can be suitably maintained.

Further, as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), the gauge image GG usually reduces the display area every unit time within the valid period. However, it is possible to mention "a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period". According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is little time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can gauge the gauge. It becomes conscious of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed.

That is, in the example described below, "a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" by using at least one of such "first display mode" and "second display mode". A display example is shown for the case of executing.

First, in FIG. 151 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced by the second effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0. It shows the production situation performed by the display device 1600.

In FIG. 151 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 151 (a), an operation acceptance period for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is allowed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. The integrated image IG is displayed to show the production status. As shown in FIG. 151 (b), at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not been reduced yet. ..

Further, when the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is executed within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is ". It is made longer than the time (set time) set for the valid period (first valid period) in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed. This means that if an attempt is made to execute a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized within the valid period, it takes time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the first valid period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the "movement of the gauge image GG" Even though the set time until the end of the validity period is different from the second validity period in which the "display mode with features" is executed, is the integrated image IG itself the same? The images are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the first validity period and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized". It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time when the situation is not reduced. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

In addition, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 151 (b) occurs, a precursor effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, when the entire integrated image IG (at least the "display target area of the gauge image GG" included in the integrated image IG) is displayed without overlapping the precursory effect, the display area of the gauge image GG. Is at its maximum and is required to be in a situation where it has not yet been reduced.

That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the state where the operation reception for the predetermined post-operation display and the predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted (within the valid period). When a predetermined time elapses from the production situation shown in FIG. 151 (b) and the production situation shown in FIG. 151 (c) appears, the gauge image GG is displayed up to that point. The display area is maintained in a state where the display area is reduced according to the elapsed time (predetermined time), and the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is started.

As shown in FIGS. 151 (c) and 151 (d), such a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is to be continued for a predetermined time after the period occurs. It has become. However, even during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the operation reception is maintained in an allowable state, and when an operation is performed on the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, the valid period. Is terminated, and along with this, the integrated image IG is hidden, and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 151 (g)).

According to such a configuration, "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the valid period. Therefore, compared with the case where the display area of the gauge image GG continues to be reduced at a constant speed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest that there is a margin in the remaining time until the end of the valid period.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an acceptable state, so that it is possible to give an image as if the valid period has been extended. , It will be expected to improve the game entertainment when the valid period has occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 151 (c) and 151 (d), the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed up to that point is hidden or difficult to visually recognize in the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". The state is set so as to encourage attention to the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized".

However, if a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that a so-called "freeze effect" in which the image in the display screen suddenly becomes stationary has occurred. That is, since the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined time and the state cannot be released, it is erroneously recognized that the operation reception is no longer allowed. There is a concern that the player's willingness to operate will be lost, and the interest in the game will decline. In particular, in this example, since the decorative symbol SZ is set to be in a hidden state or a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it, it may promote a false recognition that the operation reception is no longer permitted.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated image IG itself is not made stationary in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated image itself. The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept stationary, while the button image BMG included in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving part is depicted. Display) is continued.

According to such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button image BMG is continued, the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease, so that the operation reception is not allowed (). It becomes possible to suppress the possibility of being mistakenly recognized as (a freeze effect has occurred), and it is expected that the player's willingness to operate is appropriately maintained.

Here, the dynamic display by the button image BMG is executed as a display in which a predetermined operation (such as an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving portion) is repeated. In this respect, the setting is set during the valid period (first valid period shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. While it is executed as a display in which the predetermined operation by the button image BMG is repeated n times by the end of the time, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. During the valid period (the second valid period shown in FIGS. 151 to 155) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the setting time is set, "the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" in the set time. It is desirable to make it possible to execute the predetermined operation by the button image BMG as a display repeating m (> n) times even within the "non-functioning period".

According to such a configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG decreases for a longer time than the first valid period shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and the like. Since the state that is not done will continue, even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and it takes time to grasp the situation, you will have enough time to operate it. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. It should be noted that the valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is different from the first valid period shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and the like. If a period (one that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is prepared, it is longer than the longest of each time (set time) set for those valid periods. Of the second valid period shown in FIGS. 151 to 155, it is desirable that the number of predetermined operations by the button image BMG is larger in the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". ..

As described above, at the time when such a second valid period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and its display area is set as a predetermined maximum value. It is designed to be displayed (FIG. 151 (b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 146, if the specific image TG may be displayed in a display target area of the gauge image GG in a state of good visibility, the specific image TG is displayed. However, it may appear that the display area of the gauge image GG is decreasing, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 145, when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may appear in a state of good visibility, and the specific image TG may appear. It becomes clear that it does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the game interest will decline due to exaggerating the length of the remaining time as a valid period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second valid period. Therefore, even if the reduction of the display area of the gauge image GG is started from the situation shown in FIG. 151 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is not displayed. When is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 151 (c) and 151 (d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the operation by the player, the gauge image GG is designed to reduce the display area again. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 151 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is timed up. As the second validity period ends, the operation-related image including the integrated image IG is hidden (FIG. 151 (f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is "0", that is, when it is hidden (FIG. 151 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is timed up. As the second validity period ends, the operation-related image including the integrated image IG is hidden (FIG. 151 (f)).

As described above, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 151 (f)), the same operation as when the operation is accepted within the second valid period is performed. The post-display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect functions), and this point is also different from the first validity period. However, instead, in the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and operation acceptance is permitted even in the displayed period in the stopped state. As described above, it can be said that the situation itself in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be performed in time is unlikely to occur. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 151, the gauge image GG is usually predetermined (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.) as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized". A case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed and the "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period" is applied has been described. However, as described above, as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", usually (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), when the operation is not performed within the valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed. When the valid period ends when the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "the operation is not performed within the valid period, and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, at the end of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. The first display aspect of the above may be further applied. When such a method is adopted, it is necessary to execute it in either the mode shown in FIGS. 152 and 153 or the mode shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 in order to improve the interest of the game. More desirable.

FIGS. 152 and 153 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the production when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (d) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (d) and other examples thereof. Therefore, also in this example, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second valid period, and the period including the period is within the second valid period. When the operation reception is made in, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 153 (g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is terminated without the operation being accepted by the operation by the player, the gauge image GG is reduced in its display area again. It will not be displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is continued until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains as it is (predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 152 (d) and 153 (e). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG will be hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see.

As described above, in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 153 (e)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, instead, in the second validity period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first validity period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the second valid period is set with the display area of the predetermined value left. Since the game is terminated, the player may not be able to operate the game even though he / she intends to operate the game, and the second validity period may end, which reduces the interest in the game. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, the symbol stop or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is satisfied. While not, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given within the second valid period, and the operation opportunity is given to the operation means. When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for re-occurring the second validity period will be generated from the time of the end. It can be said that it is.

According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player causes FIG. 153 (g). ) Will be able to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 153 (e), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is accepted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 153 (f)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 152 (b) to (d), FIGS. 153 (e), and (g). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the second valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 153 (g)). ).

When the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 153 (e), the image shown in FIG. 153 (f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 152 (b)) appears as a post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is different from the post-operation display executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the second validity period (FIGS. 152 (b) to (d), FIG. 153 (f), etc.). It's different. Further, the post-operation sound output executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 153 (e) is also the same as that of the second valid period (FIGS. 152 (b) to (d) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation in 153 (f) and the like).

FIGS. 154 and 155 are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect progress when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 154 (a) is the same as the above-mentioned contents and other examples with reference to FIGS. 151 (a) and 152 (a). However, in this example, when the effect display device 1600 displays the integrated image IG during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 154 (a), the second valid period occurs. From the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 154 (b) and 154 (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG sets the display area to the maximum value. It will be maintained as it is.

It should be noted that the operation reception is permitted even during the period when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress within the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", such as the execution of the after-sound output, are the same as those described above and other examples with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. ..

Further, also in this example, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, "the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. The "period that is not done" is to be continued. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (maximum value) as shown in FIGS. 154 (c) and 155 (d). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG will be hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see.

As described above, in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 155 (d)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, instead, in the second validity period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first validity period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, also in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the display area for the maximum value is left as the second valid period. Since the player is trying to terminate the game, the player may not be able to operate the game even though he / she intends to operate the game, and the second validity period may end. There is a concern. Therefore, also in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, specific conditions (for example, symbol stop, 10 seconds before the symbol stop, etc.) are satisfied. While not, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given within the second valid period, and the operation means is given. When the operation for is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated.

According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player causes FIG. 155 (f). ) Will be able to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 155 (d), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is accepted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 155 (e)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 154 (b), (c), 155 (d), and (f). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the second valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 155 (f)). ).

However, in this example, even when the second valid period reoccurs in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs from the time of the reoccurrence. Therefore, FIG. 155 (e). In the situation shown in, the decorative symbol SZ is hidden or hard to see.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 155 (e)" that appears as a post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 155 (d) is the "image shown in FIG. 154 (b)". Is the same as. Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 155 (f)), which is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the second validity period (FIG. 154 (b), (c), FIG. 155 (d), etc.). )) Is different from the image display. Further, the post-operation sound output executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 155 (d) is also the same as that of the second valid period (FIGS. 154 (b), (c) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 155 (f)) executed based on the reception of the operation in 155 (d) and the like).

Thus, in the example shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the entire period from the start to the end of the second valid period functions as a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any situation.

In the situation (special valid period) shown in FIGS. 153 (e) and 155 (d), the integrated image IG may be displayed as in the second valid period. However, the second validity period and the special are so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation have different validity periods (second validity period, special validity period). It is desirable that at least one of the display positions and sizes of the integrated image IG differs from the validity period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second validity period, the integrated image IG corresponding to the second validity period is hidden, and the integrated image IG corresponding to the special validity period is newly added. Will be displayed in. When displaying the integrated image IG in the special valid period, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated within the valid period, or a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated. May not be generated.

The "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 can be executed when the integrated image IGa is displayed among the integrated images IGa to IGd. Therefore, it is desirable not to execute the integrated images IGb to IGd when the integrated images IGb to IGd are displayed. That is, the integrated image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation, but when the integrated image IGa is displayed, the "movement of the gauge image GG" shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 is displayed. Since there is a possibility that a "display mode with characteristics" will appear, it will be possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, when the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", it depends on the player. Even if a situation appears in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set period (second valid period) without performing the operation, an operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , Sound output after operation) will be possible. More specifically, even when the predetermined set period (second valid period) has expired, the operation receiving unit (operation means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated image IG until then is operated. It is possible to re-occur a predetermined set period (second valid period), and operation acceptance is permitted during the re-occurred predetermined set period (second valid period) (Fig.). 153 (e), (f) and FIGS. 155 (d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined setting period (second valid period) ends without understanding the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized". Since the predetermined set period (second valid period) can be regenerated, the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the predetermined set period (first valid period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is not displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", the operation reception is performed. Even if the operation receiving unit (operating means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated image IG is operated after the predetermined setting period (first valid period) ends without being performed, the predetermined setting period (Second validity period) does not occur again (FIGS. 147 to 150).

It should be noted that the symbol changes are not necessarily required for the predetermined set period (second valid period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized". It does not have to occur during the execution period of. For example, it may be a period generated by using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of a symbol change, or a "period during which the big hit game is not executed, such as a period before the big hit game is started". It may occur in ".

Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 147 to 155, a longer time is set in the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155) than in the first valid period (FIGs. 147 to 150). In spite of this, the integrated image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship between the first valid period and the second valid period (in the above example, the integrated image IG itself). The simulated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated image IG is displayed in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button image is the same, so that the set time (set time) is used. It is expected that the lengths of will appear to be the same. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the first validity period and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized". It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time when the situation is not reduced. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When displaying the integrated image IG in a manner having a similar relationship between the first validity period (FIGS. 147 to 150) and the second validity period (FIGS. 151 to 155), "gauge image" is used. It is desirable that the integrated image IG smaller than the first valid period is displayed in the second valid period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized" appears.

Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 147 to 155, in the first valid period (FIG. 147 to 150), if there is no operation reception, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, "" It ends when it reaches 0 "), but in the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155), if there is no operation reception, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It is terminated in the state of being. That is, if the time (set time) set for the valid period is long, the tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, "" By giving the possibility that the effective period may end even if it does not become 0 "), it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, when the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the precursor effect is being performed (first valid period), the precursor is present. When the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced while the effect is not performed or the precursor effect is performed but at least while the precursor effect is performed (second effective). The image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG is different depending on the period). In this case, the modes of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. As illustrated in FIGS. 154 and 155, "the precursory effect is performed, but at least the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced while the precursory effect is being performed" is the gauge image over the entire valid period. It means that the display area of GG is not reduced.

In this regard, according to the above-mentioned example, in the first valid period (FIGS. 147 to 150), the specific image TG is displayed, and the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. In the second valid period (FIGS. 152 to 155), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display) is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. The target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first validity period, it is possible to make the validity period look longer by the amount that the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the validity period, and in the second validity period. By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to make it appear that the valid period ends earlier than expected by the player and maintain a sense of tension. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in the second effective period, a large amount of the display area (at least more than half of the maximum value) of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left at the end of the effective period. It is desirable to do so.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced every unit time during the first valid period (FIGS. 147 to 150). However, in the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155), the display area is not reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced in both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first valid period, whereas the first mode is in the second valid period. It is designed to be displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above-mentioned example, although the button image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decorative image SSG). Of the integrated image IG, when the button image BMG is dynamically displayed, the gauge image GG is in a decreasing state and the gauge image GG is not decreasing. I am trying to have. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, it is preferable as the integrated image IG that the operation reception is permitted by dynamically displaying the button image BMG. You will be able to suggest.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, only when the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb are displayed in the normal button image BMGa, "the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characteristic. It is possible to display the "display mode provided". Further, when the normal button image BMGa is displayed, "a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized" may be displayed, and "gauge image (predetermined image)" may be displayed. ) The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a mode (normal mode) that appears even when the special button image BMGb is displayed without displaying "a display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized". I made it. Therefore, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest when the normal button image BMGa, which has a lower expectation than the special button image BMGb, is displayed.

In particular, in the second valid period shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. However, only one aspect is displayed. That is, in this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed even though the remaining time suggestion function and the expectation degree suggestion function by the gauge image GG itself are lost and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG. The integrated image IG on which the is formed is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is statically displayed (in an area-invariant manner) in the integrated image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second valid period is not an image suggesting the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a decorative image in the integrated image IG. Therefore, its function can be significantly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first valid period, and the variety of expressions related to the expression as the gauge image GG will improve the game entertainment. Will be expected.

As for the first validity period and the second validity period, it is sufficient that the conditions for their occurrence are different from each other. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol fluctuation period. Further, the first valid period means a period during which operation acceptance regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and the second valid period is the first valid period. It means the period during which the operation acceptance for the second post-operation sound output different from the post-operation display and the second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and within each of those periods. The reactions (display change, sound output) that appear when the operation is accepted in are different from each other.

In addition, regarding the integrated image IG,
-After the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed every unit time from the time when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. The mode to be reduced (FIGS. 147 to 150) and
-The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect is started to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects (FIGS. 151 to 155)
I made it so that there was. According to such a configuration, as a result of the precursory effect, the display area has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured, and whether or not the precursory effect has been performed. When the entire gauge image GG is made visible, the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced, and the visibility of the gauge image GG is used to provide an interesting effect. You will be able to.

In particular, when the embodiment (FIGS. 151 to 155) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the entire gauge image GG is visible regardless of whether or not the precursory effect is performed is adopted. As long as the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can appear even though it is within the valid period, it becomes possible to further enhance the gaze of the gauge image GG.

It should be noted that the display area of the gauge image GG decreases when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect is started to be displayed, at least the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. In the case of adopting the mode (FIGS. 151 to 155) that is not used, in addition to the case where the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears within the valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155), the gauge image GG is used. It may be possible that the display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155) in which the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears is the second condition, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The condition for generating a specific validity period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, during the period when the button image BMG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG may be reduced or not displayed according to the passage of time. did. If the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may be hidden within the valid period. Nevertheless, regarding the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first valid period in which the display area is reduced with the passage of time, but also the display area is not reduced with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the valid period, it is expected to preferably suggest that the reception of the production is permitted.

In the above example, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) elapses without displaying the display area to be reduced according to the passage of time by the gauge image GG. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function will not be activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is enabled, the tension due to the fact that the gauge image GG does not indicate the remaining time may be completely lost. Therefore, the valid period (second valid period). With regard to), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not enabled (in any production mode). On the other hand, it is desirable that the automatic reception function is enabled (in any effect mode) for the first validity period described above.

In addition, when the button image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and the display method that pursues only the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is adopted, the method that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is adopted. Then, despite the fact that the gauge image is GG, the remaining time suggestion function is not exerted, which makes us feel a great sense of discomfort. In this respect, in the above configuration, the button image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, the pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG, or the gauge image GG itself can have a plurality of colors. Since this itself has a decorative property in the integrated image IG, it is expected to suppress a sense of discomfort when a situation appears in which the remaining time suggestion function by the gauge image GG is not exhibited. become.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, prior to the occurrence of the first valid period, the "button image BMG" has a low expectation (normal button image BMG) and a high expectation. A mode with low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image SSGa) and a mode with high expectation (special peripheral decoration image) as "peripheral decoration image SSG" and the directing effect as to which of (special button image BMGb) appears. The effect of which of SSGb) and SSGb) appears is made to appear step by step. However, such a color rendering can also be made to appear by the method described below.

FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect of stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation of the integrated image IG.

First, in FIG. 156 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced by the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0. It shows the production situation performed by the display device 1600.

In FIG. 156 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 156 (a), an operation acceptance period for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is allowed, and the effect display device 1600 The button image BMG is displayed to indicate the production status.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (b), the button-shaped image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "peripheral decorative image SGG", and is only displayed as a single image. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b), the button image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (normal button image BMGa) or a mode with a high expectation (special button image BMGb). It provides a directing effect as to whether or not the image is to be performed, and in the figure, an example is shown in which a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button image BMGb) appears. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

FIG. 156 (c) shows an effect situation in which the special button-shaped image BMGb shown in FIG. 156 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the staging progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the button image BMG (normal button image BMGa, special button image BMGb) shown in FIG. 156 (b) is valid without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG (first valid period). ) Is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 156 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c) and becomes an integrated image IG. Whether a period (first valid period) occurs, or a valid period (first valid period) occurs without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c) and without becoming an integrated image IG. You will be able to provide fun about what to do. When the valid period (first valid period) occurs without becoming the integrated image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as an image different from the button image BMG, for example, a rod shape (straight line shape). ), The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced in the depiction. In this case, it is desirable that the specific image TG is not displayed.

In addition, when the valid period occurs after the button image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG, it is expected to be stopped at the jackpot symbol than when the valid period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (ratio). Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (b), the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (b). ), And it is desirable to increase the ratio of integration with the peripheral decorative image SSG. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (c), the button-shaped image BMG has a peripheral decoration image having a low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image having a high expectation (special peripheral decoration). It provides a directing effect as to which of the images BMGb) is integrated with, and the figure illustrates a case where a highly expected aspect (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears. .. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

The peripheral decorative image BMG (normal peripheral decorative image BMGa, special peripheral decorative image BMGb) according to this example has an image type different from that shown in each of the above examples (FIGS. 144 to 156) for convenience of explanation. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button-shaped image BMG, and the peripheral decorative image BMG usually has a heart pattern (not shown). On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a checkered pattern is applied. Then, among the areas where these patterns are applied, the "area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 156 (c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated. It is the same as 144 (d).

FIG. 156 (d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 156 (c).

However, the staging progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the valid period (first valid period) without the first additional decorative HS1 being added to the integrated image IG (integrated image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 156 (c). If the mode in which the above occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Validity period (first validity period) whether a period (first validity period) occurs, or the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d) is not performed and the first additional decoration HS1 is not added. Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

When the valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IG, the valid period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is higher than in the case. Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c), FIG. 156 (b). The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of the first additional decorative HS1 being added is high. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 is intended to provide an effect as to whether the first additional decoration HS1 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may try to do it.

FIG. 156 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 156 (d).

However, the staging progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (e) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the valid period (first valid period) without the second additional decorative HS2 being added to the integrated image IG (integrated image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 156 (d). If the mode in which the above occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Validity period (first validity period) whether a period (first validity period) occurs, or the staging progress to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (e) is not performed and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added. Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

When the valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IG, the valid period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is higher than in the case. Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c), FIG. 156 (b). The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 156 (e) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of the second additional decorative HS2 added is high. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (e), the second additive decoration HS2 provides an effect as to whether the second addition decoration HS2 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may try to do it.

FIG. 156 (f) shows an effect situation in which the valid period (first valid period) occurs while the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 156 (e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 156 (f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, operation instruction images such as "press" and "down arrow" are displayed. In addition to this, the above-mentioned specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the operation reception is permitted by confirming the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. The specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from those shown in the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 144 to 156) for convenience of explanation, but is basically the same. Displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced according to the "end of the gauge image GG" which is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases. Will be done.

The specific image TG according to this example is displayed by the same method as the example shown in FIG. 145 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the valid period but is gradually displayed with the passage of time). Alternatively, the display may be performed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 146 (a method in which the entire image is displayed when the validity period starts).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (snail character) or a mode with a high expectation (frog character), which is omitted from the illustration. It provides a directing effect as to whether or not it is to be performed, and in the figure, a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed in a more promising manner when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d) than when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (c). The ratio is high, and the expectation is higher when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (e) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156 (d). It is desirable that the ratio of displaying the specific image TG is high. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide a directing effect as to how much the operation-related image can be developed into a highly expected aspect before the valid period occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment related to the operation in a state where the valid period has not yet occurred. In addition, while the operation-related images (button image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) suggest the degree of expectation until the validity period occurs, after the validity period occurs. , Since the degree of expectation is further suggested by another image (specific image TG), it is possible to preferably improve the interest over the period from before the valid period to after it occurs. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 156, the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 156 (b) to FIG. 156 (c) and the production progresses from FIG. 156 (c) to FIG. 156 (d). At the timing of whether or not to proceed, and the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 156 (d) to FIG. 156 (e), operation-related images (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) are displayed. You may hide it once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is necessary to provide the fun of whether the effect has progressed or the validity period has expired. Will be able to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 156, the button image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period at the stage before the validity period occurs, but the mode is different from this. It may be displayed as (blinking, translucent, etc.).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 156, it is desirable that the time required to gradually suggest the degree of expectation by the operation-related image before the occurrence of the valid period is longer than the set time for the valid period. ..

By the way, the sword decoration body 5001 according to this embodiment has a "handle portion 5012" that can move (moves up and down) with respect to the sheath portion 5020 and a "handle portion 5012" that can move (moves up and down) with respect to the handle portion 5012. As mentioned above, the two operation receiving portions with the "button 5014" are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a valid period (operation reception effect) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 is generated, the valid period (operation) is generated. In the reception production), both the "pattern image TMG" that imitates the pattern portion 5012 and the "button image BMG" that imitates the pattern button 5014 are displayed. During the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is not allowed, and the operation reception is given to the handle button 5014 (operation reception effect). ), The operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is not allowed.

In such a configuration, when the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 occurs, is the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 permitted, or the operation reception for the handle button 5014. Will be able to make it difficult to recognize if is allowed. That is, when the operation is accepted during the valid period when the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, after the operation is performed, the operation is accepted during the valid period when the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. The rate of appearance of a mode suggesting that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a display (or a mode suggesting that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a sound output after operation) is high. The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, while it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted, the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted. When the player becomes aware of the above, the handle portion 5012 is operated in an uplifting feeling, and the game entertainment can be significantly improved.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the handle portion 5012 (the light emitting portion of the handle portion 5012) is not only made to emit light. , The handle button 5014 (light emitting portion of the handle button 5014) on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light. That is, in this case, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which both the "pattern image TMG" imitating the pattern part 5012 and the "button image BMG" imitating the pattern button 5014 are displayed, the pattern part 5012 Even if the handle button 5014 is directly visually observed, it is difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is provided with the operation opportunity. In such a situation, the player recognizes that the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted, so that the operation for the handle portion 5012 is performed in an uplifting feeling, and the game is enjoyed. Can be significantly improved.

That is, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the handle portion can be obtained by directly visually observing the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 or by looking at the effect display device 1600 for a while. It is difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given to the 5012 or the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. At least for those who have played the pachinko machine 1 for the first time (beginners) and those who are not familiar with complicated production specifications (elderly people, etc.), an operation opportunity is given to either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "valid period in which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity" is generated in this way. It is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity within the valid period, but it can be recognized if a certain amount of time is required. Then, the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed respectively.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the "pattern copy image TMG" that imitates the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014. Both the "button image BMG" and the "button image BMG" are displayed respectively, but among those images, the "pattern image TMG" on the side where operation reception is permitted is dynamically displayed, but the operation reception is performed. The "button image BMG" on the side where is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. The "dynamic display" here means, for example, a display depicting the displacement of the operation receiving portion within the movable range (in the case of the handle portion 5012, the appearance of operating (moving up and down) with respect to the sheath portion 5020). It corresponds to the depicted display, and in the case of the handle button 5014, it corresponds to the display depicting the state of operation (up and down movement) with respect to the handle portion 5012).

Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity within the valid period. However, when a predetermined time that can be recognized as a dynamic display (moving image) has elapsed, the behavior during operation appears as a dynamic display in the pattern image TMG, but the behavior during operation is displayed in the button image BMG. Since it becomes noticed that is not appearing as a dynamic display, it becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity. Then, when the player recognizes that the operation reception is permitted for the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) on the side with high expectation, the operation for the handle portion 5012 is performed in an uplifting feeling. Therefore, it will be possible to significantly improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "pattern image TMG" and the "button image BMG" are displayed during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity. Also, by displaying those images as an "integrated image" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of them, the improvement of the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. I am trying to plan. The functions and modification examples of such an integrated image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144 to 156 is displayed so as to further display (include) the "pattern image TMG" in addition to the "button image BMG". good.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button image BMG" and the "pattern image TMG" are displayed as a "composite image HMG" that imitates at least a part of the sword decoration 5001. The "composite image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated image IG" integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of the “integrated image IG” displayed when the operation reception effect (valid period) is generated for the handle portion 5012.

As shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 is generated. In the case of making the effect display device 1600, in the effect display device 1600, the "pattern image TMG" imitating the pattern portion 5012 is changed to the "composite image HMG" integrated with the "button image BMG", and then the "composite image HMG" is used. "Image HMG" is displayed as an integrated image IGe to IGH integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. In the examples shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), "pattern image TMG", "button image BMG", and "peripheral decoration image SSG" are not individually prepared as image data, and they are not prepared individually. It is displayed as one integrated image data (integrated image IGe to IGH). Further, when the integrated images IGe to IGH are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "push" and "lower left arrow" are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, "relatively". A plurality of production modes including "first production mode with low expectation" and "second production mode with relatively high expectation" are prepared, and these productions are based on the result of the jackpot judgment (production judgment). It is intended to carry out any of the embodiments. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d),
The mode (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 157 (b) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGe) shown in FIG. 157 (a) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When appears, the appearance rate of "the second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGg) shown in FIG. 157 (c) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 157 (b) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When appears, the appearance rate of "the second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGh) shown in FIG. 157 (d) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGg) shown in FIG. 157 (c) in the specific operation reception effect (valid period). Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (directing judgment), so that the relationship that the appearance ratio of the "second production mode with relatively high expectation" is higher as the post-operation effect is established when One of the simulated images IGe to IGf is displayed.

It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated image IGe to IGH. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the valid period only by preparing at least two modes. Further, an embodiment different from the above four embodiments (integrated image IGe to IGH) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared embodiments may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operating means (sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery thereof.
-Integration that displays the image (pattern image TMG) that imitates the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) as an integrated image IGe to IGH integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image. Image display means and
-As an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) when an operation is performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed. The integrated image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated image IGe to IGH).

The details of the "integrated image" shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d) will be described separately for each of these modes (integrated image IGe to IGH).

First, the "integrated image IGe" shown in FIG. 157 (a) has a pattern image TMGe, a button image BMGe (composite image HMGe), and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. It is composed of. However, in the "integrated image IGe", the pattern image TMGe and the button image BMGe (composite image HMGe) are "an image of the pattern portion 5012 to which an operation opportunity is given" and "an image". While the "image of the pattern button 5014 that is not the target to which the operation opportunity is given" is displayed as an integrated image, the peripheral decoration image SSGe is usually the "target to which the operation opportunity is given". The peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle portion 5012 is not modeled. In the normal peripheral decorative image SSGe according to this example, a part of the peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) is modeled. Most of the image SSGe decorates the periphery of the patterned image TMGe (composite image HMGe) as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the effect display device 1600. There is.

In the "integrated image IGe" shown in FIG. 157 (a), the peripheral decorative image SSGa is usually expressed as a treasure box containing some treasures including the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe). As described above, these "treasure" and "treasure box" have a shape different from that of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

In this respect, in the "integrated image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum value display area when the operation is not accepted within the valid period. It is displayed so that it decreases with the passage of time until it reaches the display area of.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 157 (a), a section image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is provided. .. The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as a section image KG, and a "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the necklace. However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the “integrated image IGe” is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the handle portion to be operated. In the first aspect, the 5012 is made to emit light (for example, emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the "integrated image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 157 (a))). Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the fifth aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGe in the "integrated image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 157 (a)). ) Is used to emit light. Here, the same color is used, but the colors may be different from those of the first aspect and the fifth aspect.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGf" shown in FIG. 157 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGe", and the pattern image TMGf and the button image BMGf ( The composite image HMGf) and the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated image IGf", there is no shape change in the pattern image TMGf and the button image BMGf (composite image HMGf). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" and the treasure box itself are displayed as the same, but the amount and type of treasure contained therein is increasing. It is displayed as "decorative image SSGf". The amount and types of treasures are increasing, and necklaces, treasure swords, and cups are also displayed in the case of "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and are common.

Further, in the "integrated image IGf" shown in FIG. 157 (b), as the amount and type of treasure increase, the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG The shape has changed, so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is different. According to such a configuration, the shape of the gauge image GG as the display target area is different (not similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes having different expectations is displayed, so that the display area is large. It becomes difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left as it is reduced, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGf" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is set. In the second aspect, the unit 5012 is made to emit light (for example, emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the “integrated image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 157 (b))). Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the sixth aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGf in the “integrated image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 157 (b)”. ) Is used to emit light. Here, the same color is used, but the second aspect and the sixth aspect may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGg" shown in FIG. 157 (c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGe", and the pattern image TMGg and the button image BMGg (composite image). The image HMGg) and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated image IGg", there is no change in shape between the pattern image TMGg and the button image BMGg (composite image HMGg). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the treasure itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSG", but the treasure box (shape) for storing them is different. It is displayed as "image SSGg".

However, the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
"The peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle portion 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, and is virtual in the display effect on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the pattern image TMGg (composite image HMGg) is decorated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGg" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is used. In the third aspect, the unit 5012 is made to emit light (in FIG. 157 (c), for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGg in the “integrated image IGg” (for example, “red”)). Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the seventh aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGg in the “integrated image IGg” (for example, “red” in FIG. 157 (c)”. ) Is used to emit light. Here, the same color is used, but the third aspect and the seventh aspect may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGH" shown in FIG. 157 (d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGe", and the pattern image TMGh and the button image BMGh (composite image). The image HMGh) and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated image IGh", there is no shape change in the pattern image TMGh and the button image BMGh (composite image HMGh). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the amount and type of treasure are increased and the treasure box (shape) for storing them is also different from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSG". It is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGh".

Further, in the "integrated image IGH" according to this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, changes as the amount and type of treasure increase. This makes the display mode of the gauge image GG different.

However, the "third special peripheral decoration image SSGh" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" in the following points.
"The peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle portion 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, and is virtual in the display effect on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the pattern image TMGh (composite image HMGh) is decorated.

That is, in the "integrated image IGh (FIG. 157 (d))", a part (treasure) in the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGf (FIG. 157 (b))". ) And a part (treasure box) in the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGg (FIG. 157 (c))" is displayed as an image combined. There is.

On the other hand, since the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decorative image SSG, the case where the "integrated image IGe (FIG. 157 (a))" appears and the case where "integrated" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period) for the same post-operation effect when the image IGH (FIG. 157 (d)) appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGH" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is set. In the fourth aspect, the unit 5012 is made to emit light (for example, in the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the “integrated image IGH” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 157 (d))). .. Further, the pattern button 5014, which is not the operation target, also emits light in the eighth aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGh in the "integrated image IGH" (in FIG. 157 (d), for example, "rainbow color". ”) To emit light). Here, the same color is used, but the fourth aspect and the eighth aspect may be different colors.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in any of the embodiments. However, as the amount and type of treasure change (Fig. 157 (b), (d)), or as the treasure box changes (Fig. 157 (c), (d)), the pattern image The shapes of the TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) may be different.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), in each embodiment, the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in different colors, but the same color. It may be displayed with.

When displaying the button-shaped image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014, in the examples shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the peripheral decoration images SSGa and b are integrated and displayed with the button-shaped image BMG. I tried to do it. In this regard, also in the examples shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), the button imitation image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 is displayed, but this is not displayed for the peripheral decoration images SSGa and b. .. That is, because the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the effect display device 1600, the case of the example shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 157 and FIG. 157 ( It is possible to display the image as a completely different image from the cases shown in a) to (d), which makes it possible to provide various effects.

In addition, among the configurations according to the examples shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), the portions having the same functions as the examples shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) are shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to (d). Needless to say, the same effects as the various effects described above are exhibited with reference to d). Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), the above-mentioned modified examples and staging examples with respect to the examples shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) can be appropriately adopted.

Further, even in the valid period in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the embodiment shown in FIG. 157, as in the valid period in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the embodiment shown in FIG. 144, the above-mentioned is described. The "specific image TG" is displayed.

However, in the valid period (plural valid periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144, the type of the valid period (type as post-operation display or post-operation sound output, and precursor effect) Depending on the type, etc.), the "specific image TG" may be displayed or the "specific image TG" may not be displayed, whereas the integrated image is shown in FIG. 157. In the valid period (multiple valid periods) in which the IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is displayed regardless of the type of the valid period (type as post-operation display, post-operation sound output, type of precursor effect, etc.). It is always displayed.

That is, during the valid period (plural valid periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the embodiment shown in FIG. 157, the “state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 is displayed. The validity period generated as an effect is not included. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much time is left. When displaying the "specific image TG", it is not always necessary to display the gauge image GG.

The "specific image TG" when the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 157 may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 145, or may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 146. You may try to do it.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 157, an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, thereby moving from the specific position to the original position. The operation (sword operation) is allowed. However, when giving an operation opportunity to the handle portion 5012, it is not always necessary to move the handle portion 5012 from the original position to a specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is in the in-situ position, whereby a movement operation (sword pulling operation) from the in-situ position to a specific position may be permitted.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of an effect (operation reception effect) when the integrated image IG is displayed in the embodiment shown in FIG. 157.

FIG. 158 (a) shows the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is based on the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. In the staging situation performed in, the staging display device 1600 shows the staging situation in which the display related to the precursor staging (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 147 to 150. When the same effect pattern is used, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and the effective period shown in FIG. 158 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern, respectively. Alternatively, only one of these valid periods (operation reception effect) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination.

The precursor effect (specific display TH3) related to this example is also executed in a form that straddles before and after the occurrence timing of the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed. The production reception) is not allowed and the validity period has not occurred.

In this respect, the precursory effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by the display of the integrated image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid portion of the treasure box). At the time shown in FIG. 148 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decorative image SSG of the integrated image IG is displayed as a "closed mode", whereby the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe) is displayed. Some treasures including the above are not displayed as an image (by the specific display TH3 which is the lid part of the treasure box), and are in a state where they cannot be visually recognized (or are in a state where it is difficult to see).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decorative image SSG of the integrated image IG has a relatively low expectation as shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b). And, in which of the mode with relatively high expectation shown in FIGS. 157 (c) and 157 (d) is displayed, the effectability is provided, and in the figure, the degree of expectation is shown. The case where it is displayed in a low mode (FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). In addition, although the explanation is omitted when the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation, the subsequent production progress in the same manner as "when the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation" explained below. Will be done.

In FIG. 158 (b), as the precursory effect shown in FIG. 158 (a) progresses (the area where the lid portion of the treasure box (specific display TH3) is opened and is displayed overlapping with the “treasure” is the time. (As it shrinks with the passage of time), in "Treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid part of the treasure box (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and that part is displayed in a good visual condition. Is shown.

That is, when the precursory effect shown in FIG. 158 (a) progresses, a specific timing arrives and an effective period for the handle portion 5012 is generated. When the effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the handle portion 5012 to be operated starts moving to the "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012" which is the operation target and the "handle button 5014" which is not the operation target start emitting light in a predetermined mode (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursory effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 158 (a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the integrated image IG has a mode in which the lid portion (specific display TH3) of the treasure box is opened from the "closed mode (fully closed)". It is in a state of describing the change to "(fully open)". Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 158 (b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is "precursor effect (specific display TH3) depicted (expressed) as if it is in front of the gauge image (predetermined image) TG. However, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (progressed). ) Is in the situation. In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the precursor staging (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

According to such a configuration, the precursory effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period is generated is , At least a part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the precursory effect (specific display TH3). That is, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated image IG (pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the valid period. Therefore, it is interesting to know which is the degree of expectation (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the pattern image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG. It will be possible to maintain it for a predetermined time after the validity period starts.

That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (b), the "treasure" which is the content of the treasure box is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are small (the mode in which the expectation is relatively low as shown in FIG. 157 (a)). There are at least cases where the amount and type are large (the mode with relatively high expectation shown in FIG. 157 (b)), and in any of these modes. It provides a directing effect as to whether it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), it is recognizable that the "treasure", which is the contents of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode having a large amount and type (a mode with high expectation). ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the type in which the "specific image TG" is displayed in the first place when the valid period starts ( It is difficult to distinguish whether it is a type (see FIG. 146) or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and gradually appears after that (see FIG. 145). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to detect that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, the type shown in FIG. 146 is used. When adopted, it can be said that it is particularly effective to execute the precursory effect in the above-mentioned manner in order to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. The case where "treasure" is displayed in a mode with low expectation is omitted from the explanation, but it is the same as "when" treasure "is displayed in a mode with high expectation" explained below. Subsequent production progress will be carried out.

FIG. 158 (c) overlaps with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of further progress of the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 158 (b). It shows a situation where the part (the part where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the "treasure") has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated image IG is displayed. It will be possible to provide a single effect from the time until the end of the game, and it will be possible to improve the taste of the game.

As shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the entire treasure of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visually good, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of the "specific image TG" has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area larger than the actual display area applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is large. It is left behind, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, when the precursor effect (the effect of opening the lid portion which is the specific display TH) is completed, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced, which suppresses the deterioration of the game entertainment. Can be expected. The "specific image TG" according to this example is displayed as an image expressing "light" displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), the pattern image TMG of the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (a display depicting how the pattern portion 5012 is displaced within its movable range). However, as described above, the button image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display depicting how the handle button 5014 is displaced within its movable range).

In FIG. 158 (d), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period (set time) ends (or). An example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 (immediately before the end of the valid period) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 158 (d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely allowed in time, but the operation reception is already in the state where the screen is displayed. It may be unacceptable. However, in this case, at that time point, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 are put into a state in which each light emission has already been completed. In this case, images such as "push in!" And "lower left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, at least a part (or all of them) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the end of the valid period.

When the valid period ends, both the light emission of the handle portion 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are terminated. In this regard, during the valid period in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed are displayed even if the player does not perform the operation within the period. It is done (see FIG. 158 (e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (FIGS. 147 (e), (f), etc.) that functions within the first validity period described above.

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player operates immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer allowed), the display after the operation is displayed. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the sound output after the operation is performed, the display and the operation after the operation are performed according to the operation reception caused by the operation by the player in time. It will be possible to make it appear as if the wake output has started. In particular, when the precursory effect (preliminary display) is performed in such an manner, the gauge image (predetermined) is reached when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is visually good. Image) The display area of GG has already decreased, and the displacement of "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation by the player will not be in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the display after the operation is displayed with the "specific image TG" displayed. It can be said that it is effective to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by outputting the sound after the operation. Further, in this example, the handle button 5014 on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is set to the light emitting state according to the occurrence of the valid period, and the operation opportunity is given to either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014. I try to make it difficult to recognize. That is, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation within the valid period will not be in time, it can be said that it is effective in suppressing the deterioration of the game entertainment when the operation is not in time.

Regarding the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 158, there are cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 145 and cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 146. It may be applied to any of the above.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 158, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed on a separate layer, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 147. It was decided to realize the progress of the production in the aspect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 158 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, the embodiment (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 157 (b) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 158, first, when the treasure box that is a part of the integrated image IG is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the treasure box is described as "a mode with high expectation" and "a mode with high expectation". The first effectability as to which of the "low-expected aspects" is displayed will be provided. In addition, after the validity period has occurred, the treasure box of the integrated image IG is gradually opened, and the "treasure" is either "highly expected" or "lowly expected". A second effect on what is displayed in is provided. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested by the stepwise effect (first effect, second effect) performed in a form straddling the occurrence of the effect period, so that the effect period occurs. It is expected that the game entertainment in the period from the front to the post-occurrence will be suitably improved.

In addition, since it was decided to realize such a stepwise effect by depiction of the integrated image IG itself (depiction of the lid of the treasure box), another image (specific display TH shown in FIG. 147). By being disturbed by (such as), it is less stressful than when the visibility of the integrated image IG is deprived, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. However, also in the example shown in FIG. 158, the precursory effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 149. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 149, the precursory effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 158.

In FIG. 158, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the modeled image of the operation target is integrated with the “peripheral decorative image (first decorative image)” including the display target area of the gauge image. Regarding the case of displaying as a simulated image, an example (first operation acceptance allowable period) related to the progress of the production was explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 159 and 160, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the image of the operation target is referred to as the "peripheral decorative image including the display target area of the gauge image (first decorative image)." In the case of displaying as "an image that is not integrated with", an example (second operation acceptance allowable period) related to the progress of the production will be described. The example shown in FIG. 158 and the example shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 do not necessarily give an operation opportunity to the same operation target, but since an operation opportunity is given to the same operation target. If there is, it is desirable that the image itself that imitates the operation target is displayed as the same image (including similar figures).

Here, as an embodiment in which the image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image", for example, the image of the operation target is "periphery". A mode in which the image is displayed as a single image that is not integrated with the decorative image in the first place, or an image that imitates the operation target is displayed as an image that is integrated with the peripheral decorative image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image. It is possible to adopt the mode to be used. According to such a configuration, when the validity period occurs, the gauge image is displayed in the image when the image of the operation target is displayed as one image, and the operation target is imitated. When the image is displayed as one image, the gauge image may not be displayed in the image, so that the tension during the valid period can be suitably maintained.

In the example described below, a display example is shown in which the modeled image of the operation target is displayed as "an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image".

First, in FIG. 159 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed in a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0. In the effect situation performed by the device 1600, the effect state in which the display related to the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started on the effect display device 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and 158. When the same effect pattern is used, it may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in one effect pattern, or any of the valid periods (operation reception effect) based on the result of the effect determination. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern.

In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 159 (a) and 159 (b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 158 (a) and 158 (b), and the description of the same configuration is omitted. However, the "treasure (second decorative image)", which is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 159 (b), is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 158 (b). The content is different from the "treasure (first decorative image)". That is, as described above, the "image that imitates the operation target" according to this example is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image". Regarding the "peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image", the part that is displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "peripheral decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image" and the part that is displayed as a different image are It has become something.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the point that the "treasure (second decorative image)" of the peripheral decorative image SSG according to this example includes the "Holy Grail" is shown in FIG. 158. It is the same as the "treasure (first decorative image)" shown. However, in the "treasure" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the "gold bar" and the "necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. An image of a necklace packed with gold coins is displayed. The treasure chest shown in FIG. 159 (c) is the same as the treasure chest shown in FIG. 158 (c), and is also the same in that the treasure chest is displayed in any of the plurality of embodiments shown in FIG. 157.

According to such a configuration, even if there is no portion where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the "treasure (peripheral decorative image SSG)" (FIG. 159 (c)). The gauge image GG will no longer be displayed in the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". That is, in this case, while the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" is gradually improved in visibility by the specific display TH3, even if an attempt is made to find the gauge image GG, it cannot be found. You will be able to adequately maintain a sense of tension about how much time is left.

In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The same image (such as the Holy Grail) as in the case (FIG. 157 (c)) is intentionally displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to make the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, appear to be displayed somewhere, whereby the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, can be displayed. After looking for it, when you realize that this is not displayed anywhere, you will be in a situation where a certain amount of time has already passed since the expiration date, so you will feel nervous during the validity period. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to 159 (d), the integrated image IG itself in which the pattern image TMG imitating the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG is a gauge image. Not only the display target area of the above is not provided, but also the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed and it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left in the valid period, so that the tension during the valid period can be suitably maintained. The display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image different from the integrated image IG, and the display area is reduced with the passage of time. You may do so.

FIG. 159 (d) shows an example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has elapsed and the valid period is about to end. As mentioned above, the gauge image is not displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), it is not suggested that the validity period is about to end, and the player side is in the situation even if the image is visually observed. I can't recognize that there is.

However, even during the valid period of this example, in the pattern image TMG that is the operation target, a display depicting how the handle portion 5012 reciprocates within its movable range (reciprocating movement from the original position to a specific position). (Dynamic display) is being performed. In this respect, the valid period of this example is terminated when the reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N does not have to be an integer) after the period occurs. By keeping an eye on the dynamic display by the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much time is left as the valid period (how many reciprocating movements).

Even during the valid period of this example, as shown in FIGS. 159 (c) and 159 (d), in the button image BMG, a display (movement) depicting how the handle button 5014 reciprocates within its movable range is displayed (movement). (Display) is not performed. In this respect, when the operation receiving unit (here, the handle button 5014) corresponding to the image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated during the valid period when the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed. However, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output may be performed according to the operation reception.

That is, during the valid period of this example, the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, so that the player operates in a hurry, and as a result, the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed. Since it is assumed that there is a high possibility of operating, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated, unlike the case shown in FIG. 158, the display and operation after the operation are performed. It is desirable to output the after-sound in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Examples of the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case include a display such as "press the handle portion instead of the handle button!" And sound output. Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed in response to the operation, the valid period is terminated or the set time is set. It is desirable that the dynamic display of the patterned image TMG is continued without being stopped without being reset. When the handle portion 5012 is operated within the continuous valid period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are performed accordingly (see FIG. 160 (h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated (for example, "the handle part, not the handle button". It goes without saying that the content is different from the content such as "Push in!"). However, "within the valid period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the button image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, and the pattern image TMG that is dynamically displayed is supported. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output when the operation receiving unit (handle part 5012) is operated (for example, "Congratulations!") "And" Button image that is not dynamically displayed within the valid period. After the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the post-operation display when the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated. It is desirable to make the post-operation sound output (for example, "I'm glad I was in time, congratulations!") And the content different from each other in order to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 160 (e) shows an example of an image that appears in the effect display device 1600 when the operation reception is not performed within the time (set time) set for the valid period of this example.

That is, in the valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIGS. 159 (d) and (e)), the operation is accepted for the handle portion 5012 within the valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when it was done are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed in the integrated image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as another image, so that the player side can see. Even if there is an intention to operate it, it may not be possible to operate it and the valid period may end, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period ends without any operation by the player, while the specific conditions (for example, the symbol stop or not reached 10 seconds before the symbol stop) are not satisfied. , The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (here, the handle portion 5012) to which the operation opportunity is given within the valid period, and when the operation for the operation means is accepted, this is given. Based on the above, the above valid period can be regenerated. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period is generated from the time of the end.

According to such a configuration, even when the valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player is shown in FIG. 160 (h). It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 160 (e), when the player operates the handle portion 5012, the valid period starts based on the fact that the operation is accepted. (Fig. 160 (f), (g)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), FIGS. 160 (e), and (g). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed in the above-described manner (FIG. 160 (h). reference).

When the operation is accepted in the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 160 (e), the images shown in FIGS. 160 (f) and 160 (g) are displayed after the operation (FIGS. 159 (b) and (g). The same as the image shown in c)) will appear in sequence. Such an image is an image display that is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the valid period (FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), FIGS. 159 (f), (g), etc.). Is different. Further, the post-operation sound output executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 160 (e) is also the valid period (FIGS. 159 (b) to (d) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation in 160 (f), (g), etc.).

Since the specific image TG is not displayed in the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, it is not always necessary to perform the precursor effect (dynamic display by the specific display TH3) in generating the valid period. May be good. For example, when a predetermined condition for allowing an operation reception for a predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 159 (c) appears. After that, the display may be advanced in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG are displayed as one image (composite image HMG), but these images are displayed as separate images. It may be displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the "button image BMG" and the "pattern image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite image HMG) including both of the images. The "composite image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated image IG" integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the periphery thereof. However, the "button image BMG" and the "pattern image TMG" are displayed as separate images, and at least one of the images is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery thereof. It may be displayed as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the "button image BMG" is displayed as a single separate image, the "pattern image" is displayed. Although both "TMG" and "button image BMG" are displayed at the same time, "pattern image TMG" can be made more conspicuous, and operations corresponding to "pattern image TMG" can be performed. It becomes possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving portion (handle portion 5012) should be operated. At this time, the "pattern image TMG" in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, while the "button image BMG" displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. The same applies to configurations and other examples.

Further, during the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 158, both the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed, but the image on the side that gives the operation opportunity (here, the pattern). It is also possible to display only the image TMG).

Further, it is desirable that the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is generated assuming that a set time longer than the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 158 is set. In this case, the mode in which the image (here, the pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 158 (speed of reciprocating motion, etc.) is shown in FIGS. 159 and 160. It is desirable that the mode (here, the pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed (such as the speed of reciprocating motion) within the indicated valid period (operation reception effect). According to such a configuration, even if the gauge image GG is not displayed, by confirming "the state of the dynamic display of the image" based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed, there is a margin. You will be prompted to operate.

In the example shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be used as a “treasure” image, and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, when the operation receiving unit corresponding to the image that is not dynamically displayed is referred to as the "first operation receiving unit", in the examples shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, the operation receiving unit is dynamically displayed. The operation receiving unit corresponding to the image may be the "first operation receiving unit". However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 158, when the dynamically displayed operation receiving unit is referred to as the "second operation receiving unit", in the examples shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, the dynamically displayed image is not displayed. It is desirable that the operation receiving unit corresponding to the above is a "third operation receiving unit" different from the "second operation receiving unit". According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to generate two types of operation reception effects in such a manner that the display relationship related to the three operation targets (operation receiving units) slides. , You will be able to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 does not necessarily have to occur during the execution period of the symbol change. For example, it may be a period generated by using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of a symbol change, or a "period during which the big hit game is not executed, such as a period before the big hit game is started". It may occur in ".

Further, in the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, the decorative symbol SZ displayed up to that point is hidden as in the valid period in the examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 155. Or, it may be made difficult to see, so that it is easy to notice that the gauge image is not displayed in a special effect state.

As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 158 (c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods having different generation conditions may be prepared. In this case, it is not necessary to make the display progress shown in FIG. 158 in all of those valid periods, and it is sufficient that the display progress shown in FIG. 158 is made in at least one valid period.

As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 159 (c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods having different generation conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 may not be made during all of these valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 may be made during at least one valid period.

In the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, unlike the case of the valid period shown in FIG. It may be made displayable only in an embodiment.

The validity period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is not displayed can be generated only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the operation opportunity is given to the other. When it is given, a valid period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is displayed may occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the valid period (valid period shown in FIGS. 151 to 153) in which the integrated image in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is displayed and the gauge image are displayed. The valid period (valid period shown in FIGS. 159 and 160) in which the integrated image in which the display target area of the GG is not provided is displayed can be generated as one of the plurality of types of valid periods. There is. In this regard, during these valid periods (FIGS. 151 to 153, 159, 160), when the operation by the player is not accepted, or when the operation is accepted, in order to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. During the valid period (FIGS. 147 to 150, 158), the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced in size with the passage of time without performing the same post-operation effect (without the automatic button function). In order to maintain the optimum operation, it is desirable that when the operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is performed (with an automatic button function).

In this respect, the valid period in which the integrated image is displayed (the valid period shown in FIGS. 151 to 153) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and the integrated area in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is not provided in the first place. When an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the valid period in which the image is displayed (valid period shown in FIGS. 159 and 160), a change (display) according to the operation reception is made. It is desirable that the integrated image is not hidden but displayed at the time when the execution is started (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the change and the light emission of the lamp). It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated image be continued. This makes it possible to make people feel anxious about whether the production was properly accepted while the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained more appropriately. Become so.

In this case, it should be noted that the display mode (for example, color) of the image before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) according to the operation reception occurs and after the change occurs. (Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the image due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or a lamp emission) occurs. On the other hand, during the valid period (FIGS. 147 to 150, 158) in which the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced with the passage of time, the change according to the operation reception by the operation by the player (display change or change). , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as lamp emission), the integrated image (both the image and the gauge image) in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs. ) May be hidden, or as in the above case, the integrated image is not hidden and changes according to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, etc.) are displayed while the integrated image is displayed. It may be generated.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time" in this way, the imitation image of the operation means to be operated is to be displayed. It is desirable to display the image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With such a configuration, although the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

[Integrated image, pre-validation effect, image disappearance effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (notice effect, etc.) is selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect of the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol staging based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It is desirable not to do so or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one of the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the reception is accepted. The permissible state (valid period) itself has poor staging, and there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable until the post-operation staging is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when the acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the operation opportunity is given occurs, the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is given. By displaying the modeled image as an integrated image (see FIG. 144) integrated with the peripheral decorative image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, it is possible to enjoy the game until the post-operation effect is executed. I try to suppress the decline. For such an integrated image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable to display it in both the reception effect (valid period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. Further, it is desirable to replace each of the above-mentioned production examples with one of the integrated images described below to realize the display mode of the illustrated image in order to improve the entertainment of the game. ..

The "integrated image" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image, A display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) having different expectations are prepared, and the same applies to the fact that they are displayed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception allowable state occurs, the reception allowable sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted is generated. It is designed to output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound that has already been accepted (valid period).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, a plurality of acceptance allowance states including the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state are prepared as the acceptance allowance state (valid period). There is. Here, the first acceptance allowable state can occur when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), but the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Of these, an effective period that cannot occur in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (or any fluctuation pattern among low expected fluctuation patterns) (based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied in the staging judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). Validity period to be generated). Further, in the second acceptance allowable state, a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). The second condition, which is different from the first condition in the staging judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment, is the valid period that can occur in either case (or at least one of those fluctuation patterns). The validity period that occurs based on the establishment).

The "integrated image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first acceptance allowable state and the second acceptance acceptance state. Here, since it is assumed that both the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state occur as a reception allowable state in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410). The "integrated image" displayed in the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance acceptance state is an image in which the same operation means (operation button 410) is imitated.

However, among the plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image", the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)) is the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state. Of these, it is possible to display only in the first reception allowable state, and in the second reception allowable state, it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c)). ing. In the first acceptance allowable state, it is determined which of the plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) including the special mode is to display the "integrated image" based on the result of the jackpot judgment. This is done, and the "integrated image" is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of this determination. Regarding which of the plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) not including the special mode is to display the "integrated image" based on the result of the jackpot determination even in the second reception allowable state. The determination may be made, and the "integrated image" may be displayed in an manner corresponding to the result of the determination.

In such a configuration, in the first acceptance allowable state, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output, and in the second acceptance allowable state, the acceptance allowable sound is output. One type of reception permissible sound (third reception permissible sound) is output. Here, the first permissible sound and the third permissible sound are output as sound effects such as "Pickin!", And may be output as the same sound or different from each other. It may be output as sound. On the other hand, the second allowable sound is output as a message sound such as "press!". However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and if it is a sound different from the first permissible sound and is output over different output times, two types of acceptance permissible sounds. It is possible for the player to preferably recognize that the sound (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) is being output.

Here, it has been described above that the "integrated image" can be displayed even in a mode different from the special mode (a mode having a relatively low expectation) in the first reception allowable state. Even in this case, two types of acceptable reception sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. That is, in this case, when the reception allowable state occurs (the integrated image is displayed), if only one type of reception allowable sound is output, the special mode is not displayed as the "integrated image" and the special mode is used. Will be displayed in different modes, but when two types of acceptable reception sounds are output, the special mode is displayed as an "integrated image" and the mode different from the special mode is displayed. There will be.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated image" is displayed in a special mode based on which mode the reception permissible sound is output, and the reception permissible. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when a condition occurs.

Further, when the "integrated image" is displayed in the first reception allowable state or the second reception allowable state, the preceding effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated image is executed. Is displayed (displayed in a state where it is difficult to see) at least a part of the "image related to the pre-effect" in a state where such a pre-effect is executed. Then, in the integrated image, the portion overlapping with the "image related to the previous effect" is gradually reduced by gradually reducing the image, or the transmittance of the "image related to the previous effect" is gradually reduced. By increasing the height and finally hiding it, the mode (whole) becomes dew (displayed in an easily visible state) after the occurrence of the acceptance allowable state. Such a precursory effect (precursor effect) is, for example, an effect shown in FIGS. 147 (b) and (c), FIGS. 149 (c) to (f), and is executed in the same manner. You may try to do it.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start the output at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts the output later than this. ing. However, at the time when the output of the first permissible sound is started in advance, it is said that "the integrated image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize the mode". Of course, even at the time when the output of the second allowable sound is delayed, at least a part of the integrated image is displayed in such a state that the image related to the precursory effect (precursor effect) is overlapped from the front side. This makes it difficult to see. The acceptance allowable state (valid period) is generated when the execution of the precursor effect (precursor effect) is started or during the execution period, and at least when the output of the second allowable sound is started. It is in a state where it has already occurred, or it is generated when the output starts.

According to such a configuration, when there is at least a situation such as "the first permissible sound is output and the second permissible sound is not output", there are two types of acceptance permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound). Whether the first acceptance allowable state in which the second allowable sound is output occurs (or has occurred), or the second acceptance allowable state in which only one type of acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output occurs (). Or it is difficult to recognize whether it is occurring). However, when a situation such as "the output of the second permissible sound is started after the first permissible sound is output" appears, two types of acceptance permissible sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance acceptance state to be performed has occurred, and that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode.

That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize in which mode (or whether the integrated image is displayed) the integrated image is displayed.
-When shifting from "a state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (first acceptance permissible state). When,
-When there is no transition from "a state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (second acceptance permissible state). And can occur, and it becomes possible to suggest "the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode" by the mode of "transition related to the output of the reception allowable sound". Therefore, while in the "state in which only the first allowable sound of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is output", before the image related to the precursor effect (precursor effect) is hidden, It becomes possible to make people interested in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound is started, and thereby it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. As a result, if the second allowable sound is output while the image related to the precursor effect (precursor effect) is displayed, the integrated image having a special aspect is displayed (displayed). It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation, and it becomes possible to provide a staging effect such that the integrated image is gradually exposed in such an expectation.

As described above, even at the time when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a part of the integrated image is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "image related to the previous effect". Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode, it is not easy to recognize at least in which mode the integrated image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, when the output of the second allowable sound is started, the first allowable sound may be maintained in the output state, or the first allowable sound may be terminated in the output state. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance allowable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance allowable state) and the second condition (second acceptance allowable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated image is displayed without outputting any reception allowable sound (first allowable sound or second allowable sound), and the operating means (here, here) is displayed while the integrated image is displayed. , When the operation is accepted for the operation button 410), the display may change or the output sound after the operation may be generated, as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptance allowable state or the second acceptance acceptance state. good. In this case, the display change and the content of the output sound after the operation may be different depending on the type of the acceptance allowance state (first acceptance allowance state, second acceptance allowance state, third acceptance allowance state).

In other words, by displaying the integrated image without outputting any reception allowable sound, it becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp when the operation reception is permitted, which is related to the operation. You will be able to improve the taste of games. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is displayed in any of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 151 to 155. It is desirable to. According to such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" in which the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined value (0) and is integrated with the gauge image GG left. Since the image will be hidden, it will be possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension when the reception acceptance state is occurring, and it will be more suitable to improve the game entertainment related to the operation. You will be able to plan.

Alternatively, when the integrated image is displayed without outputting any reception allowable sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated image and the display target area is not even provided. May be good. As such a display method, although the operation target is different, it is as described above with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. For example, "the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the gauge image GG is displayed. The display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated image, and the same image (peripheral decoration image) as when the target area is displayed is intentionally displayed. It can be applied in the same way to the technical idea such as "to do so". Even with such a configuration, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to more preferably improve the game entertainment related to the operation. become able to.

Further, even in the reception allowable state according to this example, there are cases where operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is permitted. ) Is output in a suppressed mode, or it may be allowed to accept operations while it is in a non-output state. In this example, "outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppressed mode" includes a case where a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output at a volume of "0" (silence output). be. The “non-output state” means, for example, a case where the channel is not even assigned.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception allowable state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and a specific type of effect. There are multiple reception allowable states in which operation reception is permitted while the sound (BGM playback) is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state. The "permissible state" and "third reception permissible state" are acceptance permissible in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. It is included as one of the states, and the above-mentioned "second reception allowable state" is an operation reception in which a specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode. It is included as one of the permissible acceptance conditions.

According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction (directed sound of a specific type) is suppressed or turned into a non-output state, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode. Since it will be possible to do so, while avoiding a situation where the production is poor, the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or in a non-output state, so you can enjoy the production with even more concentration. You will be able to do it.

It should be noted that "a reception allowable state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state" is output in a non-suppressed mode. A specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) may be output in a suppressed mode, or may be in a non-output state, and then a reception allowable state may be generated, or a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) may be generated. While the BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode, the reception allowable state is generated, and while the reception allowable state is generated (or at the same time), a specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed in the suppressed mode. It may be the output of, or it may be in the non-output state. In short, it is sufficient that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state.

Further, even in the reception allowable state according to this example, when the operation is not detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted, the operation is executed in the automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In some cases, the operation may be executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, among the acceptance allowance states, the acceptance allowance state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed is as described above.
-It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, regardless of whether or not the operation is performed within the valid period.
-It means that the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the valid period regardless of the effect state (the state of the effect setting). In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special effect state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of effect states" as the effect state. In addition, if the reception allowance state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed is set to the special staging state (automatic reception mode), is the automatic reception enabled? Either may be adopted as to whether or not (for example, "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the production state", or "when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set". It may be said that "automatic reception is enabled only if"), and it has nothing to do with the configuration related to the technical features described here.

More specifically, during the demo screen (the period during which the symbol change is not executed), if the settings related to the game are possible, and even if any of those settings is selected, the acceptance acceptance status " The automatic reception is always enabled in the reception acceptance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Then, among those settings, at least when it is in a specific setting condition, the reception allowable state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the reception allowable state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed are different from each other. It is possible to occur from the beginning. The settings related to the game include settings such as volume, brightness, and probability of appearance of the effect in addition to the special effect state (automatic reception mode), and the settings related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) are not necessarily installed. It doesn't have to be a thing. When the setting related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not set in the "specific setting condition".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the acceptance allowance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the "non-automatic reception mode" are executed at least when the specific setting conditions are met. A plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared for each, but the above-mentioned "first acceptance allowance state" is included as one of the acceptance allowance states in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed. The above-mentioned "second reception allowable state" and "third reception allowable state" are included as one of the reception allowable states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed.

According to such a configuration, the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144 (d)) (the game entertainment may be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). In the state, the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate when the integrated image is displayed in a special mode with high expectations (a mode in which the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in other modes), the post-operation effect is produced. (At least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) can be generated, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. Will be able to. On the other hand, there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144 (d)) (there is a possibility that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). Since the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed in the reception acceptance state, this is suitable for the tension when the operation reception is permitted while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest when the operation is forgotten. Will be able to maintain.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the reception allowable sound is output overlaps with the reception allowable state, and the operation is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, the output state of the acceptance allowable sound can be terminated halfway (it can be made into an inaudible state).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation reception), and the "operation" can be easily recognized. It will be possible to suppress anxiety about whether the reception is being done or the operation is not being accepted yet.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the reception allowable sound is output overlaps with the reception allowable state, but when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. Even if the operation is accepted, the output state of the acceptance allowable sound may not be terminated halfway (it may be made inaudible) based on the operation acceptance, and it may be maintained. I have to. As will be described later, there are a plurality of reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle and a reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated in the middle. Is included as one of the reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle, and the above-mentioned "second reception allowable state" is the reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated in the middle. It is included as one of them.

According to such a configuration, the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144 (d)) (the game entertainment may be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). In the state, if the operation reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is being output, this will be terminated halfway. Therefore, when the integrated image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in other modes), "Is the operation accepted? You can concentrate on post-operation production such as post-operation display, post-operation output sound, change in light emission by the lamp, and production operation by the movable decorative body, without making you feel uneasy by "Is it in a state where it is not done?" It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest. On the other hand, in the second reception allowable state where there is no possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment is significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten), the reception is accepted. Even if the operation reception is done when the permissible sound is output, it is not terminated in the middle, so while suppressing the deterioration of the game entertainment, this is about the tension when operating. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation acceptance is permitted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state. When the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144 (d)), and when the integrated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)). I try to have some time.

More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the acceptance acceptance state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In addition to the above-mentioned first acceptance allowance state that occurs when the image is received, at least the fourth acceptance allowance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied is included, and the first acceptance acceptance state is integrated. When the image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144 (d)) and when the integrated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)). However, in the fourth reception allowable state, the integrated image is not displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144 (d)), and is different from the special mode (FIGS. 144 (a) to (1). It is displayed only by c)). Then, in the first reception permissible state, when the operation reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway based on the operation reception (non-audible). On the other hand, in the 4th reception allowable state, when the operation reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception allowable sound is set in the middle based on the operation reception. I try not to end it (do not make it inaudible).

According to such a configuration, a reception acceptance state is generated in which the operation reception is permitted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state, and the reception is performed. When the integrated image is displayed in a special mode in the permissible state, the reception permissible sound is terminated in the middle based on the operation reception. On the other hand, there is a reception permissible state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, and the reception permissible state is integrated. When the simulated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, the reception allowable sound may be terminated in the middle or the reception allowable sound may be maintained without being terminated in the middle based on the operation reception. It will be like.

That is, in this case, in the reception allowable state where the operation reception is permitted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state, the integrated image is a special mode. Is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which it is unlikely that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). Since the permissible sound may be maintained without being terminated in the middle, it may be because the operation reception is not performed when the reception permissible sound is not terminated in the middle. Although it has been done, it becomes possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the reason is that the fourth reception acceptance state has occurred, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest and maintain a good sense of tension. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception allowable state occurs, a wide area using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the staging display device 1600) is used prior to this. The execution of the pre-type pre-effect is started, and when the above-mentioned second acceptance acceptance state occurs, the narrow-area type pre-effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed prior to this. It is supposed to be done. Then, the image of the operation receiving unit (here, the integrated image) is displayed in both the period in which the wide area type pre-effect is executed and the period in which the first acceptance allowable state is generated. However, the period in which the wide area type pre-effect is executed and the period in which the first acceptance allowance state is generated are displayed in different modes from each other.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image (image) displayed during the period when the wide area type pre-effect is executed and the integrated image displayed during the period when the first acceptance acceptance state is generated. In the integrated image (image) to be displayed, the same operation receiving unit (operation button 410) is imitated, but the images are displayed based on different image data. As a result, not only the color scheme but also the contour shape itself is displayed as different.

According to such a configuration, when performing a wide area type pre-staging, the form (image data) of the integrated image (image) displayed in the first reception allowable state is not limited, and the degree of freedom is increased. Since it becomes possible to display an integrated image (image) with a high independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the effectability when performing a pre-effect (wide area type pre-effect) in a wider range. It will be like. It is clear that such effects cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on a single image data.

In addition, in the reception allowance state in which the wide area type pre-effect is executed, the effect at the time of a big hit that appears only when a big hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than in the reception allowance state in which the narrow area type pre-effect is executed. The rate at which aspects appear is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to the wide area type pre-effect (the wide area type pre-effect is executed), and these acceptance allowance states are prepared. As one, a first reception allowable state and a third reception allowable state are prepared respectively. In addition, a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared as reception allowance states corresponding to the narrow area type pre-effect (the narrow area type pre-effect is executed), and the second acceptance allowance state is one of the acceptance allowance states. A state and a fourth reception allowance state are prepared respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception allowable state, the operation is performed while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state. As mentioned above, the reception can be performed, and the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction) is set to the non-suppressed mode in the second reception allowable state. That's right. That is, when a narrow-range type pre-effect that is relatively inferior in the effectability is performed, the operation reception is performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not set to the suppressed mode but is set to the non-suppressed mode. Since it can be done (second reception allowable state), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide-area type pre-production, which is relatively superior in staging, is not performed. On the other hand, if the operation can be accepted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, a wide area type that is relatively superior in effectability. Since the pre-production is performed (first reception allowable state), the game is due to the fact that the operation reception is not performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, no operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted in the first reception allowable state, at least when the specific setting condition (one effect state) is met. When, the operation is executed in the automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception acceptance state, the operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not performed, the operation is performed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception permissible state in which the wide area type pre-production is performed, there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced when the operation is forgotten due to the high performance, but the automatic reception mode is used. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when the operation is forgotten. On the other hand, in the second reception permissible state in which the narrow area type pre-effect is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that the operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the staging is firmly performed. Only those who are paying attention and noticed that the operation reception is allowed can enjoy the post-operation production such as the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound, so the tension is suitable. You will be able to maintain it.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the operation reception is permitted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state. Is such that at least the above-mentioned first acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied are included. As described above. In this regard, in the fourth reception allowable state, the operation reception can be performed while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the state, the operation can be accepted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in the non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth reception permissible state occurs, prior to this, the narrow area type pre-effect using less than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. That is, when a narrow-range type pre-effect that is relatively inferior in staging is performed, the degree of suppression is lowered even if a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is set to the suppression mode. (Fourth reception permissible state), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide area type pre-production, which is relatively superior to the production, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first acceptance allowed state), the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) was not low because the wide-area type pre-production, which is relatively superior to the performance, is performed. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the taste of games.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception is performed by the player while the first reception acceptance state is generated and the image (integrated image) is displayed, the operation reception is performed. The corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is started, and the image (integrated image) is started. When hiding an image), a wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect) using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, an effect display device 1600) is executed. When the operation reception is performed by the player while the second reception acceptance state is generated and the image (integrated image) is displayed, the post-operation effect (effect display device) corresponding to the operation reception is performed. When the display change in 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) are started to be executed, and the image (integrated image) is hidden. A narrow area type extinction effect (narrow area type extinction effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed.

Here, the disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance effect, narrow area type disappearance effect) is a form in which a part or the whole of the displayed image (integrated image) is difficult to see or cannot be seen. It means "an image different from the image" or "display effect on the image" that is displayed. As such an extinction effect (disappearance effect), for example, it may be executed as an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image) is displayed. , The image (integrated image) and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and a part or the whole of the image (integrated image) in the moving image is the image (disappearing). It may be an effect that makes it difficult to see, or it is executed by changing the display mode of the image (integrated image) itself (display effect). It may be. However, as such an extinction effect, in order to suggest the degree of expectation or to improve the game entertainment, what is this when hiding the image (integrated image)? Needless to say, it is more desirable to display it as a separate image.

In addition, "when the image (integrated image) is hidden ... the disappearance effect is executed" means that "the image (integrated image) is hidden". The disappearance effect may be executed, or the transparency of the image itself is high while the image (integrated image) is hidden (integrated image). It may be "... the disappearance effect is executed" or "the disappearance effect is executed after hiding the image (integrated image)". , It means that any of these aspects is included. In addition, when the image (integrated image) is hidden, the fact that the transmittance of the image itself increases in the process of hiding the image itself is described as "when the image (integrated image) is hidden". ... The disappearance effect is executed. "

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception by the player is started to be executed and the image is hidden, the wide area disappearance effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there are cases where the narrow-range type disappearance effect is executed and cases where the narrow-range type disappearance effect is executed, it becomes possible to enhance the staging until the time when the image (integrated image) disappears.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such an extinction effect (image at the time of extinction) is executed, the narrow area type extinction effect (image at the time of extinction of the narrow area) is the narrow area type extinction effect (narrow). The background image that was displayed before the area type disappearance image) is displayed until the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type disappearance image) is hidden, or after the operation. While (post-operation display and post-operation output sound) is being executed, it is displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, in the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image), the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) was displayed before the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) was displayed based on the operation reception by the player. The background image is different from the background until the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) is hidden or while the post-operation effect (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is executed. It is supposed to be changed to an image.

That is, when the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is executed, not only the image (integrated image) but also at least a part of the background image is the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance). Since it will be difficult to see due to the image), the background image is changed (replaced) to a different background image aiming at the timing when such a wide area disappearance effect (image at the time of wide area disappearance) is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a smooth transition to the production (transition to a new production phase) using the button production. For example, the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the image (integrated image) is displayed and the layer in which the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the image (integrated image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as one prepared moving image, and one of the images (integrated image) in the moving image. A part or the whole or a part or the whole of the background image may be expressed in such a way that the image (disappearance effect) makes it difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the narrow-range type disappearance effect (narrow-range type disappearance image) is executed, while the narrow-range type disappearance effect (narrow-range type disappearance image) is hidden or after the operation. Since the background image is not changed while the effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is being executed, the effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, as a player, in addition to the post-operation effect, he is interested in whether the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) or the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type disappearance image) is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment related to the image from the time when the image (integrated image) is displayed until it is hidden.

In addition, when the wide area type disappearance effect (image at the time of wide area type disappearance) is displayed, a big hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than when the narrow area type disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow area type disappearance) is displayed. The rate at which the production mode at the time of a big hit, which appears only when the player is playing, appears is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to the wide area type extinction effect (image at the time of wide area extinction) (the wide area type extinction effect is executed). As one of these reception allowable states, a first reception allowable state and a third reception allowable state are prepared respectively. In addition, as the acceptance allowance state corresponding to the narrow area type disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow area type disappearance) (the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed), a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared, and these acceptance allowance states are prepared. As one of the above, a second reception allowable state and a fourth reception allowable state are prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception allowable state, a game in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. The operation can be accepted by a player, and the second acceptance allowance state allows the player to accept the operation while the specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction) is set to the non-suppressed mode. It is as described above. That is, when the narrow-range type extinction effect, which is relatively inferior in staging, is performed, the player is in a non-suppressing mode in which the staging sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is set to the non-suppressing mode. Since the operation reception can be performed (second reception allowable state), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide area type extinction effect, which is relatively superior in staging, is not performed. On the other hand, if the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state, the effect is relatively good. Since the superior wide-area extinction effect is performed (first reception allowable state), the operation reception by the player while the production sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode is accepted. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the interest in games due to the fact that it was not done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific setting condition (one effect state) is met, in the first reception allowable state, the operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception by the player is permitted. When not, the operation is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception allowable state, the operation reception by the player is allowed within the set time. As described above, when the operation is not detected in, the operation is performed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception permissible state in which the wide area type extinction effect is performed, there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced when the operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but it is executed in the above automatic reception mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when the operation is forgotten. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception is not performed by the player and the automatic reception functions, the wide area disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the operation reception is performed by the player. On the other hand, in the second reception permissible state in which the narrow area type extinction effect is performed, since the execution is performed in the above non-automatic reception mode, the set time elapses without the player operating (second reception permissible). When the state is completed), the image is displayed without performing the post-operation effect (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body). It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second reception allowable state, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed even when the image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, which causes forgetting to operate. As a result, it is designed to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when the effect is not executed after the operation. At this time, as the narrow area type extinction effect, the operation may be executed in the same mode (same image) as when the operation reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception allowable state according to this example, the narrow area type disappearance effect that appears when the operation reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed, and the case where the operation reception is not performed and the post-operation effect is not executed. The mode (image) different from that of the narrow-range disappearance effect that appears in is made to appear.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the receptionist is allowed to accept the operation while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state. The permissible state includes at least the first acceptance permissible state that occurs when the first condition is met and the fourth acceptance permissible state that occurs when the fourth condition is met. That is as described above. Then, in the fourth reception allowable state, the player can accept the operation while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the reception allowable state, the operation by the player while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in the non-output state. It was also mentioned above that the reception can be done. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception is performed by the player in the above-mentioned fourth reception allowable state, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed instead of the wide area type disappearance effect. .. That is, when a narrow-range type extinction effect that is relatively inferior in staging is performed, a specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction) is set to a suppression mode prior to that, but the degree of suppression is lowered. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide-area extinction effect, which is relatively superior in staging, is not performed (the fourth reception allowable state). On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first acceptance allowed state), the wide-area extinction effect, which is relatively superior to the effect, is performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the taste of games.

FIG. 161 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a second reception allowable state occurs.

Assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the variation pattern determination is performed and the "second variation pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a may be used. First, an effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 163 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, an effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ second variation pattern ”itself. It will be.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained (when the second condition is satisfied) in the staging determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU1511a is shown in FIG. 161 (b). In addition, when the timing tB3 when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives, the operation acceptance regarding the second post-operation effect is permitted. (Corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163 (d)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the second acceptance allowable state (valid period),
-The operation reception is performed while the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of effect sound)" corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern, for example, the BGM reproduction sound during normal fluctuation maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. The operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which the operation reception is permitted in the allowable “non-suppressed reception allowable state (see FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b))”. In this case, the "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 161 (h))" that does not generate the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) corresponding to the second reception allowance state.
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, the set time (valid period) in which the operation reception is permitted without the effect of suggesting the occurrence of the reception acceptance state by the "BGM reproduction sound" being suppressed. ) Is suddenly set (unsuppressed reception effect), so that the player is surprised and the start of movement when trying to operate is likely to be delayed. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time is terminated without the post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). By making people aware of the risk of missing the opportunity of the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect), the tension can be suitably maintained.

However, such a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" is performed after the operation (here, the second post-operation effect) in a manner that appears only at the time of a big hit than the "suppressive / automatic reception effect" described later. Even though the ratio (which may be 0% or 100%) is low, if the player's intention is that the post-operation effect does not occur frequently, the game interest may decline. I am concerned. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 (b), (e), and (i), a set time (timing tB3 to tB4) at which operation reception is permitted occurs. When the timing tB2 arrives a little earlier, the output of the "acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)" is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163 (c)"), and the timing within the set time. Even if the operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained by straddling the operation. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 in which the setting time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception allowable state is set, and it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted. It is difficult to frequently say that the player is late in noticing that the reception has been accepted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. It will be expected. However, the "acceptable sound for reception (here, the first permissible sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) is generated, and for example, the timing at which the set time is generated. It may be generated according to the generation timing of tB3.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" As the "acceptable sound" and "press!" A second permissible sound that is output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 161 (f) and 161 (j), in the second acceptance allowable state, the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. Is output, and even with the output limitation applied to such a "reception allowable sound", a delay is likely to occur at the start of movement when the player tries to operate.

By the way, in the second reception allowable state, as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time or the execution as a non-automatic reception mode, the operation means (here, the operation) from the time when the operation reception is not permitted. By repeatedly hitting the button 410), it is considered that some players may try not to miss the opportunity to generate the effect after the operation. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect is started immediately after the operation reception is permitted, the started effect is "the one performed according to the operation reception (post-operation effect)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice effect that has nothing to do with the operation reception", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 161 (particularly, FIG. 161 (e)), in the second reception allowable state, the “reception allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production reception is performed at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is terminated, while the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway and is used as the first allowable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output ends (the same timing tB3c (FIGS. 161 (e) and (i)) as when there was no operation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether the sound is "performed (post-operation effect)" or "automatically generated as an effect unrelated to the operation reception". It will be like.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 161, when the effect reception is performed within the set time of the second reception allowable state (timing tB3a in the figure), the effect display device is used as a post-operation effect according to the operation reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 161 (d)). See). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tB4, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output if the timing tB4 has not been completed. It is required to maintain the state.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 161, when the timing tB2 before the timing tB3 in which the set time of the second reception allowable state is set arrives, the operation means targeted for operation in the effect display device 1600. An image of the above is displayed, and a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163 (c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 in which the setting time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception allowable state is set, and it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted. It is difficult to frequently say that the player is late in noticing that the reception has been accepted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. It will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the image is displayed is the same as the time when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is started to be output, but it is not limited to this, and either one is started earlier. You may do it. Alternatively, only one of the image and the reception allowable sound (for example, only the image) may be started before the timing tB3.

Further, as described above, the image displayed when the second reception allowable state occurs (the image of the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) is the edge that decorates the periphery of the image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image (predetermined) is included in the peripheral decoration image. Image) A display target area (section image KG) of GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image IG", a plurality of modes having different expectations (see FIG. 144) are prepared, and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, among the plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image" in the second reception allowable state, the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)) is drawn (selected). ) Is not included, and only an aspect different from the special aspect (for example, the normal aspect shown in FIG. 144 (a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 163, the integrated image IGa having the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated image IG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (c) to 161 (f), it is assumed that the timing tB3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated image is displayed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and a movable decorative body. As at least one of the effect operations), the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started, respectively (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163 (f)").

However, as shown in FIGS. 161 (c) and 161 and FIG. 163 (f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image IG is not displayed at the time when the post-operation effect is started. It is not set to, and the display state is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, no change due to the integrated image IG (specific layer) occurs at that time (timing tB3a), and a short time (timing tB3a) from there. Until the timing tB3b after the elapse of the predetermined time) arrives, the "display on the integrated image IG" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 163, a conversation notice (maybe a chance) by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) displayed in a form that makes it difficult or invisible to see a part or the whole of the integrated image in the displayed state appears (“FIG. 163”. Corresponds to "the situation shown in (g)"). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image IG and the image (disappearance effect). ) Is displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the video is expressed as being difficult to see due to the image KSE (disappearing effect). It may be as described above.

As shown in FIG. 161 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearance effect) is started to be displayed. It is not set to, and the display state is maintained. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated image IG is displayed, the change caused by the integrated image IG is caused. However, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the extinction effect is displayed on the layer in front of it, the image and the gauge image GG are difficult to see or cannot be seen.

That is, in this case, the image KSE of the extinction effect (the same applies to the image HSE of the wide-area extinction effect described later) is used for the purpose of making the image (integrated image IG) difficult to see or making it invisible. The image (integrated image IG) itself displayed on a specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) even though it is displayed on the predetermined layer is itself. The display will be maintained in the same mode as when the operation reception was permitted, and no change will occur. Further, with respect to the gauge image GG, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced will be continued across the operation reception. As a result, even in the process of making the image (integrated image IG) difficult to see or making it invisible, the mode (at least a part) when the operation reception is permitted is visually recognized. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the time to be maintained as the state shown in FIG. 163 (f).

Then, the display output (display on the layer) relating to the integrated image IG is terminated within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) in which the image KSE of the extinction effect is displayed (shown in FIG. 163 (i)). ), After that, the disappearance effect (here, the narrow area type disappearance that uses less than half of the predetermined display area) under the situation that the integrated image IG is not displayed on the layer The image KSE of the effect) will be displayed. The image KSE of such an extinction effect is hidden when a predetermined time elapses (timing tB3d) after the display is started (timing tB3b) ("FIG. 163 (Timing tB3d)". Corresponds to "the situation shown in j)"). In this regard, regarding the timing tB3d to be hidden, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display in this case) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is particularly large regardless of the timing when the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the running period. That is, as will be described later, the image KSE of the extinction effect and the integrated image IG are displayed on the layer in front of the image (conversation notice by the princess character) related to the display change in the staging display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 163 (g) to 163 (i), while the image KSE of the extinction effect is displayed, the image (conversation notice by the princess character) related to the display change in the staging display device 1600 is visually recognized. It is getting harder. The same applies to the wide-area extinction effect.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, the post-operation production is first started, and at the time when the operation reception is performed, the integrated image IG is displayed in any manner. (Which aspect of FIGS. 144 (a) to (d), how much remaining time is suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) will be maintained in a state in which it can be grasped (“FIG. Corresponds to "the situation shown in 163 (f)"). After that, the display of the extinction effect by the image KSE in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600" and the integrated image IG in the post-operation effect is started. (Corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163 (g)"). As described above, as the extinction effect, there are a narrow area type extinction effect having a low effect and a wide area type extinction effect having a low effect, and here, the effect is executed as a narrow area type extinction effect. While the image KSE of such an extinction effect is displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163 (i)"), and then the extinction effect is displayed. When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character)" in the post-operation effect is finally visible in a clear state ("" Corresponds to "the situation shown in FIG. 163 (j)").

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect the integrated image IG was, and then what kind of aspect appears as an extinction effect, and then it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what mode (here, which of a plurality of conversation notice modes with different expectations) appears as a post-operation effect, when the operation is accepted with such a variety of effects. It will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing tB3b or the extinction effect may be used instead of the timing tB3a for the timing of starting the display of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timing tB3b to tB3d). However, also in this case as well, since the execution of the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started at the timing tB3a, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains the timing tB3a.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (g) to 161 (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second reception allowable state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the second reception allowable state is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, if the set time elapses without the player performing the operation, the post-operation effect is not performed. The image (here, the integrated image IGa) is hidden.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 161 (b) and 161 (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception allowable state) is completed, The image on the specific layer (here, the integrated image IGa) is not hidden, and the display state that appeared when the reception was allowed is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation reception is no longer allowed, at that time (timing tB4), there is no change due to the image (here, the integrated image IGa). Until the arrival of the timing tB4a after a short time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "display on the image" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. There is. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area left even when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception allowable state) is terminated, and the display area is displayed after the timing tB4. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the valid period (second acceptance allowable state) is terminated without any operation, the simulated image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes having different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was. In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the expiration date, it is possible to encourage people to think "I was sorry" when the operation reception was not in time at the last minute. It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest will be suppressed.

In this example, the valid period (second reception allowable state) is terminated without the operation reception, rather than the time from the timing tB3a when the operation reception is made until the image is hidden (invisible). The time from the timing tB4 until the image is hidden (invisible) is made shorter.

Further, as described above, in the second reception allowable state, if the set time elapses without the operation by the player being detected, the post-operation effect is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed when the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is hidden. While the narrow-range disappearance effect is being executed, the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is hidden. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the narrow area type extinction effect when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 161 (g)) is the narrow area type extinction effect when the post-operation effect is executed. It is designed to be executed in a mode (image) different from that (FIG. 161 (c)).

With such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether or not it was in time), it is necessary to properly understand it by confirming the mode of the narrow-range disappearance effect. This makes it possible to avoid a decline in the interest in the game due to the inability to grasp whether or not the post-operation production is being performed. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the mode of the narrow-range type extinction effect (FIG. 161 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 161 (g). )) It is desirable not to appear. However, for example, the narrow-range type disappearance effect (FIG. 161 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is referred to as "A (for example, a change in the image itself)" and "B (for example, what is the image itself)". If the two aspects of "another image display)" are to be executed together, the narrow-range disappearance effect (FIG. 161 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed should be executed by "A". You may. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception was not performed at the time when the mode of "B" does not appear in the narrow area type extinction effect, and the situation where the post-operation effect is performed. It is possible to avoid a decline in the entertainment interest of the game due to the inability to grasp whether it is in the game.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161, when the timing tB1 before the timing tB3 in which the second acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, the narrow area type pre-effect using less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. It is supposed to be started (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163 (b)"). Then, within the period in which the image KTH related to such a narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed, first, the display of the imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image IGa) that imitates the operation receiving portion and the first permissible Each of the sound outputs is started (timing tB2, which corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 163 (c)"). At the time when the display of the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the image (integrated image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH applied to the narrow area type pre-effect. It's getting harder. That is, as time passes, the display range of the image related to the narrow-range type pre-staging is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image)" is used. The visibility of the image IG) will be gradually improved ”(FIGS. 163 (b) to (d)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the narrow-range type pre-effect is executed, and the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is displayed. The timing tB3 at which the acceptance acceptance state occurs has arrived and the operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163 (d)"). That is, in this case, since the operation reception is permitted at the stage where the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) is being enhanced, the image (integrated image IG) is used. Whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the aspect (expectation degree), or confirm the aspect (expectation degree) as the image (integrated image IG). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect).

Here, the image KTH used for such a narrow-range type pre-effect is, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. Alternatively, the image (integrated image) and the image (narrow area type pre-effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) in the moving image is displayed. It may be something that expresses how the image is gradually increased.

In the narrow-range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of the effect sound related to the image may be output. However, considering that the second reception allowance state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operation-related matters, the narrow-range type pre-staging is performed. It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to enhance the concentration on the effect.

Further, as the narrow-range type pre-effect, a plurality of modes having different expectations may be prepared, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination. .. However, considering that the second reception allowable state is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, and the post-operation effect is not executed if the operation is forgotten, the narrow area type pre-effect is not executed. It is desirable to prepare only one aspect and display it only by the one aspect in order to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when the operation is forgotten.

FIG. 162 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the first condition is satisfied and the first acceptance allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which the first acceptance acceptance state occurs.

Assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the variation pattern determination is performed and the "first variation pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a may be used. First, an effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the first variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 164 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, an effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ first variation pattern ”itself. It will be.

As described above, in the effect related to the "first variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the decorative pattern is displayed regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the timing tC4 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) in which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the SZ variation effect arrives, the operation reception for the first post-operation effect is permitted. Generates an acceptable state (validity period) (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptance allowable state (valid period) is
-A "suppression acceptance allowable state" in which operation acceptance is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state (FIG. 162 (a), (B)) ”, and even if the operation for the operating means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) at which operation reception is allowed When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started in the "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 162 (h))".
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as a “strong suppression mode”.

According to such a configuration, the operation reception is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state (suppression reception effect). From the user's point of view, it becomes easier to operate immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) has the timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you will be able to enjoy operating with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly expected post-operation production. .. That is, in such a "suppression / automatic reception effect", the rate (0% or 100%) in which the post-operation effect is performed in a manner that appears only at the time of a big hit than the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". It is also good) as described above.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", FIGS. 162 (b), (e), (i). As shown in, when the timing tC3 arrives shortly before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) at which the staging reception is allowed occurs, the "acceptance allowable sound (here, the first allowable sound)" is set. The output is started and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tC4 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of effect sound)" is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state, the operation is performed at the timing tC3. It will be possible to recognize that a state where reception is allowed will occur soon, and "against the player's intention, the production reception will be done by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation". Will be expected to be less frequent. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) occurs, and is generated, for example, in accordance with the generation timing tC4 of the set time. You may do so.

In order to more preferably obtain the above-mentioned action effect (suppression reception effect), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is changed from "a state in which it is output in a non-suppressive mode" to "a state in which it is output in a suppressed mode or non-suppressed mode". The timing tC2a that shifts to the "output state" has a different aspect from that shown in the figure, but has a relationship such as "length of timing tC2a to tC3> length of timing tC3 to tC4". It can be said that it is desirable to set it well before the above-mentioned output start timing tC4 of the above-mentioned acceptance allowable sound that occurs in advance of the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide area type pre-staging is started.

Further, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 162 (f) and 162 (j), unlike the case of the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", " As the "acceptable reception sound", not only the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" But also the second allowable sound which is a message sound such as "press!" Is output. Moreover, in this example, the second permissible sound is in a state (valid period) in which the operation reception is already permitted after being delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the first permissible sound is started to be output. At the timing tC4a that arrives at, the output is started.

That is, in this case, in the second acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the integrated image IG (image) cannot be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay in the occurrence of, and the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the integrated image IG (image) can be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay in the occurrence, and the output of the second allowable sound is started after the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

According to such a configuration, the first permissible sound (sound effect) is started to be output when the mode of the integrated image IG (image) is difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the previous effect. After that, when the first permissible state (valid period) is generated, both the first permissible sound (sound effect) and the second permissible sound (message sound) can be output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated image IG (image) is displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. You will be able to do it. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, the integrated image having a specific high expectation mode (special mode). It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the IG (sound image) will be displayed, and in such a situation, the integrated sound image IG (sound image) will be gradually exposed (clear). Sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (c) and 162 (f), while the "second wide area type pre-effect" is being executed among the wide-area type pre-effects (image of the pre-effect). Is displayed), the output of the second permissible sound is started.

As will be described later, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation target" are selected based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When there is a "selection" and the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Deliver the sword!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

Further, in this staging example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second permissible sound" is adopted as a staging sound that is output for a relatively short time. However, although the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the staging sound that is output over a relatively long time, the long-short relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 162 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the output states of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" are maintained for different times. In addition, the time when these output states are terminated (the time when they are made inaudible) should arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is enabled. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound" is in. It will be possible to do so, and it is expected that it will be difficult for the player to frequently say that "the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention".
-The first situation in which only the "first permissible sound" of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" maintains the output state-both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" 2nd situation where the output state is maintained ・ The "1st permissible sound" maintains the output state, but the "2nd permissible sound" has finished the output state (being in an inaudible state). 3rd situation-Both the "1st permissible sound" and the "2nd permissible sound" have ended the output state (they are in an inaudible state).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, "Pickin!") Is output as the "first permissible sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output by the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", but the effect sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds. As for the first permissible sound), since it can be output as a production sound that is also output in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception production", the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type production sound)" is suppressed. It becomes possible to more easily recognize that the production reception is in an allowable state while maintaining the effectability when the situation is favorable (second permissible sound) (first permissible sound). Allowable sound). However, in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. It may be output.

It should be noted that the time length between arbitrary timings shown in the above-mentioned figures and each figure described later may be the minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in the control (processing) unit, or 2 frames. It may be the above time. For example, if the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) can be output even a little earlier than the set time (valid period), the player is in a state where the operation reception is permitted (or). Since it will be possible to recognize what has happened earlier by the preceding time, the period until the set time ends or the timing when the automatic button function is activated comes. It will be expected to prevent people from forgetting to operate inside.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 162, unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 161, the operation is performed when the reception allowable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is in the output state. When the reception is made, the output state is terminated halfway based on the fact that the operation reception is made. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is performed, the output of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and the operation reception is permitted by this (the operation reception is permitted). It is possible to recognize that the validity period) has expired. As a result, it is less likely that an operation is accepted even though the operation is not accepted, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the automatic reception function is enabled against the intention of the player. become able to. If the operation is performed and the operation is accepted before the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period), the operation is performed when the operation is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not enabled even if the timing tC4f arrives because the state in which reception is permitted is terminated.

Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (e) and 162 (f), the output of the first permissible sound is started without delaying the occurrence of the set time (valid period), and the second permissible sound is the set time (valid). The output is started after the occurrence of the period). According to such a configuration, the output of the first permissible sound is started no matter how quickly the operation by the player is accepted, but the second permissible sound depends on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When the operation is accepted between the timings tC3 and tC4a) The state in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends without the output being started, and as a result, the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect). ) Will be executed. When the operation is performed between the timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated by this as an opportunity. Further, if the operation is accepted before the timing tC4a arrives, the output of the second allowable sound is not started.

According to such a configuration, is it possible to start the post-operation effect after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that the first permissible state is satisfied), or the first 2 Whether to start the post-operation effect without confirming that the permissible sound is output (without recognizing whether the first reception permissible state or the second reception permissible state) is played. Since it will be possible to leave it to the choice of the person, the range of games will be expanded, and it is expected that the game will be improved.

Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 162 (c) and 162 (f), at least the image (here, the wide area type pre-staging) is applied within the period of timing tC3 to tC4a. (Some) are not hidden, and the display state is maintained. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound has not yet been output (timing tC3 to tC4a), the mode (expectation degree) of the integrated image (image) cannot be clearly visually recognized by the previous staging. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned playability such as "leave it to the player's choice" to be more interesting.

Further, also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 162 (d), when the operation reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is performed. (Here, as the first post-operation effect), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member). At least occurs (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (i)"). Here, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 161, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the timing is set regardless of the timing of the operation reception within the set time (valid period). While the display (invisible) is made at a specific timing (same timing) that arrives after tC5, the output sound (directing sound) after the operation is predetermined from the timing when the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for the time (fixed time). In the example shown in FIG. 164, a background notice by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output related to the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 162, even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (valid period), the post-operation output sound (directing sound) is the "BGM reproduction sound (BGM reproduction sound). It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained when the timing tC6 from the suppressed state (non-output state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives.

On the other hand, as for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is terminated at the timing tC6 when the “BGM reproduction sound” becomes the output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at the timing tC6, both the “BGM reproduction sound” is output in the non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effectability is large. It is expected that it will be changed to improve the game entertainment. However, instead of this, the output state may be maintained at the time when the timing tC6 arrives for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). Further, the "BGM reproduction sound" may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 162, when the timing tC3 before the timing tC4 in which the set time of the first reception allowable state is set arrives, the operation targeted by the effect display device 1600 is performed. An image of the means is displayed, and a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (f)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tC3 slightly before the timing tC4 in which the setting time (timing tC4 to tC5) of the first reception allowable state is set, and it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted. It is difficult to frequently say that the player is late in noticing that the reception has been accepted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends without occurring. It will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the image is displayed is the same as the time when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is started to be output, but it is not limited to this, and either one is started earlier. You may do it. Alternatively, only one of the image and the reception allowable sound (for example, only the image) may be started before the timing tC4.

Further, as described above, the image (image of the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) displayed when the first acceptance acceptance state occurs is also the edge that decorates the periphery of the image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, the gauge image GG (in the peripheral decoration image) is included in the peripheral decoration image. Predetermined image) A display target area (partition area KG) of the GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image IG", a plurality of modes having different expectations (see FIG. 144) are prepared, and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, unlike the second reception permissible state, in the first reception permissible state, a special mode with high expectation among a plurality of modes prepared as "integrated image IG" (for example, FIG. 144). As described above, the aspect shown in (d) (integrated image IGd)) is included as a target of lottery (selection) and can be displayed.

By the way, in the first reception allowable state (FIG. 162) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time is displayed (based on the time until the timing ct4f at which the automatic button function is activated when there is no operation arrives). It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first reception allowable state (FIG. 162) according to this embodiment, the remaining time is displayed based on the time until the timing tC5 at which the set time elapses, not the time until the timing tc4f arrives (FIG. 162). Gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect is started to be executed by enabling the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left. It is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" against the intention of the player, and this makes it possible to indicate that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" regardless of the remaining gauge amount in the set time (valid period) from the next time onward. You will be able to encourage them to perform operations at an early stage.

However, regarding the first reception allowable state (FIG. 162) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception was received does not necessarily have to be started within the set time, and the set time It may be started when or after the end of.

Further, the integrated image IG (image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 162 is not necessarily the same as the integrated image IG (image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 161. good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161 the operating means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 162, the operating means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is depicted. May be depicted realistically.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) to be operated, and the operation button 410 is displayed as an integrated image IG (image). In the example shown in FIG. 162, the handle portion 5012 (sword decorative body 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and the handle portion 5012 (sword decoration body 5001) is displayed as an integrated image IG (image). 157 (a)-(d) may be referred to). This "integrated image IGe-IGh" is as described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, a gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. (Predetermined image) A display target area (partition image KG) of GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image IG", a plurality of modes having different expectations (see FIG. 144) are prepared, and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed.

As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tC4 in FIG. 162, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. There is. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tB3 in FIG. 161 there is no "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, it is possible to set the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred, which is against the intention of the player. It is desirable to prevent the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tC4 in FIG. 162, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means of the above is operated, it is desirable that the effect reception is performed and the effect is executed after the operation. That is, there is a possibility that the player may be confused if a situation appears in which the production reception is not performed even though the operation means is operated, and it is appropriate to interrupt the erroneous operation state in such a situation. Since it is harsh to further request an operation for the operation means on the side, even if an erroneous operation state is maintained, the staging reception is performed when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated. It is desirable to do.

As described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, the effect sound of a specific type is output or non-output in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, so that it is compared with the non-suppression operation reception effect. There is a concern that the staging will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer period of time than the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are provided. It is prepared, and any one of the plurality of embodiments is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIG. 162 (e), and the "time maintained as the output state" is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes. It is something that is. Further, it is desirable that the rate (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the above-mentioned plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that "which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound" and "which of the plurality of operating means is used as the operation target" are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination as one determination result. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible is regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable to be able to select it as a sound. Further, also in the second aspect and the third aspect, it is possible to select either the case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the case where the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. However, it is desirable to prepare a mode in which the output can be performed only when the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. Then, regardless of which of these modes the first permissible sound is output, the output state is maintained with a length longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 161.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 162 (c) to 162 (f), it is assumed that the timing tC4 arrives and the operation is accepted while the integrated image IG (here, the integrated image IGd) is displayed. is doing. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and a movable decorative body. As at least one of the effect operations), the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started respectively.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 162 (c) and 162 (d), also in this example, the integrated image IG on the specific layer is not hidden at the time when the post-operation effect is started. , Maintain the display state from the time when the reception was allowed. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, it is caused by the integrated image IG at that time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 164 (i)"). No change occurs, and until the arrival of the timing tC4c after a short time (predetermined time) has passed, the "integrated image IG" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is applied. "Display" is being continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes it difficult or invisible to see a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the display state appears (“Fig.” Corresponds to "the situation shown in 164 (j)"). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer (predetermined layer) before a specific layer on which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image and the said image. The image (disappearance effect) is displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image in the video is expressed as being difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect). As mentioned above, it may be the same as the above.

As shown in FIG. 162 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and the image HSE displayed on a predetermined layer ( The disappearance effect) is not hidden even when the display is started, and the display state is maintained as it was when the reception was allowed. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated image IG is displayed, the change caused by the integrated image IG occurs. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the extinction effect is displayed on a predetermined layer on the front side of the effect, the image or gauge image GG is difficult to see or gradually becomes invisible.

Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated image IG is terminated within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) in which the image HSE of the extinction effect is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is displayed. The image HSE of the disappearance effect (here, a wide area type disappearance effect using more than half of a predetermined display area) is displayed under the condition that the IG is not displayed on the specific layer. The image HSE of such an extinction effect is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) after the display is started (timing tC4c). In this regard, regarding the timing tC4g to be hidden, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display in this case) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is particularly large regardless of the timing when the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the running period. That is, as will be described later, the image HSE and the image (integrated image) of the extinction effect are displayed on a predetermined layer on the front side of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, while the image HSE of the extinction effect is displayed (FIGS. 164 (j) and (k)), it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. There is.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, the post-operation production is first started, and at the time when the operation reception is performed, the integrated image IG is displayed in any manner. (Which aspect of FIGS. 144 (a) to (d), how much remaining time is suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) is maintained in a state in which it can be grasped. After that, among the post-operation effects, the image HSE of the disappearance effect in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" and the integrated image IG. Will start to display. As described above, the extinction effect includes a narrow-area extinction effect having a low effect and a wide-area extinction effect having a low effect, and is executed as a wide-area extinction effect here. While the image HSE of such an extinction effect is displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden, and then when the image HSE of the extinction effect is hidden, the post-operation effect The "image related to the display change in the staging display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" can finally be visually recognized in a clear state (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (l)").

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect the integrated image IG was, and then what kind of aspect appears as an extinction effect, and then it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears as a post-operation effect, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the operation is accepted by such various effects.

In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing tC4c or the extinction effect may be used instead of the timing tC4b for the timing of starting the display of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timing tC4c to tC4g). However, also in this case as well, since the execution of the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started at the timing tC4b, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains the timing tC4b.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 162 (g) to 162 (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the first acceptance allowable state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the first reception allowable state is executed in the automatic reception mode, the post-operation effect is performed even when the set time has elapsed without the player performing the operation. In the meantime, the image (here, the integrated image IG) is hidden.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 162 (b) and 162 (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, the operation by the player is the same as when the operation is accepted. , The image (here, the integrated image) is not hidden and maintains the display state. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time (timing tC4f), there is no change due to the image (here, the integrated image). Until the arrival of the timing tC4fa after a short time (predetermined time) has passed, the "display on the image" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. There is. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area left even when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception allowable state) is terminated, and the display area is displayed after the timing tC4f. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the post-operation effect is started by enabling the automatic button function, the simulated image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes having different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was.

Further, in this example, the time until the image is hidden (invisible) from the timing tC4c when the operation is accepted and the image is hidden (invisible) from the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is enabled. ) Is made the same as the time until it is made.

Further, in this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), the image (here, the integrated image IG) is hidden as shown in FIG. 162 (g). At the time of setting, the wide area type extinction effect is executed, and the image (here, the integrated image) is hidden while the wide area type extinction effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the image applied to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 162 (c)) when the operation by the player is accepted and the automatic button function are enabled. It is designed to be executed in the same manner as the image applied to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 162 (g)) (all images are "image HSE"). This is a part different from the case of the example shown in FIG. 161 (the narrow-range type extinction effect when the image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode is different from the operation mode).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not in time at the last minute, the same mode as when the operation reception is in time will appear. It will be possible to encourage people to think that "has started to be executed", and it is expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 162, when the timing tC1 before the timing tC3 in which the first acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, the wide area type pre-effect using more than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. (Corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (b)"). Then, during the period during which the wide area type pre-effect is being executed, the display of the imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image IG) imitating the operation receiving portion and the output of the first permissible sound are started (in this case). Timing tC3, which corresponds to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (f)"). At the time when the display of the image (here, the integrated image IG) is started, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part or the whole of the image (integrated image IG) due to the image applied to the wide area type pre-effect. ing. That is, as time passes, the display range of the image related to the wide area type pre-staging is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image)" is displayed. ) Will be gradually improved ”(FIGS. 164 (f) to (h)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the wide area type pre-production is executed, and the image (here, the integrated image IG) is displayed, and the first reception is performed. The timing tC4 at which the permissible state occurs has arrived, and the operation reception is permitted. That is, in this case, since the operation reception is permitted at the stage where the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) is being enhanced, the image (integrated image IG) is used. Whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the aspect (expectation degree), or confirm the aspect (expectation degree) as the image (integrated image IG). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect).

Here, the image used for such a wide area pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. , The image (integrated image) and the image (wide area type pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the image (integrated image) is gradually improved in the moving image. It may be something that expresses how it goes.

It should be noted that the wide area type pre-effect is different from the case of the second reception allowable state in the effect display device 1600 in view of suggesting the occurrence of the first reception allowable state, which has a relatively high expectation. It is desirable that not only the image display but also the output of the staging sound related to this is performed. Then, a part of the staging sound applied to such a wide area type pre-staging may be executed so as to function as the first permissible sound.

Further, as a wide area type pre-effect, it is possible to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations and selectively display one of the modes based on the result of the staging judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the wide area type pre-effect according to this example is started when the timing tC1 in the "first fluctuation pattern" arrives, and the first acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is executed so as to straddle the timing tC4, and is finished within the set time of the first acceptance allowable state. However, between the start and the end of such a wide area type pre-effect, the first wide area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect are sequentially executed as the wide-area type pre-effect. It has become like. These two wide-area type pre-staging may be displayed as one moving image data or may be displayed as different moving image data from each other.

Here, the first wide area type pre-effect is to start displaying when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (b)"), and the second wide area type pre-effect is the timing. When tC2 arrives, the display starts in place of the first wide area type pre-effect (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (e)"), but any of these pre-effects is displayed. Even during the period, the "image of the operation target to be operated" is displayed during the period when the previous effect is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 162 (c), a copy image (integrated copy image) is displayed when the timing tC1a within the period during which the first wide area type pre-staging is being executed arrives. As a result, it is possible to recognize which of the plurality of operating means the operation opportunity is given at a relatively early stage (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (c)"). In FIG. 164 (c), the image HTH1 produced by the first wide area type pre-staging is described as producing "an image in which the entire image (here, the integrated image) is outlined". It is just a blank image, and it cannot be said that it is an image that imitates the effect button that is the operation target. After that, the "image A1 in which the entire image (here, the integrated image) is outlined" is "at least the outline of the image (here, the integrated image) by at least one of the decoration and the pattern". It is now displayed as a "shaped image A2" (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164 (d)"), which suggests that the operation target is an effect button. From this, it can be said that such an "image A2" is a simulated image of the operating means to be operated. That is, such an image A2 is executed as an effect that makes it appear as if the "image HTH1 by the first wide area type pre-effect" was produced. The "outline of the image (here, the integrated image)" means the outline of the operation receiving portion (here, the outline of the operation receiving portion and the outline of the peripheral decorative image).

However, when the timing tC2 arrives, whether to hide the "image A2 as an image (integrated image)" and the "image HTH1 related to the first wide area type pre-effect" that had been displayed until then. The "second wide area type front staging" is started to be executed in a form that makes it difficult to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164 (e)"). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period during which the second wide area type pre-effect is being executed arrives, the image (integrated image IG) is displayed again (in the "situation shown in FIG. 164 (f)"). (Equivalent), the timing tC4 at which the first acceptance acceptance state occurs in the displayed state has arrived (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164 (g)"). That is, the second image (FIGS. 164 (f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from the time when the operation reception is permitted until at least the operation reception is not permitted, and the second image is continuously displayed. The operation is accepted while the image is displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started to be executed.

That is, in this case, the pre-effects are executed twice prior to the occurrence of the first reception permissible state, and in the pre-effects, "the operation reception is hidden before the permissible operation reception". The first image (FIGS. 164 (c), (d)) and the second image (FIGS. 164 (f) to (k)) that continue to be displayed even after the operation reception is permitted. And are displayed separately. According to such a configuration, there is a higher degree of freedom without considering the mode (result of the staging determination, etc.) that should be displayed when the acceptance acceptance state occurs. Since it is possible to display the image (the image that is hidden before the operation reception is allowed (first time)) under the effect design, the range of the effect can be expanded. In this sense, the "image that is hidden before the operation reception is permitted (first time)" can be displayed when the operation reception is within the permitted period. It is desirable that it be displayed as a mode that does not exist (a mode different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 144).

Here, the image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-effect is being performed is the same as the image displayed while the narrow-area type pre-effect is being performed. Since the display state is continued even after the state in which the operation reception is permitted occurs, the display state is displayed as one of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 144 (in the example shown in FIG. 162). , A special embodiment of the integrated image IGd). On the other hand, the image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-effect is being performed has at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 144. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image (here, image A2). For example, as for the shape, the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target is deformed and expressed, such as making the outline part of the image rounded or using a lot of curves without using many straight lines. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying as an image. In the above-mentioned narrow-range type pre-staging, an image having at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from the acceptance allowable state does not appear.

Further, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, a plurality of images (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-staging is being performed are shown in FIG. 144. Regardless of which aspect is displayed, the simulated image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-staging is being performed can be displayed by one aspect (same aspect). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide area type pre-staging can be used exclusively for "indicating which type of operation means will soon be given an operation opportunity". According to the first wide area type pre-staging, the player can be made to recognize the operation target without deteriorating the game interest, and thus the operation target is made to be recognized by the player. From, it will shift to the second wide area type pre-production that suggests the degree of expectation.

In order to suitably obtain such an action effect, regarding the first wide area type front staging, the operation means (sword decoration) on the side with the highest expectation among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It can be said that it is more desirable to execute the operation only when the operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). That is, in this case, either when the reception allowable state in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity occurs or when the reception allowable state in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Even so, the wide area type front staging can be executed prior to this, but for the first wide area type front staging, there is an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It will be feasible only when granted. In this case, the first reception permissible state may be generated as a reception permissible state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword decoration body 5001. On the other hand, the second wide area type front staging is executed regardless of whether the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity or the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. It is possible. At this time, the second wide area type front staging is executed in the same manner when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It may be performed in a different manner.

Further, when the image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-effect is being performed is displayed by the integrated image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. However, even in such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is for the simulated image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-effect is being performed. It may be displayed as an image that does not include. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the image (integrated image) is different. At this time, the image may be displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or the image may not be integrated with the peripheral decorative image in the first place. It may be displayed as.

According to the above-mentioned production example, in the second reception allowable state shown in FIG. 161, the image (integrated image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound is output as the reception allowable sound. However, the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 162, the image (integrated image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are the acceptance allowable sounds, respectively. It is said that it can be output. However, in the first acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 162, even when a mode different from the special mode (low-expected mode used in FIG. 161) is displayed as the image (integrated image IG). As for the reception allowable sound, the processing as described with reference to FIG. 162 is performed, and it goes without saying that the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound can be output as the reception permissible sound.

At the start of output of the second permissible sound (message sound), the image related to the wide area type pre-effect remains, and it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the image (integrated image IG). In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the image (integrated image IG), the state where only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output is changed to the state where the second allowable sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the image (integrated image IG) is displayed in a special mode by the reception allowable sound. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the image with a special aspect (integrated image IGd) will be exposed. Inside, the image (integrated image IG) is gradually exposed.

The integrated image IG includes a display target area (partition image KG) of the gauge image GG, but the integrated image IG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (IGa) or a high expectation mode (IGd). Even in this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG (the part that is the target part where the gauge image GG is displayed and increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, how much time is left can be easily recognized regardless of the mode of the image.

As described above with reference to FIG. 144, the mode of the peripheral decorative image is different from that of the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd). Further, the operation means (such as the effect button) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the image, but the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the above-mentioned production example, when the game is in a predetermined gaming state, the reception allowable state at the time of suppression in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific production sound is suppressed, and the specific production sound are suppressed. There are multiple reception permissible states at the time of non-suppression where operation reception is permitted in the absence, but in the first reception permissible state among the reception permissible states at the time of suppression, the integrated image IG is a special mode. While it can be displayed, the integrated image IG is not displayable in the special mode (IGd) in the second reception allowable state among the reception allowable states at the time of non-suppression, and is different from the special mode. It can be displayed with. In the second reception allowable state, the integrated image IG is not selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) having different expectations excluding the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). It may be possible to display only. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the effect is poor as compared with the case where the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance allowable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance allowable state) and the second condition (second acceptance allowable state) is satisfied. In the case, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is one of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 (for example, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 154 and 155). ) Is adopted and displayed as described above. However, when such a third reception permissible state (valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease) is generated, the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type) is prior to this, as in the first reception permissible state. (Producing sound) ”is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display that does not appear in other accepted accepted states including the first accepted accepted state and the second accepted accepted state ( It is desirable that the post-operation effect) and the post-operation output sound are executed. That is, when the "BGM reproduction sound" is put into a suppressed state (or a non-output state) when the reception allowable state occurs, it is expected that a mode (special mode) with a high degree of expectation will be displayed as an integrated image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, only the fact that the "BGM reproduction sound" is inferior to the unsuppressed output becomes conspicuous, and the game is played. There is concern that the interest will decline. In this respect, in the third reception allowable state, it is possible to appear an aspect in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and then the post-operation display that appears only when this aspect appears is executed. Even when a special aspect does not appear as the integrated image IG, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

However, regardless of whether the first reception allowable state or the third reception allowable state is performed, the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation reception. It is desirable that the output is not restarted in the non-suppressed mode, and the display change and the output sound after the operation are executed while maintaining the suppressed state (or non-output state).

Further, even if the reception allowable state is generated after the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of effect sound)" is put into the suppressed state (or non-output state), when the third reception allowable state occurs, the third reception is permitted. 1 Unlike the case of the acceptance allowable state, the integrated image IG may not be displayed in a special mode, and may be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of effect sound)" is set to the suppressed state (or non-output state), either the first acceptance allowable state or the third acceptance allowable state is set. You will be able to add some fun about what happens.

Further, in the third reception allowable state, it is assumed that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but instead of this, the display target area of the gauge image GG is not included (FIG. 159, FIG. The image (which may or may not be an integrated image) may be executed as a valid period in which the image (which may or may not be an integrated image) is displayed in the embodiment shown in 160). It can be said that the same action and effect can be achieved even with such a configuration. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types having different generation conditions are prepared as the reception allowance state, but when a reception allowance state different from the first reception allowance state occurs. However, when this is a reception allowable state of a specific type, it is desirable that the integrated pachinko image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, for the reception allowable state where the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd), it is possible to execute it in the automatic reception mode in order to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when the operation is forgotten. Is desirable.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 162, the automatic button function is enabled at a predetermined timing within the set time (valid period), but it is automatically activated when the set time (valid period) ends or after the set time ends. The button function may be enabled to start the execution of "the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period". In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is enabled is the same as the “processing from the timing tC4f” shown in FIGS. 162 (g) and 162 (h).

For the image applied to the extinction effect shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, a predetermined transmittance is set for the image itself so that the image behind the image can be visually recognized, although it is difficult. good.

According to the effect example shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, when the operation by the player is accepted or the automatic button function is enabled and the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the image (integral). Both the aspect of the modified image IG) and the aspect of the gauge image GG are displayed in a good visibility state without being obscured by the extinction effect (FIG. 163 (f), See FIG. 164 (i)). As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-operation effect while recognizing in which mode the image (integrated image IG) is displayed and how much time is left. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 163, even if the operation reception is performed and the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed in the second reception allowable state, the background image is displayed before and after the post-operation effect is started. I try to maintain this without causing a switch. On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 164, when the operation reception is performed in the first reception allowable state and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed, before and after the post-operation effect is started. The background image is switched (after the operation, the space background).

According to such a configuration, the automatic reception function can be effectively used, and even if the operation is forgotten, the background image can be appropriately switched. Will be able to progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception allowable state where the automatic reception function is not enabled, the background image is not changed, so if you forget to operate it, the background image will not be switched or only the background image will be displayed. It becomes possible to avoid causing inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

Further, in the second reception allowable state, after the operation reception (or activation of the automatic button function) is performed, most of the display area overlaps with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect, so that the image cannot be visually recognized. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small part that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect, the aspect after the operation can be confirmed by checking the image in that part. Will be able to be recognized, and the disadvantages of executing the wide area disappearance effect can be eliminated. In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, when the operation reception (or the activation of the automatic button function) is performed in the second reception allowable state, the jackpot symbol appears after the operation in a relatively high proportion. The background images when the post-operation effect is executed should be different from each other when the effect is executed and when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of the jackpot symbol to appear is relatively low. Is more desirable. These ratios may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself is changed when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol is relatively high, whereas the post-operation effect is performed in a mode in which the rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol is relatively low. The background image may be kept unchanged when is executed.

In the above-mentioned effect example, when the operation opportunity is given, the effect sound of a specific type is output in the non-suppressed mode (second reception allowable state), and the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppressed mode. There are cases where the output is set to non-output (first acceptance allowed state), and the rate (expectation) at which the post-operation effect is executed differs depending on the type so that it appears only when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the staging when the operation opportunity is given. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the first reception allowable state, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output or not output in a suppressed mode, and when a post-operation effect occurs. It is decided to devise a staging so that the staging sound corresponding to this can be heard conspicuously. In this respect, in the above configuration, regarding the reception allowable sound output when the first reception allowable state occurs, if the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the production reception is performed. Since the output state is terminated based on the above, it becomes possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

Multiple types are prepared as reception allowable states in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd), and in any of these reception allowable states, operation reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. Then, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle. On the other hand, there are a plurality of types of acceptance allowance states in which the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in a special mode (IGd), but these acceptance allowance states are when the acceptance allowance sound is in the output state. The reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle when the operation reception is performed, and the reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated in the middle when the operation reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both the second reception allowable state, etc. (can occur under different conditions).

As described above, there are sound effects and message sounds as reception allowable sounds. In this respect, the message sound is always interrupted when the production is accepted while the integrated image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), whereas the sound effect is the sound effect. , When the integrated image is displayed when it is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), it is not interrupted when it is interrupted when the effect is accepted while it is in the output state (first acceptance allowed state). It is desirable to have a time (second reception acceptance state). As the acceptance allowance state in which the message sound is output, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of types of acceptance allowance states including the first acceptance allowance state.

In the wide area type pre-effects shown in FIGS. 162 and 164, it is decided to realize by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect. In this regard, in both the first wide area type pre-effect and the second wide area type pre-effect, an image (integrated image) that imitates the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is displayed in both of the pre-effects. However, the image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide area type pre-effect is the image (integrated image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance allowance state (first acceptance allowance state). It is different from the above, and it does not gradually change to the image (integrated image IG).

That is, the image A2 (FIG. 164 (d)) displayed in the first wide area type pre-effect is not displayed when the second wide area type pre-effect is executed prior to the occurrence of the first reception allowable state. It is set to the display state (invisible state). Then, after a predetermined time (FIG. 164 (e)) in which no image of the operation target is displayed (maintained as an invisible state), as an image within the execution period of the second wide area type pre-effect. , An image different from the image A2 displayed in the first wide area type front staging is displayed (FIG. 164 (f)). And, this "image within the execution period of the second wide area type pre-effect" is the image itself (integrated image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance allowance state (first acceptance allowance state). The image HSE related to the second wide area type pre-production is displayed in a form that straddles the occurrence of the reception allowable state (first reception allowable state), so that the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. It will be allowed to accept operations while it is being done. The image (integrated image IG) is displayed even at the time when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is started (FIG. 164 (i)), whereby the first image is displayed. It is displayed over the period from before the acceptance acceptance status occurs to after it ends.

Here, when the image A2 is displayed in the wide area type pre-effect (first wide area type pre-effect), the operation means (operation receiving unit) that the image A2 is imitating will soon be (another effect). An operation opportunity will always be given (without sandwiching). That is, in the above-mentioned effect example, the image A2 is hidden and the "operation target" is set in the wide area type pre-effect. An image in which the operation means (operation receiving unit) is imitated is different from the first (A2) image after the "state in which no imitation image is not displayed" is generated. It is displayed as an integrated image IG).

According to such a configuration, in order to suggest that a reception acceptance state with a high degree of expectation occurs, operation reception is permitted even when the image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect. It will be expected to encourage operations without delaying the timing. That is, if the image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect and the acceptance allowed state is generated while the image is displayed, the timing at which the operation acceptance is permitted suddenly arrives. As a result, there is a possibility that operation delays will occur frequently even though the previous production is being executed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance allowable state, a reproduction image having a depiction different from the reproduction image displayed within the set time of the reception acceptance state is preceded. Not only is it displayed, but after a period of time during which no image is displayed, the image displayed within the set time of the acceptance allowable state is displayed. That is, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that the first acceptance allowable state can occur only within the period after the image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptance state is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the operation delay from occurring while displaying the image for a long time as a pre-effect.

In order to suitably obtain such an action effect, it is not the "time required for the first wide area type pre-effect" or the "time during which the image A2 is displayed", but rather the "time after the second wide area type pre-effect is executed". It is better to set so that "1 time until the acceptance acceptance state occurs" and "time from the display of the image (integrated image IG) to the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptance state" are shorter. Clearly desirable. The image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide area type pre-staging.

Further, in order to suitably obtain such an action effect, the image (integrated image IG) displayed in the second wide area type front staging is referred to as an "operation in a movable region" as an operation means (operation receiving unit). This is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when operated" (see FIG. 145, etc.), whereas the image A2 displayed in the first wide area type front staging is such. It is more desirable to display without dynamic display. The image (integrated image IG) displayed in the second wide area type front staging will continue to be in the dynamic display state even after the first reception allowable state occurs. In addition, the image (integrated image IG) displayed in the narrow-area type pre-effect also expresses "operation in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as the operation means (operation receiving unit). This is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display state is continued even after the second acceptance acceptance state occurs.

The image (integrated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 164 (f) and the image (integrated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 164 (g) are images. Although they are the same in themselves, they may be different in terms of transmittance.

It is more desirable to display the image KTH related to the narrow-range type front staging shown in FIG. 163 as an image having a size that can cover the entire image (integrated image IG) from the front side. .. Then, by at least either reducing the display area of the image KTH or increasing its transmittance, an image (integrated image IG) is displayed from the place where the image KTH is displayed. ) Should be displayed in such a way that it gradually becomes exposed over time.

Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 related to the wide area type front staging shown in FIG. 164, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the image (integrated image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the image (integrated image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image having a size that can cover the entire image (integrated image IG) from the front side, similar to the image KTH related to the narrow area type pre-effect (FIG. 164 (FIG. 164). e)) An image (integrated image IG) from the place where the image HTH2 was displayed by at least either reducing the display area or increasing the transmittance. Is designed to be gradually exposed with the passage of time. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to emphasize the depiction of the image A2, there is a demerit that it is difficult to visually recognize the image when giving an operation opportunity (any operation). It becomes difficult to recognize whether an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs).

The wide-area type pre-effect is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect, and for the effect sound output by the wide-area type pre-effect, these are combined into one sound data (1). It is desirable that it be output by playing two sound effects / music).

Further, in the narrow-range type pre-staging shown in FIG. 163, the background image displayed before this is maintained without being changed in the narrow-range type pre-staging, but the wide-area type shown in FIG. 164 is maintained. In the pre-staging, the background image displayed before this is changed in the wide-area pre-staging (here, it is changed at the start of the wide-area pre-staging). In such a configuration, the background change can be executed as a part of the wide-area type pre-effect, so that the front is more effective than the narrow-range type pre-effect that is limited to the partial effect change. It will be executed as a production. It should be noted that the background image (FIG. 163 (a)) displayed before the narrow-area type pre-effect is performed and the background image (FIG. 164 (FIG. 164)) displayed before the wide-area type pre-effect is performed. The background image may be different from a)).

In the second wide area type front staging shown in FIG. 164 (f), the integrated image integrated with the "peripheral decorative image in which the section image KG that divides the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)" is integrated. Although it was decided to display the image as the IG, in the first wide area type pre-staging shown in FIG. 164 (d), it was decided to display the image in which such a section image KG is not decorated (depicted). As a result, in the first wide area type pre-staging, at least the remaining time can be enjoyed without causing the player to worry about the pre-staging. The image in which the section image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be an image in which the section image KG decorated (depicted) is not displayed in the integrated image IG, and at least a part of the integrated image IG is displayed. In addition to the mode in which the decoration (gauge area) of the above is not displayed, the shape itself may be different from that of the integrated image IG.

As described above, "an operation acceptance state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state is permitted, and is executed in an automatic reception mode". Are prepared in a plurality of forms having different generation conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and a "first acceptance allowable state" is prepared as one of these acceptance acceptance states. However, these acceptance-acceptable states include "the first wide-area type front staging (FIGS. 164 (c) to (e)) in which the image is displayed and hidden, and the timing at which the acceptance-acceptable state occurs. In addition to the "first acceptance allowed state" in which the second wide area type pre-effect (FIGS. 164 (e) to (g)) in which the image is displayed is performed, the image is displayed and hidden. The first wide area type pre-effect is not performed, and the second wide area type pre-effect (FIGS. 164 (e) to (g)) in which the image is displayed straddling the occurrence timing of the reception permissible state is performed. It is desirable to include the state. That is, in this case, in the first reception allowable state, the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a manner that appears only at the time of a big hit is higher than in the specific reception allowable state, so that the operation reception is permitted. It will be possible to enhance the game entertainment from the time when the timing significantly before (the timing when the first wide area type pre-production appears) arrives. In this case, the second wide area type pre-effect performed when the first reception permissible state occurs and the second wide area type pre-effect performed when the specific reception permissible state occurs do not necessarily have the same contents, and they do not necessarily have the same contents. It may be executed as a different effect content (image). Further, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state.

As described above, the "acceptance allowed state in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode and is executed in the non-automatic reception mode" is the occurrence condition (variation). (Patterns, etc.) are prepared in different forms, and a "second acceptance acceptance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance acceptance states.

The wide area type pre-effect performed in the first reception allowable state is performed under the condition that "specific type production sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or non-output, but "specific type production sound" is performed. (BGM reproduction) ”is executed for a longer time than the narrow-range type pre-effect (second reception allowable state) executed while being output unsuppressed, so this is preferably maintained for the game entertainment. You will be able to. In particular, among the wide-area type pre-effects, the first wide-area type pre-effect alone is made to be executed for a longer time than the narrow-area type pre-effect, so that the game entertainment is suitable from a long time before the reception acceptance state occurs. Will be able to increase. The timing at which the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or non-output may be set to arrive while the first wide area type pre-effect is being executed, or the first wide-area type pre-effect may be performed. The production may arrive before the execution starts.

According to the above-mentioned production example, when the wide area type pre-effect (FIG. 164) is performed when the first reception allowable state is generated, the effect change including the background image is generated, whereas when the second reception allowable state is generated, the effect is changed. When the narrow-range type pre-effect (FIG. 163) is performed, the background image is not changed and the effect is changed while maintaining the background image. Furthermore, in the first reception permissible state that occurred while such a wide area type pre-effect is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation effect (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether or not the operation is performed. On the other hand, in the second reception permissible state that occurred while the narrow-area type pre-effect is being performed, the background image is not changed by the post-operation effect, and the effect is maintained while the effect is maintained. There is. According to such a configuration, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence of this in the first acceptance allowable state, so that the effect is compared with the second acceptance acceptance state. It will be possible to greatly enhance the sexuality, and it will be possible to encourage more concentration on operation-related productions.

In the wide area type extinction effect according to the above-mentioned production example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 164 (j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide area disappearance effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 164 (i), the post-operation effect (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed while the background image is not changed. Then, after the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the wide area type extinction effect first makes the background image displayed when the reception is permitted state difficult or invisible (FIG. 164 (j)). The background image is not changed in the situation shown in (1), and then the background image is changed by displaying another background image (the situation shown in FIG. 164 (k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 164 (l)). Other background images may be displayed in such a way that they are gradually exposed while the wide area disappearance effect is being performed, or are displayed after the wide area disappearance effect is completed. You may.

In the example shown in FIG. 164, as the post-operation effect, first, the display change in the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed. As a post-operation effect, the execution may be started first, and the display change on the liquid crystal display may be started later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As described above, a plurality of "acceptance allowance states in which the automatic acceptance mode is executed and the wide area type extinction effect is executed" are prepared in different forms of occurrence conditions (variation pattern, etc.), and one of these acceptance acceptance states is provided. As one of them, the "first acceptance state" is prepared. However, in these reception allowable states, in addition to the "first reception allowable state", the "post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) in the same mode as the first reception allowable state can be executed, but the wide area type disappearance effect". It is desirable to include the "special reception permissible state" in which is executed as a different image (the display timing may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-operation effect is performed, the extinction effect will be different, so that it will be possible to improve the effect and it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed. become. The special reception permissible state may be the specific reception permissible state described above. The specific reception allowable state and the special reception allowable state are executed in the same manner as the first reception allowable state in terms of the display timing of the image, the processing related to the output of the reception allowable sound, the processing related to the extinction effect, and the like. ..

As described above, a plurality of "acceptance allowance states in which the non-automatic acceptance mode is executed and the narrow area type extinction effect is executed" are prepared in different forms of occurrence conditions (variation pattern, etc.), and these acceptance acceptance states are prepared. As one of the above, a "second reception permissible state" is prepared. However, in these reception allowable states, in addition to the "second reception allowable state", the post-operation effect (for example, conversation notice and movable body movement) of a type different from the second reception allowable state (third post-operation effect). ) Is possible, but it is desirable that the narrow-range disappearance effect includes a special reception allowable state in which the same image is executed (the timing of display may be the same). That is, in this case, even if different post-operation effects are performed, the extinction effect itself is displayed as the same image, so it is easy to be in a situation where the operation is accepted regardless of the type of post-operation effects. You will be able to recognize it. The special reception permissible state is executed in the same mode as the second reception permissible state in terms of the display timing of the image, the processing related to the output of the reception permissible sound, the processing related to the extinction effect, and the like.

In the narrow area type disappearance effect, the image KSE related to the narrow area type disappearance effect is hidden even when the image (integrated image IG) is hidden after the post-operation effect is started. It was decided to maintain the display state (see FIG. 163 (i)). In this respect, the image (integrated image IG) is more than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation effect is started) until the image (integrated image IG) is hidden. It is desirable to set so that the time from when) is hidden until the image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearance effect is hidden is longer. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be performed while maintaining the display state of the image (integrated image IG) even after the post-operation effect is started so that the mode can be confirmed. It seems that the reason why it is not clearly revealed is not due to the "image in which the display state is maintained" but to the staging by the "image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearance effect". By being able to do this, it will be possible to suppress the decline in the interest in games. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-range disappearance effect is performed by a dynamic display using an image different from the image, rather than a fade-out that ends relatively quickly. Regarding "dynamic display by another image" as such a narrow area type disappearance effect, multiple types with different expectations are prepared, and they appear selectively according to the type of acceptance acceptance state with different generation conditions. It is more desirable to do so.

According to the wide area type extinction effect according to the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to expect a function suggesting that the first reception allowable state is executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second reception allowable state, since the operation is accepted only by the operation by the player and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect is executed without affecting the entire screen. However, it can be said that it is advantageous that the image applied to the extinction effect is executed by the small narrow area type extinction effect in that the post-operation effect can be immediately executed in a state of good visual recognition. According to such a configuration, in the case of the wide area type extinction effect, it is required to change from the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of the narrow area type extinction effect, the background image is not changed. It will be possible to ensure visibility just by performing a post-operation effect while maintaining the above.

As described above, in the second reception allowable state, there are a plurality of modes (first mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination. , Including the second aspect), the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed. In this respect, in the case where the first aspect (a mode having a relatively high ratio) appears and the case where the second aspect (a mode having a relatively low ratio) appears as the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect), In both cases, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state, there are a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination. , The fourth aspect is included), and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed. In this respect, in the case where the third aspect (a mode having a relatively high ratio) appears and the case where the fourth aspect (a mode having a relatively low ratio) appears as the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect), there are cases. When the wide area disappearance effect is executed in different modes (images), or when the third aspect (a mode having a relatively high ratio) appears, the wide area disappearance effect is executed and the fourth aspect (relatively) It is desirable to execute the narrow-range disappearance effect when a mode with a low ratio) appears. The narrow area type extinction effect at this time may be the same as or different from the narrow area type extinction effect performed corresponding to the second acceptance allowable state.

According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance allowance state in which the wide area type extinction effect may occur among the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state, the extinction effect itself has a degree of expectation. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the low visibility of the post-operation effect due to the wide area type extinction effect. In addition to the 1st acceptance allowance state and the 2nd acceptance allowance state, the 4th acceptance allowance state and the 5th acceptance allowance state, which will be described later, are the fluctuation patterns in which the jackpot is lost and the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot is won. It can occur, and the first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern described above, and the fourth fluctuation pattern and the fifth fluctuation pattern described later are "the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (at the time of loss). Needless to say, it is prepared as a pair.

Further, the second acceptance allowable state may be set to be able to occur not only in the second fluctuation pattern but also in the first fluctuation pattern. For example, the second acceptance acceptance state is generated at a relatively early timing in the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance acceptance state is generated at a relatively late timing.

Timing when the display output (display on the layer) related to the image (integrated image IG) ends within the period when the image of the disappearance effect is displayed (timing from when the operation is accepted until it is hidden) May be different between the first permissible acceptance state and the second permissible acceptance state.

If the operation is accepted in the "situation in which the image KTH related to the narrow area type pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 163 (d), the image KTH is not hidden as a trigger. It is desirable that the post-operation effect is started to be executed while the display of the image KTH is continued. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 163 (f). After that, when the narrow area type extinction effect is started to be executed, the "image KSE applied to the narrow area type extinction effect" makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the "image KTH applied to the narrow area type pre-effect". It is desirable to advance the production so that it is done.

Further, even when the operation is accepted in the "situation in which the image HTH2 related to the wide area type pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 164 (g), the image HTH2 can be hidden by taking this as an opportunity. Instead, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started to be executed while the display of the image HTH2 is continued. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 164 (i). After that, when the wide-area extinction effect is started to be executed, the "image HSE related to the wide-area extinction effect" makes it difficult or invisible to see the "image HTH2 related to the wide-area pre-effect". It is desirable to advance the production.

In the example shown in FIG. 162, when the operation reception is permitted while the "specific type production sound (BGM reproduction)" is in the non-output state, the "specific type production sound (BGM reproduction)" Regarding "BGM reproduction)", it is not always necessary to re-output until the symbol is stopped. For example, in the timing tC6, either the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" that has already been turned off or the "effect sound related to the post-operation effect" that is started to be output when the operation is accepted. It is also possible to newly start the output of a special production sound different from the above. The output of the special effect sound is not started when the operation is accepted, but is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern.

The image related to the wide area type pre-effect and the image related to the narrow area type pre-effect are displayed until the setting time of the reception allowable state is completed (or until the automatic reception button is activated). May be good. Further, the output state of the first permissible sound may be maintained until the set time of the reception permissible state is completed (or until the automatic reception button is activated).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the image of the operation receiving portion is displayed in both the wide area type front effect and the narrow area type front effect, but in the wide area type front effect (first wide area type front effect). , The mode (image data) different from the mode (image data) that appears in the period in which the operation reception is permitted (first reception allowable state) is displayed. As a result, in the wide area type pre-effect (first wide area type pre-effect), even if the image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, the operation reception is permitted. While making it difficult for misrecognition to occur, it will be possible to appeal to the occurrence of operation reception production (reception acceptance state), which will enable large-scale pre-production that takes a relatively long time. become. In the second wide area type pre-effect and narrow area type pre-effect, the image (integrated image) is displayed in the mode (image data) that appears in the period (acceptance allowed state) in which the operation reception is permitted. As the previous effect is hidden (the display area decreases), this is gradually revealed. That is, in this case, the image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptance allowance state occurs continues the display state from before the acceptance acceptance state occurs to after it occurs. This also applies to the fourth acceptance acceptance state described later.

In the production example shown in FIG. 161 (FIG. 163) and the production example shown in FIG. 162 (FIG. 164), changes according to the operation reception (in the post-operation production) regardless of the production example. Yes, at the time when the execution starts (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission), the image (gauge image) is displayed without being hidden (further, dynamic display). (See FIG. 163 (f), FIG. 164 (i), etc.). After that, the extinction effect (narrow area extinction effect or wide area extinction effect) is started to be executed (see FIGS. 163 (g), 164 (j), and the like). However, in the wide area type extinction effect executed in a relatively large range, it becomes difficult to visually recognize most of the changes (post-operation effect) that have once appeared clearly, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, when the narrow-area extinguishing effect is executed, changes according to the operation reception (changes caused by post-operation effects such as display changes and lamp emission) prior to the execution of the narrow-area extinguishing effect. At least one of) is started to be executed, and at this point, the image (gauge image) is not hidden and is displayed without being obscured by the narrow-range disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area type extinction effect is executed, the change according to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, etc.) is performed after the operation prior to the execution of the wide area type extinction effect. At least one of the changes that occur) may not be started. That is, in this case, when the change according to the operation reception (the post-operation effect, at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started, the image (gauge image) Is displayed without being hidden, but it is difficult to see due to the wide-area extinction effect (FIG. 164 (j)).

That is, when the narrow-area extinction effect is executed, the operation is performed when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. The display state of the model image (gauge image) will be maintained in the same mode as that displayed before the reception was made. In this case, at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the simulated image (gauge image) is not difficult to see due to the narrow-range disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area disappearance effect is executed, FIG. 162 (j) may appear after passing through FIG. 162 (i), or post-operation effect without passing through FIG. 162 (i). 162 (j) may appear at the time when the execution is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the acceptance allowable state executed in the "suppression operation reception effect" in which the effect sound of a specific type can be suppressed is a state in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or no output. In addition to the first acceptance allowable state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first aspect shown in FIG. 162)", the "weak suppression mode (second aspect shown in FIG. 161)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low ) ”, As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance allowance state are prepared. In this case, the specific type of effect sound to be suppressed may be a different effect sound, or may be output as an effect sound having the same function, such as a BGM reproduction effect sound. Just do it.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an effect as to how much the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed when the set time (valid period) in which the operation reception is allowed occurs. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned action and effect, the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on which of the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" and the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" occurs. It is desirable that the rate at which the symbols appear) is different. Here, the ratio (expectation degree) that is executed in a mode in which the "post-operation effect according to the operation reception" appears only when the big hit is won when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs. , It is lower than the rate (expectation) that is executed in the mode in which the "post-operation effect according to the operation reception" appears only when the big hit is won when the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" occurs. ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)", the effect corresponding to the high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) and the reach state are not even formed (or reach). A state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach.) While it is possible to appear in any of the staging according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)). ”Does not occur in the low expectation effect pattern, but may occur as an effect corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the jackpot expectation when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" occurs. It can be said.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned action and effect more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" that can be transferred based on the satisfaction of the special effect condition, and in the "special effect state", the player Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (valid period) when an operation promotion image (such as an image or gauge display) is displayed, a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM playback effect sound) is displayed. ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed each time the set time (valid period) in which the operation reception is allowed occurs. It has become possible to provide a directing property (whether a weak suppressing mode or a plurality of modes including a strong suppressing mode appears), and apart from the expectation degree suggested by the post-operation effect, such a directing property. Since the degree of expectation is also suggested by (how much it is suppressed), it is expected that the game entertainment will be further improved when the reception of the production is permitted. In this case, the above-mentioned second reception allowable state does not occur in the "special effect state", but can occur in a different effect state (normal effect state).

In addition, a variation pattern (for example, a highly expected variation pattern) in which the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" and the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowance state)" can be sequentially executed within the symbol variation. Of these, an effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowance state)" on the side with a relatively high expectation occurs. ) ”Will remain, so it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of the specific type of staging sound is small (weak suppression mode). It will be like.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the decline in the game interest when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" is described.
-When a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the effect determination is made. Regardless of which result is obtained as (notice judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas "weak suppression mode (first suppression)" is assumed. Operation reception production) ”
-Even if the above specific fluctuation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), the production of the specific fluctuation pattern does not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it shall occur when the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" is generated in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern. Compared to when it did not occur, the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected mode when the effect is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowed state)" (a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit). It is desirable to increase the rate of execution in.

In such a configuration, in the production according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" always occurs. When it does not necessarily occur and the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, a highly expected post-operation effect is executed in the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)". Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to attract attention as to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" can be attracted attention. ) ”Will occur, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same fluctuation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)", and for example, the "strong suppression mode". (1st acceptance permissible state) "may occur within the 1st fluctuation pattern, and" weak suppression mode (4th acceptance permissible state) "may occur within the 4th fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 165 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which the fourth acceptance acceptance state occurs.

Now, for example, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the above-mentioned "special effect state" and the "fourth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a may use the peripheral control MPU1511a. First, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fourth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the staging determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU1511a is shown in FIG. 165 (b). In addition, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives, the operation acceptance regarding the fourth post-operation effect is permitted. To generate. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance allowable state (valid period),
-While the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fourth fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, the set time (valid period) at which operation reception is permitted is set, but within the set time (valid period). When the operation reception is made in, the "conditional suppression reception effect" (Fig.) That changes the "BGM reproduction sound" from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (mode in which the suppression degree is relatively low). 165 (a), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) where the operation acceptance is allowed, the operation corresponding to the fourth acceptance acceptance state. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 165 (h))" that does not generate a post-effect (post-operation effect)
It is designed to be generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method for outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned is set in the strong suppression mode (for example). , A method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is "10") having a lower suppression degree than the volume value (audible volume) is "0") can be adopted.

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (fourth reception allowance state)", unless the operation is accepted by the operation by the player, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM)" is used. Since the "playback sound) is not shifted to the" state of being output in the suppressed mode ", it seems that the" non-suppressed reception effect (first reception allowable state) "shown in FIG. 161 is occurring. You will be able to do it. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a "suppression reception effect" by changing to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppression mode" when the player operates it. Since it will be possible to get rid of it, it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game by creating a surprise effect.

In order to obtain such an effect, the fourth variation that allows "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 165)" to occur depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The pattern can be selected only when it is in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone), and when it is in the special effect state, it is "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (Fig.). 161) ”can be selected depending on the result of the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.) The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped compared to when it is in the normal effect state (expectation degree) ) Should be high. According to such a configuration, when the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" appears. In addition to the above-mentioned surprise-like staging elements, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned action and effect more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" can be generated in both the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". In the "normal production state", the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 161)" is performed within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired in the winning). ) ”And“ Suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (Fig. 162) ”are allowed to occur in sequence, and in the“ special effect state ”, one fluctuation pattern (one paired by winning) "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (Fig. 162)" are sequentially arranged in the effect according to the fluctuation pattern). It is desirable to be able to occur.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect", when the set time (valid period) has elapsed without the operation being accepted, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound)" is completed. ) Is output in a weakly suppressed mode ”, and it will progress to the subsequent production without shifting to the state. That is, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". It is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, and since the subsequent production will be progressed, it is said that the expectation is relatively low. Even when the operation reception effect (valid period) in is generated, it becomes possible to more positively encourage the operation by the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are cases where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 165)" occurs and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 161)". When "" occurs, the same production sound is output for the same time as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound), and this also causes "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production". (FIG. 165) "and" non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 161) "are made difficult to recognize.

Further, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 165)", the same as when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 161)" occurs.
a. Prior to the acceptance of operations, a narrow-range pre-effect is performed at timing tD1,
b. When the timing tD2 arrives shortly before the set time occurs, the output of the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tD2. point,
c. The point that the second permissible sound (for example, a message sound) is not output, but the first permissible sound (for example, a sound effect) is output.
d. When the timing tD2 arrives shortly before the set time occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays an image (integrated image) that imitates the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect. At the same time, a gauge image suggesting the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed.
e. Even if the operation is accepted during the output of the reception allowable sound, the reception allowable sound in the output state is not terminated halfway.
f. At the time when the operation is accepted, the image (integrated image) and the gauge image are not hidden, and the display state is continued. G. While the image (integrated image) and the gauge image are displayed, the point at which the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow area disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted, and so on. Each configuration is also adopted, and either "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)" or "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" occurs. I try to make it difficult to recognize if I am doing it. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, "a specific type of staging sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the sound has been shifted to the "state of being performed", it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained each time the production is accepted.

Therefore, as a display method for the image, the gauge image, the narrow-range type pre-effect, and the narrow-range type extinction effect, for example, as in the case where the “non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 161)” occurs, FIG. 163 is shown. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is desirable to adopt the same mode as the effect example shown in FIG. 161 for the timing at which those images are hidden. However, it is not always necessary to adopt the same embodiment.

Further, even in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)", if the operation reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation reception is performed. As the corresponding post-operation effect, at least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. It has become. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tD4, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output sound (directing sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the operation is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output if the timing tD4 has not been completed. It is required to be set to maintain the state.

In addition, the reception allowable sound, operation-related display, pre-effect, extinction effect, and post-operation effect that appear in "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)" are different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 161 and 163. It is possible to appropriately adopt examples and modifications, and it is desirable to use the same method for each other.

In this production example, regarding the length of time (predetermined fixed time) that the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the weak suppression mode, "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception production (No. 1) 4 Even if the operation is accepted at tD4, which is the latest timing of the set time (valid period) of "4 reception allowable state)", the timing to end the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound applied to the post-operation effect. It is set to arrive at the same or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode related to the "BGM reproduction sound" is terminated may be set to always be the same as the timing at which the effect sound of the post-operation effect is terminated. Regardless of the configuration, it is possible to make the post-operation effect stand out when the effect reception is performed.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) is generated, the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or non-output first reception allowable state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the weak suppression mode is the fourth acceptance allowable state). However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode, no output, or a weak suppression mode). Even if an attempt is made, it is difficult to infer whether the degree of suppression is actually high (strong suppression mode or non-output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison target. In particular, it is even more so when the volume value when suppressed is not so large between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this causes a feeling of tension when the operation reception effect is generated. Can be suitably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be adversely affected. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an effect element useful for guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode is provided within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. It is prepared as follows in the form of being scattered in chronological order.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output when the fourth reception permissible state occurs is output in the middle even if the staging reception is performed while the output state is in the output state. While it is designed to be output for a predetermined time without ending, the first permissible sound output when the first permissible state of acceptance occurs is received for staging when it is in the output state. And, based on the effect reception, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, since the first permissible sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, the game cannot be guessed. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound, so that the second allowable sound is output. By confirming whether or not the sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first acceptance permissible state and the fourth acceptance permissible state output.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted includes a special mode in the first reception acceptance state. While displaying in any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)), any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode in the fourth reception allowable state. It is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode when the output of the reception allowable sound and the operation-related display is completed. However, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the fourth reception allowable state (the fourth post-operation effect), both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are constant from the time when the effect is received. In contrast to "things that are performed over time", in the post-operation production according to the first reception allowable state (first post-operation production), "the production by the production sound" is "a certain time from the time when the production reception is received". Although it is "a thing that is performed over a period of time", "a production by a liquid crystal display" is "a thing that ends when a predetermined timing arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the first reception allowable state, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" depends on the timing when the operation reception is performed. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, it becomes possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming such a deviation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to infer whether the pachinko machine 1 is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming the execution mode of the pre-effect and the extinction effect for the reception allowable state. You can also do it. That is, in the pre-effect and extinction effect according to the fourth reception allowable state, the image related to the pre-effect and the image related to the extinction effect are displayed in a relatively narrow area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-effect and extinction effect according to the first acceptance acceptance state, the image related to the pre-effect and the image related to the extinction effect are displayed in a relatively wide area, and the background image is changed at that time. I'm going to accompany you. By confirming such an aspect, it becomes possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

However, even if the staging elements useful for guessing are prepared in such a form that they are scattered in chronological order, some players do not notice them, and as a result, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, the entertainment interest may decline in the end.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception allowable state (weak suppression mode), the production sound of BGM reproduction is produced based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the set time (valid period). Make it a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the staging sound of BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression is performed. A set time (valid period) is generated in the mode so that the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing of suppressing a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) in the fourth reception allowance state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception allowance state (strong suppression mode). By confirming the timing, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the fourth reception allowable state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the operation detection is performed within the set time (valid period). If not, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 165 (h)). That is, in this case, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the operation reception for the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Although there is a price that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not a strong suppression mode but a weak suppression mode.

Further, in the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM reproduction effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is terminated is the end timing of the post-operation effect. It is set as the same timing as or earlier than. Therefore, in the fourth reception permissible state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode can be terminated can come after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppressed mode, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppressed mode or a weak suppressed mode.

Further, as described above, in the fourth reception allowable state according to the above-mentioned effect example, the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is performed regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). The length of the period during which the post-display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on the timing at which the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). The length of the period during which the output sound (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed.

According to such a configuration, the "when to perform the production reception (operation)" becomes effective, and the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed can be suitably maintained. Become.

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output with a lower suppression degree than the strong suppression mode can appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the fourth reception allowable state does not occur). You may. That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the weakly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, as the number of times the weak suppression mode appears in the production corresponding to one fluctuation pattern, including the fourth acceptance allowable state, the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol fluctuation is stopped (the first). If (1) the rate at which the acceptance allowance state is further executed) is increased, it becomes possible to further improve the staging property through the suppression status of the “BGM reproduction staging sound”.

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also be made to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first reception allowable state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strongly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 165, when the fourth reception allowable state occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is suppressed (weak) based on the fact that the operation reception is performed within the set time (valid period). (Suppression mode). However, instead of this, even when the 4th acceptance allowable state occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the 1st acceptance allow state occurs. The mode (weak suppression mode) may be set, and a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may be set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing arrives. Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of staging can be expanded. In the fourth reception allowable state, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) to the non-suppressed mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect is terminated. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number larger than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of staging sound" in an inaudible state (output in silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel allocation)). good.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this respect, in the "fourth reception allowable state", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first reception allowable state", as described above, the result of the advance notice effect determination. Based on the above, there are "a case where the operation button 410 is selected as an operation target (first operation mode)" and "a case where the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as an operation target (second operation mode)". Therefore, when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 is not a weak suppression mode but a strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the effect reception was performed in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation production has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated is
-The first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part touched by the player when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and-the operation receiving part is operated by the driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be given by any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes that the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity, and the "second operation mode" gives the sword decoration body 5001 an operation opportunity. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is "a device that can give a player an operation opportunity while moving to a specific position". However, one operating means (one operating receiving unit) may be provided with a "first operating mode" and a "second operating mode", respectively, and an operating opportunity may be provided by either of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first reception allowable state, the operation opportunity may be always given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to the above-mentioned effect example, the reception allowable state (suppression) set so that the post-operation effect is executed while the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output in the suppression mode or is in the non-output state. In the reception effect), when the image (integrated image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 144 (d)), the reception allowable state is "first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode)". When the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144 (a)) as the special mode, the reception permissible state is the "first reception permissible state". (Strong suppression mode or non-output) "or" 4th reception allowable state (weak suppression mode) ".

That is, in this case, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 144 (d)), if the operation is accepted while the reception allowable sound is being output, the operation is terminated halfway. (1st acceptance allowed state). On the other hand, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144 (a)), if the operation is accepted while the reception allowable sound is being output, the operation is terminated halfway. There will be cases where the image is not terminated halfway (1st acceptance allowed state, 4th acceptance allowed state). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144 (a)).

Further, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 144 (d)), the acceptance allowance state is executed in the automatic acceptance aspect (first acceptance acceptance state). On the other hand, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144 (a)), the acceptance allowance state is executed in the automatic reception mode and the non-automatic reception mode. Will occur (1st acceptance allowed state, 4th acceptance allowed state). According to such a configuration, the tension when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144 (a)) can be suitably maintained.

In this regard, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144 (a)), the display is performed when the first acceptance allowable state occurs and when the fourth acceptance acceptance state occurs. The size of the image may be different. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle and whether it is executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, according to the above-mentioned effect example, by confirming whether the pre-effect is executed as "wide area type pre-effect" or "narrow-range type pre-effect", a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is performed. When the sound) is set to the suppression mode, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether this is the "weak suppression mode" or the "strong suppression mode or non-output". After that, by confirming whether or not this is terminated halfway when the operation is performed while the reception allowable sound is being output, whether it is a "weak suppression mode (not halfway terminated)" or "strong suppression". It becomes possible to reconfirm whether it is "aspect or non-output (finished in the middle)" while the post-operation effect is performed.

Further, according to the above-mentioned production example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the wide-area type front is performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound) is set to the strong suppression mode or non-output. While the effect is executed, when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow-range type pre-effect is executed while the specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is not set to the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability when the narrow area type pre-effect is performed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the rate in which the mode that appears only at the time of a big hit as a post-operation effect is executed in the first reception allowable state is higher than that in the second reception allowable state (the degree of expectation is high). It is higher) as described above. This ratio may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the first reception allowable state (special reception allowable state) occurs and the second reception allowable state (predetermined reception permission state) from the time before the operation reception is performed. Since different production contents (acceptance allowance sound, image, previous effect, etc.) appear depending on when the state) occurs, the second reception allowance state occurs (or) due to such effect contents. , What is happening) If the player detects it in advance, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of a plurality of acceptance allowance states, a fifth acceptance allowance state (specification) generated based on the fact that the fifth condition is satisfied in the staging determination based on the result of the jackpot determination. The reception allowable state) is further prepared, and the operation reception is performed while making it difficult to distinguish the fifth reception allowable state from the second reception allowable state until the operation reception is performed. After that, by realizing the production progress that reminds us of the first acceptance state, it is difficult for the game entertainment to deteriorate at least until the operation reception is done. In order to suitably obtain such an action and effect, when the fifth acceptance allowance state occurs, the first acceptance allowance state is changed from the time when the second acceptance allowance state occurs until the symbol is stopped. It is desirable to set it so that the rate of occurrence is high. Further, it is desirable to set so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped differs between when the second acceptance allowable state occurs and when the fifth acceptance allow state occurs. These ratios may be 0% or 100%.

While making it difficult to distinguish between the 2nd reception permissible state and the 5th reception permissible state, the production progress that reminds us of the 1st reception permissible state after the operation reception is made in the 5th reception permissible state is realized. For example, in the case where the second reception allowable state occurs and the case where the fifth reception allowable state occurs, the same mode is output as the reception allowable sound, but the first reception allowable state occurs. In this case, a mode in which the reception allowable sound cannot be output in either the second reception allowable state or the fifth reception allowable state (for example, the type of the sound as the first allowable sound is different, and the second allowable sound is used. Further output mode, etc.) should be output. Then, when the operation is accepted in the second reception allowable state, the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while the sound that was in the output state at the time of the operation acceptance is continuously output. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state, when the operation is accepted, (all) the sounds that were in the output state at the time when the operation reception is performed are output in a suppressed mode. A state or a non-output state is set, and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect or fifth post-operation effect) is executed in the state. In this regard, if a specific effect movable body is used as a target for causing a change in both the first post-operation effect and the fifth post-operation effect, the second acceptance allowance state and the fifth acceptance allowance state can be distinguished. However, after the operation reception is performed in the 5th reception allowable state, it becomes possible to realize the staging progress reminiscent of the 1st reception allowable state. As a result, the possibility that the first acceptance acceptance state has occurred (the possibility that the acceptance acceptance sound is mistakenly heard) becomes conscious, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment interest will be suppressed. ..

That is, in this case, in the first reception allowable state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect). Performing a movable effect (such as the effect shown in FIGS. 140 (C), (D) and 141 (CC1) to (CC3)) in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is possible.

On the other hand, even in the fifth reception allowable state, as the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed, but the first operation is the effect. It is desirable to execute the effect as if the content of the effect is significantly different from that of the post-effect. That is, the fifth reception permissible state means, "Even if a situation appears in which the mode of the previous staging or the reception permissible sound suggests the possibility of the second reception permissible state with low expectation, at least the operation reception is performed. It is prepared for the purpose of "making it possible to maintain the entertainment of the game until it is done", giving a false recognition that the first acceptance acceptance state had occurred when the post-operation production was executed. If there is such a thing, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline when the misrecognition is noticed.

Therefore, as such a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), it is desirable to perform an effect having a more suppressed tendency than in the case of the first post-operation effect, and for example, an operation reception is performed. The effect change such as reducing the light emission range or making it non-light emission state without operating the specific effect movable body that was in the light emission state at that time (does not generate driving force). It is possible to perform it as an effect that causes. In the post-second operation effect, there is no effect change that tends to be suppressed, such as reducing the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body or making it non-light emitting. In this case, the specific movable decorative body has a predetermined light emitting portion.

According to such a configuration, the first reception allowable state (the first post-operation effect) is reminiscent by causing the effect change using the specific effect movable body, thereby reminding the second reception allowable state (the second). While trying to recognize that it is not a post-operation effect), it is calmly judged that it is not the first reception allowable state (first post-operation effect) while the suppressed effect content is gradually exposed. Since it will be possible to do so, it will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

In addition, in order to more preferably execute the fifth post-operation effect as an effect having a more suppressed tendency than in the case of the first post-operation effect, the first post-operation effect is an operation target. The operation means (operation receiving part such as the effect button) is made to emit light (or causes a change in light emission) when the operation reception is performed, and the drive means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means is provided. ) Is driven to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the operation means (operation receiving portion such as the effect button) targeted for operation is operated. When the reception is made, the light is turned off (it may be turned off gradually), and the drive means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means is not driven and a predetermined movement is performed. It is desirable not to cause (vibration, etc.). In this way, while performing the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative body in the first acceptance allowance state and the fifth acceptance allowance state, the first By making the mode in which the contents of the effect are opposite to each other appear in the effect after the first operation and the effect after the fifth operation, the above-mentioned action and effect can be preferably performed.

FIG. 166 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the fifth reception allowable state occurs. The fluctuation pattern will be described as the fifth fluctuation pattern, but as described above, it may be the first fluctuation pattern.

Assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the variation pattern determination is performed and the "fifth variation pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a may be used. First, an effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fifth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

Then, as described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 166 (b), when the timing tE3 when the fifth predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, the fifth operation is performed. The above-mentioned fifth acceptance acceptance state (valid period) in which the operation acceptance regarding the post-production is permitted is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptance allowable state (valid period),
-The "non-suppressed acceptance allowed state" (unsuppressed acceptance allowed state) in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of staging sound)" corresponding to the fifth fluctuation pattern maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. (See FIGS. 166 (a) and 166 (b)) ”, and ・ When the operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) where the operation reception is allowed. Even so, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started in the "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 166 (i))".
It is designed to be generated as an "unsuppressed / automatic reception effect" executed by. The timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, and may arrive when or after the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second reception allowable state has occurred until the post-operation effect is started to be executed, whereas the post-operation effect is started to be executed depending on the automatic reception mode. When this is done, the production progress as if reminiscent of the first reception permissible state will be realized, so that it will be possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest until the execution of the post-operation production is started. ..

Further, even in the fifth reception allowable state, as in the second reception allowable state, as shown in FIGS. 166 (b), (e), and (j), the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation reception is permitted is permitted. ) Occurs, when the timing tE2 arrives, the output of the "acceptable sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is started, and the output state is output across the timing tE3 where the set time occurs. I try to keep it. The length of time from the start of output of the first permissible sound to the permissible operation reception is also the same. Further, the sound itself output as the first allowable sound is the same, and the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, which is the same as the second acceptance allowable state. As a result, with respect to the reception allowable sound, the same mode appears in the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state until the operation reception is performed, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained. Be expected.

However, as described above, in the second reception permissible state, the operation is performed at the timing tB3a (FIG. 161 (e)) in which the "reception permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is in the output state after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the reception is made, the set time itself is terminated, but the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing (there is no operation) at which the output as the first allowable sound is completed. The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (FIG. 161 (e)) as at the time of the above. When the operation is accepted at the timing tE3a (FIG. 166 (e)) in which the "allowable sound)" is in the output state, the set time itself is not only terminated, but also the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)". Also, this is to be terminated halfway. That is, with respect to the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)", such behavior (halfway termination) appears when the operation reception is performed in the first acceptance allowable state. Therefore (FIG. 162 (e)), despite the fact that the fifth acceptance allowance state has occurred, the production progress as if reminiscent of the first acceptance acceptance state has been realized. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 166, when the operation reception is performed within the set time of the fifth reception allowable state (timing tE3a in the figure), the effect display device is used as a post-operation effect according to the operation reception. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 166 (d). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) maintains the execution state until the timing tE5 regardless of the time when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is in the execution state for a predetermined time. It is designed to maintain, but it is not always limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

Further, although the illustration is omitted, in this production example, the post-operation effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance allowable state (fifth post-operation effect) and the post-operation effect corresponding to the first acceptance allow state (first). In any of the post-operation effects), at least the "effect using a specific effect movable body" is executed. As described above, the contents of each of the "production using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the first reception allowable state and the "production using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the fifth reception allowable state are as described above. Is. For example, as the effect after the first operation, the movable effect (FIGS. 140 (C), (D), FIGS. 141 (CC1) to (CC3)) in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. ) Can be performed. Further, as the fifth post-operation effect, a change in effect such as reducing the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the time when the operation is accepted or making it non-light emitting state is generated. It can be done as a production.

According to such a configuration, the first reception allowable state (the first post-operation effect) is reminiscent by causing the effect change using the specific effect movable body, thereby reminding the second reception allowable state (the second). While trying to recognize that it is not a post-operation effect), it is calmly judged that it is not the first reception allowable state (first post-operation effect) while the suppressed effect content is gradually exposed. Since it will be possible to do so, it will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (fifth acceptance allowance state), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 161 (second acceptance allowance state), the setting time of the acceptance allowance state is set at the timing tE3. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the staging display device 1600 displays a model image of the operating means to be operated, and displays a gauge image suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses. Are done respectively. Further, the display mode of these images and gauge images is the same as in the case of the second reception allowable state, and for example, they are displayed as an integrated image IG. Similarly, the integrated image IG does not display the special aspect shown in FIG. 144 (d). As a result, until the operation reception is performed, the same mode appears in the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state for the image and the gauge image, so that the game entertainment is preferably maintained. It is expected.

Also in this example, the timing at which the image is displayed is the same as the time when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is started to be output, but it is not limited to this, and either one starts earlier. It may be done. Alternatively, only one of the image and the reception allowable sound (for example, only the image) may be started before the timing tE3. However, even when such another example or the other example described above is adopted, the configuration until the operation reception is performed should be matched between the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 166 (c) to 166 (f), when the timing tE3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated image (image, gauge image) is displayed. Is assumed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the effect after the fifth operation (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration). At least one of the effect movements by the body) will be started, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the effect after the fifth operation is started, the integrated image (image, gauge image) is started. Is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, no change due to the integrated image (specific layer) occurs at that time (timing tE3a), and a short time (predetermined) from there. Until the timing tE3b when the time) has elapsed, the "display on the integrated image (image, gauge image)" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. The display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) displayed in a form that makes it difficult or invisible to see a part or the whole of the integrated image (image, gauge image) in the display state is displayed. Make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated image (image, gauge image) is not hidden and displayed even when such an image (disappearance effect) is started to be displayed. Maintain the state. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated image (image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated image (image, gauge) is displayed. No change is caused due to the change in the image), and the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the extinction effect is displayed on the layer in front of it, the image and the gauge image are difficult to see or cannot be seen.

That is, in this case, despite the fact that the image of the extinction effect is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making it difficult to see the image or the gauge image (integrated image) or making it invisible. The image or gauge image (integrated image) displayed on the specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) itself remains the same as when the operation reception was permitted. The display in is maintained and no change will occur. Further, with respect to the gauge image, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced will be continued across the operation reception. This makes it difficult to see the image or gauge image (integrated image), or even in the process of making it invisible, the mode (at least a part) when the operation reception is permitted. You will be able to see it.

In addition, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated image (image, gauge image) is completed within the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) in which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is integrated. The image of the disappearance effect will be displayed when the image (image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer.

Regarding the images and gauge images, these display methods after the operation reception is done are common to the 1st reception allowable state and the 5th reception allowable state, so that the game interest is reduced by this. There is no.

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 166, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 161, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 in which the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, less than half of the predetermined display area is reached. The narrow-area type pre-effect that uses only the area of is started to be executed. Then, during the period in which the image related to the narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed, first, the display of the image (here, the integrated image) that imitates the operation receiving portion and the first permissible sound. Each output is started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the image (here, the integrated image) is started, a part or the whole of the image (integrated image) becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image related to the narrow-range type pre-effect. There is. That is, as time passes, the display range of the image related to the narrow-range type pre-staging is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image)" is used. The visibility of the image) will be gradually improved. " In this respect, even in the 5th reception allowable state, the narrow area type pre-effect is executed and the image (here, the integrated image) is displayed, and the 5th reception allowable state is performed. The timing tE3 at which the occurrence of the above occurs has arrived, and the operation reception is permitted, and the narrow-area type pre-effect is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception acceptance state occurs.

Here, the image used for such a narrow-range type pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image) is displayed. However, the image (integrated image) and the image (narrow-range type pre-effect) are displayed as one video prepared in advance, and the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) gradually increases in the image. It may be something that expresses how it is being enhanced. However, it is desirable to use the same image as the image of the narrow area type pre-aging corresponding to the second reception permissible state for the image of the narrow area type pre-aging corresponding to the fifth reception permissible state.

In the narrow-range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of the effect sound related to the image may be output. However, considering that the second reception permissible state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operation-related matters, the narrow-range type pre-production is used. It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to enhance the concentration on the effect.

In this way, even for the narrow-area type pre-staging that occurs before the operation reception is permitted, the same mode appears in the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state. It is expected to be maintained favorably.

According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the production is relatively advanced in the same manner as the production contents shown in FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (e). Even if the player is informed in advance that the highly anticipated first acceptance state has not occurred, it is interesting to know whether the second acceptance allowance state or the fifth acceptance allowance state will occur. It will be possible to make it possible, and it will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the fifth reception allowable state and the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is started to be executed, the first acceptance state is not the second reception allowable state. The production will be developed in a manner reminiscent of.

That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 166, when the operation by the player is detected (operation reception) in the fifth reception allowable state, the sound that is in the output state in the non-suppressed mode at the time when the operation reception is performed ( All of) are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state, and this is terminated halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 162 (first acceptance allowable state), when the operation reception is performed, the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are changed to the strongly suppressed mode. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (fifth reception allowable state), when the operation reception is performed, the operation is not suppressed. The "BGM reproduction sound" and the "first allowable sound" that were in the output state in the mode are set to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or are set to the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. As a result, with respect to (all) the sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode before the operation reception was performed, the operation reception was triggered in both the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state. Since the output state is set to the strong suppression mode or the output state is set to non-output state, it becomes possible to recall the first acceptance allowable state at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. 166. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In this case, it does not matter whether the output state is set to the strong suppression mode or the non-output state is triggered by the operation reception, but the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state are used. It is desirable to do the same process in. For example, in the second reception allowable state, if the sound that had been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode is changed to the non-output state by the operation reception as an opportunity, the operation reception is also the trigger in the fifth reception allowable state. The sound that had been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then is changed to the non-output state.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 166 (g) to 166 (k), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second reception allowable state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the fifth reception allowable state is executed in the automatic reception mode, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without the operation by the player, the operation reception is performed. The same process will be executed.

Therefore, in the timing tE3c, not only the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is started to be executed, but also the sound (here, the sound of BGM reproduction) that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode is strongly suppressed. The output state in the mode or the non-output state is set, and these are terminated halfway. Even in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 162), a predetermined sound (for example, the first allowable sound) is output in a non-suppressed manner until the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives, and the timing tC4f is output. In, the output state may be set to the strong suppression mode, or the output state may be set to the non-output state, and this may be terminated halfway.

Further, in the timing tE3d, the "wide area type extinction effect" is started to be executed as the above-mentioned extinction effect while the effect after the fifth operation is already in the execution state. Regarding the "wide area type disappearance effect", the image itself does not necessarily have to be the same as in the case of the first reception allowable state, but disappearance accompanied by a change from the background image displayed until the operation reception is performed. It is desirable to have it run as an effect. That is, in this case, it goes without saying that the execution is performed using at least half of the display area. As a result, regarding the extinction effect after the operation reception is performed (after the post-operation effect is executed), the same mode (wide area type extinction effect) is used in both the second reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state. Since it will be executed in, it will be possible to recall the first acceptance allowable state after the operation reception is done (after the post-operation production is executed, it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately. It is expected that the mode of such an extinction effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tE3c). The same applies to the case of the first acceptance acceptance state.

In the example shown in FIG. 166, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) ends with respect to the timing at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is output again in the non-suppressed mode in the fifth reception allowable state. Although it is set as the timing tE5 to be performed, it may be the timing that arrives while the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) may be performed. It may be the timing that arrives after the end.

Further, even in the first reception allowable state, as in the fifth reception allowable state, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set when the operation reception is performed. May be good.

In the 1st reception allowable state and the 5th reception allowable state, the process of changing the sound that was in the output state in the non-suppressed mode to the "output in the suppressed mode" or the "non-output state", and the output sound after the operation are performed. The process to be output does not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, and any of these processes may be started as long as the operation is accepted.

Further, as described above, when the operation reception is performed in the fifth reception allowable state, the specific staging movable body that has been in the light emitting state until then is turned off for a predetermined time (fifth operation). After the first operation), when the operation reception is performed in the first reception allowable state, a driving force is applied to the specific effect movable body so that the predetermined effect operation appears (after the first operation). (Direction) is desirable. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, a driving force is generated for the driving means corresponding to the operating means to be operated so that a predetermined movement (vibration or the like) appears in the operating means. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such a process in the effect after the fifth operation. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, the light emitting mode of the operation means targeted for operation is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the light emission in the operation means targeted for operation is turned off. It is desirable to do so. It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance allowance state and the fifth acceptance allowance state be such that they can appear when the same result (for example, jackpot winning) is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

Further, when the movable effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the effect after the first operation, it is desirable to enable light emission in a manner that does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

Further, in the first post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is started to be output and then continuously output, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is started. It is desirable that when the sound is output for a predetermined time, a state in which no effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (a state in which the sound is output in the strongly suppressed mode or a non-output state) appears. According to such a configuration, in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is properly executed, but there is a tendency that the effect is suppressed as compared with the case of the first post-operation effect. It will be possible to make it possible, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, it is desirable that the reception permissible sound output when they occur differs between the first reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state. That is, as described above, in the first acceptance allowable state, the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output, whereas in the fifth acceptance allowable state, the second is accepted. The permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself be output as a different sound.

Further, as described above, the first reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state (second reception allowable state) are shown in the same mode (FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) as the image (integrated image). Aspects) can be displayed. However, even if the same mode is displayed as a similar image (integrated image) in the first reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state (second reception allowable state), the size required for the display. It is desirable that the images are displayed differently (similar to each other), and in the fifth acceptance allowable state (second acceptance acceptance state), the images are displayed in a smaller mode than in the first acceptance acceptance state. However, the size is also displayed in the same mode in the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state. In the first reception allowable state, a special mode can be displayed as a simulated image (integrated image), but in the fifth reception permitted state (second reception permitted state), the simulated image (integrated image) is displayed. ) As described above, the special aspect is not displayed.

Further, in the first post-operation effect according to the first reception allowable state, the effect sound (variation pattern) that does not trigger the operation reception while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in an unsuppressed manner. It is desirable that the output sound (the effect sound output at a predetermined timing) is started to be output in a non-suppressed manner (for example, BGM return). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect according to the fifth reception allowable state, the effect sound that does not trigger the operation reception while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in an unsuppressed manner ( It is desirable to prevent the output of the staging sound (the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) from being started in a non-suppressed manner. That is, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is set to the non-output state, the production sound (the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) that is not triggered by the operation reception is non-output. Since the output is started in the suppressed mode, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first acceptance allowable state.

Further, as described above, the second acceptance allowance state can be generated in both the fluctuation pattern in which the first acceptance acceptance state occurs and the fluctuation pattern in which the first acceptance acceptance state does not occur, so that the second acceptance acceptance state can occur. When a state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance allowable state may occur within the period until the symbol change in the execution state is stopped. Further, regarding the 5th acceptance allowable state, the 5th acceptance allowance state is generated by making it possible to occur in both the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st acceptance allowance state occurs and the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st acceptance acceptance state does not occur. When this happens, there is a possibility that the first acceptance allowance state will occur within the period until the symbol change in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the 5th acceptance accepting state occurs, the ratio of the 1st acceptance accepting state occurring within the period until the symbol change is stopped is higher than when the 2nd acceptance accepting state occurs. It is desirable to set to. This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player has previously detected that the first acceptance acceptance state has not occurred before the operation acceptance is made, the fifth acceptance acceptance state has occurred. Since it becomes possible to expect the possibility, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

According to the above-mentioned production example, the operation is accepted as a result of the operation reception being performed when the sound image (integrated sound image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)). If the reception permissible sound is not terminated in the middle based on the reception, not only the reception permissible sound but also other sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (such as "BGM playback sound") are also in the non-suppressed mode. The output state will be maintained (see FIG. 161). On the other hand, as a result of the operation reception being performed when the sound image (integrated sound image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)), the operation reception is based on the operation reception. When the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle, not only the reception allowable sound but also other sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (such as "BGM playback sound") are output or not output in the strongly suppressed mode. (See FIG. 166).

According to the above-mentioned production example, in a situation where a big hit is obtained by the big hit determination, the operation is accepted when the image (integrated image) is displayed, and as a result, the operation is accepted based on the operation reception. When the permissible sound is terminated in the middle, based on the operation reception, "when the specific effect movable body emits light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 162)" and "the light emission state was obtained." There is a case where the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or turned off, and no effect operation is generated (FIG. 166). " Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest in the situation where the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle. In addition, in the case of "when the specific effect movable body emits light in a predetermined mode and the specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 162)", the light emission area is reduced or turned off by the "process of reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body". It is desirable that the part marked with light is also emitted.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the integrated image may be displayed by using a plurality of layers. Further, when the image and the gauge image are displayed separately as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and the following examples, the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output so that there is a time when they are output overlapping each other, but after the first permissible sound is output. The output of the second permissible sound may be started.

Further, in the acceptance allowable state according to each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the following examples, the image is displayed as an integrated image IG including the gauge image GG, but it is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. It does not have to be.

The acceptance acceptance state according to each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the following examples can occur in both the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

In each reception allowable state described above and each reception allowable state described later, it was decided to execute the disappearance effect as an image different from the image when the post-operation effect is executed, but it was executed in the non-automatic reception mode. As a result, it is desirable to execute the extinction effect by fading out the image itself only when the post-operation effect is not executed, in order to prevent the expectation from being recognized. In this case, the image itself displayed on the specific layer is subjected to a process of being changed from the mode in which the reception is allowed.

In each reception allowable state described above and each reception allowable state described later, even if the same reception allowable state is used, when the jackpot is won, when the jackpot is lost (missing), or for post-operation production. The type of the extinction effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such an embodiment.

The wide area disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type disappearance effect is set to less than half of the display screen, but if "display area of wide area type disappearance effect> display area of narrow area type disappearance effect", it is not always It does not have to meet the conditions of more than half or less than half. Similarly, for the pre-effect, the wide-area pre-effect is more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area pre-effect is less than half of the display screen. If it is, it does not necessarily have to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half.

The post-operation effect may be executed only by the liquid crystal display, the sound output, or the light emitted by the lamp provided on the game board 5. In short, it suffices as long as it causes some changes in the display, sound, light emission, etc., triggered by the operation reception.

Further, the "specific type of effect sound" may be a BGM reproduction sound output during normal fluctuations, or a BGM reproduction sound output over a plurality of fluctuations.

Further, the fourth reception allowance state does not necessarily have to be executed in the non-automatic reception mode, and may be executed in the automatic reception mode.

In addition, a post-operation effect when the operation reception is performed in the first reception allowable state (first post-operation effect) and a post-operation effect when the operation reception is performed in the fourth reception allow state (fourth post-operation effect). It is desirable to make the contents of each production different.

In each of the above examples and each of the examples described later, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, the process of reducing the visibility of the integrated image IG (specific layer) itself (increasing the transmittance, etc.). You may also do it at the same time.

In each of the above examples and the examples described later, the image applied to the disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance effect, narrow area type disappearance effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance, and in this case. , Even if the image is displayed so as to overlap the entire image (integrated image), it is possible to confirm the mode of the image (integrated image).

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the "narrow-range type pre-effect" means "background change (the background image that has been displayed up to that point is made invisible, and a new background image is displayed." It may also be a "pre-production without a production) that allows the production to be performed in a state." In this case, the "wide area type front effect" is a "background change (an effect that makes the background image that has been displayed invisible until then and makes the effect appear in a state where a new background image is displayed). It means "pre-production accompanied by". The background image may be a black color image, a white color image, or the like.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d) may be omitted as the mode of the integrated image. In this case, the "special aspect" is defined as an operating means (an aspect in which the shape of the image itself imitating the operation receiving portion is the same and the shape of the peripheral decorative image is different (the aspect shown in FIG. 144 (c)). It will be used.

When a model image (integrated image) is displayed in each of the above-mentioned effect examples and each effect example described later, the model image is a "movement in a movable area" or "operation in a movable area" as an operation means (operation receiving unit). As mentioned above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when it is done". In this respect, it is desirable that such dynamic display is continued on a specific layer even after the operation is accepted until it is hidden.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the display method related to the image is appropriately changed to FIGS. 144 to 160, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and the contents described in another example. Or may be added. Further, regarding the image, gauge image, reception allowable sound, and post-operation effect when the first reception allowable state occurs, FIG. 232 to FIG. 160, and among the explanatory texts and other examples corresponding to these figures, "BGM". It is also possible to appropriately change or add to the description or the content applied to another example regarding "the valid period that occurs when the sound of reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode". .. In addition, regarding the image, gauge image, reception allowable sound, and post-operation effect when the second reception allowable state occurs, see FIGS. 232 to 160, and among the explanatory texts and other examples corresponding to these figures, "BGM". It is also possible to appropriately change or add to the description or the content applied to another example regarding "the validity period that occurs while the sound of reproduction is set to the non-suppressed mode". ..

[More detailed color rendering of the image disappearance effect, etc.]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (notice effect, etc.) is selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect of the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. The transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes feasible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol staging based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It is desirable not to do so or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is the effect member to be produced as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Post-reception effect (post-operation effect) that generates predetermined changes (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one of the effect operations by the movable decorative body) is executed. Since the reception is only allowed, the performance of the reception acceptance state (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game entertainment related to the reception period will decline.

In addition, the "operation by the player" to be detected, including each of the above-mentioned examples and the following examples, is directly operated by the player such as "operation button 410" and "sword decoration body 5001". Not limited to those that are (pushing motion or sword pulling motion), "contact motion by the player to a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor and "player in a specific space" to be detected by the non-contact sensor. It also means "operation by". In short, it should be provided with one or more reception means (operation means) to be accepted so that the movement by the player (pressing movement, sword pulling movement, touch movement, non-contact movement, etc.) can be used for the staging. Just do it.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effectability is provided. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have all of these configurations, and for example, even if any one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest, or it may be possible to selectively provide some configurations that are considered necessary for obtaining further effects, or it is applicable to other configurations. The configuration described as may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have some configuration that can suppress a decline in the entertainment interest related to the reception period.

[Structure 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the motion of the player is accepted for the image display displayed using the predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600). It is possible to display after the production has progressed (after the production change based on acceptance has started), and even after the production has progressed based on the acceptance, the image display will be accepted. The player can grasp which mode (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) is displayed within the period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect contents (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as the post-reception effect) that proceed when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted are the advance notice effect (expectation suggestion effect). ) Is prepared for a plurality of reception periods (valid periods) with different types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of a type according to the result of the judgment (staging judgment).

In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when the movement by the player is accepted within the specific acceptance period, the specific post-acceptance effect image is displayed as the "effect display device 1600" based on the acceptance. In addition to being able to be displayed in the above, a specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-receipt staging image, and when the specific mode appears, the pachinko image display is made difficult to see. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance is made, and the specific mode is until the image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility, it is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally moved from the "image display" to the "specific post-reception production image". ..

However, since the image display is originally displayed within the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, if the image display is displayed even after the acceptance has been made, the acceptance will be accepted. It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a specific post-reception production image is already displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decline. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the image display is hidden (invisible) while the specific mode appears, while the specific post-reception effect is produced. The image is designed to be displayed while a specific aspect appears. That is, in this case, after the movement is accepted by the player, the display effect from the pre-reception display (reception image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception effect image) is applied while the specific mode appears. Since the transition will be realized, just by confirming whether it is in the situation before the specific mode appears or in the situation where the specific mode has finished appearing, from the pre-reception display (image display) It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the post-reception display (specific post-reception effect image) has been completed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the above-mentioned specific mode and the above-mentioned specific post-reception effect image appear based on the fact that the reception has been made, but the above-mentioned specific mode is the above-mentioned specific reception. It appears in a situation where the specific post-receipt effect image has not yet been displayed, before the post-effect image is displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance effect image has not yet been displayed, the image display becomes difficult to see due to the above specific mode, so that the image display can be visually recognized but is specific. After the reception, the production image is in a state where it can appear soon, and it will be possible to urge the player to prepare in advance to change the gaze destination from the "difficult to see image display". ..

[Structure 2]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the first reception period (valid period) of the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods (valid period). A mode in which the first post-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and the image display becomes difficult to see separately from the first post-reception effect image (first effect mode). Can appear. Further, when the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods (valid periods), the first post-reception production image is different from the first post-reception production image based on the acceptance. A mode different from the case of the first reception period (second effect) as a mode in which the post-reception effect image of 2 can be displayed and the image display becomes difficult to see separately from the second post-reception effect image. Aspects) can appear. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to any one of the first staging mode and the second staging mode, or may not correspond to any of them.

According to such a configuration, the image display can be visually recognized without confirming which of the "first post-reception effect image" and the "second post-reception effect image" is displayed as the post-reception effect image. It becomes possible to infer the type of the post-reception effect image (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) only by confirming what kind of mode is difficult. That is, the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (first effect mode, second effect mode) is a predetermined area in the "display screen of the effect display device 1600" and at least a part of the predetermined area where the image display is displayed. Whether it is realized as an image displayed in a specific overlapping area (if it overlaps with all of them from the start of appearance, a predetermined transparency is set), or if it is displayed in a similar image and viewed from the front. Needless to say, it is realized as an effect using predetermined effect objects at overlapping positions (for example, a movable object effect). Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change the gaze destination from the image display even after being accepted, the type of mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) that appears at the gaze destination (so as to overlap with the image display). ) Can be confirmed, so that the type of post-reception effect (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) can be inferred without changing the gaze destination. Become

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the third reception period (valid period) of the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods (valid period). It is possible to display a third post-reception effect image that is different from both the first post-reception effect image and the second post-reception effect image based on the acceptance, but the third post-reception effect image. Apart from that, as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception period can appear.

According to such a configuration, it is unclear whether the first or third post-acceptance effect image appears when the first effect mode appears as an aspect of making it difficult to visually recognize the image display. When the second effect mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, it can be inferred that the second post-acceptance effect image appears. That is, in this case, for example, when the first effect mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the second post-reception effect image is output is denied, but the first and third post-reception effect images can be recognized. It is unclear which one will appear, and it will be possible for the player to be interested in which one will appear, so when an aspect that makes it difficult to see the image display appears. It will be possible to suitably promote the shift of the gaze destination to the place where the effect is being performed after the reception, while maintaining the effect and tension of.

Here, the "post-reception effect image" has been illustrated as an example of the post-reception effect, but for example, the "lamp emission" and "movable body movement" as the post-reception effect are the first reception period and the second reception period. If it is executed in a different manner in (or it is executed when there is an acceptance within one acceptance period, but it is not executed when there is an acceptance within the other acceptance period), the above-described "acceptance" is performed. It is also possible to replace "post-production image" with "lamp emission" or "moving body movement". In any case, in view of the above-mentioned effects such as "the type of post-reception effect can be inferred without changing the gaze destination", the image display is displayed for the post-reception effect. It is realized as being executed at a position that does not overlap with the position (a position that cannot be confirmed unless the player changes the gaze destination from the position where the image display is displayed). In addition, when a plurality of post-reception effects such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body movement" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-reception effects is described above. It can be said that the above-mentioned action and effect can be achieved as long as it corresponds to the "post-reception production".

If multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body movement" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, those post-reception effects () The point that at least one of the post-reception modes) can be made to correspond to the "post-reception effect" is applicable to each effect example described later in addition to the above-mentioned effect examples.

[Structure 3]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the post-acceptance production is performed based on the acceptance. As one aspect), the special effect mode can be executed, and during the execution period of the special effect mode, there are a state in which the image display is relatively easy to see and a state in which the image display is relatively difficult to see. I have to.

That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect) is started based on the acceptance. .. In addition, during the execution period of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that the "image display" can be changed to the "special effect mode (post-reception effect)". It is expected that the player's gaze target will be encouraged to move naturally.

In the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned special effect mode (effect after reception) does not affect the visibility of the image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted. The execution is started as follows. More specifically, the image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the special effect mode (post-reception effect) covers at least a part of the predetermined area. It is not an image display that is displayed by using it, nor is it an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view. As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the image display is made relatively difficult to see. ) ”Will be expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted within a specific reception period, at least a special effect mode and a predetermined effect mode appear in parallel based on the acceptance. It has become. However, the predetermined effect mode is started to be executed so as to adversely affect the visibility of the image display (make it difficult to see the image display) after the special effect mode is started (behind the special effect mode). It is supposed to be done. As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the image display is made relatively difficult to see. ) ”Will be expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

It should be noted that the process of causing the predetermined effect mode to appear is also started to be executed based on the acceptance. Therefore, the post-reception effect is assumed to be parallel to a plurality of post-reception effects (plural post-reception modes) including at least a special effect mode and a predetermined effect mode, and the predetermined effect mode is realized as one aspect of the post-reception effect. You may do so. In any case, the predetermined effect mode described in this configuration example is an image display displayed by utilizing at least a part of a predetermined area in which the image display is displayed, or at least a part of the predetermined area. It will be realized as an effect executed by using an effect body located at a position where it overlaps with the front view.

[Structure 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the image display is displayed. By using a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area which is a display target area of the image display, it is possible to display a "specific disappearance effect display" as a mode for making the image display difficult to see. The image display is set to be hidden while the specific extinction effect display is displayed after the specific extinction effect display is started to be displayed.

That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance has been made. In addition, the visibility of the image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the image display is hidden, and the image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. Therefore, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the image display is hidden is short, and the deterioration of the game entertainment when the image display is hidden is suppressed. You will be able to get it.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific extinction effect display can be displayed even during the period after the image display is hidden, and at least the specific extinction effect display is displayed. The production is started after the reception. Then, the post-acceptance effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area which is the display target area of the specific extinction effect display, or (at least one of the specific extinction effect display). It is designed to be realized by using the staging body located at the position where it overlaps with the part) in front view.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect executed at the position where the specific extinction effect display overlaps with the front view is watched from the position where the specific extinction effect display is displayed. It will be recognizable without shifting the destination. That is, in this case, when the specific extinction effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

[Structure 5]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific mode is within the period from the acceptance of the movement by the player during the reception period (specific reception period) until the image display is hidden. It may appear, and when the specific aspect appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the precursor effect display is executed in a specific precursor mode based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). When the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period corresponding to the precursory effect display, the above-mentioned specific mode is within the period from the time when the movement is accepted until the above-mentioned image display is hidden. It is made possible to appear in.

That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that when the precursor effect display is executed in the specific precursor mode, the specific mode appears until the image display is hidden, making the image display difficult to see. Therefore, it becomes possible to encourage the player to pay close attention to which mode the image display appears before the player performs the operation. It should be noted that the "specific mode" according to the configuration 5 and the "specific mode" according to the configuration 1 may have the same mode, different modes, or those that occur corresponding to different reception periods. May be.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the precursory effect display is executed in a mode different from the above-mentioned specific precursory mode based on the fact that the result of the winning determination is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). When the action by the player is accepted within the reception period corresponding to the precursory effect display (reception period different from the specific reception period), in the above specific mode, the image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until it is made, and there are cases where it does not appear within the period.

According to such a configuration, when the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific precursor mode, the specific mode is from the time when the specific mode is accepted until the image display is hidden. Since it is unclear whether or not it will appear within the period of, the effectability from the time it is accepted until the image display is hidden will be improved. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

The above configuration 5 may be realized by replacing it with the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (acceptance period) different from the above configuration 5. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the image display is hidden after the movement by the player is accepted during the reception period (a specific reception period or a reception period different from the specific reception period). Within the period until the pachinko machine is used, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the precursor effect display is the same as the specific precursor mode (same as the specific precursor mode) based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). If the action by the player is received within the reception period corresponding to the precursory effect display, the above-mentioned specific mode is such that the above-mentioned image display is hidden from the time when the action is received. Make it impossible to appear within the period until. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the special precursor mode, the specific mode does not appear until the model image display is hidden, and the model image display is difficult to visually recognize in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will not be disappointed.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the above-mentioned special precursor mode based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). When the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period corresponding to the effect display (reception period different from the above reception period), in the above specific mode, the image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until then, and cases where it does not appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, when the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the special precursor mode, the image display is hidden from the time when the specific mode is accepted. Since it will be unclear whether or not it will appear within the period up to, the staging will be improved from the time it is accepted until the image display is hidden. , You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

As for the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), each of the above-mentioned or later-described configurations applicable to the above-mentioned configuration 5 can be appropriately applied.

[Structure 6]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types are prepared as precursor display effects suggesting that the reception period for which the movement by the player is the reception target will soon occur. Then, among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays, the specific precursor effect display can be executed in a form that straddles the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. The movement by the player can be accepted.

That is, in this case, since the movement by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (aspect) is displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (aspect) of the precursor effect display is used. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the game interest caused by forgetting to confirm.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is displayed, a post-reception effect (for example, a special post-reception effect) corresponding to the acceptance is performed. The execution is started, but the specific precursor effect display is not hidden but displayed even at the time when the effect is started after the reception.

That is, in this case, the operation by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is displayed as the precursor effect display, and further, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursory effect display.

[Structure 7]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) occurs, the reception means is in a state where acceptance by the reception means is permitted, or acceptance by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute a process of making the reception allowable sound audible, which suggests that the state will be (soon), it will be possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

The reception permissible sound is the timing of the reception period even if it is realized as something that is audible before the corresponding reception period occurs (suggesting that the reception period will occur soon). It can be made audible by straddling it, and can be made audible even during the reception period, at least halfway through. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 in which the tone setting value can be set to "0", in the situation where the volume setting value is set to "0", the acceptance allowable sound is output, but it is in an audible state. Will not be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the movement by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowable sound is audible (output state) within the acceptance period (for example, a specific acceptance period), the above-mentioned "image display" is displayed. Prior to the appearance of the "mode that makes it difficult to see (disappearing effect display, etc.)", the above-mentioned acceptance allowable sound is played in a state where the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearing effect display, etc.)" has not yet appeared. The process for making it inaudible is started.

That is, in this case, even if the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the player is informed that the acceptance period has already expired. It becomes possible to suggest favorably. As a result, even if the timing at which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears after acceptance is delayed, the inconvenience is unlikely to occur, so that the image display can be displayed in a mode with good visibility. become

[Structure 8]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period (a plurality of reception periods with different post-reception effects) are prepared. Then, from the time when the movement by the player is accepted while the image display is displayed until the image display is hidden, the image display becomes difficult to see. It is supposed to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted while the image display is displayed in the first reception period, the image display is displayed in the second reception period. In both cases where the movement by the player is accepted, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears until the image display is hidden. ing.

That is, in this case, regardless of whether it is the first reception period or the second reception period, the reception period has ended while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display after the reception was made. You will be able to suggest that you are in a state. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 8 may be the same type of reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to the configuration 2. However, the reception period may be different from each other.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and the first mode appears in the first reception period. Since the second aspect is made to appear in the second reception period, it is possible to give the "aspect in which the image display is difficult to see" the effect related to the type of the reception period.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a third aspect is further prepared as "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display", and in the first reception period, regardless of whether or not the reception is received within the period. The first aspect may appear, but in the second reception period, the second aspect appears when the reception is received within the period, and the third aspect appears when the reception is not received within the period.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, it is determined whether or not the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period based on the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" that appears. However, in the first reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the movement by the player has been accepted within the reception period based on the appearance of "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". It is expected that the game will be improved through such directing.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples or the following production examples, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" means the disappearance effect display in a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area in which the image display is displayed. In addition to the mode in which is displayed, the mode in which the staging using the staging body located at a position overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined area in which the image display is displayed in front view is executed, the image display itself is visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to display (for example, the display may be made smaller, blurred, or the transmittance setting may be changed).

[Structure 9]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where acceptance by the reception means is permitted when the reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) occurs, or a state in which reception by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute a process of making the reception allowable sound audible, which suggests that the sound will be (soon), it will be possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect suggesting that a reception period for the operation by the player is to be received soon. Then, among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays, the specific precursor effect display can be executed in a form that straddles the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. The movement by the player can be accepted. That is, in this case, since the movement by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which mode is displayed as the precursor effect display, the game by forgetting to confirm the mode of the precursor effect display. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest. The "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 6, or may be a precursor effect display of a different type (aspect). ..

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific precursor effect display is displayed even after the effect (post-reception effect) corresponding to the acceptance of the action by the player has progressed. By making it possible for the player to be able to confirm which aspect has appeared as a precursory effect display even after the acceptance has been made.

However, since the precursor display effect is originally displayed in a state where acceptance is not allowed (before the reception period occurs), the player's operation is performed in the state where the precursor display effect is displayed. Even if it is done, the player may be worried about whether the action has been accepted. Nevertheless, if the precursory effect display is simply displayed even after the acceptance has been made, there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the acceptance has been made. To.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the movement by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed, the specific precursor effect is produced even after the acceptance is made. Although the display is displayed, a mode in which the specific precursor effect display is difficult to see appears while the specific precursor effect display is displayed. Then, after the embodiment appears, the specific precursor effect display is hidden under the condition that the specific precursor effect display is difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the precursor effect display, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the acceptance has already been made.

[Structure 10]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur can be executed respectively. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used for both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. ), A predetermined image display can be displayed, and the image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. There is. Then, when the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, a mode in which the image display is difficult to see appears while the image display is displayed. The "mode that makes it difficult to see" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that can be displayed even in the case of a symbol change in which the reception period does not occur.

That is, in this case, since a specific extinction effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that is not related to the reception period, it is directly related to the reception period. You will be able to proceed with the game without adversely affecting the performance.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) is used as an image display that is not related to the reception period (reception period during occurrence). The second image display and the second image display can be displayed respectively within the reception period, and the above-mentioned specific extinction effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display (the second image display (predetermined image display)). It is supposed to be displayed so as to affect the visibility of (pending).

According to such a configuration, although the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility may be affected when "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears depending on the type. In some cases, the visibility will not be affected. Therefore, when the player performs an operation, whether or not to confirm this for the image display that is not directly related to the reception period. It will be possible to provide a directing effect on the image.

However, in this case, the first image display shall be displayed as an image (s) related to (suggesting) the winning (expected degree) of the symbol variation, and the second image display shall be displayed as the symbol variation. By making it displayed as a display that does not relate to (does not suggest) the winning (expectation), it is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating when the visibility of the second image display is affected. It can be said that it is desirable above.

In addition, when the "specific disappearance effect display" displayed on the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the operation by the player is accepted within the reception period. If so, it is specified by using a specific area including at least a part of a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) which is a display target area of the image display while the image display is displayed. The disappearance effect display of is displayed.

[Structure 11]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur can be executed respectively. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used for both the symbol fluctuation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol fluctuation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. A predetermined image display can be displayed inside, and the image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. .. The "predetermined image display" in the configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in the configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the image display is displayed, and the image display becomes difficult to see. As a mode in which the image can appear and the image display is difficult to see, a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared.

That is, in this case, since any one of a plurality of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", a game entertainment hobby when the image display becomes difficult to see. It will be expected to improve.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first aspect" as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is executed, the "first aspect" is predetermined to be the image display. When the "second aspect" as the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" is executed, the "second aspect" is defined as the image display. Of the image display of, only the image display is executed so as to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to produce a directing effect as to which of the "first aspect" and the "second aspect" appears as the "aspect in which the image display becomes difficult to see". It is expected that the interest will be improved.

It should be noted that the image display and the predetermined image display are in a state where either the acceptance period of the type corresponding to the above "first aspect" or the acceptance period of the type corresponding to the above "second aspect" occurs. It is desirable to be able to display the image in order to improve the entertainment of the game.

[Structure 12]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1
-It is possible to generate a first reception period in which acceptance by the reception means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, and if the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period, the acceptance is made. Based on this, the first reception effect execution means capable of executing the effect display after the first reception in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (ratio of the jackpot symbol being stopped), and the reception means (for example, the operation button 410). It may be present, or it may be a sword decoration body 5001 different from the operation button 410). When accepted, the second reception effect execution means capable of executing the second post-acceptance effect display in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (ratio of the jackpot symbol being stopped) based on the acceptance. It is equipped with. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%. Further, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as displays of different types as the advance notice effect. Further, the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to the configuration 12 are the same types of reception periods as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to the above configurations 2 and 8. It may be a reception period of different types from each other.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, either the case where the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period or the case where the movement by the player is received within the second reception period. Also, after the acceptance is made, it is possible to appear in a mode in which the image display is difficult to see while the image display is displayed.

That is, in this case, regardless of the type of the reception period, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display even after the reception has been made. In addition, since the visibility of the image display is reduced before the image display is hidden, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the image display is hidden is small. Therefore, the deterioration of the game entertainment when the image display is hidden can be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, the first mode is executed as the first post-reception effect display, and the first post-reception effect display is performed. Regardless of whether the second aspect, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first aspect, is executed, the same aspect appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the second aspect (or the first aspect with a lower expectation than the second aspect) is executed as the effect display after the second reception. Appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", but when the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception, the "image display is visually recognized". The specific mode does not appear as "a mode that becomes difficult", and a mode different from the specific mode appears, or "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself does not appear. As described above, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as a post-reception staging display only by confirming "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see", and the expectation. Since there will be cases where the degree cannot be estimated, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by the staging of such "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". ..

As for the "specific mode" that may occur corresponding to the second reception period as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first reception period. If it is set so that it cannot appear as "", it will be possible to infer the type of reception period based on "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game. Will be able to. In order to obtain such an effect, as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the "mode" that may occur corresponding to the first reception period is a "mode" corresponding to the second reception period. It is more desirable to make it impossible to appear as "a mode in which the display becomes difficult to see".

However, as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the same mode is used in the "mode" that can occur corresponding to the first reception period and the "mode" that can occur in response to the second reception period. It may be possible to appear.

[Structure 13]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (sound image display, gauge image, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, and the reception period can be displayed. It is possible to output reception-related staging sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the generation. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the movement by the player is received within the reception period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect based on the acceptance (itself is an aspect of the post-reception effect). It is possible to output as The reception-related effect display is hidden. Similarly, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound is in the audible state within the reception period, the reception-related production sound is placed in the non-audible state based on the acceptance. I try to do it.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the post-reception effect sound related to the post-reception effect is output, the reception-related effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is not displayed. By making it audible, it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is in the accepted state.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related effect display is not terminated at the time when the specific post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started. Although it is displayed, the reception-related effect sound is finished at the time when the specific post-reception effect sound corresponding to the reception is started to be executed, and is made in an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display displayed during the reception period can be displayed until after the specific post-reception effect is started, while it is displayed within the reception period. The reception-related staging sound, which is considered to be audible (output), will not be audible when the output sound is started to be executed after reception. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started, the reception-related effect sound can be made inaudible while the mode as the reception-related effect display displayed within the reception period can be confirmed. This makes it possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

In addition, the non-audible state may be a state in which the reception-related production sound output processing itself is terminated, or the reception-related production sound output processing itself itself, in each of the above-mentioned examples and the later-described examples. May be in an inaudible state by adjusting the volume to "0" although it is continued. Further, the specific post-reception effect means that in each of the above examples and the examples described later, the post-reception effect according to the reception is a composite using a plurality of effect bodies (display, light emitting lamp, movable body, etc.). When it is executed as a staging effect, it may correspond to "a staging using a specific staging body" among those staging bodies.

[Structure 14]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor effect display, and a specific precursor effect display can be displayed prior to the reception period, and the reception-related effect sound can be displayed. It is possible to start audible output (acceptable sound for reception, etc.). Then, the specific precursor effect display and the reception-related effect sound can be executed in a form straddling the timing when the reception period occurs, the specific precursor effect display is displayed, and the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state (output). The movements by the player can be accepted in the above. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when the movement by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed within the reception period, the specific is based on the acceptance. Hide the precursor effect display. In addition, if the movement by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound is in the audible state within the reception period, the reception-related production sound is made inaudible based on the acceptance. ing.

In the above configuration, the specific precursor effect display is hidden based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even if the action by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display and the reception-related effect sound that have been in the execution state before the reception period occurs are being executed, they are accepted. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the state is in the state of being struck. The "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to the configurations 6 and 9, or is a precursor effect display of a different type (aspect). May be good. Further, the "reception-related effect sound" related to the configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the "reception-related effect sound" related to the configuration 13.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned specific precursor effect display is started to execute a specific post-acceptance effect according to the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has been accepted within the corresponding reception period. At that point, it is not finished and is displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related production sound is finished at the time when the specific post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started, and is made in an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned specific precursor effect display displayed before the reception period occurs is displayed until after the specific post-reception effect is started, while the reception is received. The reception-related staging sound, which is audible (output) before the occurrence of the period, will not be audible when the output sound is started to be executed after reception. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started, it is possible to confirm the mode as the precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, but the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound inaudible, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended. The "specific post-reception effect" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to the configuration 14 are the same as the "specific post-reception effect" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to the configuration 13. It may be present or it may be different.

[Structure 15]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is prepared with a plurality of reception periods having different "effect contents (type of post-reception effect) to be advanced based on the acceptance of the action by the player". In addition, the image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the specific acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, a plurality of the pachinko machines 1 are accepted based on the acceptance. Although any of the effects is made to appear, a specific mode can be made to appear regardless of which of the effects appears.

In the above configuration, the type of effect mode that appears based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (“conversation notice” regarding which conversation appears, and “movable body” regarding whether or not the movable body operates. We have prepared multiple reception periods with different types of notice effects such as "operation notice". In this regard, if an action by a player is accepted within a specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, one of the multiple effects will appear based on the acceptance, but any of these effects will appear. Even if it is done, a specific aspect can appear. That is, in this case, regardless of which of the plurality of effects appears, a specific mode will also appear, which is due to the fact that the action by the player was accepted within the specific reception period. It will be possible to suggest that it is a common production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the movement by the player is accepted within the special reception period different from the above-mentioned specific reception period among the plurality of reception periods, the special condition (big hit winning condition or probability change). It is possible to appear in any of a plurality of modes including a special mode in which the appearance ratio (which may be 0% or 100%) differs depending on whether or not the entry condition) is satisfied, and the special mode is capable of appearing. When it appears, it becomes difficult to see the image display.

According to such a configuration, a special mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears until the image display is hidden, and the special mode makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display. , The player will be able to enjoy the staging that progresses from the image display to the post-reception staging (special mode) without changing the gaze destination.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "specific mode" appears based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted within the above-mentioned specific reception period, the image display is displayed as the "specific mode". It is made difficult to see by "specific mode". According to such a configuration, when the image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special aspect in which the expectation for the privilege grant is suggested (special reception period), the above-mentioned specific embodiment in which the expectation for the privilege grant is not suggested. Since there are cases where the image display is difficult to see (specific reception period), the "mode that makes the image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has an effect. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 15 may be the same as the "specific reception period" related to the configurations 1, 7 and 9, or may correspond to a different reception period.

[Structure 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggestion display that reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image or the like) with the passage of time within the reception period. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted. Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced while the production is in progress, it is difficult to recognize "whether the image is accepted" even after the acceptance is made, which makes it difficult to recognize the tension. It will be expected to be maintained favorably.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific section area is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestion display, and a specific image is displayed in the specific section area. Depictions that reduce the display area of (gauge images, etc.) are to be performed. Then, after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player, the display is continued not only for the specific image (gauge image, etc.) but also for the specific section area. According to such a configuration, since the specific section area is displayed even after the effect is advanced based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is increased. It will be possible to make it easier to judge whether or not it has decreased.

In addition, "the display area of a specific image (gauge image, etc.) is reduced after the production is advanced based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted" means that, for example, the movement by the player is accepted. In the sense that the gauge image that had a predetermined display area left at the time when the effect was advanced is set to 0 (non-display) display area at a later time point. be. However, in this case, it is required that the specific section area is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the display area of the gauge image is set to 0 in the specific section area. It will be hidden after the timing.

For example, in the configuration 16, when the movement by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (specific image, specific section area, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance, but the remaining time is hidden. Prior to hiding the time suggestion display, the display area is a specific value (predetermined value) within the specific compartment area, regardless of how much display area of the specific image was left at the time of acceptance. ) Is displayed, or only a specific section area of the specific section area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). Is possible.

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted (when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started), the pachinko machine 1 is executed before being accepted. The "depiction in which the display area of a specific image is reduced" is not completed and is continued. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image whose display area is a specific value is displayed in the specific division area, or only a specific division area among the specific division area and the specific image is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Even after this is done, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize "whether it is in a state of acceptance" and that the tension will be maintained appropriately. In addition, since the depiction that significantly reduces the display area of a specific image (gauge image, etc.) is performed at a timing after the timing when the progress of the production according to the acceptance is started, the acceptance is valid (the acceptance period). It is possible to make it look as if it was just in time within the reception period), and it is expected that the game will be improved.

[Structure 17]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 provides a plurality of precursor effect displays as precursor effect displays suggesting that a reception period will occur. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific precursor effect display is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays, a reception period occurs for the image display related to the reception target. It is displayed both within the precursory period before and during the reception period. The image display displayed within the precursory period is different from the image display displayed during the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the time before the reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted within the acceptance period, the image display is hidden based on the acceptance, but the image display is not displayed. It is possible to appear "a specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" before the image is displayed. However, as will be described later, the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" is hidden when the image display displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is hidden. I try not to appear before it is done.

According to such a configuration, within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), the image display is not displayed without the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" that appears corresponding to the reception period. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the image display is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player does not know. It will be possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has expired.

If a plurality of "modes that make it difficult to see the image display" that can appear according to the acceptance are prepared, including the above "specific mode that makes it difficult to see the image display", they are prepared. It is desirable that none of the embodiments appears when the image display displayed within the precursory period is hidden. However, if it is different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" according to the acceptance, the image display is hidden within the precursory period. It is also possible to make "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" appear. That is, in this case, since it is recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" dedicated to the precursory period, even if a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" appears within the precursory period. , It becomes possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has ended without the player's knowledge.

The "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to the configurations 6, 9 and 14, or corresponds to a different precursor effect display. You may.

[Structure 18]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the first reception period can be generated as the reception period during the execution period of the symbol change, and the second effect condition is satisfied. , A second reception period can be generated as the reception period during the execution period of the symbol change. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period can be continued even after the symbol change in which the first reception period has occurred is terminated and the next symbol change is started to be executed. However, the second reception period is not continued until after the symbol change in which the second reception period has occurred is completed, and is terminated before the symbol change is terminated. It has become a thing. Furthermore, the image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period and the second reception. In both cases where the movement by the player is accepted within the period, the disappearance effect mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see based on the acceptance is made to appear.

That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has expired while making it possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance has been made. , The first reception period and the second reception period can be suitably obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearance effect mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see is when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted in the first reception period and when it is accepted in the second reception period. It is to be implemented as a different aspect. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period ends within the symbol change during execution, based on the type of "disappearance effect mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Therefore, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

The "first reception period and the second reception period" related to the configuration 18 may be the same as the "first reception period and the second reception period" related to the configurations 2, 8 and 12, or different receptions. It may correspond to a period.

[Structure 19]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of gaming states (first gaming state) having different gaming conditions (ease of obtaining a prize ball when the gaming ball is launched with respect to the gaming area, etc.) And the second gaming state) can be generated, and the reception period can be generated in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the image display is displayed based on the acceptance. "A mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance effect mode)" can be made to appear, and then the pachinko image display is hidden.

That is, in this case, there is an action effect such as "it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as an image display even after the acceptance has been made, and it can be suggested that the acceptance period has expired." , Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods is only in the first gaming state among the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It can occur, and the second reception period of the plurality of reception periods can be generated only in the second gaming state (big hit game) of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this respect, the image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first game state (when it is accepted in the first reception period), a specific "image display" that cannot appear in the second game state (when it is accepted in the second reception period) is visually recognized. A mode that makes it difficult to do (disappearance effect mode) ”can appear.

According to such a configuration, the first game is performed only by confirming which aspect appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance effect mode)" without confirming the effect after reception. It becomes possible to grasp whether the state is controlled by the state or the second game state, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Even in the second gaming state (when the image is accepted during the second reception period), the "image display is difficult to see", which is different from the specific "image display is difficult to see (disappearance effect mode)". (Extinction effect mode) ”may appear.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception acceptance state (reception period) in which the reception opportunity is given occurs, the image related to the reception target (such as the image of the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying it as an integrated image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, the deterioration of the game entertainment until the post-reception effect (post-operation effect) is executed is reduced. I try to suppress it. Such an integrated image display occurs as a result of a notice judgment with an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. .. Further, it is desirable to replace each of the above-mentioned production examples with one of the integrated images described below to realize the display mode of the illustrated image in order to improve the entertainment of the game. ..

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof, for example, in the peripheral decorative image. Is provided with a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, as the "integrated image display", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the display is performed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception allowable state (reception period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. The reception allowable sound is output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound in which the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable reception sound" is a sound that is not output under the condition that the production has nothing to do with the allowable reception state (reception period).

Further, each acceptance allowable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance allowable state classified into the first type can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that occurs when a specific condition (specific high-expected fluctuation pattern selection) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state is a valid period (occurs as a result of a notice determination) that can occur in either a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Validity period, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in any of such first type and second type acceptance acceptance states (acceptance period). Here, in both the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) and the second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that it occurs as an allowable state (reception period), the "integrated image display" displayed in those reception periods is an image that imitates the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the plurality of modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)) is the first type acceptance acceptance state (reception period). In the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in an aspect different from the special aspect (for example, the aspect shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c)). ing. In the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) of the first type, "integrated image display" is displayed in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) including a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in an manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) of the second type, the "integrated image" is obtained in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to display the image, and to display the "integrated image display" in an manner corresponding to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above configurations 1 to 19 and the like will be described with reference to the drawings.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is a type of staging (expectation suggestion staging), which is a staging content (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as post-reception staging) that proceeds when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted. ) Are prepared for a plurality of reception periods (reception production), and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of the judgment (big hit judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first reception period (reception effect) to the seventh reception period (reception effect) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effect).

Here, the "conversation notice" as a post-reception effect suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing, etc.) depending on which of the plurality of conversation contents appears, and as a post-reception effect. "Cut-in notice" suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing, etc.) depending on which cut-in image appears among multiple cut-in images, and is a "movable body" as a post-reception effect. The "notice" suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing, etc.) depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

With reference to FIGS. 167 to 178, the characteristics of each reception period (reception production) will be described. It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 166 may be prepared as a reception period different from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, or the first reception period to the reception period. It may be realized as any of the seventh reception period.

FIG. 167 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs. FIGS. 174 and 175 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a first reception period (first reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "first fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the first variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 174 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ first variation pattern ”itself. Become. In the effect example shown in FIG. 174 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variable effect) is suggested. Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol change. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings from each other. The second effect display FE itself may or may not suggest the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variation effect.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU1511a is decorated as shown in FIG. 167 (a). When the timing tF3 when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the symbol SZ arrives, the above-mentioned first acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the first acceptance" is permitted occurs. ("Situation shown in FIG. 174 (d)"). As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the first reception period, the first post-reception production will be performed based on the reception.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception period (valid period) is related to the occurrence of such a first reception period. ) Soon to occur, a sign image display suggesting a reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, and a disappearance that makes it difficult to see the image display. A related display (a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see) and a post-reception staging display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) according to the acceptance are performed. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but it is not always the case. It is not limited, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 before the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 167 (b) and 174 (b), the display screen (effect display device). In 1600), the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display. In the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. 167 (b), the timing when the corresponding reception period (first reception period) occurs (acceptance of the first post-reception effect is permitted). Timing) Although it is designed to be hidden as tF3 arrives, it may be hidden before timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 174 (d), in the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state where the player is allowed to accept the movement. It has never happened.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (b) and 174 (c), the timing tF2 before the first reception period occurs is set. When it arrives, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), " The "first precursor effect display ZEH1" makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the "integrated image display IG". As a result, there is a strong interest in which target (operation receiving unit) the movement by the player is allowed in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) before the first reception period occurs. It will be possible to make it possible, and it is expected that it will be less likely to forget to operate or make an operation error after the first reception period occurs.

In the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" are displayed, the "integrated image display IG" is easy to see. It is more desirable to display the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" so that the tendency to be gradually improved toward the occurrence of the reception period appears in order to improve the game entertainment. For example, it can be realized by gradually reducing the display range (the range overlapping with the integrated image display IG) of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" or gradually increasing the transmittance. be.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 167 (b) and 174 (c), (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "integrated image display IG" is , It is displayed so as to straddle the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the reception is made within the first reception period or when the first reception period ends without the reception being made. The first reception period according to this example is set to end when the timing tF4 arrives when the movement is not accepted by the player (see FIG. 167 (b)).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 167 and the production from FIG. 174 (d) to "A1 (FIG. 175 (e1) to (i1))" or "A2 (FIG. 175 (e2) to (i2))" can be produced. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), the first reception period is terminated and the first reception period is supported based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tF3a. The post-reception production (first post-reception production) will be started.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to "A1 (FIGS. 175 (e1) to (i1))" has a relatively low expectation as a post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to "A2 (FIGS. 175 (e2) to (i2))" corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed corresponds to the reception corresponding to the first reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as a post-effect.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167 (b) and FIG. 175 (e1) or (e2), when the movement by the player is accepted (acceptance). At the timing tF3a, which is the time when the effect is started after the first reception, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. I am doing it.

That is, the first post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a "first post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "first post-reception specific effect" using the body, the effect lamp, etc.) and the first post-acceptance output sound using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as at least a combined effect. However, among those staging devices, in the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) that displays the integrated staging image display IG (staging image display, gauge image display), the first staging after the first reception is performed. 1 The time when the effect display starts to be executed after reception is delayed compared to other effect devices, and the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is maintained even after the reception is made. It has become.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 175 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 (FIG. 144). Since the player can easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is displayed, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. become.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for the "time in which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after the acceptance is made. However, when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period even though the reception was done and the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) was already executed. If the same mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 175 (e1) and 175 (e2)) is continuously displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "it will be delayed to notice the post-reception production that is in the execution state".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 167 (b) and FIG. 175 (f1) or (f2), the first acceptance period ends when the movement by the player is accepted. When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tF3a (when the timing tF3b arrives), the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first reception period) is described as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display according to the first aspect) of the first extinction-related display SK1 is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 1 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ first extinction-related display SK1-1 ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will be naturally shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tF3b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the first post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (timing tF3a to tF3b). Since it is possible to confirm the mode of the integrated image display IG with good visual recognition, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

Further, in the first reception period, the mode with low expectation (FIGS. 175 (e1) to (i1)) and the mode with high expectation (FIGS. 175 (e2) to (i2)) correspond to the post-reception production. Regardless of which of the above is executed, since the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) appears as the first extinction-related display SK1, the post-receipt effect (second effect device) , The third effect device) can be kept secret in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) even when the execution is started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 167 (b) and FIG. 175 (g1) or (g2), the display (integrated image display) related to the first extinction-related display SK1-1. When the timing tf3c within the period in which the IG is difficult to see) arrives, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period. The execution of the "first post-reception effect display UG1" as the post-reception effect in the above is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to "A1 (FIG. 175 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 175 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and “A2” from FIG. 174 (d). In the example in which the production progresses to "(FIG. 175 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 175 (g2), the first reception is performed. The second aspect (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" are displayed, the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) or" After the first reception, the effect display UG1-2) ”will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the first reception period, the first staging device (staging display device 1600) is used. It becomes possible to start the post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) without significantly delaying it as compared with other effect devices, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In addition, since the staging display is started after the first reception while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player suggests that the first reception period has already ended. The gaze destination may naturally shift from the "integrated image display IG" to the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)". It will be expected (after timing tF3c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)" is started in this way. , FIG. 167 (b) and FIG. 175 (h1) or (h2), the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”and the“ first extinction-related display SK1-1 ”, the“ integrated image display IG ”is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 167 (b) and FIG. 175 (i1) or (i2), the "first extinction-related display SK-1" is displayed. Will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "1st post-reception effect display UG1 (1st post-reception effect display UG1-1 or 1st post-reception effect display UG1-2)" will be hidden. Will be displayed.

In this respect, the "first post-reception effect display UG1" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (here, the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first). It is displayed by any of the effect display UG1-2) after reception. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), the "first post-acceptance effect display UG1" is displayed after the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK-1" are hidden. Will be executed for a relatively long time.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the time is limited (thick line shown in FIG. 167) due to the occurrence of the first reception period, and Various displays are performed in the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) according to the reception is set to be higher than the received timing tF3a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second staging device is prepared in addition to the staging display device 1600 (first staging device), and the player operates within the first reception period. When it is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 167 (b) and 167 (c), based on the acceptance, the first post-reception staging using the second staging device (identification after the first staging). The effect) is started to be executed prior to the first post-acceptance effect (first post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tF3a that was accepted in the first reception period is limited to a part of the first post-acceptance effect (the first post-acceptance effect display). The first post-acceptance staging itself can be started without delay from the same timing tF3a.

As such a second staging device, for example, it may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or a staging movable body capable of staging operation. , It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations.

In the production example shown in FIG. 175, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second production device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to "A1 (FIGS. 175 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 175 (e1). As shown in the above, the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the first reception period, that is, the first post-reception specific effect UGT1 (first post-reception identification). As the first post-reception specific effect UGT1-1), which is a mode with low expectation of the effect UGT1, prior to the first post-reception effect (first post-acceptance effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device. Execution is to be started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to "A2 (FIG. 175 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), FIG. 175 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which "kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the first reception period, and the specific effect UGT1 (first reception) after the first reception is received. As the first post-reception specific effect UGT1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the post-reception specific effect UGT1, it precedes the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device. And the execution is started.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 174, apart from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the first reception period. The precursor effect (first precursor specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 174 (b) to (d)). The first precursor specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs is set. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tF3.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first reception period occurs, at the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167 (d), the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared. The reception allowable sound is to be started to be output (corresponding to "the situation where ♪ is started to be output in FIG. 174 (c)"). That is, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the first reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tF3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 174 (d)") at which the first reception period occurs. The movement by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first reception period, the reception permissible sound is audibly output as shown in FIGS. 167 (d), 175 (e1) to (g1), or 175 (e2) to (g2). Even if the movement is accepted by the player, the acceptance allowable sound is not terminated halfway and is output only for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, during the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods, when the player accepts the operation while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is based on the acceptance. Includes a reception period that ends prematurely. Therefore, as a result of being received while the reception permissible sound is audibly output within the first reception period, when the mode in which the audible output of the reception permissible sound is continued appears, whether or not the reception is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

However, in the first reception period, even if the movement is accepted by the player while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway (the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway). However, when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 175 (e1) or (e2)) is started based on this. It has become a thing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167 (d), the “acceptable sound” which is an audible output sound within the first reception period and the audible sound as a result of being accepted within the first reception period. Since both the output sound and the "output sound after the first reception" can be audibly output, it is possible to recognize whether the sound is within the reception period or the reception period has expired. It will be possible to make it even more difficult to recognize.

As shown in FIG. 167 (d), such an output sound after the first reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK" as in the "first reception post-effect display UG1". Even after "-1" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time ("♪♪ is output in FIGS. 175 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)". Equivalent to "situation"). Further, regarding the first post-reception output sound, an example in which the staging progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to “A1 (FIGS. 175 (e1) to (i1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception staging). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to "A2 (FIG. 175 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted in FIG. 167, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174 (d) to “A3 (FIGS. 175 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the first reception period. It is assumed that the operation by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the first reception period occurs, the timing tF4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tF4 (when the first reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tF3a (first effect device) is used. As shown in FIG. 175 (e3), the integrated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the first reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement in time, the integrated operation is performed within the first reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 175 (f3), the first extinction-related display SK1 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see". -2 (the second aspect of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ first extinction-related display SK1-2 ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the first reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the first reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the first reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first reception is for the above-mentioned "first extinction-related display SK1-2" that appears when the movement by the player is not accepted within the first reception period. It is executed as a mode different from the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" that appears based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the period. As a result, when the "first extinction-related display SK1-2" appears, it becomes possible to suggest that the movement by the player was not accepted, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (g3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-2", first, the "integrated image display IG" is not selected. Display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance-related display SK-2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 175 (h3).

FIG. 168 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs. FIGS. 176 and 177 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 176 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ second variation pattern ”itself. Become. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed.

However, in the effect related to the "second variation pattern", the variation of the decorative symbol SZ is shown in FIG. 168 (a) regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). The above-mentioned second reception period in which "acceptance regarding the second post-operation effect" is permitted when the timing tG3 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the effect arrives. (Validity period) is generated (“Situation shown in FIG. 176 (d)”). As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the second reception period, the second post-reception production will be performed based on the reception.

In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, the above-mentioned first reception period occurs (FIG. 167). Similar to this, in relation to this, a precursory effect display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, an image display suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), and suggesting the remaining time of the reception period. Gauge image display, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (a mode that makes it difficult to see the image display), and post-reception staging that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) depending on the acceptance. Each display is made. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%". As described above, the image display is displayed as an "integrated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but the image display is not limited to this and is separately displayed. It may be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, also in this example, when the timing tG1 before the occurrence of the second reception period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and 176 (b), the above-mentioned precursor effect As a display, "second precursor staging display ZEH2" is started to be executed. Further, regarding the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)", the reception period corresponding to the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 167 (here, the second reception period). When the timing tG2 before the occurrence occurs, it is displayed while the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed (FIG. 168 (b) and FIG. 176 (c). ). As shown in FIG. 176 (c), at least a part of the area where the “integrated image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “second precursor staging display ZEH2” is displayed. The point that the "integrated image display IG" is difficult to see due to the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 174 (c) (precursor effect display corresponding to the first reception period). Is similar to.

Further, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 176 (d)) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. And when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period), or when the second acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made, it is hidden. The point that the image is made is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 167 (first reception period). The second reception period according to this example is set to end when the timing tG4 arrives when the movement is not accepted by the player.

However, in the example (second reception period) shown in FIG. 168 (b), the "second precursor staging display ZEH2" corresponds to the example (first reception period) shown in FIG. 167 (b). Not only is the mode (image display) different from that of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1", but also the timing (here, the second reception period) corresponding to this is generated (the second post-reception effect). It is not hidden when tG3 arrives, but is displayed in a form straddling the timing tG3.

That is, in this case, in the second reception period, not only the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" but also the "integrated image display IG" is difficult to see, and the "second precursor" is difficult to see. The movement can be accepted by the player while the "effect display ZEH2" is displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period occurs, at least a part of the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second precursor staging display ZEH2", and the reception It becomes possible to preferably maintain a feeling of tension when it is within the period.

Here, the "second precursor staging display ZEH2" may be displayed until the timing tG4 at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends. It may be hidden at a predetermined timing within (here, the second reception period). Further, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is "integrated" within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period). It is "integrated image display" that the display range is displayed in a form that is gradually reduced so that the area that overlaps with "image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" tends to be gradually reduced. It is desirable to gradually improve the visibility of the "image display IG" within the reception period. Further, the area where the second precursor effect display is displayed and at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display" is displayed do not necessarily overlap each other during the entire period when the second precursor effect display is displayed. It is not necessary, for example, after the predetermined timing within the reception period has arrived in the entire period, the second precursor effect display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed. You may do so.

Further, the second precursor staging display ZEH2 according to this example is received when the reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), or the reception period (here, the second reception period). It is designed to be hidden when the movement by the player is not accepted until a predetermined timing within the period).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 168 and the production from FIG. 176 (d) to "B1 (FIG. 177 (e1) to (i1))" or "B2 (FIG. 177 (e2) to (i2))" can be produced. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the second reception period is terminated and the second reception period is supported based on the fact that the movement by the player is received at the timing tG3a. The post-reception production (second post-reception production) will be started.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1))" has a relatively low expectation as a post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B2 (FIGS. 177 (e2) to (i2))" corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed corresponds to the reception corresponding to the second reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as a post-effect. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 168, at the timing tG3a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance effect is started according to the acceptance), the “integrated image display IG”. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 168, not only the integrated image display IG but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is when the movement by the player is accepted (when the second post-acceptance effect is started). ) At the timing tG3a, it is not hidden or difficult to see.

That is, the second post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a "second post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "second post-reception specific effect" using the body, the effect lamp, etc.) and the second post-acceptance output sound using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as at least a combined effect. However, among those staging devices, in the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) that displays the integrated staging image display IG (staging image display, gauge image display), the second staging after reception is performed. 2 The time when the effect display starts to be executed after reception is delayed compared to other effect devices, and even after the acceptance is made, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display" are displayed. The visibility of "ZEH2" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, as in the case of the first reception period described above, as shown in FIG. 177 (e1) or (e2), even after the reception is made, it is integrated within the finished reception period. Which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) the simulated image display IG was displayed, and which mode (first precursor effect display ZEH1, second precursor effect) was displayed as the precursor effect display. Since the player can easily recognize whether or not the display is displayed on the display ZEH2 or the like), it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed.

Here, after the acceptance period is over, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are displayed within the acceptance period, after the acceptance is made. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for "the time during which the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible manner". However, despite the fact that the reception has been made and the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are being accepted during the reception period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode as when it was, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and as a result, the "post-reception effect in the execution state" is produced. It will be delayed to notice. "

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 168 (b) and FIG. 177 (f1) or (f2), a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tG3a at which the second reception period ends due to the acceptance of the motion by the player. Then (when the timing tG3b arrives), as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the display related to the "second extinction-related display SK2" different from the first extinction-related display SK1 is started. I have to.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second extinction-related display SK2" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed is displayed as "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination by the player will be naturally shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tG3b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the second post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the second extinction-related display SK2 is displayed (timing tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second precursor effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility, and the integrated image display IG can be difficult to see only by the second precursor effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. When the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden and accepted within the second reception period, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is displayed until the second extinction-related display SK2 is displayed. Needless to say, the mode of the integrated image display IG can be confirmed with good visual recognition.

Further, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second extinction-related display SK2" is displayed while the "precursor effect display (here, the second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "second extinction-related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "second precursor staging display ZEH2" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. It is expected that the player's gaze destination will naturally shift from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 to the post-reception effect (timing tG3b or later). This makes it possible to continue displaying the second precursor effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed. , It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the precursory effect display was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, the precursor effect display is displayed until the precursor effect display is difficult to see (timing tG3a to tG3b). Since the aspect (here, the second precursor staging display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the game entertainment taste is suitably maintained.

Further, in the second reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a corresponding post-reception effect, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIG. 177 (e2) to (i1)). A different aspect (second extinction-related display SK2-1, SK2-2) appears as the second extinction-related display SK2 depending on the case where (i2)) appears. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 177 (f1) and (f2), there is a situation in which the "second post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even if the second extinction-related display SK2 appearing in the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is the first aspect (second extinction-related display SK2-1) and the second aspect (second extinction-related display SK2-). By confirming which of the two appears, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "second post-acceptance effect display" is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 168 (b) and FIG. 177 (g1) or (g2), the display (integrated image display IG) related to the second extinction-related display SK2 is displayed. When the timing tG3c arrives within the period in which the mode that makes it difficult to see) appears, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the second reception period. The execution of the "second reception post-reception display UG2" as the post-production is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B1 (FIG. 177 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 177 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and FIGS. 176 (d) to "B2". In the example in which the production progresses to (FIG. 177 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), the second reception is as shown in FIG. 177 (g2). The second aspect (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the "second extinction-related display SK2 (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2)" are displayed. The "second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)" is started to be executed in each of the displayed items. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the second reception period, the first effect device The post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2) in the (effect display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay as compared with other effect devices, and the deterioration of the game entertainment is suppressed. You will be able to do it. In addition, since the second post-reception staging display UG2 is started while the integrated image display IG and the second precursor staging display ZEH2 are difficult to see, the second staging period has already ended. While suggesting that, the player's gaze destination is from "integrated image display IG" or "second precursor effect display ZEH2" to "second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-acceptance effect display UG2-1 or second). It is expected that the display will be changed to UG2-2) after reception (timing tG3c or later).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)" is started. , FIG. 168 (b) and FIG. 177 (h1) or (h2), the "second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”,“ second precursor staging display ZEH2 ”, and“ second extinction-related display SK2 ”, the“ integrated image display SK2 ”is displayed. "IG" and "2nd precursor staging display ZEH2" are hidden respectively. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor staging display ZEH2" are hidden in this way, as shown in FIGS. 167 (b), 177 (i1), or (i2). , "Second extinction-related display SK2 (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2)" will be hidden, and the "second extinction-related display SK2-2" will be hidden. 2 The display related to the post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2) will be displayed.

In this respect, the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (here, the second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second). It is displayed by any of the effect display UG2-2) after reception. Therefore, the "second reception post-reception display UG2" is compared even after the "integrated image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the "second extinction-related display SK2" are hidden. It will be executed for a long time.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example corresponding to the first reception period (FIGS. 174 and 175), even if the reception is made within the first reception period and the "first reception post-reception display UG1" is executed, even if the reception is performed and the "first reception period display UG1" is executed. Before and after the "first reception post-reception display UG1" is started, the background image is not switched and is maintained. On the other hand, in the production example (FIGS. 176 and 177) corresponding to the second reception period, when the reception is made within the second reception period and the “second reception post-reception display UG2” is executed, The background image is switched before and after the "second reception post-effect display UG2" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the situation shown in FIGS. 177 (e) and 177 (f) (timings tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 168) in which the background image is not switched, the staging display device 1600 (No. 1). Even if there is a change in the effect in the 1 effect device), it becomes possible to suggest that the "second reception post-acceptance display UG2" is in a situation where it has not been started yet.

In the example shown in FIG. 177, as a post-reception effect, the same background image can be switched between the case where the mode with low expectation appears and the case where the mode with high expectation appears, but the degree of expectation is high. It may be possible to switch to a different background image depending on whether a mode with a low degree of appearance appears or a mode with a high degree of expectation appears. Further, the background image is switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second reception period occurs, the second reception period is accompanied by the effect within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 168). There are various displays on the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), and this suppresses the deterioration of the game entertainment. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tG3c) of the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display) according to the reception is set to be higher than the received timing tG3a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

Therefore, also in this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and 168 (c), the acceptance is based on the acceptance. , The second post-reception effect (second post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is started prior to the second post-reception effect (second post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. I try to let you.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tG3a that was accepted in the second reception period is limited to a part of the second post-acceptance effect (the second post-acceptance effect display). The second post-acceptance staging itself can be started without delay from the same timing tG3a.

As described above, such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, and the staging operation is possible. It may be provided as a staging movable body, a staging lamp capable of emitting light, or the like. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect), FIG. 177 (e1). As shown in the above, the mode in which the "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the second staging period of the second staging after the second staging UGT2 (second staging device). As the second post-reception specific effect UGT2-1), which is an aspect in which the expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT2 is low, the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) using the first effect device is used. Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B2 (FIGS. 177 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 177 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which the "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the second staging period, the second post-receipt specific staging UGT2 ( As the second post-reception specific effect UGT2-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the second post-reception specific effect UGT2, the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) using the first effect device is used. ) Is started before the execution.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 176, apart from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the second reception period. The precursor effect (second precursor specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 176 (b) to (d)). The second precursor specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs is set. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed in a form straddling the timing tG3.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the second reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 168 (d) is required. In tG2, the reception allowable sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 176 (c) and 176 (d)) is to be started to be output. That is, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the second reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tG3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 176 (d)") at which the second reception period occurs. The movement by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

Here, in the second reception period, the reception allowable sound includes a long-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time. Are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (d), the output of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are started at the same time, but the output is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at or after the timing tG3 when the second reception period occurs.

Then, in the second reception period, when the player accepts the motion while the long-time allowable sound and / or the short-time allowable sound are audibly output, the acceptance is based on the acceptance. , The long-time permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound are terminated halfway (the end in the audible output state).

Further, in the second reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the reception permissible sound (long-time permissible sound, short-time permissible sound) is audibly output, the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway. Not only that, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the second post-acceptance output sound (FIG. 177 (e1) or (e2)), which is different from the first post-acceptance output sound, is output as “♪♪”. The audible output of) is started. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance were made. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the corresponding production (output sound after the second reception).

As shown in FIG. 168 (d), such an output sound after the second reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "second disappearance-related display SK2" as in the "second reception post-effect display UG2". Will be executed for a relatively long time even after "" is hidden ("Situation where ♪♪ is output in FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)". Equivalent to). Further, regarding the output sound after the second reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1))" (the degree of expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B2 (Fig. 177 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

In the second reception period, a long-time permissible sound and a short-time permissible sound are output as reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and the first permissible sound is not always output. As in the reception period, only one reception allowable sound may be output.

On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted in FIG. 168, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B3 (FIGS. 177 (e3) to (h3))" is a game within the second reception period. It is assumed that the operation by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the second reception period occurs, the timing tG4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tG4 (when the second reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tG3a (second effect device) is used. As shown in FIG. 177 (e3), the integrated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of. Not only does it not hide, but it also prevents the integrated image display IG from being difficult to see. In this effect example, since the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG4, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is not displayed after the timing tG4.

According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement in time, the integrated operation is performed within the second reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 177 (f3), the second extinction-related display SK2 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to -1 or the second extinction-related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second extinction-related display SK2-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "second extinction-related display SK2-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "1 or 2 extinction related display SK2-2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "2nd extinction related display SK2" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (image display)". , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the second reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the second reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the second reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, "second extinction-related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second extinction-related display SK2 when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period. In the case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, the production is progressing from FIG. 176 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to the case (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, when the "second extinction-related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second extinction-related display SK2 when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, the second reception period If the movement by the player is accepted within, if the production progresses from FIG. 176 (d) to "B2 (FIG. 177 (e2) to (i2))" (relatively expected degree). This is equivalent to (when a high post-reception production was performed).

That is, in this case, even if the movement by the player is not accepted in the second reception period, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the end of the second reception period. Just by confirming the mode (second extinction-related display SK2-1, second extinction-related display SK2-2) that appears as the "second extinction-related display SK2", the second post-reception production is in a mode with low expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether the game has been executed in a highly expected manner, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (g3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "second extinction-related display SK2", first, the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. do. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "second extinction-related display SK2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 177 (h3).

FIG. 169 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third reception period (third reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the third fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the third variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the third variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "third variation pattern", the third predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the elapsed timing tH3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the effect after the third operation" is permitted. The above-mentioned third reception period (valid period) is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the third reception period, the third post-reception production will be performed based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the third reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the third post-reception effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first effect device). "Third reception post-reception display", "third post-reception specific staging" in the second staging device, and "third post-reception output sound" in the third staging device) are exactly those in FIG. 167 (or FIGS. 174 and 175). The above-mentioned first post-reception effect (“first post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “first post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “first reception” in the third effect device. It is different from "after-output sound"), but the other configurations are basically the same.

For example, the timing tH1 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600). In addition, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. 169 (b) also has a timing (acceptance regarding the third reception period) when the corresponding reception period (third reception period) occurs. Allowable timing) It is designed to be hidden as tH3 arrives. However, the point that it may be hidden before the timing tH3 is the same as in the case of the first reception period described above. In any case, even in the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor staging display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state where the player is allowed to accept the movement.

Further, the timing tH2 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 174 (c), while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. For the configurations related to the "integrated image display IG" and "first precursor staging display ZEH1" displayed in relation to the third reception period, and other examples related to them, see FIGS. 167 and FIG. Since it is as described above with reference to 174 and FIG. 175, it will be omitted here.

Further, the timing tH3 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the above-mentioned third reception period is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It will occur. Also, the "integrated image display IG" is hidden when it is accepted within the third acceptance period or when the third acceptance period ends without the acceptance. The same is true. It should be noted that the third reception period according to this example ends when the timing tH4 arrives when the movement is not accepted by the player.

Further, the timing tH3a shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period is terminated based on the acceptance of the action by the player, and the post-reception production corresponding to the third reception period (after the third reception). The production) will be started. As the third post-reception effect, at least a case where the first aspect with a relatively low expectation is executed and a case where the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed are prepared. The content of the effect (display after reception, specific effect after reception, and each content as output sound after reception) is different from the above-mentioned first post-reception effect, but the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the plurality of modes is executed. The points and the like are the same as in the case of the first post-acceptance production. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%". Further, at the timing tH3a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the third reception is started according to the acceptance), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not hidden. The point that the image display IG is not made difficult to see is the same as in the case of the first post-acceptance production.

Further, the timing tH3b shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3b arrives, the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (the first reception period and the third reception period, which correspond in common), is a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize. 1 Disappearance-related display The display related to the first aspect of SK1) will be started. The configuration of the "first extinction-related display SK1" displayed in relation to the third reception period and other examples related to the configuration are as described above with reference to FIGS. 167 and 175. Since there is, I will omit it here.

According to the configuration related to the "period from the display of the first precursor effect display ZEH1 to the display of the first extinction-related display SK1" of the first effect device (effect display device 1600), the first It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception period of the above or the third reception period has occurred (whether it has occurred), and this makes it possible to make it difficult to recognize the second effect device or the third effect device. To encourage people to be interested in the game, or to have a strong interest in which mode (1st post-reception staging display, 3rd post-reception staging display) appears as a post-reception staging display to improve the game entertainment. Will be able to.

In addition, even in the third reception period, regardless of whether the mode with low expectation or the mode with high expectation is executed as the corresponding post-reception staging, the first extinction-related display SK1 Since the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) is made to appear, the first staging device even under the situation where the post-receipt staging (second staging device, third staging device) is started to be executed. In (the staging display device 1600), the degree of expectation can be maintained as confidential. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and different extinction-related indications may appear depending on the degree of expectation. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

Further, the timing tH3c shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the "third post-reception staging display" as the post-receipt staging in the third staging device (staging display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the third staging period. (The type as the advance notice effect is different from the effect display after the first reception) ”will be started. As this "third post-reception effect display", a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and the case where the mode with low expectation is executed and the mode with high expectation are executed as the third post-reception effect. As described above, a different aspect appears as the "third reception post-effect display" depending on the case.

That is, in this case, the "third post-acceptance effect display" is started to be executed while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" are displayed respectively. This makes it possible to create a confusing situation of whether or not it is possible to recognize whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred, and the player's gaze point is "integral." It is expected that there will be a natural shift from "Chemical image display IG" to "Post-reception staging display" (timing tH3c or later).

Then, also in this example, when the display related to the "third reception post-effect display" is started in this way, regardless of the mode, the "third post-reception effect display" is displayed. Of the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-1", the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first extinction-related display SK-1" is hidden, and the "first disappearance-related display SK-1" is hidden under the condition that the visibility is good. The display related to "3rd reception post-production display" will be performed.

In this respect, as described above, the "third post-acceptance effect display" is also displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the "third post-acceptance effect display" is also hidden even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK-1" are hidden. , Will be executed for a relatively long time.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 169) and is limited. Various displays are performed on the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception effect (third post-reception effect display) according to the reception is set to be higher than the received timing tH3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted in the third reception period, as shown in FIGS. 169 (b) and 169 (c), the acceptance is based on the acceptance. 2 Start the execution of the third post-reception effect (specific effect after the third reception) using the effect device prior to the third post-reception effect (the third post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. I have to. The content of the third post-reception specific effect is different from that of the first post-reception specific effect, but it is basically the same as the first post-reception specific effect.

For example, as the third post-reception specific effect, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and the case where the mode with low expectation is executed and the mode with high expectation are executed as the third post-reception effect. Depending on the case, in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), a different mode appears as the specific effect after the third reception. Further, as shown in FIGS. 169 (b) and 169 (c), the third post-reception specific effect using the second effect device is changed to the third post-reception effect display using the first effect device. The point that the execution is started in advance is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception post-specification effect.

In addition, when the third reception period occurs, as in the case of the first reception period, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) provides a precursor effect (common correspondence between the first reception period and the third reception period). It is desirable that the first precursor specific effect) is executed. Further, in this case, the precursor specific effect (first precursor specific effect) in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). It is also executed when the timing tH3 at which the reception period occurs occurs, and it is more desirable to execute the timing tH3 so as to straddle the timing tH3.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and the timing shown in FIG. 169 (d) also occurs when the third reception period occurs. At TH2, the reception allowable sound is to be started to be output. That is, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the third reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tH3 at which the third reception period occurs, and the reception permissible sound is audibly output. Among them, the movement by the player can be accepted. It is desirable that the reception permissible sound is the same sound as the reception permissible sound output when the first reception period occurs.

However, in the third reception period, when the movement is accepted by the player while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is set based on the acceptance. I'm trying to finish it.

Further, in the third reception period, when the movement is accepted by the player while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, not only the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is made, this is performed. Based on the above, the audible output of the third post-reception output sound, which is different from the first post-reception output sound and the second post-reception output sound, is started. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance were made. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the corresponding production (output sound after the third reception).

As shown in FIG. 169 (d), the output sound after the third reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-" as shown in FIG. 169 (d). Even after "1" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Further, as the output sound after the third reception, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and a mode with a low expectation is executed and a mode with a high expectation is executed as the third post-reception effect. It is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) depending on the case.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tH3c arrives only by looking at the first staging device (staging display device 1600), but the second staging device or If the third staging device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tH3a earlier than that arrives. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted in FIG. 169, even if the movement by the player is not accepted within the third reception period, basically, the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period. It is the same as if it was not done.

That is, in this case, after the third reception period occurs, the timing tH4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tH4 (when the third reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tH3a (third). Similar to the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of the above, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not hidden. The image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, the first extinction-related display SK1-2 (first reception period and third) is used as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to the first extinction-related display SK1 (second aspect), which corresponds in common with the reception period of the above, is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ first extinction-related display SK1-2 ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, if the movement by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period, so that the player is strongly urged to operate. You will be able to. In the third reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, when the movement by the player is not accepted, a different mode appears as "first extinction-related display SK1" depending on the degree of expectation. However, a mode (first extinction-related display SK1-2) different from the mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) that appears when acceptance is made appears.

After that, of the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-2", the "integrated image display IG" is first hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance-related display SK-2" is hidden.

FIG. 170 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. 178 and 179 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "fourth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fourth fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fourth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 178 (a)). Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected "fourth variation pattern" itself. In the effect example shown in FIG. 178 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variable effect) is suggested. Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol change. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings from each other.

However, in the effect related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 170, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ starts regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the timing tI3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives after the fourth predetermined time has elapsed, the "fourth operation" is performed. The fourth reception period (valid period) is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 178 (d)) in which "acceptance regarding post-production" is permitted. As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the fourth reception period, the fourth post-reception production will be performed based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the fourth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fourth post-acceptance effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first effect device). “4th post-reception staging display”, “4th post-reception specific staging” in the 2nd staging device, and “4th post-receipt output sound” in the 3rd staging device) are shown in FIG. 167 (or FIGS. 174 and 175). The above-mentioned first post-reception effect (“first post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “first post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “first reception” in the third effect device. It is different from the post-output sound "). Further, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception production) according to this embodiment, the fourth extinction different from the first extinction-related display SK1 is described as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The point that the related display SK4 appears is also different from the case of the first reception period, but the other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, the effects performed in connection with the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) will be described, but here is an explanation of what is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception effect). I will omit it. That is, for matters not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, the timing tI1 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 170 (b) and 178 (b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is used as the precursor effect display. Is started.

Further, the timing tI2 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Will be displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed.

Further, the timing tI3 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 178 (d), the above-mentioned fourth reception period is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It will occur.

Further, the timing tI3a shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. That is, the production progresses from the example shown in FIG. 170 and from FIG. 178 (d) to "C1 (FIG. 179 (e1) to (i1))" or "C2 (FIG. 179 (e2) to (i2))". In this example, it is assumed that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the fourth reception period is terminated and the fourth reception period is supported based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a. The post-reception production (fourth post-reception production) will be started.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 179 (e1) to (i1))" has a relatively low expectation as a post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to "C2 (FIGS. 179 (e2) to (i2))" corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed corresponds to the reception corresponding to the fourth reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as a post-effect. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations as the post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period, and whenever the reception is received, a specific mode (for example, C1 (FIG. 179 (e1) to E1) to C1). (I1))) may appear. In this case, even if the "integrated image display IG is difficult to see" corresponding to the fourth reception period, a plurality of modes are not prepared according to the degree of expectation, and the same is always the case when the reception is received. The aspect will be made to appear.

Also in this fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 170 (b) and FIG. 179 (e1) or (e2), the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the fourth according to the acceptance). At the timing tI3a, which is the time when the effect is started after the reception, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. ..

Further, the timing tI3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when acceptance is made during the fourth reception period, the display related to the fourth extinction-related display SK4, which is different from the first extinction-related display SK1, is started (timing tI3b).

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is displayed, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination by the player will be naturally shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tI3b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the fourth reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 179 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a corresponding post-reception effect, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIG. 179 (e2) to (i1)). The fourth extinction-related display SK4 has a different aspect (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1, SK4-2) depending on the case where (i2)) appears. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 179 (f1) and 179 (f2), the "fourth post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even if the fourth extinction-related display SK4 appearing in the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is the first aspect (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1) and the second aspect (fourth extinction-related display SK4-). By confirming which of 2) and 2) appears, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "fourth post-reception staging display" is executed in a highly expected manner.

Further, the timing tI3c shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, the player operates within the fourth reception period while the display related to the fourth extinction-related display SK4 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears. The "fourth post-receipt staging display UG4" as the post-receipt staging in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the image will be started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to "C1 (FIG. 179 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 179 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (fourth post-receipt staging display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-receipt staging display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and FIGS. 178 (d) to "C2". In the example in which the production progresses to (FIG. 179 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 179 (g2), the fourth reception is performed. The second aspect (fourth post-receipt staging display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-receipt staging display UG4 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1 or fourth extinction-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, respectively. 4 Post-reception effect display UG4 (4th post-reception effect display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception effect display UG4-2) ”will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the fourth reception period, the first staging device (staging display device 1600) is used. The post-reception staging (4th post-reception staging display UG4) can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other staging devices, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In addition, since the fourth reception post-reception display UG4 is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player suggests that the fourth reception period has already ended. The gaze destination is naturally shifted from the "integrated image display IG" to the "fourth post-reception staging display UG4 (fourth post-reception staging display UG4-1 or fourth post-receipt staging display UG4-2)". Will be expected (after timing tI3c).

Then, even in the production related to the fourth reception period, the display related to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)" starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 170 (b) and FIG. 179 (h1) or (h2), the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or after the fourth reception)". While "Production display UG4-2)" is displayed, first, "Integrated image display IG" is hidden from "Integrated image display IG" and "Second extinction-related display SK2". .. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 170 (b) and FIG. 179 (i1) or (i2), the "fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth)" "4 Disappearance-related display SK4-1 or 4th extinction-related display SK4-2)" will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, the "4th reception post-production display UG4 (4th reception)" will be hidden. Post-effect display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception post-effect display UG4-2) ”is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tI3b arrives only by looking at the first staging device (staging display device 1600), but the second staging device or If the third staging device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tI3a earlier than that arrives. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

Further, even if the player only sees the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth extinction-related display SK4 different from the above-mentioned first extinction-related display SK1 is "integrated". It will appear as "a mode in which the image display IG becomes difficult to see". Therefore, by confirming such an aspect, it is possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type has occurred as the reception period before the "4th reception post-reception display UG4" is performed. become able to.

In this respect, the "fourth post-reception staging display UG4" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (here, the fourth post-reception staging display UG4-1 or the fourth). It is displayed by any of the effect display UG4-2) after reception. Therefore, the "fourth post-acceptance effect display UG4" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" are hidden. ..

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the fourth reception period occurs, it is accompanied by this within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 170). There are various displays on the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), and this suppresses the deterioration of the game entertainment. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display) according to the acceptance is set to be higher than the received timing tI3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even when the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth reception period, as shown in FIGS. 170 (b) and 170 (c), the second effect is based on the acceptance. The fourth post-reception effect (the fourth post-reception specific effect) using the device is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. There is.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tI3a that was accepted in the 4th reception period is limited to a part of the 4th reception post-production (4th reception post-production display). The fourth post-acceptance staging itself can be started without delay from the same timing tI3a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 179 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect), FIG. 179 (e1). As shown in the above, the mode in which "one sword" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the fourth reception period of the above-mentioned fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4 (fourth). As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-1), which is a mode with low expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) using the first effect device is used. Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to "C2 (FIG. 179 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), FIG. 179 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which "two swords" are displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the fourth reception period, that is, the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4 ( As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) using the first effect device is used. ) Is started before the execution.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 178, apart from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the fourth reception period. The precursory effect (fourth precursory specific effect) is to be executed (FIGS. 178 (b) to (d)). The fourth precursor specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tI3 at which the first reception period occurs is set. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed in a form straddling the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the precursory effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as an effect different from the first precursory specific effect shown in FIG. 174 (fourth precursory specific effect), but FIG. 174 shows. It may be executed as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown. In this case, even when the second staging device is confirmed, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the fourth reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 170 (d) is required. In tI2, the reception allowable sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 178 (b) to (d)) is to be started to be output. That is, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the fourth reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tI3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 178 (d)") at which the fourth reception period occurs. The movement by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period, if the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway (audible) based on the acceptance. (End in the middle of the output state).

Further, in the fourth reception period, when the movement is accepted by the player while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, not only the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is made, this is performed. Based on the above, the audible output of the fourth post-reception output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 179 (e1) or (e2)), which is different from the first post-reception output sound, is started. It has become. That is, in this case, in the fourth reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (reception allowable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception were performed. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the corresponding production (output sound after the 4th reception).

As shown in FIG. 170 (d), the output sound after the fourth reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" as in the "fourth reception post-effect display UG4". Will be executed for a relatively long time even after "" is hidden ("Situation where ♪♪ is output in FIGS. 179 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)". Equivalent to). Further, regarding the fourth post-reception output sound, an example in which the staging progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to “C1 (FIGS. 179 (e1) to (i1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception staging). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to "C2 (FIG. 179 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

Regarding the reception allowable sound output corresponding to the fourth reception period, in order to make it difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the fourth reception period occurs, the first reception period is used. It is desirable that the sound is the same as the reception allowable sound that is output correspondingly. However, it does not have to be the same.

On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted in FIG. 170, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to “C3 (FIGS. 179 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the fourth reception period. It is assumed that the operation by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the fourth reception period occurs, the timing tI4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the timing tI4 (when the fourth reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tI3a (fourth). As shown in FIG. 179 (e3), the integrated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of. Not only does it not hide, but it also prevents the integrated image display IG from being difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the fourth reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement in time, the integrated operation is performed within the fourth reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 179 (f3), the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to -1 or the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth extinction-related display SK4-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "1 or 2nd extinction-related display SK4-2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "4th extinction-related display SK4" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (image display)". , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the fourth reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the fourth reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the fourth reception period, the "fourth extinction-related display SK4-1" is displayed as the fourth extinction-related display SK4. In the case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth reception period, the production is progressing from FIG. 178 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 179 (e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to the case (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, when the "fourth extinction-related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth extinction-related display SK4 when the movement by the player is not accepted within the fourth reception period, the fourth reception period If the movement by the player is accepted within, if the production progresses from FIG. 178 (d) to "C2 (FIG. 179 (e2) to (i2))" (relatively expected degree). This is equivalent to (when a high post-reception production was performed).

That is, in this case, even if the movement by the player is not accepted in the fourth reception period, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the end of the fourth reception period. Just by confirming the mode (4th extinction-related display SK4-1, 4th extinction-related display SK4-2) as the "4th extinction-related display SK4" that appears in Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether the game has been executed in a highly expected manner, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (g3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4", first, the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. do. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is hidden as shown in FIG. 179 (h3).

In the fourth reception period, as in the first reception period, the mode with low expectation (FIGS. 179 (e1) to (i1)) and the mode with high expectation (FIG. 179 (e1) to (i1)) as the corresponding post-reception production. Regardless of which of 179 (e2) to (i2)) is executed, the same specific mode may appear as the fourth extinction-related display SK4. However, in this case, even when the movement by the player is not accepted in the fourth reception period, the same specific mode appears as the fourth extinction-related display SK4, unlike the case of the first reception period described above. Become.

By the way, as described above, in both the first reception period and the fourth reception period, the first effect display TE (in the period from the precursor effect display to the post-reception effect display). Here, the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed respectively.

In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 174 (b) and 174 (c), in the situation where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the first effect display TE The second effect display FE is designed so as not to be obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". Further, after the first acceptance period ends, as shown in FIGS. 175 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (when accepted). The first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first extinction-related display. It is designed so that it is not obscured by SK1 (first extinction-related display SK1-1 or first extinction-related display SK1-2).

On the other hand, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 178 (b) and 178 (c), the first effect display is displayed in the situation where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. The TE and the second effect display FE are designed so as not to be obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". Further, after the fourth reception period ends, as shown in FIGS. 179 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth extinction-related display SK4) -1 or the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2) appears, but the first effect display TE is not obscured by the fourth extinction-related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth extinction-related display SK4.

According to such a configuration, even if the type as the extinction-related display SK does not remember which type of the reception period corresponds to, the second effect is displayed when the extinction-related display SK is displayed. By simply confirming whether or not the display FE is difficult to see, it becomes possible to infer which type has occurred as the reception period. Further, regarding the first effect display TE, regardless of whether or not the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the disappearance-related display SK, the disappearance-related display SK does not make it difficult to see. Therefore, it is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed and then the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed. Of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, the first effect display TE can be displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed within the period up to. ..

That is, in this case, the type as the reception period is estimated only by confirming whether or not the "precursor effect display" or the "reception period" has occurred while the second effect display FE is displayed (at least the first). Since it is possible to infer that it is neither the reception period nor the fourth reception period), the second effect display FE itself does not indicate the degree of expectation for the fluctuating symbol effect. Even so, it becomes possible to provide an interesting effect using the second effect display FE.

Even when the second reception period occurs, it is difficult to visually recognize the first effect display TE due to the precursor effect display and the disappearance-related display as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period. It is designed not to be lost.

FIG. 171 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "fifth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fifth fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fifth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "fifth variation pattern", the fifth predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the elapsed timing tJ3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the effect after the fifth operation" is permitted. The above-mentioned fifth reception period (valid period) is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the fifth reception period, the fifth post-reception production will be performed based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the fifth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first effect device). After each reception, the "fifth post-reception effect display", the "fifth post-reception specific effect" in the second effect device, and the "fifth post-reception output sound" in the third effect device) correspond to other reception periods. It is different from the effect (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “post-reception output sound” in the third effect device). Further, the "fifth precursor effect display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is also different from each precursor effect display corresponding to the other reception period. However, the method related to the display of the "fifth post-reception staging display" and the "fifth precursor staging display" themselves (the start time and end time of the display, and the other image display before being hidden) As for the display effects related to the first reception period, the display effects performed in connection with the second reception period, etc. (FIG. 167, FIG. 168, etc.). It is the same as in FIGS. 174 to 177), and the other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, the production performed in connection with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception production) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception production) or the second reception period (second reception production), it may be mentioned that they are the same, but more than that. The explanation of is omitted here. That is, for matters not specifically mentioned, the production will be performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production) or the second reception period (second reception production), which is another example or modification. The same applies to the example.

For example, the timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167 and the timing tG1 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when the timing tJ1 arrives, the "fifth precursor effect display" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the "fifth precursor staging display" is a type that is displayed so as to straddle the timing tJ3 at which the fifth reception period occurs. That is, the "fifth precursor effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second reception period, but the effect content (display image) is different, but the "display start time and display image" Regarding the end time and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden, etc., the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is explained with reference to FIGS. 168, 176 and 177. The display is done in the same way as it was done. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

Further, the timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167 and the timing tG2 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when the timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed.

Further, the timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167 and the timing tG3 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when the timing tJ3 arrives, the above-mentioned fifth reception period occurs while the "fifth precursor effect display" and the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" are displayed. It will be.

Further, the timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167 and the timing tG3a shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a, the fifth reception period is terminated and the post-reception effect (fifth post-reception effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period is started to be executed. It will be. The fifth post-reception effect is also relative to the case where the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, is executed, as in the case of the first post-reception effect (FIG. 175) and the second post-acceptance effect (FIG. 177). The second aspect, which has a high degree of expectation, may be executed.

Further, the timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167 and the timing tG3b shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when the timing tJ3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears.

In this regard, when acceptance is made during the fifth reception period, the above-mentioned "first extinction-related display SK1" that corresponds in common with the first reception period as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to is started. For "1st disappearance-related display SK1", "how the display starts and ends, and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden", etc., see FIGS. 167 and 175. As explained with reference to. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, unlike the case of the first reception period, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fifth reception period is "relatively expected" as the production after the fifth reception. It is possible that different aspects appear depending on whether the "low first aspect" is executed and the "relatively high expectation second aspect" is executed.

For example, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the effect after the fifth reception, the "first disappearance-related display SK1" is performed as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see". (Here, the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (FIG. 175), which is the first aspect, is displayed. On the other hand, as the fifth post-acceptance effect, the first with relatively low expectations is displayed. When the "aspect" is executed, the first reception is made so that a mode different from the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" appears as the "aspect in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see". When the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the period, make people aware of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception effect. Since you will be able to do things, you will be able to improve your game entertainment.

In this case, when the "second mode with a relatively high expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "second mode with a relatively high expectation" is executed as the first post-reception effect. It is desirable to set so that the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) is higher than the time. The ratio may be 100%.

Further, when the "first mode with relatively low expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is performed as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". When a mode different from "1" appears, "the first extinction-related display SK1-2, which is the second mode as the first extinction-related display SK1" may appear as the different mode. That is, in this case, when the first extinction-related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first extinction-related display SK1-2 appears as a result of acceptance in the fifth reception period, within the first reception period. As a result of not being accepted in time, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the first extinction-related display SK1-2 has appeared, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, when the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the possibility is made more appropriately conscious, or when the "1st extinction-related display SK1-2" is displayed corresponding to the 1st reception period, "relatively expected" as the 5th post-reception production. In order to make people more aware of the possibility that the "second mode with a low degree" will be executed, the precursory effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period is not the "fifth precursory effect display". It is desirable that the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period is executed.

In addition, in the case of acceptance in the fifth acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 171, the second acceptance is based on the acceptance. The fifth post-reception effect (specific effect after the fifth reception) using the effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) becomes the fifth post-reception effect (fifth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. Start execution in advance. The same applies to the point that the specific effect after the fifth reception is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (fifth precursor specific effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period. Further, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed not as the fifth precursor specific effect but as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. 174. May be good.

Further, when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 171 (d), this acceptance allowable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 171 (d), "long-time allowable sound" and "short-time allowable sound" are audible outputs, respectively, as the reception allowable sound, similar to the reception allowable sound that is audibly output when the second reception period occurs. 168, 176 and FIGS. 168 and FIG. The audible output is performed by the method described for the "acceptable sound" with reference to 177. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, as for the reception allowable sound output when the fifth reception period occurs, only one reception allowable sound is output as in the case of the reception allowable sound output when the third reception period or the fourth reception period occurs. May be output, and when it is accepted, it may be output as if it were terminated halfway.

In any case, in the fifth reception period, when the player accepts the motion while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, the reception permissible sound is not only terminated halfway but also accepted. Occasionally, based on this, the audible output of the fifth post-reception output sound, which is different from the post-reception output sound output corresponding to another reception period, is started. That is, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, the production performed within the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (fifth reception). There is no conflict (overlap) with the post-output sound).

As with the first post-reception output sound and the second post-reception output sound, the fifth post-reception output sound is also relative to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation. It is audibly output as an output sound different from the case where it is executed in the second mode with high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 171, if the movement by the player is not accepted within the fifth reception period, the movement by the player is accepted after the fifth reception period occurs. The above timing tJ4 will arrive without any notice.

In this regard, even in the fifth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tJ4 (when the fifth reception period ends and the acceptance of movements by the player is no longer allowed). In the above, not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, the display related to the fifth extinction-related display SK5 is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see".

As with the second reception period, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" when the reception is not made in the fifth reception period is tentatively accepted in the fifth reception period. If so, the mode that had appeared (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) has come to appear. However, as in the first reception period, a mode that cannot appear when the reception is received in the fifth reception period may be made to appear.

FIG. 172 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "sixth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the sixth fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the sixth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the sixth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "sixth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "sixth variation pattern", the sixth predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the elapsed timing tK3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the effect after the sixth operation" is permitted. The sixth reception period (valid period) to be performed is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the sixth reception period, the sixth post-reception production will be performed based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the sixth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the sixth post-acceptance effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first effect device). After each reception, the "6th post-reception staging display", the "6th post-reception specific staging" in the 2nd staging device, and the "6th post-reception output sound" in the 3rd staging device correspond to other reception periods. It is different from the effect (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “post-reception output sound” in the third effect device). In addition, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted during the sixth reception period (sixth reception production), the image display (here) without the appearance of "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Then, the integrated image display) is hidden. However, the method related to the display of "6th post-reception staging display" and "image display" themselves (how to display with other images before the start and end times of the display and until it is hidden). Regarding (whether it is involved, etc.), it is the same as that described in the display effect (FIG. 167, FIG. 174, FIG. 175) performed in connection with the first reception period, and other configurations are also the same. It is basically the same as any of the above-mentioned methods.

Hereinafter, the production performed in connection with the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception production) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception production), it may be mentioned that it is the same, but further explanation is omitted here. That is, for matters not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, the timing tK1 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tK1 arrives, the "first precursor effect display" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

Further, the timing tK2 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display" is displayed.

Further, the timing tK3 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

Further, the timing tK3a shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tK3a, the sixth reception period is terminated and the post-reception effect (sixth post-reception effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period is started to be executed. It will be. As for the sixth post-reception effect, as in the first post-reception effect (FIG. 175), the first aspect with a relatively low expectation is executed and the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed. It may be executed.

However, as shown in FIG. 172, there is no processing related to the effect related to the sixth reception period corresponding to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Display, gauge image display) ”is hidden before it becomes difficult to see. This is the same regardless of whether "a mode with a low degree of expectation" or "a mode with a high degree of expectation" appears as the effect after the sixth reception (timing tF3b does not exist). The same applies to the case where the sixth reception period ends without the movement by the player being received in the sixth reception period (timing tF3b does not exist).

According to such a configuration, in another reception period, when the reception period ends, it is visually recognized until the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is hidden. In the sixth reception period, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is hidden even if the reception period ends, despite the appearance of a difficult aspect. Since the mode that makes it difficult to see this (disappearance-related display SK) does not appear until then, is the sixth reception period expired? (The situation in which the operation by the player is canceled. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize (is it in), and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

In addition, in the case of acceptance in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 172, based on the acceptance, the second staging device (here, here). The sixth post-reception effect (sixth post-reception specific effect) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to the sixth post-reception effect (sixth post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. .. The same applies to the point that the specific effect after the sixth reception is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (sixth precursor specific effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period. Further, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed not as the sixth precursor specific effect but as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. 174. May be good.

Further, when the sixth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 172 (d), this acceptance allowable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. FIGS. 170, 178 and FIGS. 170 and 178 and FIGS. The audible output is performed by the method as described for the "acceptable sound for reception" corresponding to the fourth reception period with reference to 179. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, as for the reception allowable sound output when the sixth reception period occurs, the two reception allowable sounds are output and accepted in the same manner as the reception allowable sound output when the second reception period occurs. When it is done, it may be output as if it is terminated halfway.

In any case, in the sixth reception period, when the player accepts the motion while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, the reception permissible sound is not only terminated halfway but also accepted. Occasionally, based on this, the audible output of the sixth post-reception output sound, which is different from the post-reception output sound output corresponding to another reception period, is started. That is, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, the production performed within the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (sixth reception). There is no conflict (overlap) with the post-output sound).

As with the first post-reception output sound and the fourth post-reception output sound, the sixth post-reception output sound is also relative to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation. It is audibly output as an output sound different from the case where it is executed in the second mode with high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 172, if the movement by the player is not accepted within the sixth reception period, the movement by the player is accepted after the sixth reception period occurs. The above timing tK4 will arrive without any notice.

In this regard, even in the sixth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tK4 (when the sixth reception period ends and the acceptance of the motion by the player is no longer allowed). In the above, not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. However, as described above, in the sixth reception period, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not appear after the timing tK4 arrives without the movement by the player being accepted. ..

FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "seventh fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 7th variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 7th variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "seventh variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "seventh variation pattern", the seventh predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the elapsed timing tL3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the effect after the 7th operation" is permitted. The above-mentioned seventh reception period (valid period) is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the 7th reception period, the 7th reception post-production will be performed based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the seventh reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the seventh post-acceptance effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first effect device). "7th post-reception staging display", "7th post-reception specific staging" in the 2nd staging device, "7th post-reception output sound" in the 3rd staging device) are after each reception corresponding to other reception periods. It is different from the effect (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “post-reception output sound” in the third effect device). Further, the "7th precursor effect display" corresponding to the 7th reception period (7th reception effect) is also different from each precursor effect display corresponding to other reception periods. Further, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception production) according to this embodiment, even if the "integrated image display IG is difficult to see", each disappearance-related display corresponding to the other reception period is displayed. Is now showing a different "7th extinction-related display". However, the method related to the display of "7th reception post-effect display", "7th precursor effect display", and "7th extinction-related display" themselves (the start time and end time of the display, and until they are hidden. In the meantime, how it relates to other image displays, etc.) is the same as that explained in any of the display effects performed in relation to each reception period described above, and other configurations. Is basically the same.

Hereinafter, the production performed in connection with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception production) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as in the case of other reception periods (other reception productions), it is mentioned that they are the same, but further explanation is omitted here. Further, for matters not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, the timing tL1 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, the precursor effect display is started to be executed on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

However, as described above, in the 7th reception period (7th reception effect), as the precursor effect display corresponding to this, the "7th precursor effect display" which does not correspond to other reception periods is displayed. There is. As shown in FIG. 173 (b), the "seventh precursor staging display" is a type that is not displayed at the time when the seventh reception period occurs and is hidden before this. .. That is, although the "7th precursor effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "1st precursor effect display ZEH1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the effect content (display image) is different, but the "display start time and display image" Regarding the end time and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden, etc., as described for "1st precursor effect display ZEH1" with reference to FIGS. 168 and 174. The display is done by the method. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

Further, the timing tL2 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "7th precursor effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "seventh precursor effect display" is displayed.

Further, the timing tL3 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

Further, the timing tL3a shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tL3a, the seventh reception period is terminated and the post-reception effect (seventh post-reception effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period is started. It will be. As for the 7th post-reception effect, as in the 1st post-reception effect (FIG. 175), the first aspect with a relatively low expectation is executed and the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed. It may be executed.

Further, the timing tL3b shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when acceptance is made during the 7th reception period, the "7th extinction-related display" which does not correspond to other reception periods as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to is started (timing tL3b).

Here, the "seventh extinction-related display" is different from the above-mentioned "first extinction-related display SK1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period, but the effect content (display image) is different, but the "display start time". And for the end time and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden, etc., refer to Fig. 167, Fig. 168, Fig. 175, Fig. 177, etc. The display is performed by the method described for "Display SK1". The same applies to other examples and modified examples. In addition, in both "when the 7th post-acceptance effect is executed as a mode with a relatively low expectation" and "when it is executed as a mode with a relatively high expectation", "the 7th extinction-related" The "display" is the same as in the case of the first reception period, in that it is displayed in the same manner.

However, unlike the case of the 1st reception period, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (7th disappearance-related display)" corresponding to the 7th reception period is directed after the 7th reception. As a result, different aspects may appear depending on whether the "first aspect with relatively low expectation" is executed and the "second aspect with relatively high expectation" is executed.

Further, the timing tL3c shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL3c arrives, the player will be able to perform the display related to the "7th disappearance-related display" (a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see) within the 7th reception period. The "7th post-receipt staging display" as the post-receipt staging in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is started.

In addition, even if the reception is received during the 7th reception period, as shown in FIG. 173, the second staging device (here, here) is based on the reception, as shown in FIG. 173. The 7th post-reception effect (7th post-reception specific effect) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to the 7th post-acceptance effect (7th post-acceptance effect display) using the 1st effect device. .. The same applies to the point that the specific effect after the seventh reception is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (seventh precursor specific effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period. Further, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed not as the seventh precursor specific effect but as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. 174. May be good.

Further, when the seventh reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 173 (d), this acceptance allowable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. FIGS. 170, 178 and FIGS. 170 and 178 and FIGS. The audible output is performed by the method as described for the "acceptable sound for reception" corresponding to the fourth reception period with reference to 179. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, as for the reception allowable sound output when the seventh reception period occurs, the two reception allowable sounds are output and accepted in the same manner as the reception allowable sound output when the second reception period occurs. When it is done, it may be output as if it is terminated halfway.

In any case, in the seventh reception period, when the player accepts the motion while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, not only the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway, but also the acceptance is made. Occasionally, based on this, the audible output of the seventh post-reception output sound, which is different from the post-reception output sound output corresponding to another reception period, is started. That is, in this case, in the 7th reception period, as in the case of the 4th reception period, the production performed within the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (7th reception). There is no conflict (overlap) with the post-output sound).

The 7th post-reception output sound, like the 1st post-reception output sound and the 4th post-reception output sound, is relative to the case where the post-reception production is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. It is audibly output as an output sound different from the case where it is executed in the second mode with high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 173, if the movement by the player is not accepted within the seventh reception period, the movement by the player is accepted after the seventh reception period occurs. The timing tL4 will arrive without any notice.

In this regard, even in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tL4 (when the seventh reception period ends and the acceptance of movements by the player is no longer allowed). In the above, not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, the display related to the seventh extinction-related display is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see".

Regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" when the reception is not made in the 7th reception period, it was accepted in the 7th reception period as in the 1st reception period. Occasionally, aspects that cannot appear have come to appear. However, as in the second reception period, a mode (a mode different depending on the degree of expectation) that would have appeared if it had been received in the seventh reception period may appear.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which the first reception period to the seventh reception period are prepared, the excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

That is, first, regardless of which of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, the image display displayed using the predetermined area in the display screen (staging display device 1600) is the same. It is possible to display even after the effect is advanced based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted (after the effect change based on the acceptance is started). As a result, even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance, the game shows which mode (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) the image display was displayed within the reception period. It will be possible for a person to grasp.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect contents (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as the post-reception effect) that proceed when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted are the advance notice effect (expectation suggestion effect). ) Is prepared for multiple reception periods (1st reception period to 7th reception period) with different types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of the type according to the result of the judgment (directing judgment). It is supposed to be.

In this regard, in the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display (first post-reception effect display to seventh) based on the acceptance. The effect display after reception) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Then, in the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, the post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance. Not only that, "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is further made to appear. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance is made, and the image display is hidden until the image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image display by making it difficult to see (disappearance-related display), the player's gaze target is naturally moved from the "image display" to the "post-reception effect display". Will be expected.

However, since the image display is originally displayed within the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, if the image display is displayed even after the acceptance has been made, the acceptance will be accepted. After the reception, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the effect display is already displayed, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced. In this regard, when acceptance is made in any of the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the image display is "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). ) ”Is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception staging display is displayed while the“ mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance-related display) ”appears. I am trying to do it. That is, in this case, after the movement is accepted by the player, while the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, the display before reception (display image) is displayed after reception. The transition to the display effect (display after reception) will be realized.

It should be noted that both the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-reception effect display" are common in that they are displayed based on acceptance. However, as shown in FIG. 175 (f1), FIG. 177 (f1), FIG. 179 (f1), and the like, the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” is defined as the image. It appears so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display when the display is displayed. On the other hand, the "post-reception effect display" means that the image display is displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 175 (g1), 177 (g1), 179 (g1), and the like. Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display. Further, in each of the above-mentioned examples, it was decided to start displaying the "post-reception effect display" when the image display is being displayed, but the "post-reception effect display" is displayed by the image display. The display does not necessarily have to be started when the image is being displayed, and the display may be started after the image display is hidden.

In addition, regarding "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", as a method of "appearing so as to make the image display difficult to see", at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed. In addition to the method realized by preferentially displaying an image display different from the image display (displayed on the front layer), a part of the image display is missing due to the image display different from the image display (displaying on the front layer). It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying an image (moving image) made to be visible (invisible). It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself, instead of displaying an image different from the image display. On the other hand, as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the image display" with respect to the "post-reception effect display", "post-reception effect display" is displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed. Although it is displayed, in addition to the method realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" (displayed on the rear layer) in the form that the image display is prioritized, at least while the image display is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method or the like realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in the area other than the area where the image display is displayed.

In addition, as a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the image display in at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed, and a method of displaying an image display different from the image display. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing a numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself.

In addition, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is a situation in which the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It is supposed to appear below. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed, the image display becomes difficult to see due to the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, while making the image display visible, the "post-reception staging display" is in a state where it can appear soon, and the player's gaze destination should be changed from the "difficult to see image display". You will be able to urge them to be ready in advance.

In addition, when the image is accepted during the first reception period to the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc., the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the "post-reception staging display". Can be displayed even after "" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, of the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden in a wider range. Since it becomes possible to provide the effect of "post-reception effect display", it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment by changing the effect during such a display period.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, FIGS. 175 (g1) and (h1), FIGS. 177 (g1), (h1), and FIGS. As shown in 179 (g1) and (h1), regarding the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the image display is displayed but also the image display is displayed. Is also displayed in the area where is not displayed. Then, in the area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed at least in a part thereof, but the "post-reception effect" is displayed according to the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". At least a part of "display" is displayed so as to be difficult to see (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears as a mode in which not only the image display but also the "post-reception effect display" is difficult to see. Therefore, it is expected to improve both the effect until the image display is hidden and the effect when the display of "post-reception effect display" is started. Become.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed after the reception is made. In the situation where "" is not displayed, apart from "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", a specific effect after reception (using the second effect device) that does not make the image display difficult to see. Post-reception production) can appear in a manner that suits the degree of expectation. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-acceptance staging prior to this without disturbing the staging performance of the first staging device.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is described as "摸". It appears in a situation where the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared before the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears. I am doing it. In addition, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) will continue until after the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is completed. There is.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated staging in the first staging device can enjoy the post-receipt staging by the second staging device having a simpler staging. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment for various types of players.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the precursory effect display is executed over the timing at which the simulated image display is displayed. Further, in a part of each of the above-mentioned production examples, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, it is possible to accept the image while the precursor effect display is displayed. The "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" makes it difficult to see both the image display and the precursor effect display (priority display described above, etc.).

However, on the other hand, at least at the time when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, neither the image display nor the precursor effect display overlaps with the whole. , At least part of it is not obstructed by visibility. That is, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is executed in such a way that the visibility of the image display and the precursor effect display is gradually deteriorated (the overlapping area is increased). There is.

Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. It becomes. In this case, the dynamic display of the image display is not terminated and continues even though the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has appeared since it was accepted. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is only the image display. Instead, it was decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the gauge image that suggests the remaining time until the end of the reception period. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after it is accepted, it is possible to suppress the appearance as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods, after the first reception based on the acceptance. The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and a mode (first extinction-related display SK1) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display can appear separately from the first post-acceptance effect display UG1. Further, when the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods, the second post-reception effect display UG1 is different from the first post-reception effect display UG1 based on the acceptance. The post-reception effect display UG2 can be displayed, and apart from the second post-reception effect display UG2, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second) as a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see. The disappearance-related display SK2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the image display can be displayed without confirming which of "the first post-reception effect display UG1" and "the second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed as the post-reception effect display. Only by confirming what mode (first extinction-related display SK1 and second extinction-related display SK2) is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to infer the type of the effect display after reception.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the operation (operation) by the player is received within the third reception period among the plurality of reception periods, the acceptance is made. Based on this, it is possible to display a third post-reception effect display that is different from both the "first post-reception effect display UG1" and the "second post-reception effect display UG2". Separately, as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, the above mode (first extinction-related display SK1) corresponding to the first reception period can appear.

According to such a configuration, it is unclear whether the first or third post-acceptance effect display appears when the first extinction-related display SK1 appears as an aspect of making it difficult to visually recognize the image display. However, as an aspect of making it difficult to visually recognize the image display, when the second extinction-related display SK2 appears, it becomes possible to infer that the second post-acceptance effect display appears.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is displayed (priority display) in the area including at least a part of the area in which the image display is displayed. It was decided to realize as. However, it is also possible to realize an effect using an effect device (movable body or the like) on the front side of the display screen by executing an effect at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of the image display in front view.

Even if the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1) appears as a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display", if the type of reception period is different, the jackpot symbol will be affected by the symbol variation. It is desirable that the rate at which is stopped (expectation) is different.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the precursor effect display is the same (first precursor effect display), but when the "first extinction-related display SK1" appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (first). When a mode different from the "first extinction-related display SK1" appears (fourth reception period), or when the mode does not appear (sixth reception period). ) And so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, although the precursor effect display (first precursor effect display, fourth precursor effect display) is different, the same aspect (first extinction-related display SK1) is the same as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". ) Appears (first reception period, fifth reception period).

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult to guess the type of the reception period until it is grasped which type is being executed as the post-reception effect, and the game entertainment is improved. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device can be executed, and the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) can be executed using the second effect device. During the period, in the first staging device, there are a state in which the image display is relatively easy to see and a state in which the image display is relatively difficult to see.

That is, in this case, which aspect has appeared as a model image display even after the execution of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance. It is possible to confirm. In addition, during the execution period of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device, the image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that the "first effect device" can be used. It is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally move the gaze target to the "second staging device".

In the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is the visibility of the image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted. It is supposed to be started so as not to affect. More specifically, the image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is It is not an image display displayed by utilizing at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it an effect performed at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the display of the post-reception effect is started after the appearance timing of the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", but the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is started. May be started at the timing of appearance.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" is realized as an image display displayed by using at least a part of the "area in which the image display is displayed". I decided. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area in which the image display is displayed" tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

Further, as described above, the image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations. Then, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, since the display mode is maintained and continued including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. even after the acceptance is made, after the acceptance is made. It is also possible to recognize in what manner the image display was displayed during the reception period.

However, in this case, if it is in the period immediately after the reception, it is inevitable to perform the post-reception production under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the image display). That is, the range of effectability is narrow, and only a limited effect (post-reception effect using only an effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, when the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance-related display)" appears after a lapse of time, the post-acceptance effect is performed under the condition that "the visibility of the image display may be deteriorated". Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the "post-reception effect display in the first effect device" under such conditions. By performing these two post-operation effects with different properties (specific effect after reception in the second effect device and display of effect after reception in the first effect device) in stages, the mode of displaying the image even after being accepted. While making it easy to confirm, the role as a post-operation effect can also be suitably exerted.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the second precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the "image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". The second extinction-related display SK1 (FIG. 177) appears. In addition, when the 7th precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, the 7th extinction-related display appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" if acceptance is made within the corresponding reception period. It has become like. On the other hand, if a "first precursor effect display" different from the above "second precursor effect display" or the above "7th precursor effect display" is displayed as the precursor effect display, it is within the corresponding reception period. When acceptance is made, the first extinction-related display appears (first reception period, third reception period) and the fourth extinction-related display appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (the first reception period, the third reception period). There is a fourth reception period).

That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect display or the seventh precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, it is recognized what kind of aspect appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" at that time. You will be able to make it.

Moreover, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, as the precursor effect display, the "first precursor effect display" different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display" or the above "7th precursor effect display"). Is displayed, even if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, there is a case (sixth reception period) in which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself does not appear. There is.

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect display is different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display" or the above-mentioned "7th precursor effect display") (here, the first precursor effect display). If executed, whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself appears within the period from the time when the image is accepted until the image display is hidden. Since it becomes unknown, it is possible to improve the staging effect from the time when the image is accepted until the image display is hidden, and it is possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. become able to.

It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned production examples may be realized by transforming it into the following configuration, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further provided as another reception period (another precursor effect display). May be good. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, "the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" within the period from the acceptance of the movement by the player to the non-display state of the image display. "Aspects" can appear. In this regard, in this modification, when a specific mode (for example, a second precursor effect display, a seventh precursor effect display, or another precursor effect display not described above) is displayed as the precursor effect display, Even if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself is prevented from appearing. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" does not appear until the image display is hidden, and the "image display" is displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the image display is not made difficult to see in relation to the "mode that makes it difficult to see."

In this case, also in this modification, when the precursor effect display is executed in the "first precursor effect display" and is received within the corresponding reception period, the reception is performed within the corresponding reception period. At that time, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period), the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears. There are cases where this does not appear (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the precursory effect display is different from a specific aspect (for example, a second precursory effect display, a seventh precursory effect display, or another precursory effect display not described above) (here). , 1st precursor effect display), it will be unclear whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" appears. The staging effect until the image display is hidden is improved, and the tension can be appropriately maintained.

With respect to the configurations relating to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each configuration applicable to the above-mentioned configurations before the transformation.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when a specific mode (here, “second precursor effect display”) is displayed as the precursor effect display, the player operates within the corresponding reception period. Even if the image is not accepted, the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" is made to appear in the same mode as when the image was tentatively accepted.

On the other hand, when a mode different from the specific mode (here, "second precursor effect display") is displayed as the precursor effect display (here, "first precursor effect display"), it corresponds to this. When the movement by the player is accepted during the reception period and when the reception is not performed, different modes appear as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (first reception period, etc.). Even if the movement by the player is not accepted within the corresponding reception period, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears in the same mode as when the acceptance was tentatively performed. There are cases (fourth reception period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by using the effect (precursor effect display) that is executed before the reception period occurs, the effect after the reception period ends and the effect when the reception period is not accepted. You will be able to increase such things.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, a specific mode (here, a second extinction-related display, a fourth extinction-related display, a seventh extinction-related display, etc.) appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". During the possible reception period, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but a mode different from the specific mode as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (here, the first extinction-related display). During the reception period in which the reception allowable sound can appear, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound may be terminated halfway, and the audible output state of the reception allowable sound may not be terminated halfway. According to such a configuration, by confirming the output status of the reception allowable sound at the time of acceptance, a situation may appear in which it is easy to guess what kind of mode will appear as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Since the situation that is difficult to guess will appear, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the reception allowable sound that can be used as such a judgment material is terminated at a timing before the timing at which the reception period ends (timing within the reception period). Since the sound is audibly output, it is accepted while the reception allowable sound is in the audible output state, or it is accepted after the reception allowable sound is finished in the audible output state. You will be able to select whether to play the game.

In each of the above-mentioned effect examples, in the reception period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display), a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to FIG. In the reception period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first precursor effect display), the image can be displayed. It is desirable to have an aspect that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three aspects shown in FIGS. 144 (b) to (d) are not displayed and only FIG. 144 (a) is displayed). ..

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the reception period of a specific type, a plurality of types are prepared as precursor display effects suggesting that the reception period in which the movement by the player is the reception target will soon occur. Then, among the multiple types of precursor effect displays, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display) can be executed in a form that straddles the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs. , The action by the player can be accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed.

That is, in this case, since the movement by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (aspect) is displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (aspect) of the precursor effect display is used. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the game interest caused by forgetting to confirm.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the action by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, but after the acceptance. Even when the effect is started to be executed, the specific precursor effect display is displayed without being hidden.

That is, in this case, the operation by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is displayed as the precursor effect display, and further, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursory effect display.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception effects, the post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) using the second effect device is a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth). It is supposed to be executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the precursor effect display).

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception effects, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect display) using the first effect device itself itself is a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect). It is supposed to be executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the display and the fifth precursor effect display (the specific precursor effect display is prioritized over the post-reception effect display (front display on the layer), etc.). ).

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, during the reception period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display, the fifth precursor effect display), while the precursor effect display is displayed. However, when the movement by the player is not accepted, the precursor effect display can be hidden before the corresponding reception period ends. ing. That is, in this case, it is possible to select whether to start the post-reception effect while the precursor effect display is displayed or to start the post-reception effect while the precursor effect display is hidden. become.

However, the execution state of a specific precursor effect display does not necessarily have to be terminated within the reception period, and the execution state is not terminated within the reception period and continues to be displayed until the reception period ends. It may be a thing. In this case, the specific precursor effect display is displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed until the corresponding timing in the middle of the reception period. In the period after the timing, it is desirable to display only the area different from the area where the image display is displayed, not the area where the image display is displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound suggesting that the reception is permitted or the reception is permitted (soon) is audible. The process is executable. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

Further, among the above-mentioned production examples, in the examples shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 and 173, the movement by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible (output state) within the reception period. If this is the case, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" before the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" still appears. The process for making the reception allowable sound inaudible is started in the non-audible state.

That is, in this case, even if the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the acceptance period has already expired. Can be suitably suggested to the player. As a result, even if the timing at which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears after being accepted is delayed, the inconvenience is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the image display is displayed in a mode with good visibility. Will be able to

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, even if the movement by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible, the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway and the reception allowable sound is audible. It is decided to further prepare a reception period (first reception period, etc.) for displaying the disappearance effect display while the above is being continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is accepted or the situation has not been accepted yet, and the tension can be appropriately maintained.

In this regard, the reception period (FIG. 168, FIG. 170, FIG. 173) in which the reception allowable sound is made inaudible when the movement by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible. Even if the movement by the player is accepted while the reception permissible sound is audible, the reception permissible sound is not made inaudible during the reception period (Fig. 167). Since the type as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is different, it is possible to estimate the subsequent progress of the production by checking the output status of the reception allowable sound. Become.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, a plurality of types are prepared as reception allowable sounds. In this regard, it is desirable that the same sound is output as the reception allowable sound in the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of these reception periods is occurring.

On the other hand, the reception permissible sound that is audible corresponding to the first reception period is the reception that is audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. It is audibly output as a sound different from the permissible sound. According to such a configuration, when the reception allowable sound is started to be output, by checking the sound, it becomes possible to narrow down the candidates as to which type is generated as the reception period to some extent. In addition, when the acceptance is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is audible, the candidates can be further narrowed down by confirming whether the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway, and the acceptance acceptance sound can be further narrowed down. It will be possible to provide an interesting effect using.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode (here, the second precursor effect display, the fifth precursor effect display, the seventh precursor effect display), the corresponding acceptance allowable sound If acceptance is made while is being output, the acceptance permissible sound is terminated halfway, but when the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first precursor effect display), this is the case. When the reception allowable sound is output while the reception allowable sound is output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway (third reception period, fourth reception period, sixth reception period) and in the middle. There are cases where it is not completed (first reception period). Even with such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide an interesting color rendering using the reception allowable sound.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, there is a reception period in which two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the reception allowable sound, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as the reception allowable sound. .. During the reception period in which two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the reception allowable sound, if the reception is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible, the reception is terminated halfway. In the reception period in which only one sound is output, there are cases where the reception allowable sound is audible and the reception is terminated halfway or not. Even with such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide an interesting color rendering using the reception allowable sound.

Regarding the reception period for outputting two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) with different sound data as the reception allowable sound, if the reception is accepted while the reception allowable sound is output, two sounds are received. Only one of the reception allowable sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) may be terminated halfway, and the other may be continued without being terminated halfway.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" when the reception is made and when the reception is not made. The reception period (second reception period, fourth reception period, fifth reception period, seventh reception period, etc.), and when the reception is made and when the reception is not made within the reception period, " Since there is a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which a different mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", acceptance is accepted. It will be possible to improve the staging when it is not done.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when acceptance is made during a specific reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.), "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is described. , It is realized as an extinction-related display different from the image display, but when it is not accepted, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is changed to the image display itself (numerical value (transparency) related to the display characteristics). It is desirable to achieve this by changing the rate). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether the situation is accepted or not when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears. become able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, it is possible to execute the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used for both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. In), the first effect display TE (here, corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the above-mentioned second effect display FE, which are not related to the reception period, can be displayed. It has become. Then, as shown in FIG. 175, when the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period or the third reception period, the image display is displayed, and the image display is displayed. The "mode that makes it difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1)" appears, but the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (first disappearance-related display SK1)" is even in the case of a symbol change in which the reception period does not occur. It does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that can be displayed (either the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE is prioritized or the first effect display TE). And the extinction-related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

That is, in this case, the disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display (first effect display TE or the second effect display FE) that has nothing to do with the reception period. Therefore, it becomes possible to proceed with the game without adversely affecting the staging that is not directly related to the reception period.

However, if the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 179, while the image display is displayed, the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see). The "fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" appears, but the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE. (It is not difficult to see), but it is supposed to be displayed so as to affect the visibility (make it difficult to see) of the second effect display FE.

According to such a configuration, although the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility may be affected when "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears depending on the type. In some cases, the visibility will not be affected. Therefore, when the player performs an operation, whether or not to confirm this for the image display that is not directly related to the reception period. It will be possible to provide a directing effect on the image.

However, in this case, the first effect display TE shall be displayed as (suggested) images (suggestions) related to the winning (expected degree) of the symbol variation, and the second effect display FE shall be displayed as the symbol. Making it display as a display that does not affect (does not suggest) the hit (expectation) of the fluctuation reduces the entertainment interest when the visibility of the second staging display FE is affected. It can be said that it is desirable to avoid.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the second reception period can be generated while the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is displayed. It does not occur, and it occurs only when the second staging display FE is not displayed. That is, the second effect display FE can be displayed only at a relatively early stage after the start of the symbol change, and is hidden thereafter, and the effect or decoration in the early stage of the change is exhibited. It is used to enhance. In this regard, the second acceptance period is set to be able to occur only when the symbol change is relatively late after the start of the symbol change, so that this is not related to each other in a staging manner. It will be possible to create such a relationship.

As shown in FIG. 179, even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth extinction-related display SK4, the second effect display FE is then displayed again in an easy-to-see state. .. That is, in this case, it will be hidden when a predetermined timing arrives thereafter. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike the case of the simulated image display, an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize does not appear.

The first effect display TE displays a predetermined effect result (expected degree) at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation, but when the disappearance-related display is displayed during the execution period of the first effect display TE, The disappearance-related display is hidden before a predetermined timing arrives.

As shown in FIG. 179, the area where the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed, and in this area, the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode in which the priority related to the display is higher than that. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set in the fourth extinction-related display SK4, so that the second effect display FE can be visually recognized through the fourth extinction-related display SK4, although it is difficult to see. You may do it.

As shown in FIG. 179, the area where the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed, and in this area, the first effect display TE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode in which the priority related to the display is lower than that of the display. At this time, it is desirable that the fourth extinction-related display SK4 behind the first effect display TE is not made visible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 175, the first extinction-related display SK1 is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. It has become a thing.

In the case of the first extinction effect display SK1 that does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the reception allowable sound is continued without being terminated halfway, and the fourth extinction effect display that affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the reception allowable sound can be terminated halfway. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the color rendering using the reception allowable sound.

Both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are dynamically displayed, and even under the situation where any of the extinguished effect displays is displayed, both of these dynamic displays are to be continued. It is desirable to do.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to appear a "mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" while the image display is displayed, and the "image display is difficult to see". A plurality of aspects are prepared as "aspects (indication related to extinction)".

That is, in this case, since any of a plurality of modes will appear as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", the game entertainment when the image display becomes difficult to see is improved. Will be expected.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 179), the fourth. The disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the image display and the second effect display FE, but the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1) corresponding to the first reception period". ) ”(FIG. 175), the first extinction-related display SK1 is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize only the image display of the image display and the second effect display FE. There is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect as to which of the "first disappearance-related display SK1" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Therefore, it is expected that the game will be improved.

In this case, what are the "image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed in the first reception period and the "image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed in the fourth reception period? , It is desirable that they are displayed in the same manner.

The image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, and the disappearance-related display ends. It is desirable to hide the image at a predetermined timing (before the symbol change stops).

The fourth extinction-related display SK4 may not be an image but may be an effect by an effect body performed in front of the front view of the image display and the second effect display FE. However, it is desirable that the first extinction-related display SK1 is realized as an image display.

In each of the above-mentioned effect examples, the second reception period can be generated even when the second effect display FE is in a non-display state, and the second effect display is a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see. A special mode (second extinction-related display SK2) that appears only during the reception period is prepared. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. 177, when a special mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (second extinction-related display SK2)" (second extinction-related display). There are SK2-2) and cases where it does not appear (second extinction-related display SK2-1), and when the special aspect appears, the degree of expectation (big hit) is higher than when the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is displayed. It is desirable to increase the rate of stopping at the symbol). The ratio may be 100%. Further, in this case, it is desirable that during the second reception period, a special mode of precursor effect (second precursor effect display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second effect display FE is in the display state can be executed.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the first reception period, the first aspect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 (FIG. 175 (e1)). (I1)) and the case where the second aspect (first post-acceptance effect display UG1-2), which has a higher expectation than the first aspect, is executed as the first post-acceptance effect display UG1 (FIG. 175 (e2)-. In any case of (i2)), the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

On the other hand, in the second reception period, the second mode (second post-reception staging display) has a higher expectation than the first mode (second post-receipt staging display UG2-1) as the second post-receipt staging display UG2. When UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2) appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", but the first mode as the second post-acceptance effect display UG. When (second reception post-reception display UG2-1) is executed, a specific mode does not appear as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and a mode different from the specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-) is executed. 2) is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as a post-reception staging display only by confirming "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see", and the expectation. Since there will be cases where the degree cannot be estimated, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by the staging of such "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". ..

In addition, as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", a "specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2)" that may occur corresponding to the second reception period. With respect to the above, it cannot appear as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first reception period. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of reception period based on "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display", and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

However, the same mode may appear in the first reception period and the second reception period as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

As shown in FIG. 175, in the first reception period, if the reception is not made, the mode that cannot appear when the reception is made (the first disappearance-related display) as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". It was decided to make SK-2) appear. However, if the acceptance is not made during the first reception period, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself may not appear.

In the second reception period, one of a plurality of modes having different expectations (ratio at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) can be selectively audibly output as the reception allowable sound, and in the first reception period, it is possible to selectively output. It is desirable that only one aspect of the reception allowable sound can be audibly output. Further, in this case, any of the reception allowable sounds (plurality of modes) that can be audibly output corresponding to the second reception period is different from the reception allowable sound that is audibly output corresponding to the first reception period. It is desirable to prepare.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is assumed that all of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occur in different fluctuation patterns, but the same fluctuation occurs in the first reception period to the seventh reception period. The reception period may be included in the pattern, which may occur sequentially. That is, in this case, at least some of the first reception period to the seventh reception period can occur in a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

For example, regarding the reception period (second reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "image display" is used. Is difficult to see (disappearance-related display) ”does not change according to the degree of expectation After a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) occurs, it occurs within the same symbol fluctuation It is desirable to be able to.

In addition, regarding the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) that can be accepted while the precursor effect display is displayed, acceptance can be made while the precursor effect display is displayed. It is desirable that after a non-reception period (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) occurs, it can occur within the same symbol variation.

During the reception period, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation. It is possible to selectively output multiple reception permissible sounds including a specific reception permissible sound that cannot be audibly output during the reception period that does not change, and when a specific reception permissible sound is audibly output, "the image display is difficult to see. It is desirable that a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as a mode (display related to extinction).

In addition, during the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, it is dedicated to the reception period. Although the precursory effect display can be executed, a special advance notice effect can be executed at a stage even before the precursory effect display is executed, and when the special advance notice effect is executed, the above-mentioned It is desirable to ensure that "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is executed in a highly expected manner when acceptance is made during the reception period.

During the reception period when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, a big hit is obtained as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". It is also possible to prepare an aspect (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) that can appear only when the image is displayed. In addition, an embodiment that cannot appear when a big hit is obtained (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-1) may be prepared.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (such as an image display or a gauge image) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, which is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is possible to output reception-related staging sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) at least within the reception period. Further, if the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect can be output based on the acceptance, and the above reception-related effect display can be output within the reception period. If an action by the player is accepted while (image display, gauge image, etc.) is displayed, the reception-related effect display (image display, gauge image, etc.) is received based on the acceptance. ) Is hidden. Similarly, if the movement by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound, etc.) is audible within the reception period, the reception-related production is based on the acceptance. Sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) may be inaudible.

In such a configuration, based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect is audibly output, and the reception-related effect display (image display or gauge image) is displayed. Etc.) are hidden and the reception-related staging sound is made in an inaudible state (reception allowable sound, etc.), so that it becomes possible to easily recognize that the reception-related production sound is in the accepted state.

In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the reception-related effect display (sound image display, gauge image, etc.) is terminated at the time when the post-reception effect according to the acceptance is started. Although it is displayed without being displayed, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound, etc.) may be inaudible because it is finished when the reception output sound corresponding to the reception starts to be executed. I am trying to be there.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned reception-related effect display (sound image display, gauge image, etc.) displayed during the reception period is displayed until after the effect is started to be executed after the reception. On the other hand, the reception-related staging sounds (reception allowable sounds, etc.) that are audible (output) during the reception period shall not be audible when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. It becomes. As a result, even after the post-reception effect is started, the reception-related effect sound displayed during the reception period can be confirmed as the reception-related effect display (image display, gauge image, etc.). By making the reception allowable sound (such as the reception allowable sound) inaudible, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

As described above, the reception-related effect display (image display, gauge image, etc.) is executed as an effect display suggesting the ratio (expectation degree) at which a big hit is obtained. In this case, the reception-related effect sound (reception allowable sound) also differs depending on the degree of expectation (aspect as the reception-related effect display) suggested by the reception-related effect display (image display, gauge image, etc.). It is desirable to output.

However, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound) is not terminated even when the output sound is started after reception, and is continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is accepted and the tension can be appropriately maintained.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the first reception period, only one aspect can be displayed as a reception-related effect display (such as a model image display or a gauge image), and a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as an effect display that suggests the ratio (expectation level). In addition, since only one aspect of the reception-related staging sound (acceptable reception sound) appears in the first reception period, when an aspect different from the aspect appears in the other reception period. It becomes possible to appropriately improve the game entertainment.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, a plurality of modes including a specific mode are prepared as the precursor effect display, and the precursor of the specific mode is prepared prior to the occurrence of the specific reception period (for example, the second reception period). The staging display (for example, the second precursor staging display: FIG. 168) can be displayed, and the audible output of the reception-related staging sound (reception allowable sound, etc.) can be started. Then, the precursor effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) and the reception-related effect sound (acceptance allowance sound) can be executed in a form straddling the timing when the reception period occurs, and the specific mode can be executed. The motion by the player can be accepted while the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is displayed and the reception-related effect sound (reception allowable sound) is in the audible state (output). ing. In this respect, if the movement by the player is accepted while the precursor effect display of a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is displayed within the reception period, it is based on the acceptance. The precursory effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second precursory effect display: FIG. 168) is hidden. In addition, if the movement by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound) is audible within the reception period, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound) is based on the acceptance. The sound) is made inaudible.

In the above configuration, the precursor effect display of a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is hidden based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period. Since the reception-related effect sound (acceptance allowance sound) is set to be inaudible, the precursor effect display of a specific mode that has been in the execution state before the reception period occurs (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. Even when the movement by the player is accepted while the 168) and the reception-related staging sound are being executed, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the operation is in the accepted state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168 and the like, the precursory effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second precursory effect display: FIG. 168) is a post-reception effect corresponding to the reception within the corresponding reception period. Is not finished and is displayed when the execution is started. On the other hand, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound) is finished at the time when the output sound after reception according to the reception is started, and is made in an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect display of the above specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) displayed before the reception period occurs is performed after the reception start of the effect. On the other hand, the above-mentioned reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound), which is audible (output) before the reception period occurs, is in an audible state when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. Will be made to disappear. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started, it is possible to confirm the mode as the precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, but the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound (acceptable reception sound) inaudible, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

Regarding the precursor effect display of a specific mode (second precursor effect display ZEH2), it is displayed as a different display image according to the degree of expectation, and is executed as an effect display suggesting the ratio (expectation degree) that a big hit is obtained. It is desirable to be done. In this case, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance allowable sound) should also output a different sound according to the degree of expectation suggested by the precursor effect display of the specific mode (the mode as the precursor effect display of the specific mode). Is desirable.

However, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, during the reception period in which the first precursor effect display is executed, the first precursor effect display can be executed only in one mode, and the ratio (expected) that a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as an effect display suggesting (degree).

In the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which a plurality of reception allowable sounds (long-time allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) are output at the same time, the reception allowable sound is output and after reception. The output sounds do not overlap, but in the reception period when only one reception permissible sound is output, when the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception production sound overlap (first reception period), the reception permissible sound is output. There are cases where the output sounds do not overlap after reception (third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.).

The long-time allowable sound is, for example, a sound output as a sound effect, and the short-time allowable sound is, for example, a sound output as a message sound. The case where only one reception allowable sound is output is, for example, the case where the message sound is not output and only the sound effect is output. The short-time permissible sound may be referred to as a "sound output as a sound effect", and the long-term permissible sound may be referred to as a "sound output as a message sound".

When one of the two acceptable reception sounds is output as a "message sound", the message image ("press") corresponding to the message sound while the message sound (for example, "press" sound) is audibly output. It is desirable to display the reception-related effect display) such as. In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period during which the post-reception effect (post-reception output sound, etc.) is executed, but the message image corresponding to the message sound (reception-related effect display) is displayed. The period will overlap with the period when the production is executed after reception.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the image display is displayed as an integrated image display including a gauge image in the peripheral decoration image. The integrated image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 144 and the like, and an alternative configuration thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in the past, since the image display was displayed separately from the gauge image, it was difficult to make both of them difficult to see by the precursor effect display or the disappearance-related display. The gauge image may change depending on the mode of the image display that suggests the degree of expectation, and if it can be visually recognized, the meaning of making the image display difficult to see is lost. In this respect, since it is displayed as an integrated image display, it becomes easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the image display and the gauge image.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is assumed to appear so as to make the post-reception effect display difficult to see. It may appear so as not to make the display difficult to see (for example, the effect display is prioritized after reception). In addition, among the above-mentioned multiple reception periods, the reception period in which the post-reception staging display is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "image display becomes difficult to see". A mode (disappearance-related display) ”may include a reception period in which the effect display is not difficult to see after reception.

Further, it is not always necessary to prepare all of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, and only a part of the reception period may be prepared in an appropriate combination.

Even in the first reception period, when the reception allowable sound is audibly output and it is received, it may be terminated halfway.

The "1st precursor effect display" and "7th precursor effect display" do not necessarily have to be "a type that is not displayed at the time when the reception period occurs and is hidden before this". For example, it may be displayed as "a type displayed across the timing when the reception period occurs". That is, in this case, the "first precursor effect display" and the "seventh precursor effect display" are the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display ZEH2" and the effect content (display image) displayed corresponding to the second reception period. Although it is different, see FIGS. 168, 176 and 177 for "the start and end times of the display and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden". The display will be performed by the method described for the "second precursor staging display ZEH2". The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

It goes without saying that when "at least a part" is described in the above-mentioned or later description, it is intended to include "all".

Next, a modified example of each of the above-mentioned production examples will be described. That is, FIG. 180 is a modification of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 176, and FIG. 181 shows “when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 177. This is a modified example of "the production of". In this modified example, the configuration not particularly mentioned is as described above in "Example of effect relating to the second reception period (FIG. 168, FIG. 176, FIG. 177)", and the "second reception period". The same applies to another example that can be applied to the "directing example".

As shown in FIG. 180, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) as a fourth staging device. For convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) has been omitted in each of the above-mentioned production examples, but in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the pachinko machine 1 also has the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). It is equipped with a thing). That is, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not operate in connection with the occurrence of the reception period.

Assuming that the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, even in the modified example for the second reception period, first, the staging determination (notice determination) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. And so on). Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 180 (a)). ").

From this point onward, the same applies to the cases of FIGS. 176 (b) to 176 (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), the “integrated image display IG” is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" and the "integrated image display IG" are displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), a second reception period occurs. (Timing tG3).

Although the illustration of the second staging device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted here for convenience of explanation, also in this modification, the “second reception” using the second staging device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The "post-specific effect" and the "precursor effect" are executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177). Further, the staging using the third staging device (speaker) (acceptable sound for reception, output sound after the second reception, etc.) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177). ing.

Further, in this modification, even when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second reception period, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177), the first is based on the acceptance. When the reception period of 2 is terminated, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 180 (d) to "D1 (FIGS. 181 (e1) to (i1))" is relative as the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period related to the modified example. The example in which the production progresses from FIG. 180 (d) to "D2 (FIGS. 181 (e2) to (i2))" corresponds to the case where the first aspect with a low expectation is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

Then, also in the example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177), when the movement by the player is accepted (the second post-acceptance effect starts according to the acceptance). At the timing tG3a (at the time when the image is formed), not only the "integrated image display IG" is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Not only the integrated image display IG, but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG3a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the effect is started after the second reception). It is the same as the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177) in that it does not make it difficult to see.

Further, when the first aspect having a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modified example (FIGS. 181 (e1) to (i1)), after that. Is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIG. 176 and 177). That is, first, at the timing tG3b, the display related to the "second extinction-related display SK2-1" is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". Next, when the timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-reception effect display" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the second reception period. UG2-1 "is started to be executed.

After that, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177), as shown in FIG. 181 (h1), the “second reception post-reception display UG2-1” is displayed in the display. First, of the "integrated image display IG", "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction-related display SK2-1", "integrated image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2". "Is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is not displayed as shown in FIG. 181 (i1). The display will be displayed, and the display related to the "second reception post-reception display UG2-1" will be performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

However, when the second aspect having a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIGS. 181 (e2) to (i2)), the timing tG3b In the above, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is started to operate instead of displaying the disappearance-related display in the first staging device (staging display device 1600). Let me. That is, as shown in FIG. 181 (f2), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is positioned (operated) so as to overlap with at least a part of the integrated image display IG in a front view. The integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, and this functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see".

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the situation shown in FIG. 181 (f2) has a higher degree of expectation than the case shown in FIG. 181 (f1). , It will be possible to improve the game entertainment. In addition, since the operation itself by the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) itself suggests the degree of expectation, it can also be used as a post-reception effect, and the post-reception effect itself can be integrated. It becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display IG. In this sense, the fourth staging device (specific decorative member SDY) is used as a staging element that suggests the degree of expectation even in a staging different from the post-receipt staging (such as a preview staging that suggests the degree of expectation). It is desirable to have.

Next, as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", "the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is performed with at least a part of the integrated image display IG in front view. When the timing tG3c arrives while being executed in an overlapping manner, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the fact that the action by the player is accepted within the second reception period. "2nd reception after production display UG2-2" is started to be executed.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is the "integrated image". While the image display IG is being executed at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the image display IG in the front view, the execution of the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2" is started. According to such a configuration, it is difficult to visually recognize the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 by the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)". Since the post-reception staging display UG2-2 is started, the player's gaze destination is "Integrated image display IG" or "Second precursor" while suggesting that the second reception period has already ended. It is expected that the effect display ZEH2 will be automatically changed to the effect display UG2-2) after the second reception (timing tG3c or later).

Then, even when the second aspect having a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIGS. 181 (e2) to (i2)), " When the display related to the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2" is started, as shown in FIG. 181 (h2), the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" is displayed in the display. First, the "integrated image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the "integrated image display IG" are difficult to see (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)). Of the "effects used)", the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden and terminated. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden in this way, the "integrated image display IG is visually recognized" as shown in FIG. 181 (i2). The "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" as the "difficult mode" is terminated. That is, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to the original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap with the integrated image display IG in front view. As a result, the display related to the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2)" is performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

In addition, in the case of performing "the staging using the fourth staging device (specific decorative member SDY)" as "the mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see" (a mode with relatively high expectations (FIG. 181 (FIG. 181)). In e2) to (i2)), when "the staging using the first staging device (disappearance-related display)" is performed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" (relatively expected degree). It is desirable to lengthen the time from the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" to the end of the mode, rather than the lower mode (FIGS. 181 (e1) to (i1)). In this case, when the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the "fourth effect device (specification)" is executed. Production using decorative member SDY)) ”It became possible to improve the entertainment of the game by its own directing property, and then“ Production using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY) ” Even after the end, it is expected that the "second reception post-production display UG2-2", which has been difficult to see until then, will be revealed to further improve the game entertainment. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, there are cases where a mode with a low degree of expectation is executed as a post-reception effect and a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation is executed as a post-reception effect. The "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see (first extinction-related display SK-1 or the like)" is executed only for the same time.

On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 180 (d) to "D3 (FIGS. 181 (e3) to (h3))", the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period related to the modified example. It is assumed that there was no such thing.

As shown in FIGS. 181 (e3) to 181 (h3), in this modified example, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, the case of the above-mentioned example (FIG. 177 (FIG. 177). It is the same as e3)-(h3)). For example, when the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 181 (f3), the player is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" within the second reception period. If the operation by is accepted, the mode that has appeared will appear.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 181 (e3) to 181 (h3), the "second extinction-related display SK2-1" is displayed when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period. In the case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, the production is progressing from FIG. 180 (d) to "D1 (FIGS. 181 (e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to the case (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, the "fourth staging device (specification)" is defined as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". When "the effect using the decorative member SDY)" is executed, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, "D2 (FIG. 181 (e2)" is shown in FIGS. 180 (d). This corresponds to the case where the production has progressed to (i2)) ”(the case where the post-reception production with relatively high expectations has been executed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (g3), the "integrated image display IG" and the "integrated image display IG" are difficult to see (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or fourth). Of the effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY), the "integrated image display IG" is first hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 181 (h3), the "integrated image display IG" becomes difficult to see (second extinction-related display SK2). -1 or the fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY) ”will be terminated.

As described above, in the staging example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see" is performed as "display in the first staging device (staging display device 1600)". There are cases (FIGS. 181 (e1) to (i1)) and cases (FIGS. 181 (e2) to (i2)) in which the staging is performed as "the staging using the fourth staging device (specific decorative member SDY)". In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, the timing at which the "display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is started and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" are executed. It was decided that the timing to be started is the same (timing tG3b), but for "the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)", the "first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is used. The execution may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before the timing tG3b at which the “display in” is started.

According to such a configuration, after being accepted, it is "integrated" depending on the type of "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see" and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) suggested as a post-reception effect. Since the time until the appearance of "a mode in which the image display IG is difficult to see" appears, the fun is added and the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" functions as a post-reception effect as well as the "post-reception specific effect using the second effect device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

However, even in the case where "the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as "the mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", FIG. 181. As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display) is visible.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, when the production progresses from FIG. 180 (d) to "D2 (FIGS. 181 (e2) to (i2))" (relatively expected degree). In the case where a high post-reception effect is executed), the "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is not performed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". It was decided to perform "a production using a fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)". However, in this case, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specification)". It is also possible to perform both the effect using the decorative member SDY).

According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" are displayed. Both of the "effects used" and the integrated image display IG become difficult to see, and it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the image is in the accepted state.

In this way, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decoration)". When both the effect using the member SDY) and the effect are executed, the disappearance-related display is displayed (priority display, etc.) so as to make it difficult to see at least a part of the integrated image display IG, and the "fourth display" is performed. The "effect using the effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the integrated image display IG and at least a part of the disappearance-related display.

Also in this case, the "production using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" that functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" is started to be executed at the timing tG3a. The "display (disappearance-related display) in the first staging device (staging display device 1600)" that functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started at the timing tG3b. ..

Further, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decorative member)". When both the effect using SDY) and the effect are executed, the extinction-related display progresses from FIG. 180 (d) to “D1 (FIGS. 181 (e1) to (i1))” (relative). It is displayed as an image display different from the "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears when the post-reception production with low expectations is executed. It is desirable to do.

Further, the fourth staging device does not necessarily have to be provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY), and in short, at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display). A flying object capable of performing a predetermined effect at a position overlapping with the front view (for example, a flying object capable of performing a flight effect on the front side of the effect display device 1600, or a front side of the effect display device 1600. It may be a light guide plate provided in the above. In addition, the effect using the fourth effect device is executed based on the acceptance during the reception period, or when different effect conditions are satisfied (such as when a predetermined timing arrives in a specific symbol change). It is desirable to be executed as well.

The production example relating to the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the staging progress as shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 will be made.

Further, the production example relating to the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 is applied to any one of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception production) that is different from any of the reception periods.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period) is displayed, and the post-reception effect display is displayed. However, the post-reception effect display is displayed in a form that is difficult to see by the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period). It was made to start (FIG. 175, 177, 179).

However, instead of this, while the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) is displayed, the post-acceptance effect display is started to be executed. However, the post-reception effect display is not obscured by the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) (priority display, etc.). ) May start the display.

Hereinafter, a case where such a configuration is applied to the production example relating to the second reception period will be described. The configuration not specifically mentioned is the same as that of the above-mentioned example (FIG. 168, 176, 177), and another example can be appropriately applied.

Regarding the effect contents until the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the second reception period according to this modification, the above-mentioned effect contents (FIGS. 176 (a) to (d), FIGS. 177 (e)). ) Is the same. For example, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 182 (e2), at the timing tG3a at the time when the movement by the player is accepted, the “integrated image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2”. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are not difficult to see.

Further, also in this modification, there are cases where the post-reception effect with a relatively low expectation is executed and the case where the post-acceptance effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. The case where the low-level post-reception effect is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect content (FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1)), and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "post-reception effect with relatively high expectations" is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned effect content (FIG. 177 (FIG. 177). Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effect content shown in FIGS. 182 (f2) to (i2) appears.

First, in the timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 182 (f2), the “second reception post-production display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. In addition, the second extinction-related display SK2 appearing in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second aspect (second extinction-related display SK2-2). Next, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second extinction-related display SK2 (the mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the player operates within the second reception period. "Second post-reception effect display UG2" as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance is started in the second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2). Will be done. Needless to say, the post-reception staging display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the privilege is given to the player). The ratio may be 100%.

However, as shown in FIG. 182 (g2), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example includes an integrated image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, a second extinction-related display SK2, and the like. It will not be difficult to see. More specifically, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modification overlaps with the area where the integrated image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed, respectively. It is displayed in a form, and the integrated image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed (priority display) in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize them.

With such a configuration, the second post-reception staging display UG2-2 itself can be made to function as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", and the hobby of the game is improved. You will be able to plan. Even in the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this example, the first effect display TE (here, corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") is not preferentially displayed, and the first effect is not displayed. The part that overlaps with the display TE is made difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (h2), first, the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are hidden. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (i2), the second extinction-related display SK2 is hidden.

Even in the modified example shown in FIG. 182, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, it is the same as the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 177 (e3) to (h3)). .. That is, if the movement by the player is not accepted, the movement by the player appears if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". Will appear.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 and the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 are displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". However, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 may not be displayed, and only the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 may be displayed.

The effect example related to the “post-reception effect display” described with reference to FIG. 182 can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the staging progress as shown in FIG. 182 will be made.

Further, the production example related to the “post-reception effect display” explained with reference to FIG. 182 is not applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is different from any of those reception periods. It may be prepared as the eighth reception period (eighth fluctuation pattern, eighth post-reception production).

Even in the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, if the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period (specific reception period), the image display (here, the integrated image display). While the IG) is displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the image display is used to make the image display difficult to see, and the "specific disappearance effect display (for example, for example)" is displayed. The second extinction-related display SK2-2) ”can be displayed, and the image display is the specific extinction effect display after the display of the specific extinction effect display (second extinction-related display SK2-2) is started. (For example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is hidden while being displayed.

That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance has been made. In addition, the visibility of the image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the image display is hidden, and the image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. Therefore, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the image display is hidden is short, and the deterioration of the game entertainment when the image display is hidden is suppressed. You will be able to get it.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the above-mentioned "specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2)" is an image display (here, integrated). It can be displayed even during the period after the image display IG) is hidden, and at least while the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is displayed, The post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Then, is the post-acceptance effect displayed using at least a part of the specific area which is the display target area of the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2)? It is executed using the staging body (example shown in FIG. 181 or another example thereof) located at a position overlapping with (at least a part of) the specific extinction staging display (example shown in FIG. 182). I am trying to realize it as a thing.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps with the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) in front view is specified. It will be possible to recognize without shifting the gaze destination from the position where the disappearance effect display of is displayed. That is, in this case, when the specific extinction effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

When a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) related to the above modification appears, the percentage of the player being given a privilege is It may be 100%.

The specific post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) related to the above modification is executed before the image display is hidden. Since it is started and makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the image display is in the accepted state even when the image display is displayed. .. However, for the specific post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) related to the above modification, after the image display is hidden. It may be the one that is started to be executed.

Apart from the reception period during which a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) can be generated according to the above modification, the specific post-reception effect. A specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is a case where the different post-reception effect is executed after preparing a reception period in which a different post-reception effect can be generated. May also be displayed. The reception period in which different post-reception effects can be generated may be any one of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it is desirable that the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is not displayed during the reception period (first reception period) in which the reception permissible sound is not terminated in the middle. The disappearance effect display of

In addition, also in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, when the acceptance period occurs, the acceptance of the post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period is permitted, or A process of making the reception allowable sound audible, which suggests that the reception will be in an acceptable state (soon), is executed, so that the player forgets to perform the operation for acceptance. I try to suppress.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of types of precursor effect displays, but in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, a specific precursor effect display (second). When the movement by the player is accepted while the precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed, a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance is made, but the specific precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed. While the precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to visually recognize. Then, after the embodiment appears, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden while the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the precursor effect display, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the acceptance has already been made.

In the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the mode in which the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to see is the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display). The image display is different from ZEH2) (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 or the post-reception staging display UG2-2), or the front side of the specific precursor staging display (second precursor staging display ZEH2). It is designed to be a production in the production body performed in.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display). Not only the precursor effect display ZEH2), but also the specific precursor effect display and the image display are executed so as to straddle both of them in a front view, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. The aspect may be performed in a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire effect display device 1600, but in that case, a specific precursor effect display or a model image display can be visually recognized through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is realized by a change (such as a change in transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the specific precursor effect display itself. May be

Also in the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden within the reception period. Then, even when the reception is made in the hidden state, "a mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display (second extinction-related display SK2-2, post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc." (Director, etc.) ”is to be executed.

Further, in the first reception period described above, when the movement by the player is accepted, a plurality of effects (the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (e1) to (i1), FIG. 175) are obtained based on the acceptance. Any of the effects (the effects shown in (e2) to (i2)) appears, but even if any of those effects appears, the specific mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1 (first reception period)) The first aspect)) of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to the above can be made to appear. That is, in this case, regardless of which of the plurality of effects appears, a specific mode will also appear, which is due to the fact that the action by the player was accepted within the specific reception period. It will be possible to suggest that it is a common production.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned second reception period and the second reception period according to the modified example (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, if the movement by the player is accepted, the special condition (big hit winning). A special mode (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 or specific) in which the appearance rate (which may be 0% or 100%) differs depending on whether or not the conditions and the probability variation inrush condition are satisfied. It is possible to appear in any of a plurality of modes including the effect using the decorative member SDY, the effect display after reception UG2-2, etc., and when the special aspect appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display. .. According to such a configuration, a special mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears until the image display is hidden, and the special mode makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display. , The player will be able to enjoy the staging that progresses from the image display to the post-reception staging (special mode) without changing the gaze destination.

In this regard, even when the above-mentioned specific mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1 (first mode of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, the image display is the "specific". It is made difficult to see by "aspect". According to such a configuration, when the image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special aspect in which the expectation degree for the privilege grant is suggested (special reception period), the above-mentioned specific embodiment in which the expectation degree for the privilege grant is not suggested. Since there are cases where the image display is difficult to see (specific reception period), the "mode that makes the image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has an effect. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, when the reception period exemplified in each of the above-mentioned production examples and each modification occurs, an image display suggesting an object (type of operation means, etc.) to be accepted within the reception period is displayed. It may be displayed both within the period in which the precursory effect display is executed before the reception period occurs and within the reception period. However, in this case, the image display displayed during the period when the precursor effect display is executed shall be different from the image display displayed during the reception period, and may be displayed before the reception period occurs. It is desirable to hide it.

Hereinafter, a modified example of the case where the method of displaying the image in such an embodiment is applied to the second reception period will be described. That is, FIGS. 183 (a) to 183 (f) and FIGS. 184 (g) and 184 (h) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 176. (I) to (l) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 177. In this modified example, the configuration not particularly mentioned is as described above in "Example of effect relating to the second reception period (FIG. 168, FIG. 176, FIG. 177)", and the "second reception period". The same applies to another example that can be applied to the "directing example".

Assuming that the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, even in the modification for the second reception period, first, the staging determination (notice) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. Judgment etc.). Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 183 (a)). ").

However, in this modification, when the timing tG0 before the timing tG1 described above arrives, as shown in FIG. 183 (b), the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE" is executed. There is. In the example shown in FIG. 183 (b), as the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE", another effect example (the image display is executed within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed, and then this is temporarily hidden. The image display that is also used in the normal effect example that does not do such a thing is executed, but for the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE", another effect example (precursor effect display is executed) is executed. It is desirable to execute the image display as an image display that cannot appear in a normal staging example) in which the image display is executed within the period and then the image display is not temporarily hidden.

Then, in this modification, the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) appears while the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE" is displayed in this way. That is, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), at least a part of the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) according to this example is made difficult to see by the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE". The display is started in the middle of the process. Further, although the image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated image display, the gauge image GG and the section image KG which is the display target area of the gauge image GG are not displayed ( It is displayed as an image display in a mode that cannot be displayed within the reception period).

After a lapse of a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) is displayed in a manner that is not difficult to see by the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display related to the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" has been terminated, and is displayed in a form decorated by another effect display (flame effect in the figure).

However, as shown in FIGS. 183 (c) and 183 (d), the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) that appears while the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is displayed. Is displayed in a mode different from any of the modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) as an image display that can be displayed within the reception period. This makes it possible to indicate that the reception period has not yet occurred while displaying the image display TMH for a relatively long time.

Further, as will be described later, when the image display TMH (here, integrated image display) appears, the above-mentioned plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) are used within the corresponding reception period. Of these, the image display is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 144 (d)). As a result, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment when the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE" is displayed. It should be noted that the mode that can be displayed as the image display does not necessarily have to be the above four modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)), and may be, for example, only two modes.

Then, in this modification, when the timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 183 (e), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is started to be executed, and the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" displays an image. Part of the TMH becomes difficult to see (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (f), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire image display TMH, and thus the "normal type precursor effect display". While "TZE" is displayed, the image display TMH is hidden.

After that, when the timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 184 (g), the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is performed in the above-mentioned plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)). ), Which has a high degree of expectation, is displayed. In this way, at the time when the display of the image that can be displayed within the reception period (here, the integrated image display IG) is started, a part of it becomes difficult to see by the "normal type precursor effect display TZE". ing.

Then, while the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" and the "image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" are displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 184 (h), the second The reception period will occur (timing tG3).

Although the illustration of the second staging device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted here for convenience of explanation, also in this modification, the “second reception” using the second staging device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The "post-specific effect" and the "precursor effect" are executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177). Further, the staging using the third staging device (speaker) (acceptable sound for reception, output sound after the second reception, etc.) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177). ing.

Further, in this modification, even when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second reception period, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177), the first is based on the acceptance. When the reception period of 2 is terminated, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

Further, also in this modification, there are cases where the post-reception effect with a relatively low expectation is executed and the case where the post-acceptance effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. The case where the low-level post-reception effect is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect content (FIGS. 177 (e1) to (i1)), and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "post-reception effect with relatively high expectations" is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned effect content (FIG. 177 (FIG. 177). Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 184 (i) to (l) appear.

First, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 184 (i), at the timing tG3a at the time when the movement by the player is accepted, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" and the "image display (here, here). , Integrated image display IG) ”is not hidden, and the“ normal type precursor effect display TZE ”and“ integrated image display (here, integrated image display IG) ”are difficult to see. Nor.

However, in this example, dynamic display as an image display is performed at the time of acceptance in this way and while the "image display (here, integrated image display IG)" is displayed even after that. Is to be continued. Further, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced with the passage of time.

At the timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 184 (j), the “second reception post-effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. The second extinction-related display SK2 that appears in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much the gauge image GG has a display area at the time of acceptance (FIG. 184 (i)), the display area becomes "0" when the timing tG3b arrives. I am trying to be done. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG that has reduced the display area under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of the display area that decreases with the passage of time is proportional). However, ignoring the previous rules, the display area was suddenly greatly reduced, which "suddenly reduced the remaining time to" 0 ", but I was lucky enough to make it in time for acceptance." It will be possible to make people think that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Then, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second extinction-related display SK2-2 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see) appears, the player is in the second reception period. The second aspect (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is the "second post-reception effect display UG2" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance of the operation by. It will start running at. Needless to say, the post-reception staging display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the privilege is given to the player). The ratio may be 100%.

As shown in FIG. 184 (k), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example includes an integrated image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, and a second extinction-related display SK2-. Although it is difficult to see due to 2 or the like, it may be displayed in the above-described manner with reference to FIG. 182.

After that, first, the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are hidden (FIG. 184 (l)). Next, although the illustration is omitted, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 is hidden, so that the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is displayed under good visibility. It will be like.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as precursor effect displays suggesting that a reception period will occur. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 183 and 184), when a specific precursor effect display (FIGS. 183 (b) to (f) and FIG. 184 (g)) is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays. The image display related to the reception target is displayed both within the precursory period (image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and within the reception period (image display IG).

In particular, in this modification, after the image display (image display TMH) is displayed in the precursor period, it is hidden within the precursor period. The image display TMH that is displayed (hidden) only within the precursory period is different from the image display IG that can be displayed during the reception period. Therefore, the reception period It is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the time before the occurrence of.

Further, also in this modification, if the image is accepted within the acceptance period, the image display IG is hidden based on the acceptance (FIG. 184 (l)). Before the image display IG is hidden, "a specific mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (second extinction-related display SK2-2)" can appear (Fig. 184 (j), (Fig. 184 (j),). k)). However, for the "specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2)" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, the image display TMH displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is not displayed. It is prevented from appearing until it is hidden when it is turned on.

According to such a configuration, in the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (second extinction-related display SK2-2)" that appears corresponding to the reception period. ] Will not appear and the image display TMH will be hidden. Therefore, even if the image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player's knowledge It will be possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has expired before it happens.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" that can appear depending on the acceptance is changed to the above-mentioned "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (second disappearance)". Multiple items including "Related Display SK2-2)" will be prepared. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 183 and 184), none of these embodiments appears when the image display TMH displayed within the precursory period is hidden. It has become. In the above modification, a mode (normal type precursor effect display TZE) different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" according to the acceptance is displayed in the image display TMH within the precursor period. It is supposed to function as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" until it is hidden. That is, in this case, since it is recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" dedicated to the precursory period, even if a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" appears within the precursory period. , It becomes possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has ended without the player's knowledge.

Further, in the above modification, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed as "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see" until the image display TMH is hidden within the precursor period. When the image is accepted within the reception period, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed as "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see" until the image display IG is hidden. I decided. In this regard, regarding the period from the display of the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" to the non-display, the period from the display of the "second extinction-related display SK2-2" to the non-display. It is desirable to make it longer than that in order to improve the game entertainment.

If the image display TMH is displayed within the precursory period, the type of reception target suggested by the image display TMH is received during the reception period corresponding to the hidden image display TMH. Acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for (operation means), and the acceptance object (operation means) is different from the type of acceptance object (operation means) suggested by the image display TMH. It is desirable that acceptance (acceptance regarding post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is not allowed. That is, in the case of the above modification (FIGS. 183 and 184), the image display TMH displayed within the precursory period suggests the operation button 410 as a reception target, and thus corresponds to this. During the reception period, acceptance (acceptance regarding post-reception production corresponding to the reception period) is not allowed for a reception target (sword decoration body 5001) different from the operation button 410.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an "operation button 410" and a "sword decoration body 5001" as reception targets for post-reception production. In this regard, when the effect is executed in the mode of "displaying the image display and then hiding the image display within the precursory period", the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration body 5001" are selected. , It is desirable that the side with a high rate of appearance of big hit symbols when it is targeted for reception is targeted for reception. That is, in this case, among the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration body 5001", the reception target on the side where the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when it is the reception target is low, but the reception period corresponding to this occurs. Prior to this, the effect is not executed in the manner of "displaying the image display and then hiding the image display within the precursory period".

Among the above-mentioned modified examples with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, regarding such a “directing mode related to precursory effect”, the reception period different from the second reception period among the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods and their different types. It is also applicable to the example. Further, the "effect mode relating to the precursory effect" is not applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but the eighth reception period (eighth) which is different from any of the reception periods. It may be prepared as a variation pattern, an eighth post-acceptance production).

Further, among the above-mentioned modified examples with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, such “directing mode related to precursory effect” is illustrated by referring to FIGS. 180 to 182, and other examples thereof. It is also applicable to.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggestion display (display including the section image KG) that reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) with the passage of time during the reception period. be. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 183 and 184), the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the effect is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. Since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced while the production is in progress, it is recognized whether the specific image (gauge image GG) has been accepted even after it has been accepted. It is expected that it will be difficult to maintain the tension.

Further, in the modification described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600) as the remaining time suggestion display, and the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed. The display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced in the section area (section image KG). Then, after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player, the display is continued not only for the specific image (gauge image GG) but also for the specific section area (section image KG). I have to. According to such a configuration, since the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed even after the effect is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player, the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed. ) Can be easily determined whether or not the display area has decreased.

In addition, "the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the production is advanced based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted" means that, for example, the movement by the player is accepted. Meaning including the case where a predetermined display area is left as a gauge image GG at the time when the effect is advanced based on the above, but the display area is set to 0 (non-display) at a later time point. (Fig. 184 (j)). However, in this case, when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, it is required that the specific section area (section image KG) is still displayed, and the specific section area (section image KG) is still displayed. , The display area of the gauge image GG will be hidden after the timing when it is set to 0.

Further, in the above-described modification with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, when the movement by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (gauge image GG, section image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. Hide, but prior to hiding the remaining time suggestion display, regardless of how much display area of the gauge image GG was left at the time of acceptance, a specific section area (section image KG) ) Displays a specific image whose display area is a specific value (predetermined value), or a specific section area (section image) of the specific section area (section image KG) and the gauge image GG. It was decided to realize it so that only KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). That is, in this case, the gauge image GG that has reduced the display area under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of the display area that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship) is up to that point. Ignoring the law of, suddenly the display area was greatly reduced, which made me think that "I was surprised to make the remaining time" 0 ", but I was lucky enough to make it in time for acceptance." It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the modification described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, at the time when the movement by the player is accepted (when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started), the operation is executed before the acceptance. The "depiction in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" is not terminated and is continued. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) having a display area as a specific value is displayed in a specific section area (section image KG), or a specific section area (section) is displayed. Of the image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG), only the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started (for example, timing tG3a), the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize "whether it is in the accepted state" even after the acceptance is made, and the tension will be maintained favorably. In addition, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG, etc.) is significantly reduced at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing (for example, timing tG3a) when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started. It is possible to make it appear as if the reception was just in time within the valid period (reception period), and it is expected that the game will be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184, the image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after the reception. .. In this regard, when the timing tG3b, which has passed a predetermined time after acceptance, arrives, regardless of the dynamic position of the image display at the time of acceptance, after acceptance, at a specific dynamic position. The image display is displayed in a stationary manner (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (j), when the timing tG3b arrives, the button position is the highest position regardless of the button position up to that point. Depicted as in). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (j), the image display is not dynamically displayed after the timing tG3b, and is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. As a result, the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained more preferably.

Among the above-mentioned modification examples with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, such "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance is made (FIGS. 184 (i) to (k))" and ". The "dynamic display and static display related to image display" can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period among the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. In addition, "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 184 (i) to (k))" is applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception production) that is different from any of the reception periods.

In addition, the first reception is "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 184 (i)-(k))" and "dynamic display and still display related to image display". When it is applied to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any reception period may be used), it is desirable not to apply it to a reception period different from the application reception period. According to such a configuration, after the acceptance is made, there are cases where the depiction in which the gauge image GG is greatly reduced appears (FIG. 184 (j)) and cases where the depiction does not appear. You will be able to improve.

Even during the reception period when "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 184 (i)-(k))" and "dynamic display and still display related to image display" are not applied. After acceptance, it is desirable to perform depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image GG and dynamic display itself. That is, in this case, the display area of the gauge image GG is different only in that the depiction that greatly reduces the display area by ignoring the previous law is not performed and the still display is not performed.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, different examples, and variations thereof, a plurality of reception periods (for example, a first reception period to a seventh reception period) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. There is. In this regard, with respect to a predetermined reception period (for example, a first reception period, a third reception period, a fifth reception period, etc.) among a plurality of reception periods, the symbol change in which the predetermined reception period occurs ends. And make it possible to continue even after the next symbol change is started (thing that can occur across multiple changes), and a specific reception period (for example, a second reception) among multiple reception periods. The period, the 4th reception period, the 7th reception period, etc.) will not be continued until after the symbol change in which the specific reception period has occurred is completed, and rather than the symbol change being terminated. It may be terminated before. That is, in this case, the image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period, and the case where the movement by the player is accepted within the predetermined reception period is specified. In either case where the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period of, the image display is not hidden at the time of the acceptance, and the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). Etc.) will appear. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has expired while making it possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as an image display even after the acceptance has been made. It will be possible to obtain a suitable image regardless of whether it is a predetermined reception period or a specific reception period.

Further, the "predetermined reception period" is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" is, for example, the second reception period and the fourth reception period. When the reception period is set to the 7th reception period, the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display) is when the reception is made in the "predetermined reception period" that can be maintained across multiple fluctuations. It will be executed as a different mode from when acceptance is made in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period ends within the pattern change during execution, based on the type of "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)". As a result, it will be possible to improve the interest in playing games.

In addition, in both the "predetermined reception period" that can occur across multiple fluctuations and the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, the image display that imitates the reception target is displayed. The image display may be displayed in different modes (size, position, etc. for display) between the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period". For example, in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, when the image display is displayed (displayed only at a predetermined position) in the manner described above, it occurs in the form of straddling multiple fluctuations. In the possible "predetermined reception period", it is desirable to display (move display) so that the display position of the image display itself changes. According to such a configuration, even when a "predetermined reception period" occurs in the form of straddling a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to encourage the player to be accepted as soon as possible.

Further, in the "reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, the operation button 410 may be used as the reception target or the sword decoration 5001 may be used as the reception target, whereas it occurs in the form of straddling multiple fluctuations. In the possible "reception period", the operation button 410 may be used as the reception target, but it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 is not used as the reception target.

Even in the "reception period" that may occur over a plurality of fluctuations, it is desirable that the precursory effect display can be executed prior to the occurrence of the "reception period". That is, in this case, the symbol change may be terminated while the "precursor effect display" is being executed, and a reception period corresponding to the "precursor effect display" may occur after the symbol variation is completed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment after the symbol change is completed.

Even in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, as described above, after the acceptance is made, the "image" A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (such as an extinction-related display) ”appears. This "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is executed after a predetermined time, but it is a case where the symbol change is stopped while this is being executed. However, it is desirable that the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is continued without being terminated halfway.

The "precursor effect display" and "precursor effect display" executed in response to the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations. As for the mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (such as the disappearance-related display), the time from when the symbol change in the execution state is stopped until the next symbol change is started (the symbol in the execution state). The execution period (the time from when the precursor effect display is displayed until it is hidden) is shorter than the time required from when the fluctuation stops until the hold is exhausted, making it difficult to visually recognize the image display. It is desirable that the time from the appearance of the embodiment to the end) is completed.

As described above, in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of straddling multiple fluctuations, the corresponding "precursor staging display" And "disappearance related display" can be displayed respectively. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the symbol change in which the "precursor effect display" is displayed ends, the same area as the area in which the "precursor effect display" is displayed (overlapping area). ) Is displayed by using at least a part of the "disappearance-related display", and after the symbol change in which the "precursor effect display" is displayed is completed (the hold is exhausted and the next symbol change is started to be executed). When the "disappearance-related display" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display" can be displayed by using only the area different from the area where the "precursor staging display" is displayed. desirable. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that this is executed across a plurality of fluctuations while paying close attention to the post-reception production.

Further, as described above, a plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) having different expectations are prepared as the image display, and the "reception period (for example, the second reception period, etc.) that does not straddle a plurality of fluctuations is prepared. In "4th reception period, 7th reception period)", the image display is displayed as one of those modes. However, in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur over a plurality of fluctuations, a specific mode (for example, FIG. 144) among the plurality of modes is used. It is desirable that only the model image display of (a)) is displayed. However, a "reception period (for example, a second reception period, a fourth reception period, a seventh reception period)" that does not span multiple fluctuations and a "reception period (for example, a reception period) that may occur across multiple fluctuations". In any of the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) ”, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the image display is continued after the reception.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of gaming states (first gaming state and second gaming state) having different gaming conditions (ease of obtaining a prize ball when the gaming ball is launched with respect to the gaming area, etc.) are used. (Game state) can be generated. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "reception period" in which the post-reception effect can be executed when the movement by the player is received is the first game state and the second game state. It can occur in any of the gaming states. Furthermore, when the movement by the player is accepted within such a "reception period", it is assumed that the "reception period" occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. However, after being accepted, "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears while the image display is displayed, and then the "image display becomes difficult to see". The image display is hidden while the mode (disappearance-related display, etc.) appears.

That is, in this case, there is an action effect such as "it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as an image display even after the acceptance has been made, and it can be suggested that the acceptance period has expired." , Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

The "first gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a normal gaming state (low probability / non-time saving), and the "second gaming state" occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination ( It corresponds to a "game state different from the normal game state" that can be changed to a state). Any gaming state may be used as long as it is in a gaming state different from the normal gaming state.

In this regard, further explaining using the plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) exemplified in each of the above-mentioned production examples and other examples, and their variants, for example, a plurality of receptions. Of the periods, a predetermined type of reception period (for example, a first reception period, a fourth reception period, a sixth reception period, a seventh reception period, etc., but not all of them are necessarily provided. (May be) is set so that it can occur only in the first gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third reception period out of the plurality of reception periods is set so that it can occur only in the second gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Even with such a configuration, the image display related to the reception target has a predetermined type of reception period (first game state) and a third reception period (second game state). It is displayed in both cases. However, in the first gaming state (when it is accepted in the first reception period), in the second gaming state (when it is accepted in the second reception period) as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Is capable of appearing specific modes that cannot appear (4th extinction-related display SK4, 7th extinction-related display, etc., but not necessarily all of them).

According to such a configuration, the first gaming state and the first game state and the first game state can be obtained only by confirming which aspect appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" without confirming the type of the effect after reception. It becomes possible to grasp which of the two game states is controlled, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

It should be noted that the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 also appears only when the player is in the first gaming state (when the image is accepted during the first reception period). It may be set as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" which cannot be obtained. That is, in this case, it is expected that the gaming interest when the player is in the most disadvantageous state (normal gaming state) is preferably maintained.

Further, according to the above configuration, in the second gaming state (when the image is accepted in the third reception period), the first extinction-related display is executed as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". However, the first extinction-related display can also appear in the first gaming state (when it is accepted in the first reception period). That is, in this case, since the possibility of being controlled by the second gaming state is only shown, the tension can be suitably maintained. Further, even when the player is controlled to the first gaming state, when the first extinction-related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility of being controlled to the second gaming state. Since it becomes possible to make the game entertaining, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as a reception period that can occur in both the first game state and the second game state, or the first game. It may occur only in the first gaming state of the state and the second gaming state.

Further, as described above, during the reception period generated in the first gaming state, the simulated image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)). In this regard, in the reception period generated in the second gaming state, it is possible to display only the model image display of the specific aspect (for example, the aspect of FIG. 144 (a) having a low expectation degree) among the plurality of aspects. desirable. According to such a configuration, even if a mode with low expectation (FIG. 144 (a)) appears as a simulated image display, there is a possibility that the game is controlled by the second gaming state. Since it becomes possible to make people aware of it, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest.

In the first gaming state, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same aspect as the accepted case appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (for example, the first). There are two cases: the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc.) and the case where a mode different from the case of acceptance appears (for example, the first reception period). However, in the second gaming state (third reception period), as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the same mode as in the case of acceptance is always made to appear, or It is desirable to make sure that a mode different from the accepted case appears. According to such a configuration, when the movement is not accepted in the first gaming state, the same aspect as when the acceptance is made appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". It becomes possible to make people aware of the possibility that a second gaming state has occurred.

The reception period (third reception period) that occurs in the second gaming state is the same as when it is accepted as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see even if it is not accepted within the period". When it is generated as "a mode that always appears", the reception period (third reception period) is "the image display becomes difficult to see even if it is not accepted" that occurs in the first gaming state. As the "mode", it is desirable that the valid time (set time) as the reception period is longer than any of the "reception period" in which the same mode as in the case of acceptance always appears.

In both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the precursor effect display corresponding to the reception period is executed before the reception period occurs. In this regard, in the first gaming state, a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display, seventh precursor effect display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second gaming state is executed. Is desirable.

[Special reception period]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (notice effect, etc.) is selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect of the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. The transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes feasible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol staging based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a reception period in which the movement (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted, and the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the reception period. And, the display changes according to the type of the reception period in which the occurrence occurs. Further, during the reception period, it is possible to display an image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It is desirable not to do so or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is the acceptance of display changes on the staging display device 1600 as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is only executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect operation by the movable decorative body, etc. are generated, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) is this. The performance of the game itself is poor, and there is concern that the game entertainment will decline in relation to the reception period.

In addition, the "operation by the player" to be detected, including each of the above-mentioned examples and the following examples, is directly operated by the player such as "operation button 410" and "sword decoration body 5001". Not limited to those that are (pushing motion or sword pulling motion), "contact motion by the player to a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor and "player in a specific space" to be detected by the non-contact sensor. It also means "operation by". In short, it suffices to have one or a plurality of receiving means (operating means) for receiving actions by the player (pressing action, sword pulling action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effectability is provided. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have all of these configurations, and for example, even if only one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, the hobby of the game is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of water, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary for obtaining further effects, or it may be applicable to another configuration. The described configuration may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest related to the reception period.

[Structure 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in both the case where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, the character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the character information is displayed. , Although the same movement as the movement by the player is targeted for reception in the first reception period and the second reception period, it is displayed as different character information (for example, "press!", "Press", etc.). I am trying to do it. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 1-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 1-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is required to perform the same operation (operation mode), the display change (display after reception) that occurs as a result of the detection of the operation. Are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), the character information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period is displayed in the reception period. Since the characters are different from each other according to the type (type of display after reception), the operation is performed while recognizing which type of display change may occur as the display after reception (operation by the player). It will be possible to perform, and it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in pachinko.

In addition, when different actions (operation modes) are requested from the player, even if the reception period is the same type (the one that generates the same display after reception), it is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable to make the displayed character information different from each other in order to suppress an operation error by the player. In the same sense, when different actions (operation modes) are requested from the player and the reception period is of a different type (which causes different post-reception display), the reception period is It is desirable that the textual information displayed in relation to what has occurred is different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first reception period is requested, and the same character information and image display as in the case of the first reception period are displayed, but when acceptance is made, the case of the first reception period May provide additional reception periods that generate different post-reception displays. That is, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is executed as the display after reception only by looking at the character information or the image display, so that the tension at the time of operation is suitable. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-A" is adopted, the character information is not displayed until the state in which the acceptance is permitted (valid state) is terminated in the first reception period. In the second reception period, the character information may be hidden in the middle of the state in which the acceptance is permitted (valid state). It may be. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, if the operation (predetermined operation) is not performed relatively early after the period occurs, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode). Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the information is present, and eventually it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, it is difficult to accept the situation where different character information is displayed. It is expected that the tension will be avoided at all.

Although this will also be described later, when the "configuration 1-A" is adopted, there are a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is hidden in the second reception period. , The same display change may occur as the display change regardless of which of these periods the acceptance is made. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation is performed properly as long as it is confirmed what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. It is possible, and it is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest will be suppressed.

[Structure 2-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, only one aspect can be displayed as the image display, and in the second reception period, the image can be displayed by any one of a plurality of modes. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, the effect that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, so that the operation (operation) by the player is detected. It will be possible to suitably improve the hobby of the game.

Regarding the "multiple modes of image display" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible to make the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears different depending on which of the images is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the interest. Further, any one of the "plurality of image displays" may be the same as the "one aspect" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that the "lowest expected mode" of the "plurality of image displays" is the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the first reception period and the third reception period, only one mode is displayed as an image display. It may be possible. Then, in the "second reception period" in which the image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, the image display is prevented from being hidden until the valid state is terminated. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which the image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is terminated in the "first reception period". The image display will not be hidden until the image is displayed, but in the "third reception period", the valid state (the valid state is continued) until the valid state (reception period) ends. In the middle of the process, the image display that had been displayed up to that point may be hidden. That is, in this case, whether or not the image display is hidden in the middle of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which only one aspect is displayed as the image display. Since the effectability is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the game entertainment until the operation (movement) by the player is detected. The image display displayed in the first reception period and the image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but may not necessarily be the same, and may not be displayed. It may be suggested that it may be.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-A" is adopted, either the period in which the image display is displayed or the period in which the image display is hidden is displayed in the third reception period. The same display change (display after reception) may be caused even if the reception is made in. That is, in this case, even after the image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so that the effectability using the "third reception period" ( In creating (non-display of image display), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

The "third reception period (displayed after the third reception)" related to the configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" related to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the first reception period related to other configurations). 2 It may mean (reception period, etc.).

[Structure 3-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, after the image display is displayed when the first reception period occurs, the image display is not hidden until the end of the first reception period. , The movement can be accepted by the player while the image display is displayed, and the movement can be accepted by the player while the image display is not displayed during the second reception period. The above-mentioned "acceptable sound" is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second reception period occurs. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 3-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, not only the "first reception period" in which the reception permissible sound is audibly output and the image display is displayed, but also the reception permissible sound is not audibly output. Since there is a "second reception period" in which the image display is not displayed, the player is aware of the possibility that the post-reception display will occur at various timings not intended by the player. It will be possible to make it possible, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the second reception period, the image is taken from the occurrence to the end of the second reception period. It is possible for the player to accept the movement while the display is not displayed and the image display is not displayed, but in the third reception period, the image display is displayed only for a part of the third reception period. The movement may be accepted by the player during both the period in which the image is hidden and the image display is displayed and the period in which the image display is hidden. That is, in this case, the third reception period is the side as the first reception period (acceptance while the image display is displayed) and the side as the second reception period (the image display is not displayed). Since it will have both (acceptance at) and (acceptance at), it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game. In addition, even after the image display is hidden, there is a possibility that the state in which the movement (operation) by the player is accepted continues, so the movement (operation) by the player is accepted. It is expected that the deterioration of the game interest when the image display is hidden without being displayed will be suppressed.

The "third reception period (displayed after the third reception)" related to the "configuration 3-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" related to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the first reception period related to other configurations). 2 It may mean (reception period, etc.).

Further, the reception allowable sound is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second reception period occurs and when the third reception period occurs. .. That is, in the third reception period, there is a timing at which the image display is displayed. In this regard, according to the above configuration related to the third reception period, the reception permissible sound is not output at the timing (or before or after) when the image display is displayed. .. As a result, in the third reception period, even at the timing when the reception period occurs, the side as the first reception period (the image display is displayed) and the side as the second reception period (the reception allowable sound is output). Since it will have both of the above and the above, it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-A" is adopted, either the period in which the image display is displayed or the period in which the image display is hidden is displayed in the third reception period. The same display change (display after reception) may be caused even if the reception is made in. That is, in this case, even after the image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so that the effectability using the "third reception period" ( In creating (non-display of image display), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

[Structure 4-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, when the movement by the player is detected within the period, the display after the first reception is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but the movement by the player is not detected within the period. Occasionally, the display after the first reception is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output. In the second reception period, when the movement by the player is detected within the period. The display after the second reception is displayed and the second reception sound is output, and even if the movement by the player is not detected within the period, the same second as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. The display is displayed after reception, but the second reception sound is not output. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 4-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, if the movement (operation) is not accepted by the player within the reception period, a staging demerit can occur. Therefore, a feeling of tension when the reception period occurs is preferable. Will be able to maintain.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, when an operation (operation) by the player is detected within the period. The display after the third reception is displayed and the third reception sound is output, and even if the movement by the player is not detected within the period, the same third as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. The display after reception may be displayed and the third reception sound may be output. That is, in this case, when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (change after acceptance) as when the acceptance is made is generated so as to cause a staging demerit. Since there are cases (second reception period) and cases where it is generated so as not to cause a staging demerit (third reception period), the player can accept the movement (operation) in time within the reception period. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest when there is no such thing.

The "third reception period (displayed after the third reception)" related to the "configuration 4-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" related to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the first reception period related to other configurations). 2 It may mean (reception period, etc.).

[Structure 5-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, the first variation pattern is started to be executed regardless of the number of determination information stored by the hold storage means (the number of jackpot determinations in the hold state (hold number)). And, it can occur when the first timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of execution of the first fluctuation pattern arrives, and the second reception period is the number of determination information stored by the hold storage means (hold). If the second variation pattern is started when the number of jackpot determinations (held number) in the state is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern was started. It can occur when the two timings arrive, but when the second variation pattern starts to be executed when the number of determination information stored by the hold storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern Is prevented from occurring even when the second timing, which is a predetermined time after the start of execution, arrives. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 5-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 5-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be canceled and the number of holdings is decreasing, a reception period (second reception period) of a type that has not occurred until then will occur. You can expect to be encouraged not to stop the game, or even if the game is stopped, you will be able to give an interesting impression to the game at the end.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 5-A" is adopted, the second fluctuation pattern occurs when the "number of determination information stored by the hold storage means (hold number)" is less than a predetermined number. Even when the execution is started, "the number of determination information stored by the hold storage means (hold)" at the stage where the second timing has not arrived after a predetermined time has passed since the second fluctuation pattern was started to be executed. When the number) ”is increased (when the number exceeds a predetermined number), the second reception period may not occur when the second timing, in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second fluctuation pattern is started, arrives. That is, even if the symbol fluctuation (second fluctuation pattern) is started to be executed when the number of holdings is decreasing, if the number of holdings is increased within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. , It suggests that we are not trying to stop the game. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed when the number of pending numbers is decreasing, the symbol variation is within the execution period. If the number of holds is increased, the second reception period will not be generated when the second timing, which is a predetermined time after the execution of the second fluctuation pattern is started, is reached. , It will be possible to function more properly as "a type of reception period that can appear only when the game is about to be stopped".

In order to more preferably obtain such an action and effect, even when the second reception period occurs, "determination information stored by the reserved storage means" is performed while the second reception period occurs. It is more desirable to end the second reception period at that point when the number of (holding number) ”increases.

[Structure 6-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. The first reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner regardless of the situation of the production, and the second reception period is the specific BGM regardless of the situation of the production. Is generated after the suppression mode or the inaudible state is set, so that the specific BGM can be used to provide the staging property related to the type of the reception period even before the reception period occurs. It will be like. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 6-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In addition, as will be described later, when the "Structure 6-A" is adopted, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period, the second reception period, and the third reception period shall be prepared as the reception period. 3 The reception period may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is in the suppressed mode or the non-audible state, depending on the situation of the production. You may do so. According to such a configuration, the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and the reception period occurs after the specific BGM is set to the suppressed mode or the non-audible state. In any case, since the reception period may be the "third reception period", the game entertainment until the movement (operation) by the player is accepted is preferably maintained. Will be expected to do.

The "third reception period (displayed after the third reception)" related to the "configuration 6-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" related to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the first reception period related to other configurations). 2 It may mean (reception period, etc.).

[Structure 7-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, if the reception is made within the period, the first post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the first post-reception display is displayed on the staging symbol. During that time, it is displayed with priority over the display after the first reception. On the other hand, in the second reception period, if the reception is made within the period, the second post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the second post-reception display is displayed for the staging symbol. During that time, it is displayed or hidden in a manner that is difficult to see by the display after the second reception. The "mode that makes it difficult to see" according to the configuration 7-A means that "at least a part of the staging symbol corresponds to the transmittance through the second post-acceptance display set to a predetermined transmittance". A mode in which only a part of the effect design can be visually recognized, a mode in which at least a part of the effect symbol is invisible by the display after the second reception, or a mode in which at least a part of the effect symbol is hidden. Means. Further, the "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 7-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 7-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type as the reception period by confirming whether or not the visibility of the staging symbol is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the operation by the player. It will be like. The "design for staging" is, for example, a symbol that forms a reach state as a staging in the staging display device 1600. It is a design that is also used for full rotation production.

However, it has been confirmed that some of the players are disgusted by the deterioration of the visibility of the staging pattern as the display after the second reception is displayed. There is. Therefore, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 7-A", when the display after the second reception corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is displayed, the reception period different from the second reception period is displayed. (For example, it occurs according to the acceptance within the second reception period). Then, when the operation is accepted by the player within the different period, the display after the second acceptance may be hidden to make it easier to visually recognize the effect symbol.

For example, assuming that the display after the second reception corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is to be hidden when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display, until the predetermined time elapses. In addition, the player can hide the display after the second reception at that point only by performing a predetermined operation. It should be noted that the operation required of the player to display the display after the second reception within the second reception period and the reception period different from the second reception period (the reception period that occurs according to the reception within the second reception period). ), The operations required of the player to hide the display after the second reception may be the same operation or different operations. For example, within a reception period different from the second reception period (a reception period that occurs in response to reception within the second reception period), the player may use a plurality of operating means to hide the display after the second reception. It may be required to perform each operation.

On the other hand, the display after the first reception may be the same time as the predetermined time from the start of the display until the display after the second reception is hidden, or may be a different time. It is hidden when (good) has passed. However, the display after the first reception, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the design for staging, will not be hidden even if the player performs any operation until the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent the deterioration of the game interest when the player makes an erroneous operation against the intention of the player.

[Structure 8-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. The first reception period can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and when the specific BGM is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode. The specific BGM is made inaudible as a trigger, and acceptance is permitted after the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode becomes audible output or non-audible output in the suppressed mode during the second reception period. Even if the acceptance is made, the specific BGM is maintained in a state of being audibly output or not being audibly output in a suppression mode. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 8-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 8-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to "the state of being audibly output or not being audible output in the suppression mode" in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. You will be able to.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 8-A" is adopted, all the sounds that were audibly output at that time when the reception is made are inaudible (only the specific BGM is audible output) in the first reception period. When it is, only the specific BGM is made inaudible, and in the second reception period, all the sounds that were audibly output at that time are inaudible (only one sound is audibly output). Occasionally, only that one sound may be inaudible). That is, in this case, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which audible output is performed or is not audible output in a suppressed mode" in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, and when acceptance is made, audible output is performed at that time. It will be possible to have a common effect between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making all the sounds that have been heard inaudible, and it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game. become.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 8-A" is adopted, the specific BGM is made inaudible (in the middle of the valid period) while the player is allowed to accept the operation during the first reception period. There may be a situation where no sound is output, but it is desirable that the reception period be continued even in such a situation. That is, in this case, in the first reception period, although the specific BGM is made inaudible when the reception is made, the reception is not performed for a predetermined time after the first reception period occurs. If it is not accepted, the specific BGM will be made inaudible while the acceptance has not been made yet, so it will be possible to make people think that the first reception period has expired, and the game. You will be able to strongly attract people's interests.

In addition, when acceptance is made, when the specific BGM is made inaudible with this as an opportunity, "display change according to acceptance (display after the first acceptance)" is made to occur in accordance with this, but acceptance has not been done yet. When making a specific BGM inaudible, it is desirable not to cause "display change according to acceptance (display after the first reception)" in accordance with this. That is, in this case, the first reception period is continued by confirming that the specific BGM has been made inaudible but the "display change according to the reception (display after the first reception)" has not yet occurred. You will be able to be aware of the possibility of doing so. Then, when the operation by the player is accepted after the specific BGM is made inaudible and before the end of the first reception period, the display change according to the acceptance (first reception) is triggered by this. (Post-display) ”will occur, which will eliminate the anxiety (concern that the validity period may have expired) when the specific BGM is made inaudible, thereby improving the game entertainment. Will be able to.

[Structure 9-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the operation means, a plurality of operations including a first operation means (first operation receiving unit) and a second operation means (second operation receiving unit). Means are prepared, and as the reception period, multiple types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared. Then, in the specific reception period, both the acceptance of the operation to the first operating means and the acceptance of the operation to the second operating means are permitted as acceptance for causing the display change corresponding to the specific reception period. , A specific display change can be generated when the operation is accepted for the first operating means, and the specific display change is not generated when the operation is accepted for the second operating means. Since it is possible to generate a display change different from that of the above, it becomes possible to have an interest in which operation means is to be operated. The "specific reception period (display after specific reception (specific display change))", "first operation means", and "second operation means" related to the configuration 9-A are the techniques of the configuration 9-A. It is just a name used to explain the idea. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "reception period" or "operation means" related to other configurations, or may mean a reception period or operation means different from those reception periods. ..

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 9-A" is adopted, the specific reception period is terminated when the first operation means is operated in the specific reception period, but when the second operation means is operated. The remaining time may be extended without ending the specific reception period. That is, in this case, as a reception period using a plurality of operation means, it becomes possible to give an unprecedented effect, so that various interesting reception periods premised on such effect can be provided. Will be able to provide.

[Structure 10-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, an image display that imitates the operation receiving unit is displayed, and in the second reception period, a plurality of image displays that imitate the operation receiving unit are displayed, and the image display is operated by the player. It is made possible to execute it as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 10-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 10-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, for example, even when a plurality of operation receiving units having different required operations (for example, pushing, pulling, etc.) are prepared, what kind of operation may be performed by the player. It becomes easier to recognize whether or not, and it becomes possible to make it difficult for the operation within the valid period to occur in time.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 10-A" is adopted, the image display is executed as "a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the operation by the player". In some cases, it may not be executed as "a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the operation by the player". That is, in this case, not only when it is easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed even when the image display is displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed. Since it may be difficult to recognize the above, it is expected that the tension until the operation by the player is accepted is preferably maintained.

[Structure 11-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the operation means, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receiving units) including a specific operation means (specific operation receiving unit) are prepared. As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, an image display that imitates the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the image display are displayed and "specified by reducing the display area of the specific image with the passage of time.""Remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time that the operation is allowed to be accepted by the operating means" is performed, and in the second reception period, the image is displayed by imitating the specific operating means. The line "Remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time that the operation is allowed to be accepted by the specific operation means by reducing the display area of the specific image with the passage of time" is displayed by displaying the specific image corresponding to the display. I try not to get it. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 11-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 11-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, even if an image display imitating a specific operation means is displayed, "acceptance of an operation to the specific operation means is permitted by reducing the display area of the specific image with the passage of time. Since the "remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time" is not necessarily performed, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the reception period occurs.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 11-A" is adopted, in the second reception period, a specific image display imitating a specific operation means and a special image display imitating a special operation means different from this are displayed. However, the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" may not be performed.

That is, in this case, in the second reception period, although both the acceptance of the operation to the specific operating means and the acceptance of the operation to the different operating means are permitted, the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" is allowed. Will be prevented from being done. As a result, the second reception period occurs without the player having to think that both the acceptance of the operation for the specific operating means and the acceptance of the operation for the different operating means are allowed. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when you are there.

[Structure 12-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation means, "a first operation receiving portion displaced by an operation by a player and a first peripheral decoration portion provided on the peripheral edge thereof are provided. "1 operating means" and "a second operating means having a second operation receiving portion displaced by an operation by a player and a second peripheral decoration portion provided on the peripheral edge thereof" are prepared. Then, when displaying the first image display that imitates the first operation means, the first image that imitates the first operation receiving portion and the first peripheral edge that decorates the peripheral edge of the first receiving image. When displaying a decorative image and displaying a second image display that imitates the second operation means, the image of the second receiving part that imitates the second operation receiving part and the image of the second receiving part are displayed. The second peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge can be displayed, and the first peripheral decoration image and the second peripheral decoration image are displayed as different images from each other. The "first operating means" and "second operating means" related to the configuration 12-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" or "second operating means" related to other configurations, or it may mean the operating means opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean an operating means different from those operating means.

According to such a configuration, even if the operating means themselves are similar, the appearance of the first operating means and the case of displaying the second operating means can be significantly different from each other. It is expected that it will be easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 12-A" is adopted, the first peripheral decoration image is displayed as an image imitating the first peripheral decoration portion, but the second peripheral decoration image is the second peripheral decoration. It may be displayed as an image including at least a portion that imitates a peripheral decorative portion different from the portion. That is, in this case, when the "first image display" having the first peripheral decoration image, which is an image of the first peripheral decorative portion, is displayed, the operation opportunity is given to the first operating means. It becomes possible to make people recognize that there is a problem. On the other hand, when the "second image display" having the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not imitate the second peripheral decorative portion, is displayed, an operation opportunity is given to the second operating means. It will be possible to provide a situation with a higher degree of directing. In this case, the "second operating means corresponding to the second image display" has a larger operation receiving unit (first operation receiving unit) than the "first operating means corresponding to the first image display". Even if the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not imitate the second peripheral decoration portion, is displayed, such as by providing it as a member, it may be difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated. It is desirable not to.

Further, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the second operating means as a "situation with higher effectability", the second peripheral decoration image is a fictitious image that does not exist in the gaming machine. It is desirable to display the decorative part as an imitation image. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, a part of the second peripheral decoration image includes a portion of the second peripheral decoration portion. It may be possible to do so.

[Structure 13-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation receiving units including a first operation receiving unit, a second operation receiving unit, and a third operation receiving unit are prepared as operating means. As a reception period, we have prepared multiple types of reception periods including a specific reception period. Then, during the specific reception period, the first image display that imitates the first operation receiving unit, the second image display that imitates the second operation receiving unit, and the third image display that imitates the third operation receiving unit. When all of them are displayed and the operation is accepted for the first operation receiving unit among the plurality of operation receiving units, the acceptance is performed among the first image display, the second image display, and the third image display. At least the second image display and the third image display that imitate the operation receiving part that has not been performed are hidden. The "first operation receiving unit", "second operation receiving unit", "third operation receiving unit", and "specific reception period" related to the configuration 13-A refer to the technical concept of the configuration 13-A. It is just a name used to explain. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "operation receiving unit" and the "reception period" related to other configurations, or may mean different things.

According to the above configuration, an image display (second) is performed by imitating an operation receiving unit (second operation receiving unit, third operation receiving unit) different from the operation receiving unit (first operation receiving unit) to which the operation is received. Since the image display (2nd image display, 3rd image display) will be hidden, the operation receiving unit (2nd operation receiving unit, 3rd operation receiving unit) has been displayed but the operation has not been accepted. The operation receiving unit) can be easily recognized as to whether or not further operation is required.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 13-A" is adopted, the first image display, the second image display, and the third image display are displayed in the specific reception period, but the third image display is displayed. Of the 1 operation receiving unit, the 2nd operation receiving unit, and the 3rd operation receiving unit, the 3rd operation receiving unit may be set so that the acceptance of the operation is not enabled (not allowed). That is, in this case, in the specific reception period, when the operation is accepted by the first operation receiving unit, the first display change is generated, and when the operation is accepted by the second operation receiving unit, the second display change is generated. However, since the operation is not accepted by the third operation receiving unit and the display change triggered by the operation is not performed, until the operation by the player is accepted during the specific reception period. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the directing performance and the feeling of tension.

[Structure 14-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in both the case where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, the character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the character information is displayed. , Although the same movement as the movement by the player is targeted for reception in the first reception period and the second reception period, it is displayed as different character information (for example, "press!", "Press", etc.). I am trying to do it. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 14-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 14-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is required to perform the same operation (operation mode), the display change (display after reception) that occurs as a result of the detection of the operation. Are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), the character information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period is displayed in the reception period. Since the characters are different from each other according to the type (type of display after reception), the operation is performed while recognizing which type of display change may occur as the display after reception (operation by the player). It will be possible to perform, and it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in pachinko.

In addition, when different actions (operation modes) are requested from the player, even if the reception period is the same type (the one that generates the same display after reception), it is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable to make the displayed character information different from each other in order to suppress an operation error by the player. In the same sense, when different actions (operation modes) are requested from the player and the reception period is of a different type (which causes different post-reception display), the reception period is It is desirable that the textual information displayed in relation to what has occurred is different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first reception period is requested, and the same character information and image display as in the case of the first reception period are displayed, but when acceptance is made, the case of the first reception period May provide additional reception periods that generate different post-reception displays. That is, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is executed as the display after reception only by looking at the character information or the image display, so that the tension at the time of operation is suitable. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 14-A" is adopted, the character information is not displayed in the first reception period until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) is terminated. In the second reception period, the character information may be hidden in the middle of the state in which the acceptance is permitted (valid state). It is more desirable to have it. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, if the operation (predetermined operation) is not performed relatively early after the period occurs, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode). Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the information is present, and eventually it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, it is difficult to accept the situation where different character information is displayed. It is expected that the tension will be avoided at all.

Although this will also be described later, when the "configuration 14-A" is adopted, there are a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is hidden in the second reception period. Different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the acceptance was made. That is, in this case, a display change that cannot be confirmed unless it becomes difficult to recognize what kind of operation mode is requested (a state in which the character information is hidden) is prepared. A feeling of tension is suitably maintained through such directing.

In addition, when the first reception period occurs, the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when the player does not perform the operation, and the second reception period occur. In this case, it is desirable that the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when the player does not perform the operation is different from each other.

[Structure 15-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, only one aspect can be displayed as the image display, and in the second reception period, the image can be displayed by any one of a plurality of modes. The "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, the effect that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, so that the operation (operation) by the player is detected. It will be possible to suitably improve the hobby of the game.

Regarding the "multiple modes of image display" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible to make the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears different depending on which of the images is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the interest. Further, any one of the "plurality of image displays" may be the same as the "one aspect" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that the "lowest expected mode" of the "plurality of image displays" is the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 15-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the first reception period and the third reception period, only one mode is displayed as an image display. It may be possible. Then, in the "second reception period" in which the image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, the image display is prevented from being hidden until the valid state is terminated. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which the image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is terminated in the "first reception period". The image display will not be hidden until the image is displayed, but in the "third reception period", the valid state (the valid state is continued) until the valid state (reception period) ends. In the middle of the process, the image display that had been displayed up to that point may be hidden. That is, in this case, whether or not the image display is hidden in the middle of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which only one aspect is displayed as the image display. Since the effectability is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the game entertainment until the operation (movement) by the player is detected. The image display displayed in the first reception period and the image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but may not necessarily be the same, and may not be displayed. It may be suggested that it may be.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 15-A" is adopted, the third reception period includes a period in which the image display is displayed and a period in which the image display is hidden. However, different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the acceptance was made. That is, in this case, a display change that cannot be confirmed unless the state is such that the possibility that the reception period has expired (the state in which the image display is hidden) is prepared. A feeling of tension is suitably maintained through such directing.

The "third reception period (displayed after the third reception)" related to the configuration 15-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" related to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the first reception period related to other configurations). 2 It may mean (reception period, etc.).

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception acceptance state (reception period) in which the reception opportunity is given occurs, the image related to the reception target (such as the image of the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated image display (see Fig. 144) integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest until the post-reception display (display change) is executed. I try to do it. Such an integrated image display occurs as a result of a notice judgment with an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. ..

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof, so details are omitted. For example, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. Further, as the "integrated image display", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the display is performed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception allowable state (reception period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. The reception allowable sound is output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound that has already been accepted (acceptance period). That is, it can be said that the "acceptable reception sound" is a sound that is not output under the condition that the production has nothing to do with the allowable reception state (reception period).

Further, each acceptance allowable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance allowable state classified into the first type can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that occurs when a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expected fluctuation pattern) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state is a valid period (occurs as a result of a notice determination) that can occur in either a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Validity period, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in any of such first type and second type acceptance acceptance states (acceptance period). Here, in both the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) and the second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, operation button 410). Since it is assumed that it occurs as an allowable state (reception period), the "integrated image display" displayed in those reception periods is an image that imitates the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the plurality of modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)) is the first type acceptance acceptance state (reception period). In the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in an aspect different from the special aspect (for example, the aspect shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c)). ing. In the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) of the first type, "integrated image display" is displayed in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) including a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in an manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), "integrated image" is obtained in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to display the image, and to display the "integrated image display" in an manner corresponding to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above configurations 1 to 15 and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is only described as the best embodiment and may not necessarily be provided. That is, with respect to each configuration described in the specification described below, only the configuration corresponding to the configuration can be arbitrarily selected and adopted when further action and effect are desired to be obtained.

First, an example embodying the above configurations 2, 3, 5 to 8 will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is a staging content (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice, etc. as a post-reception effect) that is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted. A plurality of reception periods (reception effects) with different types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of a judgment (big hit judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the reception period A (reception effect A) to the reception period D (reception effect D) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effect).

With reference to FIGS. 185 to 194, the characteristics of each reception period (reception production) will be described. It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 184 is prepared as a reception period different from the reception period A (reception effect A) to the reception period D (reception effect D). Alternatively, it may be realized as any one of the reception period A (reception effect A) to the reception period D (reception effect D).

FIG. 185 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the condition A is satisfied as a result of the determination and the reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the reception period A (acceptance effect A) occurs.

Now, suppose that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction) is performed, and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, "variation pattern A" is selected. In the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern A is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (the effect description according to the variation pattern A, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 191 (a)”). Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected "variation pattern A" itself. In the production example shown in FIG. 191 (a), a landscape depicting a mountain is projected as the background image HG1.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU1511a starts the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ as shown in FIG. 185 (a). When the timing tM2 at which the predetermined time A has elapsed has arrived (when the condition A is satisfied), the above-mentioned reception period A (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the display A after reception" is permitted is generated ("Fig." The situation shown in 191 (b) "). This reception period A occurs in a state where the specific BGM is output without suppression. As a result, when the movement (operation) by the player is received within the reception period A, the post-reception display A is performed based on the reception (the situation shown in FIG. 191 (c)).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is related to the occurrence of such a reception period A. ), Gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (a mode that makes it difficult to see the image display), depending on the acceptance Post-acceptance displays that suggest the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) are displayed respectively. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but it is not always the case. It is not limited, and may be displayed separately. Further, when displaying the image display instead of the "integrated image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to these matters during other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), when the timing tM1 before the reception period A occurs, " Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tM2 at which the reception period A occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the reception period A is received or when the reception period A is completed without the reception. The reception period A according to this example is set to end when the timing tM3 arrives when the operation (operation) is not accepted by the player (see FIG. 185 (h)). ..

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (g) and the examples shown in FIGS. 191 (b) and 191 (c), the movement (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tM2a within the reception period A. It is assumed that it has been done. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (g) and FIGS. 191 (b) and 191 (c), the acceptance period is based on the fact that the movement (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tM2a. When A is completed, the post-reception display A (post-reception effect A) corresponding to the reception period A is started to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 191, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A. However, although the illustration is omitted, when the movement (operation) by the player is received within the reception period A, the first aspect (for example, for example) with a relatively low expectation as the post-reception display A based on the reception. There are cases where "chance") is executed, and there are cases where the second mode (for example, "super heat"), which has a relatively high expectation as the display A after reception, is executed.

However, although details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. 185 is produced in the same manner as the “first reception period” shown in FIG. 167 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), the time when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the audible output of the reception sound A corresponding to the acceptance is started). At the timing tM2a, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for the "time in which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner" after the acceptance is made. However, even though the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound A has already started, the same mode as when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period (shown in FIG. 167). In the example, if the display continues as it is in the mode shown in FIGS. 175 (e1) and 175 (e2), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "it will be delayed to notice the post-reception effect (here, reception sound A) in the execution state".

Therefore, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tM2a at which the reception period A ends due to the reception of the operation (operation) by the player. (When the timing tM2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related effect (the disappearance-related display A corresponding to the reception period A) is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The "disappearance-related effect" here is an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated image display IG). When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" is started, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and the integrated image is displayed while the "disappearance-related effect" is displayed. The image display IG will be gradually hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, "disappearance-related display A (disappearance EF in the figure)" is displayed while "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance-related display A" is displayed overlaps with the area where "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is designed to do.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, so that the reception sound is received. It becomes possible to suggest that A is already in a running situation. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound A has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the reception sound A. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed in A. Further, even after the process for outputting the reception sound A to be audible is started, the integrated image display IG is displayed until the integrated image display IG is difficult to see (timing tM2a to tM2b). Since it is possible to confirm the mode of the IG with good visibility, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the reception period A, the same mode appears as the extinction-related display A regardless of whether the mode with low expectation or the mode with high expectation is executed as the corresponding post-reception display A. I am doing it. As a result, even under the situation where the reception sound A is started to be executed, the effect display device 1600 can maintain the degree of expectation as concealment.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 185 (b) to (d), a display related to the disappearance-related display A (a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see) appears. When the timing tM2c within the above period arrives, the "post-acceptance display A" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player within the acceptance period A is started to be executed. As the post-reception display A, the first mode with relatively low expectation (for example, "chance") is executed, or the second mode with relatively high expectation (for example, "super heat") is executed. ") May be executed, as described above.

That is, in this case, the "post-acceptance display A" is started to be executed while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display A" are displayed respectively. In addition, since the "post-reception display A" is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player's gaze destination while suggesting that the reception period A has already ended. Is expected to shift from "integrated image display IG" to "post-acceptance display A" (timing tM2c or later).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-reception display A" is started in this way, the "post-reception display A" is displayed as shown in FIGS. 185 (b) to 185 (d). Among the displayed images, first, of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display A", the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display A" is hidden, and the "post-reception display A" is considered to be good for visibility. (In FIG. 191, the illustration of the progress of the production is omitted).

In this respect, the "post-acceptance display A" is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185 (d), the "post-reception display A" remains for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display A" are hidden. It will be executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period A occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tM1 shown in FIG. 185 (f). That is, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tM2 at which the reception period A occurs, and the player is able to audibly output the reception permissible sound. The operation (operation) by is acceptable.

Here, in the reception period A, as shown in FIG. 185 (f), even if the operation (operation) is accepted by the player while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception is performed. The permissible sound is not terminated in the middle, and is output only for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, during the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods, when the player accepts the operation (operation) while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is based on the acceptance. The reception period in which the audible output status is terminated halfway is included. Therefore, as a result of being accepted while the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output within the acceptance period A, when the mode in which the audible output of the acceptance permissible sound is continued appears, it is determined whether or not the acceptance is in the accepted state. It becomes difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

As shown in FIGS. 185 (d) and 191 (c), the post-acceptance display A according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps with the decorative symbol SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG is preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ, but the post-reception display A is preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ. Instead, the decorative symbol SZ is preferentially displayed on the post-acceptance display A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 185 (d) and 191 (d), the post-acceptance display A according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. ..

On the other hand, FIGS. 185 (h) to (n) and "an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 191 (b) to FIG. 191 (d) without going through FIG. 191 (c)" are within the reception period A. It is assumed that the movement by the player is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the reception period A occurs, the timing tM3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled). In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (when the reception period A ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the staging display device 1600 has the timing tM2a (the movement by the player within the reception period A). Similar to the staging display device 1600 at the time of acceptance), not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. (In the example of FIG. 167, the embodiment shown in FIG. 175 (e3)).

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period A ends because the player cannot accept the movement in time, the integrated image display IG will be displayed within the reception period A after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the display was made, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the reception period A, when the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 185 (j), the disappearance-related effect (reception) is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to the extinction-related display A) corresponding to the period A is not started. At this time, if it is a method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself, this may be performed. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden.

FIG. 186 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the condition B is satisfied as a result of the determination and the reception period B (second reception effect B) occurs. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the reception period B (acceptance effect B) occurs.

Now, suppose that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction) is performed, and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, "variation pattern B" is selected. In the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern B is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the variation pattern B, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 192 (a)”), and the variation effect is performed. Within the execution period, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected "variation pattern B" itself. In the production example shown in FIG. 192 (a), a landscape depicting a river is projected as a background image HG2.

However, in the effect related to the "variation pattern B", as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is obtained regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). The above-mentioned reception period B (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding display B after reception" is permitted when the timing tN2 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) when the predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of the operation is reached. Generate (the situation shown in FIG. 192 (b)). This reception period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible. As a result, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period B, the post-reception display is performed based on the reception. In the example shown in FIG. 192 (b), the reception period B occurs when the decorative symbol SZ forms a reach state.

In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a reception period B occurs, as in the case where the above-mentioned reception period A occurs (FIG. 185). In relation to, the image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), the gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and the disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (the image display is visible). Post-receipt display suggesting the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) according to the acceptance (a mode that makes it difficult). The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%". As described above, the image display is displayed as an "integrated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but the image display is not limited to this and is separately displayed. It may be displayed. Further, when displaying the image display instead of the "integrated image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to these matters during other reception periods.

More specifically, even in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the timing tN1 before the reception period B occurs, the “integrated image display” is performed. IG (image display, gauge image display) ”is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tN2 at which the reception period B occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is used when the reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the reception period B), or when the reception period B is completed without the reception. The point that it is hidden is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 185 (reception period A). The reception period B according to this example is set to end when the timing tN3 arrives when the operation (operation) is not accepted by the player (see FIG. 186 (h)).

Here, in the above-mentioned "reception period A (see FIG. 191 (b))", when the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed, no character information corresponding to the image display is displayed. , In the "reception period B (see FIG. 192 (b))", when the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed, the character information related to the acceptance is permitted (here, the character information related to the acceptance is permitted). , "Press") is displayed. That is, in the "reception period A" and the "reception period B", both of the same modes as the image display (integrated image display IG) (out of the plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to (d), FIG. Character information that does not appear when "reception period A" occurs when "reception period B" occurs even though the aspect shown in 144 (a) is used (here, "press"). ) Is displayed, which suggests that the degree of expectation that can be suggested as a post-receipt display is different. In this example, the expectation (ratio) that the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol is stopped is higher in the case where the reception period B occurs than in the case where the reception period A occurs. Alternatively, in the post-reception display B according to the reception period B, a mode suggesting that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is 100% can appear, whereas the reception according to the reception period A can appear. In the post-display A, an aspect suggesting that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is 100% may not appear.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 186 (a) to 186 (g), it is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tN2a within the reception period B. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the reception period B is terminated and the reception period B corresponds to the reception period B based on the fact that the movement (operation) by the player is received at the timing tN2a. Post-reception display B (post-reception staging B) will start execution.

In the example shown in FIG. 192, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception period B. However, although the illustration is omitted, when the movement (operation) by the player is received within the reception period B, the first aspect (for example, for example) with a relatively low expectation as the post-reception display B based on the reception. "Defeat 10 bodies!") May be executed, or the second mode (for example, "Defeat 100 bodies!"), Which has a relatively high expectation as display B after reception, may be executed. There is.

Although details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period B shown in FIG. 186 is produced in the same manner as the “second reception period” shown in FIG. 168 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of the reception sound B corresponding to the acceptance is started). At the timing tN2a, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for the "time in which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after the acceptance is made. However, even though the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound B has already started, the same mode as when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period (shown in FIG. 168). In the example, if the display continues as it is in the mode shown in FIGS. 177 (e1) and 177 (e2), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "it will be delayed to notice the post-reception effect (here, reception sound B) in the execution state".

Therefore, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tN2a at which the reception period B ends due to the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player. (When the timing tN2b arrives), as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the display related to the "disappearance-related display B" different from the extinction-related display A is started. Here, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)" is an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated image display IG). That is. When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" is started, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and the integrated image is displayed while the "disappearance-related effect" is displayed. The image display IG will be gradually hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, so that the reception sound is received. It becomes possible to suggest that B is already in a running situation. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound B has already been executed, it is possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the reception sound B. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed in B. Further, even after the process for outputting the reception sound B to be audible is started, the integrated image display IG is displayed until the integrated image display IG is difficult to see (timing tN2a to tN2b). Since it is possible to confirm the mode of the IG with good visibility, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, although the illustration is omitted, in the reception period B, the extinction-related display B differs depending on whether a mode with a low expectation appears or a mode with a high expectation appears as the corresponding post-reception staging B. (Disappearance-related indications B1 and B2) are made to appear. That is, in this case, even if the "post-reception display B" using the effect display device 1600 is not yet started, the disappearance-related display B appearing on the effect display device 1600 is the first aspect and the second aspect. By confirming which of the modes appears, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "post-reception display B" is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 186 (b) to (d), a display related to the disappearance-related display B (a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see) appears. When the timing tN2c within the above period arrives, the "post-reception display B" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player within the reception period B is started to be executed. As the post-reception display B, the first mode with a relatively low expectation (for example, "defeat 10 bodies!") Is executed, or the second mode with a relatively high expectation (for example, "100") is executed. Defeat the body! ") May be executed, as described above.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B (disappearance-related display B1 or extinction-related display B2)" are displayed, the "post-acceptance display B (first aspect or first mode)" is displayed. 2 embodiments) ”will be started. In addition, since the display B is started after the reception while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player's gaze point is ", while suggesting that the reception period B has already ended. It is expected that the "integrated image display IG" will naturally shift to the "post-reception display B" (timing tN2c or later).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-reception display B" is started in this way, the "post-reception display B" is displayed as shown in FIGS. 186 (b) to 186 (d). Among the displayed images, first, of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B", the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden, and the "post-reception display B" is considered to be good for visibility. (In FIG. 192, the illustration of the progress of the production is omitted). ..

In this respect, the "post-acceptance display B" is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186 (d), the "post-reception display B" has a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B" are hidden. Will be executed over.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example corresponding to the reception period A (FIG. 191), even if the reception is made and the "post-reception display A" is executed within the reception period A, the "post-reception display A" is started. I tried to maintain this without causing a switch in the background image before and after. In this regard, in the production example (FIG. 192) corresponding to the reception period B, when the reception is made and the "post-reception display B" is executed within the reception period B, the "post-reception display B" is started. The background image may be switched before and after.

According to such a configuration, during the period in which the background image is not switched (timing tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 186), even if there is some display change in the effect display device 1600, "display after reception B". Will be able to suggest that the situation has not yet been started.

Further, at this time, as the post-reception display B, the same background image may be switched between the case where the mode with low expectation appears and the case where the mode with high expectation appears, and the mode with low expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to a different background image depending on the case and the case where a mode with high expectation appears. Further, the background image is switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period B occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tN1 shown in FIG. 186 (f). That is, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the reception period B is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tN2 at which the reception period B occurs, and the player is able to audibly output the reception permissible sound. The operation (operation) by is acceptable.

Here, in the reception period B, the reception allowable sound includes a long-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time. It is designed to be output. In the example shown in FIG. 186 (f), the output of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are started at the same time, but the output is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at or after the timing tN2 at which the reception period B occurs.

Then, in the reception period B, when the player accepts the motion while the long-time allowable sound and / or the short-time allowable sound are audibly output, the length is based on the acceptance. The time permissible sound and / or the short time permissible sound are terminated halfway (the end in the audible output state).

Further, in the reception period B, as shown in FIG. 186 (f), when the movement is accepted by the player while the reception permissible sound (long-time permissible sound, short-time permissible sound) is audibly output. Not only is the reception allowable sound terminated halfway, but when the reception is made, the audible output of the reception sound B is started based on this. That is, in this case, in the reception period B, unlike the case of the display change, the production performed within the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (second reception sound) are performed. There will be no conflicting (overlapping) periods.

As for such a second reception sound, as shown in FIG. 186 (g), the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B" are hidden as in the "post-reception display B". After that, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Further, regarding the second reception sound, it is possible to output different output sounds (modes) depending on whether the mode with high expectation appears as the display B after reception and the mode with low expectation appears. desirable. On the other hand, regarding the first reception sound, the same output sound (mode) is output to each other when the mode with high expectation appears and the mode with low expectation appears as the display A after reception. Is desirable.

In the reception period B, a long-time permissible sound and a short-time permissible sound are output as reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, which is the same as the reception period A. As such, only one reception allowable sound may be output.

As shown in FIGS. 186 (d) and 192 (d), the post-acceptance display B according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps with the decorative symbol SZ. In this example, the integrated image display IG is preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ, and the post-reception display B is also preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ. As shown in FIGS. 186 (d) and 192 (d), the post-acceptance display B according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ will be improved.

On the other hand, FIGS. 186 (h) to (n) assume a case where the movement by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period B.

That is, in this case, after the reception period B occurs, the timing tN3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, the reception period B is set as a "reception period for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled", unlike the reception period A. Therefore, in the reception period B, even if the above timing tN3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted, the operation (operation) by the player is performed within the reception period B thereafter. The same post-reception display B as when it was there will be generated.

However, in the reception period B according to this embodiment, although the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, in the effect display device 1600 when the timing tN3 is set, the timing tN2a (player in the reception period B). As shown in FIG. 186 (i), as shown in FIG. 186 (i), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image is not displayed. I also try not to make the display IG difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period B ends because the player cannot accept the operation (operation) in time, the integrated image is captured within the reception period B after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 186 (i), when the timing tN3a when the predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tN3 at which the reception period B ends arrives. As "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", the display related to the disappearance-related display B is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Therefore, at least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception period B ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the reception period B has ended. Further, even in a situation where the reception period B has already ended, it becomes possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the image. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period B.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the mode of the disappearance-related display B that appears when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the reception period B is the operation (operation) by the player during the reception period B. ) Appears if it had been accepted.

That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in the reception period B, the integrated image display IG is hidden after the reception period B ends. By simply confirming the mode as the "disappearance-related display B" that appears, it becomes possible to recognize whether the post-acceptance display B was executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, when the timing tN3b arrives, the "post-reception display B" is started to be executed in the manner that would have appeared if the operation (operation) by the player had been received within the reception period B (FIG. 192 (b). After the situation shown in () appears, the situation shown in FIG. 192 (c) appears regardless of the presence or absence of the operation).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 186 (i) to 186 (k), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B", first, the "integrated image display IG" is not selected. Display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden.

The timing at which the "disappearance-related display B" appears and the timing at which the "post-reception display B" starts to be executed do not have to be later than the timing tN3 at which the reception period B ends, and the reception period B ends. The timing may be tN3, or the timing may be earlier than that.

FIG. 187 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the condition C is satisfied as a result of the determination and the reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the reception period C (acceptance effect C) occurs.

Now, suppose that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction) is performed, and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, "variation pattern C" is selected. In the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern C is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the variation pattern C, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation effect, the result of the advance notice effect determination is met. The effect (notice effect) is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. In the production example shown in FIG. 193 (a), a landscape depicting a desert is projected as a background image HG3.

However, in the effect related to the "variation pattern C", a predetermined time C has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started, regardless of which result was obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the timing tO2 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the display C after reception" is allowed. Generate reception period C (valid period). This reception period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible. As a result, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, the post-acceptance display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the reception period C (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a reception period C occurs, the degree of expectation (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) is suggested according to the acceptance. Although the display C is performed after the reception, unlike the case where the reception periods A and B described above occur (FIGS. 185 and 186), the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is suggested in relation to this. Image display, gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (a mode that makes it difficult to see the image display), etc. are not performed. .. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the reception period C occurs, the image display, the gauge image display, and the character information prompting the operation are displayed. Etc. will not be done. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize from which timing the reception period C occurs and at which timing the reception period C ends, and it is also difficult to even recognize the existence of the reception period C itself. Will be done. The reception period C according to this example is set to end when the timing tO3 arrives when the operation (operation) is not accepted by the player (see FIG. 187 (h)).

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 187 (a) to 187 (g), it is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tO2a within the reception period C. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), the reception period C is terminated and the reception period C corresponds to the reception period C based on the fact that the movement (operation) by the player is received at the timing tO2a. Post-reception display C (post-reception staging C) will start execution.

In the example shown in FIG. 193, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display C corresponding to the reception period C. However, although the illustration is omitted, when the movement (operation) by the player is received within the reception period C, the first aspect (for example, for example) with a relatively low expectation as the post-reception display C based on the reception. When the mode in which the number of ghosts appearing as a ghost group is small) is executed, or in the second mode with relatively high expectations as the display C after reception (for example, the mode in which the number of ghosts appearing as a ghost group is large). It is designed to be executed.

As described above, in this reception period C, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), when the movement (operation) by the player is received, the extinction-related display is not performed. Further, when the reception period C occurs, as shown in FIG. 187 (f), the reception allowable sound is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 187 (d) and 193 (c), the post-acceptance display C according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps with the decorative symbol SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-acceptance display C is not preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ, and the decorative symbol SZ is preferentially displayed on the post-acceptance display C. .. Then, as shown in FIGS. 187 (d) and 193 (d), the post-acceptance display C according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. ..

On the other hand, FIGS. 187 (h) to (n) and "an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 193 (b) to FIG. 193 (d) without going through FIG. 193 (c)" are within the reception period C. It is assumed that the movement by the player is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the reception period C occurs, the timing tO3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled). However, in the reception period C, since some display change does not occur with the end of the period C, the timing tO3 (the reception period C ends and the player operates the operation. Even when the acceptance is no longer allowed), the background image HG3 is only flowing in the effect display device 1600, and it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

FIGS. 188 and 189 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition D is satisfied as a result of the determination and the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a reception period D (acceptance effect D) occurs.

Now, as a result of the start condition being satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the fluctuation pattern determination are performed, "variation pattern D1 (FIG. 188)" or Assuming that "variation pattern D2 (FIG. 189)" is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (the effect description according to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 194 (a)”. ), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally added to the effect of the above-selected "variation pattern D1" or "variation pattern D2" itself. It will be executed. In the production example shown in FIG. 194 (a), a landscape depicting mountains and rivers is projected as a background image HG4a.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fluctuation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 189 (a). The above-mentioned acceptance period D (valid) in which "acceptance regarding display D after acceptance" is permitted when the timing tP2 in which the predetermined time D has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of SZ arrives (when the condition D is satisfied). Period) (“Situation shown in FIG. 194 (b)”). As a result, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period D, the post-reception display D is performed based on the reception (the situation shown in FIG. 194 (c)).

However, more accurately, this reception period D is predetermined after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), when the variation pattern D1 that generates the reach effect is selected. It occurs when the timing tP2-D1 (the timing that arrives after the timing at which the reach state is formed) that the time D1 has elapsed arrives (when the condition D1 is satisfied), but the reach effect is not generated. When the variation pattern D2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), when the timing tP2-D2 in which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives (condition D2 is set). It is supposed to occur (when it is established).

Moreover, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 in which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect arrives, it is shown in FIG. 188 (e). Therefore, before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output or inaudible is generated in a suppressed manner. That is, in this case, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state.

On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 in which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect arrives, FIG. 189 (e). As shown in the above, when the timing tP2-D2 arrives, the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. That is, in this case, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

As described above, does the reception period D occur when the timing tP2-D1 in which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the reach effect arrives, or does not generate the reach effect? The mode of the effect differs depending on whether the time tP2-D2 occurs when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 was started.

First, FIG. 188 shows an example of an effect in which the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the reach effect arrives. And FIG. 194 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is related to the occurrence of such a reception period D. ), A gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a post-reception display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) according to the acceptance. There is. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but it is not always the case. It is not limited, and may be displayed separately. Further, when displaying the image display instead of the "integrated image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to these matters during other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the timing tP1 before the reception period D occurs, " Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the reception period D occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden (invisible) when the reception period D is received or when the reception period D is completed without the reception period D. The reception period D according to this example is terminated when the timing tP3 arrives if the movement (operation) is not accepted by the player (see FIG. 188 (h)). ..

In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 188 (a) to (g) and the example of following the production route such as FIG. 194 (b) → FIG. 194 (e) → FIG. 194 (f) → FIG. It is assumed that the movement (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tPx within the period D. That is, in this case, the reception period D is terminated based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tPx, and the post-reception display D (post-reception effect D) corresponding to the reception period D is displayed. Execution will be started.

In the example shown in FIG. 194 (c), only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. However, although the illustration is omitted, when the movement (operation) by the player is received within the reception period D, the first aspect (for example, for example) with a relatively low expectation as the post-reception display D based on the reception. The cut-in by the princess character) may be executed, or the second aspect (for example, the cut-in by the samurai character) having a relatively high expectation as the display D after reception may be executed.

However, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 188 (b), the integrated image display IG is hidden at the time when the movement (operation) by the player is received (here, the timing tPx). Not to mention not doing so, it does not make it difficult to visually recognize the integrated image display IG.

Further, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), an effect related to disappearance even if a predetermined time elapses from the timing tPx at which the reception period D ends due to the reception of the operation (operation) by the player. Is not displayed. That is, in the reception period D, the corresponding disappearance-related display (an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated image display IG)). Is not prepared, and the integrated image display IG will be suddenly hidden.

Even in the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 188 (b) to (d), when the timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated image display IG is displayed, the player determines the timing tPx1 within the reception period D. The "post-acceptance display D" according to the acceptance of the operation (operation) is started to be executed.

However, in the reception period D, when the movement (operation) by the player is received, the "post-reception display D" is displayed by the integrated image display IG as shown in FIG. 194 (c). The display is started in a mode in which the image overlaps with the entire region and is preferentially displayed on the integrated image display IG. The "post-reception display D" may be displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, the integrated image display IG is suddenly hidden (displayed on the layer) when the display of "post-reception display D" is started based on the acceptance of the movement (operation) by the player. Even if it remains), it will be possible to provide a different effect from the case of other reception periods using the extinction effect or the like. The post-acceptance display D according to this example is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started.

Further, in the reception period D, unlike the case of other reception periods, even if the display related to the "post-reception display D" is started based on the reception, the reception is triggered. The process related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" is not terminated. That is, in the reception period D, the process for displaying the "integrated image display IG" is continued until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (here, timing tP3), and the predetermined specific condition is continued. I try to end it when is satisfied. In addition, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted and the acceptance period D is continued until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the "integrated image display IG" is used. In addition to terminating the processing related to the display, the processing for terminating the reception period D is also performed.

That is, in the reception period D, when the "post-reception display D" is started to be displayed based on the acceptance, the period D is terminated based on the acceptance. , The process related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" itself is not terminated, and the display on the layer is continued. However, since the "post-reception display D" is preferentially displayed over the "integrated image display IG", the "post-reception display D" causes the "integrated image display IG" to be displayed. As described above, the image is hidden (invisible) (in FIGS. 188 and 189, the period covered by the diagonal line is displayed as an image (integrated) by the "post-reception display D". Image display IG) is hidden (corresponding to the period when it is invisible).

In this case, the "integrated image display IG" may not be completely hidden, but may be made difficult to see through a predetermined transmittance set in the "post-reception display D".

Further, in the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 188 (b) and 194 (b), (e), (f), the state in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) is continued. In the meantime, the "integrated image display IG" can be changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189), or the "integrated image display IG" can be changed from the non-display state. It may be displayed (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189). Of course, even when the "integrated image display IG" is in the non-display state, if the player performs an operation (operation), the operation (operation) will be accepted, and the acceptance will be performed. Based on this, the display D will be performed after reception (see the example of following the production route such as FIG. 194 (e) → FIG. 194 (c)).

In this example, if the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, is it accepted before the "integrated image display IG" is hidden (FIG. 194). (B) → FIG. 194 (c)), or was the acceptance made when the “integrated image display IG” was in the non-display state (FIG. 194 (e) → FIG. 194 (c)), or “integrated”. Regardless of whether the acceptance was made after the "changed image display IG" was returned to the display state again (FIG. 194 (f) → FIG. 194 (c)), the same mode as the "post-reception display D" (FIG. 194 (FIG. 194). c)) is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 194 (e), the reception period C (FIG. 193 (FIG. 193)) in which the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed even though the reception period D has occurred. It will be possible to provide an atmosphere as if it was suddenly replaced with b)), and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment through such a surprise-like production. On the other hand, even if the player accepts the operation (operation) under the situation where it seems that the reception period C is suddenly replaced (the integrated image display IG is not displayed), the reception period Since the same mode (FIG. 194 (c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D" corresponding to D, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the reception period D according to this example, when the "integrated image display IG" changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. With such a configuration, it is expected that when the "integrated image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it is expected to create an atmosphere that suddenly changes with another reception period. become.

In particular, in this example, the "background image HG4a" in which mountains and rivers are drawn is changed to the "background image HG4b" in which a desert different from the "background image HG3" is drawn (Fig. 194 (Fig. 194). b) → FIG. 194 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the "integrated image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it more preferably creates an atmosphere that suddenly replaces the reception period C that may occur in the background of the desert. Will be expected.

In this example, when the "integrated image display IG" is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 194 (e) → FIG. 194 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D from the other reception period (particularly, the reception period C) will be more preferably created.

Further, as shown in FIG. 194 (c), the post-acceptance display D according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps with the decorative symbol SZ (displayed on the entire screen). It may be one)). In this example, the integrated image display IG is preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ, and the post-reception display D is also preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ. As shown in FIGS. 188 (d) and 194 (d), the post-acceptance display D according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ will be improved. The situation shown in FIG. 194 (d) shows a situation in which the effect of the reach state progresses and the SP reach effect is entered.

However, when the post-reception display D is preferentially displayed for the decorative symbol SZ, the effect (reach state, etc.) by the decorative symbol SZ can be seen until the display time as the post-reception display D elapses. There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable due to the inability to do so.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) during the period when the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, and the acceptance is made. With this as an opportunity, the process related to the display of "display D after reception" is terminated (see the example of following the production route such as FIG. 194 (c) → FIG. 194 (g)). That is, in this case, depending on the operation of the player, the timing at which the display of "post-reception display D" is terminated can be made early (arrival before the display time as the post-reception display D elapses). (Fig. 194 (g)), the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the fact that the effect (reach state, etc.) by the decorative symbol SZ cannot be seen by the "display D after reception" will be suppressed. ..

In this example, in the reception period D, the operation content (pressing operation on the operation button 410) required to start displaying the "post-reception display D" and the period in which the "post-reception display D" is displayed. , The operation contents (pressing operation for the operation button 410) required for early termination of the "display D after reception" are set as the same operation contents, but these operation contents are different from each other. You may. For example, while the operation content required to start displaying "post-reception display D" is "pressing operation on the operation button 410", the operation content required to end the "post-reception display D" is The "sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001" may be performed, or a combination of "pressing operation on the operation button 410" and "sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001" may be performed.

In any case, during the period when the "post-reception display D" is displayed, what kind of operation is required to end the "post-reception display D" as shown in FIG. 194 (c). It is desirable to clearly indicate whether or not this is done by displaying "text information (cancellable in the figure)" or "image display". In this case, it is desirable that the "image display" is preferentially displayed with respect to the "post-reception display D" at a position overlapping the "post-reception display D" (in the figure, the "post-reception display D" is displayed. The image display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with "D"). In addition, "character information" is not prepared as a separate image from "display after reception D", but is displayed as a part of the display of "display after reception D" itself (image on the same layer). You may try to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period D occurs, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), the reception allowable sound is not audibly output. It is designed to provide the same directing performance as "Period C", which also makes "Reception Period C" conscious. Even at the timing when the "integrated image display IG" is hidden or returned to the display state, the reception allowable sound is not audibly output.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. 188 (h) to (n) and the examples of following the production route such as FIGS. 194 (b), (e), (f), (g), and (d) are within the reception period D. It is assumed that the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the reception period D occurs, the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled), and the above-mentioned "predetermined specific condition (here, here). The arrival of timing tP3) ”will be established. In this regard, in the staging display device 1600 at the timing tP3 (when the reception period D ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tPx (the movement by the player within the reception period D) is used. Similar to the staging display device 1600 at the time of acceptance), not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. There is.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period D ends because the player cannot accept the operation (operation) in time, the integrated image is captured within the reception period D after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, in the reception period D, when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 188 (j), the disappearance-related as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display of the effect does not start. At this time, if it is a method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself, this may be performed. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden.

Next, the figure shows an example of an effect in which the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect arrives. It will be described in detail with reference to 189 and FIG. 194. Note that FIG. 194 assumes a case where the reception period D occurs after the reach state is formed, and does not correspond to the case where the reception period D shown in FIG. 189 occurs, but is shown in FIG. 189. Also in the reception period D, among the production contents shown in FIG. 194, the reception period D occurs when the reach state is not formed, and the SP reach production is not entered after the reception period D ends. Since it is basically the same except for the above, it will be described with reference to FIG. 194 for convenience of explanation.

When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect arrives, the reception period D is also the same reception period as the above-mentioned reception period D. Therefore, the processing contents performed when the acceptance is made and the processing contents performed when the acceptance is not made are the same as the above-mentioned processing contents unless otherwise specified.

However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 in which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the reach effect arrives, FIG. 188 (e). ), Before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output or inaudible in a suppressed manner. On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 in which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect arrives, FIG. 189 (e). As shown in the above, prior to the arrival of the timing tP2-D2, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output or inaudible is not generated in the suppression mode.

Therefore, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 in which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect arrives, it is shown in FIG. 189 (e). As described above, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

However, if the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect arrives, the reception period D In the state where

According to such a configuration, while the reception period A (see FIG. 185), which occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, appears to have occurred, the specific BGM is subsequently generated. It is as if the reception period B (see FIG. 186) in which the movement (operation) by the player can be accepted occurs in the state of being audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the non-audible state. The atmosphere will change, and it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In order to obtain such an effect more preferably, when the acceptance is made in the reception period B, a high expectation (for example, a jackpot symbol) that cannot appear when the acceptance is made in the reception period A appears. It is desirable that the display after reception may be displayed in a manner suggesting that the ratio is 100% or the like).

Further, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception period D occurred arrives, the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden. This is as described above, but the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden for the timing tPy at which the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is made inaudible. It is set to arrive before the timing tP2a.

If such a configuration is further provided, the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is inaudible while the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the atmosphere will be changed more preferably as if the reception period B (see FIG. 186) has occurred.

On the other hand, the timing tP2a at which the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden while the specific BGM is audibly output or inaudible in the suppressed mode is set. Since it will arrive, at the timing tP2a, it becomes possible to more preferably provide an atmosphere as if the reception period C (see FIG. 187) has occurred.

In the reception period D according to this example, when the timing tP2b arrives after a predetermined time has passed since the image display (integrated image display IG) was hidden, the image display (integrated image display) is displayed. The state in which IG) is displayed again is as described above (see FIG. 194 (f)). However, even after the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed again in this way, the specific BGM continues to be in the "audible output state in the suppression mode or the non-audible state". ..

FIGS. 189 (a) to 189 (g) show an operation (operation) by the player when the specific BGM is in the "audible output state or non-audible state" in the above-mentioned reception period D. Is assumed to be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 189 (a) to 189 (g), even in the reception period D, as in the reception period B, as shown in FIGS. 189 (a), (b), (e), the specific BGM is Even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while in the "audible output state in the suppressed mode or the non-audible state", the specific BGM starts the audible output in the non-suppressed mode. In order to maintain "a state of being audibly output or an inaudible state in a suppressed mode". This also makes it possible to more preferably provide an atmosphere as if the reception period B (see FIG. 186) has occurred.

FIGS. 189 (a') to (g') show the timing tPy in which the specific BGM is set to "the state of being audibly output in the suppressed mode or the state of being inaudible" in the above-mentioned reception period D. Also before, that is, it is assumed that the movement (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode.

As shown in FIGS. 189 (a') to 189 (g'), during the above-mentioned reception period D, the movement (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode. At that time, the acceptance is used as an opportunity to set the specific BGM to "a state in which audible output is performed in a suppressed mode or a state in which it is inaudible". That is, in this case, when the acceptance is made while the specific BGM is in the "audible output in the suppressed mode or the non-audible state", the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode with the acceptance as an opportunity. However, when the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode and is accepted, the specific BGM is "audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the non-audible state" with the acceptance as an opportunity. Will be. As a result, after the reception period D occurs, it becomes possible to urge the player to perform the operation at an early stage where the operation (operation) by the player can affect the specific BGM, and the reception period D occurs. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when you do this.

As described above, in the reception period D according to this example, "the image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 194 (b))" is triggered by the acceptance. Do not end the process related to the display of. That is, by giving priority to the "post-reception display D" for the image display (integrated image display IG) whose display state is maintained on the layer, the "image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated image display IG)" ( "Integrated image display IG)" is hidden (invisible).

Further, in the "post-reception display D" according to this example, as described above, the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) during the display period, and when the acceptance is made, this is used as an opportunity. The process related to the display of the "post-reception display D" is terminated early (see an example of following an effect route such as FIG. 194 (c) → FIG. 194 (g)). At this time, when the reception is made, the "image display (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 194 (c))" and the character information (cancellable) corresponding to the display D after reception are also accepted. (See FIG. 194 (g)).

In such a configuration, during the period in which "display after reception D" is displayed, depending on the timing at which the operation (operation) by the player is accepted, the "image display (integrated image) corresponding to the reception period D" is displayed. In a situation where the processing related to the display of "display IG)" is continued, it is conceivable that the processing related to the display of "display D after reception" may be terminated early. That is, in this case, the display of the "post-reception display D" that was preferentially displayed for the "image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 194 (b))" is terminated. As a result, the "image display corresponding to the reception period D" is displayed again, but at this time, the "reception period D" itself may be generated again.

In this way, if the process related to the display of "display D after reception" is terminated early and then the "reception period D" is to be generated again, the process related to the display of "display D after reception D" is terminated early. Even after this is done, if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted again within the "reception period D" that has occurred again, the "post-reception display D" can be displayed again. Will be. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game when the "display D after reception" is accidentally terminated early.

By the way, for the reception periods A to D shown in FIGS. 185 to 194, the fluctuation patterns A to C, D1 and D2 are selected as the fluctuation patterns, and a predetermined time A to D has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was started. It is described above as what happens at each time. However, regarding the reception periods A to D, it is not necessary to generate only when different fluctuation patterns are selected. For example, as will be described later, this is an opportunity when one fluctuation pattern is selected. It may be set so that all of the reception periods A to D occur.

Further, as described above, the reception period D is generated as a reception period having a special property as compared with the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such a reception period D may be set as a reception period that can occur only when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number. That is, in this case, when the number of reservations becomes less than the predetermined number as a result of the player trying to interrupt the game, the reception period D will occur, and it seems as if the reception period A to C is changed each time. Since it will be provided with a special effect, it will be possible to expect to encourage the game not to be stopped, or even if the game is stopped, it will give an interesting impression to the game. You will be able to have it at the end.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are tables showing a setting example relating to the generation conditions of the reception periods A to D when these effects are to be realized.

First, FIG. 190 (a) is a table referred to when the number of holds is any one of "2" to "4" in consuming the hold. That is, in this case, even if the symbol change according to the hold digestion is started, the hold number does not become "0", it is any of "1" to "3", and there is a risk that the game is stopped. Since the situation is low, the reception period D does not occur regardless of which of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" is executed as the fluctuation pattern. ..

More specifically, when the hold is exhausted and the first fluctuation pattern is executed when the number of hold is any of "2" to "4", 70% as a result of the effect judgment (notice judgment). None of the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate, and as a result of the staging judgment (notice judgment), only the reception period A out of the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate of 30%.

In addition, when the hold is exhausted and the second fluctuation pattern is executed when the number of hold is any of "2" to "4", the acceptance period is 50% as a result of the production judgment (notice judgment). Of A to D, only the reception period C occurs, and as a result of the staging judgment (notice judgment), the reception period A and the reception period C occur at a rate of 50%.

In addition, when the hold is exhausted and the third fluctuation pattern is executed when the number of hold is any of "2" to "4", the acceptance period is 10% as a result of the production judgment (notice judgment). B and the reception period C are generated, and as a result of the staging judgment (notice judgment), the reception period A, the reception period B, and the reception period C are generated at a rate of 90%.

The reception period A is 5 after the start of fluctuation, regardless of which of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" having different fluctuation times is selected. It is said that it can occur when the second has elapsed, and the reception period C is 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation regardless of which of the "second fluctuation pattern" and the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected. The reception period B can be generated when 35 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation when the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected.

Further, the reception periods B and C are not subject to the effect determination (notice determination), and are always generated when the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected. However, the reception period A is the effect. It is a target of judgment (notice judgment), and can occur only when a special result is obtained in the production judgment. However, the reception periods B and C may be subject to the effect determination (notice determination), or the reception period A may not be subject to the effect determination (notice determination).

Next, FIG. 190 (b) is a table referred to when the number of holds is "1" when the hold is exhausted. That is, in this case, when the symbol change according to the hold digestion is started, the number of holds becomes "0", and there is a risk that the game will be stopped unless a new hold is added within the execution period of the symbol change. Regardless of which of all the fluctuation patterns including the "first fluctuation pattern", the "second fluctuation pattern", and the "third fluctuation pattern", which are selected as the fluctuation patterns, is executed, the above acceptance period It is designed to generate D.

More specifically, when the hold is exhausted and the first fluctuation pattern is executed when the number of hold is "1", the acceptance period A to D is 70% as a result of the production judgment (notice judgment). Of these, only the reception period D occurs, and as a result of the staging judgment (notice judgment), the reception period A and the reception period D occur at a rate of 30%.

Further, when the hold is exhausted and the second fluctuation pattern is executed when the number of holds is "1", the reception period C and the reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the staging judgment (notice judgment). However, as a result of the production determination (notice determination), the reception period A, the reception period C, and the reception period D are generated at a rate of 50%.

Further, when the hold is exhausted and the third fluctuation pattern is executed when the number of hold is "1", the reception period B, the reception period C, and the reception period C are performed at a rate of 10% as a result of the staging judgment (notice judgment). The reception period D occurs, and as a result of the staging judgment (notice judgment), the reception period A, the reception period B, the reception period C, and the reception period D occur at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the "first fluctuation pattern" is a fluctuation pattern that does not form a reach state, and the "second fluctuation pattern" and the "third fluctuation pattern" are set as fluctuation patterns that form a reach state. ing. Therefore, when the "first variation pattern" is selected, the reception period D will occur in the manner described with reference to FIG. 189. On the other hand, when the "second fluctuation pattern" or the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected, the reception period D will occur in the manner described with reference to FIG. 188.

Further, the reception period A, the reception period B, and the reception period C have a predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) from the start of the symbol change regardless of the type of the change pattern and the number of holds. In contrast to the fact that each of them can occur when the lapse of time has passed, in the reception period D, the symbol variation changes depending on which of the first variation pattern, the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern is selected. The time (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) from the start to the occurrence is different.

That is, in this case, since it is possible to generate the reception period D by aiming at the timing that does not get in the way in relation to the production content for each type of fluctuation pattern, the reception period D can be set to any of all the fluctuation patterns. Can also be suitably generated.

In the above-mentioned production example, the reception period includes a plurality of reception periods A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Structure 2-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Structure 2-A"). We have prepared a reception period for. In this regard, in the reception period A, only one aspect (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 144 (a)) can be displayed as the image display (here, the integrated image display IG). In the reception period B, a plurality of modes (integrated image display IGa to IGd shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d)) are prepared as the image display, and among those modes, "directing" is prepared. "Aspects according to the result of the determination (notice determination)" are selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, in the reception period B, since the effect that cannot appear when the reception period A occurs is provided, the game until the operation (operation) by the player is detected. You will be able to improve your interests.

Regarding the "multiple modes of image display" that can be displayed in the reception period B, it is a hobby to make the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears different depending on which of the images is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the image. Further, any one of the "multiple modes of image display" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed in the reception period A. In this case, it is desirable that the "lowest expected aspect" of the "multiple aspects of image display" is the same as the "one aspect" that can be displayed in the reception period A.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Structure 2-A") is further provided, and the reception period A and the reception period D have only one mode as an image display. Is made displayable. Then, in the "reception period B" in which the image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, the image display is not hidden until the valid state is terminated. On the other hand, of the "reception period A" and "reception period B" in which the image display is displayed only in one mode, in the "reception period A", until the valid state (reception period) ends. In the meantime, the image display is not hidden, but in "Reception period B", until the valid state (reception period) ends (while the valid state continues). In the middle of the process, the image display that had been displayed up to that point was hidden (see FIG. 194 (e)). That is, in this case, even if the "reception period A" and the "reception period D" in which only one aspect is displayed as the image display, the effect of whether or not the image display is hidden in the middle of the display is effective. Will be provided, so that it becomes possible to suitably improve the game entertainment until the operation (movement) by the player is detected.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period D, the same display change (after reception) regardless of whether the reception is performed during the period in which the image display is displayed and the period in which the image display is hidden. (Display) is caused (the progress of the production shown in FIGS. 194 (b) → (c), FIG. 194 (e) → (c)). That is, in this case, even after the image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so that the effectability using the "reception period D" (reception period D) In creating (non-display of image display), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period D, the image display is hidden in the middle of the reception period D, and then the image display is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the reception period D has ended even though the reception period D has not ended, the misunderstanding is resolved by displaying the image display again thereafter. You will be able to make it.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the "reception period A" and the "reception period D" are standardized in that only one aspect can be displayed as a simulated image display, but they are accepted. The contents of the display changes that appear at the time are different from each other. This makes it possible to add fun to what kind of display change will appear when acceptance is made.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "reception period D", the operation means (here, the operation button 410) to be received is made to emit light during the period when the image display is displayed. This may encourage the player to move (operate). Further, in this case, even during the period in which the image display is hidden in the "reception period D", the operation means to be accepted is the same as during the period in which the image display is displayed (here). Then, the operation button 410) may be made to emit light. In this regard, in the "reception period C", if the operation means (here, the operation button 410) targeted for reception is not made to emit light, which type of reception period is occurring is determined. You will be able to suggest.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, as the reception period, reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "configuration 3-A") and reception period C (second of "configuration 3-A"). We have prepared multiple reception periods including (corresponding to the reception period). Then, in the reception period A or the reception period B, when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is displayed, and then the reception period A or the reception period B. The image display is not hidden until the end of the process, and the player can accept the motion while the image display is displayed (FIGS. 185, 186, FIG. (Refer to 191, FIG. 192, etc.) In the reception period C, the player can accept the operation (operation) while the image display is not displayed (see FIGS. 187, 193, etc.), as described above. The "acceptable reception sound" is audibly output when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, but is not audibly output when the reception period C occurs.

According to such a configuration, not only the "reception period A or reception period B" that is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output and the image display is displayed, but also the reception allowable sound is audible output. Since there is a "reception period C" in which the image is not displayed and the image is not displayed, there is a possibility that the post-reception display will occur at various timings not intended by the player. It becomes possible to raise awareness, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Structure 3-A") is further provided, and the reception period C occurs in the reception period C (FIG. 187 and 193). The image display is not displayed from the time to the end, and the player can accept the operation (operation) while the image display is not displayed, but the reception period D (FIG. 188, FIG. 189). , FIG. 194) shows a period in which the image display is hidden only for a part of the reception period D, a period in which the image display is displayed, and a period in which the image display is hidden. In either case, the movement (operation) by the player may be accepted. That is, in this case, the reception period D is the side as the reception periods A and B (acceptance while the image display is displayed) and the side as the reception period C (the image display is not displayed). Since it will have both of the above and the above, it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game. In addition, even after the image display is hidden, there is a possibility that the state in which the movement (operation) by the player is accepted continues, so the movement (operation) by the player is accepted. It is expected that the deterioration of the game interest when the image display is hidden without being displayed will be suppressed.

Further, the reception allowable sound is audibly output when the reception periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when the reception period C occurs and when the reception period D occurs. That is, in this case, in the reception period D, at the timing when the reception period D occurs, the side as the reception period A and B (the image display is displayed) and the side as the reception period C (the reception allowable sound are displayed). Since it will have both (not output) and, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period D, the same display change (after reception) regardless of whether the reception is performed during the period in which the image display is displayed and the period in which the image display is hidden. Display) was made to occur. That is, in this case, even after the image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so that the effectability using the "reception period D" (reception period D) In creating (non-display of image display), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the background image (FIGS. 191 and 192) appearing when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, and the background image appearing when the reception period C occurs (FIG. 191 and 192). It is different from FIG. 193). This makes it possible to give the impression that "the background image differs depending on the type of reception period".

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the background image is changed within the reception period D, and the image display is not displayed from the period during which the image display is displayed according to the timing at which the change occurs. Since the transition to the displayed period is made, it becomes possible to provide the staging as if the transition to a different reception period is performed within the reception period D.

Furthermore, within the reception period D, the background image that has changed once is restored, and the image display is displayed from the period when the image display is hidden according to the timing of the restoration. Since the transition to the displayed period is made, it becomes possible to provide the effect as if the reception period was returned to the reception period before the transition within the reception period D.

The background image changes within the reception period D when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period D without the movement (operation) by the player being accepted, and the predetermined time has elapsed rather than the predetermined time. When the movement (operation) by the player is received before, the background image does not change even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period D. As a result, it becomes possible to avoid changing to a different background image during the execution of the post-reception display according to the reception period D, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception periods A and B and the reception period D, the image display is hidden when the image is accepted while the image display is displayed. At that time, in the reception periods A and B, the "disappearing EF" as an image different from the image display is displayed in accordance with the hiding of the image display, but in the reception period D, the image display is displayed. When it is hidden, the "disappearing EF" as an image different from the image display is not displayed. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" has occurred if the "disappearing EF" does not appear when the reception is made, the reception period D is set to the reception period. While giving the aspects of A and B, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment interest because it is not possible to understand at all which reception period is occurring.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A or the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Structure 5-A") and the reception period D (the second of "Structure 5-A"). We have prepared multiple reception periods including (corresponding to the reception period). Then, in the reception period A or the reception period B, the number of determination information stored by the reserved storage means (the number of jackpot determinations in the pending state (reserved number)) is shown in FIG. 190 regardless of the numerical value. When the execution of the three fluctuation patterns (corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern of "Structure 5-A") is started, the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the third fluctuation pattern was started (in FIG. 190, the reception period A). In the case of, it is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of the reception period B, it can occur when the timing when 35 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation) has arrived. When the number of judgment information stored by the hold storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in the hold state (hold number)) is less than "2" (that is, "1"), this is digested and the hold number becomes "1". When the second variation pattern shown in FIG. 190 (corresponding to the second variation pattern of “Structure 5-A”) is started to be executed in the state of “0”, a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the second variation pattern was started. It can occur when the elapsed timing (in FIG. 190 (b), the timing 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) arrives, but the number of determination information stored by the hold storage means is "2" or more. When the execution of the second variation pattern is started at a certain time, it is prevented from occurring even when the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern is started (FIG. 190 (a)). reference).

According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be canceled and the number of holdings is exhausted as a result, a reception period (reception period D) of a type that has not occurred until then will occur, so that the game will be canceled. You can expect to be encouraged not to do it, or even if the game is stopped, you will be able to give an interesting impression to the game at the end.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the "number of determination information stored by the hold storage means (hold number)" is less than "2" (that is, "1"), this is digested and the hold number is "1". Even when the execution of the second fluctuation pattern is started in the state of "0", the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second fluctuation pattern was started (in FIG. 190 (b), 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation). When the "number of determination information stored by the hold storage means (hold number)" increases (when the hold number changes from "0" to "1" or more) when the elapsed timing) has not arrived. The reception period D may not occur when a predetermined time elapses from the start of execution of the second fluctuation pattern.

That is, even if the number of pending numbers is digested when the number of pending numbers is "1" and the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed in the state of "0", the symbol variation is within the execution period. If the number of holds is increased in, it indicates that the game is not being stopped. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even when the symbol fluctuation (second fluctuation pattern) is started to be executed while the number of holdings is "0", the number of holdings is increased within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. Therefore, the reception period D is not generated even if the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second fluctuation pattern is started (in FIG. 190 (b), the timing when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation) has arrived. Therefore, the reception period D can be made to function more appropriately as a "reception period of a type that can appear only when the game is about to be stopped".

In order to more preferably obtain such an action and effect, even when the reception period D occurs, "the number of determination information stored by the hold storage means (hold)" while the reception period D occurs. When the number) ”increases, it is more desirable to end the reception period D (end the state in which acceptance is permitted) at that time.

Furthermore, even in a situation where the reception is made within the reception period D and the post-reception display according to the reception is executed, the display time is "stored by the hold storage means" before the elapse. When the "number of determination information (reserved number)" increases, the post-acceptance display may be terminated (hidden) at that point.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period D, the first fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 190 is started to be executed, and the fluctuation starts at a predetermined time after the first fluctuation pattern is started to be executed (in FIG. 190 (b)). It also occurs when the timing (the timing when 10 seconds have passed since) has passed (provided that the number of holds is 0). and,
-The timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. 190 has started (in FIG. 190 (b), the timing when 30 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation) has arrived. If the reception period D occurs at that time, the specific BGM is made in an inaudible state before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D occurs while the inaudible state is maintained. (See Figure 188).
-The timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern that does not form a reach state) shown in FIG. 190 has started (in FIG. 190 (b), the timing when 10 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation) has arrived. If the reception period D occurs at that time, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output without making the specific BGM in an inaudible state, and the reception period D is generated within the generated reception period D. Make the specific BGM inaudible (see Figure 189)
It is supposed to have such a configuration.

According to such a configuration, when the reception period D occurs, it seems as if the reception period A (see FIG. 185), which occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, has occurred. Or, the reception period B (see FIG. 186), which occurs while the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or inaudible state, appears as if it occurred, so that the hobby of the game is improved. You will be able to plan. Further, the reception period D, which appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 185) has occurred, may appear as if it has changed to the reception period B within the reception period D. Therefore, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, after the first fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 190 is started to be executed, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and the specific BGM is audible. If the acceptance is made while the output is being performed, the audible output of the specific BGM will be terminated with the acceptance as an opportunity (see FIG. 189). However, the audible output of the specific BGM may not be terminated with the acceptance as an opportunity, and the audible output may be continued thereafter. For example, even in the case of FIG. 189 (e'), the timing tPy (previously) shown in FIG. The specific BGM may be put into a suppressed mode or an inaudible state based on the arrival of a predetermined timing). That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM is put into a suppressed mode or an inaudible state in the middle of the display period of the display D after reception, and it becomes possible to provide an interesting effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period corresponds to the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Structure 6-A") and the reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Structure 6-A"). ) Is available for multiple reception periods. The reception period A can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner regardless of the situation of the production (result of the big hit determination, the result of the production determination, etc.). Since the reception period B can be generated after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the inaudible state regardless of the situation of the production (result of the big hit judgment, the result of the production judgment, etc.). , The specific BGM can be used to provide staging related to the type of reception period even before the reception period occurs.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Structure 6-A") is further provided as the reception period, and the reception period D is the status of the production (result of the jackpot determination). Depending on the result of the effect determination, etc.), it may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, or it may occur after the specific BGM is set to the suppressed mode or the non-audible state. I did it.

More specifically, a predetermined time (10 seconds in FIG. 190 (b)) has elapsed from the start of execution of the symbol variation of the first variation pattern (see FIG. 190 (b) and the like) that does not form a reach state. When the reception period D sometimes occurs, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner (see FIG. 189). On the other hand, after the symbol variation of the second variation pattern or the third variation pattern (see FIG. 190 (b) and the like) forming the reach state is started to be executed, the second variation (in FIG. 190 (b), the second variation). If the reception period D occurs after 30 seconds in the case of the pattern and 50 seconds in the case of the third fluctuation pattern), the reception period D is performed after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the inaudible state. (See FIG. 188).

According to such a configuration, the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and the reception period occurs after the specific BGM is set to the suppressed mode or the non-audible state. In any case, since the reception period may be the "reception period D", the game entertainment until the movement (operation) by the player is accepted is suitably maintained. Will be expected.

Even in the reception period A, if an abnormal state occurs and the notification sound is output, the reception period may occur after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the inaudible state. obtain. However, the above-mentioned "reception period A can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner regardless of the situation of the production (result of the jackpot determination, the result of the production determination, etc.)". The meaning of "" means "when the reception period A occurs in a situation where the abnormality is not notified and the production is proceeding properly, the specific BGM is always audibly output in a non-suppressed manner." The reception period A will be generated. "

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period corresponds to the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Structure 7-A") and the reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Structure 7-A"). ) Is available for multiple reception periods. Then, in the reception period A, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the post-reception display A is displayed for the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ). During this period, the display is prioritized over the display A after reception (see FIG. 191 (c)). On the other hand, in the reception period D, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the post-reception display D of the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ) is displayed. While it is displayed, it is displayed or hidden in a manner that is difficult to see by the display D after reception (see FIG. 194 (c)).

The "mode that is difficult to see" here means that "at least a part of the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ) corresponds to the transmittance through the post-acceptance display D set to a predetermined transmittance. Only one of the modes that can be visually recognized, or a mode in which at least a part of the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ) is invisible by the post-reception display D that overlaps with the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ), or at least one of the staging symbols (decorative symbol SZ). It means "a mode in which the part is hidden".

According to such a configuration, the reception period can be set by confirming whether or not the visibility of the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ) is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the movement (operation) by the player. You will be able to recognize the type of. The "staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ)" is, for example, a symbol that forms a reach state as an effect in the effect display device 1600, and other effects such as whether or not to form a reach state. , Pseudo-continuous production, full rotation production, etc.

However, some players may be disgusted by the deterioration of the visibility of such a staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ) as the display D is displayed after reception. Has been confirmed. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, when the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is displayed, a reception period different from the reception period D occurs (for example, according to the reception within the reception period D). If the operation is accepted by the player within the different reception period, the post-reception display D is hidden (the process related to the display of the post-reception display D). This makes it easier to visually recognize the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ) (see the staging progress shown in FIG. 194 (c) → FIG. 194 (g)).

According to such a configuration, assuming that the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance within the acceptance period D is "the one that is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display", the predetermined time The player can hide the display D after reception at that point only by performing a predetermined operation until the lapse of time. The operation (operation) required of the player to display the display D after reception within the reception period D and the reception period different from the reception period D (reception period that occurs according to the reception within the reception period D). The actions (operations) required of the player to hide the display D after reception may be the same actions (operations) or different actions (operations). The above-mentioned "reception period different from the reception period D" is terminated when the display D is hidden after reception.

On the other hand, the post-reception display A also has a predetermined time from the start of display (it may be the same time as the predetermined time until the post-reception display D is hidden, or it may be a different time). Is hidden when the time has passed. However, the post-reception display A, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ), is hidden as an opportunity no matter what operation the player performs before the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable not to do so in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the player makes an erroneous operation against the intention of the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period B is further provided as the reception period, and in the reception period B, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception can be executed. , The staging symbol (decorative symbol SZ) is displayed or hidden in a manner that is difficult to see by the post-reception display B, at least while the post-reception display B is displayed. (See FIG. 192 (c)).

However, in the above-mentioned production example, "post-reception display B" and "post-reception display D" are common in that they affect the visibility of the production design (decorative design SZ). Instead, the display B after reception is "the one that is hidden when a predetermined time (which may be different from the time until the display D after reception is hidden) has elapsed from the start of display". If this is the case, the display B will not be hidden after the reception even if the player performs any operation until the predetermined time elapses. As a result, when the visibility of the effect symbol (decorative symbol SZ) is affected by the display after reception, it becomes possible to provide the effectability as to whether or not this can be improved.

It is desirable that the reception period B is set as the reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, and the reception period D is set as the reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period corresponds to the reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "Structure 8-A") and the reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Structure 8-A"). ) Is available for multiple reception periods. The reception period D can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode. Taking this as an opportunity, the specific BGM is made inaudible (see FIG. 189), and during the reception period B, the specific BGM that was audibly output in the non-suppressed mode becomes audible output or not audible output in the suppressed mode. After that, acceptance is permitted, and even if the acceptance is made, the specific BGM is maintained in an audible output state or a non-audible output state in a suppression mode (see FIG. 186).

According to such a configuration, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to "the state of being audibly output or not being audible output in the suppression mode" in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. You will be able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when acceptance is made in the reception period D, all the sounds that have been audibly output up to that point, including the production sound different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and in the reception period B. , When acceptance is made, all the sounds that were audibly output at that time (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) are made inaudible. That is, in this case, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which audible output is performed or is not audible output in a suppressed mode" in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, and when acceptance is made, audible output is performed at that time. It will be possible to have a common effect between the reception period D and the reception period B, such as making all the sounds inaudible, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment. ..

Further, as described above, in the reception period D, a situation occurs in which the specific BGM is made inaudible (in the middle of the valid period) and no sound is output while the player is allowed to accept the movement (operation). Although it is possible (see FIG. 188 (e)), the reception period is continued even in this situation (see FIG. 194 (e)). That is, in this case, in the reception period D, although the specific BGM is made inaudible when the reception is made, the reception is not made for a predetermined time after the reception period D occurs. Since the specific BGM will be made inaudible while the acceptance has not been made yet, it will be possible to make the player think that the acceptance period D has ended, and the player's interest. Will be able to attract strongly.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, the background image is changed according to the timing when the specific BGM is made inaudible while the acceptance has not been made yet, so that a reception period different from the reception period D occurs. It will provide a directing effect as if you were doing it.

When the specific BGM is made inaudible (see FIG. 189) in connection with the occurrence of the reception period D, "display change according to reception (display D after reception)" occurs accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible (see Fig. 189) while the acceptance has not been made yet, "display change according to acceptance (display D after acceptance)" should be generated accordingly. I tried not to. That is, in this case, the reception period D ends by confirming that "display change according to reception (display D after reception)" has not yet occurred when the specific BGM is made inaudible. You will be able to be aware of the possibility that you have not. Then, when the operation (operation) by the player is received after the specific BGM is made inaudible and before the reception period D ends, the display change (reception according to the reception) is triggered by this. Since the "rear display D)" will occur, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period B, a predetermined production sound (for example, a reception allowable sound) is audibly output until the timing tM3 at which the period ends arrives. When the staging sound is made inaudible, the player is not allowed to accept the movement (operation), so it is easy to determine whether the reception period B is continuing or not. You will be able to recognize it. In the above-mentioned production example, the reception period B is set as the reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, so that the automatic button function is enabled based on the arrival of the timing tM3. It has become.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period B occurs, for example, when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the third fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 190, and is a specific BGM. Is de-audible before a predetermined time elapses after the start of the third variation pattern, but for the reception period D, the specific BGM is de-audible after the start of the third variation pattern. It is desirable that it does not occur in the meantime. According to such a configuration, in the third fluctuation pattern, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, the reception period B is first generated, and after that, the specific BGM is made inaudible. Since it is possible to expect that the reception period D will occur further, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period D can be generated only when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, and the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 190, the second. In both the fluctuation pattern and the third fluctuation pattern, it is assumed that the occurrence can occur when the time specified for each has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation is started, but any fluctuation pattern can be other. It is desirable to set it so that it occurs after the reception period (reception periods A to C, etc.). That is, in this case, the reception period D having a special effect can be made to function as the reception period that occurred last for the player who is trying to stop the game, so that the game is not stopped. You will be able to expect to be encouraged, or even if the game is stopped, you will be able to give an interesting impression to the game at the end.

In the reception period D, the post-reception display D appears for a specific time when it is accepted, but it is desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted when the post-reception display D is hidden after the specific time has elapsed. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted unless the next symbol change is started.

Next, as a modification to the above-mentioned production example, an example in which the above configurations 1, 14 and 15 are embodied will be described in order.

That is, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period D, when the acceptance is made within the period in which the image display is displayed and when the reception is made within the period in which the image display is hidden. It was decided to generate the same display D after reception. However, instead of this, in the acceptance period D, when the acceptance is made within the period when the image display is displayed, and when the acceptance is made within the period when the image display is hidden. It is also possible to generate different post-reception displays.

That is, in this case, the reception period D is, more strictly speaking, the "reception period D1" which is the period in which the image display is displayed, and the "reception period D2" which is the period in which the image display is hidden. It is composed of two types of reception periods such as, and when acceptance is made while in reception period D1, the corresponding post-acceptance display D1 is displayed, and when acceptance is made while in reception period D2, it corresponds to this. The display D2 will be displayed after the reception.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example in which the reception period D shown in FIG. 194 and the like is modified as described above.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect shown in FIG. 195 will be described, but the same configuration as that of the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. 194 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the reception period D (reception period D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 195 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and 194, and the same applies to another example. It is possible to apply.

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 195, first, the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 195 (b)), and when the reception is made during the reception period D1, the display after the reception corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 195 (c)).

On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 195 (b)), when a predetermined time elapses without being accepted (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives). , The image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 195 (e)). The point that the player is allowed to accept the movement (operation) even under such a situation (the situation where the image display is hidden) is the case of the production example shown in FIG. 194 and the like. It is the same. However, in this modification, when the image display is hidden (see FIG. 195 (e)), the above "reception period D1" ends and a different "reception period D2" occurs. It is designed to do.

That is, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted in the "reception period D2" in which the image display is hidden, the post-reception display D2 corresponding to the "reception period D2" is displayed. (See FIG. 195 (h)). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to actually provide the staging that the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise. It will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game through sexual production.

Moreover, in the reception periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the image display (integrated image display IG) changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the image display (integrated image display IG) changes to the non-display state, an atmosphere that suddenly changes with another reception period is created more preferably. Will be done.

In particular, in this example, as in the case of the staging example shown in FIG. 194, the "background image HG4b" in which a desert different from the "background image HG3" is drawn from the "background image HG4a" in which mountains and rivers are drawn. (Fig. 195 (b) → Fig. 195 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the image display (integrated image display IG) changes to the non-display state, the atmosphere is suddenly replaced with the reception period C that may occur in the background of the desert. It will be expected to be produced favorably.

Further, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example is different from the "group notice" of the "post-reception display C" shown in FIG. 193 (c), but it uses a ghost character. It is a content that can be reminiscent of "post-reception display C", such as being common to all of the above, and this also makes it more suitable for an atmosphere that suddenly replaces the reception period C that can occur in the background of the desert. It will be expected to be produced.

Further, in this example, when the reception is made within the reception period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" displayed during the reception period D1. , The post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. As a result, the post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more accurately, the reception period D1 occurs) instead of the post-reception display having nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, the post-reception display according to the reception period C). It can be suggested that it is the reception period (display after reception according to the reception period D2) that occurs when a predetermined time elapses (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives). It will be like.

When a predetermined time elapses without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted after the reception period D2 occurs (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives), FIG. 195 (f). ), The reception period D1 occurs again, and the image display (integrated image display IG) is returned to the displayed state. At this time, the background image is also changed so as to return from the “background image HG4b” to the “background image HG4a” (FIG. 195 (e) → FIG. 195 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 from the other reception period will be more preferably created.

When acceptance is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 195 (f)) that has occurred again in this way, the acceptance period D1 is the same as when acceptance is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 195 (b)) that first occurred. The post-reception display D1 corresponding to the above will be displayed (see FIG. 195 (c)).

Needless to say, such reception period D (reception period D1 and D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 195, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Structure 15-A") includes a period in which the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed and a period in which the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed. There is a period in which the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden, but these periods are to function as "reception period D1" and "reception period D2", and these "reception period D1". And, it was decided to cause different display changes depending on which of the "reception period D2" was accepted. That is, in this case, the display change (acceptance is made within the reception period D2) that cannot be confirmed unless the state is such that the possibility that the reception period D has ended (the state in which the image display is hidden) is reached. Since the display change) will be prepared, the tension will be suitably maintained through such directing.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period D includes "a period in which the image display is displayed" and "a period in which the image display is hidden". However, instead of this, in the reception period D, "the period in which the character information related to the acceptance is displayed" and "the character information related to the acceptance is not displayed" are hidden. There may be a "period that has been done".

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example in which the reception period D shown in FIG. 194 and the like is modified as described above.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect shown in FIG. 196 will be described, but the same configuration as that of the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. 194 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the reception period D shown in FIG. 196 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and 194, and can be similarly applied to another example. ..

However, in the reception period D (see FIG. 196 (b)) shown in FIG. 196, first, as in the case of the reception period B (see FIG. 192 (b)), although the contents are different, acceptance is permitted. Textual information related to what you are doing (here, "press") is displayed.

That is, as described above, the character information related to the acceptance is not allowed to be displayed during the acceptance period A (see FIG. 191 (b)), which has a relatively low expectation. It is displayed during the reception period B (see FIG. 192 (b)), which has a relatively high expectation. Therefore, by displaying such character information (here, "please press") in the reception period D, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

However, in the reception period D according to this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (b), (e), and (f), the state in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) is continued. In the meantime, the character information related to the acceptance (here, "press") can be changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189), and the character information can be changed. May be changed from the non-display state to the display state (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189). Of course, even when the character information (here, "press") is hidden, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) will be accepted. The display D will be performed after the reception based on the reception (see the example of following the production route such as FIG. 196 (e) → FIG. 196 (c)).

In this example, if the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the reception period D, the character information (here, "press") related to the acceptance is hidden. Was it accepted before (Fig. 196 (b) → Fig. 196 (c)), or was accepted when the text information (here, "press") was hidden. (Fig. 196 (e)-> Fig. 196 (c)), or was the character information (here, "press") returned to the displayed state and then accepted (Fig. 196 (f)-> Fig. Regardless of 196 (c)), the same aspect (FIG. 196 (c)) is made to appear as "post-reception display D".

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 196 (e), although the reception period D has occurred, the character information related to the acceptance is not displayed in the reception period A. (See FIG. 191 (b)), it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere as if it was suddenly replaced, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment through such a surprise-like production. On the other hand, even if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted under the situation (character information is not displayed) that seems to have been suddenly replaced with the reception period A, the reception period D is supported. Since the same mode (FIG. 196 (c)) is displayed as the “post-reception display D”, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Moreover, in the reception period D according to this example, when the character information related to the acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the text information related to the acceptance is changed to the hidden state, it is possible to more preferably create an atmosphere that suddenly replaces another acceptance period. It will be expected.

In particular, in this example, the "background image HG4a" in which mountains and rivers are drawn is changed to the "background image HG4c" in which mountains different from the "background image HG1" are drawn (FIG. 196 (Fig. 196). b) → FIG. 196 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the text information related to the acceptance is changed to the hidden state, the atmosphere is suddenly replaced with the reception period A which may occur in the background of the mountain. It will be expected to produce more favorably.

In this example, when the character information related to the acceptance is returned from the hidden state to the displayed state, the background image is also returned from the "background image HG4c" to the "background image HG4a". (Fig. 196 (e) → Fig. 196 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D from the other reception period (particularly, the reception period A) will be more preferably created.

Needless to say, such a reception period D is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 196, first, as the reception period, the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “Structure 1-A”) and the reception period D (the second reception of “Structure 1-A”) We have prepared multiple reception periods including (corresponding to the period). Then, in both the case where the reception period B occurs and the case where the reception period D occurs, the character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the character information is received. Character information that is different from each other ("press" in the reception period B and "press" in the reception period D) even though the same operation (pressing operation on the operation button 410) as the operation by the player in the period B and the reception period D is targeted for reception. "Please press") is displayed.

That is, although the reception period B and the reception period D require the player to perform the same operation (operation mode), the display change (post-reception display B, D) that occurs as a result of the detection of the operation is required. ) Are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), the character information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period is displayed in the reception period. Since it is designed to be different from each other according to the type (type of display after reception), it is recognized which type of display change (display B, D after reception) may occur as the display after reception. It becomes possible to perform operations (movements by the player) with, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the reception period B is requested, and the same character information and image display as in the case of the reception period B are displayed, but when the reception is made, the reception is different from the case of the reception period B. A further reception period may be prepared to generate a post-display. That is, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is executed as the display after reception only by looking at the character information or the image display, so that the tension at the time of operation is suitable. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned modification, in the reception period B, the character information is not hidden until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) is terminated. In the reception period D, the character information can be hidden in the middle of the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state). That is, in this case, in the reception period D, the player is required to perform any operation (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively early after the period occurs. Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the information is displayed, and eventually it becomes difficult to recognize the type as the reception period, the situation where the text information is displayed makes me feel nervous. It will be expected to suitably avoid such things as disappearing altogether.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification, in the reception period D, the period in which the character information is displayed (see FIG. 196 (b)) and the period in which the character information is hidden (see FIG. 196 (e)). ), But the same display change (see FIG. 196 (c)) is made to occur regardless of which of these periods the acceptance is made. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation is performed properly as long as it is confirmed what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. It is possible, and it is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest will be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification, in the reception period D, the character information is hidden in the middle of the reception period D, and then the character information is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the "reception period D" suddenly changes to the "reception period A" in which the character information is not displayed, the misunderstanding is subsequently displayed by displaying the character information again. It will be possible to eliminate it.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification, the background image is changed within the reception period D, and the character information is not displayed from the period in which the character information is displayed according to the timing at which the change occurs. I am trying to shift to the period to be displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to give a suitable impression as if the reception period D has shifted to a different reception period.

In the production example described with reference to FIG. 196, when the acceptance is made within the period in which the character information related to the acceptance is permitted in the acceptance period D, and the acceptance is permitted. It was decided to generate the same post-acceptance display D as when the acceptance was made within the period in which the text information related to the presence was hidden. However, instead of this, in the acceptance period D, when the acceptance was made within the period in which the character information related to the acceptance is displayed, and related to the acceptance being allowed. It is also possible to generate a post-acceptance display different from that when the acceptance is made within the period in which the text information is hidden.

That is, in this case, the reception period D is more strictly related to the "reception period D1", which is the period in which the character information related to the acceptance is permitted, and the acceptance period D1. It is composed of two types of reception periods such as "reception period D2", which is the period during which the displayed character information is hidden, and when reception is made while the reception period D1 is in effect, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed. When the reception is made while the reception period D2 is in effect, the post-reception display D2 corresponding to the display will be displayed.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example in which the reception period D shown in FIG. 196 and the like is modified as described above.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect shown in FIG. 197 will be described, but the same configuration as that of the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 188 to 190, FIG. 194, and FIG. 196, which is a modification thereof, is not particularly mentioned. That is, the reception period D (reception period D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 197 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 196, and can be similarly applied to another example. ..

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 197, first, the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 197 (b)), and when the reception is made during the reception period D1, the display after the reception corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 197 (c)).

On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 197 (b)), when a predetermined time elapses without being accepted (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives). , The textual information related to the acceptance being allowed (here, "press") is hidden (see Figure 197 (e)). Regarding the point that the player is allowed to accept the movement (operation) even under such a situation (the situation where the character information related to the acceptance is hidden) is shown in FIG. 196. It is the same as the case of the production example shown in the above. However, in this modification, when the character information related to the acceptance is hidden (see FIG. 197 (e)), the above-mentioned "acceptance period D1" ends. Is designed to generate a different "reception period D2".

That is, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted in the "reception period D2" in which the character information related to the acceptance is allowed is hidden, after the reception according to the "reception period D2". Display D2 will be displayed (see FIG. 197 (h)). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to actually provide the staging that the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise. It will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game through sexual production.

Moreover, in the reception periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the character information related to the acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the acceptance is changed to the hidden state, the character information is suddenly replaced with the reception period A in which the character information is hidden. It is expected that the atmosphere will be created more favorably.

In particular, in this example, as in the case of the staging example shown in FIG. 196, the "background image HG4c" in which mountains different from the "background image HG1" are drawn from the "background image HG4a" in which mountains and rivers are drawn. (Fig. 197 (b) → Fig. 197 (e)). With such a configuration, when the text information (here, "press") changes to the hidden state, the atmosphere is suddenly replaced with the reception period A that may occur in the background of the mountain. It will be expected to produce favorably.

Further, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example is different from the "conversation notice" of the "post-reception display A" shown in FIG. 191 (c), but the princess character is used. It is a content that can be reminiscent of "post-reception display A", such as being common to all of the above, and it is more preferable to have an atmosphere that suddenly replaces the reception period A, in which the text information is hidden. Will be expected to be produced.

Further, in this example, when the reception is made within the reception period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" displayed during the reception period D1. , The post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. As a result, the post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more accurately, the reception period D1 occurs) instead of the post-reception display having nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, the post-reception display according to the reception period C). It can be suggested that it is the reception period (display after reception according to the reception period D2) that occurs when a predetermined time elapses (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives). It will be like.

When a predetermined time elapses without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted after the reception period D2 occurs (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives), FIG. 197 (f). ), The reception period D1 occurs again, and the state is returned to the state in which "character information related to the acceptance is permitted" is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed so as to return from the “background image HG4c” to the “background image HG4a” (FIG. 197 (e) → FIG. 197 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 from the other reception period will be more preferably created.

When acceptance is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 197 (f)) that has occurred again in this way, the acceptance period D1 is the same as when acceptance is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 197 (b)) that first occurred. The post-reception display D1 corresponding to the above will be displayed (see FIG. 197 (c)).

Needless to say, such reception period D (reception period D1 and D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 197, "character information related to the acceptance is permitted" is displayed in the reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Structure 14-A"). There is a period and a period in which "text information related to acceptance is permitted" is hidden, but these periods will function as "reception period D1" and "reception period D2". It was decided to cause different display changes depending on which of the "reception period D1" and "reception period D2" was accepted. That is, in this case, when the "text information related to the acceptance is permitted" is hidden, the acceptance period is not terminated, but the acceptance period different from the acceptance period that has occurred until then is set. Since it will occur, it will be possible to suitably maintain the directing performance even when the movement (operation) by the player is not easily accepted.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, it was decided to start displaying the "post-reception display" when the image display is being displayed, but the "post-reception display" is the same. It is not always necessary to start the display when the image display is displayed, and the display may be started after the image display is hidden.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the image display is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception period occurs, but when the timing at which the reception period occurs occurs. Alternatively, it may be displayed after that.

Further, also in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the image display will be displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the image display is not terminated and continues even though the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" has appeared since it was accepted.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" is not only for displaying the image, but also for the gauge image suggesting the remaining time until the reception period ends. I decided to make this difficult to see. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after it is accepted, it is possible to suppress the appearance as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, in the reception period D, even if the reception is performed within the period, the display process related to the image display (character information in the modified example) is terminated. I tried not to let you. That is, by giving priority to the display D after reception for the image display (character information in the modified example) that is kept in the display state on the layer, the image display (character information in the modified example) is displayed. Is hidden (invisible). However, even when the reception is made during the reception period D, the display processing related to the image display (character information in the modified example) may be terminated with this as an opportunity.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, it was decided to display an image display (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation receiving portion to be operated during the reception period. The image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized by replacing it with, for example, an arrow notation that prompts an operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 189, if the reception is performed while the specific BGM is unsuppressed and audibly output within the reception period D, is the specific BGM audible output in the suppression mode with the acceptance as a trigger? , Or in an inaudible state, but the specific BGM may be inaudible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not it has been accepted. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the display will be inaudible during the execution period of the display after reception, and it is expected that the effectability will be improved.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are displayed before each reception period occurs, but the reception period is It may be displayed according to the timing of occurrence. Further, depending on the type of the reception period, it may be displayed before the reception period occurs, or may be displayed according to the timing when the reception period occurs. In short, as long as each background image is displayed and can be accepted, the above-mentioned action and effect related to the background image can be achieved.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the reception period C is assumed to occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state. , The specific BGM may be generated when it is output in a non-suppressed manner.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the reception period D includes a period during which the image display (in the modified example, text information related to the acceptance of acceptance) is displayed. The period to be hidden is included, but these periods include the player's operation (operation) after confirming that the image display (or text information) is hidden. Even if you start the game, it is set as a sufficient time for the reception to be done in the hidden state, and after confirming that the image display (or text information) has been returned to the display state, the game is played. Even if a person starts an operation (operation), it is set as a sufficient time for acceptance while in the display state, and it has technical significance excluding the display method by so-called "blinking display". It is clear that it has.

For example, in the reception period D, the time for maintaining the "hidden state" after the image display (or text information) is set to the "hidden state" is set as the reception period A or the reception period B. It is desirable to set the time value as half or more (1.5 seconds or more) of the set time (for example, 3 seconds). Further, after the image display (or text information) is returned to the display state, the time for maintaining the display state is also half of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as the reception period A or the reception period B. It is desirable to set it as the time value of the above (1.5 seconds or more), and the reception period is also the time from when the image display (or text information) is displayed until it is hidden. It is desirable to set the time value as half or more (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as A or the reception period B.

Alternatively, the time from when the image display (or text information) is displayed until it is hidden, or after the image display (or text information) is set to "hidden", the "non-display" is performed. The time to maintain the "display state" and the time to maintain the display state after the image display (or text information) is returned to the display state are the shortest time for the symbol change (required for shortened change). It may be set as a time value of time) or more. This is because such a time value is set as a time value that is sufficient for the player to confirm the symbol change, but can end the symbol change at an early stage.

Next, an example embodying the above configurations 4, 9 to 13 will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is a staging content (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice, etc. as a post-reception effect) that is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted. A plurality of reception periods (reception effects) with different types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of a judgment (big hit judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned reception period A (reception effect A) to reception period D (reception effect D), a reception period E is further prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effect). It is supposed to be.

The characteristics of the reception period E will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 184 may be prepared as a reception period different from the reception period E (reception effect E), or may be prepared as a reception period E (reception effect). It may be realized as E).

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a reception period E (acceptance effect E) occurs.

Now, suppose that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction) is performed, and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, "variation pattern E" is selected. In the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern E is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (the effect description according to the variation pattern E, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 198 (a)”). Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected "variation pattern E" itself. In the production example shown in FIG. 198 (a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 194 (a) is displayed.

Here, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the timing at which the predetermined time E has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived in the peripheral control MPU1511a. When this is done (when the condition E is satisfied), the above-mentioned reception period E (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the display E after reception" is permitted is generated ("the situation shown in FIG. 198 (e)").

In this regard, when the reception period E occurs, a precursory display corresponding to the reception period E is performed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the character KI of "Kunoichi" is introduced. The character KI then throws a smoke ball to produce smoke, as shown in FIG. 198 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (d), a state in which the character KI speaks a line such as "press a button to call that person" is displayed. At this time, the appearance of the expansion of "smoke" is depicted or the "image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "image display" are difficult to see by preferentially displaying the character KI and dialogue. Has been made. Then, when the reception period E occurs after such a precursor display (FIGS. 198 (b) to (d)) is performed, the character KI and the dialogue are hidden, thereby clearly displaying the "image display". Will be done.

In this example, "character KI" and "smoke" are preferentially displayed on the background image HG4a and the decorative image SZ. Further, the "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), whereby the background image may be changed from the "background image HG4a" to the "smoke". That is, in this case, the "smoke" functions as the "background image" of the change destination. The "smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the reception period E (it does not have to be displayed as a precursor display).

Here, as shown in FIG. 198 (e), in the reception period E according to this example, as the image display, the "integrated image display IG" with the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are imitated. The "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special image TM" that imitates the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed, respectively. In this example, a plurality of "integrated image display IG", "sword decorative image SYG", and "special image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one. ..

That is, in this case, in the reception period E, the player is prompted to operate the "operation button 410", the "sword decoration body 5001", and the "special operation means 1410". As a result, the player determines which of the "operation button 410", the "sword decoration body 5001", and the "special operation means 1410" should be operated.

In this regard, if the operation for the "operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 198 (f), the acceptance sound such as "ping pong" is made based on the acceptance. E1 is audibly output, and the display change (display E1 after reception) that "image suggesting that the integrated image display IG is correct" and "samurai character" are displayed, and "the cityscape is depicted" The background changes to the "background image HG5" and the like occur. After the "post-reception display E1" is displayed in this way, the production will be advanced while the "background image HG5" is displayed.

On the other hand, when the operation for the "special operating means 1410" is performed within the reception period E, as shown in FIG. 198 (g), no reception sound is generated and no reception sound is generated. The display change of the above is not caused, and the reception period E is not terminated (the same as the state where no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). That is, in the reception period E, the "special image TM" that imitates the "special operation means 1410" is displayed even though the "special operation means 1410" is not set as the acceptance target. .. According to such a configuration, in the reception period E, the image display (integrated image display IG, sword decorative image SYG) that imitates the operation means set as the object of acceptance in the reception period E and the said. Since the image display (special image TM) that imitates the operation means that is not set as the target of acceptance in the reception period E will be mixed, it is difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated. It will be possible to give an operation opportunity in the presence of. Regarding the "special operation means 1410" when it is within the reception period E, the operation is accepted for the "special operation means 1410", but no reception sound is generated as a trigger. Moreover, no display change is caused, and the reception period E is not terminated (the same as in a state where no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). good.

On the other hand, when the operation for the "sword decoration body 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 198 (i), the acceptance sound E2 such as "boo" is emitted based on the acceptance. Along with the audible output, there is a display change (display E2 after reception) in which the character KI speaks a line such as "I'm going to repartition!". At this time, the background image does not change.

That is, after the "post-reception display E2" is displayed, the production does not progress, but the set time (remaining time) as the reception period E is reset, which causes the remaining time as the reception period E. Is returned to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs (it can also be said that the reception period E reoccurs). According to such a configuration, even if the operation for displaying the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) is not performed and as a result the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) cannot be displayed, the remaining time Since the "reception period E" can be redone from the initial state where the game is not digested, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

It should be noted that the condition for returning to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs is not "the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted once" but "the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is a predetermined number of times". It may be "to be accepted only for the minute".

By the way, it goes without saying that if the operation for the "special operating means 1410" is performed within the reception period E, the remaining time as the reception period E is not reset.

Then, as a result of the operation on the "sword decoration body 5001" within the reception period E, the remaining time as the reception period E is returned to the state immediately after the occurrence of the reception period E (reception period E reoccurs). ), The same as described above, depending on whether the operation for the "operation button 410", the operation for the "sword decoration body 5001", or the operation for the "special operation means 1410" is accepted within the reception period E. A phenomenon will occur (Fig. 198 (f), (g), (i)).

However, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the set time (remaining time) is not reset, the mode and the set time displayed as the post-acceptance display D according to the acceptance. When the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the (remaining time) is reset, the mode displayed as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance is different from each other (after acceptance). Display D1, D2, etc.) may be used. According to such a configuration, a staging value is generated for displaying the display D after reception without resetting, so that a feeling of tension when the reception period E is generated is preferable. Will be able to be maintained.

On the other hand, the "example of progressing from FIG. 198 (e) or FIG. 198 (g) to FIG. 198 (h)" is the "operation on the operation button 410" and "operation on the sword decoration body 5001" within the reception period E. It is assumed that none of them was accepted.

That is, in this case, after the reception period E occurs, all the remaining time is consumed without the operation (operation) by the player being received, and the reception period E ends. In this respect, the reception period E is set as "the reception period for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled". Therefore, in the reception period E, even if neither the "operation for the operation button 410" nor the "operation for the sword decoration body 5001" is accepted and all the remaining time is exhausted, FIG. 198 (h). As shown in the above, the same post-reception display E as when there is an operation (operation) by the player within the reception period E is generated.

However, if neither "operation for the operation button 410" nor "operation for the sword decoration body 5001" is accepted within the reception period E, "operation for the operation button 410" is accepted within the reception period E. Although the same post-reception display E is generated during the reception period E, the same reception sound E (ping pong) as when the "operation for the operation button 410" is received is no longer audibly output. There is.

According to such a configuration, the result of successful selective operation by the player while displaying the same post-reception display E as when the "operation for the operation button 410" was received within the reception period E. Since it will be possible to suggest that "Display E after reception" is not displayed, it is expected to encourage more aggressive operations when the reception period E occurs again. Become so.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the reception period E, it is difficult to recognize how much time is left as the reception period E, or the display E1 is displayed after the reception. Therefore, processing is performed to give a hint as to which operation mode (operation type) is required.

FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (d) are enlarged views of a part of the display screen shown in FIG. 198 (e), and show the display contents with the passage of time while the reception period E is continued. It is a figure which shows the change.

As described above, in the reception period E, the "integrated image display IG" imitating the operation button 410, the "sword decoration image SYG" imitating the sword decoration body 5001, and the special operation means ("PUSH" in the figure). The "special image TM" that imitates the described button) 1410 is displayed respectively.

That is, in the reception period E, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used for suggesting the remaining time is one of the plurality of types of image display even though the display of the plurality of types of images is displayed. It will be associated only with one (integrated image display IG). This makes it possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated image display IG" among the plurality of types of image display is in a state to be operated.

Further, as time elapses in the reception period E, the "integrated image display IG" is "movement when operated by the player" as shown in FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (d). The part of the operation button 410 that imitates the "operation receiving part" (button imitation image BMG) is dynamically displayed. This dynamic display is the same as the content described above in FIGS. 145 and 146, and is also the same when the “integrated image display IG” is displayed in the staging examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 197.

However, in this production example, the "sword decorative image SYG" and the "special image TM" among the multiple types of image displays are the part of the sword decorative body 5001 in which the "operation receiving part" is imitated, or a special one. The portion of the operating means 1410 that imitates the "operation receiving portion" is not dynamically displayed, but is still displayed. For the "sword decorative image SYG" and the "special image TM", the light emission mode such as blinking light may be changed.

According to such a configuration, of the multiple types of image display, only the "integrated image display IG" expresses the "movement when the player receives an operation". It becomes possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated image display IG" among the types of image display is in a state to be operated.

Further, as described above, in the reception period E, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used for suggesting the remaining time is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, such a gauge image GG usually performs a depiction in which the display area is gradually reduced as the time from the occurrence of the reception period elapses. , This is used to suggest how much time is left for the reception period. The method of using the gauge image GG is the same even when the "gauge image GG (here, the integrated image display IG)" is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 197. be.

However, in the reception period E, as shown in FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, "the time has elapsed since the reception period occurred. In particular, "depictions that gradually reduce the display area" are not performed. That is, in the reception period E according to this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner maintained at the maximum value from the occurrence of the period to the end. There is. According to such a configuration, in the reception period E, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left as the reception period E, and it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. It will be expected.

In particular, in the reception period E according to this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time as the reception period E by performing an operation on the special operation means 1410, but even if such a process is performed, it is possible to reset the remaining time. Since the depiction that increases the display area of the gauge image GG is not performed, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize that the remaining time as the reception period E has been reset and the tension will be maintained favorably. Will be done.

The "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" shown in FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (d) is repeated until the reception period E ends. Therefore, if the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the reception period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" is terminated with the acceptance as a trigger. However, when the operation for the special operation means 1410 is performed within the reception period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" is not terminated with this as an opportunity. Further, even if the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted within the reception period E, the process of causing the display D2 after the reception is performed, but the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" is terminated. There is no need to make it or start over from the beginning, only the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" that has been performed up to that point is continued.

According to the above-mentioned production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Structure 4-A") and the reception period E (the second reception period of "Structure 4-A") are set. We have multiple reception periods including. Then, in the reception period A (FIG. 185 and 191), when the operation (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display A is displayed and the reception sound A is output, but within the period. When the operation (operation) by the player is not detected, the display A after reception is not displayed and the reception sound A is not output. In the reception period E (FIG. 198), the period is concerned. When the movement (operation) by the player is detected in the inside, the display E1 after reception is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output, and even if the movement (operation) by the player is not detected within the period, the period. The same post-reception display E1 as when the player's action (operation) is detected is displayed, but the reception sound E1 is not output.

According to such a configuration, when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the reception period E, a staging demerit can occur. Therefore, a feeling of tension when the reception period E occurs. Can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of "Structure 4-A") is further provided, and in the reception period B (FIG. 186, FIG. 192), the game is played within the period. When an operation (operation) by a person is detected, the display B after reception is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even if the operation by the player is not detected within the period, the operation by the player is performed within the period. The same post-reception display B as when (operation) was detected is displayed and the reception sound B is output. That is, in this case, when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (change after acceptance) as when the acceptance is made is generated so as to cause a staging demerit. Since there are cases (reception period E) and cases where it is generated so as not to cause a staging demerit (reception period B), while maintaining a favorable feeling of tension when the reception period occurs, It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game when the player fails to accept the movement (operation) within the period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period A (FIG. 191), the character information related to the acceptance is not displayed, and the reception period B (FIG. 192) and the reception period E (FIG. 198). ) Displays textual information related to the acceptance. In this respect, the character information displayed in the reception period B and the character information displayed in the reception period E are made different from each other. According to such a configuration, first, when the reception period occurs, the reception of the target for which the automatic button function is enabled by confirming the existence of "character information related to the acceptance is allowed". It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a period. In addition, when "character information related to acceptance is allowed" is displayed when the reception period occurs, by checking the type of the character information, it can be regarded as the reception period that has occurred. It will be possible to recognize the type of.

Further, in the reception period B, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is enabled, as described above (see FIG. 186 (j)). In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E (FIG. 198), when the automatic button function is enabled (when the process progresses from FIG. 198 (e) to (h), etc.), the “disappearing effect” is obtained. (Disappearance-related display) ”should not appear. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the type as the reception period depending on whether or not the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is enabled. ..

In the reception period E (FIG. 198), even when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted and the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden as a trigger, " It is also possible to prevent the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" from appearing.

As described above, in the reception period B, the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144). On the other hand, in the reception period A and the reception period E, it is desirable that the image display is displayed in only one mode.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the background image is not changed based on the acceptance of the operation by the player in the reception period A (see FIG. 191), and the player in the reception periods B and E. The background image is changed based on the acceptance of the operation by. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the automatic button function is enabled and the display after reception is displayed, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

However, in the reception period E, even if the movement (operation) by the player is accepted, if this is due to the operation on the "sword decoration body 5001", the post-reception display E2 is displayed. The background image is not changed to a different background image. According to such a configuration, the player confirms that the background image that should be originally changed has not been changed while displaying the post-reception display E2 according to the reception. It becomes possible to recognize that the period E has not been completed yet.

In the reception period E, a plurality of objects (operation buttons 410 and sword decoration body 5001 are included, but special operation means 1410 may also be included) as objects (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player). Is set, and the action (operation) of the player with respect to the operation button 410 among the plurality of objects is different from the case where the action (operation) of the player with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted. The reception sound is output. This makes it possible to preferably suggest that different effectability occurs depending on which of the plurality of objects is operated.

In the reception period B, the case where the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output and the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A are based on the result of the production judgment (big hit judgment). There may be a case where a different "reception sound B" is audibly output.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, a plurality of options (here, the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001 or the special operation means 1410 are operated) for the player. Is presented), and different displays (post-reception displays E1 and E2) appear as post-reception displays depending on which of these options is selected by the action (operation) by the player. If none of the above-mentioned plurality of options is selected within the period (here, if none of the actions (operations) by the player is detected), a specific option among the above-mentioned plurality of options is displayed as a post-acceptance display. Is selected (here, when the operation button 410 is operated), the display (post-reception display E1) is displayed.

According to such a configuration, if no operation is performed within the reception period E, only the same post-reception display is always displayed. Therefore, the player should perform a selective operation within the reception period E. Will be able to be encouraged.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as the operation means, the operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving portion) of the “configuration 9-A”) and the sword decoration body 5001 (“configuration 9-A”). A plurality of operation means including the second operation means (corresponding to the second operation receiving unit) are prepared, and the reception period includes a plurality of reception periods E (corresponding to the specific reception period of "Structure 9-A"). We have prepared a reception period for each type. Then, in the reception period E, both the acceptance of the operation for the operation button 410 and the acceptance of the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 are permitted as the acceptance for causing the display change corresponding to the reception period E. When the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, the post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) is displayed. Since it is possible to generate a display change (post-reception display E2) different from the post-reception display E1 (specific display change) without generating it, it is interesting to decide which operation means to operate. Will be able to.

Further, in the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the reception period E is terminated, but when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated, the reception period E is not terminated. I tried to extend the remaining time on the contrary. More specifically, in the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the remaining time as the reception period E1 is not consumed. That is, in this case, as the reception period E using a plurality of operation means, it becomes possible to give an unprecedented effect, so that various interesting effects can be produced on the premise of such effect. Will be able to provide.

However, in the reception period E according to the above-mentioned production example, the remaining time as the reception period E can be extended only by operating the sword decoration body 5001, so that the tension is suitably maintained. There is a concern that it cannot be done. Therefore, it is decided to further provide a reception period F different from the reception period E, and in the reception period F as well, the "integrated image display IG" and the sword decoration 5001 that imitate the operation button 410. The "sword decoration image SYG" imitating the above and the "special image TM" imitating the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed respectively. Then, even when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period F, as in the case of the above-mentioned acceptance period E (see FIG. 198), the acceptance is made.
-When the operation for the "operation button 410" is accepted, the reception sound F1 is audibly output and the post-reception display F1 is displayed based on the acceptance.
-When an operation is performed on the "special operating means 1410", no reception sound is generated, no display change is generated, and the reception period E is terminated. Make sure there is no reaction (same as no reaction and no operation)
-When the operation for the "sword decoration body 5001" is accepted, the reception sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and the display change (display after reception) different from the above-mentioned post-reception display F1. Perform processing such as displaying F2). On top of this, in the reception period F, even if the operation for the "sword decoration body 5001" is accepted, the remaining time as the reception period F is not reset (not extended), and the reception period F is not extended. You may continue to digest the remaining time as it is. That is, in this case, if the operation for the "sword decoration body 5001" is accepted within the reception period F, the post-reception display F2 is displayed, but the reception period F is terminated or the reception period F is used. The remaining time is not reset, and the reception period F is continued after that (of course, the reception of the operation for the operation button 410 is also allowed).

According to such a configuration, the player is presented with the options of "whether to operate the operation button 410", "whether to operate the sword decoration body 5001", and "whether to operate the special operation means 1410". Even if the reception period occurs, when the operation for the "sword decoration body 5001" is accepted, the remaining time for the reception period will not necessarily be reset (extended), so a feeling of tension is preferable. Will be expected to be maintained.

Further, it is desirable that the reception period F is set as the target for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated, as in the reception period E. Then, even when the automatic button function is enabled for the reception period F, when the operation button 410 is received within the reception period F, as in the case where the automatic button function is enabled for the reception period E. It is desirable to display the "post-reception display F1" that appears in. However, at this time, when the automatic button function is enabled for the reception period F, the reception sound F1 should be audibly output, unlike the case of the reception period E (the reception sound E1 is not audibly output). Is more desirable.

With such a configuration, when the reception period ends without any acceptance, it is possible to suggest whether the reception period was the reception period E or the reception period F. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

In this case, even in the reception period F, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed as the image display of the operation button 410, and the gauge image GG included in the integrated image display IG is displayed. It is desirable that the display area does not decrease over time.

Further, also in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, a plurality of gauge images (predetermined images) GG used for suggesting the remaining time are displayed even though a plurality of types of image displays are displayed. It is desirable that the image is associated with only one of the types of image display (integrated image display IG).

Further, also in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, as the time elapses in the reception period F, the “integrated image display IG” is shown in FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (d). In addition, the part (button image BMG) of the operation button 410 that imitates the "operation receiving part" is dynamically displayed as if "movement when receiving an operation by the player" is performed. In the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special image TM", the part of the sword decoration body 5001 that imitates the "operation receiving part" and the part of the special operating means 1410 that imitates the "operation receiving part" are dynamic. It is desirable that it is not displayed and is displayed still.

In the reception period E and the reception period F, it is not always necessary to display the image display (special image TM) that imitates the special operation means 1410, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the special operation means 1410 itself. You may not have it.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period includes "reception period A or reception period B or reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of" configuration 10-A ")" and "reception period E (" configuration 10- ". A plurality of reception periods including "A" (corresponding to the second reception period) "are prepared. Then, in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), a specific image display (here, an integrated image display IG) is displayed as a model display of the operation receiving unit, and in the reception period E, Multiple image displays (here, integrated image display IG, sword decorative image SYG, special image TM) are displayed as image displays that imitate the operation receiving unit, and the image display is performed by the player's operation. It is made feasible as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, when the image display is executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the operation by the player" (for example, the reception period A, B, E) and the case where it is not executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the operation by the player" (for example, the reception period E). That is, in this case, not only when it is easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed even when the image display is displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed. Since it may be difficult to recognize the above, it is expected that the tension until the operation by the player is accepted is preferably maintained.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation receiving units including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are prepared, and in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), the sword decoration body 5001 is imitated. The image display (sword decoration image SYG) is not performed, and the image display (integrated image display IG) is performed by imitating the operation button 410. At this time, the image display by imitating the operation button 410 is operated by the player. The operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display that describes the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

On the other hand, in the reception period E, at least both the image display of the operation button 410 (integrated image display IG) and the image display of the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) are displayed. , One of the integrated image display IG and the sword decorative image SYG (here, the integrated image display IG) describes the movement when the operation receiving portion of the one is moved by the operation by the player. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, in the other of the integrated image display IG and the sword decorative image SYG (here, the sword decorative image SYG), the operation receiving portion of the other is movable by the operation by the player. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when the image is displayed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or not as a dynamic display, so that various effects can be achieved. It will be possible to realize it, and it is expected that the game will be improved.

Moreover, in the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. When this is accepted, the first display change (post-reception display E1) can occur, and it corresponds to the image display (here, sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. When an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation is received, the second display change (display E2 after reception) can be generated. That is, in this case, regardless of whether or not the dynamic display is performed, the post-acceptance display according to the type of the accepted side will appear. It will be possible to give the display a "meaning for staging". For example, even when an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where the dynamic display is not performed. , It will be possible to give a surprise to the display change triggered by this.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation receiving units including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), the special operation means 1410 is imitated. The image display (special image TM) is not performed, and the image display (integrated image display IG) is performed by imitating the operation button 410. At this time, the image display by imitating the operation button 410 is operated by the player. The operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display that describes the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

On the other hand, in the reception period E, at least both the image display (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 and the image display (special image TM) that imitates the special operation means 1410 are displayed. , One of the integrated image display IG and the special image TM (here, the integrated image display IG) describes the movement when the operation receiving portion of the one is moved by the operation by the player. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, in the other of the integrated image display IG and the special image TM (here, the special image TM), the operation receiving portion of the other is movable by the operation by the player. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when the image is displayed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or not as a dynamic display, so that various effects can be achieved. It will be possible to realize it, and it is expected that the game will be improved.

Moreover, in the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. When this happens, the first display change (display E1 after reception) can be triggered by this, and the operation receiving unit (here, the special image TM) corresponding to the image display on the side where the dynamic display is not performed (here, the special image TM). Here, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410), no display change (display after reception) is caused. That is, in this case, even if the image display (here, the special image TM) is displayed within the reception period, it is not always accepted when the corresponding operation receiving unit (special operating means 1410) is operated. Therefore, it is expected that the tension during the reception period will be maintained.

In this case, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D) in which the special image TM is not displayed, the display change (display after reception) triggered by the operation is performed. It will not occur. However, in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D) in which the special image TM is not displayed, a display change (display after reception) occurs when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410. You may let it. According to such a configuration, the effectiveness of the operation cannot be determined only by the presence / absence of the display of the image display, and the tension can be suitably maintained.

In the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special image TM are displayed as still images. However, for the sword decoration image SYG and the special image TM, the operation receiving unit (in the case of the sword decoration image SYG, the sword decoration body 5001 and in the case of the special image TM, the special operation means 1410) is operated by the player. Any movement that is not executed as a dynamic display that describes the movement when it is made movable, for example, a movement (rotation, etc.) different from the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the operation by the player. For example, it may be executed as a dynamic display.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of operation means (plural operation receiving units) including an operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation receiving unit) of “Structure 11-A”) are prepared. The reception period includes reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Structure 11-A") and reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of "Structure 11-A"). We have multiple reception periods. Then, in the reception period A (or reception period B), an image display (button image BMG) that imitates the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button image BMG are displayed. , "Remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time at which the operation button 41 is allowed to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG with the passage of time" is performed.

On the other hand, in the reception period E, the button image BMG (integrated image display IG) is performed by imitating the operation button 410, but the operation is performed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG according to the passage of time. This is not performed for the "remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time that the operation can be accepted for the button 41".

According to such a configuration, even if the button image BMG (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed, "the operation is performed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG with the passage of time. Since the "remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time that the operation can be accepted for the button 41" is not necessarily performed, the tension when the reception period occurs can be suitably maintained. become.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, a button image BMG (integrated image display IG) in which the operation button 410 is imitated and an operation means (sword decoration body 5001) different from this are imitated. Even though the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the remaining time display (the above-mentioned remaining time specific display) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed. ing. That is, in this case, in the reception period E, although both the acceptance of the operation for the operation button 410 and the acceptance of the operation for the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) different from this are permitted, the above-mentioned ". The "remaining time specific display" will not be performed. As a result, when the acceptance period E occurs without the player being distracted by the fact that both the acceptance of the operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 are permitted. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

Even in a situation where the remaining time display (the above-mentioned remaining time specific display) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed, the remaining time as the reception period E is not performed. Needless to say, it is decreasing.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, the button-shaped image BMG that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that forms the display area of the gauge image GG. It is supposed to be. However, the gauge image GG is designed so that the display area is not reduced with the passage of time and the display area is maintained. That is, in this case, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at all, the remaining time as the reception period E is reduced, so that a large display area of the gauge image GG is left. It will be expected to maintain a favorable feeling of tension when in. The gauge image GG does not reduce the display area until the remaining time as the reception period E becomes "0" and this is hidden.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, only the button-shaped image BMG is left out of the button-shaped image BMG with the operation button 410 and the sword-decorated image SYG with the sword-decorated body 5001. It is displayed as an image integrated with a specific image (gauge image GG) used for time display. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the gauge image GG also corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and by extension, whether or not the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled). Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension.

In this case, even in the reception period F described above, of the button image BMG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001, only the button image BMG is displayed as the remaining time. It is desirable to display it as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used.

Further, the reception period G related to the display G after reception can be generated, and in the reception period G, the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed, and the button imitation image BMG imitating the operation button 410 is integrated as described above. Image display Display as IG. However, in the reception period G, unlike the reception period A and the reception period B, the gauge image GG in the integrated image display IG does not reduce the display area with the passage of time and maintains the display area. Make it displayed in the form. According to such a configuration, even if there is a reception period in which only the button image BMG (integrated image display IG) is displayed as the image display, the gauge image GG does not necessarily display the display area. Since it does not decrease, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the reception period is occurring.

In the above-mentioned production example, in the reception periods E, F, and G, the integrated image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as the image display of the operation button 410, and then the gauge is displayed. By not reducing the display area of the image GG, it is difficult to recognize the remaining time as the reception periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, in the reception period E, F, G, unlike the case of the reception period A or the reception period B (integrated image display IG), the image display of the operation button 410 is displayed as "gauge". By displaying as "an image that does not include the image GG", the remaining time may not be displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge image GG is not displayed at any position in the display area during the reception periods E, F, and G.

When the image display obtained by imitating the operation button 410 is displayed as an "image not including the gauge image GG", the "image not including the gauge image GG" is the button image included in the integrated image display IG. It is desirable that the image be displayed as an image containing at least "image BMG". That is, in this case, when the button image BMG is displayed, there are both a case where it is displayed as an image integrated with the gauge image GG and a case where it is displayed as an image not integrated with the gauge image GG. , It becomes possible to maintain a feeling of tension when the reception period occurs.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, at least the following operation means are prepared as the operation means.
The handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of "Structure 12-A") that is displaced by being operated by the player, and the handle portion 5012 provided on the periphery thereof are not displaced even if the handle portion 5012 is operated. A sword decorative body 5001 having a sheath portion 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration portion of "Structure 12-A") (corresponding to the first operating means of "Structure 12-A") (see FIG. 124 and the like), and. An operation button 410 (corresponding to the second operation receiving portion of "Structure 12-A") that is displaced by being operated by a player, and a frame provided on the periphery thereof that is not displaced even if the operation button 410 is operated. A staging operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operating means of “Structure 12-A”) having a unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decoration portion of “Structure 12-A”) (see FIG. 44 and the like).

Then, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG that imitates the sword decoration body 5001, the handle part reprint image (corresponding to the first receiving part reprint image of "Structure 12-A") that imitates the handle portion 5012 and the handle portion. It is possible to display a pattern peripheral peripheral decoration image (corresponding to the first peripheral decorative image of "Structure 12-A") that decorates the peripheral edge of the image (see FIG. 199, etc.), and the effect operation unit 400 is imitated. When displaying an image display (here, an integrated image display IG), a button image BMG (corresponding to the image of the second receiving part of "Structure 12-A") and the button image of the operation button 410 are displayed. It is possible to display the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image BMG (see FIG. 199 and the like), and the pattern portion peripheral decoration image and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as different images from each other.

According to such a configuration, since the peripheral decorative images are different from each other, even if the appearance of the operating means itself is similar, the case of displaying the sword decorative image SYG and the integrated image display IG can be used. It will be possible to make the appearance of each other greatly different depending on the case of display, and it is expected that it will be easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the pattern peripheral peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG does not include a portion that imitates a non-existent decorative portion in the pachinko machine 1, and the sheath portion 5020 is imitated as an image display. Although it is displayed, the peripheral decorative image SSG in the integrated image display IG is displayed as an image including at least a portion of the decorative portion that does not exist in the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this case, when the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed, it becomes possible to preferably recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 is in a situation where an operation opportunity is given. On the other hand, when the "integrated image display IG" is displayed, a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the staging operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is provided as a situation with higher staging. Will be able to. In this case, the "directing operation unit 400" is provided as a member having an operation receiving portion (operation button 410) larger than that of the "sword decoration body 5001", and the decoration portion that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. Even if the peripheral decoration image SSG including at least the portion that is imitated is displayed, it is desirable not to make it difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated.

In this way, in order to provide the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a “situation with higher effect”, the peripheral decoration image SSG is the pachinko machine. It is desirable that the machine 1 be displayed as an image of a fictitious decorative part that does not exist. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the staging operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is in a situation where an operation opportunity is given, a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG is a portion of the frame unit 415. May be included.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the remaining time is displayed only on the peripheral decoration image SSG among the peripheral decorative image of the handle portion in the sword decorative image SYG and the peripheral decorative image SSG in the integrated image display IG. As described above, the display area of is formed into a section, and the remaining time can be displayed using the display area.

The "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an image display in which the handle image of the handle 5012 and the pattern peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the handle image are integrated. The "integrated image display IG" is displayed as an integrated image display of the button image BMG that imitates the operation button 410 and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button image BMG. .. In this respect, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not separately include the "handle part image" and the "handle part peripheral decoration image" as the image data, but as one image data in which they are integrated. It is to be prepared. Similarly, the image data of the "integrated image display IG" does not have the "button image BMG" and the "peripheral decorative image SSG" separately, and is prepared as one integrated image data. It is supposed to be done.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, as the operation receiving unit, the operation button 410 of the effect operating unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation receiving unit of "Structure 13-A") and the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 ("" A plurality of operation receiving parts including the second operation receiving part of "Structure 13-A") and the operation receiving part of the special operating means 1410 (corresponding to the third operation receiving part of "Structure 13-A") are prepared. As the reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including the reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period of "Structure 13-A") are prepared. Then, in the reception period E (FIG. 198), the "integrated image display IG (inner button image BMG)" that imitates the operation button 410 and the "sword decorative image SYG (inner handle) that imitates the handle 5012". When both the "peripheral decorative image)" and the "special image TM" that imitates the operation receiving part of the special operating means 1410 are displayed and the operation is accepted for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation receiving parts. Of the "integrated image display IG", "sword decorative image SYG", and "special image TM", the "sword decorative image SYG" and "special image TM" that imitate the operation receiving part that has not been accepted. Is at least hidden (see Figure 198).

According to the above configuration, an image display (sword decoration image) in which an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410) different from the operation button 410 to which the operation is received is imitated. Since the SYG, special image TM) will be hidden, the operation receiving part (handle part 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001, special operation) where the image display is displayed but the operation is not accepted. The operation receiving portion of the means 1410) can be easily recognized as to whether or not further operation is required.

Further, in the reception period E, the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, and the special operation are displayed even though the "integrated image display IG", the "sword decoration image SYG", and the "special image TM" are displayed. Of the means 1410, the special operating means 1410 prevents the acceptance of the operation (acceptance regarding the display after reception) from being enabled (not allowed). That is, as described above, in the reception period E, when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the first display change (display E1 after reception) is generated, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, the second display is displayed. Although a change (display E2 after reception) is generated, the operation is not accepted by the special operating means 1410, and the display change triggered by the operation does not occur. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability and tension until the operation by the player is accepted in the reception period E.

Further, in the reception period E, when the operation is accepted for the sword decoration body 5001, the second display change (display E2 after reception) is generated, and the acceptance triggers the "integrated image display IG" and "sword". Neither the "decorative image SYG" nor the "special image TM" is hidden, and the display state thereof is continued (FIG. 198 (i)). With such a configuration, it is possible to generate a display change that is significantly different from the case where the operation is accepted for the operation button 410, and it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

In particular, in the reception period E, when the operation is accepted for the sword decoration body 5001, the remaining time of the reception period E is increased by this as an opportunity (FIG. 198 (i) → (FIG. 198). Progress to e)), in order to realize the directing performance that requires further operation, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the shortage of the remaining time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, when the operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the first display change (post-reception display E1) is generated, but the first display change (post-reception display) is generated. In the state where E1) is generated, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed, and both the "sword decorative image SYG" and the "special image TM" are hidden (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). f)). As a result, it is recognized that the post-acceptance display E1 is generated due to the acceptance of the operation for the operation button 410 even after the operation is accepted while the plurality of images are displayed. You will be able to.

At this time, since the "integrated image display IG" is displayed at a position different from the position displayed within the reception period E (FIG. 198 (f)), the reception period E ends. You will be able to suggest that you are in a state of being.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the remaining time is exhausted in the reception period E, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled and the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period E. The same display screen as is displayed (see FIG. 198 (h)). In this case as well, in the state where the first display change (display E1 after reception) is occurring, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decorative image SYG" and the "special image TM" are displayed. Since all of them are hidden, it becomes possible to recognize that the display is E1 after reception corresponding to the operation button 410.

In the reception period D shown in FIG. 196, when the character information (press) is hidden, the display state of the image display is maintained (FIG. 196 (e)), but the image display is performed. Also, the character information may be hidden at the timing when the character information is hidden. In this case, when the character information (press) is returned to the display state again, the image display is also returned to the display state (FIG. 196 (f)).

[Operation reception production with a characteristic image display status]
As illustrated and described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (notice effect, etc.) is selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect of the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. The transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes feasible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol staging based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production (directing after reception).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a reception period in which the movement (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted, and the movement (operation) by the player is received within the reception period. And, the display change (post-reception effect) according to the type of the reception period that occurred is caused.

In addition, during the reception period, it is possible to display an action target display that suggests which is the "target of action by the player". Such an operation target display can be displayed, for example, as a simulated image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "movement target display" according to this production example is displayed as a "reproduction image display" that imitates a movement target by a player and has a plurality of modes having different expectations.

Further, during the reception period, it is possible to display the remaining time display suggesting the remaining time that the player is allowed to accept the movement (operation). Such a remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. In particular, in this production example, as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects (for example, the rate of decrease in the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are used. It is prepared and is to be executed in one of those modes.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. The low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) does not include the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It may be included or included, but it is desirable to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate) (although it is not always necessary).

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is the acceptance of display changes on the staging display device 1600 as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is only executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect operation by the movable decorative body, etc. are generated, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) is this. The performance of the game itself is poor, and there is concern that the game entertainment will decline in relation to the reception period.

The "operation (operation) by the player" to be detected, including the above-mentioned examples and the later-described examples, is a player such as "operation button 410" or "sword decoration body 5001". It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pushing motion or sword pulling motion) by the touch sensor, "contact motion by the player to a specific part" that is the detection target by the touch sensor, and "inside the specific space" that is the detection target by the non-contact sensor. It means that the movement by the player in the above is also included. In short, it suffices to have one or a plurality of receiving means (operating means) for receiving actions by the player (pressing action, sword pulling action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special effects regarding the state of the image display when, for example, an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player. I have to. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have all of these configurations, and for example, even if only one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, the hobby of the game is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of water, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary for obtaining further effects, or it can be applied to another configuration ( The configuration described as (preferably applied) may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest related to the reception period.

[Structure 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the motion target display (for example, the image display having a plurality of modes imitating the motion target by the player and having different expectations) is not displayed. It was decided to prepare a plurality of reception periods, including a specific reception period in which "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective operation" is allowed. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 1-B is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good. However, in such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize from which timing the reception validity judgment is permitted, and further, it is difficult to recognize whether the reception validity judgment is already permitted. It can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to directing. "

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a specific reception period occurs, the reception acceptance sound suggesting that the reception validity judgment is permitted or the reception validity judgment is permitted. Is enabled to be output, so that the motion target display (for example, an image display that imitates the motion target by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed. Although there are still situations in which it is not possible to fully recognize which action the player is targeting, in situations where the player is required to perform some action (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given). It becomes possible to recognize that there is something, and it is expected that many players will enjoy the production.

The reception allowable sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may occur before the specific reception period and end before the specific reception period, or may occur before the specific reception period. It may be output so as to straddle the above, or it may occur after the occurrence timing of the specific reception period and end within the specific reception period. As for the reception allowable sound, it may be realized as a sound in which some operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is always given (or given) to the player when this is output. Further, the "state in which the operation target display (image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and the "operation target display (image display)" is displayed in other configurations as well. It suffices if it is invisible on the screen. For example, it means that the image is displayed on the layer but is not visible due to the priority display of the image on the other layer.

Further, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound output when a specific reception period occurs is a sound that is output (as a reception allowable sound) even when another reception period occurs. For example, if the reception permissible sound is output even when the reception period in which the same operation opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific reception period occurs occurs, the operation target display (for example, the image display) is displayed. Even if it is not done, it becomes possible to preferably suggest which movement opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (given) to the player. Further, for example, if the reception allowable sound is output even when a reception period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) different from the specific reception period is given occurs, the operation target display (for example, an image display) is displayed. ) Is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which operation opportunity (operation opportunity) will be granted, but some operation opportunity (operation opportunity) will be granted (given). You will be able to suggest that you are in a state.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-B" is adopted, the operation target display (for example, the image display) is first hidden (not displayed) when the specific reception period occurs. Make the state appear. Then, after that, while the specific reception period is continued, the second display state in which the operation target display (for example, the image display) is displayed may appear. That is, in this case, during the specific reception period, it initially occurs as a so-called "hidden button", and only players who are sensitive to such directing can enjoy it. However, the operation target display (for example, the image display) must be displayed while the specific reception period is continued (the stage before the set time (effective time) is exhausted). Therefore, many players will be able to notice this (specific reception period) and enjoy the production even if they are not sensitive to the production. In addition, through such color rendering, it is expected to develop the ability to detect that so-called "hidden buttons" are occurring.

At this time, in the second display state, it is desirable that the operation target display can be displayed with any of a plurality of different expectations. That is, if the player side may accept the operation in the second display state even though the operation is not accepted in the first display state, the operation target display (for example, the image display) is displayed. Until then, the fact that it was not possible to recognize that the specific reception period had occurred was revealed to the surroundings, and there is concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the fact that it was revealed that it was insensitive to such production. In this regard, in the second display state, if the operation target display is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectations, the player side can accept the operation even if the operation is accepted in the second display state. I noticed that the operation reception was allowed from the time when it was in the display state, but I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the operation target display (for example, image display), so in the first display state It will be possible to make it look like "I didn't accept the operation," and it is expected that the decline in the game interest will be suppressed.

In addition, due to the nature of the so-called "hidden button", the player must accurately recognize from which timing a specific reception period in which the "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective operation" is allowed occurs. It is difficult. And in this case, if the operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the specific reception period, it is a mistake to think that the specific reception period has occurred because the "reception validity judgment" is not made. There is a concern that the player may misidentify it, and that the specific reception period will end without the player performing any action (operation). Therefore, when the "configuration 1-B" is adopted, even if there is an operation (operation) by the player before the specific reception period, the operation (operation) is "reception valid determination" at that time. However, it is said that the "reception validity judgment" (based on) is targeted at the actions (operations) performed by the player after the specific reception period has started and before the specific reception period. It is desirable to be able to do. According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) is performed shortly before the occurrence of the specific reception period, it can be accepted after the specific reception period occurs. As a result, it will be possible to execute the post-reception production triggered by this. However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not the operation (operation) by the player has been performed is whether or not there is a reception period in which the "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is an effective operation" is allowed. Regardless, it will be required to execute.

At this time, for the operation (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the operation (operation) is displayed in the first display instead of the second display state after the occurrence of the specific reception period. It is desirable to be able to accept (reception validity judgment) as a valid judgment in the state. According to such a configuration, it is the timing when a little time has passed since the operation (operation) by the player is performed (for example, the timing when the first display state (specific reception period) occurs), and the operation target display. (For example, the reception valid judgment is made while (for example, the image display) is not displayed, and the effect is started to be executed after the reception. As a result, the operation by the player is properly accepted instead of the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no operation (operation) even though the operation target display (for example, the image display) is displayed. It will be possible to suggest that it is in the game, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

[Structure 2-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, the operation target display (here, imitating the target of the operation by the player) regardless of the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the operation by the player is the effective operation" is performed. Make sure that the image display having multiple modes with different expectations is displayed, and in the second reception period, the operation target display (here, the operation target display is performed regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination is made). It is made sure that the image display) that imitates the target of the movement by the player and has a plurality of modes having different expectations is not displayed. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods with completely different effects, it becomes possible to give the player a sharp feeling when requesting an action (giving an operation opportunity) to the player. It is expected that the hobby of the game will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-B" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, the operation (operation) by the player is regarded as an effective operation (effective operation). Depending on the timing at which the reception validity determination is made, the operation target display (image display) may be displayed or the operation target display (image display) may not be displayed. The "third reception period" related to the configuration 2-B is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different reception period, and the reception period is different from those reception periods. May mean.

According to such a configuration, it seems as if a "first reception period" has occurred in which the operation target display (image display) is always displayed regardless of the timing at which the reception validity judgment is made. Or, it becomes possible to make it appear as if a "second reception period" has occurred in which the operation target display (image display) is not always displayed regardless of when the reception validity judgment is made. Through the staging that gives such uncertainty, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the reception period occurs.

[Structure 3-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the first reception period, the first is one of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the reception validity determination. 1 It is possible to perform the effect after reception, and if the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made. It is possible to perform the second post-reception effect in any of a plurality of different modes. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 3-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the reception validity determination is made in both the case where the "reception validity judgment" is made within the first reception period and the case where the "reception validity judgment" is made within the second reception period. At least one of the display target areas (specific areas) of the operation target display (here, the image display having a plurality of modes imitating the operation target by the player and having different expectations) based on the fact that Since the disappearance EF effect can be executed using the unit, it is easy to recognize that the reception validity judgment has been made properly (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). You will be able to.

The disappearing EF effect is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the operation target display (image display), but at that time, the operation target display (image display) is displayed. It does not necessarily have to be displayed. Further, the extinction EF effect means, for example, a meaning including the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and in this case, at least a part of the specific area in which the operation target display (image display) is displayed. An effect using an effect body located in a position where the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including the image, or at least a part of a specific area in which the operation target display (image display) is displayed in front view is executed. In addition to the mode, the operation target display (image display) itself is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, the display is made smaller, blurred, or the transparency setting is changed). It may be an embodiment.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-B" is adopted, at what timing is the reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is an effective action (effective operation) is made in the first reception period? Depending on the case, the operation target display (image display) may be displayed, or the operation target display (image display) may not be displayed.

In this case, first, when the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where the operation target display (image display) is displayed, the specific area in which the operation target display (image display) is displayed is triggered by this. The disappearance EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the above. On the other hand, even if the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where the operation target display (image display) is not displayed, the disappearance EF effect is performed under the above-mentioned situation (operation target display). It is desirable to execute in the same manner as when the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made even in a situation where the operation target display (image display) is not displayed. .. If the reception valid judgment is made in the situation where the operation target display (image display) is not displayed, the first reception period ends without displaying the operation target display, and the disappearance EF effect is produced. Will be executed using at least a part of the area where the operation target display was to be displayed.

At this time, in the second reception period, the operation target display (image display) is always displayed regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination that the movement (operation) by the player is an effective operation (effective operation) is made. It is desirable to display it. By preparing such a "second reception period in which the operation target display (image display) is always displayed" separately from the first reception period described above, the extinction EF effect is executed. Combined with this, it becomes possible to provide a sense of security and directing, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the entertainment interest.

[Structure 4-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, the operation target display (here, the operation by the player) is usually performed. It is possible to display a pachinko image display that imitates the target of the above and has multiple modes with different expectations) using at least a specific area, and the operation by the player is effective while the pachinko image display is displayed. When the "reception validity determination" is made, it is possible to hide the operation target display (image display) based on the reception validity determination. In addition, if the "reception valid judgment" is made while the operation target display (image display) is displayed within the reception period, the operation target display (image display) is hidden before the operation target display (image display) is hidden. It is possible to execute the extinction EF effect using at least a part of the specific area.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period as the reception period. Then, during the specific reception period, the game is performed in a state where the motion target display (here, the image display having a plurality of modes that imitates the motion target by the player and has different expectations) is not displayed. It is possible to perform a "reception validity determination" in which an action by a person is an effective operation, and when the reception validity determination is made, the extinction EF effect is not executed. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 4-B is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different reception period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" is properly performed (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player). It is expected that the tension as the specific reception period, which secretly asks the player for the movement (gives an operation opportunity secretly), will be maintained even after the reception validity judgment is made. Become.

Even when the disappearing EF effect is displayed, the operation target display (image display) may not necessarily be displayed at that time. Further, the extinction EF effect means, for example, a meaning including the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and in this case, at least a part of the specific area in which the operation target display (image display) is displayed. An effect using an effect body located in a position where the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including the image, or at least a part of a specific area in which the operation target display (image display) is displayed in front view is executed. In addition to the mode, the operation target display (image display) itself is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, the display is made smaller, blurred, or the transparency setting is changed). It may be an embodiment.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-B" is adopted, the above "specific reception period" may be set as the first reception period. Then, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period are prepared, and the operation target display (image) is prepared in both the first reception period and the second reception period. It may be possible to make a reception valid determination that the action performed by the player is an effective action in the state where the image display) is not displayed. Then, in the first reception period, when the reception validity determination is made so that the operation performed by the player in the state where the operation target display (image display) is not displayed is the effective operation, the extinction EF effect is executed. However, in the second reception period, even if the above-mentioned extinction EF effect is executed when the reception validity determination is made so that the operation performed by the player in the state where the operation target display is not displayed is an effective operation. good. In this case, the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period are performed until the movement is performed by the player in the state where the operation target display (image display) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize which one has occurred, but after the reception validity judgment was made with this as an effective operation, which of the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period occurred? Since it becomes possible to recognize, it becomes possible to encourage the player to move.

[Structure 5-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 5-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

Then, when the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the first reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the motion target display (here, the image display having a plurality of modes imitating the motion target by the player and having different expectations) is displayed without being hidden. In some cases, if the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the second reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period). ) Is started to be executed, the motion target display (here, the image display that imitates the motion target by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is displayed without being hidden. I try not to be in.

According to such a configuration, after the post-receipt effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed, the operation target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the operation target by the player and have different expectations). The display of the image is visible, and the display of the motion target (here, the display of the image that imitates the target of the motion by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is visible. Since there are cases where the image is not displayed, it is expected that the tension after the start of the post-reception production will be maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 5-B", within the first reception period, "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective movement" is performed depending on the timing. When the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the operation target display (image display) is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable that the operation target display (image display) may be hidden.

That is, from the player's point of view, when the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation" out of the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination". It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-reception production) is started in order to improve the game entertainment. However, when the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" among multiple modes, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" starts to be executed. If this is displayed even after it is displayed, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (post-reception staging corresponding to the first reception period), the image display is "first mode with low expectation" and "low expectation first" within the valid period (first reception period). Regardless of which of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that the mode is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (furthermore, there is a possibility that the mode is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation). Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone, but at this time. , If the image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the game entertainment will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the image display. It can be said that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the image is reproduced in the "second aspect with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to appropriately suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-acceptance production being executed in a mode with low expectations, so hide the image display. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without doing so.

Or, even if the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", some players may "execute the post-reception effect in the" low expectation mode ". As an excuse, there may be some people who want to keep the display state of the image display in a continuous state at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception. Even when the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations", some players are "irritated" when the post-reception production is executed in the "low expectations mode". It seems that there are some people who want to make the image display invisible at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display the image through the timing when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It will be possible to substantially select whether to start the post-reception effect while it is displayed, or to start the post-reception effect when the image display is hidden and invisible. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

[Structure 6-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 6-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

Then, when the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the first reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time, and is expected as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image. (Those with multiple modes with different degrees) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and within the second reception period, "reception validity judgment that the movement by the player is an effective movement" is made. If so, the remaining time display (for example, the display of the gauge image displayed in the frame image) is displayed at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. It is a depiction that the area is reduced with the passage of time, and as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared) are in a state of being displayed without being hidden. I try not to have a case.

According to such a configuration, after the post-receipt effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. A case where a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) and a remaining time display (for example, in the frame image). It is a depiction that reduces the display area of the displayed gauge image with the passage of time, and as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared) cannot be visually recognized. Since there will be cases, it is expected that the tension after the production is started after the reception is preferably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 6-B", within the first reception period, "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective movement" is performed depending on the timing. At the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable to have some cases and some cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden.

That is, from the player's point of view, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (first) based on the "reception validity determination". It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-reception production corresponding to the reception period) is started in order to improve the game entertainment. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity judgment" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period). If this is displayed even after the execution of the production) is started, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (post-reception staging corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is "the first mode with low expectation" and "the first mode" within the valid period (first reception period). Regardless of which of the "second mode with low expectation" is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectation (furthermore, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with low expectation). It has become. Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone, but at this time. , If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", it is clear that the game entertainment is adversely affected. Therefore, the frame image and the gauge image are displayed. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the frame image is in the "second mode with high expectation". And if at least one of the gauge images continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-acceptance staging performed in a mode with low expectation. And it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", some players may perform the post-reception effect in the "low expectation mode". As an "excuse" when the situation is closed, a person who wants to keep the frame image and the gauge image in a state where the display state is not hidden and the display state is continued at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation", some players may have a "low expectation mode" for the post-reception effect. In order to suppress "irritability" when it is executed in "", the frame image and gauge image are hidden and invisible at the time when the effect is started after reception. There seems to be someone.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can see the frame image and the gauge through the timing when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It is possible to substantially select whether to start the post-reception effect while the image is displayed, or to start the post-reception effect when the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

[Structure 7-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the first reception period, the first is one of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the reception validity determination. 1 It is possible to perform the effect after reception, and if the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made. It is possible to perform the second post-reception effect in any of a plurality of different modes. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" starts to be executed. At that time, the motion target display (here, the image display having a plurality of modes imitating the motion target by the player and having different expectations) may not be displayed and may be hidden. be. On the other hand, when the "reception validity judgment" is made within the second reception period, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" is started. , The motion target display (here, the image display that imitates the motion target by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and may not be hidden. There is.

According to such a configuration, the operation target display (image display) is visible after the post-acceptance effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, and the operation target display (image display). ) May not be visible, so it is expected that the tension after the start of the post-acceptance production will be maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 7-B" is adopted, the case where "the reception validity determination is made so that the movement by the player is an effective movement" is made before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. Is displayed because the operation target display (image display) is hidden at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. However, if "the reception valid judgment is made that the action by the player is the valid action" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period has arrived, the action target display (image display) is displayed. It is desirable that the production is started after the reception.

That is, from the player's point of view, when the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation" out of the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination". It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-reception production) is started in order to improve the game entertainment. However, when the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" among multiple modes, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" starts to be executed. If this is displayed even after it is displayed, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (post-reception staging corresponding to the first reception period), the image display is "first mode with low expectation" and "low expectation first" within the valid period (first reception period). Regardless of which of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that the mode is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (furthermore, there is a possibility that the mode is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation). Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone, but at this time. , If the image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the game entertainment will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the image display. It can be said that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the image is reproduced in the "second aspect with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to appropriately suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-acceptance production being executed in a mode with low expectations, so hide the image display. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without doing so.

Or, even if the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", some players may "execute the post-reception effect in the" low expectation mode ". As an excuse, there may be some people who want to keep the display state of the image display in a continuous state at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception. Even when the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations", some players are "irritated" when the post-reception production is executed in the "low expectations mode". It seems that there are some people who want to make the image display invisible at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player "effectives the operation by the player" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If the "reception validity judgment as an operation" is made, it is possible to start the post-reception staging in a state where the image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and it is possible to start the effect after the reception. If the "reception valid judgment that the action by the player is an effective action" is not made before the timing arrives, the post-reception effect starts to be executed while the image display is not displayed at that time. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of being performed, those who seek such a directing ability will be able to enjoy the operation directing with peace of mind after that.

[Structure 8-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the first reception period, the first is one of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the reception validity determination. 1 It is possible to perform the effect after reception, and if the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made. It is possible to perform the second post-reception effect in any of a plurality of different modes. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" starts to be executed. At the time when the remaining time is displayed (for example, it is a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time, and the degree of expectation is as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image. (Those with different configurations) may not be displayed and may be hidden. On the other hand, when the "reception validity judgment" is made within the second reception period, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" is started. , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time, and as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes having different expectations are used. (Prepared ones) are not displayed and are not hidden.

According to such a configuration, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and the remaining time display (frame) after the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed. Since the image and the gauge image) may not be visible in some cases, it is expected that the tension after the start of the post-acceptance production is preferably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 8-B" is adopted, the case where "the reception validity determination is made so that the movement by the player is an effective movement" is made before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. Is displayed because the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although it has not been done, if "the reception validity judgment is made that the movement by the player is the effective movement" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period has arrived, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed. It is desirable that the effect is started after reception while it is in the displayed state.

That is, from the player's point of view, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (first) based on the "reception validity determination". It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-reception production corresponding to the reception period) is started in order to improve the game entertainment. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity judgment" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period). If this is displayed even after the execution of the production) is started, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (post-reception staging corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is "the first mode with low expectation" and "the first mode" within the valid period (first reception period). Regardless of which of the "second mode with low expectation" is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectation (furthermore, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with low expectation). It has become. Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone, but at this time. , If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", it is clear that the game entertainment is adversely affected. Therefore, the frame image and the gauge image are displayed. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the frame image is in the "second mode with high expectation". And if at least one of the gauge images continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-acceptance staging performed in a mode with low expectation. And it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", some players may perform the post-reception effect in the "low expectation mode". As an "excuse" when the situation is closed, a person who wants to keep the frame image and the gauge image in a state where the display state is not hidden and the display state is continued at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation", some players may have a "low expectation mode" for the post-reception effect. In order to suppress "irritability" when it is executed in "", the frame image and gauge image are hidden and invisible at the time when the effect is started after reception. There seems to be someone.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player "effectives the operation by the player" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If the reception validity judgment as an operation is made, it is possible to start the post-reception production in a state where the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and within the first reception period. When the "reception validity judgment that the movement by the player is an effective movement" is not made before the predetermined timing of the above is reached, after the reception is performed while the frame image and the gauge image are not displayed at that time. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the production will be started, those who seek such performance will be able to enjoy the operation production with peace of mind after that.

[Structure 9-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, the operation target display (here, the operation by the player) is usually performed. It is possible to display a pachinko image display) that imitates the target of the above and has a plurality of modes having different expectations) using at least a specific area. During the reception period, if a "reception valid judgment" is made in which the action by the player is an effective operation, it is possible to execute the post-reception production according to the type of the reception period based on the reception valid judgment. Will be done. In addition, even when the effect is started after the reception, the operation target display (image display) may be displayed without being hidden.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period as the reception period. Then, the "reception validity judgment" was made in both the case where the "reception validity judgment" was made within the first reception period and the case where the "reception validity judgment" was made within the second reception period. Based on the above, the extinction EF effect can be executed by using at least a part of the specific area. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean the reception period opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, the acceptance valid judgment is properly performed under the operation acceptance condition suggested by the image display (the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). You will be able to easily recognize that it has become.

The extinction EF effect means, for example, a meaning including the above-mentioned "mode in which the operation target display (image display) becomes difficult to see", and in this case, the specific operation target display (image display) is displayed. Use a mode in which the extinction effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the area, or an effect body located at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of a specific area in which the operation target display (image display) is displayed in front view. In addition to the mode in which the effect is executed, the operation target display (image display) itself is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, making the display smaller, blurring, changing the transparency setting, etc.). ) May be displayed.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 9-B", in the first reception period, the first reception period depends on the timing at which the "reception validity determination" in which the operation by the player is an effective operation is performed. 1 When the post-reception effect corresponding to the reception period starts to be executed, the operation target display (image display) is displayed without being hidden, and the operation target display (image display) is displayed. It may be in a state where it is not visible (a state in which it cannot be visually recognized).

That is, from the player's point of view, when the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation" out of the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination". It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-reception production) is started in order to improve the game entertainment. However, when the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" among multiple modes, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" starts to be executed. If this is displayed even after it is displayed, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (post-reception staging corresponding to the first reception period), the image display is "first mode with low expectation" and "low expectation first" within the valid period (first reception period). Regardless of which of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that the mode is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (furthermore, there is a possibility that the mode is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation). Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone, but at this time. , If the image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the game entertainment will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the image display. It can be said that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the image is reproduced in the "second aspect with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to appropriately suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-acceptance production being executed in a mode with low expectations, so hide the image display. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without doing so.

Or, even if the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", some players may "execute the post-reception effect in the" low expectation mode ". As an excuse, there may be some people who want to keep the display state of the image display in a continuous state at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception. Even when the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations", some players are "irritated" when the post-reception production is executed in the "low expectations mode". It seems that there are some people who want to make the image display invisible at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display the image through the timing when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It will be possible to substantially select whether to start the post-reception effect while it is displayed, or to start the post-reception effect when the image display is hidden and invisible. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 9-B", in the second reception period, regardless of the timing of the "reception validity determination" in which the operation by the player is an effective operation, the operation is performed. The operation target display (image display) may be always displayed at the time when the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is not always possible to select whether or not to display the operation target display (image display) at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception. It becomes possible to maintain a feeling of tension within the period.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception acceptance state (reception period) in which the reception opportunity is given occurs, the image display related to the reception target (such as the image of the operation receiving unit) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated image display (see Fig. 144) integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image display, the game interest is reduced until the display (display change) is executed after reception. I try to suppress. Such an integrated image display occurs as a result of a notice judgment with an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. ..

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof, so details are omitted. For example, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. Further, as the "integrated image display", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the display is performed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception allowable state (reception period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. The reception allowable sound is output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound in which the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable reception sound" is a sound that is not output under the condition that the production has nothing to do with the allowable reception state (reception period).

Further, each acceptance allowable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance allowable state classified into the first type can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that occurs when a specific condition (specific high-expected fluctuation pattern selection) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state is a valid period (occurs as a result of a notice determination) that can occur in either a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Validity period, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in any of such first type and second type acceptance acceptance states (acceptance period). Here, in both the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) and the second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that it occurs as an allowable state (reception period), the "integrated image display" displayed in those reception periods is an image that imitates the same operation means (operation button 410).

Of the plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)) is the first type acceptance acceptance state (reception period). In the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in an aspect different from the special aspect (for example, the aspect shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c)). (This configuration is not required). In this case, in the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) of the first type, in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) including a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination, the "integrated image" is used. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the "display", and the "integrated image display" is displayed in an manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) of the second type, the "integrated image" is obtained in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination. It may be possible to make a determination as to whether or not to display, and to display the "integrated image display" in an manner corresponding to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the above-mentioned "configuration 1-B" to "configuration 9-B" and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment and may not necessarily be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above-mentioned "Structure 1-B" to "Structure 9-B" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration to be used.

First, an example embodying the above "configuration 1-B" to "configuration 4-B" will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is an effect content (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice, etc. as a post-reception effect) that is advanced when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted. A plurality of reception periods (reception effects) with different types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of a judgment (big hit judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception production), at least the 1B reception period (1B reception post-production), the 2B reception period (2B reception post-production), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception production) are set. I have prepared.

With reference to FIGS. 200 to 215, the characteristics of each reception period (reception production) will be described. Regarding each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 199, the 1st B reception period (1B reception post-production), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception production), and the 3B reception period (3B reception post-production). It may be prepared as a reception period different from the production), the 1st B reception period (1B reception post production), the 2B reception period (2B reception post production), and the 3B reception period (production). It may be realized as any one of the 3B post-reception production). Further, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily included in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods with reference to FIGS. 199. You may not be prepared.

FIGS. 200 to 202 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 1B is satisfied and the first B reception period (first B reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. 209 and 210 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the first B reception period (first B reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the change pattern determination is performed, and as a result, the "first B change pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the first B fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the first B variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the first B variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 209 (a)). ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ 1B variation pattern ”itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 200A, when the timing tQ2 in which the first B predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives (when the condition 1B is satisfied). , Generates the first B reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the production after reception of the first B" is permitted ("Situation shown in FIGS. 209 (b) and (c)"). As a result, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1st B reception period (when the reception validity is determined), the 1B post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (operation receiving unit) is related to the occurrence of such a first B reception period. Operation target display (image display) that suggests (such as), and remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (valid period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. Depiction), disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance EF effect), 1B post-acceptance effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) according to acceptance (reception validity judgment) Are to be performed respectively. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with the passage of time). Although it is displayed as an "integrated image display", it is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the first B reception period occurs at the timing tQ2, as shown in FIGS. 200 (b) and 209 (b), (c), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) according to this example. In (1 staging device), "image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated image display IG. The integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tQ2, or may appear before timing tQ2 and straddle the timing tQ2. It may be displayed in. In addition, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (acceptance validity determination) when it is accepted (acceptance validity determination) within the 1st B acceptance period. It is hidden when the 1st B reception period ends without any notice. The first B reception period according to this example ends when the timing tQ3 arrives when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 200 (a)).

Further, in the first B reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is any one of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (d)). 209 (b) shows the case where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a). 209 (c) corresponds to the case where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d). Even during the 1st B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the mode shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c). It may be done.

Then, FIG. 200 assumes a case where "reception validity determination with the operation (operation) by the player as an effective operation" is performed when the relatively early timing tQ2a within the first B reception period arrives. There is. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 200A, the first B reception period is terminated and the reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tQ2a (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception production corresponding to the 1st B reception period (1B post-reception production) will be started.

An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to 210 (h1)) is as a post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the 1st B reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E2 (FIGS. 210 (d2) to 210 (h2)" corresponds to the case where the first aspect having a relatively low expectation is executed is the first. It corresponds to the case where the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the 1B reception period (the first B post-reception effect). It may include "0%" and "100%".

Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 200, at the timing tQ2a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the reception of the first B is started according to the acceptance), the “integration” is performed. Not only does it not hide the "image display IG", but it also prevents the integrated image display IG from being difficult to see.

That is, the first B post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a "first B post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "specific production after the reception of the 1st B" using the body, the lamp for the production, etc.) and the production sound after the reception of the 1st B using the 3rd production device (speaker) are realized as at least a composite production. (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first staging device), the time when the "first post-receipt staging display" as the first B post-receipt staging is started is delayed as compared with other staging devices. Even after the acceptance is made, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is intentionally maintained.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 210 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 (FIG. 144). Since the player can easily recognize which of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. It will be like.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period, the "integrated image display" after the acceptance is made. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for displaying the IG in an easily visible manner. However, when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period even though the reception was done and the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) was already executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, "it is delayed to notice the post-reception production in the execution state". There is a concern that it will end up.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 200 (b) and FIG. 210 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tQ2a at which the first B reception period ends due to the acceptance of the motion by the player. (When the timing tQ2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF)" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "Production)" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance-related display (Disappearance EF production)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (Image display, gauge image display)". Is designed to overlap with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tQ2b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the 1st B reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1)) appears as a post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the mode, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIG. 210 (d1) to (h1)). FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2)) appear differently as the extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKB1, second extinction-related display SKB2). That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 210 (e1) and 210 (e2), the "first B post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the extinction-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) appears in the "first extinction-related display SKB1" or the "second extinction-related display SKB2". This makes it possible to infer whether or not the "first B post-acceptance effect display" is executed in a highly expected manner.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 200 (b) and FIGS. 210 (f1) or (f2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display related to the disappearance-related display (integrated image display IG). When the timing tQ2c within the period in which the mode) appears, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the first B reception period. "1B reception effect display UGB1 (cut-in effect)" is started to be executed. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 210 ( As shown in f1), the first aspect (here, the first B post-receipt staging display UGB1-1 as a cut-in staging by the princess character) is the first B post-receipt staging display UGB1 corresponding to the first B reception period. In the example in which the effect is displayed and the effect progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E2 (FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception), FIG. 210 (f2). ), The second aspect ((here, the first B post-reception effect display UGB1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 corresponding to the 1st B reception period). It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKB1, second extinction-related display SKB2)" are displayed, the "first B post-acceptance effect display UGB1 (1st extinction-related display SKB1)" "1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1" or "1st B post-reception effect display UGB1-2") will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the 1st B reception period, the reception in the 1st staging device (staging display device 1600) is performed. Post-production (The UGB1 effect display after reception of the first B can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other production devices, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. Since the staging display UGB1 after the 1st B reception is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player's gaze destination while suggesting that the 1B reception period has already ended. Is expected to naturally shift from the "integrated image display IG" to the "1st B post-reception staging display UGB1 (1st B post-receipt staging display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-receipt staging display UGB1-2)". (Timing tQ2c or later).

On the other hand, for "1B post-reception staging display UGB1 (1st B post-receipt staging display UGB1-1 or 1B post-receipt staging display UGB1-2)", the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed. When it is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and "1st B". The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed for the post-reception effect display UGB1 (1st B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception effect display UGB1-2). As a result, even while the execution of "1B post-receipt staging display UGB1 (1st B post-receipt staging display UGB1-1 or 1B post-receipt staging display UGB1-2)" is started, the integrated image display is performed within the reception period. It is intended to facilitate the recognition of which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-acceptance effect display UGB1-2)" is started in this way. , FIG. 200 (b) and FIG. 210 (g1) or (g2) show the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1st B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”and the“ disappearance-related display ”, the“ integrated image display IG ”is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 200 (b) and FIG. 210 (h1) or (h2), the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display)" is displayed. The "display SKB1 or the second extinction-related display SKB2" will be hidden, and the "first B post-reception effect display UGB1 or the first B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or the first" will be hidden under the condition that the visibility is good. 1B After receiving the effect display UGB1-2) ”will be displayed.

In this respect, the "first B post-acceptance effect display UGB1" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (here, the first B post-acceptance effect display UGB1-1 or the first B). It is displayed by any of the effect display UGB1-2) after reception. Therefore, the "first B post-acceptance effect display UGB1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

Further, in the production example (FIGS. 209 and 210) corresponding to the 1st B reception period, when the reception is made within the 1B reception period and the “1B post-reception effect display UGB1” is executed, the “1B 1B” is executed. The background image is switched before and after the "post-reception staging display UGB1" is started.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 210 (d) and 210 (e) in which the background image is not switched (timing tQ2a to tQ2b shown in FIG. 200), the staging display device 1600 (No. 1). Even if there is a change in the effect in the 1 effect device), it becomes possible to suggest that the “1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1” has not yet been started.

In this effect example, the time when the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKB1, second extinction-related display SKB2)" is started to display "first B post-acceptance effect display UGB1" and "background change" (1st extinction-related display SKB1, second extinction-related display SKB2) It was decided to start the display at a time later than the timing tQ2b) (timing tQ2c), but the time when the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKB1, second extinction-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed (timing tQ2b). The display may be started at the same time as (timing tQ2b).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 210, as a post-reception effect, the same background image can be switched between the case where the mode with low expectation appears and the case where the mode with high expectation appears, but the degree of expectation is high. It may be possible to switch to a different background image depending on whether a mode with a low degree of appearance appears or a mode with a high degree of expectation appears. Further, the background image is switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the first B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 200) accordingly. Moreover, various displays are performed in the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tQ2c) of the first B post-acceptance effect (first B post-acceptance effect display) according to the acceptance is set to be higher than the received timing tQ2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the first B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c), based on the acceptance. The first B post-reception effect (specific effect after 1B reception) using the second effect device is started to be executed prior to the first B post-reception effect (first B post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. I am doing it.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tQ2a that was accepted during the 1st B reception period is limited to a part of the 1B post-acceptance effect (the 1B post-acceptance effect display). The first B post-acceptance effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tQ2a.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect), FIG. 210 (d1). As shown in the above, the mode in which the "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the first B reception period and the specific staging UTB1 (first staging) after the first B reception. As the first B post-reception specific effect UTB1-1), which is a mode with low expectation of the post-specific effect UTB1, it precedes the first B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1) using the first effect device. And the execution is started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E2 (FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), FIG. 210 ( As shown in d2), the mode in which the "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the first B reception period and the specific staging UTB1 (first) after the first B reception. As the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1, the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2) using the first effect device is used. The execution is started prior to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 209, apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the first B reception period is also set in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). The effect within the reception period, which suggests that it is in the generated state, is executed (FIGS. 209 (b) and 209 (c)). For the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low expectation (see FIG. 209 (b)). ) And the high-expected mode (see FIG. 209 (c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, when the player is in the first B reception period in which the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and In the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after that, if the "reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 1st B reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) "integrated image display IG". While the display related to "" is being continued (while it has not yet suggested the degree of expectation as a post-reception effect), different aspects will appear in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) depending on the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device according to the time, rather than paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it will be possible to improve the interest in playing games.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "Specific production UTB1-1 after reception of the 1st B" or "Specific production UTB1-2 after reception of the 1st B" appears as the specific production UTB1 after the reception of the 1st B. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTB1 after the reception of the first B. For example, it is assumed that only the "1st B post-reception specific staging UTB 1-2" is provided as the 1st B post-receipt specific staging UTB 1, and the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on whether or not the "1B post-receipt specific staging UTB 1-2" appears. May be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "specific effect UTB1-2 after the reception of the first B" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTB1-2 after the reception of the first B" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first B reception period occurs, the timing tQ1 shown in FIG. 200 (d) is generated. In, the reception allowable sound is to be started to be output. That is, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 1st B reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tQ2 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIGS. 209 (b) and (c)") at which the 1B reception period occurs. The operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first B reception period, as the reception allowable sound, the first long allowable sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively long time and the first short allowable sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively short time. And are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (d), the output of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are started at the same time, but the output is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at the timing tQ2 or later when the first B reception period occurs.

Then, in the first B reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the first long allowable sound and / or the first short allowable sound are audibly output, the acceptance is based on the acceptance. Therefore, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound are terminated halfway (the end in the audible output state).

In this regard, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation as shown in FIG. 200 (d) (FIG. 209 (b). ) And the case where it is executed (audible output) in a mode with high expectation (the case shown in FIG. 209 (c)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, they are accepted (reception) unlike the "integrated image display IG". If the validity judgment) is made, it will be executed as if it cannot be confirmed, so there is tension about when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) should be made within the reception period. It is expected that the feeling will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the 1st B reception period, if the movement is accepted by the player while the reception allowable sound (1st long allowable sound, 1st short allowable sound) is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway. In addition to making the sound, when the reception is made, the audible output of the effect sound after the reception of the first B is started based on this. The first B post-acceptance effect sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (audible output) and in a mode with a high degree of expectation (audible). It may be output). That is, in this case, in the first B reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance are made. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the staging performed (the staging sound after the reception of the first B).

As shown in FIG. 200 (d), such a 1B post-reception effect sound is the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF)" as shown in FIG. 200 (d). Even after "Direction)" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Further, regarding the 1B post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to “E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E2 (FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

In the 1st B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and one reception is required. Only the permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 1st B reception period, not only the 1B post-reception production sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation can be heard in the 3rd production device. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). And the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E2 (FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), the audible output is in the same manner. Is to be done. Then, such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the first B reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the effect is to be performed after the reception, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity judgment) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that the sound is present, it becomes possible to encourage the person to concentrate on the content of the production after the reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 201 assumes a case where "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is performed when the relatively late timing tQ2A within the first B reception period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 201 (a), the first B reception period is terminated and the reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tQ2A (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception production corresponding to the 1st B reception period (1B post-reception production) will be started.

In this regard, in the 1st B reception period, even if acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period (when acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made at any timing). (Even if there is), basically, the production will proceed in the same manner as when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made at a relatively early timing tQ2a within the first B acceptance period. Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201 (a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1))" (relatively as a post-reception effect). When the degree of expectation is low) and when the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E2 (Fig. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production). In the first staging device, the second staging device, and the third staging device, basically, the staging is executed with the contents as explained with reference to FIG. 200 and the like. ..

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, the gauge image is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. This means that the display area of is further reduced. Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, as shown in FIG. 201 (d), acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made while the first short allowable sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the first short permissible sound is not terminated halfway (intermediate termination of the audible output state) due to the acceptance (reception validity determination).

Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, the time for displaying the "first B post-acceptance effect display" based on the acceptance (reception validity determination) is shorter than in the case of the example shown in FIG. 200. It will be lost. That is, the "specific effect after the reception of the 1st B" and the "effect sound after the reception of the 1st B" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. On the other hand, the "first B post-acceptance effect display" is terminated (hidden) when the predetermined timing tQ4 in the fluctuation pattern arrives, regardless of when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made. It has become a thing. According to such a configuration, it is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension as to when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is to be made within the acceptance period.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 202 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209 (b) to "E3 (FIGS. 210 (d3) to (g3))" are operations by the player within the first B reception period. It is assumed that (operation) is not performed and acceptance (reception validity judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 202, after the first B reception period occurs, the timing tQ3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tQ3 (when the first B reception period ends and the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tQ2a or The effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tQ2A or the like (at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first B reception period (or at the time when the effect is started after the reception)). ), As shown in FIG. 210 (d3), not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the first B reception period ends because the player cannot accept the operation (operation) in time, it is integrated within the first B reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, even if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 210 (e3), the disappearance-related display is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". (Disappearance EF production) has been started.

That is, in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) according to this example, while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed. ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the first B reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the first B reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the first B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. , It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st B reception period, the "1st extinction-related display SKB1" is displayed as the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect). I'm going to let you. That is, in this case, it is expected that the player feels the possibility that if the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1st B reception period, the expectation is low by the staging after the 1st B reception. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage people to think that they did not have to operate (operate) within the 1B reception period, and when the operation (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the interest in the game is reduced. Will be expected to be suppressed.

However, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st B reception period, the "second extinction-related display SKB2" may be displayed as the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect), or ". A mode different from any of the "first extinction-related display SKB1" and the "second extinction-related display SKB2" may appear.

Further, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st B reception period, when the operation (operation) is accepted for the disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect). It may be performed in a manner that may appear. That is, in this case, when the "first extinction-related display SKB1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 210 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first B reception period, FIG. It means that the production has progressed from 209 (b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1))" (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations has been executed). Will be. On the other hand, when the "second extinction-related display SKB2" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 210 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first B reception period, FIG. 209 ( It means that the production has progressed from b) to "E2 (FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception production with relatively high expectations has been executed). .. That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in the 1st B reception period, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the 1B reception period ends. Whether the effect after the reception of the first B was executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation or was executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation just by confirming the mode as the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears. Since it becomes possible to recognize the above, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (f3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1 in the figure)", first, "integration" is performed. Hide the image display IG. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 210 (g3), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the first disappearance-related display SKB1))" is not displayed. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the first B reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a) (FIG. 209 (b)). (See), as described above, it may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (d) (see FIG. 209 (c)). When such a situation shown in FIG. 209 (c) appears, there is a case where the situation shown in FIG. 209 (b) described above appears and "integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge)". The production will be developed in the same manner except for the aspect as "image)".

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 209 (c) to "E1'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 209 (b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. When the production progresses from FIG. 209 (c) to "E2'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 209 (b) to "E2 (FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. When the production progresses from FIG. 209 (c) to "E3'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 209 (b) to "E3 (FIGS. 210 (d3) to (g3))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only.

FIGS. 203 to 205 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 2B is satisfied and the second B reception period (second B reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the second B reception period (second B reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the change pattern determination is performed, and as a result, the "second B change pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second B fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second B variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second B variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 211 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ second B variation pattern ”itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 203A, when the timing tR2 in which the second B predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives (when the condition 2B is satisfied). , Generates the above-mentioned second B reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the production after the second B reception" is permitted. As a result, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2B reception period (when the reception is validly determined), the secondB post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). become.

However, in the second B reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the first B reception period occurs, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is suggested in relation to the occurrence of the second B reception period. Operation target display (image display) and remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period) (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with the passage of time) , The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is not displayed.

More specifically, in the second B fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 203 (b) and 211 (a), the integrated image display IG (“image display” and “remaining time display (frame image and frame image)” While the production situation in which the gauge image) ”) is not displayed is maintained, the timing tR2 arrives and the second B reception period occurs. Then, the second B reception period ends when the timing tR3 arrives when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 203 (a)).

Such a second B reception period is a so-called "hidden button", and from what timing was "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is an effective operation" allowed (second B reception period)? (Whether it occurred), whether it is in a state where "reception validity judgment" is acceptable (whether it is in a situation where the second B reception period has occurred), and at what timing "action by the player is effective operation" No operation-related information is provided, such as whether the "reception validity determination" is not allowed (whether the second B reception period ends), and the like. Therefore, it can be said that the second B reception period can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such color rendering.

Then, FIG. 203 assumes a case where "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is performed when the relatively early timing tR2a arrives in such a second B reception period. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 203 (a), the second B reception period is terminated based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is received at the timing tR2a (the reception validity determination is made). At the same time, the post-reception effect (second B post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the second B reception period will be started to be executed.

In addition, as an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 211 (a) to FIGS. 211 (b) and (c), the second B post-reception effect corresponding to the second B reception period (“second B post-reception effect display” or “second B post-acceptance effect display” or “No. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as "2B post-reception specific effect", "2B post-acceptance effect sound", etc.). The first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, is executed as the second B post-reception effect (“second B post-acceptance effect display”, “second B post-acceptance specific effect”, “second B post-acceptance effect sound”, etc.). The illustration of the case is omitted, and in reality, the production is advanced from FIG. 211 (a) to the situation where the production after the reception of the second B is executed in the omitted mode (first mode with low expectation). In some cases. However, regarding such a 2B reception period, when the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made, the 2B post-reception effect ("2B post-reception effect display" or "2B post-reception effect display" or " Whether or not the "second B post-reception specific effect", "second B post-reception effect sound", etc.) is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 211 (b) and 211 (c). It may be realized as a type) that does not have a low expectation mode as a post-effect display, a specific effect after the reception of the first B, and an effect sound after the reception of the first B). The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

Here, even in this production example (second B reception period), as shown in FIGS. 203 and 211 (b), the time when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted (second B according to the acceptance). At the timing tR2a (when the post-reception effect is started), the "2B post-reception effect display UGB2 (group notice effect)" of the 2nd B post-acceptance effect is not executed, and the "second B post-acceptance specific effect" is not executed. "UTB2-2" and "second B post-acceptance staging sound (highly expected mode)" are being executed. According to such a configuration, the effect progresses in the same manner as in the case of the effect after the reception of the first B, so that the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained in the same manner.

However, in this production example (second B reception period), as shown in FIGS. 203 and 211 (b), even if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at any timing within the second B reception period. The above-mentioned disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is not executed. That is, in this case, even if the movement (operation) is accepted by the player during the second B reception period, it is significantly delayed to notice this just by looking at the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). Will be. In this case, the second B reception period has not occurred due to the fact that the integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is not displayed. It looks as if it has been operated (operated) underneath, and it can be said that this point is also realized as a production with a high degree of difficulty in playing a game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (b) and 211 (c), when the timing tR2c after the timing tR2a arrives, the player operates within the second B reception period. As a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance, "2B post-reception effect display UGB2 (in the figure, a group notice effect by a ghost character, which is a highly expected aspect). 2B after receiving the effect display UGB2-2) ”is started to be executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 203 (b) and 211 (d), the “second B post-acceptance effect display UGB2” started in this way has a predetermined time from the time when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made. It will be terminated (hidden) when (a certain time) has elapsed.

In the production example (FIG. 211) corresponding to the second B reception period, the background image is switched when the "second B reception post-reception display UGB2" is executed, unlike the case of the first B reception period. This has never been the case, and this also makes it difficult to recognize that the situation has been accepted.

Further, when the movement by the player was accepted within the second B reception period, the acceptance was made as shown in FIGS. 203 (b) and 203 (c) and 211 (b) and (c). Based on this, the second B post-acceptance effect (specific effect after the second B reception) using the second effect device precedes the second B post-acceptance effect (second B post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. And start execution.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 211 (a) to FIG. 211 (b) (when the expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception), as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the sub liquid crystal is used. The mode in which "ghost" is displayed in 1610 (second staging device) is a mode in which the above-mentioned second B post-receipt specific staging UTB2 (second B post-receipt specific staging UTB 2) corresponding to the second B reception period has a high degree of expectation. As the second B post-acceptance specific effect UTB2-2), the execution is started prior to the second B post-acceptance effect (second B post-acceptance effect display UGB2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the case where the mode with low expectation is executed as the second B post-acceptance effect is omitted, but the "second B post-acceptance effect display" and the "second B post-acceptance specific effect UTB2" are the low expectation modes. It is only executed in, and is basically the same as the case where it is executed in a high expectation mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), even in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the effect within the reception period suggesting that the second B reception period has occurred is not executed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third staging device (speaker) is further prepared. However, when the second B reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 211 (d), the reception allowable sound is not output, and as a result, the timing at which the second B reception period occurs is determined. I try to make it difficult to recognize.

Further, in the first B reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the effect sound after the second B reception is started based on this. The second B post-acceptance effect sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, the sound is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (audible output) and in a mode with a high degree of expectation (audible). It may be output).

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 2nd B reception period, not only the 2B post-reception production sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation can be heard in the 3rd production device. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an audible output in the same mode regardless of whether the second B post-reception effect is executed in either the high expectation mode or the low expectation mode.

On the other hand, FIG. 204 assumes a case where "reception validity determination with the operation (operation) by the player as an effective operation" is performed when the relatively late timing tR2A within the second B reception period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the second B reception period is terminated and the second B reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tR2A (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception effect corresponding to the 2nd B reception period (2B post-reception effect) will be started to be executed.

In this regard, in the second B reception period, even if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tR2A within the second B reception period (when acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made at any timing). (Even if there is), basically, the production will proceed in the same manner as when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made at a relatively early timing tR2a within the second B reception period. Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 204 (a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 211 (a) to FIGS. 211 (b) and (c) (when the expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception). ) And the case where the illustration is omitted (the case where the expectation is relatively low as the effect after reception), and basically in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device. Will execute the effect as described with reference to FIG. 203 and the like.

In particular, in the 2nd B reception period, unlike the case of the 1st B reception period, the "second B reception post-reception display" is accepted in the same way as the "2B post-reception specific production" and the "2B post-reception production sound". Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time when (reception validity judgment) is made, the mode as a post-reception production is also at the timing when acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made. It is the same regardless.

It should be noted that the "second B post-acceptance effect display", "second B post-acceptance specific effect", and "second B post-acceptance effect sound" may be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and they may be mutually executed. It does not have to end at the same time.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 205 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 211 (a) to FIG. 211 (d), the player does not perform any operation (operation) within the second B reception period and is accepted (reception). It is assumed that the valid judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 205, after the second B reception period occurs, the timing tR3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted during the second B reception period, as shown in FIG. 205, no effect related to the occurrence or termination of the movement is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the player does not know that the 2B reception period has occurred or that the operation (operation) could not be performed, the player does not know that the 2B reception period has occurred. It will be suppressed that the game interest is reduced.

FIGS. 206 to 208 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 3B is satisfied and the third B reception period (third B reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. 212 and 213 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the third B reception period (third B reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the change pattern determination is performed, and as a result, the "third B change pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the third B fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 3B variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 3B variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 212 (a)). ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ 3B variation pattern ”itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 206A, when the timing tS2 in which the 3B predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives (when the condition 3B is satisfied). , Generates the above-mentioned 3B reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the production after reception of the 3B" is permitted. As a result, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B reception period (when the reception validity is determined), the 3B post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (operation receiving unit) is related to the occurrence of such a third B reception period. Operation target display (image display) that suggests (such as), and remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (valid period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. Depiction), disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance EF effect), 1B post-acceptance effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) according to acceptance (reception validity judgment) Are to be performed respectively. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with the passage of time). Although it is displayed as an "integrated image display", it is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

However, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the effect of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It is realized as a special production that has both.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 208 (b) and 212 (a), the third B reception period is an integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display (frame image)”. And gauge image) ”) is not yet displayed (timing tS2). That is, in this case, the player is secretly given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), and the effectability as a so-called "hidden button effect" is provided.

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 208 (b), the effectability as such a "hidden button effect" is continued only until the timing X when the predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the third B reception period. That is, when the timing X within the 3B reception period arrives, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the integrated image display IG includes "image display" and "remaining time display". (Frame image and gauge image) ”is displayed, which gives the player an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) while the integrated image display IG is displayed. Will shift to. It should be noted that the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) displayed in this way is accepted (reception valid judgment) when it is accepted (reception valid judgment) within the 3B reception period. ) Is not done and is hidden when the 3B reception period ends. The third B reception period according to this example ends when the timing tS3 arrives when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 208 (a) and the like).

According to such a third B reception period, from the occurrence of the third B reception period to the arrival of timing X, the integrated image display IG is not displayed in the "first display state". "Directiveness as a so-called hidden button" that allows the player to accept movements (operations) has come to be provided, and from the above timing X to the end of the third B reception period, an integrated image is provided. While the image display IG is displayed in the "second display state", the "directing property as a so-called normal button" that allows the player to accept the operation (operation) is provided. As a result, the third B reception period according to this embodiment is the effect of the above-mentioned "first B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It will be realized as a special production that has both sex and sex, and it is expected that this will improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in the above-mentioned "second display state" of the third B reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) has a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 144 (a). ), (C)), and in FIG. 212 (b), the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is shown in FIG. 144 (a). In FIG. 212 (c), the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (c). It corresponds to the case where it was done. Even during the third B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of embodiments including the embodiments shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (d). It may be done.

Then, FIG. 206 shows the "game" while the above "first display state (see, for example, FIG. 212 (a))" appears in the third B reception period (timing tS2a in the figure). It is assumed that the reception valid judgment that the action (operation) by the person is the valid action is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the third B reception period is terminated based on the fact that the movement (operation) by the player is received at the timing tS2a (the reception validity determination is made). At the same time, the post-reception effect corresponding to the 3B reception period (3B post-reception effect) will be started to be executed.

In addition, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F1 (FIG. 213 (d1) to FIG. 213 (h1))", the above "first display state" appears in the third B reception period. Among them, as a result of the "reception validity determination", it corresponds to the case where the first aspect with a relatively low expectation is executed as the "third B post-reception effect", and FIGS. 212 (a) to "F2 (FIG. 213) are executed. (D2)-FIG. 213 (h2)) ”, as a result of“ reception validity determination ”while the above“ first display state ”appears during the 3B reception period,“ This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the "third B post-receipt effect". The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 206, at the timing tS2a, which is the time when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the 3B reception is started according to the acceptance). It is possible to display the "integrated image display IG" that was previously hidden.

That is, when the player performs an operation (operation) while the above "first display state" appears during the 3B reception period (when the "reception validity determination" is made), the player is integrated. The operation (operation) is performed without recognizing which aspect appears as a modified image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image). In this regard, by allowing the "integrated image display IG", which had been hidden until then, to be displayed when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted, the player can receive the third B reception. When the above-mentioned "second display state" is tentatively changed during the period, it becomes possible to recognize which aspect has appeared as the "integrated image display IG".

That is, the third B post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a "third B post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "3B post-reception specific effect" using the body, the effect lamp, etc.) and the 3B post-acceptance effect sound using the 3rd effect device (speaker) are realized as at least a combined effect. (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first staging device), the time when the "third post-receipt staging display" as the third B post-receipt staging is started is delayed as compared with other staging devices. Even after the acceptance is made, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is intentionally maintained.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 213 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made in the above-mentioned "first display state" in the third B acceptance period, it is within the terminated acceptance period. In the above, the player can easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was planned to be displayed. , It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest will be suitably suppressed.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period, the "integrated image display" after the acceptance is made. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for displaying the IG in an easily visible manner. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is in the above "second display state". If it continues to be displayed in the same mode as at a certain time, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and as a result, "notice the post-reception effect in the execution state". Will be delayed. "

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 206 (b) and FIG. 213 (e1) or (e2), a predetermined time from the timing tS2a at which the third B reception period ends due to the acceptance of the movement (operation) by the player. After that (when the timing tS2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF)" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "Production)" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance-related display (Disappearance EF production)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (Image display, gauge image display)". Is designed to overlap with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is displayed after the acceptance is made when the third B reception period is in the above "first display state", the said. By making the integrated image display IG difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed.

In addition, if acceptance is made while in the above-mentioned "first display state" that provides the effect as a "so-called hidden button" in the third B reception period, either the second B reception period or the third B reception period It is difficult to recognize whether it is in the state of being accepted in, but it is in the state of being accepted in the 3B reception period due to the appearance of "disappearance related display (disappearance EF production)" that can not appear in the 2B reception period. You will be able to recognize that it is in.

Further, in the third B reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 213 (d1) to (h1)) appears as an effect after the reception of the third B, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIG. 213 (d2) to (h2)). The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as in the case where appears. According to such a configuration, as compared with the case of the 1st B reception period (when the mode of the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), the “disappearance” is performed after the acceptance is made within the 3rd B reception period. Since it is less important to pay close attention to the "related display (disappearing EF effect)", it is accepted when it is in the "first display state" that provides the effect as a "so-called hidden button" during the 3B reception period. Even if this is done, the integrated image display IG can be suitably watched after the acceptance is made.

Further, in the 3B reception period related to this production example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made, the post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the above 1B reception period is expected. The "second extinction-related display SKB2" displayed when executed in a high-degree manner is used. That is, in this case, in the third B reception period, as long as the reception is made, it becomes possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a highly expected manner, and the entertainment of the game is improved. You will be able to plan.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third B reception period does not necessarily have to be the "second disappearance-related display SKB2". For example, as the disappearance-related display corresponding to the 3B reception period (disappearance EF effect), it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1st B reception period is executed in a mode with low expectation. Even when the "1st extinction-related display SKB1" is used, whether it is in the state of being accepted in the 1st B reception period or in the state of being accepted in the 3rd B reception period. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 206 (b) and FIG. 213 (f1) or (f2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display related to the disappearance-related display (integrated image display IG). When the timing tS2c within the period in which the mode) appears, after the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player within the third B reception period. The execution of "3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3 (conversation notice)" as an effect is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to “F1 (FIG. 213 (d1) to (h1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 213 ( As shown in f1), the first aspect (here, the 3B post-reception staging display UGB3-1 which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the 3B post-reception staging display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to “F2 (FIGS. 213 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 213 (f2). As shown in, the second aspect (here, the third B post-reception staging display UGB3-2, which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the 3B post-receipt staging display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKB2)" are displayed, the "third B post-reception effect display UGB3 (" third B post-reception effect display ")" "UGB3-1" or "3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3-2") will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the 3B reception period, the reception in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) is performed. Post-effect (3B reception post-reception display UGB3 can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress deterioration of the game entertainment. Since the staging display UGB3 after the 3rd B reception is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player's gaze destination while suggesting that the 3B reception period has already ended. Is expected to shift from "integrated image display IG" to "3B post-reception staging display UGB3 (3B post-receipt staging display UGB3-1 or 3B post-receipt staging display UGB3-2)". (Timing tS2c or later).

On the other hand, for "3B post-reception staging display UGB3 (3B post-receipt staging display UGB3-1 or 3B post-receipt staging display UGB3-2)", the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed. When it is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and "3rd B" The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed for the post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2). As a result, even while the execution of "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)" is started, the integrated image display is performed within the reception period. It is intended to facilitate the recognition of which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3B post-receipt staging display UGB3 (3B post-receipt staging display UGB3-1 or 3B post-receipt staging display UGB3-2)" is started in this way. , FIG. 206 (b) and FIG. 213 (g1) or (g2) show the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”and the“ disappearance-related display ”, the“ integrated image display IG ”is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 206 (b) and FIG. 213 (h1) or (h2), the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display)" is displayed. "Display SKB2)" will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3)" will be hidden. -2) ”will be displayed.

In this respect, the "third B post-reception effect display UGB3" is a plurality of modes (here, the third B post-reception effect display UGB3-1) having different expectations based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player. Alternatively, it is displayed by any of the 3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3-2). Therefore, the "third B post-acceptance effect display UGB3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In the production example corresponding to the 3B reception period (FIGS. 212 and 213), even if the reception is made within the 3B reception period and the “3B reception post-reception display UGB3” is executed, the “No. 3B reception period” is executed. The background image is not switched before and after the "3B effect display UGB3" is started. According to such a configuration, when compared with the first B reception period, the third B has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button" even when the reception is made in the "second display state". It will be possible to suggest that the acceptance has been made during the reception period. In addition, when compared with the above 2B reception period, it seems that the production is progressing as a result of the reception being done by the "so-called hidden button" even though the "3B reception post-reception display UGB3" is being executed. It is possible to show it to.

In this effect example, the "3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3" is displayed at a later time (timing tS2c) than the time when the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKB2)" is started to be displayed (timing tS2b). However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tS2b) as the display start time (timing tS2b) of the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKB2)".

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the third B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 206) accordingly. Moreover, various displays are performed in the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tS2c) of the third B post-acceptance effect (third B post-acceptance effect display) according to the acceptance is set to be higher than the received timing tS2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the third B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 206 (b) and 206 (c), based on the acceptance. The 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception specific effect) using the 2nd effect device is started to be executed prior to the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-acceptance effect display) using the 1st effect device. I am doing it.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tS2a that was accepted in the 3B reception period is limited to a part of the 3B post-acceptance effect (3B post-acceptance effect display). The third B post-acceptance effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tS2a.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F1 (FIGS. 213 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect), FIG. 213 (d1). As shown in the above, the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the third B reception period, and the third B post-reception specific effect UTB3 (third post-reception specific effect). As the third B post-reception specific effect UTB3-1), which is a mode with low expectation of UTB3, it is executed prior to the third B post-reception effect (3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to be started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F2 (FIGS. 213 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), FIG. 213 ( As shown in d2), the mode in which "kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the third B reception period, and the specific effect UTB3 (after the third B reception) corresponds to the third B reception period. As the 3B post-reception specific staging UTB3-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific staging UTB3, it precedes the 3B post-receipt staging (3B post-receipt staging display UGB3-2) using the first staging device. It is designed to start execution.

In the production example shown in FIG. 213, it is suggested that the third B reception period has occurred even in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) in the above "first display state" of the third B reception period. It is suggested that the effect within the reception period is not executed, and the above "second display state" in the third B reception period indicates that the third B reception period has occurred even in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). The production within the reception period is executed (FIGS. 212 (b) and (c)). For the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low expectation (see FIG. 212 (b)). ) And the high-expected mode (see FIG. 212 (c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, when the player is in the above-mentioned "second display state" during the third B reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has an expected degree. Different aspects appear depending on the situation, and the same aspect appears in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after that, if the "reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made while in the above "second display state" during the third B reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first). In the sub-LCD 1610 (second staging device), while the display related to the "integrated image display IG" is being continued (while not yet suggesting the degree of expectation as a staging after reception) in the staging device). Different aspects will appear depending on the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device according to the time, rather than paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it will be possible to improve the interest in playing games.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of "3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-1" and "3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2" appears as the 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTB3 after the reception of the third B. For example, it is assumed that only the "3B post-reception specific staging UTB3-2" is provided as the 3B post-receipt specific staging UTB3, and the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on whether or not the "3B post-receipt specific staging UTB3-2" appears. May be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3-2" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the third B reception period occurs, the timing tS1 shown in FIG. 206 (d) is generated. In, the reception allowable sound is to be started to be output. The reception permissible sound corresponding to the third B reception period straddles both the timing tS2 at which the thirdB reception period occurs and the timing X at which the above "first display state" shifts to the "second display state". The operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output. However, the reception allowable sound may be audibly output in a form straddling the timing X, and the timing tS2 may not necessarily be audibly output in a form straddling the timing tS2.

Here, during the 3rd B reception period, the 3rd permissible sound, which is different from both the 1st long permissible sound and the 1st short permissible sound, is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It becomes possible to suggest that the third B reception period, which has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button", occurs (or has occurred) instead of the period. However, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the third B reception period may be executed by either the first long allowable sound or the first short allowable sound.

Then, during the 3B reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the reception allowable sound (here, the 3rd allowable sound) corresponding to this is audibly output, the acceptance is made. Based on this, the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway (the halfway termination of the audible output state), and even with this, the third B reception that also has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button" instead of the above first B reception period. You will be able to suggest that a period is occurring (or is occurring). However, the acceptance allowable sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance period may also be terminated halfway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 206 (d), the reception allowable sound corresponding to the third B reception period (here, the third allowable sound) is executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation. It is desirable to have a case (when shown in FIG. 212 (b)) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed (audible output) in a mode with high expectation (when shown in FIG. 212 (c)). That is, in this case, although the reception allowable sound suggests the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", it is confirmed when the reception (reception validity judgment) is made. Since it will be executed as something that can not be done, it is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension as to when acceptance (acceptance validity judgment) will be made during the acceptance period. It will be like.

Further, even during the 3B reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but also the reception is performed. Based on the above, the audible output of the effect sound after the reception of the third B is started. The third B post-acceptance effect sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, the sound is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (audible output) and in a mode with a high degree of expectation (audible). It may be output). That is, in this case, in the third B reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance are made. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the effect (effect sound after the reception of the 3rd B) performed.

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), such a third B post-reception effect sound is the same as the “3B post-reception effect display UGB3”, such as “integrated image display IG” and “disappearance related display (disappearance EF”). Even after "Direction)" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Further, regarding the third B post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to “F1 (FIGS. 213 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F2 (FIG. 213 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 3B reception period, the 3rd effect device can hear not only the 3B post-acceptance effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F1 (FIG. 213 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). And, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F2 (FIG. 213 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), the audible output is in the same manner. Is to be done. Then, such a "reception sound" is accepted (reception validity determination) in a reception period different from the 3B reception period (for example, the 1st B reception period or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). Even if it is, it will be audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the effect is to be performed after the reception, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity judgment) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that the sound is present, it becomes possible to encourage the person to concentrate on the content of the production after the reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 207 shows the above-mentioned "second display state (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (b) and (c))" appearing during the third B reception period (in the figure, FIG. 207). , Timing tS2A), "Reception valid determination with the action (operation) by the player as an effective action" is assumed. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 207 (a), the third B reception period is terminated based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is received at the timing tS2A (the reception validity determination is made). At the same time, the post-reception effect corresponding to the 3B reception period (3B post-reception effect) will be started to be executed.

In this regard, in the 3B reception period, acceptance (reception validity determination) is performed while the above "second display state (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (b) and (c))" appears during the 3B reception period. ) Is made, but after the acceptance is made, the above "first display state (for example, see FIG. 212 (a))" appears in the third B reception period. The production will proceed in the same manner as when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made. Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 207 (a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 212 (b) to "F1 (FIGS. 213 (d1) to (h1))" (relatively as a post-acceptance effect). When the degree of expectation is low) and when the production progresses from FIG. 212 (b) to "F2 (Fig. 213 (d2) to (h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production). In the first staging device, the second staging device, and the third staging device, basically, the staging is executed with the contents as explained with reference to FIG. 206 and the like. ..

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 207, the gauge image is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It means that the display area of is reduced.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the "3B post-reception staging display" is accepted (reception valid judgment) from the time when the "3B post-reception specific staging" and "3B post-reception staging sound" are accepted. Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time), the mode as the post-reception effect is the same regardless of the timing when the reception (reception validity determination) is made.

It should be noted that the "3B post-reception effect display", "3B post-reception specific effect", and "3B post-acceptance effect sound" may be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and they may be mutually executed. It does not have to end at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 208 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is assumed that (operation) is not performed and acceptance (reception validity judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 208, after the third B reception period occurs, the timing tS3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tS3 (when the third B reception period ends and the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tS2a or The effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tS2A or the like (at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B reception period (or at the time when the effect is started after the reception)). ), As shown in FIG. 213 (d3), not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 3B reception period ends, it is integrated within the 3B reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, even if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 213 (e3), the disappearance-related display is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". (Disappearance EF production) has been started.

That is, in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) according to this example, while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed. ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the 3B acceptance period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the third B reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the third B reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. , It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I'm going to let you.

It is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the first B reception period. That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the reception period is the effectability of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". It can be suggested that both the above-mentioned and the staging by the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button staging)" are combined.

Further, it is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKB3" is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the third B reception period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to more preferably suggest that the third B acceptance period has ended without being accepted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (f3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (third disappearance-related display SKB3 in the figure)", first, "integration" is performed. Hide the image display IG. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 213 (g3), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKB3))" is not displayed. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the third B reception period according to this example, in the above "second display state", the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is shown in FIG. 144 (a). As described above, there are cases where the image is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (c) instead of the mode (see FIG. 212 (b)). When such a situation shown in FIG. 212 (c) appears, there is a case where the situation shown in FIG. 212 (b) described above appears and the "integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge) appears. The production will be developed in the same manner except for the aspect as "image)".

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 212 (c) to "F1'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 212 (b) to "F1 (FIGS. 213 (d1) to (h1))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 212 (c) to "F2'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 212 (b) to "F2 (FIGS. 213 (d2) to (h2))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 213 (c) to "F3'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 212 (b) to "F3 (FIGS. 210 (d3) to (g3))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which the first B reception period to the third B reception period are prepared, the excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect content (cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc. as the post-reception effect) to be performed when the machine is accepted is a notice effect (expectation suggestion effect). There are multiple reception periods (1st B reception period to 3rd B reception period) with different types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of the type according to the result of the judgment (directing judgment). It has become.

In this regard, during the 1st B reception period to the 3rd B reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display (1B post-reception effect display to 3B post-acceptance display) is based on the acceptance. The effect display) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, not only the post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related display). "Disappearance EF production)" is made to appear further. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance is made, and the image display is hidden until the image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility by "a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", the "image display" is changed to the "post-reception effect display". It is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally transferred to. It should be noted that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be used in common for a plurality of reception periods in which the content of the effect is different when the effect is received (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210). See e2) and FIG. 213 (e2) and the like).

However, since the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed within the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, the image is displayed even after the acceptance is made. And when the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception effect display according to the reception is in the displayed state, and there is a concern that the game interest will decline. be. In this regard, when acceptance is made in either the 1st B reception period or the 3rd B reception period, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as "image display and remaining time display (frame image, frame image,). While the "gauge image) is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", it is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception staging display is "image display and remaining time display (frame image). , Gauge image) is displayed in a mode that makes it difficult to see (disappearance-related display). That is, in this case, after the movement is accepted by the player, the reception is accepted while the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears. The transition from the front display (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception effect display) will be realized.

In addition, both "a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on acceptance. Common in terms of points. However, "a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is shown in FIGS. 210 (e1) and 210 (e2), for example. As shown above, when the image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears to be difficult to see. Is to be done. On the other hand, the "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 210 (f1) and FIG. 210 (f2), a model image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in the situation where it is displayed, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Further, in each of the above-mentioned examples, it was decided to start displaying the "post-reception effect display" when the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. The "post-effect display" does not necessarily have to be started when the image display is displayed, and the display is started after the image display is hidden. May be good.

In addition, regarding "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)", it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). As a method of "appearing like this", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In addition to the method realized by giving priority to the image display different from that (displayed in the front layer), the image display and the remaining time are displayed by an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying an image (moving image) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, it is not an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt a method of changing (etc.). On the other hand, as for the "post-reception effect display", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image) , Gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method realized by displaying "Post-reception effect display" (displayed on the rear layer), the image display is displayed at least while the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in the area other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display). A method of displaying an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the image, and the display of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing a numerical value (permeability, etc.) related to the characteristic.

In addition, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the "reception" before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in a situation where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are the above-mentioned "image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). ) Is difficult to see due to the "disappearance-related display", so while making it possible to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the "post-reception effect display" Is in a state where it can appear soon, so that the player should be prepared in advance to change the gaze destination from the "difficult to see image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)". You will be able to urge.

In addition, when the product is accepted during the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is "after reception". It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period when the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the effect of the "post-reception effect display" in a wider range. Therefore, the change in the effect during such a display period will improve the entertainment interest of the game. You will be able to do it.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first B reception period and the third B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 213, "the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to visually recognize. Regarding the "mode (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in the area that is not displayed. Then, in the area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed at least in a part thereof, but the "image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize". (Disappearance-related display) "is displayed so that at least a part of the" post-reception effect display "is difficult to see (for example, it is displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) makes it difficult to visually recognize not only the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the effect until the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the effect when the display of "post-reception effect display" starts. It will be expected to improve both sex and sex.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, the "post-reception effect display" before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed after the reception is made is displayed. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect), it is not difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-acceptance staging prior to this without disturbing the staging performance of the first staging device.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first B reception period and the third B reception period, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is based on the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). Also, the previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) is completed.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated staging in the first staging device can enjoy the post-receipt staging by the second staging device having a simpler staging. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment for various types of players.

Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, the image display will be displayed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. .. In this case, regarding the image display, it is desirable that the dynamic display is not terminated and continues even though the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) has appeared since it was accepted.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only an image display but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We decided to make it difficult to see the image as well. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after it is accepted, it is possible to suppress the appearance as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the 3B reception period among the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods, the pachinko machine 1 is based on the fact that the reception is performed. 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 ”can be displayed, but apart from the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3, the above aspect (second extinction) corresponding to the first B reception period as an extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect). The related display SKB2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second extinction-related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear whether the first or third B post-acceptance effect display appears, but when the first extinction-related display SKB1 appears, It will be possible to infer that the effect display UGB1 will appear after the reception of the first B.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed in an area including at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed (priority display). ). However, the effect using the effect device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen should be executed at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in front view. It is also possible to realize by.

Even if the same mode (second extinction-related display SKB2) appears as the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the type of reception period is different, the jackpot symbol is stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable that the ratios (expectations) are different.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device can be executed, and the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) can be executed using the second effect device. During the period, in the first staging device, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relative. There are some conditions that are difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), Which mode has appeared. In addition, during the execution period of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device, it is relatively difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). As a result, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift the gaze target from the "first staging device" to the "second staging device".

In the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is a continuous display (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device is used. The post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) is neither an image display displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor an effect executed at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view. It is a thing.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the post-acceptance effect display is started to be displayed after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but is displayed at the appearance timing of the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may want to start.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area in which the image display is displayed" tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

Further, as described above, the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment are a plurality of modes (integrated image) having different expectations as an integrated image display IG. Display IGa to IGd) can be displayed. Then, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, since the display mode is maintained and continued including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. even after the acceptance is made, after the acceptance is made. Also, it is possible to recognize in what mode the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the reception period.

However, in this case, if it is in the period immediately after being accepted, the post-acceptance production must be performed under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). You won't get it. That is, the range of effectability is narrow, and only a limited effect (post-reception effect using only an effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after a lapse of time, after acceptance under the condition that "the visibility of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated". Since it becomes possible to perform the effect, it becomes possible to execute the "post-reception effect display in the first effect device" under such conditions. By performing these two post-operation effects with different properties (specific effect after reception in the second effect device and display of effect after reception in the first effect device) in stages, the mode of displaying the image even after being accepted. While making it easy to confirm, the role as a post-operation effect can also be suitably exerted.

As described above, the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, frame image)" may be displayed separately. Only one of the gauge images) ”may be displayed.

Further, in the first B reception period, the second B reception period, and the third B reception period, the targets of the actions (operations) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different actions may be required. However, when different operations are required, the operation target display (image display) is also displayed as a different display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "first" is permitted without displaying the image display (or the remaining time display) and allowing "the reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation". It was decided to prepare a plurality of reception periods including the third B reception period (FIGS. 206 to 208) having "display state". In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a third B reception period (first display state) occurs, the reception validity determination is permitted, or the reception validity judgment is permitted. Since it is possible to output a reception permissible sound that suggests that, it is not possible to fully recognize which is the target of the movement by the player due to the state where the image display is not displayed. However, it is now possible to recognize that the player is required to perform some action (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given), and this makes it possible for many players to perform the action. You will be expected to enjoy the production. As a result, unlike the case of the 2nd B reception period, the so-called hidden button is used even though the reception period is such that the image display is not displayed and the "reception valid judgment that the movement by the player is an effective operation" is allowed. Even players who are insensitive to directing will be able to enjoy it. However, the reception allowable sound may not be output when the third B reception period occurs. Further, "a state in which the image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" means a state in which the image display (or the remaining time display) cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. good. For example, it means that the image is displayed on the layer but is not visible due to the priority display of the image on the other layer. Further, the “image display (or remaining time display)” here means an image displayed in any of the plurality of modes having different expectations shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d). is doing. Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine which of these modes is displayed, it can be said that the image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed (conversely, it can be said). For example, if it is possible to determine which of these modes is displayed, even if it is not displayed in a good visual mode, the "image display (or remaining time display) is displayed". It can be said that it is in).

In addition, the acceptance allowable sound that is output when the 3B acceptance period occurs is realized as the "third acceptance sound", but it is also output (as the acceptance allowance) when another acceptance period occurs. It is desirable that the sound is played. For example, if the reception permissible sound is output even when the reception period in which the same operation opportunity as the 3B reception period (for example, the pressing operation on the operation button 410) occurs, the image display is displayed. Even if it is not done, it becomes possible to preferably suggest which movement opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (given) to the player. Further, for example, if the reception allowable sound is output even when a reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity different from the third B reception period (for example, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) occurs. It is difficult for the player to predict which operation opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given while the image display is not displayed, but some operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (granted). Being able to suggest that you are in a state of being).

Further, in the third B reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, as shown in FIG. 208 and the like, first, a “first display state” in which the image display is hidden appears. After that, while the third B reception period is continued, the "second display state" in which the image display is displayed appears. That is, in this case, during the 3B reception period, it initially occurs as a so-called "hidden button", and only a player who is sensitive to such a directing effect can enjoy it. However, while the 3B reception period is continuing (the stage before the set time (effective time) is exhausted), the image display is displayed, so it is sensitive to the production. Even without it, many players will be able to notice this (3B reception period) and enjoy the production. In addition, through such color rendering, it is expected to develop the ability to detect that so-called "hidden buttons" are occurring.

At this time, in the "second display state", as shown in FIGS. 212 (b) and 212 (c), the image display can be displayed with any of a plurality of different expectations (modes). Is desirable. That is, if the player side may accept the operation in the "second display state" even though the operation is not accepted in the "first display state", until the image display is displayed. During that time, the fact that it was not possible to recognize that the 3B reception period had occurred was revealed to the surroundings, and there is concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the fact that it was revealed that it was insensitive to such production. In this regard, in the "second display state", if the image display is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectations (modes), the player side operates in the "second display state". Even if it was accepted, "I noticed that the operation acceptance was allowed from the time when it was in the first display state, but I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the image display, so in the first display state It will be possible to make it look like "I didn't accept the operation," and it is expected that the decline in the game interest will be suppressed.

Further, in the third B reception period (first display state), due to the nature of the so-called "hidden button", the third B reception is permitted from any timing to "reception valid determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation". It is difficult for the player to accurately recognize whether the period has occurred. And in this case, if the operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, I thought that the "3B reception period has occurred" because the "reception validity judgment" is not made. There is a concern that the player may misunderstand that it was a misunderstanding, and that the third B reception period will end without the player performing any action (operation).

Therefore, in the 3B reception period, the movement (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tS2 in which the state (3B reception period) in which the "reception valid determination in which the movement by the player is an effective operation" is allowed occurs. Even if there is, the operation (operation) is not regarded as "reception validity judgment" at that time, but when the third B reception period starts (or after that), the third B reception It is desirable to make it possible to make (based on) the "reception validity judgment" for the movement (operation) by the player performed before the period.

However, in this case, as for the detection itself of whether or not the operation (operation) by the player has been performed, is the third B reception period in which the "reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation" is permitted? It will be required to execute it regardless of whether or not it is executed.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 206, even if the operation (operation) by the player is performed shortly before the timing tS2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the movement (operation) by the player is detected in this way, the third B reception period has not yet occurred. Therefore, based on the detection, "reception in which the movement by the player is an effective operation". No "valid judgment" is made. However, the presence of this detection information is left as a memory (history), and after the 3B reception period occurs, the detection information left as the above memory (history) within the 3B reception period. Based on this, the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective action" is made. Then, based on the "reception validity determination" obtained in this way, the third B post-reception effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) is performed shortly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it can be accepted within the 3B reception period. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the post-reception production (3B post-reception production) triggered by this. As a result, even while the so-called "hidden button" effect (first display state) is realized, the difficulty level of accepting the motion can be reduced.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period (more than a predetermined time), it is possible to prevent the production after the 3B reception from being executed. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

It should be noted that the configuration when the operation (operation) is performed shortly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may or may not be applied in the same manner in the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period. You may do so.

At this time, for the operation (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the operation (operation) is not the above-mentioned "second display state" after the occurrence of the 3B reception period. It is desirable to be able to accept (acceptance validity determination) as a valid determination in the above "first display state". According to such a configuration, it is a timing when a little time has passed since the operation (operation) by the player is performed (for example, the timing when the first display state (third B reception period) occurs), and the image is imitated. The reception is judged to be valid while the display is not displayed, and the effect is started after the reception. This suggests that the movement by the player is properly accepted, not the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no movement (operation) even though the image display is displayed. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 206, 212, 213, etc.), the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made while the "first display state" is in the third B acceptance period, and the third B acceptance is received. It was decided that the same mode would appear as the 3B post-acceptance effect according to the acceptance (FIG. 212 and FIG. See 213 etc.). However, acceptance (reception valid judgment) is made when it is in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and it is accepted (reception valid) when it is in the "second display state" within the 3B reception period. It is more desirable to make the production contents different from each other when the judgment) is made, in order to improve the performance as the reception period having the "first display state" and the "second display state". ..

For example, in the above-mentioned production example (FIG. 206, 212, 213, etc.), even if acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period. Similar to the case where acceptance (reception validity judgment) was made while in the "second display state" within the 3B reception period, after the acceptance (reception validity judgment) was made (it was not displayed until then). ) Integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed (from FIGS. 212 (a) to “F1 (FIG. 213 (d1) to FIG. 213)). When the production progresses to "h1))", or when the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F2 (FIG. 213 (d2) to FIG. 213 (h2))"). However, instead of this, if acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, this will be an opportunity after the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made. It is desirable that the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed.

According to such a configuration, from the player's point of view, the acceptance is made in the "first display state", which is relatively difficult to be accepted due to the staging of the "so-called hidden button". After the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made, it becomes possible to show the fact that the situation is successful to the people around (by progressing the production while the image display is not displayed), and the game. You will be able to improve your interest.

However, at this time, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is an integrated image even if it is accepted (reception valid judgment) while it is in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period. It is desirable to display the display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) so that it can be visually recognized while it is not displayed (while it cannot be visually recognized). That is, when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made while the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (while it cannot be visually recognized). If the integrated image display IG is not displayed even after the acceptance is made, does the acceptance period occur as the second B acceptance period, or the third B acceptance period (first display state)? It becomes difficult to distinguish whether or not it occurred. In this regard, even if the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) is referred to as the above-mentioned "No. 1". By making it appear in the same way as when it was accepted in "2 display state", the reception period occurred not as the second B reception period but as the third B reception period (first display state). You will be able to suggest that.

In the example in which these configurations are adopted, if acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made while in the "first display state (see FIG. 212 (a))" within the 3B acceptance period, FIG. 213 (d1). )-(H1) or FIGS. 213 (d2)-(h2), the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It will be done without it. That is, when the reception validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) remains undisplayed in any of the plurality of modes. After the reception, the staging will be started, and if the reception is valid in the second display state, there will be multiple integrated image display IGs (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). After the reception, the effect is started to be executed in the state of being displayed by any of the embodiments.

Or, in the "first display state" of the 3B reception period,
・ Even if acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made, the 3B reception is not displayed after the acceptance (reception valid judgment) is made, without displaying the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). The first period (first state, first timing) when the post-production will be executed, and
-When acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made, integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge) after the acceptance is made (after the timing when the acceptance is made) Image)) is displayed, and the second period (second state, second timing) in which the display of the integrated image display IG and the execution of the effect after the reception of the third B are performed in parallel is further included. You may do it. For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) occurs first, and then the second period (second state, second timing) occurs. According to such a configuration, the effect content differs depending on the timing at which the reception is performed in the first display state, so that the effectability as the reception period having the "first display state" can be improved. It will be expected to be planned.

In the "first display state" of the third B reception period, only at least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing) is included. It may be included.

In the third B reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, when the set time elapses without the movement by the player being accepted (FIG. 208 (f)), it is the same as when the operation is accepted within the third B reception period. Prevented the post-reception effect from being executed (automatic reception effect works). However, the third B reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception effect functions. In this case, the automatic reception is not performed in the first display state, but in the second display state. Further, the first reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception effect functions.

Further, in the third B reception period, the timing at which automatic reception is performed may be different depending on the state of the effect (state that can be set by the player). However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception is performed, the same post-reception production as when the automatic reception is performed in the above "second display state" and the reception is performed within the 3B reception period. It is desirable to start execution.

Further, when the above-mentioned "second display state" occurs in the third B reception period, the third B reception period itself is in a situation where it has already occurred before this, but the gauge image is the same. The display (depiction that reduces the above-mentioned area) may be started from the state where the display area is the maximum value within the frame (the display may be started from the state where the area is already reduced). According to such a configuration, even if the remaining time as the reception period is actually already reduced, the area of the gauge image is displayed from the maximum value, so that the game can be enjoyed. The decrease will be suppressed. It is also possible to make the reception period appear as if it were the first B reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first B reception period and the second B reception period are prepared. Then, in the 1st B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame) is performed regardless of the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective operation" is performed. (Image, gauge image))) must be displayed (see FIGS. 200, 201, etc.), and in the second B reception period, the integrated image display regardless of when the reception validity judgment is made. The IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always not displayed (see FIGS. 203, 204, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods with completely different effects, it becomes possible to give the player a sharp feeling when requesting an action (giving an operation opportunity) to the player. It is expected that the hobby of the game will be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third B reception period, and in the third B reception period, the reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation (effective operation) is performed. Depending on which timing is used, the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) or the integrated image display IG (image display) may be displayed. , Remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "reception validity judgment" is made. It looks as if the "1st B reception period" is occurring, or the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display) regardless of when the "reception validity judgment" is made. (Frame image, gauge image)) is not always displayed. It is now possible to make it appear as if a "second B reception period" has occurred, and the reception period can be extended through the staging that gives such uncertainty. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when it occurs.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 209 and 212 in the 1st B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge) cannot appear in the 3B reception period. It is desirable to make the image)) displayable. That is, the special mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144 (d) can be displayed in the first B reception period according to the above-mentioned effect example, but the special mode appears in the third B reception period. It has become something that cannot be obtained. According to such a configuration, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) has the embodiment (integrated image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a). When it is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1st B reception period or the 3rd B reception period has occurred, and the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) )) Is displayed in the special mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144 (d), it becomes possible to suggest that the first B reception period is occurring.

Further, in the 2nd B reception period, the reception allowable sound is not output, and in the 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It is desirable that the reception permissible sound is output even when the reception is performed without the reception and the effect is executed after the reception. That is, in this case, it can be suggested that the reception period is not the second B reception period but the third B reception period (first display state).

In addition, the "reception sound" that is output in the same mode regardless of the mode (expectation) of the post-reception effect is output during the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, and is not output during the 2nd B reception period. May be good. In the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, it is desirable that the same mode is output as the "reception sound". However, such a "reception sound" does not necessarily have to be output during the first B reception period and the third B reception period.

Further, it is desirable that the disappearance EF effect (for example, the first disappearance-related display SKB1) that cannot appear in the third B reception period can be displayed in the first B reception period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the first B reception period is occurring instead of the third B reception period through the type of the extinct EF effect.

Further, in the first B reception period, it is desirable that the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction-related display SKB2) that may appear in the third B reception period can be displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the first B reception period and the third B reception period has occurred.

In the 1st B reception period, the 2nd B reception period, and the 3rd B reception period, the target to which the operation opportunity is given (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) may be the same or different. May be good. However, if the target to which the operation opportunity is given is different, the operation target display (image display) will be displayed as different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including the first B reception period and the third B reception period are prepared as the reception period. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the first B reception period, the first is in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the reception validity determination. It is possible to perform the 1B post-reception effect, and if the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 3B reception period, the degree of expectation is based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made. It is possible to execute the effect after the reception of the third B in any of a plurality of different modes.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the reception validity determination is made in both the case where the "reception validity judgment" is made within the 1st B reception period and the case where the "reception validity judgment" is made within the 3B reception period. Based on the fact that the Since it is feasible, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the reception validity determination has been made properly (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player).

Further, as described above, in the third B reception period, at which timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) is the reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation (effective operation) is performed. Depending on the case, the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image)) is displayed. , Gauge image)) may not be displayed. In this case, first, when the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, this is used as an opportunity. The disappearance EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of a specific area in which the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. On the other hand, even if the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, this is an opportunity. Therefore, it is desirable to execute the extinction EF effect in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made in the situation where the integrated image display IG is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made even in a situation where the integrated image display IG is not displayed. If the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where the integrated image display IG is not displayed, the first reception period ends without displaying the integrated image display IG, and the disappearance EF. The effect will be performed using at least a part of the area where the integrated image display IG was to be displayed.

At this time, in the 1st B reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination that the movement (operation) by the player is an effective operation (effective operation) is made. It is desirable to do so. By preparing the "1st B reception period" in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed separately from the above-mentioned 3B reception period, it is safe to combine with the configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed. It becomes possible to provide a feeling of directing, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the entertainment interest.

In the first B reception period, when the corresponding post-reception effect is executed in the high expectation mode (FIGS. 210 (f2) to (h2)), the specific mode (FIG. 210) is also used as the extinction EF effect in the third B reception period. (E2) to (g2)) appear, but when the mode is different from the highly expected mode, the specific mode (FIGS. 210 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the extinction EF effect, and a mode different from this (FIG. 210 (g2)) appears. It is desirable that e1) to (g1)) appear or the extinct EF effect itself does not appear. According to such a configuration, when the extinction EF effect is executed corresponding to the 3B reception period, it becomes possible to give an image as if a high expectation effect is being executed, and the game entertainment is lowered. Can be suppressed.

In the first B reception period, the reception permissible sound is output in a plurality of modes having different expectations, but in the third B reception period, the reception permissible sound may be output only in "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the reception allowable sound having the "one aspect" is output, it is conscious that the third B reception period having the effect as a "so-called hidden button" has occurred. Since it becomes possible to attach it, it becomes possible to maintain a suitable feeling of tension. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the first B reception period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that the "one aspect" is output as the aspect having the lowest expectation. In this case, it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained even in a situation where the reception allowable sound is output in the mode with the lowest expectation.

When the specific fluctuation pattern is selected, both the first B reception period and the third B reception period may be sequentially generated within the specific fluctuation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first B reception period occurs after the third B reception period occurs. Further, in this case, the first B reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the second B reception period can occur between the time when the third B reception period occurs and the time when the first B reception period occurs.

Further, it is desirable that the precursory effect output when the first B reception period occurs and the precursory effect output when the third B reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the first B reception period or the third B reception period occurs by the precursory effect.

Further, in the third B reception period, as an extinction EF effect, a specific mode (for example, the second extinction-related display SKB2) appears when there is acceptance, and a mode different from the specific embodiment (for example, the third extinction) is not accepted. It is desirable that the association display SKB3) appears or that no aspect appears. On the other hand, in the first B reception period, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is received appears as the extinction EF effect even if the reception is not performed. That is, in the third B reception period, which has both the effect of the above-mentioned "first B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It can be said that it is more likely to forget to operate (end of the reception period without being accepted) than in the above-mentioned "1st B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3rd B reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the 2nd extinction-related display SKB2) at the time of acceptance will not appear. It will be possible to appeal to the player that he / she is in a situation where he / she has forgotten to operate, and after that, he / she will be able to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become. On the other hand, there is no element that is likely to be forgotten to operate during the 1st B reception period. Nevertheless, if the movement is not accepted, it is possible that the player has made a game choice of "do not move", so for the player who made such a choice. If you make an "appeal that you are in a situation where you have forgotten to operate", the interest in the game may decline. Therefore, in the first B reception period, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is received appears as the extinction EF effect even if the reception is not performed.

In particular, in the first B reception period according to the above-mentioned effect example, the mode of the extinct EF effect differs depending on the mode (expectation degree) of the first B post-reception effect (see FIG. 210). Therefore, in the 1st B reception period, even if there is no reception, if the same mode as when the reception was received as the extinction EF effect appears, after the 1B reception that appeared when the reception was received. It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) related to the production, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the second B reception period according to this embodiment, the player performed in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. It is possible to perform a "reception validity determination" in which the operation by the above is an effective operation, and when the reception validity determination is made, the extinction EF effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" is properly performed (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player). It is expected that the tension as the second B reception period, which secretly asks the player for the movement (gives an operation opportunity secretly), will be maintained even after the reception validity judgment is made. become.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in either the 2nd B reception period or the 3rd B reception period. It is possible to make a reception valid judgment that the action performed by the player in the state is an effective action. Then, in the second B reception period, if the reception validity determination is made so that the operation performed by the player is the effective operation performed in the state where the integrated image display IG) is not displayed, the extinction EF effect is not executed. In the 3rd B reception period, when the reception validity determination is made so that the operation performed by the player in the state where the integrated image display IG is not displayed is the effective operation, the above-mentioned extinction EF effect is executed. did.

According to such a configuration, until the player performs an operation in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize whether the 2nd B reception period or the 3B reception period has occurred, but after the reception validity judgment is made with this as an effective operation, the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period Since it becomes possible to recognize which one has occurred, it becomes possible to encourage the player to perform an action.

Further, when the 4B condition is satisfied, the 4B reception period may be further enabled. Even in this 4B reception period, the operation performed by the player in the state where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is regarded as an effective operation. It is possible to judge whether the reception is valid. During the 4th B reception period, the reception is valid for the operation performed by the player when the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. When the determination is made, the extinction EF effect is executed as in the case of the third B reception period. However, in the 4B reception period, the extinction EF effect is executed in a different manner depending on the mode (expectation degree) of the corresponding 4B post-reception effect. According to such a configuration, until the player performs an operation in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize which of the 2nd B reception period, the 3B reception period, and the 4B reception period has occurred, but after the reception validity judgment is made with this as an effective operation, the 2B reception period and the first In addition to being able to recognize whether the 3B reception period or the 4th reception period has occurred, in the case of the 4th reception period, it will be possible to suggest the degree of expectation. ..

During the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed on the operation receiving unit when the movement by the player is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearance EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the reduction of the area of the gauge image are continued.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples and other examples may be realized by transforming into the following configuration, or the following configuration (reception period) may be realized by another reception period (different reception period) in which the type of production is different after reception. It may be further prepared as a precursor effect display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first B reception period, the second B reception period, and the third B reception period are at least set as the reception period in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation). I have. Of these, during the 1st B reception period and the 3rd B reception period, the extinction EF effect can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player (reception validity determination), and during the 2B reception period. As described above, even if the player accepts the action (operation) (reception validity determination), the extinction EF effect is not executed.

In this regard, if the player accepts the action (operation) during the 1st B reception period (reception validity judgment), the 1B post-reception production is expected based on the reception (reception validity judgment). The disappearance EF effect can be executed in the same mode as the case where the effect is executed in a mode with a low rate of appearance) and the case where the effect after the reception of the first B is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot symbol appears). You may do so. When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 210, any aspect (the aspect shown in FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1), FIGS. 210 (d2) to 210 (d2) to (h1)) is applied as the first B post-acceptance effect. Regardless of whether the aspect shown in h2) appears, and whether or not the acceptance is made within the first B reception period (the aspect shown in FIGS. 210 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF As a production, one predetermined mode will surely appear. That is, the 1st B reception period is an integrated image regardless of when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made (even if acceptance is not made) at any time within the period. The display of the image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continued. In this case, information such as "Which mode was the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed?" Is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided by the disappearing EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will be too complicated. In this regard, in such a first B reception period, any aspect (aspect shown in FIGS. 210 (d1) to (h1), a mode shown in FIGS. 210 (d2) to (h2)) as a post-reception effect of the first B). Regardless of whether or not the crab appears, and whether or not the crab is accepted within the first B reception period (the embodiment shown in FIGS. 210 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF effect is predetermined. By making sure that one aspect appears, the above-mentioned concerns can be resolved.

In addition, when the player accepts the action (operation) during the 3B reception period (reception validity determination), the 3B post-reception production is expected based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). The extinction EF effect can be executed in different modes depending on whether the effect is executed in a mode with a low appearance rate) or in a mode in which the third B post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a high expectation (ratio at which a jackpot symbol appears). You may do so. The 3B reception period has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button", and it can be said that it is positioned as a "difficult reception period" by that amount. It is a game to make it possible to obtain different production information from both the mode as the image display IG (image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode as the disappearance EF effect. It is desirable to give a person a stimulus for staging.

When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 213, the mode as the extinction EF effect that appears when the acceptance is not made is the extinction EF effect that can appear when the acceptance is made. It is desirable to make it different from any of the plurality of aspects of. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the reception has not been made, and the reception period is the staging by the above-mentioned "1st B reception period (so-called normal button production)" and the above-mentioned "2nd B reception". It will be possible to suggest that it had both the effect of the period (so-called hidden button effect).

Further, as described above, in another example for the 3B reception period, when the acceptance is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (摸) after the acceptance is made. The image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will not be displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "Which mode was the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed?" Is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information (expectation information regarding the post-reception production) by the disappearing EF production in order to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, if the player does not accept the action (operation) during the 1st B reception period (reception validity determination), the extinction EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the reception is performed. You may do it. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and if the embodiment cannot appear in the 3B acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "1st B acceptance period (1B acceptance period). It can be suggested that the effect of "the so-called normal button effect" and the effect of the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" were not combined.

In addition, if the player does not accept the action (operation) during the 3B reception period (reception validity determination), the extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner as the mode that appears when the reception is made. You may. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the condition is accepted, so that the effectability as a "so-called hidden button" can be enhanced.

With respect to these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of their configurations to the above-mentioned staging example and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-mentioned staging example or another example thereof.

Next, a case where some of the above modified examples are applied to the above-mentioned staging example will be described. That is, FIG. 214 is a modification of the “effect that appears when acceptance is made or is not accepted during the first B reception period” shown in FIG. 210, and FIG. 215 is shown in FIG. 213. This is a modified example of "the effect that appears when acceptance is made during the 3B reception period or when acceptance is not made". In this modification, the configuration not particularly mentioned is described in "Examples of effects related to the first B reception period (FIGS. 200 to 202, 209, 210)" and "Examples of effects related to the third B reception period (FIGS. 206 to 206). As described above with reference to "208, FIG. 212, FIG. 213)", with respect to each of the above-mentioned different examples applicable to "the production example regarding the first B reception period" and "the production example regarding the third B reception period". Is also applicable.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 214, when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the 1st B reception period (reception validity determination), the 1B post-reception effect is expected based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). When it is executed in a mode with a low degree (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 214 (d1) to (h1)), a mode in which the expected degree (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) is high in the first B post-acceptance effect (see FIGS. 214 (d1) to (h1)). The extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner as in the case of being executed in FIGS. 214 (d2) to (h2). Here, the second extinction-related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 214, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) during the 1st B reception period (reception validity determination) (see FIGS. 214 (d3) to (g3)). As the extinction EF effect, a mode that does not appear when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the first B reception period (reception validity determination) appears. Here, as the extinction EF effect, the third extinction-related display SKB3 is executed.

On the other hand, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the 3B acceptance period (acceptance validity determination), the 3B acceptance is based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). When the post-effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 215 (d1) to (h1)), the third B post-reception effect is expected (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing). The extinction EF effect is executed in a different manner from the case where it is executed in a high mode (see FIG. 215 (d2 to (h2)). Here, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) When executed in a low mode (see FIGS. 215 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction-related display SKB1 is executed as an extinction EF effect, and is executed in a mode with a high expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing). When this is done (see FIGS. 215 (d2 to (h2)), the second extinction-related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) during the 3B reception period (reception validity determination) (see FIGS. 215 (d3) to (g3)). As the extinction EF effect, the mode that appeared when the player's operation (operation) was tentatively accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B reception period appears. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 215 (d3) to (g3), since the first extinction-related display SKB1 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the player accepts the operation (operation) during the thirdB reception period ( Assuming that the reception validity determination) has been made, it becomes possible to recognize that the staging progress shown in FIGS. 215 (d1) to (h1) has occurred. On the other hand, when the player does not accept the action (operation) during the 3B reception period (reception validity determination) and the 2nd extinction-related display SKB2 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the 3B reception period Assuming that the movement (operation) is accepted by the player (reception validity determination), it becomes possible to recognize that the staging progress shown in FIGS. 215 (d2) to (h2) has occurred. ..

In the 1st B reception period related to such a modified example, as an extinction-related display (disappearing EF effect) that appears when acceptance is made, a post-reception effect (after 3B reception) corresponding to the above 3B reception period related to the modified example. The "second extinction-related display SKB2" displayed when the production) is executed in a highly expected manner is used. That is, in this case, in the first B reception period according to the modified example, as long as the reception is made, it becomes possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a manner with high expectation, and the game. You will be able to improve your interest.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third B reception period according to the modified example does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKB2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the first B reception period related to the modified example, the post-reception effect (first B post-reception effect) corresponding to the first B reception period is executed in a mode with low expectation. Even if the "1st extinction-related display SKB1" displayed at the time is used, is it in the state of being accepted during the 1st B reception period related to the modified example, or is the 3B related to the modified example? It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the reception has been made during the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st B reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). It is supposed to be displayed.

It is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the third B reception period related to the modified example. That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st B reception period, the reception period is the effectability of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". It can be suggested that it did not have both the above-mentioned staging by the "second B reception period (so-called hidden button staging)".

Further, it is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKB3" is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the first B reception period according to the modified example. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to more preferably suggest that the first B acceptance period has ended without being accepted.

By the way, for the 3B reception period related to this modification, if acceptance is made while in the "first display state", "integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, frame image,)" When the configuration according to the above alternative example such as "the effect is executed after reception without displaying the gauge image))" is applied, FIGS. 215 (d1) to (h1) or FIGS. 215 (d2) to (h2), etc. The effect progress shown in (1) is performed in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. That is, when the reception validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) remains undisplayed in any of the plurality of modes. After the reception, the staging will be started, and if the reception is valid in the second display state, there will be multiple integrated image display IGs (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). After the reception, the effect is started to be executed in the state of being displayed by any of the embodiments.

It should be noted that even in the third B reception period related to this modification, the player before the timing tS2 when the state (third B reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective operation" is allowed occurs. Even if there is an operation (operation) by, the operation (operation) is not regarded as "reception validity judgment" at that time, but at the time when the third B reception period is started (or after that). ), The configuration according to the above alternative example, which enables the "reception validity determination" (based on) for the movement (operation) by the player performed before the 3B reception period. Alternatively, it is possible to apply the configuration related to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the third B reception period according to the above modification, when a low-expected mode appears as the third B reception effect (FIGS. 215 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction-related display SKB1 is executed as the extinction EF effect. However, the disappearance EF effect itself may not appear.

Further, in the first B reception period according to the above modification, a specific mode appears when there is acceptance as an extinction EF effect (FIGS. 214 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 214 (d2) to (h2)). Although a mode different from the specific mode appears when there is no acceptance (FIGS. 214 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF effect itself may not appear when there is no acceptance.

Further, in the first B reception period according to the above modification, the second extinction-related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (extinction EF effect) when there is acceptance, but it is different from the second extinction-related display SKB2. It may be carried out in an embodiment. For example, even if it is executed in the first extinction-related display SKB1, whether it is in the state of being accepted in the first B reception period or in the state of being accepted in the third B reception period. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize.

Next, an example embodying the above "configuration 5-B" to "configuration 9-B" will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is an effect content (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice, etc. as a post-reception effect) that is advanced when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted. A plurality of reception periods (reception effects) with different types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of a judgment (big hit judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception production), at least the 1st C reception period (1C reception post-production), the 2C reception period (2C reception post-production), and the 3C reception period (3C reception post-production) are set. I have prepared.

With reference to FIGS. 216 to 230, the characteristics of each reception period (reception production) will be described. Regarding each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 215, the 1st C reception period (1C reception post-production), the 2C reception period (2C reception post-production), and the 3C reception period (3C reception post-production). It may be prepared as a reception period different from the production), the 1st C reception period (1C reception post production), the 2C reception period (2C reception post production), and the 3C reception period (production). It may be realized as any one of the 3C post-acceptance production). Further, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily included in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods with reference to FIGS. 215. You may not be prepared.

FIGS. 216 to 218 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 1C is satisfied and the first C reception period (first C reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. 225 and 226 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the first B reception period (first B reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the "first C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the start condition being satisfied (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the first C fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the first C variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the first C variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 225 (a)”. ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ 1C fluctuation pattern ”itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), when the timing tT2 in which the first C predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives (when the condition 1C is satisfied). , Generates the first C reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the production after reception of the first C" is permitted ("Situation shown in FIGS. 209 (b) and (c)"). As a result, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1st C reception period (when the reception validity is determined), the 1C post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (operation receiving unit) is related to the occurrence of such a first C reception period. Operation target display (image display) that suggests (such as), and remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (valid period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. Depiction), disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance EF effect), 1C post-acceptance effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) according to acceptance (reception validity judgment) Are to be performed respectively. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with the passage of time). Although it is displayed as an "integrated image display", it is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the first C reception period occurs at the timing tT2, as shown in FIGS. 216 (b) and 225 (b), (c), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) according to this example. In (1 staging device), "image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated image display IG. The integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tT2, or may appear before timing tT2 and straddle the timing tT2. It may be displayed in. In addition, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (acceptance validity determination) when it is accepted (acceptance validity determination) within the 1st C acceptance period. It is hidden when the 1st C reception period ends without any notice. The first C reception period according to this example ends when the timing tT3 arrives when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 216 (a)).

Further, in the first C reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is any one of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (d)). 225 (b) shows the case where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a). 225 (c) corresponds to the case where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d). Even during the 1st C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c). It may be done.

Then, FIG. 216 assumes a case where "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is performed when the relatively early timing tT2a within the first C reception period arrives. There is. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the first C reception period is terminated and the first C reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tT2a (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception production corresponding to the 1st C reception period (1C post-reception production) will be started to be executed.

An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G1 (FIG. 226 (d1) to FIG. 226 (h1)) is as a post-reception production (1C post-reception production) corresponding to the 1st C reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to “G2 (FIGS. 226 (d2) to 226 (h2)” corresponds to the case where the first aspect having a relatively low expectation is executed is the first. It corresponds to the case where the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period (the first C post-acceptance effect). It may include "0%" and "100%".

In this regard, in the first C reception period, as shown in FIG. 216, at the timing tT2a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the reception of the first C is started according to the acceptance), the “integral”. Not only does it not hide the "image display IG", but it does not make it difficult to see the integrated image display IG.

That is, the first C post-acceptance effect according to this embodiment includes a "first C post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "specific production after the reception of the 1st C" using the body, the lamp for the production, etc.) and the production sound after the reception of the 1st C using the 3rd production device (speaker) are realized as at least a composite production. (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first staging device), the time when the "first post-receipt staging display" as the first C post-receipt staging is started is delayed as compared with other staging devices. Even after the acceptance is made, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is intentionally maintained.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 (FIG. 144). Since the player can easily recognize which of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. It will be like.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period, the "integrated image display" after the acceptance is made. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for displaying the IG in an easily visible manner. However, when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period even though the reception was done and the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) was already executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, "it is delayed to notice the post-reception production in the execution state". There is a concern that it will end up.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 216 (b) and FIG. 226 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tT2a at which the first C reception period ends due to the acceptance of the movement by the player. (When the timing tT2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF)" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "Production)" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance-related display (Disappearance EF production)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (Image display, gauge image display)". Is designed to overlap with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tT2b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the 1st C reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1)) appears as a post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the mode, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIG. 226 (d1) to (h1)). FIGS. 226 (d2) to (h2)) are arranged so that different modes (first extinction-related display SKC1, second extinction-related display SKC2) appear as extinction-related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 226 (e1) and 226 (e2), the "first C post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the extinction-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) appears in the "first extinction-related display SKC1" or the "second extinction-related display SKC2". This makes it possible to infer whether or not the "first C post-acceptance effect display" is executed in a highly expected manner.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 216 (b) and FIG. 226 (f1) or (f2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display related to the disappearance-related display (integrated image display IG). When the timing tT2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the first C reception period serves as a post-reception effect. The execution of "1C post-acceptance effect display UGC1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G1 (FIG. 226 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 226 ( As shown in f1), the first aspect (here, the first C post-receipt staging display UGC1-1 as a cut-in staging by the princess character) is as the first C post-receipt staging display UGC1 corresponding to the first C reception period. In the example in which the effect is displayed and the effect progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G2 (FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception), FIG. 226 (f2). ), The second aspect ((here, the first C post-reception effect display UGC1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the first C post-reception effect display UGC1 corresponding to the first C reception period). It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKC1, second extinction-related display SKC2)" are displayed, the "first C post-acceptance effect display UGC1 (1) "1C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-1" or "1stC post-acceptance effect display UGC1-2") will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the 1st C reception period, the reception in the 1st staging device (staging display device 1600) is performed. Post-production (The UGC1 post-effect display after the reception of the first C can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other production devices, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. Since the staging display UGC1 after the 1st C reception is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player's gaze destination while suggesting that the 1C reception period has already ended. Is expected to be naturally transferred from the "integrated image display IG" to the "1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1 (1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-2)". (Timing tT2c or later).

On the other hand, in the case of "1C post-acceptance effect display UGC1 (1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-2)", the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed. When it is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and "1st C". The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed for the post-reception effect display UGC1 (1st C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception effect display UGC1-2). As a result, even while the execution of "1C post-receipt staging display UGC1 (1st C post-receipt staging display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-receipt staging display UGC1-2)" is started, the integrated image display is performed within the reception period. It is intended to facilitate the recognition of which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "1st C post-receipt staging display UGC1 (1st C post-receipt staging display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-receipt staging display UGC1-2)" is started. As shown in FIG. 216 (b) and FIG. 226 (g1) or (g2), the "1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1 (1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-acceptance effect display UGC1). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”and the“ disappearance-related display ”, the“ integrated image display IG ”is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 216 (b) and FIG. 226 (h1) or (h2), the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display)" is displayed. The "display SKC1 or the second extinction-related display SKC2" will be hidden, and the "first C post-acceptance effect display UGC1 or the first C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-1 or the first" will be hidden under the condition that the visibility is good. 1C After receiving the effect display UGC1-2) ”will be displayed.

In this respect, the "first C post-acceptance effect display UGC1" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (here, the first C post-acceptance effect display UGC1-1 or the first C). It is displayed by any of the effect display UGC1-2) after reception. Therefore, the "first C post-acceptance effect display UGC1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

Further, in the production example (FIGS. 225 and 226) corresponding to the 1st C reception period, when the reception is made within the 1st C reception period and the "1C reception post-reception display UGC1" is executed, the "1st C" is executed. The background image is switched before and after the "post-reception staging display UGC1" is started.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 226 (d) and 226 (e) in which the background image is not switched (timing tT2a to tT2b shown in FIG. 216), the staging display device 1600 (No. 1). Even if there is a change in the effect in the 1 effect device), it becomes possible to suggest that the “1C post-acceptance effect display UGC1” is in a situation where it has not been started yet.

In this production example, the time when the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKC1, second extinction-related display SKC2)" starts to display "first C post-acceptance effect display UGC1" and "background change" (1st extinction-related display SKC1, second extinction-related display SKC2) It was decided to start the display at a time later than the timing tT2b) (timing tT2c), but the time when the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKC1, second extinction-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed (timing tT2b). The display may be started at the same time as (timing tT2b).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 226, as a post-reception effect, the same background image can be switched between the case where the mode with low expectation appears and the case where the mode with high expectation appears, but the degree of expectation is high. It may be possible to switch to a different background image depending on whether a mode with a low degree of appearance appears or a mode with a high degree of expectation appears. Further, the background image is switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the first C reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 216) accordingly. Moreover, various displays are performed in the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tT2c) of the first C post-acceptance effect (first C post-acceptance effect display) according to the acceptance is set to be higher than the received timing tT2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the first C reception period, as shown in FIGS. 216 (b) and 216 (c), the acceptance is based on the acceptance. The first C post-acceptance effect (specific effect after the first C reception) using the second effect device is started to be executed prior to the first C post-acceptance effect (first C post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. I am doing it.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tT2a that was accepted during the 1st C reception period is limited to a part of the 1C post-acceptance effect (the 1C post-acceptance effect display). The effect itself after the reception of the first C can be started without delay from the same timing tT2a.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G1 (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 226 (d1). As shown in the above, the mode in which the "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the first C reception period and the specific staging UTC 1 (first C reception) after the first C reception. As the first C post-reception specific effect UTB1-1), which is a mode with low expectation of the post-specific effect UTC1, it precedes the first C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1) using the first effect device. And the execution is started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G2 (FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), FIG. 226 ( As shown in d2), the mode in which the "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the first C reception period and the specific staging UTC 1 (first) after the first C reception. As the first C post-reception specific effect UTC1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1, the first C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2) using the first effect device. The execution is started prior to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 225, apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the first C reception period is also set in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). The effect within the reception period, which suggests that it is in the generated state, is executed (FIGS. 225 (b) and (c)). For the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low expectation (see FIG. 225 (b)). ) And the high-expected mode (see FIG. 225 (c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, when the player is in the first C reception period in which the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and In the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after that, if the "reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 1st C reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) "integrated image display IG". While the display related to "" is being continued (while it has not yet suggested the degree of expectation as a post-reception effect), different aspects will appear in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) depending on the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device according to the time, rather than paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it will be possible to improve the interest in playing games.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "Specific production UTC1-1 after reception of the 1st C" or "Specific production UTC1-2 after reception of the 1st C" appears as the specific production UTC1 after the reception of the 1st C. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC1 after receiving the first C. For example, it is assumed that only "specific effect UTC1-2 after reception of the first C" is provided as the specific effect UTC1 after the reception of the first C, and the degree of expectation (a big hit is obtained) depending on whether or not the specific effect UTC1 appears after the reception of the first C. Percentage) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "specific effect UTC1-2 after the reception of the first C" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTC1-2 after the reception of the first C" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first C reception period occurs, the timing tT1 shown in FIG. 216 (d) is generated. In, the reception allowable sound is to be started to be output. That is, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the first C reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tT2 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIGS. 225 (b) and (c)") at which the first C reception period occurs. The operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first C reception period, as the reception allowable sound, the first long allowable sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively long time and the first short allowable sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively short time. And are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 216 (d), the output of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are started at the same time, but the output is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at the timing tT2 or later when the first C acceptance period occurs.

Then, in the first C reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the first long allowable sound and / or the first short allowable sound are audibly output, the acceptance is based on the acceptance. Therefore, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound are terminated halfway (the end in the audible output state).

In this regard, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation as shown in FIG. 216 (d) (FIG. 225 (b). ) And the case where it is executed (audible output) in a mode with high expectation (the case shown in FIG. 225 (c)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, they are accepted (reception) unlike the "integrated image display IG". If the validity judgment) is made, it will be executed as if it cannot be confirmed, so there is tension about when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) should be made within the reception period. It is expected that the feeling will be maintained favorably.

In addition, during the 1st C reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the reception allowable sound (1st long allowable sound, 1st short allowable sound) is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway. In addition to making the sound, when the reception is made, the audible output of the effect sound after the reception of the first C is started based on this. The first C post-acceptance effect sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (audible output) and in a mode with a high degree of expectation (audible). It may be output). That is, in this case, in the first C reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance are made. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the staging performed (the staging sound after the reception of the first C).

As shown in FIG. 216 (d), such a 1C post-acceptance effect sound is the same as the “1C post-acceptance effect display UGC1”, such as “integrated image display IG” and “disappearance related display (disappearance EF”). Even after "Direction)" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Further, regarding the 1C post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to “G1 (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G2 (FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

In the 1st C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and one reception is required. Only the permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 1st C reception period, the 3rd effect device can hear not only the 1C post-acceptance effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G1 (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). And the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G2 (FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), the audible output is in the same manner. Is to be done. Then, such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the first C reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the effect is to be performed after the reception, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity judgment) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the fact that there is, it becomes possible to encourage the person to concentrate on the content of the production after the reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 217 assumes a case where "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made when the relatively late timing tT2A within the first C reception period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 217 (a), the first C reception period is terminated and the first C reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tT2A (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception production corresponding to the 1st C reception period (1C post-reception production) will be started to be executed.

In this regard, in the 1st C reception period, even if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C reception period (when acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made at any timing). (Even if there is), basically, the production will be advanced in the same manner as when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tT2a within the first C reception period. Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G1 (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1))" (relatively as a post-reception effect). When the degree of expectation is low) and when the production progresses from FIG. 225 (b) to "G2 (Fig. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production). In the first staging device, the second staging device, and the third staging device, basically, the staging is executed with the contents as explained with reference to FIG. 216 and the like. ..

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217, the gauge image is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. This means that the display area of is further reduced. Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, as shown in FIG. 226 (d), acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made while the first short allowable sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the first short permissible sound is not terminated halfway (intermediate termination of the audible output state) due to the acceptance (reception validity determination).

Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217, the time for displaying the "first C post-acceptance effect display" based on the acceptance (reception validity determination) is shorter than in the case of the example shown in FIG. 216. It will be lost. That is, the "specific effect after the reception of the 1st C" and the "effect sound after the reception of the 1st C" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. On the other hand, the "first C post-acceptance effect display" is terminated (hidden) when the predetermined timing tT4 in the fluctuation pattern arrives, regardless of when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made. It has become a thing. According to such a configuration, it is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension as to when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is to be made within the acceptance period.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 218 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is assumed that (operation) is not performed and acceptance (reception validity judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 218, after the first C reception period occurs, the timing tT3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tT3 (when the first C reception period ends and the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tT2a or The effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tT2A or the like (at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C reception period (or at the time when the effect is started after the reception)). ), As shown in FIG. 226 (d3), not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the first C reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement (operation) in time, it is integrated within the first C reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 226 (e3), the disappearance-related display is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". (Disappearance EF production) has been started.

That is, in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) according to this example, while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed. ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the first C reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the first C reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the first C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. , It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C reception period, the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I'm going to let you. That is, in this case, it is expected that the player feels the possibility that if the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1st C reception period, the expectation is low by the staging after the 1st C reception. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage people to think that they did not have to operate (operate) within the 1st C reception period, and when the operation (operation) is not accepted within the 1st C reception period, the interest in the game is reduced. Will be expected to be suppressed.

However, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st C reception period, the "second extinction-related display SKC2" may be displayed as the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect), or ". A mode different from any of the "first extinction-related display SKC1" and the "second extinction-related display SKC2" may be made to appear.

Further, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st C reception period, when the operation (operation) is accepted for the disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect). It may be performed in a manner that may appear. That is, in this case, when the "first extinction-related display SKC1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 226 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C reception period, the figure is shown in FIG. It means that the production has progressed from 225 (b) to "G1 (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1))" (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations has been executed). Will be. On the other hand, when the "second extinction-related display SKC2" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 226 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C reception period, FIG. 225 ( It means that the production has progressed from b) to "G2 (FIGS. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception production with relatively high expectations has been executed). .. That is, in this case, even if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted in the first C reception period, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the first C reception period ends. Whether the effect after the reception of the first C was executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation or was executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation just by confirming the mode as the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears. Since it becomes possible to recognize the above, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, as shown in FIG. 226 (f3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1 in the figure)", first, "integration" is performed. Hide the image display IG. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 226 (g3), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the first disappearance-related display SKC1))" is not displayed. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the first C reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a) (FIG. 225 (b). (See), as described above, it may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (d) (see FIG. 209 (c)). When such a situation shown in FIG. 225 (c) appears, there is a case where the situation shown in FIG. 225 (b) described above appears and "integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge)". The production will be developed in the same manner except for the aspect as "image)".

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 225 (c) to "G1'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 225 (b) to "G1 (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 225 (c) to "G2'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 225 (b) to "G2 (FIGS. 226 (d2) to (h2))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 225 (c) to "G3'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 225 (b) to "G3 (FIGS. 226 (d3) to (g3))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only.

In the first C reception period related to this effect example, for convenience of explanation, the first C post-reception effect (1C post-acceptance effect display UTC, 1C post-acceptance specific effect UTC, 1C post-acceptance effect sound) is described above. It was decided to execute the same production content (type) as the production after the reception of the 1st B corresponding to the reception period of the 1B. However, it is desirable that the post-reception effect (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect, post-reception effect sound) be different between the 1st B reception period and the 1st C reception period.

Further, in the first C reception period according to this effect example, for convenience of explanation, the extinction-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the extinction-related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned first B reception period. However, the extinction-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the first B reception period and the first C reception period.

FIGS. 219 to 221 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 2C is satisfied and the second C reception period (second C reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the second C reception period (second C reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the "second C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the start condition being satisfied (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second C fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second C variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second C variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 227 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ second C variation pattern ”itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 219 (a), when the timing tU2 in which the second C predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives (when the condition 2C is satisfied). , Generates the above-mentioned 2C reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the production after reception of the 2C" is permitted. As a result, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2C reception period (when the reception validity is determined), the secondC reception post-production is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). become.

However, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the first C reception period occurs, the operation is accepted by the player (reception validity determination) (or the post-reception effect starts to be executed). At the time when the image is displayed, the integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is never displayed.

More specifically, in the second C fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 219 (b) and 227 (b), when the timing tU2 arrives, the second C reception period occurs, and the integrated image display IG (““ "Image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") will be displayed. The second C reception period ends when the timing tU3 arrives when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 219 (a)).

Then, FIG. 219 assumes a case where "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is performed when the relatively early timing tU2a arrives in such a second C reception period. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 219 (a), the second C reception period is terminated based on the fact that the movement (operation) by the player is received at the timing tU2a (the reception validity determination is made). At the same time, the post-reception effect (second C post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the second C reception period will be started to be executed.

In addition, as an example of the production progressing from FIG. 227 (b) to FIG. 227 (c), the second C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second C reception period (“second C post-acceptance effect display” or “second C post-acceptance identification”). This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as "staging", "staging sound after receiving the second B", etc.). The first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, is executed as the second C post-reception effect (“second C post-acceptance effect display”, “second C post-acceptance specific effect”, “second C post-acceptance effect sound”, etc.). The illustration of the case is omitted, and in reality, the production is advanced from FIG. 227 (b) to the situation where the production after the reception of the second C is executed in the omitted mode (the first mode with low expectation). In some cases. However, regarding such a 2C reception period, when the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made, the 2C post-reception effect ("2C post-reception effect display" or "2C post-reception effect display" or " Whether or not the second C post-reception specific effect, the second C post-acceptance effect sound, etc.) are executed in the manner shown in FIG. 227 (c). It may be realized as a type) in which a low expectation mode is not prepared as a specific effect after the reception of the first C and an effect sound after the reception of the first C). The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

In this regard, in this production example (second C reception period), as shown in FIGS. 219 (b) and 227 (c), when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance). The integrated image display IG (“image display” and “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is displayed at the timing tU2a, which is the time when the effect is started after the reception of the second C according to the above. There is no such thing. More precisely, FIG. 227 (c) shows the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tU2c shown in FIG. 219 (c). That is, at the timing tU2a, "2C post-reception effect display UGC2 (group notice effect)" is not executed among the 2C post-acceptance effects, and "2C post-acceptance specific effect UTC2-2" and "2nd C reception" are not executed. The post-directing sound (highly expected mode) "is being executed. According to such a configuration, the effect progresses in the same manner as in the case of the effect after the reception of the first C, so that the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained in the same manner.

Therefore, in this production example (second C reception period), as shown in FIGS. 219 and 227 (b), even if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at any timing within the second C reception period. The above-mentioned disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is not executed. This is because the integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining”) is at the timing when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted (when the effect after the reception of the second C is started according to the acceptance). This is because the time display (frame image and gauge image) ”) is not displayed and it is not necessary to make it difficult to visually recognize.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 219 (b) and 227 (c), when the timing tU2c after the timing tU2a arrives, the player operates within the second C reception period. As a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance, "2C post-reception effect display UGC2 (in the figure, a group notice effect by a ghost character, which is a highly expected aspect). 2C after receiving the effect display UGC2-2) ”is started to be executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 219 (b) and 227 (d), the "second C post-acceptance effect display UGC2" started in this way has a predetermined time from the time when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made. It will be terminated (hidden) when (a certain time) has passed.

In the production example corresponding to the second C reception period (FIG. 227), unlike the case of the first C reception period, the background image is switched when the "second C reception post-reception display UGC2" is executed. There is no such thing.

Further, when the movement by the player was accepted within the second C reception period, as shown in FIGS. 219 (b) and 219 (c), the second staging device was used based on the acceptance. The second C post-acceptance effect (second C post-acceptance specific effect) is started to be executed prior to the second C post-acceptance effect (second C post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 227 (b) to FIG. 227 (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is "ghost". Is displayed as the above-mentioned second C post-acceptance specific effect UTC2 (second C post-acceptance specific effect UTC2-2, which is a highly expected aspect of the second C post-acceptance specific effect UTC2) corresponding to the second C reception period. , The execution is started prior to the second C post-acceptance effect (second C post-acceptance effect display UGC2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the case where the mode with low expectation is executed as the second C post-acceptance effect is omitted, but the "second C post-acceptance effect display" and the "second C post-acceptance specific effect UTC2" are the low expectation modes. It is only executed in, and is basically the same as the case where it is executed in a high expectation mode.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third staging device (speaker) is further prepared. However, when the second C reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound is not output as shown in FIG. 219 (d).

Further, in the first C reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the effect sound after the reception of the second C is started based on this. The second C post-acceptance effect sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (audible output) and in a mode with a high degree of expectation (audible). It may be output).

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 2C reception period, the third staging device can hear not only the 2C post-receipt staging sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an audible output in the same mode regardless of whether the second C post-receipt effect is executed in either the high-expected mode or the low-expected mode.

On the other hand, in FIG. 220 and the example of progressing from FIG. 227 (b) and (e) to FIG. 227 (c), when such a relatively late timing tU2A arrives within the second C reception period, " It is assumed that the reception valid judgment that the action (operation) by the player is an effective action is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 220 (a), the second C reception period is terminated and the second C reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tU2A (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception effect corresponding to the 2C reception period (2C post-reception effect) will be started to be executed.

In this regard, in the 2C reception period, even if acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tU2A within the 2C reception period (when acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made at any timing). (Even if there is), basically, the production will proceed in the same manner as when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made at a relatively early timing tU2a within the second C reception period. Therefore, at the time when the operation by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) (or when the effect after reception is started), the integrated image display IG ("image display" or "remaining time display" ("remaining time display") Frame image and gauge image) ”) are not displayed. Further, in the case of FIG. 220 (a) and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 227 (b) and (e) to FIG. Is omitted (when the expectation is relatively low as a post-reception effect), and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, refer to FIG. 219 and the like. However, the production will be executed with the contents as explained.

In particular, in the 2nd C reception period, unlike the case of the 1st C reception period, the "second C reception post-production display" is accepted in the same way as the "2C reception post-specific production" and the "2C reception post-production sound". Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time when (reception validity judgment) is made, the mode as a post-reception production is also at the timing when acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made. It is the same regardless.

It should be noted that the "second C post-acceptance effect display", "second C post-acceptance specific effect", and "second C post-acceptance effect sound" may be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and they may be mutually executed. It does not have to end at the same time.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 221 and the example in which the production progresses from FIGS. 227 (b) and (e) to FIG. 227 (d), the player performs an operation (operation) within the second C reception period. It is assumed that the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is not made without fail.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 221, after the second C reception period occurs, the timing tU3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted during the second C reception period, no effect related to the end is executed as shown in FIG. 221.

In the second C reception period, only one aspect (in FIG. 227, the integrated image display IGb (see FIG. 144 (b))) is displayed as the image display. The integrated image display IGb is an embodiment that is not displayed during the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period. However, the 2C reception period is the time when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made (or the time when the post-reception production starts to be executed, regardless of the timing when the reception (reception validity judgment) is made. ) Is characterized in that the image display (gauge image) is never displayed. Therefore, in the second C reception period, any aspect may appear as the image display, or it may be displayed in any of a plurality of aspects. Further, during the second C reception period, the image display may not be displayed and the gauge image may be displayed. Further, during the second C reception period, the gauge image may not be displayed, and the image display may be displayed. Further, during the second C reception period, neither the image display nor the gauge image may be displayed.

Further, according to the above-mentioned feature related to the second C reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to concentrate only on the mode as the post-receipt effect without worrying about the mode of the image display (gauge image). become. In this case, even if the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, the 2nd C reception period should not be subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. Is desirable. As a result, the case where the effect is generated after the reception is limited to the case where the player who has confirmed the effect mode during the second C reception period operates the effect, and therefore the second C reception period has ended. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time point or after.

FIGS. 222 to 224 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 3C is satisfied and the third C reception period (third C reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. FIGS. 228 to 230 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the third C reception period (third C reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the "third C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the start condition being satisfied (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the third C fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 3C variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 3C variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 228 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ 3C variation pattern ”itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 222 (a), when the timing tV2 that the third C predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives (when the condition 3C is satisfied). , Generates the above-mentioned 3C reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the production after reception of the 3C" is permitted. As a result, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C reception period (when the reception validity is determined), the 3C reception post-production is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). become.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is set in relation to the occurrence of such a third C reception period. Suggested action target display (image display), remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period) (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with the passage of time), The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to see the image display, and the 1C post-acceptance effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) according to the acceptance (reception validity judgment) are lined respectively. It has come to be. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with the passage of time). Although it is displayed as an "integrated image display", it is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

In this regard, the third C reception period according to this embodiment is the above-mentioned "directing property by the first C reception period (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the production is started after the reception)), the image display and the gauge. The image display and gauge image are displayed at the time when the image is displayed) and the effect according to the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (when the reception is made (or when the production after reception starts)). It is realized as a special production that has both of the effects that have not been done).

More specifically, when the third C reception period in which the player is allowed to accept the operation occurs, first, as shown in FIGS. 222 (b) and 228 (b), the integrated image display IG ("Image display" and "Remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") are displayed (timing tV2). However, the 3C acceptance period is the time when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made (or acceptance) depending on at which timing within the 3C acceptance period the operation is accepted by the player (acceptance validity determination). At the time when the post-effect is started to be executed), there are cases where the image display or gauge image is displayed and cases where the image display or gauge image is not displayed.

As will be described later, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 222 (a) and the like, the player is within the period (first period) from the occurrence of the third C reception period to the timing Y when the predetermined time has elapsed. When the operation is accepted (reception validity judgment) by, the image display or gauge image is displayed at the time when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made (or when the effect after reception is started). If the operation is accepted by the player (acceptance validity determination) within the period from the timing Y to the end of the 3rd C acceptance period (second period), the acceptance (acceptance) is made. At the time when the valid judgment) is made (or when the effect is started after reception), the image display and the gauge image are displayed. However, such an aspect is only an example, and the point is that when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made at the first timing within the 3C acceptance period, the time when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made (or acceptance). At the time when the post-production starts to be executed), the image display and gauge image are hidden (not displayed), and the image is accepted at the second timing different from the first timing within the 3C reception period (reception). When the validity determination) is made, the image display or the gauge image may be displayed at the time when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made (or at the time when the effect is started after the reception).

According to such a 3C reception period, during the period from the occurrence of the 3C reception period to the arrival of the timing Y, even if the reception is made, the corresponding post-3C reception production is integrated. The image display IG will be started to be executed in a non-display state (invisible state), and acceptance has been made from the timing Y until the timing tV3 at which the third C reception period ends arrives. The corresponding 3C post-acceptance production will be started in the state where the integrated image display IG is displayed (as long as at least a part of the integrated image display IG is visible). .. As a result, the third C reception period according to this embodiment is the above-mentioned "directing property by the first C reception period (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the production after the reception is started)), the image display and the gauge. The image display and gauge image are displayed at the time when the image is displayed) and the effect according to the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (when the reception is made (or when the production after reception starts)). It will be realized as a special staging that has both the staging performance that has not been done), and it is expected that this will improve the entertainment of the game.

That is, in this case, the player can visually recognize the mode of the integrated image display IG (image display or gauge image) displayed within the 3C reception period by adjusting the operation timing with respect to the 3C reception period. In order to start executing the 3C post-acceptance effect while the integrated image display IG (image display or gauge image) is still displayed, or to concentrate on the 3C post-acceptance effect. It has become possible to substantially select whether to hide the integrated image display IG (image display or gauge image) and start the production after the reception of the 3rd C. You will be able to improve.

In order to more preferably realize such an effect, during the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) may be in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations. It is displayed in any of the displayed images (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (c)), and FIG. 228 (b) shows an integrated image display IG (image display or frame image). , Gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (a), and FIG. 228 (d) shows an integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image). It is desirable to make it correspond to the case where it is displayed in the mode shown in 144 (c). Even during the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of embodiments including the embodiments shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (d). It may be done.

Then, FIG. 222 shows the above-mentioned "first period (first state) (see, for example, FIG. 228 (b))" of the third C reception period (timing tV2a in the figure). It is assumed that the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is an effective action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 222 (a), the third C reception period is terminated based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is received at the timing tV2a (the reception validity determination is made). At the same time, the post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period (3C post-reception effect) will be started to be executed.

An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (b) to "H1 (FIGS. 229 (d1) to 229 (h1))" is the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" in the third C reception period. As a result of making the "reception validity determination" in the above, it corresponds to the case where the first aspect with a relatively low expectation is executed as the "third C post-reception effect", and from FIG. 228 (b) to "H2 ( In the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 229 (d2) to FIG. 229 (h2)), the "reception validity determination" is made in the above "first period (first state)" of the third C reception period. As a result, it corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the "third C post-acceptance effect". The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, when the "reception validity determination" is made in the above "first period (first state)" of the third C reception period, FIG. 222 (b), FIG. 229 (d1) or ( As shown in d2), at the timing tV2a, which is the time when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the reception of the 3rd C is started according to the acceptance), the “integrated image display IG”. Is hidden and not displayed (made invisible).

According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the third C reception period ("reception validity determination" is made). (Case), the player is in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not displayed (made invisible), and the effect is performed after reception (here, after the reception of the 3rd C). You will be able to enjoy the specific production UTC3).

In this regard, in the third C reception period according to this production example, even if the player performs an operation (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)", the reception is performed. When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tV2a (when the timing tV2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is started as shown in FIG. 229 (e1) or (e2). ..

That is, in the third C reception period according to this example, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted in the above "first period (first state)", when the timing tV2b arrives, "integrally". "Disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is started to be displayed even though "Chemical image display IG (reproduction image display, gauge image display)" is not already displayed (invisible state). At least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is designed to do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest that the post-acceptance effect is being executed as the movement by the player is properly accepted.

In addition, in the 3C reception period, the image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time of the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the production is started after the reception)). If the acceptance is made during the above "1st period (1st state)" that provides no directing performance, which of the 2nd C reception period and the 3rd C reception period is the acceptance? Although it is difficult to recognize, it is possible to recognize that the reception has been made during the 3C reception period by the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2C reception period. It will be like.

Further, in the third C reception period, a mode with a low expectation (FIGS. 229 (d1) to (h1)) appears as an effect after the reception of the third C, and a mode with a high expectation (FIGs. 229 (d2) to (h2)). The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as in the case where appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1st C reception period (when the mode of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), the “disappearance” is performed after the reception is made within the 3rd C reception period. Since it is less important to pay close attention to the "related display (disappearing EF effect)", the fact that the image display (gauge image) is not displayed is combined with the fact that the effect display UGC after the 3rd C reception is focused on what kind of aspect will appear. You will be able to make it.

Further, in the 3C reception period related to this production example, a post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1st C reception period is expected as an extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when acceptance is made. The "second extinction-related display SKC2" displayed when executed in a high-degree manner is used. That is, in this case, during the 3C reception period, as long as the reception is made, it becomes possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a highly expected manner, and the entertainment of the game is improved. You will be able to plan.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third C reception period does not necessarily have to be the "second disappearance-related display SKC2". For example, as an extinction-related display corresponding to the 3C reception period (disappearance EF effect), it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1C post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the 1st C reception period is executed in a mode with low expectation. The "first extinction-related display SKC1" may be used, or an aspect that does not correspond to the first C reception period may be used as the extinction-related display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 222 (b) and FIG. 229 (f1) or (f2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display related to the disappearance-related display (integrated image display IG). When the timing tV2c within the period in which the mode) appears, after the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player within the third C reception period. The execution of "3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" as an effect is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (b) to "H1 (FIGS. 229 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 229 ( As shown in f1), the first aspect (here, the third C post-receipt staging display UGC3-1 which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the third C post-receipt staging display UGC3 corresponding to the third C reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (a) to “H2 (FIGS. 229 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 229 (f2). As shown in, the second aspect (here, the third C post-receipt staging display UGC3-2, which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the third C post-receipt staging display UGC3 corresponding to the third C reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed and the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)" is displayed, the "third C post-acceptance effect display UGC3 (" third C. "Post-reception effect display UGC3-1" or "3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2") will be started to be executed.

In this regard, the "3C post-receipt staging display UGC3 (" 3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-1 "or" 3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-2 ") is the" disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2). Is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the displayed area (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), and is displayed behind the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)". The "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)" is preferentially displayed. In this way, by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the gaze target (3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3), further concentration can be promoted.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "3C post-receipt staging display UGC3 (3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-1 or 3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-2)" is started. , FIG. 222 (b) and FIGS. 229 (g1), (h1) or (g2), (h2), the "3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3 (3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3-1). Or, while the "3C reception post-reception display UGC3-2)" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)" is hidden, which makes it easy to see. Based on this, the display related to "3C post-receipt staging display UGC3 (3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-1 or 3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-2)" is performed.

In this respect, the "third C post-acceptance effect display UGC3" is a plurality of modes (here, the third C post-acceptance effect display UGC3-1) having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement (operation) by the player. Alternatively, it is displayed by any of the 3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3-2). Therefore, the "third C post-acceptance effect display UGC3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In this effect example, the "3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3" is displayed at a later time (timing tV2c) than the time when the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)" is started to be displayed (timing tV2b). However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tV2b) as the display start time (timing tV2b) of the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)".

In this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 222 (b) and 222 (c), the acceptance is based on the acceptance. The third C post-receipt effect (specific effect after the third C reception) using the second effect device is started to be executed prior to the third B post-reception effect (third B post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. I am doing it.

According to such a configuration, even if the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) performs the extinction-related display and then the effect display after the third C reception is performed, the effect after the third C reception is performed. As for itself, the execution can be started without delay from the same timing tV2a.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (b) to "H1 (FIGS. 229 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 229 (d1). As shown in the above, the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the third C reception period, and the third C post-reception specific effect UTC3 (third reception post-specific effect). As the third C post-reception specific effect UTC3-1), which is a mode with low expectation of the UTC3, the thirdC post-acceptance effect (3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3-1) using the first effect device is executed prior to the process. It is supposed to be started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (a) to "H2 (FIGS. 229 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), FIG. 229 ( As shown in d2), the mode in which "kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the third C reception period, and the specific effect UTC 3 (after the third C reception) corresponds to the third C reception period. As the third C post-receipt specific staging UTC3-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific staging UTC3, it precedes the third C post-receipt staging (3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-2) using the first staging device. It is designed to start execution.

In the production example shown in FIG. 229, when the third C reception period is in the above "first period (first state)" (FIG. 229 (b)), and in the third C reception period, the above "second". The reception period suggesting that the third C reception period has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display 1610 (second staging device) both in the "period (second state)" and in (FIG. 229 (c)). The internal production is to be executed. For the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b)). ) And the high expectation mode (see FIG. 228 (d)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, when the player is in the third C reception period in which the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub. In the liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after that, when the "reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made during the 3C reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) "integrated image". The "display IG" is hidden (while it has not yet suggested the degree of expectation as a post-receipt effect), and the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device according to the time, rather than paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In this staging example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "3C post-acceptance specific staging UTC3-1" or "3C post-acceptance specific staging UTC3-2" appears as the 3C post-acceptance specific staging UTC3. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC3 after the reception of the third C. For example, it is assumed that only the "3C post-acceptance specific staging UTBC-2" is provided as the 3C post-acceptance specific staging UTC3, and the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on whether or not the "3C post-acceptance specific staging UTC3-2" appears. May be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "specific effect UTBC-2 after the reception of the 3rd C" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTBC-2 after the reception of the 3rd C" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the third C reception period occurs, the timing tV1 shown in FIG. 222 (d) is generated. In, the reception allowable sound is to be started to be output. The reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3C reception period is audible in a form that straddles both the timing tV2 at which the 3C reception period occurs and the timing Y at which the above "first period" shifts to the "second period". It is output, and the operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output. However, the reception allowable sound may be audibly output in a form straddling the timing Y, and the timing tV2 may not necessarily be audibly output in a form straddling the timing tV2.

Here, during the 3C reception period, the 3rd permissible sound, which is different from both the 1st long permissible sound and the 1st short permissible sound, is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It becomes possible to suggest that a third C reception period having a plurality of effects is occurring (or is occurring) instead of a period. However, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period may be executed by either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

Then, during the 3C reception period, if the movement is accepted by the player while the reception allowable sound (here, the 3rd allowable sound) corresponding to this is audibly output, the acceptance is made. Based on this, the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway (the halfway termination of the audible output state), and this also causes a third C reception period having a plurality of effects, instead of the above first C reception period. Be able to suggest (or what is happening). However, the acceptance allowable sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period may also be terminated halfway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 222 (d), the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3C reception period (here, the third allowable sound) is executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation. It is desirable to have a case (when shown in FIG. 228 (b)) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed (audible output) in a mode with high expectation (when shown in FIG. 228 (d)).

As shown in FIG. 222 (d), the effect sound after the 3C reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" as in the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3". Will continue to run for a relatively long time after is hidden. Further, regarding the third C post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (a) to “H1 (FIGS. 229 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (a) to "H2 (FIG. 229 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 3C reception period, the 3rd effect device can hear not only the 3C post-acceptance effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (b) to "H1 (FIGS. 229 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). And the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (b) to "H2 (FIGS. 229 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance production), the audible output is in the same manner. Is to be done. Then, such a "reception sound" is accepted (reception validity determination) in a reception period different from the 3C reception period (for example, the 1st C reception period or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). Even if it is, it will be audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the effect is to be performed after the reception, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity judgment) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the fact that there is, it becomes possible to encourage the person to concentrate on the content of the production after the reception.

On the other hand, the production is directed from FIG. 223 and FIGS. 228 (b) and (c) to "H3 (FIG. 230 (d3) to (h3))" or "H4 (FIG. 230 (d4) to (h4)). An example of progress is that during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the third C reception period (timing tV2A in the figure), "the operation (operation) by the player is effectively operated". It is assumed that the reception validity judgment is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 223 (a), 230 (d3) to (h3), or 230 (d4) to (h4), the movement (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tV2A. Based on (the reception validity determination has been made), the 3C reception period is terminated, and the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started to be executed.

In this regard, in the third C reception period, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the third C reception period (shown in FIG. 228 (c)). Even if the acceptance is made in the above-mentioned state), after the acceptance is made, basically, it is within the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" within the third B reception period. The production will proceed in the same manner as when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made (when the acceptance is made in the state shown in FIG. 228 (b)). Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 223 (a), when the effect is advanced in a manner having a relatively low expectation as the effect after reception from FIG. 228 (c) (“H3 (FIG. 230 (d3) to”). (H3)) ”) and when the production progresses in a manner with relatively high expectations as a post-acceptance production from FIG. 228 (c) (“H4 (FIG. 230 (d4) to (H4)) ”), and in the first staging device, the second staging device, and the third staging device, basically, with reference to FIG. 222 and the like. The production will be executed with the contents as explained.

However, as described above, the third C reception period according to this embodiment is the above-mentioned "effect by the first C reception period (the effect in which a model image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect starts to be executed". As a special effect that has both the above-mentioned effect (the effect that the image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the effect after reception starts). It will be realized, and if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the above "second period (second state)" within the third C reception period (shown in FIG. 228 (c)). (When acceptance is made in the above-mentioned state), the staging by the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" (the staging in which the image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the post-receipt staging starts) appears. It has become a thing.

Therefore, it is clear when "FIG. 230 (d3) to (h3) or (d4) to (h4)" is compared with "FIG. 229 (d1) to (h1) or (d2) to (h2)". As is the case, when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the third C acceptance period (acceptance is performed in the state shown in FIG. 228 (c)). If this is done), the integrated image display IG will not be hidden and the display state will be continued at the time when the effect is started after the reception of the 3rd C.

It should be noted that such an integrated image display IG is provided at the time when the "third C post-acceptance effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" starts to be executed (see FIG. 223, FIG. 230 (f3) or (f4)). Will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed. The integrated image display IG is not displayed with priority for the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" and is displayed behind it, but for the "third C reception post-reception display UGC3 (conversation notice)". Priority display is provided, which makes it easier to recognize which mode was displayed during the reception period.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the third C reception period, thus "after the third C reception". When the display related to the staging display UGC3 (3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-1 or 3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-2) is started, FIG. 223 (b), FIG. 230 (g3) or (g4) As shown in the above, while the "3C post-receipt staging display UGC3 (3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-1 or 3C post-receipt staging display UGC3-2)" is displayed, first, "integration". Of "Image display IG" and "Disappearance-related display", "Integrated image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 223 (b) and FIG. 230 (h3) or (h4), the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display)" is displayed. "Display SKC2" will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-" will be hidden. 2) ”will be displayed.

Other production modes (for example, post-reception specific production, disappearance-related display, post-reception display production, permissible sound, post-reception production, etc.) when acceptance is made in the second period (second state) within the 3C reception period. The reception sound and the like) are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 229 (or the same as the production example shown in FIG. 213), so the description here will be omitted.

In the production example corresponding to the 3C reception period (FIGS. 228 to 230), even if the reception is made within the 3C reception period and the "3C reception post-reception display UGC3" is executed, the "first" is performed. The background image is not switched before and after the start of "3C After reception of effect display UGC3". According to such a configuration, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the case where the acceptance is made in the first C reception period and the case where the acceptance is made in the second period within the third C reception period. It is common in that the production is started after reception, but by checking whether the background image changes according to the reception, the above 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are common. It becomes possible to recognize which of the above has occurred. On the other hand, in the case where the acceptance is made during the 2C reception period and the case where the acceptance is made in the 1st period within the 3C reception period, the reception is performed while the integrated image display IG is not displayed. It is common in that the post-production starts to be executed, but by confirming whether or not the "disappearance-related display" is executed according to the acceptance, the above 2C reception period and the 3C reception period are confirmed. It becomes possible to recognize which of the above has occurred.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the "3C reception post-reception display" is received (reception valid judgment) from the time when the "3C reception post-reception specific production" and "3C reception post-reception sound" are accepted. Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time), the mode as the post-reception effect is the same regardless of the timing when the reception (reception validity determination) is made.

It should be noted that the "3C post-acceptance effect display", "3C post-acceptance specific effect", and "3C post-acceptance effect sound" may be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and they may be mutually executed. It does not have to end at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 224 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228 (c) to "H4 (FIGS. 230 (d5) to (g5))" are operations by the player within the 3C reception period. It is assumed that (operation) is not performed and acceptance (reception validity judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 224, after the third C reception period occurs, the timing tV3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tV3 (when the third C reception period ends and the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is no longer permitted), the timing tV2A or the like is used. FIG. 230 (d5) is the same as the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time of (when the operation (operation) is accepted by the player in the second period within the third C reception period). As described above, not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 3C reception period ends, it is integrated within the 3C reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 230 (e5), the disappearance-related display is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". (Disappearance EF production) has been started.

That is, in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) according to this example, while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed. ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the 3C acceptance period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the third C reception period has expired. In addition, even when the 3C reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. , It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I'm going to let you.

It is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the first C reception period. That is, in this case, even if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period, the reception period is the above-mentioned "directing property (at the time when acceptance is made) by the 1C reception period (acceptance). Or, the effect of displaying the image or gauge image at the time when the effect is started after reception) and the effect of the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time of acceptance (or reception)). It can be suggested that the staging had both the imitation image display and the staging property in which the gauge image was not displayed) at the time when the post-effect was started to be executed.

Further, it is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKC3" is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the thirdC reception period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to more preferably suggest that the third C acceptance period has ended without being accepted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (f5), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (third disappearance-related display SKC3 in the figure)", first, "integration" is performed. Hide the image display IG. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 230 (g5), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKB3))" is not displayed. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the third C reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a) (FIG. 228 (b), (C)), it may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (c) (see FIGS. 228 (d) and (e)) as described above. When the situation shown in FIGS. 228 (d) and 228 (e) appears, the situation shown in FIGS. 228 (b) and 228 (c) described above appears and the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display IG) The effect is different only in the mode as "image display, frame image, gauge image)", and the production is advanced in the same mode other than that.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 228 (d) to "H1'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 228 (b) to "H1 (FIGS. 229 (d1) to (h1))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 228 (d) to "H2'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 228 (b) to "H2 (FIGS. 229 (d2) to (h2))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 228 (e) to "H3'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 228 (c) to "H3 (FIGS. 230 (d3) to (h3))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 228 (e) to "H4'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 228 (c) to "H4 (FIGS. 229 (d4) to (h4))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 228 (e) to "H5'", the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 228 (c) to "H5 (FIGS. 230 (d5) to (g5))". The mode of "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only.

In the 3C reception period related to this effect example, for convenience of explanation, the 3C post-reception effect (3C post-acceptance effect display UGC, 3C post-acceptance specific effect UTC, 3C post-acceptance effect sound) is described above. It was decided to execute the same production content (type) as the production after the 3B reception corresponding to the 3B reception period. However, it is desirable that the post-reception staging (post-reception staging display, post-reception specific staging, post-reception staging sound) has different staging contents (types) between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

Further, in the third C reception period according to this effect example, for convenience of explanation, the extinction-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the extinction-related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned third B reception period. However, the extinction-related display does not necessarily have to be the same between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which the first B reception period to the third B reception period are prepared, the excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect content (cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc. as the post-reception effect) to be performed when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted is a notice effect (expectation suggestion effect). There are multiple reception periods (1st C reception period to 3rd C reception period) with different types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of the type according to the result of the judgment (directing judgment). It has become.

In this regard, during the 1st C reception period to the 3rd C reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display (after the 1st C reception to the 3rd C reception) is displayed based on the acceptance. The effect display) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Of these, during the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, not only the post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related display). "Disappearance EF production)" is made to appear further. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display (or gauge image) even after the acceptance has been made, and the image display (or gauge image) has been performed. By making it difficult to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) until the image is hidden (disappearance-related display), the visibility is reduced. It is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally transferred from the "image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-reception effect display". It should be noted that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be used in common for a plurality of reception periods in which the content of the effect is different when the effect is received (FIG. 226 (FIG. 226). See e2) and FIG. 229 (e2) and the like).

However, since the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed within the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, the image is displayed even after the acceptance is made. And when the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception effect display according to the reception is in the displayed state, and there is a concern that the game interest will decline. be. In this regard, when acceptance is made in either the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period (2nd period), the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as "image display and remaining time". While the display (frame image, gauge image) is difficult to see (disappearance-related display), it is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception staging display is "image display and rest". The time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed while the mode (disappearance-related display) that makes it difficult to see is displayed. That is, in this case, after the movement is accepted by the player, the reception is accepted while the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears. The transition from the front display (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception effect display) will be realized.

In addition, both "a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on acceptance. Common in terms of points. However, "a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is shown in, for example, FIG. 226 (e1) and FIG. 230 (e3). As shown above, when the image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears to be difficult to see. Is to be done. On the other hand, the "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (f1) and FIG. 230 (f3), a model image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in the situation where it is displayed, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image).

In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, when acceptance is made in the first period of the third C reception period, the disappearance-related display and the post-reception effect display are displayed as an image as shown in FIG. 229 (e1) and the like. And since the display is started while the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is already hidden, the player concentrates on "what kind of aspect will appear as the effect display after reception". You will be able to do it. In addition, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed by adjusting whether the operation is accepted in the first period or the second period within the third C reception period. The post-reception effect display is executed after the reception is continued, or the post-reception effect display is executed after the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden. You will be able to choose whether to start or not, and you will be able to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, regarding "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)", it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). As a method of "appearing like this", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In addition to the method realized by giving priority to the image display different from that (displayed in the front layer), the image display and the remaining time are displayed by an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying an image (moving image) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, it is not an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt a method of changing (etc.). On the other hand, as for the "post-reception effect display", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image) , Gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method realized by displaying "Post-reception effect display" (displayed on the rear layer), the image display is displayed at least while the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in the area other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display). A method of displaying an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the image, and the display of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing a numerical value (permeability, etc.) related to the characteristic.

In addition, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the "reception" before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in a situation where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are the above-mentioned "image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). ) Is difficult to see due to the "disappearance-related display", so while making it possible to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the "post-reception effect display" Is in a state where it can appear soon, so that the player should be prepared in advance to change the gaze destination from the "difficult to see image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)". You will be able to urge.

In addition, when it is accepted during the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period (2nd period), it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display). Can be displayed even after the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period when the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the effect of the "post-reception effect display" in a wider range. Therefore, the change in the effect during such a display period will improve the entertainment interest of the game. You will be able to do it.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first C reception period and the third C reception period, as shown in FIGS. 226 and 230, "the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to visually recognize. Regarding the "mode (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in the area that is not displayed. Then, in the area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed at least in a part thereof, but the "image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize". (Disappearance-related display) "is displayed so that at least a part of the" post-reception effect display "is difficult to see (for example, it is displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) makes it difficult to visually recognize not only the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the effect until the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the effect when the display of "post-reception effect display" starts. It will be expected to improve both sex and sex.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the "post-reception effect display" before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed after the reception is made is displayed. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect), it is not difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-acceptance staging prior to this without disturbing the staging performance of the first staging device.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is based on the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). Also, the previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) is completed.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated staging in the first staging device can enjoy the post-receipt staging by the second staging device having a simpler staging. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment for various types of players.

Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the image display will be displayed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. .. In this case, the dynamic display of the image display is not finished (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) has appeared since it was accepted. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st C reception period and the 3C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a simulated image display but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We decided to make it difficult to see the image as well. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after it is accepted, it is possible to suppress the appearance as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the 3C reception period among the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods, the pachinko machine 1 is based on the fact that the reception is performed. Although it is possible to display the "3C post-receipt effect display UGC3", the above-mentioned embodiment (second extinction) corresponding to the first C reception period as an extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) separately from the thirdC post-reception effect display UGC3. The related display SKC2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second extinction-related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear whether the first C or the third C post-acceptance effect display appears, but when the first extinction-related display SKC1 appears, It will be possible to infer that the effect display UGC1 will appear after the reception of the first C.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed in an area including at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed (priority display). ). However, the effect using the effect device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen should be executed at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in front view. It is also possible to realize by.

Even if the same mode (second extinction-related display SKC2) appears as the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the type of reception period is different, the jackpot symbol will be stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable that the ratios (expectations) are different.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device can be executed, and the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) can be executed using the second effect device. During the period, in the first staging device, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relative. There are some conditions that are difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), Which mode has appeared. In addition, during the execution period of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device, it is relatively difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). As a result, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift the gaze target from the "first staging device" to the "second staging device".

In the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is a continuous display (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device is used. The post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) is neither an image display displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor an effect executed at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view. It is a thing.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the post-acceptance effect display is started to be displayed after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but is displayed at the appearance timing of the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may want to start.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area in which the image display is displayed" tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

Further, as described above, the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment are a plurality of modes (integrated image) having different expectations as an integrated image display IG. Display IGa to IGd) can be displayed. Then, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode may be maintained and continued even after the reception, including the display position, size, and dynamic depiction. Even after it is done, it is possible to recognize in what mode the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed within the reception period.

As described above, the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, frame image)" may be displayed separately. Only one of the gauge images) ”may be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the case where the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are in the non-display state may be in a state where the player cannot see them. For example, it includes the case where the image is displayed on the layer, but the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" cannot be visually recognized by giving priority to another image display. It means. However, if at least a part of the "image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" can be visually recognized from the player side, this is the "image display" and "remaining time display". (Frame image, gauge image) "is nothing but visible, so the" image display "and" remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) "are hidden. However, it can be said that the display is being continued.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the specific effect after reception may be realized not by the second effect device but by the first effect device (in the display screen of the effect display device 1600).

Further, in the first C reception period, the second C reception period, and the third C reception period, the targets of the movements (operations) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different movements may be required. However, when different operations are required, the operation target display (image display) and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are also displayed as different displays.

By the way, if it is desired that acceptance (acceptance validity determination) be made in the first period (first state) of the thirdC acceptance period, the reception validity determination is made for the player until the timing Y arrives. Will be required to be done. However, assuming that the 3C reception period is set as a "valid period that continues for 3 seconds", the 1st period (1st state) can only have a time of about 1 second. Will be. That is, in this case, it is assumed that the player operates (operates) a little before the occurrence of the third C reception period due to the impatience caused by having to operate (operate) within such a short time. To. In this case, even if an attempt is made to redo the operation, if the timing Y has already arrived by that time, there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced due to the inability to play the game as desired.

Therefore, in the 3C reception period, the movement (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tV2 in which the state (3C reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective operation" is allowed occurs. Even if there is, the operation (operation) is not regarded as "reception valid judgment" at that time, but when the 3C reception period starts (or after that), the 3C reception is received. It is desirable to make it possible to make (based on) "reception validity judgment" targeting (based on) the movement (operation) by the player performed before the period.

However, in this case, as for the detection itself of whether or not the operation (operation) by the player has been performed, is the third C reception period in which the "reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation" is permitted? It will be required to execute it regardless of whether or not it is executed.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 216, even if the operation (operation) by the player is performed shortly before the timing tV2, this is detected. However, at the time when the movement (operation) by the player is detected in this way, the third C reception period has not yet occurred. Therefore, based on the detection, "reception in which the movement by the player is an effective operation". No "valid judgment" is made. However, the presence of this detection information is left as a memory (history), and after the 3C reception period occurs, the detection information left as the above memory (history) within the 3C reception period. Based on this, the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective action" is made. Then, based on the "reception validity determination" obtained in this way, the third C post-reception effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) is performed shortly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it can be accepted within the 3C reception period. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the post-reception production (3C post-reception production) triggered by this. As a result, even while the above-mentioned effectability (first period) is realized, the difficulty level of accepting the motion can be reduced.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period (more than a predetermined time), it is possible to prevent the production after the 3C reception from being executed. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

It should be noted that the configuration when the operation (operation) is performed shortly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period may or may not be applied in the same manner during the 1st C reception period and the 2nd C reception period. You may do so.

At this time, for the operation (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, the operation (operation) is referred to as the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" after the occurrence of the 3C reception period. It is desirable to be able to accept (acceptance validity determination) as a valid determination in the above "first period (first state)" instead of ". According to such a configuration, the reception valid determination is made at the timing when a little time has passed since the operation (operation) by the player is performed, and the effect after the reception is started to be executed. This suggests that the movement by the player is properly accepted, not the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no operation (operation) even though the reception period has occurred. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to improve your hobby.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as a reception period in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination), a plurality of reception periods including the second C reception period and the third C reception period are included. We have a reception period. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (the first C post-reception effect corresponding to the 1st C reception period). ) Is started to be executed, the motion target display (here, the image display that imitates the target of the motion (operation) by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations (FIGS. 144 (a) to (1)). d))) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see FIG. 230), and during the 2nd C reception period, "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" When the above-mentioned post-reception effect (second C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 2nd C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the operation target display (here, the operation by the player (here, the operation by the player (here)) is performed. An image display (see FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d)) that imitates the target of the operation) and has a plurality of modes having different expectations may not be hidden and may not be displayed. (Regardless of the timing of acceptance, the image display is hidden when the post-acceptance effect starts to be executed) (see FIG. 227).

According to such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed, the operation target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the operation by the player and have different expectations). When the image display (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) having the above is visible, and when the operation target display (here, the target of the operation by the player is imitated and the degree of expectation is high). Since there are cases where the image display (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) having a plurality of different modes is not visible, there is a feeling of tension after the post-reception production is started. Will be expected to be suitably maintained.

Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception is performed according to the timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) in which the "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective operation" is performed. The operation target display (see FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d)) is hidden at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) based on the validity determination is started to be executed. When it is displayed without being displayed (see FIG. 230) and when the operation target display ((see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d))) is hidden (see FIG. 229). See).

That is, from the player's point of view, the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 228 (d))" out of the plurality of modes (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)). When it is done, it is better to keep displaying the post-reception effect (the 1st C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 1st C reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" even after the execution is started. It can be said that it is certainly preferable in planning. However, when the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (during the third C reception period). If this is displayed even after the corresponding 3C reception post-production) is started, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (third C post-reception staging corresponding to the third C reception period), the image display is "a first mode with low expectation" within the valid period (third C reception period) (FIG. 228 (b)). (See) ”and“ Second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228 (d)) ”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations). There is a possibility that it will be executed in a lesser manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone. At this time, if the image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", it is clear that the game entertainment is adversely affected. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the image display. On the other hand, even when the post-reception effect (third C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the third C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the "second mode with high expectation (Fig.)" If the image display continues to be displayed in "228 (d))", it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-reception staging being executed in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the image display.

Alternatively, even when the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", the post-reception effect is "a mode with low expectation" among the players. As an "excuse" when it is executed in, at the time when the effect is started after the reception, the image display is not hidden and the display state is continued. It seems that there are people who think, and even if the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228 (d))", some players will have a post-reception effect. In order to suppress "irritability" when it is executed in "a mode with low expectation", the image display is hidden and invisible at the time when the production is started after the reception. There seems to be someone who wants to wake up.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, the player can perform the operation through the timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) in which the “reception validity determination” is made within the third C reception period. Whether to start the post-reception effect while the image display is displayed (see FIG. 230) or to start the post-reception effect when the image display is hidden and invisible (Fig. 229). Since it becomes possible to substantially select (see), it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

Further, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228 (b), and FIG. 228 (d)). It is not displayed by any of the integrated image display IGc shown in (2) (in the example shown in FIG. 227, the integrated image display IGb), and the "reception validity determination" is made at any timing. Even so, the operation target display is not displayed and is always hidden at the time when the post-reception effect (second C post-acceptance effect) based on the reception validity determination is started. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the 2nd C reception period or the 3rd C reception period has occurred from the time when the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs. Therefore, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

As for the 3C reception period, the same post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed even if the player does not perform the operation (operation). (It may be the target for which the above-mentioned automatic reception function is enabled). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception effect is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the operation target display (image) at the time when the 3C post-reception effect is executed. It is desirable that the display) is always displayed. That is, in this case, even if the effect after the 3rd C reception is started by the automatic reception function without the player noticing, the operation target display (image display) is in any mode within the 3C reception period. You will be able to easily recognize whether it was displayed.

Further, when the "third C reception period" is the target of the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared depending on the effect mode or the like as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated. However, even if the automatic reception function is enabled at any timing, when the post-3C reception effect is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the first It is desirable that the operation target display (image display) is always displayed at the time when the effect is executed after the 3C reception.

However, during the 2nd C reception period, when the player does not perform the operation (operation), the same post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect) as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable not to do this (it is not the target for which the above-mentioned automatic reception function is enabled).

Further, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, when the operation target display (image display) is continuously displayed and the third C reception post-effect is started to be executed (see FIG. 230), the operation is performed. Regardless of whether the target display (image display) is hidden and the 3C post-acceptance effect is started (see FIG. 229), the 3C post-acceptance effect (3C) The mode of itself is the same (such as the specific effect UTC3 after reception, the effect display UGC3 after reception of the 3rd C, and the effect sound after reception of the 3rd C). Therefore, it becomes possible to select and play the effect mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the effect after the reception of the third C.

Further, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, when the operation target display (image display) is continuously displayed and the third C reception post-effect is started to be executed (see FIG. 230), the operation is performed. Regardless of whether the target display (image display) is hidden and the third C reception post-production start (see FIG. 229), the same mode as the disappearance-related display (second). The disappearance-related display SKC2) is displayed. As a result, regardless of the mode in which the production is advanced, it is possible to preferably suggest that the acceptance is properly performed during the 3C reception period.

In the above-mentioned production example, a first C reception period is further prepared in addition to the second C reception period and the third C reception period, and in the first C reception period, the reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation will be determined. Even if it is performed at the timing of, the operation target display is not hidden and the display is always continued at the time when the post-receipt effect based on the reception validity determination is started. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the directing performance of the 1st C reception period and the directing performance of the 2nd C reception period, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. ..

Further, in the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228 (b), and FIG. 228 (d)). It can be displayed in a mode different from any of the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 225 (in the example shown in FIG. 225 (c), the integrated image display IGd). That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period has occurred from the time when the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs. Therefore, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is also displayed by an embodiment that can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228 (b)). It has become something that can be done. That is, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period has occurred. The tension within the period will be suitably maintained.

In the third C reception period, the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 228 (d) is not displayed as the operation target display, and the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228 (b) is displayed. One aspect) may be displayed without fail.

Further, prior to the occurrence of the third C reception period, a specific precursor effect display suggesting that the player is given an operation opportunity may be displayed. However, in this case, if the operation target display (image display) is not hidden and the display is continued at the time when the effect after the reception of the 3rd C is started, the effect after the reception of the 3C is started. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific precursor effect display is displayed and cases where a specific precursor effect display is not displayed at a certain point in time. On the other hand, if the operation target display (image display) is hidden at the time when the 3C post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, a specific precursor is given when the 3C post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. It is desirable that the staging display is always displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as a reception period in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination), a plurality of reception periods including the second C reception period and the third C reception period are included. We have a reception period. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (the 1C post-reception effect corresponding to the 1st C reception period). ) Is a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time at the time when the execution is started, and as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image. , Multiple modes with different expectations) may be displayed without being hidden (see FIG. 230), and during the 2nd C reception period, "movement (operation) by the player). When the reception validity judgment with the above-mentioned reception validity judgment is made, the remaining time is displayed at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect (second C post-reception effect corresponding to the second C reception period) is started. For example, it is a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with the passage of time, and as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared. ) Is not hidden and may not be displayed (the frame image and gauge image are hidden at the time when the effect is started after reception, regardless of the timing of acceptance). (See FIG. 227). The remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and as an embodiment thereof, a plurality of embodiments (areas in which gauge images are displayed) shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) are displayed. A plurality of modes) are prepared as a frame image for forming the above.

According to such a configuration, after the post-receipt effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. As at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared (see FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d))). In some cases, the remaining time display may not be visible, and therefore, it is expected that the tension after the start of the post-acceptance effect is suitably maintained.

Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception is performed according to the timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) in which the "reception validity determination in which the movement by the player is an effective operation" is performed. The remaining time display (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) is hidden at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) based on the validity determination is started to be executed. When it is displayed without being displayed (see FIG. 230) and when the remaining time display ((see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d))) is hidden (see FIG. 229). See).

That is, from the player's point of view, the remaining time display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 228 (d))" out of the plurality of modes (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)). When it is done, it is better to continue to display the post-reception effect (3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" even after the execution is started. It can be said that it is certainly preferable in planning. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (during the third C reception period). If this is displayed even after the corresponding 3C reception post-production) is started, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception effect (third C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the third C reception period), the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is "first with low expectation" within the valid period (third C reception period). Regardless of whether it is displayed in any of "aspects (see FIG. 228 (b))" and "a second aspect with low expectations (see FIG. 228 (d))", it is executed in a mode with high expectations. There is a possibility (and even a possibility that it will be performed in a low-expected manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone. At this time, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", the game interest is adversely reduced. Since it is clear, it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even when the post-reception effect (third C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the third C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the "second mode with high expectation (Fig.)" If the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in "228 (d))", the entertainment interest will decline due to the post-reception staging being performed in a mode with low expectations. Since it is possible to suppress it suitably, it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image).

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", some players may produce a post-reception effect. As an "excuse" when it is executed in the "low expectation mode", the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden at the time when the post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. It seems that some people want to keep the display state continuous, and the remaining time is displayed (gauge image, frame) in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228 (d))". Even when the image) is displayed, some players perform the post-reception effect in order to suppress "irritability" when the post-reception effect is executed in a "low expectation mode". At the time of starting, it seems that some people want to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) so that it cannot be visually recognized.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, the player remains through the timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) in which the “reception validity determination” is made within the third C reception period. Either the time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed and the effect is started after reception (see FIG. 230), or the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. Since it becomes possible to substantially select whether to start the effect after the reception in the state (see FIG. 229), it is expected that the game entertainment taste is suitably maintained.

Further, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228 (b)). , And the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 228 (d) (in the example shown in FIG. 227, the integrated image display IGb), and at any timing, " Even if the "reception validity judgment" is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (second C post-reception effect) based on the reception validity judgment is started. Make sure it is hidden. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether the 2nd C reception period or the 3rd C reception period has occurred from the time when the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs. Therefore, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

As for the 3C reception period, the same post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed even if the player does not perform the operation (operation). (It may be the target for which the above-mentioned automatic reception function is enabled). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception effect is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the remaining time is displayed (gauge image) at the time when the 3C post-reception effect is executed. , Frame image) should always be displayed. That is, in this case, even if the effect after the 3rd C reception is started by the automatic reception function without the player noticing, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is any of them within the 3C reception period. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not it was displayed in the mode.

Further, when the "third C reception period" is the target of the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared depending on the effect mode or the like as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated. However, even if the automatic reception function is enabled at any timing, when the post-3C reception effect is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the first It is desirable that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time when the effect is executed after the 3C reception.

However, during the 2nd C reception period, when the player does not perform the operation (operation), the same post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect) as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable not to do this (it is not the target for which the above-mentioned automatic reception function is enabled).

Further, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, when the effect after the third C reception is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is being displayed (see FIG. 230). In any case, when the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and the effect after the 3rd C reception is started (see FIG. 229), after the 3C reception is received. The mode of the staging (specific staging UTC3 after the 3C reception, the staging display UGC3 after the 3C reception, the staging sound after the 3C reception, etc.) is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to select and play the effect mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the effect after the reception of the third C.

Further, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, when the effect after the third C reception is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is being displayed (see FIG. 230). , The same as the disappearance-related display regardless of whether the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and the effect is started after the reception of the 3rd C (see FIG. 229). The mode (second extinction-related display SKC2) is displayed. As a result, regardless of the mode in which the production is advanced, it is possible to preferably suggest that the acceptance is properly performed during the 3C reception period.

In the above-mentioned production example, a first C reception period is further prepared in addition to the second C reception period and the third C reception period, and in the first C reception period, the reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation is eventually made. Even if it is done at the timing of, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden and the display is always continued at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started. I am trying to be there. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the directing performance of the 1st C reception period and the directing performance of the 2nd C reception period, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. ..

Further, in the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228 (b)). , And the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 228 (d), which can be displayed in a mode different from that of (in the example shown in FIG. 225 (c), the integrated image display IGd). .. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period has occurred from the time when the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs. Therefore, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated model shown in FIG. 228 (b)). It can also be displayed by the image display IGa). That is, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period has occurred. The tension within the period will be suitably maintained.

In the third C reception period, the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 228 (d) is not displayed as the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image), and is shown in FIG. 228 (b). The integrated image display IGa (one aspect) may be always displayed.

Further, prior to the occurrence of the third C reception period, a specific precursor effect display suggesting that the player is given an operation opportunity may be displayed. However, in this case, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden and the display is continued at the time when the 3C post-acceptance effect is started, the 3C post-acceptance effect is executed. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific precursor effect display is displayed and cases where a specific precursor effect display is not displayed at the time of starting. On the other hand, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden at the time when the 3C post-acceptance effect is started, it is specified at the time when the 3C post-acceptance effect is started. It is desirable that the precursory effect display of is always displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first C reception period and the third C reception period are prepared. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes (Fig.) With different expectations based on the reception validity determination. The post-3C reception effect can be executed in any of the low expectation modes shown in 229 (d1) to (h1) and the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 229 (d2) to (h2), and the first C reception period. When the "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made in the above, a plurality of modes (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (d1) to FIG. It is possible to execute the first C post-acceptance effect in any of the low expectation mode shown in h1) and the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 226 (d2) to (h2).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the motion target display (here, the image display having a plurality of modes imitating the motion target by the player and having different expectations) is not displayed and is in a hidden state. In some cases. On the other hand, when the "reception validity judgment" is made within the 1st C reception period, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the 1st C reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" is started. , The motion target display (here, the image display that imitates the motion target by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and may not be hidden. There is. The image display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and as its embodiment, a plurality of embodiments shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) are prepared.

According to such a configuration, the operation target display (image display) is visible after the post-acceptance effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, and the operation target display (image display). ) May not be visible, so it is expected that the tension after the start of the post-acceptance production will be maintained.

Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, if "the reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation" is made before the timing Y within the third C reception period arrives (Fig.). (Refer to 222), the operation target display (image display) is hidden at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although it is not displayed, if "the reception valid judgment is made that the action by the player is an effective action" after the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (see FIG. 223), the action target. The effect is started to be executed after the reception of the 3rd C while the display (image display) is displayed.

That is, from the player's point of view, when the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 228 (d))" among the plurality of modes, after the reception is based on the "reception validity determination". It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display the effect (the effect after the 3C reception corresponding to the 3C reception period) even after the execution is started in order to improve the game entertainment. However, when the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (during the third C reception period). If this is displayed even after the corresponding 3C reception post-production) is started, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (third C post-reception staging corresponding to the third C reception period), the image display is "a first mode with low expectation" within the valid period (third C reception period) (FIG. 228 (b)). (See) ”and“ Second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228 (d)) ”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations). There is a possibility that it will be executed in a lesser manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone. At this time, if the image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", it is clear that the game entertainment is adversely affected. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the image display. On the other hand, even when the post-reception effect (third C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the third C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the "second mode with high expectation (Fig.)" If the image display continues to be displayed in "228 (d))", it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-reception staging being executed in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the image display.

Alternatively, even when the image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", the post-reception effect is "a mode with low expectation" among the players. As an "excuse" when it is executed in, at the time when the effect is started after the reception, the image display is not hidden and the display state is continued. It seems that there are people who think, and even if the image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228 (d))", some players will have a post-reception effect. In order to suppress "irritability" when it is executed in "a mode with low expectation", the image display is hidden and invisible at the time when the production is started after the reception. There seems to be someone who wants to wake up.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (third C reception period) occurs, the player "effectives the operation by the player" until the timing Y within the third C reception period arrives. If the "reception valid judgment as an operation" is made, it is possible to start the post-reception staging in a state where the image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and the timing within the 3C reception period. If the "reception valid judgment that the action by the player is an effective action" is not made before the arrival of Y, the post-reception effect starts to be executed while the image display is not displayed at that time. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of being performed, those who seek such a directing ability will be able to enjoy the operation directing with peace of mind after that.

According to such a configuration, during the 3rd C reception period, the player is given "the right to choose whether or not to start the effect after the reception while the image display is displayed", and the 1st C During the reception period, the player is not given "the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception effect while the image display is displayed", and the post-reception effect is always displayed while the image display is displayed. It will function as a starting point.

In this regard, in the 3C reception period in which such a selection right is granted, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period (when there is no reception validity judgment), there is a reception validity judgment. During the 1st C reception period, in which the same post-reception effect is not executed (the automatic effect function is not enabled) and the selection right is not granted, the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the 1C reception period. If it is not done (when there is no reception validity judgment), it is desirable that the same post-reception effect as when the reception validity judgment is made is executed (the automatic effect function is enabled). According to such a configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, the relief when the operation is forgotten occurs is not performed in exchange for granting the above-mentioned option right. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the post-reception production itself will not be performed unless the judgment such as "which one to select" is made within a limited time, and a feeling of tension is appropriately given. Will be able to. On the other hand, when the 1st C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned selection right is not granted, but even if the reception within the 1st C reception period is not in time, the post-reception production is properly executed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. In this case, the post-reception effect when the operation is forgotten during the 1st C reception period is also included when the operation is forgotten if the execution is started while the image display is being continued. Therefore, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned option right.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first C reception period and the third C reception period are prepared. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes (Fig.) With different expectations based on the reception validity determination. The post-3C reception effect can be executed in any of the low expectation modes shown in 229 (d1) to (h1) and the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 229 (d2) to (h2), and the first C reception period. When the "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made in the above, a plurality of modes (FIGS. 226 (d1) to (d1) to FIG. It is possible to execute the first C post-acceptance effect in any of the low expectation mode shown in h1) and the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 226 (d2) to (h2).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time, and is expected as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image. (Those with multiple modes with different degrees) may not be displayed and may be hidden. On the other hand, when the "reception validity judgment" is made within the 1st C reception period, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the 1st C reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" is started. , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time, and as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes having different expectations are used. (Prepared ones) are not displayed and are not hidden. The remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) are prepared as the mode thereof.

According to such a configuration, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and the remaining time display (frame) after the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed. Since the image and the gauge image) may not be visible in some cases, it is expected that the tension after the start of the post-acceptance production is preferably maintained.

Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, if "the reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation" is made before the timing Y within the third C reception period arrives (Fig.). (Refer to 222), the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image are hidden) at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although it is displayed and not displayed, if "the reception validity determination is made that the movement by the player is the valid movement" after the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (see FIG. 223), the rest. The time display (while the frame image and the gauge image are displayed, the effect after the reception of the 3rd C is started to be executed.

That is, from the player's point of view, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 228 (d))" among the plurality of modes, the "acceptance validity determination" is made. It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display the post-reception production based on "(3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) even after the execution is started in order to improve the game entertainment. .. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" ( If this is displayed even after the execution of the 3C post-acceptance production corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is started, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline.

For example, in the post-reception staging (third C post-reception staging corresponding to the third C reception period), the remaining time display is "a first aspect with low expectation (FIG. 228 (b)) within the valid period (third C reception period). (See) ”and“ Second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228 (d)) ”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations). There is a possibility that it will be executed in a lesser manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game entertainment by this alone. At this time, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", it is clear that the game entertainment is adversely reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even when the post-reception effect (third C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the third C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the "second mode with high expectation (Fig.)" If the remaining time display continues to be displayed in "228 (d))", it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the post-reception staging being executed in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it is desirable to continue this without hiding the remaining time display.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228 (b))", some players may have a "low expectation mode" for the post-reception effect. As an "excuse" when it is executed in, at the time when the effect is started after the reception, the remaining time display is not hidden and the display state is continued. It seems that there are people who think, and even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228 (d))", some players will have a post-reception effect. In order to suppress "irritability" when it is executed in "a mode with low expectation", the remaining time display is hidden and invisible at the time when the effect is started after the reception. There seems to be someone who wants to wake up.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (third C reception period) occurs, the player "effectives the operation by the player" until the timing Y within the third C reception period arrives. If the reception valid judgment for operation is made, the remaining time display is hidden and it is possible to start the post-reception production in a state where it cannot be visually recognized, and the timing within the 3C reception period. If the "reception valid judgment that the action by the player is an effective action" is not made before the arrival of Y, the post-reception effect starts to be executed while the remaining time display is not displayed at that time. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of being performed, those who seek such a directing ability will be able to enjoy the operation directing with peace of mind after that.

According to such a configuration, during the 3rd C reception period, the player is given "the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception production while the remaining time display is displayed", and the 1st C During the reception period, the player is not given "the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception effect while the remaining time display is displayed", and the post-reception effect is always displayed while the remaining time display is displayed. It will function as a starting point.

In this regard, in the 3C reception period in which such a selection right is granted, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period (when there is no reception validity judgment), there is a reception validity judgment. During the 1st C reception period, in which the same post-reception effect is not executed (the automatic effect function is not enabled) and the selection right is not granted, the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the 1C reception period. If it is not done (when there is no reception validity judgment), it is desirable that the same post-reception effect as when the reception validity judgment is made is executed (the automatic effect function is enabled). According to such a configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, the relief when the operation is forgotten occurs is not performed in exchange for granting the above-mentioned option right. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the post-reception production itself will not be performed unless the judgment such as "which one to select" is made within a limited time, and a feeling of tension is appropriately given. Will be able to. On the other hand, when the 1st C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned selection right is not granted, but even if the reception within the 1st C reception period is not in time, the post-reception production is properly executed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. In this case, the post-reception effect when the operation is forgotten during the 1st C reception period is also included when the operation is forgotten if the execution is started while the remaining time display is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned option right.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including the first C reception period and the third C reception period are prepared as the reception period. In the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least a specific area. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the first C reception period, the first is in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the reception validity determination. It is possible to perform the 1C post-reception effect, and if the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 3C reception period, the expectation level is based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made. It is possible to perform the effect after the reception of the 3rd C in any of a plurality of different modes. In addition, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) also at the time when the 1C post-acceptance effect starts to be executed and when the 3C post-acceptance effect starts to be executed. ) May be displayed instead of being hidden.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the reception validity determination is made in both the case where the "reception validity judgment" is made within the 1st C reception period and the case where the "reception validity judgment" is made within the 3C reception period. Based on the fact that this is done, the disappearance EF effect is performed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). Since it is feasible, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the reception validity determination has been made properly (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player).

Further, as described above, in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period depends on the timing (1st period, 2nd period, etc.) in which the "reception validity determination" in which the action by the player is an effective operation is performed. The integrated image display IG is not hidden and displayed at the time when the effect corresponding to the third C reception is started, and the integrated image display IG is not displayed (visual recognition). It may be in a state where it cannot be done). On the other hand, in the 1st C reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination that the movement (operation) by the player is an effective operation (effective operation) is made. It has become so. By preparing the 1st C reception period in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed separately from the above-mentioned 3C reception period, a sense of security is combined with the configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed. It will be possible to provide a certain degree of staging, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

In the 1st C reception period, when the corresponding post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) is executed in the high expectation mode (FIGS. 226 (d2) to (h2), the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is the first. A specific mode (FIGS. 226 (e2) to (g2)) that is also used during the 3C reception period appears, but if it is different from the highly expected mode, a specific mode (FIG. 226 (e2) to (e2) to disappearance-related display) is used as an extinction EF effect. It is desirable that (g2)) does not appear and a different aspect (FIGS. 226 (e1) to (g1)) appears, or that the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) itself does not appear. According to the above configuration, when the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed corresponding to the 3C reception period, it becomes possible to give an image as if a high expectation effect is being executed. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In the first C reception period, the reception permissible sound is output in a plurality of modes having different expectations, but in the third C reception period, the reception permissible sound may be output only in "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the reception permissible sound having the "one aspect" is output, it is necessary to make people aware of the possibility that the third C reception period having the above-mentioned two effects has occurred. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the first C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that the "one aspect" is output as the aspect having the lowest expectation. In this case, it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained even in a situation where the reception allowable sound is output in the mode with the lowest expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the first C acceptance period and the third C acceptance period may be sequentially generated within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first C reception period occurs after the third C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, the first C reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the second C reception period can occur between the occurrence of the third C reception period and the occurrence of the first C reception period.

Further, it is desirable that the precursory effect output when the first C reception period occurs and the precursory effect output when the third C reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the first C reception period or the third C reception period occurs by the precursory staging.

Further, in the third C reception period, as an extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display), a specific mode (for example, the second extinction-related display SKC2) appears when there is acceptance, and a mode different from the specific mode (for example, if there is no acceptance). For example, it is desirable that the third extinction-related display SKC3) appears or that no aspect appears. On the other hand, in the first C reception period, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is received appears as the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) even if the reception is not performed. That is, the staging by the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" (the staging that the image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the post-reception production starts) and the staging by the above-mentioned "2C reception period". During the 3C reception period, which has both the characteristics (the effect that the image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the effect is started after reception), it may be difficult to select the effect. Therefore, it can be said that it is more likely that the operation is forgotten (the acceptance period ends without acceptance) than in the above-mentioned "1st C acceptance period". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3rd C reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the 2nd extinction-related display SKC2) at the time of acceptance will not appear. It will be possible to appeal to the player that he / she is in a situation where he / she has forgotten to operate, and after that, he / she will be able to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become. On the other hand, there is no element that is likely to be forgotten to operate during the 1st C reception period. Nevertheless, if the movement is not accepted, it is possible that the player has made a game choice of "do not move", so for the player who made such a choice. If you make an "appeal that you are in a situation where you have forgotten to operate", the interest in the game may decline. Therefore, in the first C reception period, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is received appears as the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) even if the reception is not performed.

In particular, in the first C reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the mode of the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) differs depending on the mode (expectation degree) of the effect after the first C reception (FIG. 226). reference). Therefore, in the 1st C reception period, even if there is no acceptance, if the same mode as when there was acceptance as the extinction EF effect (disappearance related display) appears, it will appear when there is acceptance. In addition, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) related to the production after the reception of the 1st C, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

During the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed on the operation receiving unit when the movement by the player is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearance EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the reduction of the area of the gauge image are continued.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples and other examples may be realized by transforming into the following configuration, and the following configuration (reception period) may be further used as another reception period in which the type of post-reception is different. You may be prepared. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the 1st C reception period, the 2nd C reception period, and the 3rd C reception period are set as the reception period in which the player is allowed to accept the movement (operation). I have. Of these, during the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player (reception validity determination). As described above, during the second C reception period, the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is not executed even if the player accepts the action (operation) (reception validity determination).

In this regard, if the player accepts the action (operation) during the 1st C reception period (reception validity judgment), the 1C post-reception production is expected based on the acceptance (reception validity judgment). The disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) in the same mode as when it is executed in a mode with a low rate of appearance) and in a mode in which the effect after the reception of the first C is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of a jackpot symbol). May be made viable. Further, when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 226, any aspect (aspect shown in FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1), FIG. 226 (d2)) is used as the first C post-acceptance effect. (Aspects shown in FIGS. 226 (d3) to (g3)), regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the first C reception period (the aspect shown in FIGS. 226 (d3) to (g3)). It is desirable that one predetermined mode always appears as the extinction EF effect. That is, the first C acceptance period is the period even if acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made at any timing within the period (even if acceptance is not made). After the end, the display of the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continued. In this case, information such as "Which mode was the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed?" Is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided by the disappearing EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will be too complicated. In this regard, according to such a first C reception period, any aspect (aspect shown in FIGS. 226 (d1) to (h1), FIGS. 226 (d2) to (h2) is shown as a post-reception effect of the first C. Regardless of whether (aspect) appears, and whether or not acceptance is made within the first C reception period (aspect shown in FIGS. 226 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF effect is predetermined. Since the above-mentioned one aspect will surely appear, the above-mentioned concern can be resolved.

In addition, if the player accepts the action (operation) during the 3C reception period (reception validity determination), the effect after the 3C reception is expected (big hit symbol) based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). The extinction EF effect can be executed in different modes depending on whether the effect is executed in a mode with a low appearance rate) or in a mode in which the effect after the reception of the third C is performed in a mode with a high expectation level (rate in which a big hit symbol appears). You may do so. The 3C reception period has the above-mentioned two effects, and it can be said that it is positioned as a "reception period with a high degree of difficulty" by that amount. It is possible for the player to obtain different effect information from both the image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the extinction EF effect. On the other hand, it is desirable to give a stimulus for staging.

When such a configuration is applied to the examples shown in FIGS. 229 and 230, the aspect as the disappearance EF effect that appears when the acceptance is not made is the disappearance that can appear when the acceptance is made. It is desirable to make it different from any of the plurality of aspects as the EF effect. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and the reception period is the effect of the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2C reception period". It will be possible to suggest that it was a combination of both.

Further, as described above, in another example for the 3C reception period, when the acceptance is made while in the "1st period (1st state)" within the 3C reception period, the integrated image is taken after the acceptance is made. The display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "Which mode was the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed?" Is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information (expectation information regarding the post-reception production) by the disappearing EF production in order to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, if the player does not accept the action (operation) during the 1st C reception period (reception validity determination), the extinction EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the reception is performed. You may do it. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and if the embodiment cannot appear in the 3C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "1C acceptance period". It can be suggested that the effect of the above and the effect of the above-mentioned "second C reception period" were not combined.

In addition, if the player does not accept the action (operation) during the 3C reception period (reception validity determination), the extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner as the mode that appears when the reception is made. You may.

With respect to these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of their configurations to the above-mentioned staging example and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-mentioned staging example and its other examples.

Next, a case where some of the above modified examples are applied to the above-mentioned staging example will be described. That is, FIG. 231 is a modification of the “effect that appears when acceptance is made or is not accepted during the first C reception period” shown in FIG. 226, and FIGS. 232 and 233 are FIGS. 229. (Acceptance in the 1st period) and Fig. 230 (Acceptance in the 2nd period) in the modified example of "the effect that appears when the acceptance is made or is not made in the 3C reception period". be. In this modification, the configuration not particularly mentioned is described in "Examples of effects related to the first C reception period (FIGS. 216 to 218, FIGS. 225, 226)" and "Examples of effects related to the third C reception period (FIGS. 222 to FIGS. 226). 224, FIGS. 228 to 230) ”as described above, and with respect to each of the above-mentioned different examples applicable to the“ first C reception period-related production example ”and the“ third C reception period production example ”. Is also applicable.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 231, when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the 1st C reception period (reception validity determination), the 1C post-reception effect is expected based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). When it is executed in a mode with a low degree (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 231 (d1) to (h1)), a mode in which the effect after receiving the first C reception has a high degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 231 (d1) to (h1)). The disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner as in the case of being executed in FIGS. 231 (d2) to (h2). Here, the second extinction-related display SKC2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 231, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) during the first C reception period (reception validity determination) (see FIGS. 231 (d3) to (g3)). As the extinction EF effect, a mode that does not appear when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the first C reception period (reception validity determination) appears. Here, the third extinction-related display SKC3 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the 3C acceptance period (acceptance validity determination), the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is used. When the third C post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 232 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 233 (d3) to (h3)), the first 3C A mode different from the case where the post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 232 (d2) to (h2) and 233 (d4) to (h4)). The disappearance EF effect is executed at. Here, when the execution is performed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 232 (d1) to (h1) and 233 (d3) to (h3)), the extinction EF effect is the first. 1 When the extinction-related display SKC1 is executed and executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 232 (d2) to (h2) and 233 (d4) to (h4)). The second extinction-related display SKC2 is executed as the extinction EF effect. As described above, FIGS. 232 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 232 (d2) to (h2) are effects that appear when acceptance is made in the first period within the third C reception period according to the modified example. The progress is shown, and FIGS. 233 (d3) to (h3) and 233 (d4) to (h4) show the case where the acceptance is made in the second period within the third C reception period according to the modified example. It shows the progress of the production that appears in.

Further, in the modified example shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) during the third C reception period (reception validity determination) (see FIGS. 233 (d5) to (g5)). ) Appears as an extinction EF effect, which appears when the player's operation (operation) is tentatively accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C reception period. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 233 (d5) to (g5), since the first extinction-related display SKC1 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the player accepts the operation (operation) during the third C reception period. Assuming that the reception validity determination) has been made, the effect progress shown in FIGS. 233 (d3) to (h3) (in the case of acceptance in the first period, the effect progress shown in FIGS. 232 (d1) to (h1)). Will be able to recognize that has occurred. On the other hand, when the player does not accept the action (operation) during the 3rd C reception period (reception validity determination) and the 2nd extinction related display SKC2 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the 3C reception period Assuming that the movement (operation) is accepted by the player (reception validity determination) in the above, the staging progress shown in FIGS. 233 (d4) to (h4) (in the case of acceptance in the first period, FIG. 232 (d2). )-(H2), it becomes possible to recognize that the effect progress) has occurred.

In the 1st C reception period related to such a modified example, as an extinction-related display (disappearing EF effect) that appears when acceptance is made, a post-reception effect (after 3C reception) corresponding to the above 3C reception period related to the modified example. The "second extinction-related display SKC2" displayed when the production) is executed in a highly expected manner is used. That is, in this case, in the first C reception period according to the modified example, as long as the reception is made, it becomes possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a highly expected manner, and the game. You will be able to improve your interest.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third C reception period according to the modified example does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKC2”. For example, as the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the first C reception period related to the modified example, the post-reception effect (first C post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the first C reception period is executed in a mode with low expectation. Even if the "1st extinction-related display SKC1" displayed at the time of It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made during the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). It is supposed to be displayed.

It is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the third C acceptance period according to the modified example. That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1st C reception period, the reception period is the effect of the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" and the above-mentioned "first". It will be possible to suggest that it did not have both the directing performance of the "2C reception period".

Further, it is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKC3" is not displayed when the movement (operation) by the player is received within the first C reception period according to the modified example. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to more preferably suggest that the first C acceptance period has ended without being accepted.

It should be noted that even in the third C reception period related to this modified example, the player before the timing tV2 in which the state (third C reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation" is permitted occurs. Even if there is an operation (operation) by, the operation (operation) is not regarded as "reception validity judgment" at that time, but at the time when the 3C reception period is started (or after that). ), The configuration according to the above alternative example, which enables the "reception validity determination" (based on) for the movement (operation) by the player performed before the 3C reception period. Etc. can be applied.

In the third C reception period according to the above modification, when a low-expected aspect appears as an effect after the third C reception (see FIGS. 232 (d1) to (h1) or FIGS. 233 (d3) to (h3)), it disappears. Although the first extinction-related display SKC1 is executed as the EF effect, the extinction EF effect itself may not appear.

Further, in the first C reception period according to the above modification, as an extinction EF effect, a specific mode appears when there is acceptance (FIGS. 231 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 231 (d2) to (h2)). However, when there is no acceptance, an aspect different from the specific aspect appears (FIGS. 231 (d3) to (g3)), but when there is no acceptance, the extinct EF effect itself may not appear.

Further, in the first C reception period according to the above modification, the second extinction-related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF effect) when there is acceptance, but it is different from the second extinction-related display SKC2. It may be carried out in an embodiment. For example, even if it is executed in the first extinction-related display SKC1, whether it is in the state of being accepted in the first C reception period or in the state of being accepted in the third C reception period. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize.

[Precursor stock production]
As illustrated and described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (notice effect, etc.) is selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect of the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. The transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes feasible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then), it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol staging based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production (directing after reception).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a reception period in which the movement (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted, and the movement (operation) by the player is received within the reception period. And, the display change (post-reception effect) according to the type of the reception period that occurred is caused. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, "motion detecting means (sensor or the like) for detecting motion (operation) by the player" and "detection information storage means (peripheral control) for storing detection information by the motion detecting means". RAM1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) ”and“ The reception validity judgment that the operation by the player is effective based on the detection information that can generate the reception period and is stored by the detection information storage means is determined. If it is done within the reception period, it is provided with a reception-related effect execution means (peripheral control MPU1511a, corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) capable of executing the post-reception effect corresponding to the reception period. There is.

In addition, during the reception period, it is possible to display an action target display that suggests which is the "target of action by the player". Such an operation target display can be displayed, for example, as a simulated image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "movement target display" according to this production example is displayed as a "reproduction image display" that imitates a movement target by a player and has a plurality of modes having different expectations.

Further, during the reception period, it is possible to display the remaining time display suggesting the remaining time that the player is allowed to accept the movement (operation). Such a remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. In particular, in this production example, as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects (for example, the rate of decrease in the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are used. It is prepared and is to be executed in one of those modes. Different expectations (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when the reception period occurs, it is possible to execute a precursory effect that suggests that the player is given an action opportunity (suggests that the reception period will occur) before this. There is. The precursor effect is executed by, for example, an effect display on the effect display device 1600 and an output of a corresponding effect sound.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. The low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) does not include the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It may be included or included, but it is desirable to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate) (although it is not always necessary).

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is the acceptance of display changes on the staging display device 1600 as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is only executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect operation by the movable decorative body, etc. are generated, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) is this. The performance of the game itself is poor, and there is concern that the game entertainment will decline in relation to the reception period.

The "operation (operation) by the player" to be detected, including the above-mentioned examples and the later-described examples, is a player such as "operation button 410" or "sword decoration body 5001". It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pushing motion or sword pulling motion) by the touch sensor, "contact motion by the player to a specific part" that is the detection target by the touch sensor, and "inside the specific space" that is the detection target by the non-contact sensor. It means that the movement by the player in the above is also included. In short, it suffices to have one or a plurality of receiving means (operating means) for receiving actions by the player (pressing action, sword pulling action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special effects regarding the acceptance of "operations (movements) by the player", for example. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have all of these configurations, and for example, even if only one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, the hobby of the game is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of water, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary for obtaining further effects, or it can be applied to another configuration (). The configuration described as (preferably applied) may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest related to the reception period.

[Structure 1-C]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period, and a specific effect display can be displayed in the precursor effect. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good. Further, the "specific staging display" relating to the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" related to other configurations, or it means an effect display different from the "specific effect display" related to other configurations. You may.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if an operation is performed by the player while a specific effect display is displayed, the operation is detected by the operation detecting means (sensor or the like), and the operation is detected. The information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.), and the reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation based on the stored detection information is specified. It may be done during the reception period. According to such a configuration, even if the player moves (operates) excessively while the precursor effect (specific effect display) is being executed, the effect is started after the reception. Will be possible, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained through such flexible staging.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-C" is adopted, the player performs an operation before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific effect display is displayed. Even in such a case, the operation is detected by the motion detecting means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the specific reception period, the game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific effect display is displayed. There is a case where a reception validity judgment is made with the action by a person as an effective operation (stock reception production), and if the reception validity judgment is made, the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started to be executed. A specific effect display may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action "within the execution period of the precursory effect" before the specific reception period occurs, the detection for the action is properly performed. , The detection information may be stored and retained until the timing when the specific reception period occurs. That is, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the specific reception period occurs, the "reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation" may be made within the specific reception period. Therefore, even if the player operates (operates) excessively before the specific reception period occurs, the player does not have to redo the operation after the specific reception period occurs after the reception. You will be able to enjoy the production. Also, at this time, when the post-reception effect is started to be executed due to excessive operation (operation) in a state where the specific reception period has not yet occurred (a state in which a specific effect display is displayed), the specific effect is specified. Since the effect display of is not hidden but displayed, the operation (detection) performed by the player in the state where the specific effect display is displayed after the reception is received. It becomes possible to preferably recognize that the execution has been started based on the information).

[Structure 2-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the first precursor corresponding to the first reception period. The first effect display can be displayed in the effect, and the second effect display can be displayed in the second precursor effect corresponding to the second reception period. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reverse second reception period)" and the "second reception period (or the reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. It may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to other configurations. Further, the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" related to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as the "first effect display (or the reverse second effect display)" and the "second effect display (or the reverse first effect display)" relating to the other configurations. However, it means an effect display (for example, a specific effect display) different from the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" related to other configurations. May be good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an operation (operation) when either the first effect display or the second effect display is displayed, the operation is the above-mentioned operation. It is detected by the detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and the reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation based on the stored detection information is the first reception period or the second reception period. Since it may be done during the reception period, even if the player moves excessively while the precursor effect (first effect display or second effect display) is being executed. With this as an opportunity, it will be possible to start the production after reception, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained through such flexible production.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. That is, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, when the player performs an operation before the reception period occurs and the precursory effect is being executed. The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means is performed before the reception period occurs and when the precursory effect is being executed. Based on the information, the reception valid judgment that the movement by the player is the effective movement may be made (stock reception production). Then, within the first reception period, the game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the first reception period is before the occurrence of the first reception period and the precursory effect is being executed. When the reception validity judgment is made with the action by the person as the effective operation, at least a part of the above-mentioned image display is always displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started. To do so. On the other hand, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the second reception period, before the second reception period occurs and when the precursory effect is being executed. When the reception validity judgment is made so that the movement by the player is the effective movement, even a part of the image display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started to be executed. do. When these configurations are adopted, in either the first reception period or the second reception period, "effective operation by the player" is performed based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs. Since the "reception validity judgment" may be made within the reception period, the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even if this happens, you will be able to enjoy the post-reception production without having to redo the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if the operation (operation) is excessively performed before the first reception period occurs, at least a part of the above image display is displayed at the time when the post-reception production based on this is started. Although it is always displayed, if it operates (operates) too much before the second reception period occurs, the above-mentioned image will be displayed at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception production based on this is started. Since the display is not even partially displayed, whether the post-reception production is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before any reception period occurs). It becomes possible to suitably suggest (whether the player has acted).

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. That is, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, when the player performs an operation before the reception period occurs and the precursory effect is being executed. The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means is performed before the reception period occurs and when the precursory effect is being executed. Based on the information, the reception valid judgment that the action by the player is an effective action may be made. Then, within the first reception period, the game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the first reception period is before the occurrence of the first reception period and the precursory effect is being executed. When the reception validity determination is made with the action by the person as the effective operation, at least a part of the remaining time display is always displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started. To do so. On the other hand, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the second reception period, before the second reception period occurs and when the precursory effect is being executed. When the reception validity judgment is made so that the movement by the player is an effective operation, the remaining time display is not even partially displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started to be executed. do. When these configurations are adopted, in either the first reception period or the second reception period, "effective operation by the player" is performed based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs. Since the "reception validity judgment" may be made within the reception period, the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even if this happens, you will be able to enjoy the post-reception production without having to redo the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if the operation (operation) is excessively performed before the first reception period occurs, at least a part of the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-reception production based on this is started. Although it is always displayed, if it operates (operates) too much before the second reception period occurs, the remaining time will be the time when the above-mentioned post-reception production based on this is started. Since the display is not even partially displayed, whether the post-reception production is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before any reception period occurs). It becomes possible to suitably suggest whether the player has acted.

In addition, "the image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 2-C, and the image display and the remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen even in other configurations. It should be. For example, it means that the image is displayed on the layer but is not visible due to the priority display of the image on the other layer.

[Structure 3-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 3-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the movement by the player is not detected within the specific reception period during the specific reception period, the above reception validity determination is made and the reception corresponding to the specific reception period is performed. Since the production may be executed, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained through such flexible production.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. That is, when the specific effect display is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and the specific effect display is displayed before the specific reception period occurs. Even when an action is performed by the player, the action is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the specific reception period, based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific effect display is displayed". In some cases, the reception validity judgment is made (stock reception production), and if the reception validity judgment is made, the image display is displayed at the time when the post-reception production based on the reception validity judgment is started. Make sure it is not done. On the other hand, if the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the specific reception period", the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. , Make sure that the image display is displayed. When these configurations are adopted, when the "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is an effective operation" is made within the specific reception period based on the detection information obtained before the specific reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the specific reception period occurs, the player redoes the operation after the specific reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the production after reception without any problems. Moreover, depending on whether or not the image display is displayed at the time when the effect is started to be executed after the reception, "the state is before the specific reception period occurs and the specific effect display is displayed. Occasionally, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination has been made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means".

It should be noted that the "specific staging display" relating to the configuration 3-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" related to other configurations, or it means an effect display different from the "specific effect display" related to other configurations. You may.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. That is, when the specific effect display is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and the specific effect display is displayed before the specific reception period occurs. Even when an action is performed by the player, the action is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the specific reception period, based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific effect display is displayed". The reception validity judgment may be made (stock reception effect), and if the reception validity judgment is made, the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started to be executed. Make sure it is not done. On the other hand, if the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the specific reception period", the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. , Make sure that the remaining time display is displayed. When these configurations are adopted, when the "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is an effective operation" is made within the specific reception period based on the detection information obtained before the specific reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the specific reception period occurs, the player redoes the operation after the specific reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the production after reception without any problems. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the effect after reception is started, "the state is before the specific reception period occurs and the specific effect display is displayed. Occasionally, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination has been made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means".

In addition, "the image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 3-C, and the image display and the remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen even in other configurations. It should be. For example, it means that the image is displayed on the layer but is not visible due to the priority display of the image on the other layer.

[Structure 4-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the first reception period occurs, the said Even if the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detecting means within the first reception period, the first post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period can be executed, and when the second reception period occurs, the said Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the motion detecting means within the second reception period, the second post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period can be executed. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 4-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reverse second reception period)" and the "second reception period (or the reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. It may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to other configurations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings as the timing at which the operation by the player is not detected by the motion detecting means and the effect after the first reception is started within the first reception period. As a result, it is expected that the game will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-C" is adopted, the timing at which the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detecting means within the first reception period and the first post-reception effect is started. As a result, at least the first timing and the second timing are prepared, and in the first timing, "the reception is valid based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected before the first reception period occurs. When the judgment is made within the first reception period, the effect after the first reception is started (stock reception effect) ", and at the second timing," the player including before the first reception period occurs. The effect may be started after the first reception based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing) without detecting any operation due to the above. "

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-C" is adopted, in the second reception period, the above is based on the "action (detection information) by the player detected before the second reception period occurs". It is possible to make it possible to "start the production after the second reception by making the reception validity judgment within the second reception period" (stock reception production), but "even before the occurrence of the second reception period". Including, the effect may not be started after the second reception based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detecting any movement by the player. "

When both of these configurations are provided, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, "the reception period is based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected before the reception period occurs. The above-mentioned reception validity determination can be made within (stock reception effect) ”, which makes it possible to start the execution of the effect after reception. Moreover, in the first reception period, even if such a "stock reception production" fails, the post-reception production is relievedly executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing. Therefore, you will be able to take on the challenge of "stock reception production" with peace of mind. On the other hand, in the second reception period, if such a "stock reception production" fails, the post-reception production is not executed as a relief, so that a feeling of tension is preferably given. You will be able to.

[Structure 5-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the specific reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the specific reception period occurs, the player within the specific reception period. Even if the motion according to the motion is not detected by the motion detecting means, it is possible to execute the specific post-acceptance effect corresponding to the specific reception period as the post-acceptance effect. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 5-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first timing and the second timing are the timings at which the operation by the player is not detected by the motion detecting means and the effect after the specific reception is started to be executed within the specific reception period. It is expected that the game will be improved because of the fact that it is available.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 5-C", when the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started at the first timing, the above-mentioned image display is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started. Although it is not displayed, when the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started at the second timing, the above-mentioned image display may be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether the post-specific reception effect is in the situation where the execution is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 5-C", when the specific reception post-effect is started to be executed at the first timing, the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception effect is started to be executed. Although it is not displayed, when the effect after the specific reception is started to be executed at the second timing, the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the effect after the specific reception is started to be executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether the post-specific reception effect is in the situation where the execution is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 5-C" is adopted, a specific effect display is displayed as a precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started at the first timing. At that time, the specific effect display is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception effect is started, but when the specific post-reception effect is started at the second timing, the specific post-reception effect is started to be executed. At that point, the specific effect display may not be displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether the post-specific reception effect is in the situation where the execution is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started.

In addition, "the image display, the remaining time display, and the specific effect display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 5-C, and also in other configurations, the image display, the remaining time display, and the specification. It suffices if the effect display of is invisible on the display screen. For example, it means that the image is displayed on the layer but is not visible due to the priority display of the image on the other layer.

Further, the "specific staging display" relating to the configuration 5-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" related to other configurations, or it means an effect display different from the "specific effect display" related to other configurations. You may.

[Structure 6-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as a reception period, and when a specific reception period occurs, a player within the specific reception period. Even if the motion according to is not detected by the motion detecting means, it is possible to execute the specific post-acceptance effect corresponding to the specific acceptance period as the post-acceptance effect. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 6-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first timing and the second timing are the timings at which the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detecting means and the effect after the specific reception is started to be executed within the specific reception period. I am trying to have. Further, if the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detecting means within the specific reception period and the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started at the second timing, the disappearance EF display can be displayed, and the disappearance EF can be displayed. When the display is displayed, the operation promotion display is made difficult to see, which makes it possible to preferably recognize that the specific reception period has ended.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 6-C" is adopted, the operation after the specific reception is started at the first timing without the operation by the player being detected by the operation detection means within the specific reception period. Although the disappearance EF display can be displayed even when the display is performed, it may be difficult to visually recognize a display different from the operation promotion display when the disappearance EF display is displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether the post-specific reception effect is in the situation where the execution is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the post-specific reception effect is started.

At this time, the disappearance EF display is the same as the case where the extinction EF display appears when the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started at the first timing and the case where the extinction EF display appears when the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started at the second timing. It may be displayed as an image display. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is executed at the first timing or the second timing just by looking at the disappearance EF display, and the disappearance EF display makes it difficult to visually recognize. It is expected that the player will be encouraged to pay attention to the "object to be squeezed".

[Structure 7-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, it is decided to prepare a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a specific reception period occurs, the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the specific reception period, and the post-specific reception effect corresponding to the specific reception period is performed. There are cases where the operation is executed, and cases where the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detection means within the specific reception period and the specific reception period ends and the effect after the specific reception is not executed. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when a specific reception period occurs.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 7-C" is adopted, a predetermined reception period different from the specific reception period can be generated, and if the predetermined reception period occurs, the player is within the predetermined reception period. It is desirable to ensure that the corresponding post-acceptance effect is always executed even if the motion according to the motion is not detected by the motion detecting means. The "predetermined acceptance period" related to the configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "reception period" related to other configurations.

That is, in this case, when a specific reception period occurs, a feeling of tension such as "If the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the reception period, the post-receipt effect may not occur" is preferably given. On the other hand, when a predetermined reception period occurs, the corresponding post-reception production will always occur, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

[Structure 8-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the first reception period occurs, the first reception period is described. It is possible to execute the first precursor effect before the first reception period occurs, and when the second reception period occurs, the second precursor effect can be executed before the second reception period occurs. I tried to do it. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reverse second reception period)" and the "second reception period (or the reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. It may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to other configurations. Further, the "first precursor effect" and the "second precursor effect" related to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it means the same precursor effect as "first precursor effect (or reverse second precursor effect)" and "second precursor effect (or reverse first precursor effect)" related to other configurations. It may mean a precursory effect (for example, a specific precursory effect) different from the “first precursory effect” and the “second precursory effect” related to other configurations.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period when the first effect display (first precursor effect) is displayed, when the player performs an operation, the operation is detected by the operation detecting means. Even if the detection information by the motion detecting means is used for the reception validity determination within the first reception period and the motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detecting means. The detection information by the motion detecting means includes the second period within the first reception period, which is not used for the reception validity determination. This makes it possible to provide a tense color rendering.

Further, as will be described later, after the detection by the motion detecting means is performed within the second period of the period during which the first effect display is displayed, the first reception is performed without new detection by the motion detecting means. Even when the period is over, the first post-reception effect corresponding to the first post-reception period can be executed as the post-reception effect. That is, in this case, even if the movement by the player is detected within the second period instead of the first period during the period during which the first precursor effect (first effect display) is performed, the player is responsible for the operation. Since it will be possible to generate a post-reception effect without newly detecting the movement, it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 8-C" is adopted, the first period and the second period of the period in which the first effect display is displayed are both more than the first reception period occurs. It may be the previous period. That is, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the first reception period occurs, the "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is an effective operation" may be made within the first reception period. Therefore, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the first reception period occurs, the player repeats the operation after the first reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the production after reception without any problems. Moreover, as a result of the excessive movement (operation) before the first reception period occurs, even if the movement by the player is detected within the second period instead of the first period, it depends on the player. Since it will be possible to generate a post-reception effect without newly detecting the movement, it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed.

[Structure 9-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period, and a specific effect display is displayed in the precursory effect corresponding to the specific reception period. I am trying to be able to do it. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good. Further, the "specific staging display" related to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" related to other configurations, or it means an effect display different from the "specific effect display" related to other configurations. You may.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player performs an operation during the period when a specific effect display is displayed, the operation is detected by the operation detecting means, and the detection information by the operation detecting means is described above. The first period to be used for the reception validity determination within the specific reception period, and even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the movement is performed by the player, the detection information by the movement detection means is the above. Since the second period, which is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the specific reception period, is included, the tension can be appropriately maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 9-C" is adopted, the first period and the second period are periods before the specific reception period occurs and a specific effect display is displayed. Any of these may be included in the period. That is, in this case, even if the player operates (operates) excessively before the specific reception period occurs, the player accepts the operation without redoing the operation after the specific reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the post-production. However, if the operation (operation) is performed too much before the specific reception period occurs, the post-reception production is not necessarily executed (second period), so there is a sense of tension. It will be possible to maintain it suitably.

[Structure 10-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the first precursor corresponding to the first reception period. The first effect display can be displayed in the effect, and the second effect display can be displayed in the second precursor effect corresponding to the second reception period. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reverse second reception period)" and the "second reception period (or the reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. It may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to other configurations. Further, the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" related to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as the "first effect display (or the reverse second effect display)" and the "second effect display (or the reverse first effect display)" relating to the other configurations. However, it means an effect display (for example, a specific effect display) different from the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" related to other configurations. May be good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "player" is used in both the period in which the first effect display (first precursor effect) is executed and the period in which the second effect display (second precursor effect) is executed. When the movement is performed, the movement is detected by the movement detection means, and the detection information by the movement detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the reception period. Even if the operation is detected by the operation detecting means when the operation is performed, the detection information by the operation detecting means is not used for the acceptance valid determination within the acceptance period. Since the above is included, the tension can be appropriately maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 10-C" is adopted, a reception period (first reception period or second reception period) occurs in both the "pre-operation allowable period" and the "pre-operation non-permissible period". It may be a period before the timing of the operation. That is, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the reception period (first reception period or second reception period) occurs, the "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is an effective operation" is the reception period. Since it may be done within the game, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the reception period occurs, after the reception period occurs, the player operates (operates) too much. You will be able to enjoy the production after reception without having to redo the operation. However, if the operation (operation) is performed too much before the reception period (first reception period or second reception period) occurs, the post-reception production is not necessarily executed. Therefore (pre-movement unacceptable period), the tension can be appropriately maintained.

[Structure 11-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the specific reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the specific reception period occurs, the player within the specific reception period. Even if the motion according to the motion is not detected by the motion detecting means, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the specific acceptance period can be executed as the post-acceptance effect. The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 11-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detecting means and the effect after the specific reception is started to be executed within the specific reception period. Therefore, it is expected that the game will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 11-C" is adopted, the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detection means within the specific reception period, and the effect after the specific reception is started as the timing to be executed. At least the first timing and the second timing are prepared, and in the first timing, "the reception validity determination is based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected before the specific reception period occurs. The effect after the specific reception is started to be executed by being performed within the specific reception period (stock reception effect), and at the second timing, any movement by the player is detected even before the occurrence of the specific reception period. Instead, the effect is started to be executed after the specific reception based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (second timing). " That is, in this case, "the above reception validity determination can be made within the reception period based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected before the reception period occurs (stock reception effect)". It will be possible to start the execution of the production after the specific reception. Moreover, during the specific reception period, even if such a "stock reception production" fails, the production after the specific reception is relievedly executed based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (second timing). Because it is, you will be able to challenge the "stock reception production" with confidence.

[Structure 12-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the first reception period occurs, the said Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the above-mentioned motion detecting means within the first reception period, the corresponding first post-reception effect can be executed, and when the second reception period occurs, the second reception period is concerned. Even if the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detecting means, it is possible to execute the corresponding second post-acceptance effect. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 12-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reverse second reception period)" and the "second reception period (or the reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. It may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to other configurations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first post-reception effect is performed by the player during the first reception period without detecting the movement by the player by the motion detection means, and by the player during the first reception period. Since the execution time is the same as in the case where the motion is executed based on the detection by the motion detection means, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 12-C" is adopted, the detection information (operation detection information by the player) acquired before the first reception period occurs is within the first reception period. By being subjected to the above-mentioned reception validity determination in, the movement by the player is not detected by the above-mentioned movement detection means within the first reception period, and the first post-reception effect can be executed, and the second reception period. Is used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the second reception period, so that the detection information (detection information of the movement by the player) acquired before the occurrence of is used for the operation by the player within the second reception period. However, the effect may be enabled after the second reception without being detected by the motion detecting means. According to such a configuration, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs, the first reception period or the first reception period After the second reception period occurs, you will be able to enjoy the post-reception production without having to redo the operation.

[Structure 13-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the precursory effect suggesting that the player is given an operation opportunity, the precursory effect sound corresponding to the precursory effect is output and the precursory effect sound is output. In some cases, the precursor sound corresponding to the precursor sound may not be output. As a result, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when the player is given an opportunity to move.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 13-C", when a specific precursor sound is output before the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs, the reception is performed. While there are at least the first timing and the second timing as the timing at which the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the period and the corresponding post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, the player On the other hand, when no precursor sound is output before the reception period in which the movement opportunity is given occurs, the movement by the player is dealt with without being detected by the movement detection means within the reception period. There may be a case where there is at least a first timing and a second timing as a timing when the effect is started after the reception, and there is a case where there is no second timing and there is at least the first timing. That is, in this case, it is expected that the tension when the precursory effect sound corresponding to the precursory effect is not output is more preferably increased.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) in which the acceptance validity determination in which the operation by the player is considered to be an effective operation is permitted based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means is set. When it occurs, the integrated image display related to the reception target (such as the image of the operation receiving part) is integrated with the peripheral decorative image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image display (Fig. 144). By displaying as (see), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest until the display (display change) is executed after reception. Such an integrated image display occurs as a result of a notice judgment with an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. ..

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof, so details are omitted. For example, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. Further, as the "integrated image display", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the display is performed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception allowable state (reception period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. The reception allowable sound is output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound in which the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable reception sound" is a sound that is not output under the condition that the production has nothing to do with the allowable reception state (reception period).

Further, each acceptance allowable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance allowable state classified into the first type can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that occurs when a specific condition (specific high-expected fluctuation pattern selection) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state is a valid period (occurs as a result of a notice determination) that can occur in either a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Validity period, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in any of such first type and second type acceptance acceptance states (acceptance period). Here, in both the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) and the second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that it occurs as an allowable state (reception period), the "integrated image display" displayed in those reception periods is an image that imitates the same operation means (operation button 410).

Of the plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)) is the first type acceptance acceptance state (reception period). In the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in an aspect different from the special aspect (for example, the aspect shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c)). You may do so. In this case, in the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) of the first type, in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)) including a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination, the "integrated image" is used. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the "display", and the "integrated image display" is displayed in an manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) of the second type, the "integrated image" is obtained in any of a plurality of embodiments (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include a special embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination. It may be possible to make a determination as to whether or not to display, and to display the "integrated image display" in an manner corresponding to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the above-mentioned "configuration 1-C" to "configuration 13-C" and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment and may not necessarily be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above-mentioned "Structure 1-C" to "Structure 13-C" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration to be used. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is an effect content (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice, etc. as a post-reception effect) that is advanced when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted. A plurality of reception periods (reception effects) with different types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of a judgment (big hit judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception production), at least a first D reception period (first D reception post-production) and a second D reception period (second D reception post-production) are prepared.

With reference to FIGS. 234 to 246, the characteristics of each reception period (reception production) will be described. It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 233 is prepared as a reception period different from the 1D reception period (1D reception post-production) and the 2D reception period (2D reception post-production). It may be realized as either the 1st D reception period (1D reception post-production) or the 2D reception period (2D reception post-production). Further, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily included in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods with reference to FIGS. 233. You may not be prepared.

FIGS. 234 to 236 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 1D is satisfied and the first D reception period (first D reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. 240 to 243 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the first D reception period (first D reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the fluctuation pattern determination is performed, and as a result, the "first D fluctuation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the first D fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 1D variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 1D variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in "FIG. 240 (a)". ”), Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ 1D variation pattern ”itself. Become.

However, in the effect related to the "first D variation pattern", the variation of the decorative symbol SZ is shown in FIG. 234 (a) regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). The above 1D reception period (valid) in which "acceptance regarding the production after the 1D reception" is permitted when the timing tW2 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) when the 1D time has elapsed from the start of the production is reached. Period) (“Situation shown in FIG. 241 (d)”). As a result, if the movement by the player is received within the 1D reception period, the effect after the 1D reception is performed based on the reception.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a first D reception period occurs, the reception period (valid period) will soon occur in connection with this. Precursor effect display suggesting, operation target display (remaining image display) suggesting reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), remaining time display suggesting remaining time of reception period, operation target display (remaining image display) and remaining The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display and the like, and the post-acceptance effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) according to the acceptance are performed respectively. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%". As described above, the operation target display (image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , Not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, when the timing tW1 before the first D reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 234 (b) and 240 (b), (c), as the precursor effect display. "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is started to be executed. As will be described later, the "1st D precursor effect display ZEC" according to this example includes the "1st D precursor effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240 (b))" and the "1D precursor effect display ZEC-1". Is displayed in sequence with the "1st D precursor staging display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240 (c))" that makes it difficult to visually recognize. However, it is not always necessary to provide the configuration. In this example, as shown in FIG. 234 (d), when the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, the effect sound (precursor effect sound) corresponding to the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is output. Will be done.

Further, the "1st D precursor effect display ZEC" according to this example is hidden at the timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tW2. There may be.

Further, as will be described later, in the first D reception period according to this embodiment, the player operates (for example, presses) the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) before the first D reception period occurs. Even when the operation) is performed, the operation (operation) is detected by the operation detecting means (sensor or the like), and the detected information is the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c or the corresponding in the program). It seems that there is a case (when the stock reception effect is executed) that the memory is retained even at the time when the 1D reception period occurs in the processing step, etc.) and the reception validity determination is performed within the 1D reception period. It has become.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 234 and 235 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 240 (c) to "I (FIG. 241 (d)", such a stock reception effect is not performed. It is assumed that the 1D reception period occurs, that is, the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period.

More specifically, when the first D reception period occurs at the timing tW2 without the stock reception effect, the effect display according to this example is shown in FIGS. 234 (b) and 241 (d). In the device 1600 (first staging device), "image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated image display IG. Even if the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) can appear at the timing tW2 in which the corresponding reception period (here, the first D reception period) occurs. Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tW2 and be displayed so as to straddle the timing tW2. In addition, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is accepted (reception valid judgment) when it is accepted (reception valid judgment) within the 1D reception period, or the reception (reception valid). It is hidden when the 1D acceptance period ends without making a judgment). The first D reception period according to this example ends when the timing tW3 arrives when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 234 (a)).

Further, in the first D reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) has a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (d)). )) Is displayed. FIGS. 241 to 243 correspond to the case where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)". ing. Integrated image display When the IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "mode shown in FIG. 144 (a)", the integrated image shown in FIGS. 241 to 243. Since the display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is only changed from "a mode shown in FIG. 144 (d)" to "a mode shown in FIG. 144 (a)", the illustration is shown. I will omit it. Even during the 1st D reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the mode shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c). It may be done.

Then, in FIG. 234, the movement by the player is detected within the first D reception period, and based on the detection information, the “reception validity determination in which the movement (operation) by the player is an effective operation” is performed at the timing tW2a. It is assumed that it will be done. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the first D reception period is terminated and the first D reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tW2a (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception effect corresponding to the 1D reception period (1D post-reception effect) will be started to be executed.

An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I1 (FIGS. 242 (e1) to 242 (i1)) is as a post-reception production (1D post-reception production) corresponding to the 1st reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I2 (FIGS. 242 (e2) to 242 (i2)" corresponds to the case where the first aspect having a relatively low expectation is executed is the first. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the 1D reception period (the first post-acceptance effect). It may include "0%" and "100%".

In this regard, in the first D reception period, as shown in FIG. 234, at the timing tW2a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the first D reception is started according to the acceptance), the “integral”. Not only does it not hide the "image display IG", but it does not make it difficult to see the integrated image display IG.

That is, the first D post-receipt effect according to this embodiment includes a "first post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "specific effect after the 1st D reception" using the body, the effect lamp, etc.) and the effect sound after the 1D reception using the 3rd effect device (speaker) are realized as at least a combined effect. (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in which is displayed, the time when the "first post-reception effect display" as the first D post-reception effect is started is delayed as compared with other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 242 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 (FIG. 144). Since the player can easily recognize which of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. It will be like.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period, the "integrated image display" after the acceptance is made. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for displaying the IG in an easily visible manner. However, when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period even though the reception was done and the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) was already executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, "it is delayed to notice the post-reception production in the execution state". There is a concern that it will end up.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 234 (b) and FIG. 242 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tW2a at which the first D reception period ends due to the acceptance of the movement by the player. (When the timing tW2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF)" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display)" is displayed. "Production)" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance-related display (Disappearance EF production)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (Image display, remaining time display)". Is designed to overlap with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tW2b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the first D reception period, a mode with a low expectation (FIGS. 242 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a post-reception effect (first D post-reception effect) corresponding to the mode, and a mode with a high expectation (FIG. 242 (e1) to (i1)). FIGS. 242 (e2) to (i2)) are arranged so that different modes (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2) appear as extinction-related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 242 (f1) and (f2), there is a situation in which the "first D post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the extinction-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) appears in the "first extinction-related display SKD1" or the "second extinction-related display SKD2". This makes it possible to infer whether or not the "first D post-acceptance effect display" is executed in a highly expected manner.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 234 (b) and FIG. 242 (g1) or (g2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display related to the disappearance-related display (integrated image display IG). When the timing tW2c within the period in which the mode) appears, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the first D reception period. The execution of "1D reception effect display UGD1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I1 (FIG. 242 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 242 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (here, the first D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 as a cut-in effect by the princess character) is the first aspect of the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1 corresponding to the 1st D reception period. In the example in which the effect is displayed and the effect progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I2 (FIGS. 242 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception), FIG. 242 (f2). ), The second aspect (here, the first D post-reception effect display UGD1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the first D post-reception effect display UGD1 corresponding to the first D reception period. It has become so.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "first D post-acceptance effect display UGD1 (1) "1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-1" or "1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-2") will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the 1D reception period, the reception in the 1st staging device (staging display device 1600) is performed. Post-production (The UGD1 effect display after the reception of the first D can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other production devices, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. Since the staging display UGD1 after the 1st D reception is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player's gaze destination while suggesting that the 1D reception period has already ended. Is expected to naturally shift from the "integrated image display IG" to the "1D post-reception staging display UGD1 (1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-1 or 1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-2)". (Timing tW2c or later).

On the other hand, for "1D post-reception staging display UGD1 (1st D post-receipt staging display UGD1-1 or 1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-2)", the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed. When it is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the image (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and is displayed in the "1st D". The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed for the post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1st post-reception effect display UGD1-2). As a result, even while the execution of "1D post-reception staging display UGD1 (1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-1 or 1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-2)" is started, the integrated image display is performed within the reception period. It is intended to facilitate the recognition of which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "1D post-receipt staging display UGD1 (1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-1 or 1st post-receipt staging display UGD1-2)" is started in this way. , FIG. 234 (b) and FIG. 242 (h1) or (h2), the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”and the“ disappearance-related display ”, the“ integrated image display IG ”is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 234 (b) and FIG. 242 (i1) or (i2), the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display)" is displayed. The "display SKD1 or the second extinction-related display SKD2" will be hidden, and the "first D post-reception effect display UGD1 or the first post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or the first" will be hidden under the condition that the visibility is good. After the 1D reception, the display related to the effect display UGD1-2) ”will be displayed.

In this respect, the "first D post-receipt effect display UGD1" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (here, the first D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or the first D). It is displayed by any of the effect display UGD1-2) after reception. Therefore, the "first D post-acceptance effect display UGD1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

Further, in the production example corresponding to the 1D reception period (FIG. 242), when the reception is made within the 1D reception period and the "1D reception post-production display UGD1" is executed, the "1D post-reception effect" is performed. The background image is switched before and after the "display UGD1" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the situation shown in FIGS. 242 (e) and 242 (f) in which the background image is not switched (timing tW2a to tW2b shown in FIG. 234), the staging display device 1600 (No. 1). Even if there is a change in the effect in the 1 effect device), it becomes possible to suggest that the “1D post-acceptance effect display UGC1” is in a situation where it has not been started yet.

In this production example, the time when the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2)" is started to display the "first D reception post-reception display UGD1" and "background change" (1st extinction-related display SKD1, 2nd extinction-related display SKD2) It was decided to start the display at a time later than the timing tW2b) (timing tW2c), but the time when the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed (timing tW2b). The display may be started at the same time as (timing tW2b).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 242, as a post-reception effect, the same background image can be switched between the case where the mode with low expectation appears and the case where the mode with high expectation appears, but the degree of expectation is high. It may be possible to switch to a different background image depending on whether a mode with a low degree of appearance appears or a mode with a high degree of expectation appears. Further, the background image is switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the first D reception period occurs, the display screen (effect) is within a limited time and is limited accordingly. Various displays are performed in the display device 1600), thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tW2c) of the first D post-acceptance effect (first D post-acceptance effect display) according to the acceptance is set to be higher than the received timing tW2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the first D reception period, as shown in FIGS. 234 (b) and 234 (c), the acceptance is based on the acceptance. The first D post-reception effect (specific effect after 1D reception) using the second effect device is started to be executed prior to the first post-reception effect (first D post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. I am doing it.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tW2a that was accepted in the 1D reception period is limited to a part of the 1D post-acceptance effect (the 1D post-acceptance effect display). The first D post-acceptance effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tW2a.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I1 (FIGS. 242 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 242 (e1). As shown in the above, the mode in which the "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the first D reception period and the specific staging UTD1 (first staging reception) after the first D reception. As the first D post-reception specific effect UTD1-1), which is a mode with low expectation of the post-specific effect UTD1, it precedes the first post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1) using the first effect device. And the execution is started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I2 (FIG. 242 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), FIG. 242 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which the "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) corresponds to the first D reception period and the specific staging UTD1 (first) after the first D reception. As the 1D post-reception specific effect UTD1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1D post-reception specific effect UTD1, the 1st post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2) using the first effect device is used. The execution is started prior to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 241 (d), apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also has the first D. The effect within the reception period (display of the samurai character and the princess character) suggesting that the reception period has occurred is executed. As for the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed in a mode with low expectation (not shown). It is displayed so as to have the same mode as the case and the case displayed in the mode with high expectation (see FIG. 241 (d)).

That is, in this case, when the player is in the first D reception period in which the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and In the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after that, if the "reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 1st D reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) "integrated image display IG". While the display related to "" is being continued (while it has not yet suggested the degree of expectation as a post-reception effect), different aspects will appear in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) depending on the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device according to the time, rather than paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In this production example, the production within the reception period (display of the samurai character and the princess character) in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is continuously executed before the first D reception period occurs. It also functions as a precursory effect suggesting that the first D reception period will occur. However, the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) and the precursor effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may be executed as different effects from each other.

Further, in this staging example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "specific staging UTD1-1 after 1D reception" or "specific staging UTD1-2 after 1D reception" appears as the specific staging UTD1 after 1D reception. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTD1 after receiving the first D. For example, it is assumed that only the "specific effect UTD1-2 after the first D reception" is provided as the specific effect UTD1 after the first D reception, and the degree of expectation (a big hit is obtained) depending on whether or not the specific effect UTD1 appears after the first D reception. Percentage) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "specific effect UTD1-2 after the first D reception" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTD1-2 after the first D reception" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first D reception period occurs, the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 234 (d) is generated. The output of the allowable reception sound is started at a timing slightly earlier than that. That is, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the first D reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tW2 at which the first D reception period occurs, and the reception permissible sound is audibly output. The movement (operation) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the first D reception period, as the reception allowable sound, the first long allowable sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively long time and the first short allowable sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively short time. And are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 216 (d), the output of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are started at the same time, but the output is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one (or both) of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound may be started to be output at the timing tW2 or later when the first D acceptance period occurs.

Then, in the 1D reception period, when the player accepts the motion (reception validity determination) while the first long allowable sound and / or the first short allowable sound are audibly output, the acceptance is performed. Based on what has been done, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound are terminated halfway (halfway end of the audible output state).

In this regard, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation as shown in FIG. 234 (d) (not shown). It is desirable to have a case where the execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner (a case shown in FIG. 241 (d)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, they are accepted (reception) unlike the "integrated image display IG". If the validity judgment) is made, it will be executed as if it cannot be confirmed, so there is tension about when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) should be made within the reception period. It is expected that the feeling will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the 1D reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the reception allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway. In addition to making the sound, when the reception is made, the audible output of the effect sound after the reception of the first D is started based on this. The first D post-acceptance effect sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (audible output) and in a mode with a high degree of expectation (audible). It may be output). That is, in this case, in the first D reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance are made. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the effect (effect sound after the 1st D reception) performed.

As shown in FIG. 234 (d), such a 1D post-reception effect sound is the same as the “1D post-reception effect display UGD1”, such as “integrated image display IG” and “disappearance related display (disappearance EF”). Even after "Direction)" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Further, regarding the 1D post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to “I1 (FIGS. 242 (e1) to (i1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I2 (FIG. 242 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

In the 1D reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and one reception is required. Only the permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 1st D reception period, the third effect device can hear not only the 1D post-reception effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I1 (FIGS. 242 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). And the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I2 (FIGS. 242 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance production), the audible output is in the same manner. Is to be done. Then, such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the first D reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the effect is to be performed after the reception, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity judgment) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that the sound is present, it becomes possible to encourage the person to concentrate on the content of the production after the reception.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIG. 235, "i1 (FIGS. 242 (e3) to (i3))" from FIGS. 241 (d), and "i2 (FIG. 242 (e4) to (i3)" from FIGS. 241 (d)). The example in which the production progresses to "i4))" is assumed to be a case where the player does not perform an operation (operation) within the 1D reception period and the reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 235, after the first D reception period occurs, the timing tW3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted (reception validity determination). However, in the 1D reception period according to this example, the above timing tW3 arrives even if the player does not perform an operation (operation) and the reception (reception validity determination) is not performed within the 1D reception period. Based on the above, the same post-reception effect (here, the first post-reception effect) as when the reception validity determination was made within the 1D reception period is generated.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "i1 (FIGS. 242 (e3) to (i3))", if the acceptance validity determination is tentatively made within the first D acceptance period, FIG. 241 (d). ) To "I1 (Fig. 242 (e1)-(i1))" (low expectations), but in reality, the reception validity judgment was not made within the 1D reception period. , Corresponds to the case where the first D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the arrival of the above timing tW3. That is, in this case, in the integrated image display IG, the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" is "0", which is the point of "I1 (FIGS. 242 (e1) to (i1))". Although different from the case, other than that, as shown in FIGS. 242 (e3) to (i3), the production is basically the same as in the case of "I1 (FIGS. 242 (e1) to (i1))". Will be developed.

Further, when the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "i2 (FIGS. 242 (e4) to (i4))", if the acceptance validity determination is tentatively made within the first D acceptance period, FIG. 241 (d). ) To "I2 (Fig. 242 (e2)-(i2))" (high expectations), but in reality, the reception validity judgment was not made within the 1D reception period. , Corresponds to the case where the first D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the arrival of the above timing tW3. That is, in this case, in the integrated image display IG, the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" is "0", which is the point of "I2 (FIGS. 242 (e2) to (i2))". Although different from the case, other than that, as shown in FIGS. 242 (e4) to (i4), the production is basically the same as in the case of "I2 (FIGS. 242 (e2) to (i2))". Will be developed.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the first D reception post-production is executed based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made within the 1st D reception period, and the case where the reception validity judgment is performed within the 1st D reception period. In the case where the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3, the 1D post-reception effect (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) The execution times are different from each other. In this example, if the reception validity judgment is not made within the 1D reception period and the effect after the 1D reception is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3, the reception validity judgment is made within the 1D reception period. The execution time as the 1D post-reception effect is shortened as compared with the case where the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the above, so that the reception valid judgment is made within the 1D reception period. I try to encourage players to do so. However, if the reception validity judgment is not made within the 1D reception period and the production after the 1D reception is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3, the reception validity judgment is made within the 1D reception period. The execution time of the first D post-acceptance effect may be longer than that of the case where the first D post-acceptance effect is executed.

On the other hand, FIG. 236 shows the operation (operation) as a result of the player performing an operation (for example, pressing operation) on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) before the first D reception period occurs. Is detected by an operation detecting means (sensor or the like), and the detected information is stored and held by the detection information storing means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) until the first D acceptance period occurs. It is assumed that the above reception validity determination is performed within the 1D reception period (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 236 (a), when the timing tW1 before the first D reception period occurs, the pachinko machine 1 operates with respect to the player. The precursory effect display (here, the first D precursory effect display ZEC) suggesting that an opportunity is given is feasible. In this regard, during the period when the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed,
-When an action is performed by the player, the action is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period (stock). Period) and
-When the movement is performed by the player, even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the detection information by the movement detection means is not used for the "reception validity determination" within the first D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) is included.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 240 (b) and 240 (c), the "1st D precursor staging display ZEC" according to this example corresponds to the "1st period (stock period)". Precursor effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240 (b)) ”and“ 1D precursor effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240 (c)) corresponding to the above “second period (non-stock period)”. "Is executed by displaying sequentially. That is, in this case, during the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, the player operates within the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240 (b))" is executed. When is detected, this is used for the above reception validity determination within the 1D reception period, but within the period during which the "1D precursor staging display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240 (c))" is executed. When the movement by the player is detected in, this is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the first D reception period.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 236, the player performs an operation in the "first period (stock period)" of the period in which the "first D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, and this is performed by the operation detecting means. It is supposed to be detected.

However, the "acceptance validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is permitted only within the 1D reception period. Therefore, even if an operation is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the operation detecting means, that time point (when the first D reception period has not yet occurred). "Reception validity judgment" is not made in. That is, the detection information (operation detection information by the player) obtained in the "first period (stock period)" is stored and retained even at the timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs. Then, at the timing tW2 (more accurately, the determination timing tW2A that arrives immediately (several ms later) after the timing tW2 is generated), the "reception validity determination" is performed based on the detection information stored in the memory. It will be determined whether or not the situation should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the detection information stored in the memory (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)"), " "Reception validity judgment" will be made (stock reception production). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made, the 1D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception effect corresponding to the 1D reception period (1D post-reception effect). ) Will be started.

Therefore, even if an operation is performed by the player within the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the operation detecting means, the first D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed at the time of the detection. It will not be terminated halfway, and the corresponding precursor sound will not be interrupted. Furthermore, even if an operation is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the operation detecting means, the effect display device 1600 (1600) based on the detection. No reaction is generated in the first staging device), and the reception allowable sound is not output after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the player performs an operation in the "first period (stock period)" until the timing tW2 at which the first D reception period occurs occurs, and this is the operation detection. Whether it is detected by the means or not detected by the motion detecting means, the effect is advanced in the same manner as each other.

Further, in the first D reception period, when the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs (when the stock reception effect is executed). However, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 243, basically, the production is advanced in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. Become.

Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the first D reception period), the effect is from FIG. 240 (c) to “J1 (FIGS. 243 (e5) to (i5))”. (When the expectation is relatively low as a post-reception production) and when the production progresses from FIG. 240 (c) to "J2 (FIGS. 243 (e6) to (i6)" (post-reception production). (When the degree of expectation is relatively high), and in the first staging device, the second staging device, and the third staging device, basically, FIGS. 234 and 242 (e1) to ( The production will be executed with the contents as described with reference to i1) or FIGS. 242 (e2) to (i2).

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the first D reception period), the time when the movement by the player is accepted (depending on the acceptance) as in the case shown in FIG. 234. At the timing tW2 (more accurately, the timing tW2A), which is the time when the effect is started after the first D reception, the "integrated image display IG" is in the display state, and the integrated image display IG is visually recognized. It doesn't make it difficult.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the first D reception period), the movement by the player is accepted as shown in FIGS. 243 (e5) and (e6). The "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is not hidden at the timing tW2 (more accurately, the timing tW2A), which is the time when the 1D reception is started (more accurately, the timing tW2A). It is supposed to be in the displayed state. That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is being executed before the 1D reception period occurs (1D precursor effect display ZEC). It will be possible to suggest that the situation is such that the reception is valid.

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 236 (b) and FIG. 243 (f5) or (f6), the timing tW2 (more accurately, the first D reception period ends due to the acceptance of the movement by the player). When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tW2A) (when the timing tW2B arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated image display IG (image display) is started. It disappears depending on whether a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 243 (e5) to (i5)) appears as an effect after the reception of the first D and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIGS. 243 (e6) to (i6)) appears. It is the same as the case shown in FIGS. 234 and 242 that different modes (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2) appear as the related display.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as shown in FIGS. 243 (f5) and (f6), the disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display). The display SKD1 or the second extinction-related display SKD2) is displayed so that not only the integrated image display IG (image display) but also the "first D precursor effect display ZEC" is difficult to see.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed), the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed while the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is difficult to see. This makes it possible to suggest that the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed.

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed), when the timing tW2C within the period in which the disappearance-related display appears arrives, as shown in FIG. 243 (g5) or (g6). In addition, "1D post-receipt staging display UGD1 (cut-in staging)" as a post-receipt staging in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of an action by a player within the 1D reception period. Is started to execute. An example in which the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (cut-in effect)" progresses from FIG. 240 (c) to "J1 (FIGS. 243 (e5) to (i5))" (relative as post-reception effect). (When the degree of expectation is low) and an example where the production progresses from FIG. 240 (c) to "J2 (Fig. 243 (e6) to (i6))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production). ), It is the same as the case shown in FIGS. 234 and 242 that it is executed as different modes (1D post-receipt staging display UGD1-1, 1st post-receipt staging display UGD1-2).

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), when the timing tW2C arrives, the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is hidden. ing.

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the odor stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), the “1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D after reception” is also obtained. After the display related to the "effect display UGD1-2)" is started, as shown in FIG. 236 (b) and FIG. 243 (h5) or (h6), the "first D post-acceptance effect display UGD1 (first)" While "1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2)" is displayed, first of all, "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display" are "integrated". "Image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 236 (b) and FIG. 243 (i5) or (i6), the "disappearance-related display (first extinction-related display)" is displayed. The "display SKD1 or the second extinction-related display SKD2" will be hidden, and the "first D post-reception effect display UGD1 or the first post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or the first" will be hidden under the condition that the visibility is good. After the 1D reception, the display related to the effect display UGD1-2) ”will be displayed.

In addition, also in the example shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. 243 (example in which the stock reception effect is executed), the second effect device is used based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted (the reception validity determination is made). The 1D post-reception effect (specific effect after 1D reception) and the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect sound) using the 3rd effect device are performed after the 1D reception using the first effect device. The execution is started prior to the effect (effect display after the 1D reception), and the player accepts the action (reception is valid) while the first long allowable sound and / or the first short allowable sound are audibly output respectively. Based on the fact that the determination) has been made, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound may be terminated halfway (intermediate termination of the audible output state).

However, for the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound, one (or both) of them may be started to be output at the timing tW2 or later when the first D reception period occurs. Is as described above. When such a configuration is adopted, in the example shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. 243 (example in which the stock reception effect is executed), the example shown in FIG. 234 and FIG. 242 (example of being accepted within the reception period). Unlike the case of, the output of the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound may not be started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (the case where the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period) and the case shown in FIGS. 234 and 242 are shown. In the case of the example (in the case of the case of the example received based on the detection information obtained in the 1D reception period), the 1D reception is executed based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made within the 1D reception period. The execution time as a post-effect (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) is set to be different from each other. In this example, if the post-first D reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs (see FIGS. 236 and 243), it is within the first D reception period. The execution time as the first D post-acceptance effect is shortened as compared with the case where the first D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 234 and 242). The player is urged to play the game so that the operation by the player is detected within the 1D reception period. However, if the post-first D reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs (see FIGS. 236 and 243), it is obtained within the first D reception period. The execution time of the first post-acceptance effect may be longer than that of the case where the first post-acceptance effect is executed based on the detected information (see FIGS. 234 and 242).

Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. 243 (in the case of the example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the first D reception period), in the case of the example shown in FIG. 235 (the case of not being accepted within the reception period). (In the case of), the execution time as the 1D post-reception effect (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) is set to be different from each other.

In the example shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), the timing at which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is hidden is set after the 1D reception. The display UGD1 is set to be the same as the timing tW2C at which the execution is started, but it does not necessarily have to be the same timing. For example, for the "1D precursor effect display ZEC", the timing is the same as the "integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image))" (timing after timing tW2C). It may be hidden.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), "reception is valid" based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs. When the "judgment" is made, the 1D precursor effect display SKC-2 (second period) is set as the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" at the timing tW2 (more accurately, the timing tW2A) at which the "reception validity determination" is made. ) Is displayed, but instead of this, the 1D precursor effect display SKC-1 that appeared when the detection information was obtained may be displayed. .. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest at which timing the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the period during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed is set.
-When an action is performed by the player, the action is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period (stock). Period) and
-When the movement is performed by the player, even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the detection information by the movement detection means is not used for the "reception validity determination" within the first D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) is generated in sequence, but instead, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first and then the first period (stock period) is generated. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the production content as the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is different between the first period (stock period) and the second period (non-stock period), but the production content is the same. (Continued for two periods) may be used. Further, the second period (non-stock period) may not necessarily be included in the period during which the first D precursor effect display ZEC is executed.

By the way, in the first D reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not shown in FIG. 144 (d), but is shown in FIG. 144 (a). As described above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. It was predetermined (predetermined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (a). Nevertheless, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the first D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs, the situation shown in FIG. 243 described above. Is different from the case where "Integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image)" appears, and the production is advanced in the same manner other than that. That is, when the situation shown in FIG. 243 described above appears, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144 (d). Corresponds to the case where has been determined in advance (predetermined based on the result of the jackpot determination).

According to such a configuration, even when the above-mentioned stock reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs, the integrated image display IG (model). It becomes possible to suitably suggest which aspect was planned to appear as an image display, a frame image, or a gauge image).

FIGS. 237 to 239 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the condition 2D is satisfied and the second D reception period (second D reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. FIGS. 244 to 247 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a second D reception period (second D reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "second D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second D fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second D variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second D variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 244 (a)). ”), Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ second D variation pattern ”itself. Become.

In the effect related to the "second D variation pattern", the variation of the decorative symbol SZ is shown in FIG. 237 (a) regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the timing tX2 (for example, the timing in the non-reach state) when the 2D time has elapsed from the start of the production arrives (when the condition 2D is satisfied), "acceptance regarding the production after the 2D reception" is displayed. The permissible second D reception period (valid period) may be generated (“situation shown in FIG. 245 (d)”), or when a predetermined result is obtained as a staging judgment (notice judgment). Only when the timing tX2 (for example, the timing in the non-reach state) arrives (when the condition 2D is satisfied), the above-mentioned 2D reception period (valid) in which "acceptance regarding the production after the 2D reception" is permitted. Period) may be generated. In any case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period (when the acceptance is determined to be valid), the second D post-acceptance effect will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) according to this embodiment, when such a second D reception period occurs, the reception period (valid period) will soon occur in connection with this. Precursor effect display suggesting, operation target display (remaining image display) suggesting reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), remaining time display suggesting remaining time of reception period, operation target display (remaining image display) and remaining The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display and the like, and the post-acceptance effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) according to the acceptance are performed respectively. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%". As described above, the operation target display (image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , Not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, when the timing tX1 before the occurrence of the second D reception period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 237 (b) and 244 (b), (c), as the precursor effect display. "2D precursor effect display ZED" is started to be executed. The "second D precursor effect display ZED" according to this example is hidden at the timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tX2. May be good. In this example, as shown in FIG. 237 (d), the case where the "second D precursor effect display ZED" is executed is different from the case where the above-mentioned "1D precursor effect display ZED" is executed. The effect sound (precursor effect sound) corresponding to the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is not output.

Further, as will be described later, the second D reception period according to this embodiment is also the same as the first D reception period described above, with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) before the second D reception period occurs. Even when an operation (for example, a pressing operation) is performed by the player, the operation (operation) is detected by an operation detecting means (sensor or the like), and the detected information is obtained by the detection information storage means (periphery). When the memory is retained even at the time when the second D reception period occurs in the control RAM 1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc., and is used for the above reception validity determination within the second D reception period (stock reception effect). Is executed). However, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs, the above-mentioned "first D reception period occurs". Unlike "when the" reception validity judgment "is made within the 1D reception period based on the detection information obtained before", the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image) , Gauge image)) is never displayed (in a visible state), and the post-reception effect (here, the second post-acceptance effect) is started to be executed. The target to which the operation opportunity is given in the first D reception period (type of operation means) and the target to which the operation opportunity is given in the second D reception period (type of operation means) may be the same as each other. , May be different.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 244 (c) to "K (FIG. 245 (d)", such a stock reception effect is not performed. It is assumed that the 2D reception period occurs, that is, the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period.

More specifically, when the second D reception period occurs at the timing tX2 without the stock reception effect, the effect display according to this example is shown in FIGS. 237 (b) and 245 (d). In the device 1600 (first staging device), "image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated image display IG. Even if the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) can appear at the timing tX2 in which the corresponding reception period (here, the second D reception period) occurs. Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tX2 and be displayed so as to straddle the timing tX2. In addition, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is accepted (reception valid judgment) when it is accepted (reception valid judgment) within the 2D reception period, or the reception (reception valid). It is hidden when the 2D acceptance period ends without making a judgment). The second D reception period according to this example ends when the timing tX3 arrives when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 237 (a)).

Further, in the second D reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) has a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a), (c). )) Is displayed. FIGS. 245 and 246 correspond to the case where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in FIG. 144 (c)". ing. Integrated image display When the IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "mode shown in FIG. 144 (a)", the integrated image shown in FIGS. 245 and 246. Since the display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is only changed from "a mode shown in FIG. 144 (c)" to "a mode shown in FIG. 144 (a)", the illustration is shown. I will omit it. Even during the 2D reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (d). It may be done.

Then, in FIG. 237, the movement by the player is detected within such a second D reception period, and based on the detection information, the “reception validity determination in which the movement (operation) by the player is an effective operation” is performed at the timing tX2a. It is assumed that it will be done. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the second D reception period is terminated and the second D reception period is terminated based on the movement by the player being received at the timing tX2a (the reception validity determination is made). The post-reception effect (2D post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the 2D reception period will be started.

Here, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to “K1 (FIG. 246 (e1) to FIG. 246 (i1)) is the post-reception effect corresponding to the second D reception period (second D post-reception effect). As an example, the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to “K2 (FIGS. 246 (e2) to 246 (i2)”, which corresponds to the case where the first aspect having a relatively low expectation is executed. It corresponds to the case where the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the 2D reception period (the second D post-acceptance effect). , "0%" and "100%" may be included.

In this regard, even in the second D reception period, as shown in FIG. 237, at the timing tX2a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the second D reception is started according to the acceptance), " Not only does it not hide the "integrated image display IG", but it does not make it difficult to see the integrated image display IG.

That is, the second post-acceptance effect according to this embodiment also includes the "second post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "specific effect after 2D reception" using the body, the effect lamp, etc.) and the 2D post-reception effect sound using the 3rd effect device (speaker) are realized as at least a combined effect. (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in which is displayed, the time when the "second post-reception effect display" as the second post-reception effect is started is delayed as compared with other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 246 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 (FIG. 144). Since the player can easily recognize which of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. It will be like.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period, the "integrated image display" after the acceptance is made. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for displaying the IG in an easily visible manner. However, when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period even though the reception was done and the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) was already executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, "it is delayed to notice the post-reception production in the execution state". There is a concern that it will end up.

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 237 (b) and FIG. 246 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tX2a at which the second D reception period ends due to the acceptance of the motion by the player. (When the timing tX2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF)" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display)" is displayed. "Production)" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance-related display (Disappearance EF production)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (Image display, remaining time display)". Is designed to overlap with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG is difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tX2b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

However, unlike the case of the first D reception period described above, in the second D reception period, the mode with low expectation as the corresponding post-reception effect (second D post-reception effect) (FIGS. 246 (e1) to (i1)). ) Appears and the mode with high expectations (FIGS. 246 (e2) to (i2)) appears, so that the same mode (here, the second extinction-related display SKD2) appears as the extinction-related display. There is. That is, in this case, while the extinction-related display appears on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in what mode the "second D post-acceptance effect display" is executed. become.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 237 (b) and FIG. 246 (g1) or (g2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display related to the disappearance-related display (integrated image display IG). When the timing tX2c within the period in which the mode) appears, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the second D reception period. The execution of "2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2 (conversation notice effect)" is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "K1 (FIG. 246 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 246 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (here, the second D post-receipt staging display UGD2-1 which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the second post-receipt staging display UGD2 corresponding to the second D reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "K2 (FIG. 246 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 246 (f2). As shown in, the second aspect (here, the second D post-receipt staging display UGD2-2, which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the second post-receipt staging display UGD2 corresponding to the second D reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, the second D post-acceptance effect display UGD2 is started to be executed in any one of a plurality of modes having different expectations (the second post-acceptance effect display UGD2-1 and the second post-acceptance effect display UGD2-2). However, regardless of which of these modes is started to be executed, one mode (second extinction-related display SKD2) is displayed so as to overlap the second D post-acceptance effect display UGD2 as the extinction-related display (priority). Since it functions to make it difficult to visually recognize the display), it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize in what mode the "second D reception post-effect display" is being executed.

Further, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "second D post-reception effect display UGD2 (" second D post-reception effect display ") is displayed. "UGD2-1" or "2D reception post-reception display UGD2-2") will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the 2D reception period, the reception in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) is performed. Post-production (The UGD2 effect display after the 2D reception can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. Since the staging display UGD1 after the 2D reception is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player's gaze destination while suggesting that the 2D reception period has already ended. Is expected to shift from "integrated image display IG" to "2D post-reception staging display UGD2 (2D post-receipt staging display UGD2-1 or 2D post-receipt staging display UGD2-2)". (Timing tX2c or later).

On the other hand, for "2D post-reception staging display UGD2 (2D post-receipt staging display UGD2-1 or 2D post-receipt staging display UGD2-2)", the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed. When it is displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and is displayed in the "second D". The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed for the post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2). As a result, even while the execution of "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2)" is started, the integrated image display is performed within the reception period. It is intended to facilitate the recognition of which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "2D post-receipt staging display UGD2 (2D post-receipt staging display UGD2-1 or 2nd post-receipt staging display UGD2-2)" is started. As shown in FIG. 237 (b) and FIG. 246 (h1) or (h2), the "second D post-reception effect display UGD2 (second D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or second post-reception effect display UGD2). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”and the“ disappearance-related display ”, the“ integrated image display IG ”is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 237 (b) and FIG. 246 (i1) or (i2), the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display)" is displayed. "Display SKD2" will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2nd post-reception effect display UGD2-" 2) ”will be displayed.

In this respect, the "second D post-acceptance effect display UGD2" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (here, the second post-acceptance effect display UGD2-1 or the second D). It is displayed by any of the effect display UGD2-2) after reception. Therefore, the "second D post-acceptance effect display UGD2" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In this effect example, the display of the "second D post-acceptance effect display UGD2" starts at a time (timing tX2c) later than the time when the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed (timing tX2b). However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tX2b) as the display start time (timing tX2b) of the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKD2)".

In this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 227 (b) and 227 (c), the acceptance is based on the acceptance. The second D post-reception effect (specific effect after 2D reception) using the second effect device is started to be executed prior to the second post-reception effect (second D post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. I am doing it.

According to such a configuration, even when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) performs the extinction-related display and then performs the effect display after the second D reception, the effect after the second D reception is displayed. As for itself, the execution can be started without delay from the same timing tX2a.

Such a second staging device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the staging display device 1600 (first staging device) is used as the main liquid crystal, a staging movable body capable of staging operation, or a staging device. It may be provided as a staging lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second staging device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "K1 (FIGS. 246 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-acceptance production), FIG. 246 (d1). As shown in the above, the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the second D reception period, and the second D post-reception specific effect UTD2 (second D post-reception specific effect). As the second post-reception specific effect UTD2-1), which is a mode with low expectation of UTD2, it is executed prior to the second post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect display UGD2-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to be started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "K2 (FIG. 246 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), FIG. 246 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which "kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the second D reception period, and the specific effect UTD2 (after the second D reception) corresponds to the second D reception period. As the second D post-receipt specific staging UTD2-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific staging UTD2, it precedes the second post-receipt staging (second D post-receipt staging display UGD2-2) using the first staging device. It is designed to start execution.

In the staging example shown in FIG. 245 (d), apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the staging display device 1600 (first staging device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device) also has a second D. An effect within the reception period (display of a fortune teller) that suggests that the reception period has occurred is being executed. As for the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed in a mode with low expectation (not shown). It is displayed so as to have the same mode as the case and the case displayed in the mode with high expectation (see FIG. 245 (d)).

That is, in this case, when the player is in the second D reception period in which the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and In the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second staging device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after that, if the "reception validity determination that the movement (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made within the second D reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) "integrated image display IG". While the display related to "" is being continued (while it has not yet suggested the degree of expectation as a post-reception effect), different aspects will appear in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) depending on the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device according to the time, rather than paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it will be possible to improve the interest in playing games.

In this production example, the production within the reception period (display of the fortune teller) in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is continuously executed before the second D reception period occurs. , It also functions as a precursory effect suggesting that the second D reception period will occur. However, the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) and the precursor effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may be executed as different effects from each other.

Further, in this effect example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "specific effect UTD2-1 after 2D reception" or "specific effect UTD2-2 after 2D reception" appears as the specific effect UTD2 after 2D reception. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTD2 after receiving the second D. For example, it is assumed that only "the specific effect UTD2-2 after the 2D reception" is provided as the specific effect UTD2 after the 2D reception, and the degree of expectation (a big hit is obtained) depending on whether or not the specific effect UTD2 appears after the 2D reception. Percentage) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "specific effect UTD2-2 after the second D reception" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTD2-2 after the second D reception" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the second D reception period occurs, the timing tX2 shown in FIG. 237 (d) is generated. The output of the allowable reception sound is started at a timing slightly earlier than that. That is, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tX2 at which the second D reception period occurs, and the reception permissible sound is audibly output. The movement (operation) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the second D reception period, the first long permissible sound, which is in the audible output state for a relatively long time, is not output as the reception permissible sound, and the first long permissible sound is in the audible output state for a relatively short time. A short allowable sound is output. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period may be output as a sound different from both the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound.

Then, during the 2D reception period, if the player accepts the motion while the reception allowable sound (here, the first short allowable sound) corresponding to this is audibly output, the acceptance is made. Based on the above, the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway (the reception end is stopped halfway), so that the second D reception period occurs (or occurs) instead of the above first D reception period. (Being) is to be suggested. However, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 2D reception period may also be terminated halfway based on the reception.

In this regard, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period (here, the first short permissible sound) is executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation as shown in FIG. 237 (d). It is desirable to have a case (not shown) and a case (audible output) executed (audible output) in a highly expected manner (case shown in FIG. 245 (d)).

Further, when the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the 2D reception period, the audible output of the effect sound after the 2D reception is started based on this. As shown in FIG. 237 (d), the effect sound after the 2D reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" as in the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2". Will continue to run for a relatively long time after is hidden. Further, regarding the second D post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to “K1 (FIGS. 246 (e1) to (i1))” (relatively low expectations for post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "K2 (FIG. 246 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output the output sound (aspect).

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the 2D reception period, the third effect device can hear not only the 2D post-reception effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "K1 (FIGS. 246 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). And, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "K2 (FIG. 246 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), the audible output is in the same manner. Is to be done. Then, such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 2D reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the effect is to be performed after the reception, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity judgment) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the fact that there is, it becomes possible to encourage the person to concentrate on the content of the production after the reception.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 238 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245 (d) to "k (FIGS. 246 (e3) to (h3)" are by the player within the second D reception period. It is assumed that the operation (operation) is not performed and the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 238, after the second D reception period occurs, the timing tX3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted (reception validity determination). In the second D reception period according to this example, unlike the case of the first D reception period described above, when the player does not perform an operation (operation) within the second D reception period and the reception (reception validity determination) is not performed. The same post-reception effect (here, the second post-acceptance effect) as when the reception validity determination was made within the 2D reception period does not occur.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tX3 (when the second D reception period ends and the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tX2a (first effect device) is used. Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2D reception period (or when the effect is started after the reception). As shown in 246 (e3), not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the second D reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement (operation) in time, it is integrated within the second D reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After that, even if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 246 (f3), the disappearance-related display is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". (Disappearing EF production) is started. That is, while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed, and the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where "effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the 2D reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the second D reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the second D reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize. , It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 2D reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I'm going to let you.

It is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKD3" is not displayed in relation to the first D reception period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest that the first D reception period has not occurred. Further, it is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKD3" is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the second D reception period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to more preferably suggest that the second D acceptance period has ended without being accepted.

Regarding the "third extinction-related display SKD3", if the reception validity judgment is tentatively made within the second D reception period, regardless of whether or not a highly expected mode appears as a "second D post-reception production". , It is desirable to always display in one aspect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 246 (g3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (third disappearance-related display SKD3 in the figure)", first, "integration" is performed. Hide the image display IG. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 246 (h5), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKD3))" is not displayed. It will be displayed.

In the second D reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not shown in FIG. 144 (c), but is shown in FIG. 144 (a). As described above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. However, when such a situation appears, the production is advanced in the same manner except that the mode as "integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image)" is different. Therefore, I will omit the explanation.

On the other hand, FIG. 239 shows the operation (operation) as a result of the player performing an operation (for example, pressing operation) on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) before the second D reception period occurs. Is detected by an operation detecting means (sensor or the like), and the detected information is stored and held by the detection information storing means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) until the second D acceptance period occurs. It is assumed that the above reception validity determination is performed within the 2D reception period (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 239 (a), when the timing tX1 before the second D reception period occurs, the pachinko machine 1 operates with respect to the player. A precursor effect display (here, the second D precursor effect display ZED) suggesting that an opportunity is given is feasible. In this regard, during the period when the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed,
-When an action is performed by a player, the action is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for "reception validity determination" within the second reception period (stock). Period) and
-When the movement is performed by the player, even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the detection information by the movement detection means is not used for the "reception validity determination" within the second D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) is included.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 244 (b) and 244 (c), the "second D precursor effect display ZED" according to this example includes the above "first period (stock period)" and the above "second period". (Non-stock period) ”is displayed as the same mode. Therefore, even if the aspect of the "second D precursor effect display ZED" is confirmed, which of the "first period (stock period)" and the "second period (non-stock period)" is occurring? It is not possible to recognize. However, regarding the "2D precursor effect display ZED", different aspects appear between the time when it is in the above "first period (stock period)" and the time when it is in the above "second period (non-stock period)". You may.

Further, in the "second D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)" according to this example, the precursor effect display is executed as compared with the case of the above-mentioned "1D precursor effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)". The ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the period from the time when the reception period occurs is increased. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 236, the ratio of the above "first period (stock period)" to the "period of timing tW1 to tW2" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. 239, The ratio of the above "first period (stock period)" to the "timing tX1 to tX2 period" is about 70%. That is, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when the movement by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display to the occurrence of the reception period, this is ". The expected value performed in the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "first D precursor staging display ZED (see FIG. 236)".

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 239, the player performs an operation in the "first period (stock period)" of the period in which the "second D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, and this is performed by the operation detecting means. It is supposed to be detected.

However, the "reception validity determination in which the movement (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is permitted only within the second D reception period. Therefore, even if an operation is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the operation detecting means, that time point (when the second D reception period has not yet occurred). In, "reception validity judgment" is not made. That is, the detection information (operation detection information by the player) obtained in the "first period (stock period)" is stored and retained even at the timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs. Then, at the timing tX2 (more accurately, the determination timing tX2A that arrives immediately (several ms later) after the timing tX2 is generated), the "reception validity determination" is performed based on the detection information stored in the memory. It will be determined whether or not the situation should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the detection information stored in the memory (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)"), " "Reception validity judgment" will be made (stock reception production). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made, the second D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception effect corresponding to the second D reception period (second D post-reception effect). ) Will be started.

Therefore, even if an operation is performed by the player within the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the operation detecting means, the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed at the time of the detection. It will not be terminated halfway. Furthermore, even if an operation is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the operation detecting means, the effect display device 1600 (1600) based on the detection. No reaction is generated in the first staging device), and the reception allowable sound is not output after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the player performs an operation in the "first period (stock period)" until the timing tX2 at which the second D reception period occurs occurs, and this is the operation detection. Whether it is detected by the means or not detected by the motion detecting means, the effect is advanced in the same manner as each other.

Further, in the second D reception period, when the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs (when the stock reception effect is executed). However, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 247, basically, the production is advanced in the same manner as when the reception validity judgment is made based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. Become.

Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the second D reception period), the effect is changed from FIG. 244 (c) to “L1 (FIGS. 247 (e4) to (i4))”. (When the expectation is relatively low as a post-reception production) and when the production progresses from FIG. 244 (c) to "L2 (FIG. 247 (e5) to (i5)" (post-reception production). (When the expectation is relatively high), and in the first staging device, the second staging device, and the third staging device, basically, FIGS. 237 and 246 (e1) to ( The production will be executed with the contents as described with reference to i1) or FIGS. 246 (e2) to (i2).

However, as described above, in the second D reception period, when the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs (when the stock reception effect is executed). Is an integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is never displayed (visible) and is produced after reception (here, after 2D reception). Production) is now started to be executed.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), unlike the case shown in FIG. 237, the time when the movement by the player is accepted (depending on the acceptance). At the timing tX2 (more accurately, the timing tX2A), which is the time when the effect is started after the 2D reception, the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed (in a visible state).

Moreover, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the second D reception period), the movement by the player is accepted as shown in FIGS. 247 (e4) and (e5). The "2D precursor effect display ZED" is not hidden at the timing tX2 (more accurately, the timing tX2A), which is the time when the effect is performed (the time when the effect after the 2D reception is started according to the acceptance). It is supposed to be in the displayed state. That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is being executed before the 2D reception period occurs (). It will be possible to suggest that the situation is such that the reception is valid.

In this regard, also in the example shown in FIG. 239 (b) and FIG. 247 (f4) or (f5), the timing tX2 (more accurately, the second D reception period ends due to the acceptance of the movement by the player). , When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tX2A) (when the timing tX2B arrives), the display related to the disappearance (disappearance EF effect) is started. It disappears depending on whether a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 247 (e4) to (i4)) appears as an effect after the second D reception and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIGS. 247 (e5) to (i5)) appear. The same aspect (second extinction-related display SKD2) appears as the related display, which is the same as the case shown in FIGS. 237 and 246.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), as shown in FIGS. 247 (f4) and (f5), the disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display). The display SKD2) is displayed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the "second D precursor effect display ZED" instead of the integrated image display IG (image display).

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed while the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed. There is. According to such a configuration, even if the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is difficult to see. This makes it possible to suggest that the post-receipt effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed.

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the second reception period), when the timing tX2C within the period in which the disappearance-related display appears arrives, FIG. 247 (g4) or (g5). ), The "second D post-reception staging display UGD2 (2D post-receipt staging display UGD2)" as the post-receipt staging in the first staging device (staging display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the second D reception period. Conversation notice production) ”is started to be executed. An example in which the "second D post-reception staging display UGD2 (conversation notice staging)" progresses from FIG. 244 (c) to "L1 (FIGS. 247 (e4) to (i4))" (relative as post-reception staging). (When the expectation is low) and an example where the production progresses from FIG. 244 (c) to "L2 (FIGS. 247 (e5) to (i5))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production). ), It is the same as the case shown in FIGS. 237 and 246 that it is executed as different modes (second D post-receipt staging display UGD2-1, second post-receipt staging display UGD2-2).

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), “2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or after 2D reception” is thus obtained. After the display related to the "effect display UGD2-2)" is started, as shown in FIG. 239 (b), FIG. 247 (h4) or (h5), the "second D post-acceptance effect display UGD2 (second D)" is started. While "Post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2)" is displayed, first, "2D precursor effect display ZED" and "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKD2)" are displayed. ", The" 2D precursor effect display ZED "is hidden. Then, after the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 239 (b) and FIG. 247 (i4) or (i5), the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display)" is displayed. "Display SKD2)" will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2nd post-reception effect display UGD2)" will be hidden. -2) ”will be displayed.

In addition, also in the example shown in FIG. 239 and FIG. 247 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the second D reception period), the action by the player is accepted (the reception validity determination is made). The first effect device is used for the second post-reception effect (specific effect after 2D reception) using the second effect device and the second post-reception effect (second D post-acceptance effect sound) using the third effect device. The execution is started prior to the effect after the 2D reception (the effect display after the 2D reception).

However, in the example shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the second D reception period), the example shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. 243 described above (the stock reception effect is executed in the first D reception period). Unlike the case of the above example), the first short permissible sound is interrupted based on the fact that the player accepts the action (reception validity determination) while the first short permissible sound is audibly output. It does not end (end in the middle of the audible output state).

Further, as described above, the output of the first short permissible sound may be started at the timing tX2 or later when the second D reception period occurs. Even when such a configuration is adopted, in the example shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the second D reception period), the example shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. 243 ( It is desirable to ensure that the first short permissible sound is always output, unlike the case of the case of being received within the reception period).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (in the case where the stock reception effect is executed during the second reception period) and the case shown in FIGS. 237 and 246 are shown. In the case of the example (in the case of the case of the example received based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period), the secondD is executed based on the fact that the reception validity judgment is made within the 2D reception period. The execution time as the post-reception effect (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) is set to be the same.

In the example shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the timing at which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden is set after the 2D reception. Although the display UGD2 is later than the timing tX2C at which the execution is started, it may be hidden at the same timing tX2C.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the period during which the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed is set.
-When an action is performed by a player, the action is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for "reception validity determination" within the second reception period (stock). Period) and
-When the movement is performed by the player, even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the detection information by the movement detection means is not used for the "reception validity determination" within the second D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) is generated in sequence, but instead, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first and then the first period (stock period) is generated. You may.

Further, the second period (non-stock period) may not necessarily be included in the period during which the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed.

In the second D reception period related to this effect example, the "second D precursor effect display ZED" that can appear even when acceptance is made during the first D reception period is used as the extinction-related display SKD. However, the disappearance-related display may be executed in a manner that cannot appear in relation to the 1D reception period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which such a first D reception period and a second D reception period are prepared, the excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect content (cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc. as the post-reception effect) that is advanced when the machine is accepted is a notice effect (expectation suggestion effect). There are multiple reception periods (1D reception period and 2D reception period) with different types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of the type according to the result of the judgment (staging judgment). It has become.

In this regard, in the 1st D reception period and the 2nd reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, the post-acceptance effect display (1D post-acceptance effect display, 2D post-acceptance effect display) is based on the acceptance. The effect display) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, not only the post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related display). "Disappearance EF production)" is made to appear further. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display (or gauge image) even after the acceptance has been made, and the image display (or gauge image) has been performed. By making it difficult to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) until the image is hidden (disappearance-related display), the visibility is reduced. It is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally transferred from the "image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-reception effect display". In addition, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is a plurality of reception periods (up to FIG. 233) in which the contents of the effect are different when they are accepted. The same embodiment can be commonly used for the above-mentioned reception period, etc.) with reference to the drawings of.

However, since the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed within the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, the image is displayed even after the acceptance is made. And when the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception effect display according to the reception is in the displayed state, and there is a concern that the game interest will decline. be. In this regard, when acceptance is made in either the 1st D reception period or the 2nd D reception period, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as "image display and remaining time display (frame image, frame image,). While the "gauge image) is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", it is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception staging display is "image display and remaining time display (frame image). , Gauge image) is displayed in a mode that makes it difficult to see (disappearance-related display). That is, in this case, after the movement is accepted by the player, the reception is accepted while the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears. The transition from the front display (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception effect display) will be realized.

In addition, both "a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on acceptance. Common in terms of points. However, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is basically such as FIG. 242 (f) and FIG. 246 (f). As shown in, it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is something that appears like this. On the other hand, the "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 242 (g) and FIG. 246 (g), a model image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in the situation where it is displayed, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image).

In addition, regarding "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)", it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). As a method of "appearing like this", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In addition to the method realized by giving priority to the image display different from that (displayed in the front layer), the image display and the remaining time are displayed by an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying an image (moving image) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, it is not an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt a method of changing (etc.). On the other hand, as for the "post-reception effect display", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image) , Gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method realized by displaying "Post-reception effect display" (displayed on the rear layer), the image display is displayed at least while the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in the area other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display). A method of displaying an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the image, and the display of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing a numerical value (permeability, etc.) related to the characteristic.

In addition, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the "reception" before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in a situation where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are the above-mentioned "image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). ) Is difficult to see due to the "disappearance-related display", so while making it possible to see the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the "post-reception effect display" Is in a state where it can appear soon, so that the player should be prepared in advance to change the gaze destination from the "difficult to see image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)". You will be able to urge.

In addition, when the product is accepted during the 1st D reception period and the 2nd reception period, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is "after reception". It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period when the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the effect of the "post-reception effect display" in a wider range. Therefore, the change in the effect during such a display period will improve the entertainment interest of the game. You will be able to do it.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first D reception period and the second D reception period, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 246, "the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to visually recognize. Regarding the "mode (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in the area that is not displayed. Then, in the area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed at least in a part thereof, but the "image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize". (Disappearance-related display) "is displayed so that at least a part of the" post-reception effect display "is difficult to see (for example, it is displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) makes it difficult to visually recognize not only the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the effect until the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the effect when the display of "post-reception effect display" starts. It will be expected to improve both sex and sex.

Further, in the "disappearance-related display" according to the example shown in FIG. 247, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed in a situation where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. It is displayed not only in the area where the image is present but also in the area where the second D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. Then, in the area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed at least in a part thereof, but the "disappearance-related display" makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the "post-reception effect display". (For example, it is displayed on the rear layer). That is, in this case, it is difficult to visually recognize the "second D precursor effect display ZED" and the "post-reception effect display" instead of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Since it appears as something to do, it becomes possible to provide a staging property different from the above-mentioned staging property.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the "post-reception effect display" before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed after the reception is made is displayed. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect), it is not difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-acceptance staging prior to this without disturbing the staging performance of the first staging device.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is based on the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). Also, the previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) is completed.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated staging in the first staging device can enjoy the post-receipt staging by the second staging device having a simpler staging. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment for various types of players.

Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the image display will be displayed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. .. In this case, the dynamic display of the image display is not finished (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) has appeared since it was accepted. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the 1st D reception period and the 2D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a simulated image display but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We decided to make it difficult to see the image as well. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after it is accepted, it is possible to suppress the appearance as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the second D reception period among the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods, the pachinko machine 1 is based on the fact that the reception is performed. Although it is possible to display "2D post-reception effect display UGD2", the above mode (second extinction) corresponding to the first D reception period as an extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) is separate from the second post-reception effect display UGD2. The related display SKD2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second extinction-related display SKD2 appears, it is unclear whether the first D or the second D post-acceptance effect display appears, but when the first extinction-related display SKD1 appears, It will be possible to infer that the effect display UGD1 will appear after the 1D reception.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed in an area including at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed (priority display). ). However, the effect using the effect device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen should be executed at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in front view. It is also possible to realize by.

Even if the same mode (second extinction-related display SKD2) appears as the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the type of reception period is different, the jackpot symbol is stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable that the ratios (expectations) are different.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device can be executed, and the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) can be executed using the second effect device. During the period, in the first staging device, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relative. There are some conditions that are difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), Which mode has appeared. In addition, during the execution period of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device, it is relatively difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). As a result, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift the gaze target from the "first staging device" to the "second staging device".

In the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is a continuous display (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device is used. The post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) is neither an image display displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor an effect executed at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view. It is a thing.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the post-acceptance effect display is started to be displayed after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but is displayed at the appearance timing of the extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may want to start.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area in which the image display is displayed" tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

Further, as described above, the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment are a plurality of modes (integrated image) having different expectations as an integrated image display IG. Display IGa to IGd) can be displayed. Then, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode may be maintained and continued even after the reception, including the display position, size, and dynamic depiction. Even after it is done, it is possible to recognize in what mode the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed within the reception period.

As described above, the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, frame image)" may be displayed separately. Only one of the gauge images) ”may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the "predetermined image display" such as "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is hidden (not displayed). Is not visible from the player side, for example, it is displayed on the layer, but by giving priority to other image display, "image display" or "remaining time display (frame image)" , Gauge image) ”and other“ predetermined image display ”is invisible. However, if at least a part of the "predetermined image display" such as "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" can be visually recognized from the player side, this is "predetermined". Since the aspect of "image display" is nothing but visible, it can be said that the "predetermined image display" is not in the hidden state and is in the state of continuing the display. The "predetermined image display" may be an image different from the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" (for example, a precursor effect display, etc.).

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the specific effect after reception may be realized not by the second effect device but by the first effect device (in the display screen of the effect display device 1600).

Further, in the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the targets of the movements (operations) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different movements may be required. However, when different operations are required, the operation target display (image display) and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are also displayed as different displays.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period (see FIG. 243), the execution is started when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period (the 1D post-reception effect is started). At that time, the 1st D precursor effect display ZEC and the integrated image display IG were displayed respectively. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed behind the integrated image display IG, but instead of this, the integrated image display IG is displayed. The 1D precursor effect display ZEC may be displayed behind it. However, in this case, the 1st D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed so as to overlap only a part of the integrated image display IG, and (at least a part of) the integrated image display IG is displayed. It will be required to be in a state (visible state).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as an extinction-related display SKD that may appear when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period, it may appear even when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. Although it was decided to use the "2D precursor effect display ZED", instead of this, an aspect that cannot appear when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period may be used.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and in the precursor production, the “second D precursor” shown in FIGS. 244 (b) and 244 (c) is prepared. The effect display ZED (specific effect display) "can be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 239, 244 and 247, even when the player performs an operation while the "second D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed. The operation is detected by the operation detection means (sensor or the like), and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.), and the stored detection information. When the reception validity determination is made within the above-mentioned second D reception period (the detection information is detected in the first period (stock period) of the period in which the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed). (When is obtained) (stock reception production). According to such a configuration, even if the player moves (operates) with excessive momentum while the precursor effect (2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed, the effect after the 2D reception is triggered. It will be possible to start the game, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained through such flexible staging. The same can be said about the configuration and the effect and effect not only when the stock reception effect is executed in the second D reception period but also when the stock reception effect is executed in the first D reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the operation by the player is performed before the second D reception period occurs and when the "second D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed. However, the operation is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the second D reception period, it was stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurred and when the "second D precursor effect display ZED" was displayed. When the reception valid judgment is made based on the detection information that the action by the player is an effective action (when the detection information is obtained in the first period (stock period) of the period in which the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed). ), And as shown in FIG. 247, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed at the time when the second D post-acceptance effect based on the acceptance validity determination is started. I tried to do it. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an operation "within the execution period of the second D precursor effect display ZED" before the second D reception period occurs, the detection for the operation is performed. Is properly performed, and the detection information may be stored and retained until the timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs. That is, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs, "reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation" may be made within the 2D reception period. Therefore, even if the player operates (operates) excessively before the 2D reception period occurs, the player repeats the operation after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the production after reception without any problems. At this time, the 2D is based on the detection information obtained by operating (operating) with excessive momentum in a state where the 2D reception period has not yet occurred (the state in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed). At the time when the post-reception effect starts to be executed, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not hidden but is displayed, so that the 2D post-reception effect is the 2D precursor effect. It becomes possible to suitably recognize that the execution is started based on the operation (detection information) performed by the player while the effect display ZED is displayed. The same can be said about the configuration and the effect and effect not only when the stock reception effect is executed in the second D reception period but also when the stock reception effect is executed in the first D reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, at a specific timing within the second D reception period (timing tX2a in FIG. 239), based on the detection information (motion detection information by the player) obtained within the second D reception period. When the reception validity determination is made so that the movement by the player is an effective operation, the 2D precursor effect display ZED (specific effect display) is displayed at the time when the second D post-acceptance effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. I made it not displayed. According to such a configuration, when the reception validity is determined within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs, and when the reception is valid within the 2D reception period. The effect mode in the effect display device 1600 at the time when the effect after the 2D reception is started differs depending on whether the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period based on the detected detection information. As a result, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs. The same can be said about the configuration and action / effect not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

If the reception validity is determined within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, the precursory effect display is displayed when the corresponding post-secondD reception effect is started to be executed. (Here, the second D precursor effect display ZED) may be displayed or not displayed. That is, in this case, whether or not the reception is valid while suggesting whether or not the reception is valid based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it becomes possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. This other example can be similarly applied during the 1st D reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception validity determination is made within the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained within the second D reception period, and the second D reception is made based on the reception validity determination. If the precursor effect display (here, the 2D precursor effect display ZED) is not displayed at the time when the post-effect is started to be executed, the integrated image display IG (here, the integrated image display IG (here, the second D precursor effect display ZED) is displayed at the time when the post-reception post-effect is started to be executed. (Image display and remaining time display) are displayed. According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 246 (e1) and 246 (e2), the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display) is started to be produced after the second D reception. Since the display state is maintained without being obscured by other image displays thereafter, it becomes possible to preferably suggest in which mode the image was displayed within the second D reception period. The same can be said about the configuration and action / effect not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, when the “precursor effect display (here, the second D precursor effect display ZED)” is displayed at the time when the effect after the 2D reception is started, it is shown in FIG. 247 (f). As a result, the "precursor effect display (here, the second extinction effect display ZED)" is made difficult to see by the extinction-related display (here, the second extinction-related display SKD2). According to such a configuration, the "precursor effect display (here, the 2D precursor effect display ZED)" is displayed while suggesting that the stock reception effect is being executed. It will be possible to suppress the suspicion that "the reception validity judgment has not been made yet". The same can be said about the configuration and action / effect not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the disappearance-related display (FIG. (Refer to 247) and makes it difficult to visually recognize the "integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display)" when the reception validity judgment is made based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. The disappearance-related display (see FIG. 246) for the purpose is displayed in the same manner as each other (second disappearance-related display SKD2). This makes it possible to more preferably suggest that the second D reception period has expired.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the stock reception effect is executed during the second D reception period (see FIG. 247), the integrated image display is performed at the time when the corresponding post-second D reception effect is started to be executed. (Image display and remaining time display) is not displayed (visible), but "precursor effect display (here, 2D precursor effect display ZED)" is displayed, and stock reception effect during the 1D reception period. When is executed (see FIG. 243), the integrated image display (image display and remaining time display) is displayed (visually visible) at the time when the corresponding 1D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. I tried to be done. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest whether the stock reception effect is executed in the 1st D reception period or the 2D reception period, and immediately after the reception period occurs. It is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the termination will be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first D reception period and the second D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the precursory production corresponding to the first D reception period (see FIG. 240). The 1D precursor effect display ZEC (first effect display) is displayed, and the 2D precursor effect display ZED (second effect display) is displayed in the precursor effect (see FIG. 244) corresponding to the 2D reception period. I made it possible.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an operation (operation) when either the 1D precursor effect display ZEC or the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the operation is performed. It is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and the reception validity determination that the action by the player is an effective motion based on the stored detection information is within the first D reception period or. Since it may be performed within the above 2D reception period, the player operates excessively while the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC or 2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed. Even in such a case, it will be possible to start the production after reception with this as an opportunity, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained through such flexible production.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it was decided to adopt each of the following configurations. That is, in both the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, when the player performs an operation before the reception period occurs and the precursory effect is being executed. The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the detection information storage means stores the information before the reception period occurs and when the precursory effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, the reception valid judgment that the movement by the player is an effective movement may be made (stock reception production). Then, within the 1D reception period, when the 1D reception period is before the occurrence and the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC) is being executed, the detection information storage means stores the information. When the reception validity determination is made based on the detected detection information that the movement by the player is an effective operation, the above-mentioned image display is at least the same at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started to be executed. Make sure that some parts are displayed. On the other hand, within the 2D reception period, the detection information storage means is in a state before the 2D reception period occurs and the precursor effect (2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed. If a reception valid determination is made based on the detection information stored in the above, and the operation by the player is regarded as an effective operation, the above-mentioned image display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. I made it so that even a part of it is not displayed. When these configurations are adopted, in either the 1st D reception period or the 2nd reception period, "effective operation by the player" is performed based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs. Since the "reception validity judgment" may be made within the reception period, the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period occurs. Even if this happens, you will be able to enjoy the post-reception production without having to redo the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if the operation (operation) is excessively performed before the 1D reception period occurs, at least a part of the above image display is displayed at the time when the post-reception production based on this is started. Although it is always displayed, if it operates (operates) too much before the 2D reception period occurs, the above-mentioned image will be displayed at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception production based on this is started. Since the display is not even partially displayed, whether the post-reception production is based on the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period (before any reception period occurs). It becomes possible to suitably suggest whether the player has acted.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it was decided to adopt each of the following configurations. That is, in both the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, when the player performs an operation before the reception period occurs and the precursory effect is being executed. The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the detection information storage means stores the information before the reception period occurs and when the precursory effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, the reception valid judgment that the movement by the player is an effective movement may be made (stock reception production). Then, within the 1D reception period, when the 1D reception period is before the occurrence and the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC) is being executed, the detection information storage means stores the information. When the reception validity determination is made based on the detected detection information that the movement by the player is an effective operation, the remaining time display (frame image) at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. And gauge images) are always displayed at least in part. On the other hand, within the second D reception period, the detection information storage means is in a state before the second D reception period occurs and the precursor effect (second D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed. If a reception valid determination is made based on the detection information stored by the player, and the reception validity determination is made based on the reception validity determination, the remaining time display (frame) at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. Images and gauge images) are not even partially displayed. When these configurations are adopted, in either the 1st D reception period or the 2nd reception period, "effective operation by the player" is performed based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs. Since the "reception validity judgment" may be made within the reception period, the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period occurs. Even if this happens, you will be able to enjoy the post-reception production without having to redo the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if the operation (operation) is excessively performed before the 1D reception period occurs, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed at the time when the post-reception production based on this is started. ) Is always displayed at least in part, but if it operates (operates) too much before the 2D reception period occurs, the above post-reception production based on this will start execution. Since the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not even partially displayed at the time when it is displayed, the post-reception production is based on either the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period. It becomes possible to preferably suggest whether or not (whether the player operates before the reception period occurs).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is decided to give an operation opportunity to the same operation means in the first D reception period and the second D reception period. In this respect, in the first reception period, it is possible to display an aspect (integrated image display IGd shown in FIG. 144 (d)) that cannot appear in the second reception period as the image display or the remaining time display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest which of the first D reception period and the second D reception period has occurred even when the stock reception effect is not performed.

Further, as described above, in the second D reception period according to this embodiment, "reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation" based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs. If is performed within the 2D reception period (when the stock reception effect is performed), the image display or the remaining time display is not even partially displayed at the time when the effect after reception is started to be executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 247, the extinction-related display (here, the extinction-related display is made based on the fact that the reception validity determination was made within the second D reception period (stock reception effect was made). Then, it was decided to display the second extinction-related display SKD2). According to such a configuration, even if the image display or the remaining time display that urges the player to perform the action does not appear at all, the action by the player is accepted within the reception period. It becomes possible to suggest that the "post-reception production" is being executed.

Further, in the first D reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 243 (e5) to (i5)) appears as an effect after the reception of the first D, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIGS. 243 (e6) to (i6)). The extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in different modes (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2). On the other hand, in the second D reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 247 (e4) to (i4)) appears as an effect after the reception of the second D, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIGS. 247 (e5) to (i5)). )) Appears and the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1st D reception period (when the mode of the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), the “disappearance” is performed after the acceptance is made within the 2nd D reception period. Since it is less important to pay close attention to the "related display (disappearing EF effect)", it is concentrated on what aspect will appear as the effect display UGD2C after the 2D reception, coupled with the fact that the image display or the remaining time display is not displayed. You will be able to make it.

Further, in the 2D reception period related to this production example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made, the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) corresponding to the above 1D reception period is expected. The "second extinction-related display SKD2" displayed when executed in a high-degree manner is used. That is, in this case, in the second D reception period, as long as the reception is made, it becomes possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a highly expected manner, and the game entertainment is improved. You will be able to plan.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the second D reception period does not necessarily have to be "second disappearance-related display SKD2". For example, as an extinction-related display corresponding to the 2D reception period (disappearance EF effect), it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1D post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed in a mode with low expectation. The "first extinction-related display SKD1" may be used, or an aspect that does not correspond to the first D reception period may be used as the extinction-related display.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the second D reception period, as the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display), a specific mode (for example, the second extinction-related display SKD2) appears when there is acceptance, and there is no acceptance. It is desirable that an aspect different from the specific aspect (for example, the third extinction-related display SKD3) appears, or that no aspect appears. According to such a configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 2D reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the 2nd extinction-related display SKD2) at the time of acceptance will not appear. It will be possible to appeal to the person that he / she is in a situation where he / she has forgotten to operate, and after that, he / she will be able to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs. ..

Further, in the 1D reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the image display or the remaining time display (at least a part of) is displayed at the time when the production after the 1D reception is started based on the stock reception production. The 1D post-acceptance effect is performed when the reception validity determination (stock reception effect) is made based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, and when the 1D reception effect is performed. It is now executed for a different time from the case where the reception validity judgment is made based on the detection information obtained within the reception period (see FIGS. 234 and 236). On the other hand, in the second D reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the image display or the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the second D reception post-production starts to be executed based on the stock reception effect. The second D post-reception effect is performed when the reception validity is determined (stock reception effect) based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period, and within the second D reception period. It was made to be executed for the same time as when the reception validity judgment was made based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 237 and 239). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide completely different effects in the first D reception period and the second D reception period, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

It should be noted that the detection by the motion detection means when the player performs the motion and the memory of the detection information by the detection information storage means are not limited to the reception period or the execution period of the precursory effect, and are always. You may do it. However, in this case, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means is not stored until the reception period occurs, or even if the storage is retained, it is not used for the reception validity determination within the reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the movement by the player is not detected within the 2D reception period in the 2D reception period, the above reception validity determination is made and the 2D reception period is supported. Since the post-reception staging (second D post-reception staging) may be executed, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained through such flexible staging.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the 2D precursor effect display ZED (specific effect display) is displayed as the precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, which is before the 2D reception period occurs. Even if an operation is performed by the player while the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the operation is detected by the operation detection means, and the detection information is the detection information storage means. Made to be remembered by. Then, within the second D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and when the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed" The reception validity judgment may be made based on "information" (stock reception production), and if the reception validity judgment is made, the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment is started to be executed. The image display is not displayed. On the other hand, when the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period", the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (second D post-reception effect). ) May be displayed when the execution is started. When these configurations are adopted, "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is effective operation" is performed within the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the 2D reception period occurs, after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the post-reception production (2D post-reception production) without having to redo the operation. Moreover, depending on whether or not the image display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (second D post-acceptance effect) is started, "the second D precursor effect is before the second D reception period occurs". It is suggested whether or not the reception valid judgment is made (the stock reception effect is made) based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means" when the display ZED is displayed. You will be able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the 2D precursor effect display ZED (specific effect display) is displayed as the precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, which is before the 2D reception period occurs. Even if an operation is performed by the player while the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the operation is detected by the operation detection means, and the detection information is the detection information storage means. Made to be remembered by. Then, within the second D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and when the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed" The reception validity judgment may be made based on "information" (stock reception production), and if the reception validity judgment is made, the rest at the time when the post-reception production based on the reception validity judgment is started to be executed. The time display is not displayed. On the other hand, when the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period", the post-reception effect (second D post-reception effect) based on the reception validity determination. ) May be displayed when the remaining time is displayed. When these configurations are adopted, "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is effective operation" is performed within the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the 2D reception period occurs, after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the post-reception production (2D post-reception production) without having to redo the operation. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (second D post-acceptance effect) is started, "the second D precursor effect is before the second D reception period occurs and the second D precursor effect". It is suggested whether or not the reception valid judgment is made (the stock reception effect is made) based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means" when the display ZED is displayed. You will be able to.

If the reception valid determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period", the post-reception effect (second D post-reception effect) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, there may be a case where the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed and a case where the second D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. That is, in this case, the post-reception effect (second D post-acceptance effect) is started to be executed based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs". Or, it is difficult to recognize whether the post-reception effect (second D post-acceptance effect) is in the state of being started to be executed based on the "detection information stored by the above-mentioned detection information storage means within the 2D reception period". It becomes possible to maintain a feeling of tension in a suitable manner.

Further, in the case where at least one of the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the post-reception production is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs". May prepare a special effect mode that cannot appear. That is, the special effect mode may appear when the post-acceptance effect is not started to be executed based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs". It has become. Depending on whether or not the special effect mode appears, it is desirable to suggest a high rate of appearance of a mode with high expectation as a post-reception effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first D reception period and the second D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the first D reception period occurs, it is within the first D reception period. Even if the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detecting means, it is possible to execute the effect after the 1D reception corresponding to the 1D reception period, and when the 2D reception period occurs, it is within the 2D reception period. Even if the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detecting means, the effect after the second D reception corresponding to the second D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings as the timing at which the operation after the first D reception is started without the movement by the player being detected by the motion detection means within the first D reception period. As a result, it is expected that the game will be improved.

By the way, the player intended to perform the operation (operation) within the "timing tW1 to W period" before the first D reception period occurs, but in reality, the "timing W to tW2" If the operation (operation) is performed within the "period", it is difficult for the player to recognize that the operation should be redone after the first D reception period occurs, and as a result, it is difficult to recognize. It can be said that there is a high possibility that you will forget to operate.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, FIG. 236 is a timing at which the operation after the first D reception is started without the movement by the player being detected by the operation detection means within the first D reception period. At least the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 235 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are prepared. The above-mentioned reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected in), so that the 1D reception post-production starts to be executed (stock reception production). At the timing tW3, "The production after the 1D reception is started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any movement by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D reception period. I did. According to such a configuration, there is a misrecognition on the player side that the operation (operation) is performed within the "timing tW1 to W period" before the first D reception period occurs, and the operation is performed as a result. Even if you forget to do so, it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suitably suppressed because the production will start to be executed after the 1st D reception is received based on the arrival of the timing tW3. become.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the second D reception period, the above-mentioned reception validity determination is based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected before the second D reception period occurs. Although it is possible to make it possible to "start the production after the 2D reception by performing it within the reception period" (stock reception production), "the operation by the player including before the occurrence of the 2D reception period". The second D reception post-production is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detecting anything. " That is, in this case, in both the 1st D reception period and the 2D reception period, "the above reception validity determination is made within the reception period based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected before the reception period occurs. Can be done (stock reception production) ”, which makes it possible to start the production after reception. Moreover, in the 1st D reception period, even if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect (1D post-acceptance effect) is relieved based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3). Since it is being executed in a targeted manner, it will be possible to take on the challenge of "stock reception production" with peace of mind. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect (1D post-acceptance effect) is not executed as a relief. , It becomes possible to give a feeling of tension suitably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the precursor effect corresponding to the 1D reception period (1D precursor effect display ZEC, etc.) and the precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period (2D precursor effect display ZED, etc.) are different from each other. Although it is decided to execute as an effect mode, these precursor effects may be executed as the same effect mode (for example, the second D precursor effect display ZED in each case). According to such a configuration, whether or not a reception period (1D reception period) with relief (timing tW3) occurs when the stock reception production based on the operation when the precursor effect is performed fails. It becomes difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

In the case of the 1D reception period related to the above-mentioned production example, when the 1D post-reception effect is generated (by the stock reception effect) based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, the first effect is performed. Same process as when generating the 1D post-reception effect based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period (detection by the same motion detection means → storage by the same detection information storage means → same reception valid within the 1D reception period By performing the determination), the effect after the 1D reception is generated. On the other hand, when the 1D reception post-production is generated based on the arrival of the timing tW3 after the 1D reception period occurs, the 1D reception is based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. The first D post-acceptance effect is generated by performing a process different from the case of generating the post-effect (determination that there is no detection by the same motion detection means, no memory by the same detection information storage means, and the timing tW3 has arrived). I'm going to let you. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide various effects to the player in automatically generating the post-reception effect without requiring the player to perform the operation within the reception period. It is expected that the interest will be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the production after the 1D reception is generated based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (by the stock reception production), and the timing tW3 has arrived. Since the execution time of the 1D post-receipt effect is different from that of the case where the 1D post-acceptance effect is generated, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the execution time of the 1D post-reception effect when the reception validity determination is made at a specific timing (timing tW2a) within the 1st D reception period is obtained before the 1D reception period. This is because it is different from the case where the 1D post-reception effect is generated based on the detected information (by the stock reception effect) and the case where the 1D post-acceptance effect is generated based on the arrival of the timing tW3. , It will be possible to further improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the 2D reception period where there is no relief (automatic reception) when the stock reception production fails, the 2D reception is based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period (by the stock reception production). Execution of the 2D post-reception effect depending on whether the post-effect is generated or the 2D post-reception effect is generated based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made at a specific timing (timing tX2a) within the 2D reception period. Since the times are set to be the same for each other, even if the stock reception production fails, the same production can be enjoyed by re-doing the operation within the 2D reception period, and there is no relief. It is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed.

Further, in the execution period of the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC) prior to the 1D reception period, even if there is an operation by the player, the detection information obtained for the operation is the 1D. No notification is given to indicate whether or not the reception is valid during the reception period. Further, at least in the effect display device 1600, it may not be possible to suggest that the movement by the player has been detected. By providing such a configuration, it is expected that the tension is appropriately maintained even during the 1st D reception period in which the relief (timing tW3) when the stock reception production fails is set. Become.

Even in the execution period of the precursor effect (2D precursor effect display ZED) prior to the 2D reception period, if there is an operation by the player, the detection information obtained for the operation is within the 2D reception period. It is possible not to give any notification suggesting whether or not the reception is valid. Further, at least in the effect display device 1600, it may not be possible to suggest that the movement by the player has been detected.

Further, in the precursor effect corresponding to the 1D reception period, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC and the precursor effect sound related thereto are executed respectively. On the other hand, in the precursory effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, the 2D precursory effect display ZED is executed, but the precursory effect sound related to the 2D precursory effect display ZED is not executed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not there is relief when the stock reception effect fails through the presence or absence of the output of the precursor effect sound.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the player operates within the 1D reception period. Is not detected by the above-mentioned motion detecting means, but it is possible to execute the first D reception post-production corresponding to the first D reception period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the timing shown in FIG. 236 is the timing at which the operation after the first D reception is started without the movement by the player being detected by the motion detection means within the first D reception period. Since tW2 (tW2A) and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are provided, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed as the precursor effect corresponding to the 1D reception period, and the 1D post-reception effect is executed at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236. At the time of starting, the first D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed at the time when the first D post-acceptance effect is started, but when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. The 1D precursor effect display ZEC is not displayed at the time when the effect after the 1D reception is started. That is, in this case, when the execution of the post-first D reception effect is started without obtaining the detection information within the first D reception period, the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are used. It will be possible to suggest in which situation the execution was started.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, even when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the first D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed, even in the situation where the first D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed. The "first extinction-related display SKD1" or the "second extinction-related display SKD2" is made to appear as the extinction-related display (see FIG. 243). In this case, the extinction-related display (disappearance EF display) displays the first D precursor staging display ZEC regardless of whether it is displayed as "first extinction-related display SKD1" or "second extinction-related display SKD2". It is desirable to execute in a form that overlaps with this so that it is difficult to see.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the first post-reception effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, and the first post-reception effect is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. In either case, the above-mentioned image display is displayed at the time when the effect is started after the first D reception. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 248, when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, the timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. 239 is the first. Similar to the case where the 2D post-acceptance effect is started, the above-mentioned image display may not be displayed at the time when the first post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. That is, in this case, even when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1st D reception period, the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is never performed in the same manner as the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period. The post-reception effect (here, the first D post-acceptance effect) is started without being displayed (visible).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the first post-reception effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, and the first post-reception effect is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. In either case, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed at the time when the effect after the reception of the first D is started to be executed. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 248, when the first D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, the timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. As in the case where the 2D post-receipt effect is started to be executed, the remaining time display may not be displayed at the time when the first post-receipt effect is started to be executed. That is, in this case, even when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period, the remaining time display (here, the integrated image display IG) is never displayed in the same manner as when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period. The post-reception effect (here, the 1D post-reception effect) is started without being displayed (visible).

According to the configuration according to these other examples, when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 based on the detection information obtained before the first D acceptance period. (Refer to FIG. 248), the image display and the remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the effect after the first D reception is started, whereas the first D reception is performed at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. When the post-effect is started to be executed, the image display and the remaining time display are displayed at the time when the first D post-acceptance effect is started (see "i1" and "i2" in FIG. 242. reference). That is, in this case, when the operation after the first D reception is started without the movement by the player being detected within the first D reception period, this is the first timing (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236) and the first. It becomes possible to suggest which of the two timings (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235) the execution is started.

Further, even when these other examples are adopted, when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, it is shown in FIGS. 248 (f5) and (f6). As such, it is desirable to make the "first extinction-related display SKD1" or the "second extinction-related display SKD2" appear as the extinction-related display. That is, in this case, the "disappearance-related display" appears while the image display and the remaining time display are not displayed, and the "disappearance-related display" is the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" or the "1st D". After the reception, the effect display UGD1 "and the like will be displayed so as to be difficult to see.

The reception period (see FIG. 248) according to these other examples is provided as a modification of the first D reception period shown in FIGS. 234 to 236 and 240 to 243. However, instead of this, it may be prepared as a third D reception period (generated by the condition 3D) which is different from both the first D reception period and the second D reception period. In this case, when the post-reception effect corresponding to the 3D reception period (3D post-reception effect) is executed, the "disappearance" is performed regardless of which of the plurality of modes having different expectations is executed. One aspect (for example, the second extinction related display SKD2) may appear as the "related display".

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, at least the timing shown in FIG. 236 is the timing at which the operation after the first D reception is started without the movement by the player being detected by the motion detection means within the first D reception period. There is a tW2 (tW2A) and a timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. Then, when the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detecting means within the 1D reception period and the effect after the 1D reception is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF) is performed. Display) can be displayed, and when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to preferably recognize that the 1D reception period has ended.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the operation after the first D reception is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 without the movement by the player being detected by the operation detection means within the first D reception period. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) can be displayed even when the display is performed, but when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is displayed. May make it difficult to see different displays. That is, in this case, after the first D post-acceptance effect is started, the first D post-acceptance effect is started at either the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. You will be able to suggest whether it is in.

For example, when the configuration according to another example for the 1D reception period is adopted, the 1D reception is performed at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period. When the post-effect is started to be executed, the image display and the remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect is started. That is, in this case, when the motion by the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the first D reception period and the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, the effect disappears. When the related display (disappearing EF display) is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a display (1D precursor effect display ZEC, etc.) different from the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display). Alternatively, when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, it appears when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. The image display that cannot be obtained may be displayed, and the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) may make the image display difficult to see.

Further, regarding the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display), the case where the display appears when the first D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the above at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. The image is displayed as the same as when the effect appears when the first D reception is started. That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize whether the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 is being executed just by looking at the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display). It is expected that the player will be encouraged to pay attention to the "object that is difficult to see" by the disappearance EF display.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the second D reception period occurs, the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detection means within the second D reception period, and the second D corresponding to the second D reception period corresponds to the second D reception period. When the post-reception effect is executed (see FIG. 239), the second D reception period ends and the second D reception is completed without the movement by the player being detected by the motion detection means within the second D reception period. There is a case where the post-effect is not executed (see FIG. 238). This makes it possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the second D reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, a first D reception period different from the second D reception period can be further generated, and when the first D reception period occurs, the operation by the player within the first D reception period is described above. Even if it is not detected by the motion detecting means, the corresponding 1D post-acceptance effect is always executed. That is, in this case, when the second D reception period occurs, "the post-reception effect may or may not occur when the movement by the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the reception period". While trying to give a feeling of tension appropriately, when the first D reception period occurs, "even if the movement by the player is not detected by the above movement detection means within the reception period, a post-reception effect always occurs". Therefore, it is expected that the game will be improved.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect setting (at least one of volume, brightness, effect mode, etc.) that causes a change in the effect mode based on the operation by the player. It has the means. In this regard, there are cases where the post-second D reception effect is executed without the movement by the player being detected by the motion detection means within the second D reception period, and the motion by the player during the second D reception period. When the second reception period ends without being detected by the detection means and the second D reception post-effect is not executed, it can occur under the same effect setting. That is, when the operation after the second D reception is executed without the movement by the player being detected by the operation detection means within the second D reception period, the second D reception period is set in the state where the automatic button effect state is set. It does not mean that it will occur. For example, even in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set (under the same effect setting), in the second D reception period, the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detection means within the second D reception period. When the 2D reception post-effect is executed, and when the operation by the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the 2D reception period, the second reception period ends and the 2D reception post-effect is not executed. There will be cases.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period. I made it possible. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 239, during the period in which the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, when an operation is performed by the player, the operation is detected by the operation detecting means. The stock period (first period) in which the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the second reception period, and the motion is the motion detection means when the player performs the motion. Even if it is detected by, the detection information by the motion detecting means includes the non-stock period (second period) in which the reception validity determination is not used within the second reception period. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The same can be said for the configuration and action / effect not only in the 2D reception period (2D precursor effect display ZED) but also in the 1D reception period (1D precursor effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) are shown in FIG. 239, before the second D reception period occurs. It is assumed that both are included in the period and the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed. That is, in this case, even if the player operates (operates) excessively before the 2D reception period occurs, the player repeats the operation after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the production after the 2D reception. In addition, if the operation (operation) is excessively performed before the 2D reception period occurs, the effect after the 2D reception is not necessarily executed (non-stock period). You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The same can be said for the configuration and action / effect not only in the 2D reception period (2D precursor effect display ZED) but also in the 1D reception period (1D precursor effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the ratio of the stock period (first period) to the period in which the precursory effect display is performed is the ratio between the case where the first D reception period occurs and the case where the second D reception period occurs. Made different from each other. In the first D reception period and the second D reception period, at least one of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) is set as different times from each other.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned production example, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the 1D reception period occurs), the execution period (timing tW1 to tW2 period) of the 1D precursor effect display ZEC On the other hand, the ratio occupied by the above "first period (stock period)" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the second D reception period occurs), the execution period of the second D precursor staging display ZED. The ratio of the above "first period (stock period)" to (the period of timing tX1 to tX2) is about 70%. That is, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when the movement by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display to the occurrence of the reception period, this is ". The expected value performed in the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "first D precursor staging display ZED (see FIG. 236)".

In the "second D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)" according to this example, the precursor effect display is executed as compared with the case of the above-mentioned "1D precursor effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)". The ratio of the above "first period (stock period)" has been increased to the period from the time until the reception period occurs, but instead, the ratio may be reduced. good.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, at least in the effect display device 1600, when the operation by the player is detected within the stock period and when the operation by the player is detected within the non-stock period. In each case, no reaction was shown in response to the detection. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the situation can be executed as a stock reception effect, and it is expected that the tension is appropriately maintained.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the 1D precursor effect display is performed in the precursor production corresponding to the 1D reception period. ZEC is displayed, and the 2D precursor effect display ZED can be displayed in the second precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 239, "game" is performed in both the period in which the first D precursor effect display ZEC is executed and the period in which the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed. When an action is performed by a person, the action is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the acceptance period (pre-operation allowable period). " , "When the movement is performed by the player, even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the detection information by the movement detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the reception period. Since the period (pre-operation non-permissible period) is included, the tension can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the stock period (previous operation permissible period) and the non-stock period (previous operation non-permissible period) are both more than the timing at which the reception period (first D reception period or second D reception period) occurs. Made it to the previous period. That is, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the reception period (1D reception period or 2D reception period) occurs, the "reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation" is the reception period. Since it may be done within the game, even if the player operates (operates) with excessive momentum before the reception period occurs, after the reception period occurs, the player operates (operates) too much. You will be able to enjoy the production after reception without having to redo the operation. Moreover, if the operation (operation) is excessively performed before the reception period (1D reception period or 2D reception period) occurs, the post-reception production is not necessarily executed. (Non-stock period (pre-operation non-allowable period)), the tension can be maintained favorably.

By the way, in the above-mentioned effect example, the stock period within the period in which the first D precursor effect display ZEC is executed (preliminary operation allowable period) and the stock period within the period in which the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed (preliminary operation allowable period). In any of the period), no message display prompting the player to operate is displayed.

However, instead of this, a message display urging the player to operate is displayed at least during the stock period (preliminary operation allowable period) of the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed, and the 2D During the stock period (preliminary operation allowable period) within the period in which the precursor effect display ZED is executed, the message display urging the player to operate may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the first D reception period occurs, it is possible to prompt the player to obtain the action by the player as the detection information before the first D reception period occurs. As a result, it becomes possible to more positively provide the staging (stock reception staging) in which the reception validity determination is made within the first D reception period based on the detection information obtained in this way. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period occurs, it is concealed that such stock reception production is permitted, so that it becomes possible to add fun to the production, and the game is enjoyed. Will be able to improve.

In this case, the message display that is in the display state during the stock period (previous operation allowable period) during the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed is also in at least a part of the non-stock period (previous operation non-permissible period). It may be in the displayed state. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an operation while the message display is in the display state, this is not necessarily used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period, so that a feeling of tension is preferable. Will be able to maintain. In the period in which the second D precursor effect display ZED is executed, the message display is not displayed in either the stock period (previous operation allowable period) or the non-stock period (previous operation non-permissible period).

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, as shown in FIGS. 244 and 247, when the stock reception effect is performed during the 2D reception period, no message display is displayed after the 2D precursor effect display ZED is started to be displayed. The production is started after the 2D reception without any trouble. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned modification regarding the message display, when the stock reception effect is performed in the 1D reception period, the 1D reception period occurs even if the detection information is obtained in the stock period (previous operation allowable period). It is desirable not to hide the message display within the period prior to the above, and to maintain the display state as when the detection information was not obtained. Further, when the stock reception effect is performed during the 1D reception period, it is desirable that the message display is in the display state even at the time when the effect after the 1D reception is started to be executed accordingly. According to such a configuration, the stock reception effect is performed (successful stock reception effect) in both the case where the first D reception period occurs and the case where the second D reception period occurs. It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not it is, and it becomes possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the player operates within the 1D reception period. Is made possible to execute the 1D post-receipt effect corresponding to the 1st D reception period as the post-acceptance effect even if is not detected by the motion detection means. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least two timings (FIG. 236) are the timings at which the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detecting means and the effect after the first D reception is started to be executed within the first D reception period. Since the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 235 and the timing tW3) shown in FIG.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the timing tW2 (timing tW2) shown in FIG. tW2A) and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are prepared at least, and in the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on the detection information), the effect after the 1D reception is executed (stock reception effect) ”, and at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235,“ Even before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, the operation after the 1D reception is started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any movement by the player. "

That is, in this case, "the above reception validity determination can be made within the 1D reception period based on the operation (detection information) by the player detected before the 1D reception period occurs (stock reception effect)". As a result, it becomes possible to start the execution of the effect after the reception of the 1st D. Moreover, in the 1st D reception period, even if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the 1D post-acceptance effect is relievedly executed based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3). Because of this, you will be able to take on the challenge of "stock reception production" with peace of mind.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the production after the 1D reception is executed based on the fact that the stock reception production is performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 236), the player during the 1D reception period. When the first D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3 without detecting the operation due to (see FIG. 235), the execution time required for the first D post-acceptance effect is different from each other. did. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is not detected within the 1D reception period and the 1D post-reception effect is executed, the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on any timing. You will be able to suggest. At this time, any execution time may be set longer.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the reception validity determination is made based on the detection information at the timing tW2a within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 234), the stock reception production is performed within the 1D reception period. When the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed based on (see FIG. 236), and when the timing tW3 arrives without detecting the movement by the player within the 1st D reception period, the 1D post-acceptance effect is performed. Since the effect after the 1D reception is executed for a time different from that of the case where is executed (see FIG. 235), the movement by the player performed within the 1D reception period is properly accepted. You will be able to suggest that you are in the same situation.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a specific reception period different from both the first D reception period and the second D reception period can be generated, and even in the specific reception period, it is before the specific reception period (within the execution period of the precursory effect). ), When the post-reception effect (for example, a specific post-reception effect different from both the 1D post-reception effect and the 2D post-acceptance effect) is executed (stock reception effect), the specific case. The post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) may be executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detecting the movement by the player within the reception period. Then, when the post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) is executed based on the fact that the stock reception effect is performed within the specific reception period, the predetermined timing is set without detecting the movement by the player within the specific reception period. Depending on the arrival, the post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) may be executed, and the execution time required for the post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) may be the same. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize at which timing the post-reception effect was executed just by looking at the execution time of the post-reception effect, and the tension is appropriately maintained. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the second D post-reception effect is performed when the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detection means within the second D reception period (stock reception effect). Since the execution time is the same as in the case where the movement by the player is executed based on the detection by the above-mentioned movement detection means within the reception period, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest. become able to

On the other hand, in the 1D post-reception effect, when the operation by the player is executed without being detected by the operation detection means within the 1D reception period (stock reception effect), the player is within the 1D reception period. Since the execution time is different between the case where the operation is executed based on the detection by the above-mentioned operation detection means and the case where the operation is executed, it is possible to provide different effects depending on the type of reception period. become.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the precursory effect suggesting that the player is given an action opportunity, when the precursory effect sound corresponding to the precursory effect is output (see FIG. 234). There is a case where the precursor sound corresponding to the precursor effect is not output (see FIG. 237). As a result, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when the player is given an opportunity to move.

Further, when a specific precursor sound (effect sound corresponding to the 1D precursor effect display ZEC) is output before the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs, FIGS. 234 to 234. As shown in 236, the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. ) And the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. On the other hand, when no precursor sound is output before the reception period in which the player is given an action opportunity occurs, the game is played within the reception period as shown in FIGS. 237 to 239. There is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 as the timing at which the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the motion by the person is not detected by the motion detecting means, and the timing tW2 shown in FIG. There is at least a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to (tW2A). According to such a configuration, even if the stock reception effect fails (the operation is detected within the non-stock period) as a result of the action performed by the player when the precursor sound is output, after the reception. Since the production is always executed, it will be possible to challenge the stock reception production with a sense of security. In addition, when the precursor effect sound is not output, if the stock reception effect fails, the player will have to perform the operation again within the reception period in order to generate the effect after the reception. Therefore, it will be possible to challenge the stock reception production in a tense atmosphere.

In addition, when no precursor sound is output before the reception period in which the movement opportunity is given to the player occurs, the player may perform the operation within the reception period as shown in FIGS. 237 to 239. There is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 as the timing at which the corresponding post-acceptance effect is started without the motion being detected by the motion detecting means, and the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236. ) At least when there is a timing tX2 (tX2A) (second D reception period), the operation by the player is not detected by the operation detection means within the reception period, and the corresponding post-reception production starts to be executed. When there is at least a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 and a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 (separate reception period). There may be. According to such a configuration, when the precursor sound is not output, it is possible to challenge the stock reception production while maintaining a feeling of tension and providing a sense of security. It will be like.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the precursor effect sound corresponding to the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is output, and the player performs an operation within the stock period (first period) to detect this. Even if this is the trigger, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC and the corresponding precursor effect sound are not interrupted before the 1D reception period occurs. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the motion is detected during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period).

As described above, the 1D precursor staging display ZEC may be performed so as to straddle the timing when the 1D reception period occurs. At this time, the precursor sound corresponding to the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is also output in a form straddling the timing when the 1D reception period occurs. In this case, when the player performs an operation and detects it while the 1D reception period has occurred and the precursor sound corresponding to the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is being output. With this as an opportunity, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC and the corresponding precursor effect sound may be interrupted within the 1D reception period. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the stock reception effect has been performed or the situation has been received within the 1D reception period. On the other hand, when the stock reception effect is performed, the precursor effect sound is interrupted at the timing tX2 (tX2A).

By the way, as described above, the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and the "stock reception production" in another example (variation) thereof are "precursor production" before the reception period occurs. When an operation by the player is performed within the "execution period" and this is obtained as detection information, the detection information is stored, and the stored detection information is "reception valid" within the reception period generated thereafter. It means that it is used so as to be used for "judgment". Therefore, "the operation by the player is performed within the execution period of the precursor effect and this is obtained as the detection information" is the technique that "the operation for setting the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is performed". It is completely different.

For example, in the "stock reception effect", the detection information obtained in the "precursor effect execution period" is confirmed as it is within the reception period, so that the reception is valid even if the movement by the player is not detected within the reception period. Is made to be done. On the other hand, when the operation for setting the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is performed, the detection information corresponding to the operation is obtained, but the detection information is retained until the reception period occurs. There is no. That is, when the detection information corresponding to the operation for setting the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is obtained, the state of the effect state flag is changed to the "automatic button effect state" based on the obtained detection information. It will be set and operated to the specific state corresponding to. After that, each time the reception period occurs, the player does not move (operate) during the reception period by checking the state of the effect status flag when a predetermined timing within the reception period arrives. It is possible to execute the production after reception.

Therefore, in order to realize the above-mentioned effect example and the "stock reception effect" in another example (modification example) with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247, the gaming machine does not have the setting function related to the automatic button effect state. It may be present, or it may be a gaming machine that is always controlled to the automatic button effect state. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned effect example and another example (modification example) with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247, the first D reception is performed when the automatic button effect state is set by the operation by the player. Assuming that a period occurs, in the first D reception period, apart from the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, a predetermined timing between those timings has arrived. Based on this, the production will be started after the 1st D reception. That is, in this case, the first D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed based on the arrival of the predetermined timing without detecting the operation by the player (the acceptance validity determination is not made). On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is not set, the predetermined timing does not function, so that the timing tW3 arrives without the operation by the player being detected (the reception validity determination is not made). After the 1D reception, the production will start to be executed. If the second D reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is set by the operation by the player, the second D reception period is specified after the timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. 239. Based on the arrival of the timing, the production will be started after the 2D reception.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example and another example (modification example) with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247, the operation (operation) required of the player in order to succeed in the above-mentioned "stock reception production" is Needless to say, it is the same as the operation (operation) required of the player within the corresponding reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example and another example (modification example) with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247, it is assumed that the operation by the player is performed before a predetermined time or more before the timing when the reception period occurs. Also, the above-mentioned "stock reception effect" is not executed based on the detection information (in the embodiment, only the detection information within the execution period of the corresponding precursor effect is used for the "reception validity determination". Not done). That is, it is possible to realize such a "stock reception effect" only when the player is in a situation where the player can be aware of the reception period that is the target of the operation (operation). It can be said that it is important to make the player perform an action (operation) while being aware of the occurrence of.

Further, as described above, in the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and another example thereof (modification example), even if the detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information is obtained. Notification of the fact is not performed in the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is set, it is obvious that it is necessary to notify the person who made the setting whether or not the setting is completed.

Further, as described above, in the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and another example (modification example) thereof, when the detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information is received during the reception period. It will always be used for the "reception validity judgment" within, and the post-reception production will always occur based on this. On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is set, it is obvious that this can be canceled by the time the predetermined timing arrives.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example (first D reception period, second D reception period, etc.), the stock period (first period) is generated first within the period in which the precursory effect is executed, and the non-stock period (second). Period) was generated after this so that the reception period would occur in a way that would lead to this. However, instead of this, the non-stock period (second period) is generated first and the stock period (first period) is generated later than this within the period in which the precursory effect is executed, which leads to this. A reception period may occur. In this case, it is assumed that the movement by the player is detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, but even in such a case (obtained in the reception period). It is desirable that the acceptance validity judgment is made within the acceptance period based on the detection information obtained in the stock period (first period) (without using the detection information). Alternatively, when the movement by the player is detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, the detection information obtained in the stock period (first period) and the detection information obtained within the reception period are detected. The reception validity may be determined within the reception period based on both of the above. Even in such a case, the effect may be advanced in the manner shown in FIGS. 243 and 247.

In addition, in the above-mentioned effect example and its alternative example (modification example), unless there is a description that the automatic button effect state is set, is the state not set to the automatic button effect state? It is described as a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a function related to an automatic button effect state.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example and another example thereof (modification example), during the period when the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the player performs an operation as shown in FIGS. 237 to 239. When the motion is detected, the motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the second reception period (first period) and the motion by the player. Even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the second reception period (the first non-stock period). 2 periods) and are included. Then, after the detection by the motion detecting means is performed within the non-stock period (second period) in the period during which the second D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the motion detecting means is not required to perform a new detection. When the 2D reception period is over, the effect after the 2D reception is not executed (see FIG. 238).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, even during the period in which the first D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed in the above-mentioned production example and its alternative example (modification example), the operation by the player is performed. The stock period (first period) in which the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the first D reception period, and the player. Even if the operation is detected by the operation detection means, the detection information by the operation detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the first D reception period during the non-stock period. (Second period) and is included. Nevertheless, there is no new detection by the motion detecting means after the detection by the motion detecting means within the non-stock period (second period) in the period during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed. Even when the 1D reception period has expired, the effect after the 1D reception is executed (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235). That is, in this case, even if the movement by the player is detected within the non-stock period (second period) instead of the stock period (first period) during the period during which the first D precursor effect display ZEC is performed. Since it becomes possible to generate the effect after the first D reception without newly detecting the movement by the player, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is within the first D reception period. In the production progress on the side where the 1D post-acceptance effect can be executed without newly obtaining the detection information, the mode related to the 1D post-acceptance effect (1D post-acceptance effect display UGD1-) as an extinction-related display. 1 or 1D After receiving the effect display UGD1-2), different modes (first extinction-related display SKD1 or second extinction-related display SKD2) are made to appear. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 246 and 247, when the detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). As long as the effect progresses on the side where the effect after the 2D reception can be executed without newly obtaining the detection information within the above 2D reception period, the mode related to the effect after the 2D reception is displayed as an extinction-related display (the first). The same mode (second extinction-related display SKD2) is made to appear regardless of the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or the 2nd post-reception effect display UGD2-2).

That is, in the 1D post-acceptance effect, the detection information is generated within the above 1D reception period regardless of whether the detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period). Since it is feasible without new gain, there is a concern that the player's tension cannot be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the first D post-acceptance effect is executed, the extinction-related display itself is provided with an effect for suggesting the degree of expectation, so that the tension is suitably maintained. Will be expected. On the other hand, the 2D post-acceptance production is performed only when the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since it is possible to execute the detection information without newly obtaining the detection information within the second D reception period, it can be said that the player's tension is maintained by the staging of the detection information itself. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the second D post-reception effect is executed, the disappearance-related display itself is not provided with an effect for suggesting the degree of expectation, so that the reception is effective by the stock reception effect. After the judgment is successful, it is expected to encourage concentration on the production after the 1D reception. In addition, when the 2D post-reception effect is executed, the "2nd extinction-related display SKD2" corresponding to the high-expected mode of the 1st post-reception effect is always displayed as the extinction-related display. It will be expected to be maintained favorably.

Further, as shown in FIG. 243, regardless of whether the detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is detected within the first D reception period. In the production progress on the side where the 1D post-reception effect can be executed without newly obtaining The image display and the remaining time display are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247, the above-mentioned first only when the detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). In the production progress on the side where the 2D post-reception effect can be executed without newly obtaining the detection information within the 2D reception period, if the reception validity judgment is made by the stock reception effect, the 2D post-reception effect will be performed. At the time when the execution is started, the image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (invisible state).

That is, in the 1D post-acceptance effect, the detection information is generated within the above 1D reception period regardless of whether the detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period). Since it is feasible without new gain, there is a concern that the player's tension cannot be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even when the first D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, the "acceptance validity determination" has not yet been made because the image display and the remaining time display are displayed. It is expected that the person will be aware of the possibility and maintain a good sense of tension. On the other hand, the 2D post-acceptance production is performed only when the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since it is possible to execute the detection information without newly obtaining the detection information within the second D reception period, it can be said that the player's tension is maintained by the staging of the detection information itself. In this regard, according to the above configuration, since the image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (invisible state) at the time when the second D reception post-production starts to be executed, the "reception validity determination" is performed. It will be easier to recognize that the situation has been properly done, and it will be expected to encourage concentration on the production after the 1D reception.

The first D reception period and the second D reception period related to each of the above-mentioned production examples and modifications (another example) may be realized by transforming them into the following configurations, or the configurations according to the following modifications (other examples). The 1D reception period and the 2D reception period) may be further provided as a reception period different from the above-mentioned 1D reception period and the 2D reception period.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes at least a first D reception period and a second D reception period as a reception period in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation).

In this regard, when the 1D post-receipt effect corresponding to the 1st D reception period is executed, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the 1D post-reception effect is expected (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears). When executed in a low mode (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1) and in a high expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) for the 1st post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2). ), The disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in a different manner. However, instead of this, there are cases where the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (1D post-acceptance effect display UGD1-1), and 1D post-acceptance effect is expected. It disappears in one predetermined mode (same mode) regardless of whether it is executed in a mode with a high (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (1D reception post-effect display UGD1-2). The EF effect (display related to disappearance) may be executed.

Further, when the second D post-reception effect corresponding to the second D reception period is executed, as shown in FIGS. 246 and 247, the second D post-reception effect is expected to have a degree of expectation (ratio at which a jackpot symbol appears). A mode in which the effect is executed in a low mode (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1) and a mode in which the 2D post-reception effect has a high degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2). The extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in one predetermined mode (same mode) regardless of whether it is executed in. However, instead of this, there are cases where the 2D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2-1), and 2D post-acceptance effect is expected. The extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) may be executed in a mode different from the case where the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in a mode having a high (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (2D reception post-effect display UGD2-2).

Next, a case where the above modification is applied to the above-mentioned production example will be described. That is, FIG. 249 shows that "when the first D post-reception effect is executed based on the fact that the detection information is obtained within the first D reception period, or within the first D reception period, the reception validity determination is determined. FIG. 250 is a modified example of "the effect that appears when the effect after the first D reception is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3 without being done", and FIG. 250 shows "before the first D reception period" shown in FIG. 243. This is a modified example of "the effect that appears when the effect after the first D reception is executed" based on the detection information obtained in. Further, FIG. 251 shows that "when the secondD reception post-production is executed based on the fact that the detection information is obtained within the second reception period, or within the second reception period, the reception validity determination is determined. FIG. 252 is a modification of "the effect that appears when the timing tX3 arrives without being done", and FIG. 252 shows after the second D reception based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period shown in FIG. 247. This is a modified example of "the effect that appears when the effect is executed". In this modification, the configuration not particularly mentioned is described in "Examples of effects related to the first D reception period (FIGS. 234 to 236, FIGS. 240 to 243)" and "Examples of effects related to the second D reception period (FIGS. 237 to 234). 239, FIGS. 244 to 247) ”as described above, with respect to each of the above-mentioned different examples applicable to the“ first D reception period production example ”and the“ second D reception period production example ”. Is also applicable.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, first, the first D post-receipt effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) based on the detection information obtained within the first D reception period. In the case (see FIGS. 249 (e1) to (i1)), the first D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 249 (e2) to (i2)). The disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner as in the case of the above. Further, when the first D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) based on the arrival of the timing tW3 (see FIGS. 249 (e3) to (i3)), the first Even when the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a high expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 249 (e4) to (i4)), the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner. It is supposed to be done. Further, when the first D post-receipt effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) based on the detection information obtained before the 1st D reception period (FIGS. 250 (e5) to (i5). ) And the extinction EF effect in the same manner as when the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a high expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 250 (e6) to (i6)). (Disappearance related display) is now executed. Here, the second extinction-related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, the second D post-receipt effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) based on the detection information obtained within the second D reception period. (See FIGS. 251 (e1) to (i1)) and when the second D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (FIGS. 251 (e2) to (i2). ) And), the extinction EF effect is executed in a different manner. Further, when the second D post-receipt effect is executed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period (FIGS. 252 (e4) to (i4). ) And the extinction EF effect in a mode different from the case where the 2D post-acceptance effect is executed in a mode with a high expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 252 (e5) to (i5)). Is to be executed. Here, when the execution is performed in a mode with a low expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 251 (e1) to (i1) and FIGS. 252 (e4) to (i4)), the extinction EF effect is the first. 1 When the extinction-related display SKD1 is executed and executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 251 (e2) to (i2) and FIGS. 252 (e5) to (i5)). The second extinction-related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 251, when the timing tX3 arrives without the reception validity determination being made within the second D reception period, the third disappearance-related display SKD3 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect. However, instead of this, as the extinction EF effect, the mode (first extinction-related display SKD1 or second extinction-related display SKD2) that appeared when the reception validity determination was tentatively made within the second D reception period appears. You may do so. According to such a configuration, even if the reception validity determination is not made within the 2D reception period, the mode as the extinction EF effect displayed based on the arrival of the timing tX3 can be confirmed. If the reception validity determination is tentatively made within the second D reception period, it becomes possible to recognize in which mode (low expectation mode or high expectation mode) the second D post-reception effect was executed.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 238 and 246 and the modified example shown in FIG. 251 when the timing tX3 arrives without the reception validity determination being made within the second D reception period, the second D post-reception effect is executed. I tried not to be done. However, instead of this, the effect example shown in FIGS. 238 and 246, and even in the modified example shown in FIG. 251 such as the effect example shown in FIGS. 235 and 242 and the modified example shown in FIG. 249. Similarly, the effect after the second D reception may be executed based on the arrival of the timing tX3 without the reception validity determination being made within the second D reception period. That is, in this case, only the remaining time indicated by the remaining time display (the display area of the gauge image is “0”) is different, and the others are shown in FIGS. 246 (e1) to (i1) or 246 (e2) to (e2). The production is advanced in the mode shown in i2), or in the mode shown in FIGS. 251 (e1) to (i1) or FIGS. 251 (e2) to (i2).

[Color rendering of the acceptance period that can be operated multiple times]
As illustrated and described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect of the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol (special symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, the player is given a privilege. It will be possible to execute the jackpot game as a game and the transition to the high probability game state.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate a reception allowable period (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then), it is possible to generate a reception allowable period (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the acceptance allowable period (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance allowance period (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance allowance period (validity period) that occurs when the symbol staging based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as an effect (display after reception, output sound after reception, etc.).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a reception period in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) can be generated, and the player can accept the operation within the reception period. When the operation (operation) is accepted, the display changes (display after reception) according to the type of the reception period in which the operation occurs. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, "motion detecting means (sensor or the like) for detecting motion (operation) by the player" and "detection information storage means (peripheral control) for storing detection information by the motion detecting means". RAM1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) ”and“ The reception validity judgment that the operation by the player is effective based on the detection information that can generate the reception period and is stored by the detection information storage means is determined. If it is done within the reception period, it is provided with a reception-related effect execution means (peripheral control MPU1511a, corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) capable of executing post-reception display corresponding to the reception period. There is.

In addition, during the reception period, it is possible to display an action target display that suggests which is the "target of action by the player". Such an operation target display can be displayed, for example, as a simulated image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "movement target display" according to this production example is displayed as a "reproduction image display" that imitates a movement target by a player and has a plurality of modes having different expectations.

Further, during the reception period, it is possible to display the remaining time display suggesting the remaining time that the player is allowed to accept the movement (operation). Such a remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. In particular, in this production example, as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects (for example, the rate of decrease in the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are used. It is prepared and is to be executed in one of those modes. Different expectations (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when the reception period occurs, it is possible to execute a precursory effect that suggests that the player is given an action opportunity (suggests that the reception period will occur) before this. There is. The precursor effect is executed by, for example, an effect display on the effect display device 1600 and an output of a corresponding effect sound.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable period (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. The low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) does not include the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable period (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It may be included or included, but it is desirable to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate) (although it is not always necessary).

The "operation (operation) by the player" to be detected, including the above-mentioned examples and the later-described examples, is a player such as "operation button 410" or "sword decoration body 5001". It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pushing motion or sword pulling motion) by the touch sensor, "contact motion by the player to a specific part" that is the detection target by the touch sensor, and "inside the specific space" that is the detection target by the non-contact sensor. It means that the movement by the player in the above is also included. In short, it suffices to have one or a plurality of receiving means (operating means) for receiving actions by the player (pressing action, sword pulling action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

By the way, as the acceptance allowable period (valid period) according to this embodiment, the types such as the post-acceptance display and the post-acceptance output sound are different, the audible output status of the BGM is different, and the acceptance allowable period (valid period). Various types of acceptance allowable periods (valid periods) are prepared, such as the number of times that operation acceptance is allowed differs within the period), and whether or not the auto continuous hit function is enabled is different. There is.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special effects during the plurality of acceptance allowance periods, so that the effectability when the acceptance allowance period occurs is enhanced. Or to maintain a good sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have all of these configurations, and for example, even if only one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, the hobby of the game is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of water, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary for obtaining further effects, or it is applicable to another configuration (). The configuration described as (preferably applied) may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest related to the reception period.

[Structure 1-D]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display, which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.), is displayed ( It is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means targeted for the image display), and when the operation acceptance is made during the image display acceptance period, The reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception, and the operation reception is permitted when the image display reception period occurs. Or, it is provided with an allowable sound output means capable of audibly outputting a reception allowable sound suggesting that the operation reception is in an allowable state. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which a periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display. At least a "long-cycle display acceptance period" that is not displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit but can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time is prepared. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 1-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. In addition to the image display acceptance period in which the image display is displayed, a reception period in which the image display is not displayed will be further prepared, and the effectability will differ depending on whether or not the image display is displayed. You may suggest it.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-D" is adopted, the reception allowable sound is audibly output in the "short cycle display reception period", and the reception allowable sound is not audibly output in the "long cycle display reception period". There may be cases. According to such a configuration, in the "long-period display reception period", the player is given an operation opportunity as compared with the "short-period display reception period" in which the reception allowable sound is audibly output. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the fact, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension due to an increased possibility of forgetting to operate.

In this case, in the "short cycle display reception period", the reception allowable sound is audibly output, and in the "long cycle display reception period", the reception allowable sound may or may not be audible output. May be good. According to such a configuration, it is recognized whether the "short cycle display reception period" or the "long cycle display reception period" is generated only by confirming that the reception allowable sound is audibly output. Therefore, it is expected that the tension when the reception permissible sound is audibly output as well as the tension when the reception permissible sound is audible output is suitably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-D" is adopted, a mode sound that cannot appear in the "short cycle display reception period" can be output as a reception allowable sound in the "long cycle display reception period". You may do it. According to such a configuration, it is recognized whether the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" is generated only by checking whether or not the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output. Although it is difficult to do so, if the type (mode sound) is also confirmed, there is a possibility that it can be easily recognized that the "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

In this case, in the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period", the same mode sound may be output as the acceptance allowable sound. According to such a configuration, even if the type (mode sound) is confirmed when the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the "short cycle display reception period" and the "long cycle display reception period" Since it is not always easy to recognize which of the above is occurring, it is expected that the tension will be maintained more preferably.

[Structure 2-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which a periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display. At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit is prepared. Both the "short-period display acceptance period" and the "long-period display acceptance period" can occur while some kind of staging sound is audibly output. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 2-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. In addition to the image display acceptance period in which the image display is displayed, a reception period in which the image display is not displayed will be further prepared, and the effectability will differ depending on whether or not the image display is displayed. You may suggest it.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 2-D", in the "short cycle display reception period", the staging sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence until the end of the reception period (all). ) Is not made inaudible, but in the "long-period display acceptance period", (all) of the staging sounds that were in the audible state at the time of occurrence until the end of the acceptance period are inaudible. It may be possible to make it.

That is, as the image display acceptance period, a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which a periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display appear in a predetermined time unit. Even if a "long-cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed on the screen is prepared, the periodic change in the image display is actually a predetermined time. It is difficult to accurately determine whether it appears in units or in hours longer than a predetermined time. In this regard, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is not terminated by the end of the acceptance period, but in the "long cycle display acceptance period". If the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence may be terminated before the end of the reception period, will the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence be terminated? By confirming whether or not it occurs, it becomes possible to more accurately recognize which of the "short-period display acceptance period" and the "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred.

In this case, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is not terminated by the end of the acceptance period, but the "long cycle display acceptance period". Then, the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence may not be terminated or may be terminated by the end of the reception period. According to such a configuration, even if the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is not terminated by the end of the acceptance period, the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period" are accepted. It is difficult to recognize which of the "periods" is occurring. Therefore, the reception period is reduced by the amount that the player delays the operation in order to confirm whether or not the production sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is terminated. It is expected that the tension within the body will be maintained favorably.

[Structure 3-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the image display acceptance period occurs when a specific type of effect sound is audibly output and when it occurs after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. And both. Then, as the image display acceptance period, a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display appear in a predetermined time unit. At least, a "long cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed on the screen is prepared. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 3-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations. Further, the "specific type of staging sound" related to the configuration 3-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same effect sound as the "specific type effect sound" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different effect sound from the "specific type effect sound" related to other configurations. It may be.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. In addition to the image display acceptance period in which the image display is displayed, a reception period in which the image display is not displayed will be further prepared, and the effectability will differ depending on whether or not the image display is displayed. You may suggest it.

Further, in the above configuration, the image display acceptance period is divided into a case where the effect sound of a specific type is audibly output and a case where the effect sound of a specific type is made in an inaudible state. Since there are both, it is expected to improve the staging when the image display acceptance period occurs.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-D" is adopted, the "short-period display acceptance period" is set to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the "short-period display acceptance period" occurs. Correspondingly, the specific type of staging sound is not made inaudible or inaudible before the "short-period display acceptance period" occurs, but in the "long-period display acceptance period" , A specific type of staging sound is not audible before the "long-period display acceptance period" occurs, depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "long-period display acceptance period" occurs. It may be in a state or not in an inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it is either a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" when an operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easier to recognize whether or not, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given.

Regarding the "short cycle display acceptance period", the mode of the production sound of a specific type does not change according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the short cycle display acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to do. For example, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the staging sound of a specific type may be made inaudible before the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, or the "short cycle display acceptance period" may be made inaudible. A specific type of staging sound may be made audible at the time when the "display acceptance period" occurs. Alternatively, the "short cycle display acceptance period" is a specific type before the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, depending on the type of post-operation display and post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted. There are cases where the staging sound is in an inaudible state (type) and cases where the staging sound of a specific type is in the audible state at the time when the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs (type). May be good.

Regarding the "long cycle display acceptance period", for example, as the type of the "long cycle display acceptance period" in which the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound are different when the operation is accepted, at least the "first long cycle display acceptance period" is used. And "2nd long cycle display acceptance period" will be prepared, and the "1st long cycle display acceptance period" will be the previous change that has ended when the 1st long cycle display acceptance period occurs. The mode of the staging sound does not change according to the type of pattern (the reception period occurs (or does not occur) while the staging sound of a specific type is audibly output), and the "second long cycle" is set. In the "display acceptance period", the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended when the second long cycle display acceptance period occurs (a state in which the effect sound of a specific type is inaudible). The reception period may occur in the non-audible state, or the reception period may occur while the production sound of a specific type is audibly output.) With such a configuration, it is expected that it will be difficult to determine whether the "short-period display acceptance period" or the "long-period display acceptance period" is occurring, and the tension will be maintained favorably. Will be done.

[Structure 4-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation is received, the pachinko machine 1 may display the image display after the reception in such a manner that the design for the production (decorative design, etc.) is overlapped from the front side. Then, as the image display acceptance period, a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display appear in a predetermined time unit. At least, a "long cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed on the screen is prepared. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 4-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. Further, in the above configuration, when the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display may be performed in such a manner that the staging symbol can be seen overlapping from the front side. Therefore, the post-acceptance display should be emphasized. Will be possible, and it will be expected to improve the staging when the operation is accepted.

In addition, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-D" is adopted, the short-period display reception period may not be displayed after reception in a manner in which the design for staging can be seen overlapping from the front side, and reception is performed on the back side thereof. The post-reception display is performed, but during the long-period display reception period, there are cases where the post-reception display is performed so that the staging symbol can be seen overlapping from the front side, and there are cases where the post-reception display is performed behind the staging symbol. You may do so. According to such a configuration, when a short cycle display reception period occurs, the display after reception is not emphasized with respect to the design for staging, and the player has an opportunity to operate with a sense of tension. Will be able to be granted. When the long-period display reception period occurs, the display may or may not be emphasized after reception, so it is preferable to feel the tension when the player is given an operation opportunity. It will be possible to provide a certain degree of security while maintaining it.

In this case, based on the fact that the reception was made during the long-period display reception period, when the post-reception display is performed in such a manner that the design for staging can be seen overlapping from the front side, the reception is performed by a predetermined operation by the player or the like. It may be possible to shorten the period until the rear display is hidden so that the design for staging becomes easy to see. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the deterioration of the visibility of the staging symbol when the display after reception is emphasized is suitably suppressed.

[Structure 5-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period, the disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to see the image display is executed in a predetermined mode, and the disappearance EF display is predetermined. It may or may not be performed in a different mode than the mode. Then, at least the "first image display acceptance period", the "second image display acceptance period", and the "third image display acceptance period" are prepared as the image display acceptance period, and the "first image display acceptance period" is prepared. In the "image display acceptance period", it is possible to display so that periodic changes in the image display appear in predetermined time units (short cycle display acceptance period), and the "second image display acceptance period" and "third image display". In the "reception period", the periodic change in the image display is not displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, but can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (long cycle display). Reception period). The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 5-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations. In addition, the "first image display acceptance period", "second image display acceptance period", and "third image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 5-D refer to the technical concept of the configuration 5-D. It's just a name used to explain. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period (validity period) as the "reception period (validity period)" related to other configurations, and is different from the "reception period (validity period)" related to other configurations. It may mean a reception period (valid period).

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. Further, in the above configuration, when the operation reception is performed during the image display reception period, the disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is executed in a predetermined mode, and the disappearance EF display is a predetermined mode. Since it may or may not be executed in a different manner, it is possible to add staging even by such an extinct EF display.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 5-D", if the operation is accepted in the "first image display acceptance period (short cycle display acceptance period)", a predetermined result (big hit) is obtained. The post-acceptance display can be executed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations, and the extinct EF display is "the first aspect when the post-acceptance display is executed in the higher expectation mode among the above-mentioned plurality of modes. However, when the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode different from the mode with high expectation among the above-mentioned plurality of modes, it is executed or not executed in a mode different from the first mode. " When the operation is accepted in the "second image display acceptance period (long-cycle display acceptance period)", it is accepted in any of multiple modes with different expectations that a predetermined result (big hit) is obtained. The post-reception display is made feasible, and the extinct EF display is "when the post-reception display is executed in the mode with high expectation among the above-mentioned plurality of modes, the second mode is executed, but the post-reception display is the above-mentioned plurality. When it is executed in a mode different from the mode with high expectation among the modes, it is executed or not executed in a mode different from the second aspect, and the "third image display acceptance period (3rd image display acceptance period) When the operation is accepted in the "long cycle display acceptance period)", even if the post-acceptance display can be executed in any of multiple modes with different expectations that a predetermined result (big hit) is obtained, it disappears EF. The display may be "executed in the third aspect regardless of which of the above-mentioned plurality of aspects the post-acceptance display is executed". According to such a configuration, in the short cycle display reception period in which the periodic change in the image display appears in a predetermined time unit, the expectation degree is suggested by the mode of the disappearance EF display when the operation reception is performed. (1st image display acceptance period), it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity so as not to feel anxiety that it is difficult to recognize the degree of expectation even though the operation is performed. On the other hand, in the long-cycle display acceptance period in which the periodic change in the image display is not displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit but appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, it disappears when the operation is accepted. Depending on the mode of EF display, there are cases where the degree of expectation is suggested and cases where the degree of expectation is not suggested (second image display acceptance period, third image display acceptance period), so despite the operation. While giving an operation opportunity so as not to feel anxiety that makes it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation, it becomes possible to suitably maintain this feeling of tension when giving an operation opportunity.

In this case, the "first aspect", "second aspect", "third aspect", "aspect different from the first aspect", and "aspect different from the second aspect" as the extinction EF display are those. Some of the embodiments may be the same (in any combination), or they may all be different. However, the "first aspect" and the "aspect different from the first aspect" are different from each other, and the "second aspect" and the "aspect different from the second aspect" are different from each other.

[Structure 6-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first operation means and the second operation means are prepared as the operation means, and the periodic change in the image display is changed in a predetermined time unit as the image display acceptance period. The "short cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so that it appears, and the periodic change in the image display can be displayed so that it does not appear in a predetermined time unit but appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. At least prepare a "long-cycle display acceptance period". Then, at least one of the "short-period display acceptance period" and the "long-period display acceptance period" allows an operation reception for the first operation means and an operation reception for the second operation means, respectively. I made it in a state. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 6-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations. Further, the "first operating means" and the "second operating means" according to the configuration 6-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and the "second operating means" related to the other configurations, or the "first operating means" and the "first operating means" related to the other configurations. The "2 operating means" may mean different operating means.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. Further, in the above configuration, at least one of the "short-period display reception period" and the "long-period display reception period", the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are respectively. Since the state is allowed, it is possible to add the effectability by using a plurality of operating means.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 6-D" is adopted, both the "short-period display acceptance period" and the "long-period display acceptance period" are the operation acceptance for the first operation means and the second operation acceptance. The operation reception for the operation means may be allowed respectively.

In this case, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", only the image display that imitates the first operation means is displayed, and in the "long cycle display acceptance period", the first operation of the operation means is displayed. There are cases where only the image display that imitates the means is displayed, and there are cases where the image display that imitates the first operation means and the image display that imitates the second operation means are displayed. You may. That is, in this case, basically, in the "short-period display acceptance period", it is concealed that the operation opportunity is given not only to the first operation means but also to the second operation means. In the "long-period display acceptance period", it may be possible to recognize that the operation opportunity is given to both the first operation means and the second operation means. However, when the player can detect that the time required for one periodic change in the image display is a predetermined time (the reception period is the "short cycle display reception period"), the first operation is performed. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the operation opportunity is secretly given not only to the means but also to the second operation means, the effectability when the operation opportunity is given is improved. Will be expected.

[Structure 7-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which a periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display. At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit is prepared. Then, at least one of the "short-period display reception period" and the "long-period display reception period" allows the operation reception to be permitted multiple times. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 7-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. Further, in the above configuration, since the operation reception can be permitted multiple times for at least one of the "short cycle display reception period" and the "long cycle display reception period", the operation reception is permitted multiple times. It is possible to add a directing effect.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 7-D" is adopted, the player accepts the operation (operation) multiple times (operation reception) regardless of the type of the reception period in the "short cycle display reception period". It will be an acceptable type (for example, continuous push type), but in the "long cycle display acceptance period", the acceptance acceptance period depends on the type of acceptance period (type such as post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound). When the type (for example, single push type) allows the player to accept the operation (operation) only once until the end of the (valid period) (while it is occurring). , A type in which the player is allowed to accept operations (operations) multiple times (for example, continuous hitting type) until the acceptance period (valid period) ends (while it occurs). ) May be the case. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the operation reception is allowed a plurality of times (for example, the continuous hitting type) when the "short cycle display reception period" occurs. In addition, when the "long-period display reception period" occurs, it becomes possible to conceal whether or not the operation reception is allowed multiple times (for example, whether or not it is a continuous hit type). , You will be able to be given an operation opportunity in a tense atmosphere.

In this case, even if the reception period (valid period) of the type (for example, the continuous hitting type) in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) multiple times (operation reception), the lottery (judgment) related to the production is performed. Depending on the result of the above, the reception period (valid period) may end with only one operation reception. In short, if it is allowed multiple times (pattern), it may be a certain type of acceptance period (valid period).

[Structure 8-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which a periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display. At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit is prepared. Then, when the operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the image display in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display is hidden. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 8-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. Further, in the above configuration, when an operation is received for the operation means corresponding to the image display in the "short cycle display reception period", the periodic change that has appeared in the image display up to that point is hidden. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the image display, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the operation reception is performed.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 8-D", in the "short-period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the image display is displayed. The periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden, but in the "long-period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the image display is operated and the operation is accepted, it is displayed on the image display. There may be a case where the periodic change that has appeared up to is hidden, and a case where the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is not hidden and is continued in the image display. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display until then was not hidden and continued when the operation was accepted, the "long-period display acceptance period" occurred. You will be able to suggest that. In addition, when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display is hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short-period display acceptance period" or the "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize what it is.

In this case, "the periodic change is hidden" may be hidden by "hiding the image display", or the image display continues to be displayed. The periodic change that has appeared up to that point may be terminated once and become a static display, the same periodic change may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Structure 9-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the image display), and the operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period. Then, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which a periodic change in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a periodic change in the image display. At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" that can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit is prepared. Then, when the operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the image display in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic change that has appeared in the image display up to that point is not hidden and continues. I made it. The "predetermined time" required for the configuration 9-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" for other configurations.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display, so that the image display acceptance period has occurred. It is expected that the tension at the time will be maintained favorably. Further, in the above configuration, even if the operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the image display in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic change that has appeared in the image display until then is hidden. Since the operation is continued without being performed, it is expected that the time required for one periodic change in the image display can be confirmed even after the operation is accepted.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 9-D", in the "short-period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the image display is displayed. The periodic changes that have appeared until then continue without being hidden, but in the "long-period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the image is displayed. There may be a case where the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden, and a case where the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display is not hidden and is continued. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the "long-period display acceptance period" occurred when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display was hidden when the operation was accepted. You will be able to. In addition, when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display when the operation is accepted is not hidden and is continued, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" is set. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize whether it has occurred.

In this case, "the periodic change is hidden" may be hidden by "hiding the image display", or the image display continues to be displayed. The periodic change that has appeared up to that point may be terminated once and become a static display, the same periodic change may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Structure 10-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed during the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means and the reception can execute at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception. When the permissible period occurs, the permissible sound output means capable of audibly outputting the reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is in the permissible state or the operation reception is in the permissible state is provided. In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" in which operation acceptance can be allowed multiple times before the acceptance acceptance period ends is prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation reception is performed a plurality of times only by keeping the operation means set as the operation target to which the operation reception is permitted a plurality of times in the operated state as the "multiple times allowable period". At least the "maintenance operation permissible period" is prepared, and in the "maintenance operation permissible period", the reception permissible sound is audibly output when it occurs.

According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple allowable period), if a "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, By audibly outputting the reception allowable sound, "It becomes easy to start the operation immediately after the maintenance operation allowable period occurs, and the operation is performed multiple times while the remaining time is sufficient for that amount. It will be possible to "play", and "the operation will be accepted multiple times just by keeping the operating means in the operated state", so it is expected to suppress the decline in the game interest. become.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 10-D" is adopted, at least the "operation means in which the operation reception can be allowed multiple times" among the plurality of operation means is used as the image display as the "multiple times allowable period". The "maintenance operation permissible period" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display displayed and maintained in the operated state, and the operation reception is performed multiple times among the multiple operation means. An acceptable operation means is displayed at least as an image display, but the operation reception is not performed multiple times only by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. You may prepare it. Then, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", the reception permissible sound is audibly output when it occurs, but in the maintenance operation non-permissible period, the reception permissible sound may not be audibly output when it occurs. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the "automatic continuous striking function" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operating means in the operated state is enabled. You will be able to suggest whether or not.

[Structure 11-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed during the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. There is. Further, as the acceptance allowable period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an image display that imitates an operation means in which an operation reception is set as an operation target that is permitted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple permissible period" may bring the staging sound, which is in an audible state at the time of its occurrence, into an inaudible state until the end of the "multiple permissible period". be. Further, as the "permissible period for multiple times", at least "the permissible period for maintenance operation in which the operation reception is performed a plurality of times only by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state" is prepared.

According to such a configuration, when the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is changed to the inaudible state while the operation opportunity is given, the operation reception is allowed multiple times. It will be possible to suggest that there is a tolerable period. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple allowed period), "just keep the operating means corresponding to the image display in the operated state". Since the operation reception is performed multiple times, it is expected that the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 11-D" is adopted, at least an operation means that can be allowed to be operated multiple times among a plurality of operation means is displayed as an image display as a "multiple times allowable period". At the same time, the "maintenance operation allowable period" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state, and the operation reception is permitted multiple times among the multiple operation means. At least the possible operation means are displayed as an image display, but there is a "maintenance operation unacceptable period" in which the operation reception is not performed multiple times just by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. You may try to do it. Then, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", the staging sound that is in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not made into an inaudible state until the end of the "maintenance operation allowable period", but the "maintenance operation non-allowable period". Then, the staging sound that is in an audible state at the time of generation may be made into an inaudible state until the maintenance operation non-permissible period ends. According to such a configuration, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence until the end of the "multiple permissible period" is made in an inaudible state. Depending on whether or not the operation means is operated, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the "automatic continuous hitting function", in which the operation reception is performed multiple times, is enabled simply by keeping the operating means in the operated state.

In this case, the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" may occur while the audible output of the staging sound is reduced (suppressed). That is, it suffices if the staging sound is audible when the "multiple permissible period" occurs.

[Structure 12-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed during the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. There is. Further, as the acceptance allowable period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an image display that imitates an operation means in which an operation reception is set as an operation target that is permitted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple permissible period" occurs when a specific type of effect sound is audibly output and after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. There are cases. In addition, as a multiple permissible period, at least "a maintenance operation permissible period in which the operation reception is performed a plurality of times only by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state" is prepared. The "specific type of staging sound" related to the configuration 12-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-D. Therefore, it may mean the same effect sound as the "specific type effect sound" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different effect sound from the "specific type effect sound" related to other configurations. It may be.

According to such a configuration, the "multiple permissible period" occurs when a specific type of effect sound is audibly output and after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. Since there are both cases and cases, it becomes possible to improve the staging. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple allowed period), "just keep the operating means corresponding to the image display in the operated state". Since the operation reception is performed multiple times, it is expected that the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 12-D" is adopted, the operation is accepted among a plurality of operation means as a "multiple permissible period" that can occur while a specific type of effect sound is audibly output. The operation means that can be tolerated multiple times is displayed at least as an image display, and the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. Of the multiple operating means, the operating means that can be accepted multiple times is displayed at least as the image display, but the operation is performed simply by keeping the operating means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. It is also possible to prepare a "maintenance operation non-permissible period" in which reception is not performed multiple times. Then, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", a specific type of staging sound is produced before the maintenance operation permissible period occurs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. Is not made inaudible or inaudible, but in the "maintenance unacceptable period", the previous fluctuation pattern that ends at the time when the "maintenance operation unacceptable period" occurs. When the production sound of a specific type is made inaudible before the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs according to the type of (maintenance operation non-permissible when the production sound of a specific type is non-audible) There may be a case where a period occurs) and a case where the non-audible state is not set (a case where a maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs while a specific type of staging sound is audibly output). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, this is the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period". Since it becomes easier to recognize which one it is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given.

Regarding the "maintenance operation permissible period", the mode of the specific type of staging sound should not change according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. Is desirable. For example, the "maintenance operation allowable period" may be set so that the staging sound of a specific type is always made inaudible before the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, or the "maintenance operation allowable period" may be set. ”Is generated, the production sound of a specific type may always be in an audible state. Alternatively, the "maintenance operation permissible period" is a specific type of staging sound before the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs, depending on the type of post-operation display and post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted. There may be a case where is in an inaudible state (type) and a case where a specific type of staging sound is in an audible state at the time when the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs (type).

Regarding the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", for example, at least the "first maintenance operation non-permissible period" is used as the type of the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" in which the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound are different when the operation is accepted. And "2nd maintenance operation non-permissible period" are prepared, and the "1st maintenance operation non-permissible period" is the previous change that has ended when the 1st maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs. The mode of the staging sound does not change according to the type of pattern (the reception period occurs (or does not occur) while the staging sound of a specific type is audibly output), and the "second maintenance operation" is performed. In the "non-permissible period", the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the second maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs (a state in which the staging sound of a specific type is non-audible). The reception period may occur in the non-audible state, or the reception period may occur while the production sound of a specific type is audibly output.) According to such a configuration, it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained by making it difficult to determine whether the “maintenance operation allowable period” or the “maintenance operation non-permissible period” occurs. Become so.

[Structure 13-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed during the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. There is. Further, as the acceptance allowable period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an image display that imitates an operation means in which an operation reception is set as an operation target that is permitted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a first operating means and a second operating means as operating means, and during the acceptance allowable period, the operation reception for the first operating means and the second operating means are performed. In some cases, it is permissible to accept all operations. Further, as the "permissible period for multiple times", it is decided to prepare at least the "permissible period for maintenance operation" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times only by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. The "first operating means" and "second operating means" related to the configuration 13-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-D. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and the "second operating means" according to the other configuration, or the "first operating means" and the "second operating means" according to the other configuration. It may mean an operating means different from the "operating means".

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times within a limited time (allowable period for a plurality of times), he / she has operated the operation means corresponding to the image display. The operation reception will be performed multiple times just by maintaining the state, "so it is expected that the decline in the game interest will be suppressed. Further, in the acceptance allowable period, since the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are allowed respectively, a plurality of operation means are used. It is possible to add the original effect.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 13-D" is adopted, at least an operation means that can be allowed to be operated multiple times among a plurality of operation means is displayed as an image display as a "multiple times allowable period". At the same time, the "maintenance operation allowable period" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state, and the operation reception is permitted multiple times among the multiple operation means. At least the possible operation means are displayed as an image display, but there is a "maintenance operation unacceptable period" in which the operation reception is not performed multiple times just by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. You may try to do it. Then, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted, but the first operation means is imitated. Both the image display and the image display that imitates the second operation means are not displayed, and only one of the image displays can be displayed, whereas in the "maintenance operation unacceptable period", the first Both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are allowed, and the image display and the second operation means are imitated. At least there may be cases where both the image display and the image display are displayed respectively. That is, in this case, basically, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", the side of the first operation means and the second operation means on which the corresponding image display is not displayed is in a state where an operation opportunity is given. It is kept secret, and in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", it may be recognizable that the operation opportunity is given to both the first operation means and the second operation means. Become. As a result, when it is confirmed that the "maintenance operation permissible period" has occurred as the "multiple permissible period", the operation means on the side where the image display is not displayed is also urged to perform the operation. It will be possible to improve the performance.

In this case, when both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the first operation means is imitated. It is possible that only one of the image display and the image display obtained by the second operation means is displayed, and both of them are always displayed. Alternatively, when both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" (for example, display after reception or after reception). Only one of the image display that imitates the first operation means and the image display that imitates the second operation means (depending on the type of output sound, etc.) is displayed, and the image display that imitates the first operation means. In some cases, both the image display and the image display that imitate the second operation means may be displayed.

In this case, if both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation allowable period", the operation reception for the first operation means is allowed. Both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are allowed multiple times, and the operation reception for the first operation means and the second operation means are allowed in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period". When both of the operation reception for the first operation means is permitted, one of the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means is permitted multiple times, but the other May be allowed only once. Further, in this case, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the operation means (for example, the second operation means) on the side that is not displayed as an image display and is concealed in the "maintenance operation permissible period" is permitted a plurality of times. By doing so, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the automatic continuous striking function not functioning when the operating means corresponding to the image display (for example, the second operating means) is operated.

[Structure 14-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed during the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. There is. Further, as the acceptance allowable period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an image display that imitates an operation means in which an operation reception is set as an operation target that is permitted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the "maintenance operation permissible period" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times only by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state is set as the "multiple times permissible period". In the "maintenance operation permissible period", when the operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as a pachinko image display that has appeared until then is changed.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times within a limited time (allowable period for a plurality of times), he / she has operated the operation means corresponding to the image display. The operation reception will be performed multiple times just by maintaining the state, "so it is expected that the decline in the game interest will be suppressed. In addition, when the operation reception is performed, the display mode as the image display that has appeared until then is changed, so that the operation reception can be performed simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. Can be suitably suggested that is done properly.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 14-D" is adopted, at least the operation means that can be allowed to accept the operation multiple times is displayed as the image display as the "multiple times allowable period", and the image is displayed. The "maintenance operation permissible period" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the display in the operated state, and the operation means in which the operation reception can be permitted multiple times are displayed at least as an image display. However, it is also possible to prepare a "maintenance operation non-permissible period" in which the operation reception is not performed a plurality of times only by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. Then, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", when the operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as the image display that has appeared until then is changed, but in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the operation reception is performed. Even if it is done, the display mode (visibility) as the image display that has appeared until then may not be changed. According to such a configuration, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", it is preferably suggested that the operation reception is properly performed only by maintaining the operation state, so that the automatic continuous striking function is enabled. Coupled with this, it is expected that the hobby of games will be improved. On the other hand, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed even if the operation reception is performed. It is expected that they will be encouraged to repeat the operation more positively.

[Structure 15-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate an image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and if an operation acceptance is made during the operation acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound will be based on the fact that the operation acceptance has been made. Acceptance of reception that indicates that the reception period execution means that can execute at least one of the outputs and the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted when the image display reception period occurs. It is equipped with an allowable sound output means capable of audibly outputting sound. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the image display reception period, only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted once is displayed as the above-mentioned image display "specific type". "Image display acceptance period" and "Special type of image display acceptance period" in which an image display that imitates an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed at least as an image display. In the "specific type of image display acceptance period", the operation means that is set as the operation target for which the operation reception is allowed once and is the target to be displayed as the image display is When the operation is received and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the operation reception, and the "special type" is displayed. In the "image display reception period", when the operation reception is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times and the operation means that is the target to be displayed as the image display is operated, the operation reception is performed. It is now possible to continue the periodic changes that have appeared in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operating means. The "specific type image display acceptance period" and the "special type image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 15-D are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 15-D. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same image display acceptance period as the "specific type image display acceptance period" and the "special type image display acceptance period" related to other configurations, or may be used in other configurations. It may mean a different image display acceptance period from the "specific type image display acceptance period" and the "special type image display acceptance period".

According to such a configuration, the "specific type of image display acceptance period (operation)" depends on whether or not the periodic change that had appeared in the image display until then was hidden when the operation was accepted. It becomes possible to suggest which of "reception is allowed once)" and "special type of image display reception period (operation reception is allowed multiple times)" has occurred.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 15-D" is adopted, when the "special type of image display acceptance period" occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output and the acceptance allowable sound is not audibly output. There may be. Then, when the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the operation reception is performed by operating the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted multiple times in the "special type image display reception period". Then, the periodic change that had appeared until then is hidden in the image display, but if the reception allowable sound is not audibly output, the operation reception is performed multiple times in the "special type image display reception period". When the operation means set as the allowable operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display may be continued without being hidden. According to such a configuration, when the "special type of image display acceptance period" occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output, when the operation is accepted, it appears on the image display until then. It will be possible to suggest whether or not the periodic changes that have been made will be hidden.

[Structure 16-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate an image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and if an operation acceptance is made during the operation acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound will be based on the fact that the operation acceptance has been made. It has a reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the image display reception period, only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted once is displayed as the above-mentioned image display "specific type". "Image display acceptance period" and "Special type of image display acceptance period" in which an image display that imitates an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed at least as an image display. In the "specific type of image display acceptance period", the operation means that is set as the operation target for which the operation reception is allowed once and is the target to be displayed as the image display is When the operation is received and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the operation reception, and the "special type" is displayed. In the "image display reception period", when the operation reception is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times and the operation means that is the target to be displayed as the image display is operated, the operation reception is performed. It is possible to continue the periodic changes that have appeared in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operating means. Then, both the "specific type image display acceptance period" and the "special type image display acceptance period" can be generated while the staging sound is audibly output. The "specific type image display acceptance period" and the "special type image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 16-D are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-D. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same image display acceptance period as the "specific type image display acceptance period" and the "special type image display acceptance period" related to other configurations, or may be used in other configurations. It may mean a different image display acceptance period from the "specific type image display acceptance period" and the "special type image display acceptance period".

In such a configuration, the staging sound is produced in both the "specific type of image display acceptance period (operation reception is allowed once)" and the "special type of image display acceptance period (operation reception is allowed multiple times)". Since it is assumed that it can occur in the audible output, it becomes possible to provide the staging property using the staging sound.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 16-D" is adopted, the "special type of image display acceptance period" is when the "special type of image display acceptance period" occurs before the end of the "special type of image display acceptance period". In some cases, the staging sound that was in the audible state is not made in the inaudible state, and in some cases, the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is made in the inaudible state. Then, while the "special type of image display acceptance period" has occurred and the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence has been audibly output, the operation acceptance is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times. When the operated operation means is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point on the image display corresponding to the operation means may be hidden, and the image corresponding to the operation means may be hidden. In some cases, the periodic changes that have appeared on the display may continue without being hidden. On the other hand, while the "special type of image display acceptance period" has occurred and the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence is in the inaudible state, the operation reception is permitted multiple times. When the operation means set as the operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point on the image display corresponding to the operation means is continued without being hidden. May be good. According to such a configuration, when the "special type image display acceptance period" occurs, the staging sound that was audible at the time of the occurrence within the "special type image display acceptance period" is inaudible. Depending on whether or not the state is set to, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic change that has appeared in the image display up to that point is hidden when the operation is accepted.

[Structure 17-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate an image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and if an operation acceptance is made during the operation acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound will be based on the fact that the operation acceptance has been made. It has a reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the image display acceptance period is "a type of image display acceptance period that may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output" and "the specific BGM is audibly output. It can be categorized as "a type of image display acceptance period that cannot occur", and "a type of image display acceptance period that can occur while a specific BGM is being audibly output" is allowed once for operation reception. Only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target is displayed as the above image display, and the operation reception is set as the operation target that is allowed multiple times. It can be further classified into a "special type of image display acceptance period" in which the image display imitating the operating means is displayed at least as the above-mentioned image display. Then, in the "specific type image display acceptance period", the operation reception is set as the operation target that is allowed once, and the operation means that is the target to be displayed as the image display is operated and the operation reception is performed. When this is done, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the fact that the operation reception has been performed, and the "special type of image display reception period" is displayed. In "", when the operation reception is set as the operation target that is allowed multiple times and the operation means that is the target to be displayed as the image display is operated and the operation reception is performed, the operation reception corresponds to the operation means. The periodic changes that had appeared in the above image display can be continued.

According to such a configuration, at the time when the operation reception is given while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "specific type image display reception period (operation reception is allowed once)" and the "special type" It is difficult to recognize which of the "image display reception period (operation reception is allowed multiple times)" has occurred so that the tension can be maintained appropriately, and when the operation reception is performed, the image display is displayed. Depending on whether or not the periodic change that appeared up to is hidden, "specific type of image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed once)" and "special type of image display acceptance period (operation acceptance)" Can be allowed multiple times) ”can be suggested.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 17-D" is adopted, the operation means set as the operation target in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times is operated in the "special type image display reception period". When the operation is accepted, the operation means corresponds to the "first special type of image display acceptance period" that hides the periodic change that has appeared in the image display corresponding to the operation means. It can be further classified into the "second special type of image display acceptance period" that continues without hiding the periodic changes that have appeared in the image display, and the "first special type of image display acceptance period". The "period" occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "first special type image display acceptance period" occurs. , The "second special type image display acceptance period" is determined by the specific BGM according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the "second special type image display acceptance period" occurs. It may occur while the output is audible or when the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output, this is "according to the operation reception". Since it can be used as a material for judging whether or not it is a "thing that hides the periodic changes that have appeared until then", it concentrates on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. Will be able to be encouraged.

[Structure 18-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an image display which is an image display imitating an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate an image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and if an operation acceptance is made during the operation acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound will be based on the fact that the operation acceptance has been made. It has a reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first operation means and a second operation means are prepared as operation means, and during the image display reception period, the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are performed. It is now possible to allow all operations to be accepted. Then, during the image display acceptance period, only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation acceptance is allowed once is displayed as the above image display. It can be classified into "special type of image display acceptance period" in which the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed at least as the above image display. Yes, in the "specific type image display acceptance period", the operation acceptance is set as the operation target that is allowed once, and the operation means that is the target to be displayed as the image display is operated and the operation reception is performed. When this is done, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the fact that the operation reception has been performed, and the "special type of image display reception period" is displayed. In "", when the operation reception is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times and the operation means that is the target to be displayed as an image display is operated and the operation reception is performed, the operation reception corresponds to the operation means. The periodic changes that had appeared in the image display can be continued.

According to such a configuration, depending on whether the "specific type image display acceptance period" or the "special type image display acceptance period" has occurred, the image display will be displayed when the operation is accepted. It will be possible to suggest whether or not the periodic changes that have appeared until then will be hidden. Further, in the above configuration, since the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are allowed respectively, a plurality of operation means are used. It is possible to add directivity.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 18-D" is adopted, the operation means set as the operation target in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times is operated in the "special type image display reception period". When the operation is accepted, the "first special type of image display acceptance period" that ends the periodic change that has appeared in the image display corresponding to the operation means, and the image corresponding to the operation means. It can be further classified into the "second special type of image display acceptance period" that continues without ending the periodic change that has appeared on the display, and in the "first special type of image display acceptance period". , Both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted, but the image display and the second operation means that imitate the first operation means are reproduced. While both of the image display and the image display are not displayed and only one of the image display can be displayed, in the "second special type image display acceptance period", the first operation means is used. Both the operation reception and the operation reception for the second operation means are allowed, and the image display that imitates the first operation means and the image display that imitates the second operation means. At least there may be cases where both are displayed respectively. That is, in this case, basically, in the "first special type of image display acceptance period", the side of the first operation means and the second operation means on which the "corresponding image display" is not displayed is given an operation opportunity. In the "second special type of image display acceptance period", the operation opportunity is given to both the first operation means and the second operation means. Some things will be recognizable. As a result, when it is confirmed that the "first special type of image display acceptance period" has occurred, it is possible to urge the operation means on the side where the image display is not displayed to perform the operation. It will be possible, and it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In this case, when both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "second special type image display reception period", the first Only one of the image display that imitates the operation means and the image display that imitates the second operation means may be displayed, and both of them may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, when both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "second special type image display reception period" (for example, reception). Only one of the image display that imitates the first operation means and the image display that imitates the second operation means (depending on the type of post-display and output sound after reception) is displayed, and the first operation means is imitated. There may be cases where both the image display and the image display obtained by the second operation means are displayed.

[Structure 19-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed during the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means and the reception can execute at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception. When the permissible period occurs, the permissible sound output means capable of audibly outputting the reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is in the permissible state or the operation reception is in the permissible state is provided. In addition, it is possible to display the "reception period-related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear during the reception permissible period, and as the reception permissible period, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "multiple times". At least the "allowable period" will be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period", and the "specific multiple times permissible period". , And at least a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed at least as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display". Then, in the "specific multiple times permissible period", the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point in the first periodic display are hidden each time the operation is accepted multiple times. It should be noted that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and the "specific multiple-time allowable period" relating to the configuration 19-D. And "special multiple permissible period" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", which are related to other configurations. It may mean the same means as the "special multiple-time permissible period", or the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" related to other configurations. , "Fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple permissible period", and "special multiple permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, the operation is accepted by confirming the number of times that the periodic change appearing in the "first periodic display" is hidden in the "specific multiple times allowable period". You will be able to check the number of times.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 19-D", in the "specific multiple times permissible period", when the occurrence occurs, the reception permissible sound is audibly output and the operation reception permissible multiple times is performed. Each time it is made, the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden in the "first periodic display", but the periodic changes that have appeared until then are continued in the "second periodic display". You may do so. In addition, in the "special multiple-time permissible period", the reception permissible sound is not audibly output at the time of occurrence, and each time the operation reception that is permitted multiple times is performed, the "third periodic display" and the "fourth cycle" are performed. In any of the "sexual indications", the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point may be continued. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed based on the mode of the "reception period-related periodicity display" when the operation reception is performed, through the presence or absence of the audible output of the reception allowable sound. Will be able to suggest. Further, even when the reception allowable sound is audibly output (when it is suggested that it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed), the "second periodicity display" is not used. Those who mistakenly gaze at the "periodic display" will have difficulty in recognizing whether or not the operation reception has been performed properly, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

[Structure 20-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed within the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, it is possible to display the "reception period-related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear during the reception permissible period, and as the reception permissible period, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "multiple times". At least the "allowable period" will be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period", and the "specific multiple times permissible period". , And at least a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed at least as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" is prepared. Then, both the "specific multiple times permissible period" and the "special multiple times permissible period" can be generated while the staging sound is audibly output. It should be noted that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and the "specific multiple-time allowable period" related to the configuration 20-D. And "special multiple permissible period" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 20-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", which are related to other configurations. It may mean the same means as the "special multiple-time permissible period", or the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" related to other configurations. , "Fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple permissible period", and "special multiple permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, both the "specific multiple times permissible period" and the "special multiple times permissible period" can be generated while the effect sound is audibly output. It will be possible to provide staging using sound and "reception period related periodicity display".

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 20-D", in the "specific multiple-time permissible period", each time the operation is accepted multiple times, the "first periodicity display" is used. The periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden, but in the "second periodic display", the periodic change that has appeared up to that point may be continued. In addition, in the "special multiple-time permissible period", each time the operation is accepted multiple times, it has appeared in both the "third periodic display" and the "fourth periodic display". Periodic changes may be continued. And, in the "specific multiple times permissible period", the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence until the end of the "specific multiple times permissible period" is not made into the inaudible state, and is "special". The "multiple permissible period" may be set so that the staging sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is made in an inaudible state until the end of the "specific multiple permissible period". That is, in this case, the "reception" when the operation is accepted is made through whether or not the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is made in the inaudible state until the reception period (valid period) ends. It becomes possible to suggest "whether or not the operation reception is properly performed" based on the aspect of "period-related periodicity display". In addition, even if the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of its occurrence is not made in the non-audible state, the "second periodic display" is erroneously watched instead of the "first periodic display". It will be difficult for those who have done so to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been performed properly, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

[Structure 21-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed within the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, it is possible to display the "reception period-related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear during the reception permissible period, and as the reception permissible period, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "multiple times". At least the "allowable period" will be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple permissible period" occurs when a specific type of effect sound is audibly output and after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. There are cases. Then, as the "multiple permissible period", the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display", and the "specific multiple times permissible period" and the third periodicity. At least a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which the display and the fourth periodic display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodic display" is prepared. It should be noted that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of effect sound", and "specific type production sound" related to the configuration 21-D. The "specific multiple permissible period" and the "special multiple permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-D. Therefore, "1st periodicity display", "2nd periodicity display", "3rd periodicity display", "4th periodicity display", "specific type of production sound", and "specific" related to other configurations. It may mean the same means as "multiple permissible period" and "special multiple permissible period", respectively, and "first periodic display" and "second periodic display" related to other configurations. , "3rd periodicity display", "4th periodicity display", "specific type of production sound", "specific multiple times permissible period", and "special multiple times permissible period" means different means. It may be a thing.

According to such a configuration, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, the output status of the specific type of staging sound, the mode of the "reception period-related periodicity display", etc. are confirmed, and the multiple times are performed. It becomes possible to suggest the type as an allowable period.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 21-D", in the "specific multiple-time permissible period", each time the operation is accepted multiple times, the "first periodicity display" is used. The periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden, but in the "second periodic display", the periodic change that has appeared up to that point may be continued. Then, the "specific multiple times permissible period" occurs while the specific type of effect sound is audibly output, while the "special multiple times permissible period" is the audible output of the specific type of effect sound. It may occur in some cases or in a case where a specific type of effect sound is not audibly output. That is, in this case, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific type of staging sound is not audibly output, this is the "special multiple permissible period", that is, when the operation is accepted, " It is suggested that the mode of "reception period-related periodicity display" does not change. On the other hand, when a "multiple permissible period" occurs while a specific type of staging sound is audibly output, whether this is a "specific multiple permissible period" or a "special multiple permissible period". Since it becomes difficult to recognize, it becomes possible to encourage the user to pay close attention to whether or not the mode of the "reception period-related periodicity display" changes when the operation reception is performed. In addition, those who mistakenly gaze at the "second periodic display" instead of the "first periodic display" will have a "special multiple permissible period" instead of a "specific multiple permissible period". Since it may be misunderstood that it is, it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

[Structure 22-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed within the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, it is possible to display the "reception period-related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear during the reception permissible period, and as the reception permissible period, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "multiple times". At least the "allowable period" will be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period", and the "specific multiple times permissible period". , And at least a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed at least as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" is prepared. When the "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed are set to be different from each other. It should be noted that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and the "specific multiple-time allowable period" related to the configuration 22-D. And "special multiple permissible period" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", which are related to other configurations. It may mean the same means as the "special multiple-time permissible period", or the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" related to other configurations. , "Fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple permissible period", and "special multiple permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when a "multiple permissible period" occurs, it is possible to suggest the type as the "multiple permissible period" by confirming the mode of the periodicity display related to the reception period. become. In addition, it is expected that the effectability when the "specific multiple times allowable period" occurs will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 22-D" is adopted, when the "specific multiple times allowable period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the second periodicity display are displayed. However, when the "special multiple allowable period" occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display is displayed and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display is displayed are the same as each other. May be. That is, in this case, as the reception period in which the two types of periodic display appear, either the "specific multiple-time permissible period" or the "special multi-time permissible period" occurs depending on whether or not there is a difference in the display timing. You will be able to suggest what to do.

[Structure 23-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed within the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, it is possible to display the "reception period-related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear during the reception permissible period, and as the reception permissible period, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "multiple times". At least the "allowable period" will be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period", and the "specific multiple times permissible period". , And at least a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed at least as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" is prepared. Then, when the "specific multiple allowable period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodic display is displayed and the periodic change is started, and the timing at which the second periodic display is displayed and the periodic change is started are displayed. The timing is different from each other. It should be noted that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and the "specific multiple-time allowable period" relating to the configuration 23-D. And "special multiple permissible period" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", which are related to other configurations. It may mean the same means as the "special multiple-time permissible period", or the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" related to other configurations. , "Fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple permissible period", and "special multiple permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, it is possible to suggest the type as the "multiple permissible period" by confirming the mode of the "reception period related periodicity display". become able to. In addition, it is expected that the effectability when the "specific multiple times allowable period" occurs will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 23-D", when the "specific multiple times allowable period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the periodic change is started. , The timing when the 2nd periodicity display is displayed and the periodic change is started is different from each other, but when the "special multiple allowable period" occurs, the 3rd periodicity display is displayed and the period The timing at which the periodic change is started and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display is displayed and the periodic change is started may be the same as each other. That is, in this case, as the reception period in which the two types of periodic display appear, the "specific multiple-time allowance period" and the "special multiple-time allowance" are allowed depending on whether or not there is a difference in the timing at which those periodic changes are started. It will be possible to suggest which of the "periods" will occur.

[Structure 24-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation acceptance period for an operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is permitted. Is possible, and when the operation reception is performed within the reception allowable period, the reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output based on the operation reception is provided. In addition, it is possible to display the "reception period-related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear during the reception permissible period, and as the reception permissible period, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "multiple times". At least the "allowable period" will be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period", and the "specific multiple times permissible period". , And at least a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed at least as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" is prepared. Then, when the first periodicity display is displayed when the "specific multiple times permissible period" occurs, the specific display different from the first periodicity display is displayed, and the specific display is behind the specific display. The display is started in the form that the first periodic display appears. It should be noted that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and the like, which are related to the configuration 24-D. And "special multiple permissible period" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", and "specific multiple times permissible period", which are related to other configurations. It may mean the same means as the "special multiple-time permissible period", or the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" related to other configurations. , "Fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple permissible period", and "special multiple permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, it is possible to suggest the type as the "multiple permissible period" by confirming the mode of the "reception period related periodicity display". become able to. At this time, it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained by affecting the visibility of the first periodic display.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 24-D", when the first periodicity display is displayed when the "specific multiple times allowable period" occurs, another specific display is displayed. Among them, the display is started in the form that the first periodic display appears behind the specific display, but the second periodic display is not displayed behind the specific display, and "special plural". When the 3rd periodicity display and the 4th periodicity display are displayed when the "permissible period of times" occurs, both the 3rd periodicity display and the 4th periodicity display are behind different displays at the time when the display is started. It may not be displayed in. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the "specific multiple-time tolerance period" or the "special multiple-time tolerance period" occurs relatively early when the periodic display starts to be displayed. become able to. Moreover, even if a "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs, a person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodic display" instead of the "first periodic display" is said to have the "second periodic display". Since the precursory effect display corresponding to the "periodic display" may be erroneously recognized as if a "special multiple permissible period" has occurred, it is possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. It will be expected.

[Structure 25-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations, and any of the plurality of display modes can be used. Even if it is displayed, a periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" can be changed to a display mode different from the first display mode when it is displayed in the first display mode among the plurality of display modes. When the display mode is displayed in the second display mode among the plurality of display modes, the display mode can be changed to a display mode different from the second display mode. Then, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" is changed. There is. The "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" related to the configuration 25-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-D. .. Therefore, it may mean the same means as the "special image display", the "first display mode", and the "second display mode" relating to the other configurations, or the "special image display" relating to the other configurations. , "First display mode", and "second display mode" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a different display mode, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" also changes. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the "special image display" has changed.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 25-D" is adopted, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, the "special image display" is 1 There is a change in the time required for the periodic change of the batch, but when the "special image display" changes from the second display mode to a display mode different from the second display mode, the time required for the periodic change of one batch changes. May not occur. According to such a configuration, the "special image display" recognizes whether or not the display mode has changed depending on whether the display mode changes from the first display mode or the display mode changes from the second display mode. Since the ease of use will be different, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

[Structure 26-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations, and any of the plurality of display modes can be used. Even if it is displayed, a periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" is the case where the time required for one periodic change is displayed in a predetermined time and the time required for one periodic change is the above-mentioned predetermined time. May be displayed at different specific times, and when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the specific time, it is required for the one periodic change. The display mode of the "special image display" can be changed while the time is maintained at a specific time. The "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" related to the configuration 26-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 26-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" related to other configurations, or "special image display" and "predetermined time" related to other configurations. It may mean a means different from "time" and "specific time".

According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is a specific time, whether or not the display mode of the "special image display" has changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 26-D" is adopted, when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the above-mentioned specific time, the "special image display" is displayed. The display mode of "" can be changed, and when the display mode changes, the time required for the periodic change of one time as the "special image display" may change, so that the periodic change of one time is performed. When the "special image display" is displayed so that the required time becomes the predetermined time, the display mode of the special image display may not change. According to such a configuration, it is suggested whether or not the display mode changes depending on whether the "special image display" is displayed in the specific time or the predetermined time for the time required for one periodic change. You will be able to. Further, when the display is performed at the specific time, the time required for the periodic change may change when the display mode changes, so that it becomes easy to recognize the change.

[Structure 27-D]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations, and any of the plurality of display modes can be used. Even if it is displayed, a periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" is the case where the time required for one periodic change is displayed in a predetermined time and the time required for one periodic change is the above-mentioned predetermined time. May be displayed at different specific times, and when the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden, and then the periodic change of the special image display changes. I made it appear. The "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" related to the configuration 27-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" related to other configurations, or "special image display" and "predetermined time" related to other configurations. It may mean a means different from "time" and "specific time".

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden, and then the periodic change of the special image display appears. When the display mode of the special image display changes, it is expected that the time required for the periodic change will also attract interest as to whether or not there has been a change.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the acceptance acceptance period (acceptance period) in which it is permissible to perform "acceptance validity determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means". ) Occurs, the integrated image display (such as an image of the operation receiving part) related to the reception target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image display (). By displaying as (see FIG. 144), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest until the display (display change) is executed after the reception. Such an integrated image display occurs as a result of a notice judgment with an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. ..

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or a modification thereof, so details are omitted. For example, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. Further, as the "integrated image display", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the display is performed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance acceptance period (acceptance period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. In some cases, the reception allowable sound is audibly output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptable period (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound in which the acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable reception sound" is a sound that is not output under the condition that the production has nothing to do with the allowable reception period (reception period).

Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the above-mentioned "configuration 1-D" to "configuration 26-D" and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment and may not necessarily be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above-mentioned "Structure 1-D" to "Structure 26-D" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration to be used.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the type of post-reception display and post-reception output sound that appears when the machine is accepted (for example, conversation notice as post-reception production, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc., suggests the degree of expectation. We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception productions) with different production types). Occurrence conditions are set for each reception period (for example, a predetermined result can be obtained by a judgment such as a big hit judgment or a staging judgment), and when any one of these generation conditions is satisfied, the occurrence condition is satisfied. It is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception production) according to the generation conditions.

First, with reference to FIGS. 253 to 269, among such a plurality of reception periods (reception production), the first E reception period (first E reception post production) and the second E reception period (second E reception post production) ), The 3E reception period (3E reception post-production), and the 4E reception period (4E reception post-production) will be described. Regarding each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 252, the first E reception period (the first E reception post-production), the second E reception period (the second E reception post-production), and the third E reception period (the third E reception post-production). It may be prepared as a reception period different from the 4E reception period (4E reception post-production), the 1E reception period (1E reception post-production), and the 2E reception period. It may be realized as one of (2E reception post-production), 3E reception period (3E reception post-production), and 4E reception period (4E reception post-production). Further, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily included in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods with reference to FIGS. 252. You may not be prepared.

FIG. 253 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the “condition 1E” is satisfied as the generation condition and the first E reception period (first E reception effect) occurs. FIGS. 255 to 257 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the first E reception period (first E reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the "first E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the start condition being satisfied (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the first E fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 1E variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 1E variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started (. "Situation shown in FIG. 255 (a)"), within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is the effect of the above-selected "first E variation pattern" itself. Will be additionally executed.

As shown in FIG. 253 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "first E variation pattern", the timing ta2 has arrived when the first E time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 1E" is satisfied), the above-mentioned 1E acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the display after acceptance of 1E (sound output after acceptance of 1E)" is permitted is It is possible to occur (the situation shown in FIG. 255 (c)).

Here, the first E reception period according to this embodiment is until the end of the first E reception period (until the operation reception regarding the display after the first E reception (sound output after the first E reception) is not allowed). During the period), the operation reception functions as a "multiple permissible period" in which the operation reception is permissible multiple times.

That is, as will be described later, during the 1st E reception period, a display change (for example, a depiction in which the 1st meter rises) occurs in the background image or the like as "display after the 1st E reception" each time the operation is received. When the special condition is satisfied as a result of the operation reception being performed multiple times in this way, the display change different from the display change of the background image (display that does not suggest the degree of expectation) until the first E reception period is terminated. (Display suggesting the degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as "display after reception of the first E" (for example, a depiction in which the first meter is full and the first character is revived) can be displayed. ing. On the other hand, when the special condition is not satisfied within the first E reception period, it is based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining time as the first E reception period becomes "0"). (The first E reception period has ended)), and a predetermined mode as "display after the first E reception" (for example, the depiction that the first meter does not fill up and the first character collapses) is displayed. It has become. When the predetermined mode is displayed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation (ratio) that a big hit is obtained is lower than when the above special mode is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when such a first E reception period is generated, a reception period-related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, is displayed in connection with the first E reception period. It is possible, and the "first periodic display SH1" and the "second periodic display SH2" are displayed as the reception period-related periodic display.

Here, the "first periodic display SH1" according to this embodiment means "the dog character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 254 (A) and then in the mode shown in FIG. 254 (B). When a moving image such as "displayed" is regarded as one periodic change, it means a display in which the periodic change can repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period C time. Further, the "second periodic display SH2" according to this embodiment is shown in FIGS. 254 (b) to 254 (d) after the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254 (a). When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is a predetermined period D time (a time different from the period C time (here, rather than the period C time). It means a display that can appear repeatedly in a form that takes a long time)).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to give the player information as a hint as to which type the reception period has occurred, such a reception period-related periodicity display (first). Periodic display SH1 and second periodic display SH2) are to be displayed. However, the reception period-related periodic display (first periodic display SH1, second periodic display SH2) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is required to make it more difficult to recognize which type of reception period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these.

For example, when the first periodic display SH1 is displayed when the first E reception period occurs, the first periodic display SH1 appears behind the specific display while the specific display is displayed. Although the display is started, the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed behind the specific display. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the reception period generated through the visibility in the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display is started. I try to suggest the type of.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to 255 (d), it is suggested that the player is given an operation opportunity (the first E reception period occurs) as the specific display. The precursor effect display is used. The specific display does not necessarily have to be a precursory effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing ta1 before the first E reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 253 (c) and 255 (b), As the above-mentioned precursor effect display, "1st E precursor effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIGS. 253 (c) and 255 (c) and (d), this "1st E precursor effect display ZED" includes an integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and reception. The period-related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2) is displayed so as to straddle before and after the display timing.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the first periodic display SH1 are "1E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)". Is displayed, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "1st E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed in the form of appearing behind the "1st E precursor staging display ZED (specific display)", and is here. Then, the display is started with the "1st E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)" turned to the back side.

In this production example, it was decided to start the display of the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the first periodic display SH1 at the timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs. Not limited to. For the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1, the display may be started before or after the timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, or it may be integrated. The image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the first periodic display SH1 may be displayed at different timings from each other.

Then, in this pachinko machine 1, the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 are displayed at different timings. In this effect example, the first periodic display SH1 is started to be displayed in advance of the second periodic display SH2, and the second periodic display SH2 is displayed while the first periodic display SH1 is displayed. The display is started. Further, since the first periodic display SH1 according to this effect example starts its periodic change immediately after the display is started, the timing at which the periodic change is started is also the first. The two-periodic display SH2 is set to be before the timing at which the periodic change is started.

However, regarding the first periodic display SH1, for example, the display is started before the timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, and the periodic change is not started at the time when the display is started. May be good. That is, in this case, the first periodic display SH1 is displayed in a form that maintains the mode shown in FIG. 254 (A). Then, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 may be started based on the arrival of the timing ta2 at which the first E reception period occurs. In this regard, regarding the second periodic display SH1, for example, if the display is started including the periodic change based on the arrival of the timing ta2, the first periodic display SH1 and the second period display SH1 are started. Although the timing at which the display is started differs between the two periodic display SH1, the timing at which the periodic change is started is the same.

On the contrary, the display of the second periodic display SH2 may be started before the timing when the first periodic display SH1 is displayed or the timing when the first E reception period occurs. In this case, regarding the second periodic display SH2, regarding the timing at which the periodic change is started, the timing at which the periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 is started and the timing at which the first E reception period occurs ta2 It is desirable to do it before. That is, as will be described later, the second periodic display SH2 changes periodically even if the operation reception is performed within the first E reception period, while the first E reception period is continued. )-(D)) are not hidden (stopped), and can be used as a comparison criterion for whether or not the periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 is hidden (stopped). It has become a thing. Therefore, by starting such "periodic change on the second periodic display SH2" prior to the first periodic display SH1, the periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 can be caused. It becomes possible to easily determine whether or not the display has been hidden (cancelled).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. In the first E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is modeled from the integrated image display IG. A moving image such as "a part (button image BMG) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 254 (α) and then displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 254 (β)" is regarded as one periodic change. At times, the periodic change is repeated in a form that requires a predetermined period A time. As a result, in the first E reception period, the appearance of the "operation receiving unit" moving up and down in its movable range is depicted in the integrated image display IG. In this example, the cycle A time and the cycle C time are exemplified as the same time, but the times may be different from each other.

In this production example, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed at the timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, but before the timing ta2. The display may be started, or the display may be started after the timing ta2. However, when the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed before the timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, the first E reception period occurs for the periodic change. It is desirable to wait for the timing ta2 before starting. That is, in this case, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is displayed in a form that maintains the mode shown in FIG. 254 (α) until the timing ta2 arrives.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) according to this effect example also has the same “1E precursor effect display” as the 1st periodic display SH1. While the "ZED (specific display)" is displayed, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "first E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)", and the periodic change is started.

The display range of the 1E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time, and even though the 1E precursor effect display ZED is displayed in such an embodiment, the integrated image display IG and the first The periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2, which is started to be displayed later than the periodic display SH1, will advance their respective periodic changes in each of the above-described embodiments.

Then, as a result of the display range of the first E precursor effect display ZED being reduced in this way, when the first E precursor effect display ZED is hidden, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), the second periodicity Not only the display SH2 but also the integrated image display IG and the first periodic display SH1 have good visibility. After that, unless the operation is accepted by the player, as shown in FIGS. 255 (f) to (h1), the integrated image display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity are shown. The display SH2 will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the first E reception period is performed. I'm assuming. That is, as described above, the first E reception period according to this embodiment functions as a "multiple permissible period" in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times, and each time the operation reception is performed, the "first" is accepted. When the display changes (for example, the depiction of the first meter rising) occur in the background image as "1E display after reception", and the special condition is satisfied as a result of the operation reception being performed multiple times in this way, A display change (display that suggests the degree of expectation) that is different from the display change (display that does not suggest the degree of expectation) of the background image until the end of the first E reception period, that is, a special display as "display after the first E reception". A mode (for example, a depiction in which the first meter is full and the first character is revived) can be displayed.

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the first E reception period, the staging display device 1600 according to this example may use the effect display device 1600. First, the embodiments shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) will appear in sequence.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 253, the EF display (effect display) according to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the first E reception period. EKH is displayed. In this effect example, the first aspect EKH1 and the second aspect EKH2 are sequentially displayed as the EF display (effect display) EKH, but any one of the first aspect EKH1 and the second aspect EKH2. Only may be displayed.

Further, for convenience of explanation, although not shown in FIG. 256, as shown in FIG. 253 (f), the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) was performed in the first E reception period. "Display after reception of the first E" is displayed according to the above. The "display after reception of the first E" is as described above, and is displayed as, for example, a depiction (background image) in which the first meter rises. This "display after reception of the first E" is not displayed in front of the integrated image display IG, the first periodic display SH1, and the second periodic display SH2, and is displayed at an overlapping position. Even if they are displayed, they are displayed behind them. Further, although the illustration is omitted, when the display after the reception of the first E is displayed, the corresponding sound output after the reception of the first E is also audibly output.

Further, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253 (e), when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, based on this. First periodic display Hides the periodic changes in SH1. In this example, although the display of the first periodic display SH1 itself continues, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is hidden by stopping the periodic change and preventing it from progressing. It is supposed to be. Therefore, in this example, the first periodic display SH1 shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) has the same aspect as the first periodic display SH1 shown in FIG. 255 (f) (in FIG. 254 (B)). It is displayed as it is (indicated mode), and no progress of periodic change has occurred from the first periodic display SH1 shown in FIG. 255 (f).

In this regard, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, for the second periodic display SH2, as shown in FIG. 253 (e), the first operation reception (operation reception without ending the reception period) is performed. ) Is made, the periodic change (period D time) is not hidden and is continued. Therefore, in this example, the second periodic display SH2 shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) is shown in FIG. 255 (g1) when there is no first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). , (H1), the periodic change is progressing. According to such a configuration, when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed in the first E reception period, the first of the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2. Periodic display When only SH1 receives an operation, its periodic change is hidden.

Further, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253 (b), when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, based on this. Of the integrated image display IG, the periodic change in the portion (button image BMG) of the operation receiving portion of the operation button 410 is hidden. In this example, although the display of the integrated image display IG itself continues, the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is stopped by stopping the periodic change so as not to progress. The target change is to be hidden. Therefore, in this example, of the integrated image display IGs shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2), the portion (button image BMG) of the operation receiving portion 410 of the operation button 410 is shown in FIG. 255 (button image BMG). Of the integrated image display IG shown in f), it is displayed in the same manner as the portion (button image BMG) in which the "operation receiving portion" of the operation button 410 is imitated, and is shown in FIG. 255 (f). No progress of periodic changes has occurred from these aspects.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and 256 (h2), the EF display EKH (first aspect) corresponding to the fact that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed in the first E reception period. EKH1 and the second aspect EKH2) are the first periodic display SH1 and the integrated image display IG (button) in which the periodic change is hidden according to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). For the image BMG), it is displayed in an overlapping form from the front of them, making it difficult to see them, but there is a periodic change according to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). The second periodic display SH2, which is not hidden, is not displayed in an overlapping manner from the front. In this example, the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second periodic display SH2, and the second aspect EKH2 of the EF display EKH is the second periodic display EKH. Although it is displayed at a position overlapping with the display SH2, it is displayed behind the second periodic display SH2.

Then, such EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is shown in FIGS. 253 (d) and 256 (i2) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation reception is performed. Will be hidden in. Although not shown in the figure, the operation reception is performed again in the form that the reception period (first E reception period) is continued while the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is displayed. At that time, it is desirable to redisplay the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) in the middle of execution from the first aspect. That is, in this case, if the operation is accepted while the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed (see FIG. 256 (g2)), the EF display EKH progresses to the second aspect EKH2. Instead, it will be displayed again from the first aspect EKH1.

Further, regarding the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1, a predetermined time has elapsed since the periodic change was hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). Then, it will be executed again as shown in FIG. 253 (e) and FIG. 256 (i2). As shown in FIG. 256 (i2), the first periodic display SH1 according to this example re-executes the periodic change in the form of redoing the periodic change from the embodiment shown in FIG. 254 (A). It will be. Although not shown in the figure, the reception period (1st E) is while the periodic change in the 1st periodic display SH1 is hidden according to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). When the operation reception that does not end the operation reception is performed again, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the operation reception is performed again. It is desirable to try again. That is, in this case, the time required from the time when the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is hidden to the time when it is executed again is substantially extended.

In addition, regarding the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the periodic change is hidden in advance according to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). After the stipulated time has elapsed, it will be executed again as shown in FIGS. 253 (e) and 256 (i2). As shown in FIG. 256 (i2), the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) according to this example redoes the periodic change from the first aspect (the aspect shown in FIG. 254 (α)). In the form, the periodic change will be re-executed. Although not shown in the figure, while the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is hidden according to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). When the operation reception that does not end the reception period (1st E reception period) is performed again, the integrated image is displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the timing based on the timing when the operation reception is performed again. It is desirable to re-execute the periodic change in the IG (button image BMG). That is, in this case, the time required from the time when the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is hidden until it is executed again is substantially extended.

Further, for convenience of explanation, although not shown in FIG. 256, the operation reception is performed for the "first E reception post-display" corresponding to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when it was made, it will be hidden as shown in FIG. 253 (f). The "first E reception sound output" will also be in an inaudible state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation reception is performed.

The time until the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, the second aspect EKH2) is hidden, the time until the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is re-executed, and the integrated image. "Display after 1E reception" according to the time until the periodic change in the image display IG (button image BMG) is re-executed and the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. The time until "" is hidden may be different from each other or may be the same time.

Further, even during the period in which the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is hidden according to the operation reception while the first E reception period is continued, the gauge image GG elapses over time. The depiction that decreases according to the demand may be continuously displayed without being hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (i2), while the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 is continued, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the integrated image display IG (button). After each of the periodic changes in the image BMG) is resumed, the integrated image is as shown in FIGS. 256 (j2) to (m2) unless the operation is accepted by the player. The display IG, the first periodic display SH1, and the second periodic display SH2 will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time), respectively.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the first E reception period is performed. I'm assuming.

When the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the first E reception period, the first operation reception (the reception period is not ended). In the effect display device 1600 according to this example, first, the embodiments shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) and (m3) will appear in sequence, as in the case where the operation reception is performed.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 253, the EF display (effect display) corresponding to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) during the first E reception period. EKH is displayed. The first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is also made in that the first aspect EKH1 and the second aspect EKH2 are sequentially displayed as the EF display (effect display) EKH. It is the same as the case.

Further, for convenience of explanation, although not shown in FIG. 257, as shown in FIG. 253 (f), the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) was performed in the first E reception period. "Display after reception of the first E" is displayed according to the above. The "display after the first E reception" is almost the same as the case where the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, for example, as a depiction (background image) in which the first meter is further raised. Is displayed.

Further, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253 (e), even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the first operation reception is performed. As in the case of the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is hidden based on this. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 253 (e), the second periodic display SH2 is periodic even if the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. The change (period D time) is not hidden and is continued. Similarly, for the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed as shown in FIG. 253 (b). Based on this, the periodic change in the portion (button image BMG) of the "operation receiving portion" of the operation button 410 is hidden.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) and (m3), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) corresponding to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is also provided. Similar to the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) corresponding to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the first periodic display SH1 and the periodic display SH1 in which the periodic change is hidden. For the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), it is displayed in a form that overlaps from the front of them, making it difficult to see them, while the second periodic display in which the periodic change is not hidden. For SH2, it is not displayed in an overlapping form from the front.

After that, the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is hidden, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is executed again, and the integrated image display is performed. Regarding the fact that the periodic changes in the IG (button image BMG) are executed again and other examples thereof, the above-mentioned example corresponding to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is used. The same is true.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (n3), while the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 is continued, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the integrated image display IG (button). After each of the periodic changes in the image BMG) is restarted, the integrated image is shown in FIGS. 257 (n3) and (o3) unless the player accepts the operation. The display IG, the first periodic display SH1, and the second periodic display SH2 will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time), respectively.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, it is assumed that the third operation reception is performed at the timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 256 (o3)) within the first E reception period.

Here, the first E reception period is originally continued until the timing ta3 arrives when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), as shown in FIG. 253 (a), and the timing ta3 arrives. It will be terminated based on what you have done. However, in this production example, the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 256 (o3)) within the first E reception period, and based on this, the first operation reception is performed. It is assumed that the 1E reception period ends before the timing ta3 arrives.

In the first E reception period according to this embodiment, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed, the first E reception period is assumed to satisfy the above-mentioned "special conditions". Display change different from the display change of the background image after the end (the mode as the "first E reception post-display" that does not suggest the expectation) (the mode as the "1E post-reception display" that suggests the expectation) Can be displayed. At this time, the "sound output after the reception of the first E" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

More specifically, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2C within the first E reception period (see FIG. 257 (o3)), "display after the first E reception" is performed. Aspect UH1-1 (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (s3)) with a relatively low degree of expectation appears, and a mode UH1-2 (aspects UH1-2 with a higher degree of expectation as a "display after the first E reception") than the aspect. FIGS. 257 (p4) to (s4)) may appear in some cases. In addition, the aspect UH1-1 (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (s3)) corresponds to the predetermined aspect as the above-mentioned "display after receiving the first E", and the aspect UH1-2 (FIGS. 257 (p4) to (s4)). ) Corresponds to the above-mentioned special aspect as "display after reception of the first E".

In this regard, when the mode UH1-1 with a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after the first E reception", as shown in FIGS. 257 (p3) to (r3), it is relative as the "display after the first E reception". The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (low expectation mode) different from that when the mode UH1-2 having a high degree of expectation appears.

That is, when the aspect UH1-1 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after receiving the first E", the first aspect EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p3)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. After that, the third aspect EKH3 (see FIGS. 257 (q3) and (r3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, based on the fact that the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) was performed during the first E reception period, "a low expectation mode of EF display EKH (corresponding to" first extinction EF "in FIG. 253". ) ”Is executed as a series of aspects (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (r3)) such as“ the first aspect EKH1 and the third aspect EKH3 are sequentially displayed ”, whereby after receiving the first E. It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH1-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as "display".

On the other hand, when the mode UH1-2 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "display after the first E reception", as shown in FIGS. 257 (p4) to (r4), the "display after the first E reception" is displayed. The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (high expectation mode) different from that when the mode UH1-1 having a relatively low expectation appears.

That is, when the mode UH1-2 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "display after receiving the first E", the first mode EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p4)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. After that, the fourth aspect EKH4 (see FIGS. 257 (q4) and (r4)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, based on the fact that the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) was performed during the first E reception period, "highly expected mode of EF display EKH (corresponding to" 4th extinction EF "in FIG. 253". ) ”Is executed as a series of aspects (FIGS. 257 (p4) to (r4)) such as“ the first aspect EKH1 and the fourth aspect EKH4 are sequentially displayed ”, whereby after receiving the first E. It becomes possible to suggest that the mode UH1-2, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, appears as "display".

In the "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" and "high expectation mode of EF display EKH" related to this effect example, the period during which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (FIG. 257 (p3)). (Refer to FIG. 257 (p4)), when the EF display EKH is displayed according to the first or second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the first E reception period (FIG. 256 (g2)). , Refer to FIG. 257 (l3)), and whether or not the first E reception period ends and whether or not the EF display EKH suggests the degree of expectation. I try to make it difficult to recognize. However, it is not always necessary to prepare the configuration, and the first or second operation in the first E reception period within the display period of "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" or "high expectation mode of EF display EKH". The same mode as when the EF display EKH is displayed may not appear depending on the reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period).

Further, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253 (e), when the third operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, it is also based on this. The periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is hidden. However, here, unlike when the first and second operation receptions are received, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the first periodic display SH1 itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (q3) or FIGS. 257 (p4) to ( q4)), the first periodic display SH1 is not hidden, and the mode shown in FIG. 257 (o3) (the mode in which no progress of periodic change occurs) remains behind the EF display EKH. The first periodicity display SH1 is to be displayed, and then the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden (based on the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period)). However, it may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Further, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, the second periodic display SH2 is different from the first and second operation receptions as shown in FIG. 253 (e). When the third operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic change is hidden based on this. Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the second periodic display SH2 itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (q3) or FIGS. 257 (p4) to ( q4)), the second periodic display SH2 is not hidden, and the mode shown in FIG. 257 (o3) (the mode in which the progress of the periodic change does not occur) remains on the front side of the EF display EKH. The second periodic display SH2 is to be displayed, and then the second periodic display SH2 is hidden (based on the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period)). However, it may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Further, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, for the integrated image display IG, as shown in FIG. 253 (b), the third operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). Even when this is done, the periodic change is hidden based on this. However, here, unlike when the first and second operation receptions are received, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the integrated image display IG itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (q3) or FIGS. 257 (p4) to ( q4)), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the mode shown in FIG. 257 (o3) (the mode in which the development of periodic change does not occur) remains behind the EF display EKH. The integrated image display IG is displayed in, and then the integrated image display IG is hidden (based on the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period)). However, it may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "display after the reception of the first E" is displayed behind the first periodic display SH1, the second periodic display SH2, the integrated image display IG, and the EF display EKH. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the "display after reception of the first E" immediately after it is displayed. However, as shown in FIGS. 257 (p3) to (r3) and FIGS. 257 (p4) to (r4), the first periodic display SH1, the second periodic display SH2, the integrated image display IG, and EF. By hiding the display EKH and the like, the visibility of the "display after the first E reception" is gradually improved. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode in which the EF display EKH is displayed, the mode in which the "display after the first E reception" has a low expectation is UH1-1 and the mode in which the expectation is high UH1-2. It is easy to recognize which one is displayed.

In addition, during the first E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, the "first permissible sound" may be audibly output as the reception permissible sound when the sound is generated. In this regard, in the first E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, a situation may occur in which the operation reception is performed while the "first allowable sound" is audibly output as the reception allowable sound. However (timing ta2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" is continued without interruption based on the operation reception.

In the example shown in FIG. 253, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before the timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. The audible output may be started at the timing ta2, or the audible output may be started after the timing ta2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 253, the first E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is audibly output, there is a possibility that the first E reception period will occur, so that it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. The "specific BGM" may be a BGM reproduction sound that is normally output during fluctuations, or a BGM reproduction sound that is output across a plurality of symbol fluctuations (multiple fluctuation patterns). May be good. Further, as such a "specific BGM", a plurality of types of BGM may be prepared.

In addition, during the 1st E reception period, the operation reception can be performed simply by keeping the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) in the operated (pressed) state. It is designed to be performed multiple times (operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (automatic continuous hit function). According to such a configuration, the player can make the operation reception a plurality of times without repeatedly performing the operation (pressing) on the operation button 410, so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. You will be expected.

Here, during the first E reception period, when an operation is performed using such an "automatic continuous striking function", while "first aspect EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH (FIG. 256 (g2). ), Fig. 257 (l3), etc.), the following operations are accepted. In this case, if the operation is accepted while the "first aspect EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH, the "second aspect EKH2" is not displayed and the "first aspect EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH. Will be displayed again.

For example, when an operation reception is performed in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2), the situation shown in FIG. 257 (l3) appears based on the operation reception, and the operation reception is performed in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (l3). Then, the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) or the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p4) will appear based on the operation reception, and thereafter, in FIGS. 257 (p3) and 257 (p4). Depending on which one appears, the staging progress shown in FIGS. 257 (q3) to (t3) or the staging progress shown in FIGS. 257 (q4) to (t4) will be performed. However, in this case, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is hidden (interrupted) after the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2). ) Will be maintained. Further, the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 is continued even after the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2), but when the operation is performed without using the "auto continuous striking function". Similarly, it will be hidden based on the operation reception that makes the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) or the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p4) appear.

FIG. 258 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the “condition 2E” is satisfied as the generation condition and the second E reception period (second E reception effect) occurs. FIGS. 260 to 262 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the second E reception period (second E reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the "second E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the start condition being satisfied (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second E fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second E variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second E variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started (. "Situation shown in FIG. 260 (a)"), within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is the effect of the "second E variation pattern" itself selected above. Will be additionally executed.

As shown in FIG. 260 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "second E variation pattern", the timing tb2 has arrived when the second E time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 2E" is satisfied), the above-mentioned 2E acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding display after acceptance of 2E (sound output after acceptance of 2E)" is permitted is It is possible to occur (the situation shown in FIG. 260 (c)).

Here, the second E reception period according to this embodiment is also the same as the first E reception period described above, until the end of the second E reception period (display after the second E reception (sound output after the second E reception)). Until the operation reception is not allowed), the operation reception functions as a "multiple allowable period" in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times.

That is, as will be described later, during the second E reception period, a display change (for example, a depiction in which the second meter rises) occurs in the background image or the like as "display after the second E reception" each time the operation is received. When the special condition is satisfied as a result of the operation reception being performed multiple times in this way, the display change different from the display change of the background image (display that does not suggest the degree of expectation) after the end of the second E reception period. (Display suggesting the degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as "display after reception of the second E" (for example, a depiction in which the second meter is full and the second character is revived) can be displayed. ing. On the other hand, when the special condition is not satisfied within the 2E reception period, it is based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining time as the 2E reception period becomes "0"). (The second E reception period has ended)), a predetermined mode as "display after the second E reception" (for example, the depiction that the second meter does not fill up and the character collapses) is displayed. ing. When the predetermined mode is displayed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation (ratio) that a big hit is obtained is lower than when the above special mode is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a second E reception period is generated, the reception period-related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, is displayed in connection with the second E reception period. It can be displayed, and "3rd periodic display SH3" and "4th periodic display SH4" are displayed as the reception period-related periodic display.

Here, the "third periodic display SH3" according to this embodiment is defined in FIGS. 259 (B) and 259 (C) after the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (A). When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each of the indicated modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change requires a predetermined period E time (a time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time"). It means a display that can appear repeatedly in the form. Further, the "fourth periodic display SH4" according to this embodiment is shown in FIGS. 259 (b) to 259 (e) after the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (a). When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change requires a predetermined period F time (a time different from the period D time or the period E time). It means a display that can appear repeatedly.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to give the player information as a hint as to which type the reception period has occurred, such a reception period-related periodicity display (third). Periodic display SH3, 4th periodic display SH4) are to be displayed. However, the reception period-related periodic display (third periodic display SH3, fourth periodic display SH4) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is required to make it more difficult to recognize which type of reception period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Further, the third periodic display SH3 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodic display SH1, and the fourth periodic display SH4 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character". The character different from the "cat character" used in the second periodic display SH2 may be displayed.

By the way, when the third periodic display SH3 is displayed when the second E reception period occurs, the third periodic display SH3 is not started to appear in the form of appearing behind other images. Further, even when the fourth periodic display SH4 is displayed, the fourth periodic display SH4 is not started to appear in the form of appearing behind other images. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the reception period generated through the visibility in the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display is started. I try to suggest the type of.

That is, also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 260 (b) and 260 (c), a precursory effect suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player (a second E reception period occurs). The display is executed.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tb1 before the second E reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 258 (c) and 260 (b), As the above-mentioned precursor effect display, "2E precursor effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIGS. 258 (c) and 260 (b) to (d), this "second E precursor effect display ZED" includes an integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and reception. The period-related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) is displayed so as to straddle before and after the display timing. In this effect example, the "second E precursor effect display ZED" is executed as the same effect display as the above-mentioned "first E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 255 (b) to (d))". However, it may be executed as an effect display different from the "1E precursor effect display ZED".

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) that appears in connection with the occurrence of the second E reception period, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth. In all of the periodic display SH4, the display is started with the "2E precursor effect display ZED" on the back side while the "2E precursor effect display ZED" is displayed. It does not start to appear behind the image of.

However, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)", the "third periodic display SH3", and the "fourth periodic display SH2" that are displayed in connection with the occurrence of the second E reception period. As long as it does not start to appear in the form of appearing behind other images, for example, it does not necessarily start to display in the form of "2E precursor effect display ZED" on the back side. It does not have to be. In this sense, the "second E precursor effect display ZED" displays "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)", "third periodic display SH3", and "fourth periodic display SH2". It may be hidden before the timing, or when the second E reception period occurs, the "second E precursor effect display ZED" itself may not be executed.

Further, at the timing tb2 when the second E reception period occurs, it is decided to start the display of the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the third periodic display SH3, but the present invention is not limited to this. For the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the third periodic display SH3, the display may be started before or after the timing tb2 when the third E reception period occurs, or it may be integrated. The image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the third periodic display SH3 may be displayed at different timings from each other.

In this respect, in this pachinko machine 1, the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 are displayed at the same timing. Further, since both the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 according to this effect example start their periodic changes immediately after the display is started, their periodic changes are started. The timing at which is started is also set to be the same for each other.

That is, as will be described later, in the second E reception period, both the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 are triggered by the operation reception even if the operation reception is performed while the second E reception period is continued. The periodic changes (FIGS. 259 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 259 (a) to (e)) are not hidden (stopped). Therefore, by displaying the "third periodic display SH3" and the "fourth periodic display SH4" having the same properties at the same timing, the periodic changes are hidden (interrupted) from each other. It will be possible to make it easier to judge that the state has not been set.

Further, even in the second E reception period related to this effect example, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. Also in the 2nd E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is copied from the integrated image display IG. A moving image such that the portion (button image BMG) is "displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 259 (β) to (δ)" 1 When two periodic changes are made, the periodic changes are repeated in a form that requires a predetermined period B time. As a result, in the second E reception period, the appearance of the "operation receiving unit" moving up and down in its movable range is depicted in the integrated image display IG. However, the "cycle B time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the second E reception period is set to be longer than the "cycle A time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the first E reception period. Since it is set, in the second E reception period, it is described that the "operation receiving unit" slowly moves up and down in the movable range as compared with the first E reception period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (d), the display range of the second E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time, and the second E precursor effect display ZED is displayed in such an embodiment. Among them, the integrated image display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 develop their respective periodic changes in each of the above-described embodiments. After that, as shown in FIGS. 260 (e) to (g1), the integrated image display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 have their respective periodic changes described above. (Cycle B time, cycle E time, cycle F time) will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 258, the case where the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing tb2A (timing shown in FIG. 260 (e)) within the second E reception period. I'm assuming. That is, as described above, the second E reception period according to this embodiment functions as a "multiple permissible period" in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times, and each time the operation reception is performed, the "first" is performed. When the display changes (for example, the depiction that the second meter rises) occurs in the background image as "2E display after reception", and the special condition is satisfied as a result of the operation reception being performed multiple times in this way, A display change (display that suggests the degree of expectation) that is different from the display change (display that does not suggest the degree of expectation) of the background image until the end of the second E reception period, that is, a special display as "display after the second E reception". A mode (for example, a depiction in which the second meter is full and the character is revived) can be displayed.

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing tb2A (timing shown in FIG. 260 (e)) within the second E reception period, the staging display device 1600 according to this example may use the effect display device 1600. First, the embodiment shown in FIG. 261 (f2) will appear.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed in the second E reception period, the integrated image is taken as an opportunity. It is possible to cause display changes that affect the visibility of the display IG, the 3rd periodic display SH3, and the 4th periodic display SH4 (displaying another image in front of any of those displays). There is no such thing. Therefore, in the second E reception period, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display (effect display) EKH as shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2). Is never displayed.

However, although not shown in FIG. 261 for convenience of explanation, the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed even in the second E reception period as shown in FIG. 258 (f). At that time, the corresponding "display after 2E reception" is displayed. The "display after reception of the second E" is as described above, and is displayed as, for example, a depiction (background image) in which the second meter rises. This "display after reception of the 2nd E" is not displayed in front of the integrated image display IG, the 3rd periodic display SH3, and the 4th periodic display SH4, and is displayed at an overlapping position. Even if they are displayed, they are displayed behind them. Further, although the illustration is omitted, when the display after the reception of the second E is displayed, the corresponding sound output after the reception of the second E is also audibly output.

Further, for convenience of explanation, although not shown in FIG. 261, the operation reception is performed for the "second E reception post-display" corresponding to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when it was made, it will be hidden as shown in FIG. 258 (f). The "second E reception sound output" will also be in an inaudible state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation reception is performed.

Further, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, as shown in FIG. 258 (e), it is based on this. 3rd periodic display SH3 does not hide the periodic change. Therefore, in this example, the third periodic display SH3 shown in FIG. 261 (f2) is an extension of the aspect of the third periodic display SH3 shown in FIG. 260 (e). It has the same embodiment as the third periodic display SH3 shown in f1).

Similarly, for the 4th periodic display SH4, in the 2nd E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258 (e), the first operation reception (operation reception without ending the reception period) is performed. ) Is made, the periodic change in the 4th periodic display SH4 is not hidden based on this. Therefore, in this example, the fourth periodic display SH4 shown in FIG. 261 (f2) is an extension of the aspect of the fourth periodic display SH4 shown in FIG. 260 (e), and is an embodiment of FIG. 260 ( It has the same embodiment as the 4th periodic display SH4 shown in f1). According to such a configuration, in the second E reception period, unlike the case of the first E reception period described above, when there is the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the third periodicity display is displayed. Neither SH3 nor the 4th periodic display SH4 will hide their periodic changes.

Further, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed as shown in FIG. 258 (b), it is based on this. The periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is not hidden. Therefore, in this example, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) shown in FIG. 261 (f2) is an embodiment of the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) shown in FIG. 260 (e). It is an aspect developed from the above, and has the same aspect as the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) shown in FIG. 260 (f1).

Further, even in the second E reception period, the depiction that the gauge image GG decreases with the passage of time is continuously displayed regardless of whether or not the operation reception has been performed while the second E reception period is continued. It has become.

That is, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 receive the first operation (reception). There is no change in the mode of the display before and after the operation reception that does not end the period), and those periodic changes remain. Therefore, even after the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 are displayed. , As shown in FIGS. 261 (f2) to (j2), each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time) will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 258, the case where the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing tb2B (timing shown in FIG. 261 (h2)) within the second E reception period is performed. I'm assuming.

When the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing tb2B (timing shown in FIG. 261 (j2)) within the second E reception period, the first operation reception (the reception period is not ended). In the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the mode shown in FIG. 262 (i3) first appears, as in the case where the operation reception is performed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed in the second E reception period, the integrated image is taken as an opportunity. It is possible to cause display changes that affect the visibility of the display IG, the 3rd periodic display SH3, and the 4th periodic display SH4 (displaying another image in front of any of those displays). do not have. Therefore, in the second E reception period, even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display (effect display) EKH as shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2). Is never displayed.

However, for convenience of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. 262, but as shown in FIG. 258 (f), when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed in the second E reception period. Also, the corresponding "display after 2E reception" is displayed. The "display after the second E reception" is almost the same as the case where the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, for example, as a depiction (background image) in which the second meter is further raised. Is displayed.

Further, for convenience of explanation, although not shown in FIG. 262, the operation reception is also performed for the "second E reception post-display" corresponding to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). When a predetermined time elapses from that time, it will be hidden as shown in FIG. 258 (f).

Further, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258 (e), even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the first operation reception is performed. As in the case of the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the periodic change (cycle E time) in the third periodic display SH3 is not hidden and is continued based on this. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 258 (e), the fourth periodic display SH4 is periodic even if the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. The change (period F time) is not hidden and is continued. Similarly, for the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), as shown in FIG. 258 (b), the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. However, the periodic change (period B time) is not hidden and is continued.

That is, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 receive the second operation (reception). There is no change in the mode of the display before and after the operation reception that does not end the period), and those periodic changes remain. Therefore, even after the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 are displayed. , As shown in FIGS. 262 (i3) to (l3), each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time) will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 262, it is assumed that the third operation reception is performed at the timing tb2C (timing shown in FIG. 262 (j3)) within the second E reception period.

Here, the second E reception period is originally continued until the timing tb3 arrives when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), as shown in FIG. 258 (a), and the timing tb3 arrives. It will be terminated based on what you have done. However, in this production example, the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing tb2C (timing shown in FIG. 262 (j3)) within the second E reception period, and based on this, the second operation reception is performed. It is assumed that the 2E reception period ends before the timing tb3 arrives.

In the second E reception period according to this embodiment, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed, the second E reception period is assumed to satisfy the above-mentioned "special conditions". Display change different from the display change of the background image after the end (the mode as "second E post-acceptance display" that does not suggest the degree of expectation) (the mode as "second E post-acceptance display" that suggests the degree of expectation) Can be displayed. At this time, the "second E reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

More specifically, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing tb2C within the second E reception period (see FIG. 262 (j3)), "display after the second E reception" is performed. Aspect UH2-1 (not shown) with a relatively low expectation appears, and a mode UH2-2 (FIG. 262 (k4) to (Fig. 262) to (Fig. 262) to There are cases where m4)) appears. It should be noted that the aspect UH2-1 (not shown) corresponds to the predetermined aspect as the above-mentioned "display after receiving the second E", and the aspect UH2-2 (FIGS. 262 (k4) to (m4)) corresponds to the above-mentioned "first display". It corresponds to a special mode as "2E display after reception".

In this regard, when displaying the "display after the second E reception" based on the fact that the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed in the second E reception period, the "first operation reception" is displayed regardless of the mode. As shown in FIG. 262 (k4), "2E display after reception" is displayed on the back side of all of the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4. It is supposed to be displayed in front of them as if.

Furthermore, when displaying the "display after 2E reception" based on the fact that the third operation reception has been performed during the 2E reception period, the "display after reception of 2E" is displayed as a decorative symbol regardless of the mode. SZ is also displayed on the front side so as to be on the back side. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the "second E reception post-display" with more emphasis, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

According to such a configuration, the "display after reception of the second E" itself is for the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, the fourth periodic display SH4, and the like. Since it will function as the "disappearing EF display", the EF display EKH will be displayed based on this even when the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is performed during the second E reception period. It will not be displayed.

In this production example, the "display after the second E reception" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is integrated at the time when the display is started (see FIG. 262 (k4)). The image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 continue without hiding their periodic changes. After that, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 are hidden (FIG. 262 (l4)). reference). However, for the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the 3rd periodic display SH3, and the 4th periodic display SH4, the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed. At the time when the "second E reception post-display" is started (see FIG. 262 (k4)), the display itself or its periodic change may be hidden.

By the way, in this production example, the "display after the second E reception" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is displayed for a predetermined time as shown in FIG. 258 (f). Is hidden when the time has passed. However, as described above, the "display after the second E reception" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) or the third periodic display. Not only SH3 and the 4th periodic display SH4, but also the decorative symbol SZ is displayed on the front side of them so as to be on the back side, so that the decorative symbol SZ is difficult to see. There is concern that the interest in games will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "display after the second E reception" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is displayed, the "after the second E reception" is displayed. An operation opportunity for ending the display state of "display" is given to the player, which makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the decorative symbol SZ being difficult to see. ..

In this production example, in the situation shown in FIGS. 262 (k4) and (l4), the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is displayed at a position different from the position previously displayed. I have to. That is, in this case, when the operation reception is performed by a predetermined operation while the "second E reception post-display" and the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) are displayed, FIG. 262. As shown in (m4), the "display after receiving the second E" in the display state is hidden.

In addition, during the second E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258, the reception permissible sound is not audibly output when it occurs. As a result, when a reception period occurs in which the player is allowed to receive multiple operations, the type (1st E) can be confirmed by confirming whether or not the reception allowable sound has been audibly output. It will be possible to estimate the reception period, the second E reception period, etc.).

However, as shown in FIG. 258, the 2nd E reception period can also occur while the specific BGM is audibly output, so that the 1st E reception period and the first It is difficult to predict which of the 2E reception periods will occur in the first place, and it is determined whether or not the reception permissible sound is audibly output due to the existence of multiple staging sounds while the specific BGM is audibly output. It also makes it difficult to confirm, which helps maintain a good sense of tension.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 258 (h), the specific BGM in the state of being audibly output within the second E reception period is satisfied with the predetermined conditions within the second E reception period (predetermined timing). When it arrives), the audible output is terminated and it becomes inaudible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 253 (h), the specific BGM in the state of being audibly output within the first E reception period may end its audible output within the first E reception period. It is supposed to be continued without. Through such a situation related to the audible output of the specific BGM, it becomes possible to suggest the type as the reception period.

In the second E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258 (h), it corresponds to the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) displayed as a target for which multiple operation receptions are allowed. The audible output is not terminated when the operating means (here, "operation button 410") is operated. As a result, the player hesitates to operate the operation means (here, "operation button 410") in which the reception of multiple operations is urged without worrying about the influence on the situation of the audible output of the specific BGM. It will be possible to operate without doing it.

Further, in the second E reception period, unlike the case of the first E reception period described above, the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is operated (pressed). ) Even if you continue to maintain the state, this will prevent the operation reception from being performed multiple times (the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the automatic repeated hit function will not be enabled). ing. According to such a configuration, the player can infer the type of the reception period by confirming whether or not the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting function is enabled when a plurality of operation receptions are allowed. Will be possible. In this case, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) within the second E reception period. Needless to say, it doesn't have to be.

FIG. 263 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the “condition 3E” is satisfied as the generation condition and the third E reception period (third E reception effect) occurs. FIGS. 264 and 265 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the third E reception period (third E reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the change pattern determination is performed, and as a result, the "third E change pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the third E fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 3E variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.) according to the 3E variation pattern, etc.) is started (. "Situation shown in FIG. 264 (a)"), within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is the effect of the "third E variation pattern" itself selected above. Will be additionally executed.

As shown in FIG. 263 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "third E variation pattern", the timing ct2 has arrived when the third E time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 3E" is satisfied), the above-mentioned 3E acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the display after acceptance of the 3E (sound output after acceptance of the 3E)" is permitted is It is possible to occur (the situation shown in FIG. 260 (c)).

Here, the third E reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first E reception period and the second E reception period, and is until the end of the third E reception period (display after the third E reception (first display). It functions as a "one-time permissible period" in which the operation reception is permitted only once) until the operation reception is not permitted for the 3E reception sound output).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a third E reception period is generated, the reception period-related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, is displayed in connection with the third E reception period. It can be displayed, and the "fifth periodic display SH5" is displayed as the reception period-related periodic display.

More specifically, the "fifth periodic display SH5" according to this embodiment means "after the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (A), then FIG. 259 (B), ( When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode shown in C)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is a predetermined period E time (a time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time"). ) Means a display that can appear repeatedly in a required form. That is, the "fifth periodic display SH5" displayed in the third E reception period has the same period E time as the "third periodic display SH3" displayed in the second E reception period. It is set as. In this effect example, the "fifth periodic display SH5" is displayed as the same image display as the "third periodic display SH3". However, the "fifth periodic display SH5" does not necessarily have to be the same as the "third periodic display SH3", for example, the sizes are different from each other, or only one of the dogs has bent ears. If there are some differences such as, they may be different.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to give the player information as a hint as to which type the reception period has occurred, such a reception period-related periodicity display (fifth). Periodic display SH5) is to be displayed. However, the reception period-related periodic display (fifth periodic display SH5) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is required to make it more difficult to recognize which type of reception period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Further, the fifth periodic display SH5 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodic display SH1 and the third periodic display SH3.

In this regard, when the 5th periodic display SH5 is displayed when the 3E reception period occurs, the 5th periodic display SH5 has a different display while the other display is displayed. The display starts to appear on the back side. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the reception period generated through the visibility in the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display is started. I try to suggest the type of.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 264 (b) and 264 (c), it is suggested that an operation opportunity is given to the player (a third E reception period occurs) as another display described above. It is decided to use a precursory staging display. In addition, another display does not necessarily have to be a precursor effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tc1 before the occurrence of the third E reception period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (b), As the above-mentioned precursor effect display, "3E precursor effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (b) to (d), this "third E precursor effect display ZED" includes an integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and reception. The period-related periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) is displayed so as to straddle before and after the display timing. In this production example, the “3E precursor effect display ZED” is referred to as the above-mentioned “1E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 255 (b) to (d))” and the “2E precursor effect display ZED” (FIG. 260 (b)-(d)) ”, but it is executed as a different effect display from the“ 1E precursor effect display ZED ”and“ 2E precursor effect display ZED ”. You may do so.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 264 (c), the "3E precursor effect display ZED" is displayed on the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the 5th periodic display SH5. In the meantime, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "3E precursor effect display ZED".

In this production example, it was decided to start the display of the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodic display SH5 at the timing ct2 when the third E reception period occurs. Not limited to. For the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the 5th periodic display SH5, the display may be started before or after the timing ct2 when the 3E reception period occurs, or it may be integrated. The image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodic display SH5 may be displayed at different timings from each other.

Further, in the third E reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. In the third E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows one operation reception, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is copied from the integrated image display IG. One moving image such as "the part (button image BMG) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 259 (β) to (δ)". When it is a periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form that requires a predetermined period B time. That is, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 3E reception period is the "integrated image display IG" in which the time required for its periodic change is displayed in the 2E reception period. (Button image BMG) ”is set as the same cycle B time. Moreover, in this production example, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 3E reception period is the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period. It is displayed as the same image display as "BMG)". However, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 3E reception period is not necessarily the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period. They do not have to be the same, for example, they may be different in size (similar shapes, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even in the third E reception period, the appearance of the "operation receiving unit" moving up and down in its movable range is depicted in the integrated image display IG. Further, the "cycle B time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 3E reception period is set to be longer than the "cycle A time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 1st E reception period. Since it is set, in the 3E reception period, it is described that the "operation receiving unit" slowly moves up and down in the movable range as compared with the 1E reception period. It should be noted that the "cycle B time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 3E reception period is the same as the "cycle B time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 2E reception period. In the 3rd E reception period, a state in which the "operation receiving unit" moves up and down in the movable range at the same speed as the 2E reception period is depicted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 264 (d), the display range of the 3E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time, and the 3E precursor effect display ZED is displayed in such an embodiment. Among them, the integrated image display IG and the fifth periodic display SH5 each advance their periodic changes in each of the above-described embodiments. After that, as shown in FIGS. 264 (e) to (g1), the integrated image display IG and the fifth periodic display SH5 have their respective periodic changes (period B time, period E time) described above. ) Will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 264, the case where the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing ct2A (timing shown in FIG. 264 (e)) within the thirdE reception period. I'm assuming. That is, as described above, the third E reception period according to this embodiment functions as a "one-time permissible period" in which the operation reception is permitted only once. Therefore, when the first operation reception is performed in the 3E reception period, the 3E reception period is terminated based on the operation reception, and the "display after the 3E reception" corresponding to the operation reception is performed. Aspect UH3-1 (FIGS. 265 (f2) to (i2)) having a relatively low expectation appears, and a mode UH3-2 having a higher expectation as a "display after receiving the third E" than the embodiment UH3-1 (FIG. 265 (f2) to (i2)). FIGS. 265 (f3) to (i3)) may appear in some cases. Further, although the illustration is omitted, when the display after the reception of the third E is displayed, the corresponding sound output after the reception of the third E is also audibly output. The "third E reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

In this regard, when the mode UH3-1 with a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after the third E reception" and when the mode UH3-2 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "display after the third E reception". Then, as shown in FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2) and FIGS. 265 (f3) to (h3), the EF display EKH is displayed in the same manner as each other.

That is, regardless of whether the aspect UH3-1 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after receiving the third E" or the aspect UH3-2 having a relatively high expectation appears. As the EF display EKH, first, the first aspect EKH1 (see FIGS. 265 (f2) and (f3)) is displayed. Next, the fifth aspect EKH5 (see FIGS. 265 (g2) to (h2) or FIGS. 265 (g3) to (h3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, when the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed during the 3E reception period, regardless of the mode UH3-1 and UH3-2 as the "display after the 3E reception", " The EF display EKH is executed in a series of modes (FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2) or FIGS. 265 (f3) to (h3)) such that "the first aspect EKH1 and the fifth aspect EKH5 are sequentially displayed". (In the figure, it corresponds to the "third extinction EF"). As a result, even if the EF display EKH is confirmed, it becomes difficult to recognize the degree of expectation as the "display after the third E reception".

In the period in which the first aspect EKH1 is displayed (FIGS. 265 (f2) and (f3)) in the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the third E reception period of this production example, the first E reception period is used. The same mode as when the operation reception is performed (see Fig. 256 (g2) etc.) appears, which makes it difficult to recognize which type of reception period the operation reception was performed. There is. However, the configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and the same mode as when the operation is accepted during the 1st E reception period does not appear within the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 3E reception period. You may.

Further, in the third E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 265 (f2) and (f3), even when the operation reception is performed, the fifth periodic display SH5 is based on the operation reception. Hide periodic changes. Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the fifth periodic display SH5 itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation in which the first aspect EKH1 and the fifth aspect EKH5 of the EF display EKH are displayed) (FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2) or FIG. 265). (F3)-(h3)), the fifth periodic display SH5 is not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, the embodiment shown in FIG. 264 (e) (progress of periodic change occurs). The 5th periodic display SH5 is to be displayed as it is, and then the 5th periodic display SH5 is displayed (based on the fact that the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed). Although it is supposed to be hidden, it may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation reception is made.

Further, in the third E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is also the first operation reception (reception period) as shown in FIG. 263 (b). The periodic change is hidden based on the fact that the operation reception) has been performed. Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation in which the first aspect EKH1 and the fifth aspect EKH5 of the EF display EKH are displayed) (FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2) or FIG. 265). (F2)-(h2)), the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is not hidden, and the aspect (periodic) shown in FIG. 264 (e) is shown behind the EF display EKH. The integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is displayed while the change progress is not occurring), and then the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is displayed (first time). It is supposed to be hidden (based on the operation reception that ends the reception period), but it is hidden from the situation immediately after the operation reception is done. May be good.

Here, the "display after the reception of the third E" is displayed behind the fifth periodic display SH5, the integrated image display IG, and the EF display EKH, whereby the "third display" is displayed. Immediately after "3E reception post-display" is displayed, it is difficult to see this. However, by hiding the 5th periodic display SH5, the integrated image display IG, the EF display EKH, etc., the visibility of the "3E post-acceptance display" will be gradually improved. Become. However, as described above, even if the mode of the EF display EKH is confirmed while the EF display EKH is displayed, the mode "display after the third E reception" has a low expectation degree UH3-1 and a high degree of expectation mode UH3. It is difficult to recognize which of -2 and -2 is displayed.

In addition, in the third E reception period, as shown in FIG. 263, when the occurrence thereof, the “first permissible sound” may be audibly output as the reception permissible sound as in the first E reception period. In this regard, in the third E reception period, as shown in FIG. 263, a situation may occur in which the operation reception is performed while the "first allowable sound" is audibly output as the reception allowable sound. However (timing tc2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" is continued without interruption based on the operation reception.

In the example shown in FIG. 263, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before the timing ct2 when the third E reception period occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. The audible output may be started at the timing ct2, or the audible output may be started after the timing ct2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263, the third E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is audibly output, there is a possibility that the third E reception period will occur, so that it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed. As described above, the "specific BGM" can be audibly output even when the first E reception period (see FIG. 253) and the second E reception period (see FIG. 258) occur. However, in the 3E reception period, unlike the case of the 2E reception period, the "specific BGM" is not terminated halfway within the 3E reception period.

FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the “condition 4E” is satisfied as the generation condition and the 4E reception period (4E reception effect) occurs. 268 and 269 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the 4E reception period (4E reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the change pattern determination is performed, and as a result, the "4E change pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 4E fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 4E variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 4E variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started (. "Situation shown in FIG. 268 (a)"), within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is the effect of the "4E variation pattern" itself selected above. Will be additionally executed.

As shown in FIG. 266 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "4E variation pattern", the timing td2 has arrived when the 4E time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 4E" is satisfied), the above-mentioned 4E acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding display after acceptance of 4E (sound output after acceptance of 4E)" is permitted is It is possible to occur (the situation shown in FIG. 268 (c)).

Here, the 4E reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 1E reception period and 2E reception period, and is until the end of the 4E reception period (display after the 4E reception (first display). 4E It functions as a "one-time permissible period" in which the operation reception is permitted only once (until the operation reception is not permitted for the sound output after reception).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a 4E reception period is generated, a reception period-related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, is displayed in connection with the fourth E reception period. It is possible to display, and "6th periodic display SH6" and "7th periodic display SH7" are to be displayed as the reception period-related periodic display.

More specifically, the "sixth periodic display SH6" according to this embodiment means "after the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (A), FIG. 259 (B), ( When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode shown in C)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is a predetermined period E time (a time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time"). ) Means a display that can appear repeatedly in a required form. That is, the "sixth periodic display SH6" displayed in the fourth E reception period is the "third periodic display SH3" and the third E reception in which the time required for the periodic change is displayed in the second E reception period. It is set as the same period E time as the "fifth periodic display SH5" displayed in the period. In this effect example, the "sixth periodic display SH6" is displayed as the same image display as the "third periodic display SH3" and the "fifth periodic display SH5". However, the "sixth periodic display SH6" does not necessarily have to be the same as the "third periodic display SH3" and the "fifth periodic display SH5". It may be different if there are some differences such as the dog's ears being bent.

Further, the "seventh periodic display SH7" according to this embodiment is "shown in FIGS. 267 (b) to 267 (f) after the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 267 (a). When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is a predetermined period G time (time different from period D time, period E time, and period F time). It means a display that can appear repeatedly in a form that requires.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to give the player information as a hint as to which type the reception period has occurred, such a reception period-related periodicity display (sixth). Periodic display SH6, 7th periodic display SH7) is to be displayed. However, the reception period-related periodic display (sixth periodic display SH6, seventh periodic display SH7) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is required to make it more difficult to recognize which type of reception period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Further, the 6th periodic display SH6 is displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the 1st periodic display SH1, the 3rd periodic display SH3, the 5th periodic display SH5, and the like. The 7th periodic display SH7 may be displayed with a character different from the "cat character" used in the 2nd periodic display SH2, the 4th periodic display SH4, and the like. good.

For example, when the 6th periodic display SH6 is displayed when the 4E reception period occurs, the 6th periodic display SH6 appears behind the other display while another display is displayed. Although the display is started in the form, the 7th periodic display SH7 is not displayed behind another display. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the reception period generated through the visibility in the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display is started. I try to suggest the type of.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 268 (b) to (d), it is suggested that an operation opportunity is given to the player (a fourth E reception period occurs) as another display described above. It is decided to use the precursory effect display. In addition, another display does not necessarily have to be a precursor effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing td1 before the occurrence of the 4E reception period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 266 (c) and 268 (b), As the above-mentioned precursor effect display, "4E precursor effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIGS. 266 (c) and 268 (c) and (d), this "4E precursor effect display ZED" includes an integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and reception. The period-related periodicity display (6th periodicity display SH6, 7th periodicity display SH7) is displayed so as to straddle before and after the display timing. In this production example, the “4E precursor effect display ZED” is referred to as the above-mentioned “1E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 255 (b) to (d))” and “2E precursor effect display ZED (FIG. FIG. 260 (b)-(d)) "and" 3E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 268 (b)-(d)) are executed as the same effect display, but the "1E precursor effect display" is executed. It may be executed as an effect display different from the "effect display ZED", the "second E precursor effect display ZED", and the "third E precursor effect display ZED".

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 268 (c), the "4E precursor effect display ZED" is displayed on the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the 6th periodic display SH6. In the meantime, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "4E precursor effect display ZED". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (d), the 7th periodic display SH7 is not displayed in the form of appearing behind the “4E precursor staging display ZED”, and here, “4E”. The display starts with the "precursor effect display ZED" turned to the back side.

In this production example, it was decided to start the display of the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodic display SH6 at the timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs. Not limited to. For the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the 6th periodic display SH6, the display may be started before or after the timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs, or it may be integrated. The image display IG (image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodic display SH6 may be displayed at different timings from each other.

Then, in this pachinko machine 1, the 6th periodic display SH6 and the 7th periodic display SH7 are displayed at different timings. In this effect example, the 6th periodic display SH6 is started to be displayed in advance of the 7th periodic display SH7, and the 7th periodic display SH7 is displayed while the 6th periodic display SH6 is displayed. The display is started. Further, since the sixth periodic display SH6 according to this effect example starts its periodic change immediately after the display is started, the timing at which the periodic change is started is also the first. 7 Periodic display The SH7 is set to be before the timing at which the periodic change is started.

However, regarding the 6th periodic display SH6, for example, the display is started before the timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs, and the periodic change is not started at the time when the display is started. May be good. That is, in this case, the sixth periodic display SH6 is displayed in a form that maintains the mode shown in FIG. 259 (A). Then, the periodic change in the sixth periodic display SH6 may be started based on the arrival of the timing td2 at which the fourth E reception period occurs. In this regard, regarding the 7th periodic display SH7, for example, if the display is started including the periodic change based on the arrival of the timing td2, the 6th periodic display SH6 and the th. Although the timing at which the display is started is different from that of the 7 periodic display SH7, the timing at which the periodic change is started is the same.

On the contrary, the display of the 7th periodic display SH7 may be started before the timing when the 6th periodic display SH6 is displayed or the timing when the 4E acceptance period occurs. In this case, regarding the 7th periodic display SH7, the timing at which the periodic change is started is also from the timing at which the periodic change of the 6th periodic display SH6 is started or the timing at which the 4E acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to do it before.

Regarding the relationship of the 7th periodic display SH7 to the 6th periodic display SH6, any of the above-described configurations may be adopted, but the relationship of the 7th periodic display SH7 to the 6th periodic display SH6 may be adopted. It is desirable to be the same as each other.

Further, in the third E reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. In the 4th E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows one operation reception, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is copied from the integrated image display IG. One moving image such as "the part (button image BMG) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 259 (β) to (δ)". When it is a periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form that requires a predetermined period B time. That is, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 4E reception period displays the time required for the periodic change in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period. It is set as the same cycle B time as the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)". Moreover, in this production example, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 4E reception period is the "integrated image display" displayed in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period. It is displayed as the same image display as "IG (button image BMG)". However, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 4E reception period is the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period. It does not necessarily have to be the same as "BMG)", and may be different in size from each other (similar shape, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the appearance of the "operation receiving unit" moving up and down in the movable range is described in the integrated image display IG even in the 4E reception period. Further, the "cycle B time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 4E reception period is set to be longer than the "cycle A time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 1st E reception period. Since it is set, in the 4E reception period, the state in which the "operation receiving unit" slowly moves up and down in the movable range is described as compared with the 1E reception period. The "cycle B time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 4E reception period is the "cycle B time" of the integrated image display IG displayed in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period. Therefore, in the 4E reception period, it is described that the "operation receiving unit" moves up and down in the movable range at the same speed as the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (c), the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display) according to this effect example also has the same “4E precursor effect display” as the sixth periodic display SH6. While "ZED" is displayed, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "4E precursor effect display ZED", and the periodic change is started.

As shown in FIGS. 268 (b) to (d), the display range of the 4E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time, and the 4E precursor effect display ZED is displayed in this manner. Among them, the integrated image display IG and the 6th periodic display SH6, and the 7th periodic display SH7, which is started to be displayed later than the integrated image display IG, have their respective periodic changes in each of the above-described embodiments. Will be developed respectively.

Then, as a result of the display range of the 4E precursor effect display ZED being reduced in this way, when the 4E precursor effect display ZED is hidden, as shown in FIG. 268 (e), the 7th periodicity Not only the display SH7, but also the integrated image display IG and the sixth periodic display SH6 have good visibility. After that, unless the operation is accepted by the player, as shown in FIGS. 268 (f) to (h1), the integrated image display IG, the sixth periodicity display SH6, and the seventh periodicity are shown. The display SH7 will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period G time).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, the case where the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing td2A (timing shown in FIG. 268 (f)) within the 4E reception period. I'm assuming. That is, as described above, the fourth E reception period according to this embodiment functions as a "one-time permissible period" in which operation reception is permitted only once. Therefore, when the first operation reception is performed in the 4E reception period, the 4E reception period is terminated based on the operation reception, and the "display after the 4E reception" corresponding to the operation reception is performed. Aspect UH4-1 (FIGS. 269 (g2) to (j2)) having a relatively low expectation appears, and a mode UH4-2 having a higher expectation as a "display after receiving the 4th E" than the embodiment UH4-2 (FIG. 269 (g2) to (j2)). FIGS. 269 (g3) to (j3)) may appear in some cases. Further, although the illustration is omitted, when the display after the reception of the 4th E is displayed, the corresponding sound output after the reception of the 4E is also audibly output. The "4E reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

In this regard, when the aspect UH4-1 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after reception of the 4th E", as shown in FIGS. 269 (g2) to (i2), it is relative as the "display after reception of the 4E". The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (low expectation mode) different from that when the mode UH4-2 having a high degree of expectation appears.

That is, when the aspect UH4-1 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after the reception of the fourth E", the first aspect EKH1 (see FIG. 269 (g2)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the sixth aspect EKH6 (see FIGS. 269 (h2) and (i2)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, based on the fact that the first operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) was performed during the 4E reception period, "a low expectation mode of EF display EKH (corresponding to" 4th extinction EF "in FIG. 266". ) ”Is executed as a series of embodiments (FIGS. 269 (g2) to (i2)) such as“ the first aspect EKH1 and the sixth aspect EKH6 are sequentially displayed ”, whereby after the reception of the fourth E. It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH4-1 having a relatively low expectation appears as "display". In this production example, the sixth aspect EKH6 (see FIGS. 269 (h2) and (i2)) is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned third aspect EKH3 (see FIGS. 257 (q3) and (r3)). However, it may be executed as a different embodiment.

On the other hand, when the aspect UH4-2 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "display after the reception of the 4th E", as shown in FIGS. 269 (g3) to (j3), the display after the reception of the 4E is performed. The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (high expectation mode) different from that when the mode UH4-1 having a relatively low expectation appears.

That is, when the aspect UH4-2 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "display after the reception of the fourth E", the first aspect EKH1 (see FIG. 269 (g3)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the seventh aspect EKH7 (see FIGS. 269 (h3) and (i3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, based on the fact that the first operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) was made during the 4E reception period, "highly expected mode of EF display EKH (corresponding to" 5th extinction EF "in FIG. 266". ) ”Is executed as a series of embodiments (FIGS. 269 (g3) to (i3)) such as“ the first aspect EKH1 and the seventh aspect EKH7 are sequentially displayed ”, whereby after the reception of the fourth E. It becomes possible to suggest that the embodiment UH4-2, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, appears as "display". In this production example, the seventh aspect EKH7 (see FIGS. 269 (h3) and (i3)) is referred to the above-mentioned fifth aspect EKH5 (FIGS. 265 (g2) to (h2) and FIGS. 265 (g3) to (h3). ) Is executed in the same manner as in), but it may be executed in a different manner.

In the period in which the first aspect EKH1 is displayed (FIGS. 269 (g2) and (g3)) among the display periods of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the fourth E reception period of this production example, the first E reception period is used. The same mode as when the operation reception is performed (see Fig. 256 (g2) etc.) appears, which makes it difficult to recognize which type of reception period the operation reception was performed. There is. However, the configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and the same mode as when the operation is accepted during the 1st E reception period does not appear within the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 4E reception period. You may.

Further, in the 4E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 269 (g2) and (g3), the 6th periodic display SH6 and the 7th cycle are based on the fact that the operation reception is performed. Sexual display Hides periodic changes in SH7. Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the 6th periodic display SH6 and the 7th periodic display SH7 itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation in which the first aspect EKH1 and the sixth aspect EKH6 (or the seventh aspect EKH7) of the EF display EKH are displayed) (FIG. 269 (g2). )-(H2) or FIGS. 269 (g3)-(h3)), the 6th periodic display SH6 and the 7th periodic display SH7 are not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, FIG. 268 ( The 6th periodic display SH6 and the 7th periodic display SH7 are displayed in the same mode as shown in f) (a mode in which no progress of periodic change occurs), and then the 6th periodic display SH6 is displayed. And the 7th periodic display SH7 is to be hidden (based on the fact that the first operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) has been made), but the situation is immediately after the operation reception is made. You may want to hide this from time to time.

Further, in the 4E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is also based on the fact that the operation reception is performed as shown in FIG. 266 (b). And hide the periodic change. Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation in which the first aspect EKH1 and the sixth aspect EKH6 (or the seventh aspect EKH7) of the EF display EKH are displayed) (FIG. 269 (g2). )-(H2) or FIGS. 269 (g3)-(h3)), the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, FIG. 268 (f). The integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is displayed in the same mode as shown in) (the mode in which the progress of the periodic change does not occur), and then the integrated image display IG (button) is displayed. The image BMG) is to be hidden (based on the fact that the first operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) has been made), but this has been the case since the situation immediately after the operation reception was made. May be hidden.

Here, the "display after reception of the 4th E" is displayed behind the 6th periodic display SH6, the 7th periodic display SH7, the integrated image display IG, and the EF display EKH. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the "display after reception of the 4th E" immediately after it is displayed. However, the visibility of the "4th E reception post-display" gradually increases as the 6th periodic display SH6, the 7th periodic display SH7, the integrated image display IG, the EF display EKH, etc. are hidden. It will be considered good. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode in which the EF display EKH is displayed, the mode UH4-1 having a low expectation and the mode UH4-2 having a high expectation of "4E post-acceptance display" can be seen. It is easy to recognize which one is displayed.

In addition, during the 4E reception period, as shown in FIG. 266, at the time of occurrence, either the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" may be (selectively) audibly output as the reception permissible sound. .. For example, when the "second permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound when the 4E reception period occurs, a big hit is obtained as compared with the case where the "first permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It is desirable to set it so that it is suggested that the degree of expectation (ratio) is high. In this regard, in the 4E reception period, as shown in FIG. 266, the operation reception is performed while either the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. Although a situation can occur (timing td2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" or "second permissible sound" is interrupted based on the operation reception.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before the timing td2 when the fourth E reception period occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. The audible output may be started at the timing td2, or the audible output may be started after the timing td2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 266, the 4E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM becomes inaudible, there is a possibility that the 4E reception period will occur, so that it is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest of the game will be suppressed. As described above, the "specific BGM" is audible even when the first E reception period (see FIG. 253), the second E reception period (see FIG. 258), and the third E reception period (see FIG. 263) occur. It can be output.

Here, such a first E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257), a second E reception period (see FIGS. 258 to 262), a third E reception period (see FIGS. 263 to 265), and the first. Of the 4E reception period (see FIGS. 266 to 269), the first E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257) is replaced by the 5E reception period (see FIG. 270) described below. Alternatively, it may be generated as the 6th reception period (see FIG. 270). In order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily included in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods with reference to FIGS. 269. You may not be prepared.

FIG. 270 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the “condition 1E” is satisfied as the above-mentioned generation condition and the fifth E reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs. The example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the 5th E reception period (5E reception effect) occurs overlaps with the case where the above-mentioned 1E reception period (1E reception effect) occurs (see FIGS. 255 to 257). Since there are many parts to be checked, only the differences (changed points) will be explained, and the illustrations will be omitted.

That is, as described above, in the first E reception period, it is possible to occur as a reception period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and an integrated image display IG that imitates an operation means in which multiple operation receptions are permitted. (Button image BMG) and the reception period-related periodic display (first periodic display SH1, second periodic display SH2), which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, are displayed, respectively. Then, during the first E reception period, the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is operated (the reception period is not terminated) and the operation reception is performed. At that time, based on the operation reception, the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 are hidden, respectively, and the second periodicity is achieved. As mentioned above, the periodic changes in the display SH2 are not hidden and continue.

In this regard, in the fifth E reception period, which is a modification of the first E reception period, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is displayed as shown in FIGS. 270 (b) and 270 (e). Even if the corresponding operation means (here, "operation button 410") is operated (the reception period is not terminated) and the operation reception is performed, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is based on the operation reception. The periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are not hidden, and the periodic changes are continued. It has become. In the timing ta2C, when the operation reception for ending the reception period is performed, the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 are based on this. The point that both the change and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are hidden is the same as in the case of the first E reception period.

That is, in this case, based on the arrival of the timing ta2 in which the first E time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the satisfaction of the "condition 1E"), "after the reception of the fifth E". The 5th reception period (valid period) in which the display (in this example, the same as the display after the 1st reception) is permitted occurs (the situation shown in FIG. 255 (c)), and the 5E reception Even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the period (valid period), the integrated image display IG (button operation) The periodic changes in the image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are not hidden, and the periodic changes are shown. It will continue. Therefore, when the situation shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) to (m2) ... Appears in this modified example, it is the same as when the situation shown in FIGS. 255 (g1), (h1) ... Appears. Yes, that is, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 will continue to progress (continue) their periodic changes as in the second periodic display SH2.

Similarly, even if the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 5E reception period (valid period). The periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. There is no such thing, and those periodic changes will continue. Therefore, when the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) to (o3) appears in this modification, it is the same as when the situation shown in FIGS. 256 (l2), (m2) ... Appears, that is, As with the second periodic display SH2, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 will continue to progress (continue) their periodic changes.

It should be noted that when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the 5E reception period (valid period), or at the timing ta2B (figure). When the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing shown in 256 (k2), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is displayed based on the operation reception. Regarding the points to be displayed and the point that the display changes (for example, the depiction in which the 1st meter rises) occurs in the background image etc. as "display after reception of 5E (in this example, the same as display after reception of 1E)". , The same as the case of the first E reception period (valid period) described above. Further, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 5E reception period (valid period), the operation reception is based on the operation reception. Therefore, the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. The points (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (s3), FIGS. 257 (p4) to (s4)) for executing the "display after the 5th reception (in this example, the same as the display after the reception of the 1st E)" are also described above. It is the same as the case of the first E reception period (valid period).

FIG. 271 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the “condition 1E” is satisfied as the generation condition and the 6E reception period (6E reception effect) occurs. The example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the 6th E reception period (6E reception effect) occurs overlaps with the case where the above-mentioned 1E reception period (1E reception effect) occurs (see FIGS. 255 to 257). Since there are many parts to be checked, only the differences (changed points) will be explained, and the illustrations will be omitted.

That is, as described above, in the first E reception period, it is possible to occur as a reception period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and an integrated image display IG that imitates an operation means in which multiple operation receptions are permitted. (Button image BMG) and the reception period-related periodic display (first periodic display SH1, second periodic display SH2), which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, are displayed, respectively. Then, during the first E reception period, the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is operated (the reception period is not terminated) and the operation reception is performed. At that time, based on the operation reception, the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 are hidden, respectively, and the second periodicity is achieved. As mentioned above, the periodic changes in the display SH2 are not hidden and continue.

In this regard, in the sixth E reception period, which is a modification of the first E reception period, as shown in FIGS. 271 (b) and 271 (e), the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is displayed. When the corresponding operation means (here, "operation button 410") is operated (the reception period is not terminated) and the operation reception is performed, the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) is based on the operation reception. The periodic change, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. As a method for hiding these periodic changes, for example, a method for hiding the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 during the first E reception period described above. (See FIGS. 256 (g2), (h2), FIGS. 257 (l3), (m3), etc.) can be used. That is, in this case, the second periodic display SH2 according to this modification is the second periodic display SH2 itself, like the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1. The display (display of the character) is continued, but the periodic change is hidden by not continuing the periodic change up to that point.

That is, in this case, based on the arrival of the timing ta2 in which the first E time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the satisfaction of the "condition 1E"), "after the sixth E is accepted". The 6th E reception period (valid period) in which the display (in this example, the same as the display after the 1E reception) is permitted occurs (the situation shown in FIG. 255 (c)), and the 6E reception When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the period (valid period), the integrated operation is performed based on the operation reception. The periodic change in the image display IG (button image BMG), the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. Therefore, when the situation shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) appears in this modification, not only the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 but also the second Periodic display SH2 also hides its periodic changes. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2), the second periodic display SH2 is an integrated image display IG (button image BMG) or a first periodic display SH1. In the same manner as in FIG. 255 (f), the display is performed in the same manner as in FIG. 255 (f), and when the situation shown in FIG. 256 (i2) is reached, the periodic change is started again. In this example, it will be restarted from the embodiment shown in FIG. 254 (a).

Similarly, when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 6E reception period (valid period). Based on the operation reception, any of the periodic changes in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2. Will also be hidden. Therefore, when the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) and (m3) appears in this modified example, not only the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 but also the second Periodic display SH2 also hides its periodic changes. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) and (m3), the second periodic display SH2 is an integrated image display IG (button image BMG) or a first periodic display SH1. In the same manner as in FIG. 256 (k2), the display is performed in the same manner as in FIG. 256 (k2), and when the situation shown in FIG. 257 (n3) is reached, the periodic change is started again. In this example, it will be restarted from the embodiment shown in FIG. 254 (a).

It should be noted that when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the 6E reception period (valid period), or at the timing ta2B (figure). When the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing shown in 256 (k2), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is displayed based on the operation reception. Regarding the points to be displayed and the point that the display changes (for example, the depiction in which the 1st meter rises) occurs in the background image etc. as "display after reception of 6E (in this example, the same as display after reception of 1E)". , The same as the case of the first E reception period (valid period) described above. Further, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 6E reception period (valid period), the operation reception is based on the operation reception. Therefore, the periodic change in the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. The points (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (s3), FIGS. 257 (p4) to (s4)) for executing the "display after reception of the 6th E (in this example, the same as the display after reception of the 1st E)" are also described above. It is the same as the case of the first E reception period (valid period).

Regarding the above-mentioned 5E reception period (see FIG. 270) or 6E reception period (see FIG. 270), the 1st E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257) and the 2nd E reception period (see FIGS. 258 to 262). ), The 3E reception period (see FIGS. 263 to 265), and the 4E reception period (see FIGS. 266 to 269) may be generated as a separate reception period. The 5th E reception period (see FIG. 270) will occur based on the condition that "condition 5E" is satisfied as the above-mentioned occurrence condition, and the 6th E reception period (see FIG. 270) will occur based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition of "condition 5E". It will occur based on the fact that "Condition 6E" is satisfied. That is, for the first E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257), the fifth E reception period (see FIG. 270), and the sixth E reception period (see FIG. 270), the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. In the meantime, it may be possible that only one of these reception periods can occur, or only two of those reception periods can occur corresponding to different generation conditions. Alternatively, all of the reception periods may be set to be able to occur corresponding to different generation conditions.

In each reception period (or a part of the reception period) related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, it is suggested that the player will be given an operation opportunity soon in connection with the occurrence of the reception period. With the precursor effect display ZED, the operation target display (integrated image display IG) that suggests the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and the image display that can show periodic changes. A certain reception period-related periodic display (1st periodic display SH1 to 7th periodic display SH7, etc.) can be displayed. However, as described above, each of these configurations does not necessarily have to be provided, and only an appropriate configuration among these configurations may be provided. Further, as described above, the operation target display (image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods. In addition, if it is not provided with a configuration for displaying the integrated image display IG, the game may be played depending on the mode (display form, combination, whether to be hidden, etc.) in the periodicity display related to the reception period. It is desirable to suggest the operation target by the person.

In addition, the periodic change is hidden based on the fact that the operation reception (without ending the reception period) is performed within the reception period (or a part of the reception period) related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification. The method is not limited to the above-mentioned configurations, and for example, periodic changes such as periodicity display (reception period-related periodicity display) and integrated image display IG (button image BMG) on the layer continue. By displaying another image (for example, EF display EKH) on the front side, a method is adopted in which the periodic display and the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) cannot be visually recognized. Alternatively, the periodic display or the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) may be changed to a periodic change different from the periodic change that has been continued until then and displayed (for example, the cycle time may be changed, etc.). ) May be used to hide the periodic changes that have continued until then, or the periodic display (reception period-related periodic display) or the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) itself. You may end the display of.

In addition, the periodic change is hidden based on the fact that the operation reception (without ending the reception period) is performed within the reception period (or a part of the reception period) related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification. After that, as a method of resuming the periodic change, the periodic change does not necessarily have to be restarted from the beginning, and may be restarted from the middle of the periodic change.

Further, regarding the configuration for displaying the EF display EKH based on the operation reception (without ending the reception period) within the reception period (or a part of the reception period) related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Although it is not an essential configuration, even if the EF display EKH is not executed (displayed) when the operation is accepted, the periodic display (reception period-related periodic display) or integrated image is displayed. It is possible to make the periodic change of the display IG (button image BMG) invisible.

In each reception period (or a part of the reception period (for example, the second E reception period, etc.)) related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, the precursor effect display ZED is the second periodic display SH2 or the third. It may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the periodic display SH3, the 4th periodic display SH4, the 7th periodic display SH7, and the like. It does not have to be displayed before the second periodic display SH2, the third periodic display SH3, the fourth periodic display SH4, the seventh periodic display SH7, and the like. During the 2nd E reception period, the precursor effect display ZED does not act in relation to the 3rd periodic display SH3 and the 4th periodic display SH4, so that the configuration related to the precursor effect display ZED is not essential. This itself may not be executed (displayed).

Of the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, the operation reception is permitted multiple times. ) ”, The reception period is not terminated based on the fact that the operation reception has been performed until the operation reception has been performed a specific number of times (third time), and the operation reception has been performed a specific number of times (third time). Based on this, we decided to end the reception period. However, it is decided to determine whether or not to end the acceptance period based on the fact that the operation acceptance has been made, and to terminate the acceptance period based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained by the determination. You may.

In addition, among the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "a plurality of times permissible period (or a part of the multiple times reception period (for example, the second E reception period)". Etc.)) ”, a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, judgment, etc.) is satisfied by the operation reception regardless of whether the“ low expectation mode ”or the“ high expectation mode ”is executed as the post-reception display. Based on the above, it was decided to end the reception period and display the display after reception. However, there is a possibility that certain conditions (for example, the number of operations, judgment, etc.) will be satisfied when the operation is accepted only when the "highly expected mode" is executed as the post-acceptance display. May be good. That is, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the condition for ending the reception period is satisfied based on the operation reception performed during the reception period. The "low expectation mode" may be executed as a post-reception display based on the arrival of the timing at which the reception period ends. Alternatively, only when the "specific mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the reception period is terminated based on the operation reception, and when the "specific mode" is not executed as the post-reception display, based on the operation reception. The reception period may not be terminated. That is, in this case, when the timing for the end of the reception period arrives, no post-reception display is executed.

In addition, among the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "a plurality of times permissible period (or a part of the multiple times reception period (for example, the second E reception period)". Etc.)) ”, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration for terminating the reception period based on the operation reception. That is, in this case, the operation reception may be performed multiple times until the reception period ends, but the reception period will not end based on this, and the predetermined timing has arrived. Only then will the acceptance period end.

In addition, among the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "a plurality of times permissible period (or a part of the multiple times reception period (for example, the second E reception period)". Etc.)) ”, a different display change may appear as a display after reception each time an operation is received.

Further, each reception period related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification may be any combination and may be sequentially generated within one variation pattern.

In addition, the post-reception display does not necessarily indicate the degree of expectation that a big hit will be obtained, and may not necessarily indicate the degree of expectation.

Further, in each reception period related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, when the reception period is terminated based on the fact that the operation reception is performed, the mode common to the EF display (effect display) EKH (first aspect). EKH1) is displayed first (for example, FIGS. 257 (p3), (p4), 265 (f2), (f3), 269 (g2), (g3), etc.), and then it is displayed. Although another aspect is displayed (for example, FIGS. 257 (q3) to (r3), (q4) to (r4), and FIGS. 265 (g2) to (h2), (g3) to (h3). , FIGS. 269 (h2) to (i2), (h3 to (i3), etc.), EF display (effect display) EKH may be performed, and this is used for the common mode (first mode EKH1). You may omit it.

Further, in the reception period related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, the display mode of the "special image display" that periodically changes may be changed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. .. For example, if an operation is accepted while the integrated image display IG (image display) is displayed, the display mode of the integrated image display IG may change. In this regard, when changing the display mode of the integrated image display IG, whether the time required for the periodic change is maintained or the time required for the periodic change is also changed. By giving it a directing effect, it becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately. In this example, the integrated image display IG is changed as a "special image display", but the "special image display" is not limited to the integrated image display IG and is an image that undergoes a periodic change. Any display (for example, reception period-related periodicity display, etc.) may be used.

FIG. 272 shows a modified example in which the display mode of the integrated image display IG is changed (or not changed) based on the operation reception being performed during the first E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257). It is a figure. It should be noted that FIG. 272 is for explaining the display mode of the image display and what kind of change occurs in the time required for the periodic change based on the operation reception. For convenience, the illustrations of other configurations (decorative patterns, display after reception, etc.) that have already been explained are omitted. In addition, only the configuration different from the first E reception period according to the above-mentioned production example will be described, and the same configuration will not be particularly mentioned.

In the first E reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the integrated image display IG is displayed so as to perform a periodic change in the “period A time” (see FIGS. 253 and 254). In this respect, in the first E reception period according to this modification, the case where the integrated image display IG is displayed so as to perform its periodic change in the "cycle A1 hour" is different from the "cycle A1 hour". In some cases, it is displayed that the periodic change is performed in the "period A2 hours" which is the time.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272 (a), the integrated image display IG is now displayed in the display mode (integrated image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a) during the first reception period. And when it is in the state of being displayed so as to perform a periodic change in the "cycle A time", the operation reception (the first E reception period) is performed for the operation means corresponding to the integrated image display IG. If an operation reception that does not end) is performed, a post-reception display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation reception.

However, if the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the first E reception period) is performed during the first E reception period related to this modification, in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated image display IG is changed. It is something that may change. That is, in the first E reception period according to this modification, if it is not determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied when the operation reception is performed, FIG. 272 (b), based on the result of the determination. When the integrated image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in (c) and it is determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied when the operation is accepted, FIG. 272 is based on the result of the determination. The integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in (d) and (e).

Here, when the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 272 (b) and 272 (c) based on the operation reception performed during the first E reception period according to this modification, first , As shown in FIG. 272 (b), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, whereby the periodic display that has appeared so far in the integrated image display IG is hidden (invisible). After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (c), the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again. You will be able to be interested in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 272 (c), it is assumed that there is no change in the "display mode" and "time required for periodic display" of the integrated image display IG. The display IG will be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 272 (a) (display mode (integrated image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a)) and the “cycle A1 hour”.

On the other hand, even when the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 272 (d) and 272 (e) based on the operation reception performed during the first E reception period according to this modification. First, as shown in FIG. 272 (d), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide (make invisible) the periodic display that has appeared so far in the integrated image display IG. After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (e), the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again. You will be able to be interested in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 272 (e), it is assumed that both the "display mode" and the "time required for periodic display" of the integrated image display IG change, that is, the integrated image is assumed. The image display IG is displayed in the "display mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144 (d)" and in the "cycle A2 hours". As described with reference to FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d), the integrated image display IGd (FIG. 272 (e)) has a larger hit than the integrated image display IGc (FIG. 272 (c)). It suggests that the degree of expectation (ratio) is high.

According to such a configuration, in the first E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are allowed), when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation reception, the integrated image display IG is triggered by this. The mode (display mode) of (image display) (display mode, cycle time required for one periodic change) can be changed, and after that, the operation can be accepted with the changed mode as it is. That is, in this case, it is suggested that the expectation (high) that a big hit is obtained when the mode (display mode) of the integrated image display IG (image display) changes (the period time required for one periodic change). Since it will be possible to play games, it is expected that the game will be improved.

FIGS. 273 and 274 are diagrams showing a modification example in which the display mode of the integrated image display IG (image display) is changed (or not changed) based on the operation reception being performed during the second E reception period. Is. It should be noted that FIGS. 273 and 274 show how the integrated image display IG (image display) mode (display mode and periodic time required for its periodic change) is based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The purpose is to explain whether or not any change will occur, and the illustrations of other previously explained configurations (decorative patterns, post-reception display, etc.) are omitted for convenience. In addition, only the configuration different from the second E reception period according to the above-mentioned production example will be described, and the same configuration will not be particularly mentioned.

In the second E reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the integrated image display IG is displayed so as to perform a periodic change in the “period B time” (see FIGS. 258 and 259). In this respect, in the second E reception period according to this modification, the case where the integrated image display IG is displayed so as to perform its periodic change in the "cycle B1 hour" is different from the "cycle B1 hour". The cycle is displayed in the case where the periodic change is performed in the time "cycle B2 hours" and in the "cycle B3 hours" which is a time different from both the "cycle B1 hours" and the "cycle B2 hours". It may be displayed to make a change. In this example, "cycle A1 hour", "cycle A2 hours", "cycle B1 hour", "cycle B2 hours", and "cycle B3 hours" are all set as different times.

More specifically, in the second E reception period according to this modification, first, as the integrated image display IG, the display mode shown in FIG. 144 (a) (integrated image display IGa) is used. There are cases where it is displayed in "cycle B1 hour" and cases where it is displayed in "display mode (integrated image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144 (b)" and in "cycle B2 hours". It has become.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), the integrated image display IG is "the display mode (integrated image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a)" during the second E reception period. In addition, it is in a state of being displayed so as to perform a periodic change in "cycle B1 hour", and in this state, an operation reception (the second E reception) is performed for the operation means corresponding to the integrated image display IG. If an operation reception (operation reception that does not end the period) is performed, a post-reception display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation reception.

However, if the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the second E reception period) is performed during the second E reception period related to this modification, in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated image display IG is changed. It is something that may change. That is, in the second E reception period according to this modification, if it is not determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied when the operation reception is performed, FIG. 273 (b), based on the result of the determination. When the integrated image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in (c) and it is determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied when the operation is accepted, the figure is based on the result of the determination. The integrated image display IG is displayed in any of the embodiments shown in 273 (d) and (e) and the embodiments shown in FIGS. 273 (f) and 273 (g).

That is, in the second E reception period according to this modification, the first condition is satisfied as the "predetermined condition when the operation reception is performed" and the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. In some cases, when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied as "a predetermined condition when the operation is accepted", FIGS. 273 (d) and (e) are based on the result of the determination. ), The integrated image display IG is displayed, and if it is determined that the second condition is satisfied as the "predetermined condition when the operation is accepted", the determination is made. Based on the result of the above, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIGS. 273 (f) and 273 (g).

Here, when the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 273 (b) and 273 (c) based on the operation reception performed during the second E reception period according to this modification, first, , As shown in FIG. 273 (b), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, whereby the periodic display that has appeared so far in the integrated image display IG is hidden (invisible). After that, as shown in FIG. 273 (c), the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again. You will be able to be interested in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273 (c), it is assumed that there is no change in the "display mode" and "time required for periodic display" of the integrated image display IG. The display IG will be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 273 (a) (display mode (integrated image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a)) and in the "cycle B1 hour".

On the other hand, even when the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 273 (d) and 273 (e) based on the operation reception performed during the second E reception period according to this modification. First, as shown in FIG. 273 (d), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide (make invisible) the periodic display that has appeared so far in the integrated image display IG. After that, as shown in FIG. 273 (e), the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again. You will be able to be interested in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273 (e), it is assumed that only the "display mode" of the "display mode" and the "time required for periodic display" of the integrated image display IG changes. That is, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the "display mode (integrated image display IGc) shown in FIG. 144 (c)" and in the "cycle B1 hour".

Further, when the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 273 (f) and 273 (g) based on the operation reception performed during the second E reception period according to this modification, first, the integrated image display IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 273 (f), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, and the periodic display that has appeared up to that point in the integrated image display IG is hidden (not visible). After that, as shown in FIG. 273 (g), the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated image display IG is displayed again. You will be able to be interested in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273 (g), it is assumed that both the "display mode" and the "time required for periodic display" of the integrated image display IG change, that is, the integrated image is assumed. The image display IG is displayed in the "display mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144 (d)" and in the "cycle B3 hours".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 274 (a), the integrated image display IG (image display) is now displayed in the display mode (integrated image) shown in FIG. 144 (b) during the second E reception period. It is in a state of "display IGb)" and is displayed so as to perform a periodic change in "cycle B2 hours", and in this state, an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the integrated image display IG (display IGb) ". Even when the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the second E reception period) is performed, the post-reception display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation reception.

However, in the second E reception period according to this modification, the integrated image display IG is in the "display mode (integrated image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144 (b)" and has a period of "cycle B2 hours". In the state where it is displayed to change the target, even if the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the second E reception period) is performed, this triggers "predetermined when the operation reception is performed". The condition (here, the first condition or the second condition) "is never satisfied. Furthermore, the integrated image display IG is displayed so as to perform the periodic change in the "display mode (integrated image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144 (b)" and the "period B2 hours". In the state, even if the operation reception (the operation reception that does not end the second E reception period) is performed, the periodic display that has appeared up to that point in the integrated image display IG is hidden (so that it cannot be visually recognized). ).

Therefore, in the second E reception period according to this modification, the integrated image display IG is the "display mode (integrated image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144 (b)" and has a period of "cycle B2 hours". In the state where the change is displayed (FIG. 274 (a)), the integrated image display IG is the embodiment shown in FIG. 274 (a) regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted. The display will be continued with the display mode and cycle B2 hours).

According to such a configuration, in the second E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are allowed), the integrated image display IG "displays the display mode (integrated image display) shown in FIG. 144 (b). In the state of "IGb)" and displayed so as to perform periodic change in "cycle B2 hours" (FIG. 274 (a)), there is no possibility that the mode of the integrated image display IG will change. This will suggest that it will be possible to encourage concentration on other staging effects such as post-reception display. On the other hand, the integrated image display IG is displayed so as to perform the periodic change in the "display mode (integrated image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144 (a)" and the "period B1 hour". It is suggested that the mode of the integrated image display IG may change when it is in the present state. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation reception, the mode of the integrated image display IG (image display) (display mode, periodic time required for one periodic change, etc.) is triggered by this. Can be changed, and after that, the operation can be accepted in the changed mode. That is, in this case, it is suggested that the expectation (high) that a big hit is obtained when the mode (display mode) of the integrated image display IG (image display) changes (the period time required for one periodic change). Since it will be possible to play games, it is expected that the game will be improved.

In particular, in the second E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed), the "display mode" of the "display mode" and the "cycle time required for one periodic change" of the integrated image display IG There are cases where only "" changes, and both "display mode" and "periodic time required for one periodic change" change, and different expectations are suggested between them. , It will be possible to encourage attention as to whether or not the "cycle time" has changed.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 272 to 274, a predetermined EF display EKH is executed in order to hide the periodic change in the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG). However, it is not always necessary to execute the predetermined EF display EKH. For example, by hiding the display itself of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG), the periodic change may be hidden, or the special image display (here, here, the special image display) may be hidden. Although the display itself of the integrated image display IG) is displayed, it can be displayed statically, or it can be displayed with different periodic changes before and after the change to display a special image. (Here, the periodic change (before and after the change) in the integrated image display IG) may be hidden.

In particular, in a state where the periodic change (before the mode change, after the mode change) of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is not yet displayed, the display itself precedes the display mode after the change. If it is displayed (made visible), the tension can be appropriately maintained.

Further, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, when the mode in the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) does not change, the period thereof is the same as in the modified example shown in FIG. 274. The target change may not be hidden (Fig. 272 (b), Fig. 273 (b), etc. may be omitted).

Further, in FIGS. 272 (a) and 273 (a), as the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG), the display modes are the same as each other (integrated image display IGa), but the period time (integrated image display IGa). Although it is decided to display the modes in which the cycle A1 hour and the cycle B1 hour are different from each other, not only the cycle time but also the display modes may be displayed so as to be different from each other. On the contrary, in FIGS. 272 (a) and 273 (a), as a special image display (here, an integrated image display IG), the display modes are different from each other, but the cycle times are the same. You may try to do it. In short, it may be displayed in different modes from each other.

Further, in FIGS. 272 (e) and 273 (g), the cycle times of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) are set to be different from each other, but the cycle times are the same (cycle A2 hours, The cycle B3 hours) may be set. That is, in this case, the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) shown in FIGS. 272 (e) and 273 (g) is displayed in the same display mode and with the same cycle time. Become.

Alternatively, in FIGS. 272 (e) and 273 (g), the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is the same, but the display modes may be different from each other. .. That is, in this case, the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) shown in FIGS. 272 (e) and 273 (g) is displayed in different display modes and with different cycle times. Become. In this case, the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) shown in FIG. 272 (e) may be displayed in the same display mode as that of FIG. 273 (e). When the same display mode is used, it is desirable to set the cycle A2 time and the cycle B1 time as the same time.

In FIG. 274 (a), both the display mode and the cycle time of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) are set as unique modes different from any of the other modes. For example, if the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is unique, it is possible to obtain the same effect even if the cycle time is the same as any of the other modes. be. Moreover, the aspect shown in FIG. 274 (a) may suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than any other aspect.

It should be noted that the term "display mode is different" here does not necessarily mean that the form of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is different, and for example, even if the form is the same, the color is used. Should be different.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification, it is realized as a directing property in the first E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are allowed) and the second E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are allowed). However, it does not have to be a directing effect that appears in multiple reception periods. For example, the directability (configuration) realized in FIGS. 272 to 274 includes the first E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are permitted) and the second E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are permitted). It may be possible to appear only in one of the period).

Further, further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 272 (when the display mode is changed when the special image display is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time are always changed), FIG. 273. The mode shown (there is a case where the cycle time does not change and a case where the cycle time changes when the display mode changes when the special image display is displayed in the second mode), and FIG. 274. The indicated mode (when the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the cycle time changes) is not necessarily realized by the operation reception. good. For example, a predetermined condition (first condition, second condition, etc.) may be satisfied at a predetermined timing within the reception period or the execution period of the precursory effect, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. When not, the display mode and the cycle time in the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) are not changed (FIG. 272 (c), FIG. 273 (c), FIG. 274 (b), etc.), and the predetermined image is displayed. When the conditions are satisfied, the display mode and cycle time in the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) are changed according to the contents (FIGS. 272 (e), 273 (e), (g)). Etc.).

Furthermore, further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 272 (when the display aspect is changed when the special image display is displayed in the first aspect, both the display aspect and the cycle time are always changed) and FIG. 273. (There are cases where the cycle time does not change and cases where the cycle time changes when the display mode changes when the special image display is displayed in the second mode) and FIG. 274. The mode shown in (1) (when the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the cycle time changes) is realized as an effect (configuration) that is not necessarily related to the operation. It does not have to be something to do. In short, if a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared as the "special image display" displayed so as to perform a periodic change, the above-mentioned staging property (the mode shown in FIG. 272 (special image display)). If the display mode changes while the display mode is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time always change), the mode shown in FIG. 273 (the special image display is displayed in the second mode). If the display mode changes while the display mode is present, there are cases where the cycle time does not change and cases where the cycle time changes), and the mode shown in FIG. 274 (the special image display is displayed in the third mode). When it is, it is possible to realize (the display mode and the cycle time do not change).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, an image display (here, a button image BMG) which is an image display of an operation target (operation button 410) is displayed and (as the button image BMG). It is possible to generate a "image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation button 410 that is the object to be manipulated). Then, when the operation reception is performed during the image display reception period, at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output can be executed based on the operation reception.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 related to each of the above-mentioned production examples, first, as the image display acceptance period,
"Short cycle display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (Fig. 253, etc.)) that can be displayed so that periodic changes in the image display (here, button image BMG) appear in predetermined time units (every cycle A time). , 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) ",
-The periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) is not displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit (every cycle A time), and is longer than the predetermined time (cycle A time). "Long cycle display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)" that can be displayed in units (every cycle B hours) )) ”Is to be prepared at least.

On top of this, in the "short cycle display reception period", the reception allowable sound is always audibly output, whereas in the "long cycle display reception period", the reception allowable sound is audibly output (third E reception period). , 4E reception period) and when audible output is not possible (2E reception period). According to such a configuration, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the image display (here, the button image BMG) is periodically changed at an early cycle time so as to strongly urge the player to operate. For example, the vertical movement of the button) is performed, and the reception allowable sound is always output audibly, which raises the expectations of the player and is expected to improve the interest of the game. It will be like. On the other hand, in the "long-period display acceptance period", it becomes difficult to recognize that the player is in a state of being given an operation opportunity as compared with the "short-period display acceptance period". It becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension due to an increased possibility of forgetting to operate.

However, in this case, if a "long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" occurs, "short cycle" Compared to the display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)), the operation is strongly urged to the player. There is a concern that the entertainment interests will decline due to not being played. Therefore, in the "long-period display acceptance period" related to the above-mentioned production example, an morphological sound (second allowable sound) that cannot appear in the "short-period display acceptance period" may be output as the acceptance allowable sound. (See FIG. 263), it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, "long-period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" and "short-period display reception period (No. 266, etc.)" The 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), and the 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) do not occur at the same time, but are appearing "required for periodic changes." It is not possible to compare whether the "time (cycle time)" is long or short. Therefore, it may be difficult for the player to recognize which of the "long-period display acceptance period" and the "short-period display acceptance period" has occurred. In this regard, in the above configuration, the "long-period display reception period" is generated by confirming whether or not the reception allowable sound is audibly output and the type (mode sound). Since there is a possibility that it can be easily recognized, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

In particular, reception is performed during the "long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example. As an allowable sound, a mode sound that cannot appear in the "short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" When the (second permissible sound) is audibly output, the expectation that a jackpot is obtained compared to when the mode sound (first permissible sound) that appears even in the "short-period display acceptance period" is audibly output. Since the (ratio) is set high, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the image display (here, the button image BMG) according to the above-mentioned production example is a depiction of the movement that can appear on the operation target (operation receiving unit) (here, the depiction of repeating the reciprocating movement when the pressing operation is performed). ) Is displayed as a moving image that is repeated, so that the player can be encouraged to operate in a natural way. However, the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a blinking light emission display.

In addition, "long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" and "short" related to the above-mentioned production example. In the periodic display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)), an image display that imitates the operation means (here, The "periodic change" that appears in the button image BMG) has the same content (a depiction of repeating the reciprocating movement when a pressing operation is performed), and only the time required for the periodic change is different. Instead, not only the time required for the periodic change but also the content of the "periodic change" itself may be different. For example, in the short-period display reception period, the movement amount (stroke) of the operation receiving unit that appears when the pressing operation is performed is shorter than in the case of the long-period display reception period. BMG) may be displayed. Alternatively, the image display during the short-period display acceptance period (here, the button image BMG) is displayed as a moving image that repeatedly describes the movements that may appear in the operation receiving unit, but during the long-period display acceptance period. The image display (here, the button image BMG) is displayed as an image display in which the depiction of the movement that can appear in the operation receiving unit is repeatedly performed, and the depiction (blinking) that is different from the depiction of the movement that can appear in the operation receiving unit. It may be displayed as an image display in which light emission display etc.) is repeated.

In addition, during the short-cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)), the image display (here, button operation). Two types of modes are prepared as periodic changes in the image BMG), and one of them is "the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) is in a predetermined time unit (cycle A time)". The other aspect is "a mode in which the image is displayed so as to appear", and another mode is that the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) appears in a time unit longer than a predetermined time (cycle A time). The mode displayed in the above may be set so that the two modes can appear within one short-cycle display acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even when the short-period display acceptance period occurs, the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) is larger than the predetermined time (period A time). Since it may appear in long time units, the short cycle display reception period and the long cycle display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period) It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the periods (such as FIG. 266) is occurring. If the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (cycle A time) within the short cycle display reception period, the long time is the above-mentioned "cycle B time". May be.

In addition, during the short-cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)), the image display (here, button operation). When two types of modes having different cycle times are prepared as periodic changes in the image BMG), "the periodic changes in the image display (here, the button image BMG) appear in a predetermined time (cycle A time) unit. "Aspect displayed in" is assumed to appear when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the image display (here, the button image BMG) is maintained in the operating state, and the image display (here). Here, when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BMG) is not operated, a predetermined time (period A time) is set as "periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG)". Periodic changes of later time may appear. According to such a configuration, the short-period display acceptance period, the long-period display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.), and the third E acceptance period (3E acceptance period, etc.) are limited to the period until the operation by the player is performed. It becomes difficult to recognize which of the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) occurs (Fig. 263, etc.), and after the operation reception is performed, the recognition can be facilitated. become. For "periodic change of time later than a predetermined time (cycle A time)", an image different from the image display is displayed in front of the image display at a position overlapping the image display, and the image is displayed in the front of the image. By displaying it as a periodic change, even if a periodic change of a time later than a predetermined time (period A time) appears as a "periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG)". good. Further, the "periodic change" itself may be different, such as one being a movement cycle and the other being a blinking cycle.

In addition, in the "long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, any As for the reception period of each type, the time required for the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) is set to the same time (period B time), but there are multiple times required for the "periodic change". You may use the time of. However, in this case, any time is specified in the "short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))". It will be set as a time longer than the time (cycle A time). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to recognize whether the short-period display acceptance period or the long-period display acceptance period occurs. In this case, when the time of "periodic change" is a specific time in the long-period display reception period, the reception allowable sound may not be output, and the time of "periodic change" in the long-period display reception period is prevented. When it is not a specific time, the reception allowable sound may or may not be output.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is decided to give an operation opportunity to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in all the reception periods, but the operation is performed to different operation means depending on the type of the reception period. Opportunities may be granted. For example, in the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), the image display (button image BMG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed at least, and the operation reception for the operation button 410 is permitted a plurality of times. In the second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), at least an image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 may be displayed so that operation reception for the operation button 410 is permitted multiple times. .. Similarly, for the 3rd E reception period to the 6th E reception period, the target to which the operation opportunity is given may be set according to the type.

Further, in the short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)), a specific operation means (for example, an operation button) is used. 410) is displayed as an image display (here, button image BMG), but the long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E In the reception period (FIG. 266, etc.)), when a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is displayed as an image display (here, button image BMG) (for example, 3E reception period, 4E reception). There may be a case (for example, a second E reception period) in which the operation means other than the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed as a model image display (sword decoration image SYG). Alternatively, in the long-period display acceptance period, when the image display (here, the button image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed (for example, the third E acceptance period, the fourth E). Image display (here, button image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) and other operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001). There may be a case where both of the displays (sword decoration image SYG) are displayed (for example, the second E reception period). When both a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) and another operating means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) are displayed, all of them use the same period time as a periodic change. Is desirable. In addition, an image display (here, button image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) and an image display (sword) imitating other operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001). When both decorative images (SYG) are displayed, the periodic changes in the image display are different from each other (for example, one is a periodic change due to a blinking light emission display, and the other is a reciprocating operation within the movable range of the operation receiving part. It may be performed by (such as depiction). When both the specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410) and the other operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) are displayed during the long-period display acceptance period, the specific operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. When the operation button 410) or other operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is operated, a predetermined condition can be satisfied, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. The reception period will be terminated (triggered by the operation reception). That is, in this case, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the reception period will be continued without being terminated by the operation reception (the condition is satisfied), and the operation reception will be performed while the operation reception is continued. The corresponding display after reception is displayed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the 1st E reception period, the 2nd E reception period, the 5th E reception period, and the 6th E reception period do not necessarily have to occur as a reception period in which operation reception is permitted multiple times. , The operation reception may occur as a reception period that is allowed only once.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the "short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" ) ”And“ Long-period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)) ”, the staging sound (here, specific BGM) is audibly output. It can occur in the midst of this (see FIGS. 253, 258, 263, 271, 271, etc.). In this regard, in the "short-period display reception period", the staging sound (here, the specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is terminated (in an inaudible state) until the reception period ends. However, in the "long-period display reception period", there may be cases where the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence ends (second E reception period) until the reception period ends. I made it.

That is, as the image display acceptance period, the "short cycle display acceptance period (1st E)" can be displayed so that the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) appears in a predetermined time (cycle A time) unit. The reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), and the 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.) "are displayed so that periodic changes in the image display appear in predetermined time units. "Long cycle display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)" and 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.) that can be displayed so that they appear in units longer than the predetermined time (cycle B time). ) ”, In fact, does the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) appear in a predetermined time unit, or appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time? It is difficult to accurately determine if it is present. In this regard, in the "short-period display acceptance period", the staging sound (here, the specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not terminated by the end of the acceptance period, but " In the "long-period display reception period", if the staging sound (here, specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence may be terminated before the reception period ends, the reception period By confirming whether or not the production sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence of is terminated, it is more accurate whether the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring. You will be able to recognize it.

In particular, the "short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example is applicable. By the time the reception period ends, the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence will not end, but the "long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)) and , 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)) ”, when the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is not terminated by the end of the reception period (3E reception period). There is a case where it is terminated (2E reception period). According to such a configuration, even if the player pays attention to whether or not the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state at the time of the reception period ends, until the reception period ends. If the staging sound (here, the specific BGM) that was in the audible state at the time of its occurrence is not terminated, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize if it is present. That is, in this case, the remaining time as the reception period is reduced by the amount that the player delays the operation in order to confirm whether or not the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state at the time of the reception period is terminated. Coupled with this, it is expected that the tension during the reception period will be maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the "short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" ) ”And“ Long-period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)) ”are sound effects (here, depending on the type of display after reception). , Specific BGM) may occur while the audible output is fading out. In short, it is sufficient that some kind of staging sound is audible at the time when the player is given an operation opportunity.

In addition, during the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, until the reception period ends. In the special type of reception period (second E reception period) in which the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence can be terminated, the operation means capable of receiving multiple operations is imitated during the reception period. Even if a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) corresponding to the displayed image display (here, the button image BMG) is operated, the sound is audible at the time of occurrence. The output related to the existing production sound (specific BGM) is not terminated (for example, it is removed from the channel allocation for outputting the specific BGM), and it has nothing to do with the operation. Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined timing has arrived), the output of the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is terminated. I decided to let him. According to such a configuration, no matter how much the player performs the operation, the output condition of the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state at the time of the reception period is not affected. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of reception period is occurring.

As described above, the time of occurrence of the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.))" until the end of the reception period. In the special type of reception period (second E reception period) in which the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state in the above can be terminated, a model image display (here, the operation button 410) imitating a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is displayed. Both the button image BMG) and the image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating other operation means (for example, the sword decoration image 5001) may be displayed, but any of these operation means may be displayed. It is desirable that the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is not terminated even if the operation is performed. However, when one of these operating means is operated, the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state at the time of its generation is not terminated, but when the other is operated, it is generated. The staging sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at that time may be terminated, and in this case, the type of reception period may be suggested by the operated target. , It is expected that players will be encouraged to perform various operations.

Here, "the staging sound (BGM, etc.) that is in an audible state at the time of occurrence of the reception period is not made in an inaudible state until the end of the reception period" is in an audible state at the time of occurrence. When there are a plurality of types of staging sounds, it is sufficient that at least one of the staging sounds is not made inaudible until the end of the reception period. In addition, "the production sound (BGM, etc.) that is in an audible state at the time of occurrence of the reception period is made in an inaudible state by the end of the reception period" is in an audible state at the time of occurrence. When there are a plurality of types of staging sounds, it means that all of the staging sounds are put into an inaudible state, that is, put into a silent state by the end of the reception period. However, the staging sound whose output is started after the timing when the reception period occurs may be in an audible state.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the same production sound (specific BGM) is audible at the time of occurrence of the "short cycle display reception period" and the "long cycle display reception period". The staging sounds that are audible at the time of generation may be different from each other.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)) and long-period display are displayed. The same mode is displayed as an image display that imitates the operation target during the reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)). However, it does not necessarily have to display the same aspect. For example, during the long-period display acceptance period, different modes may be displayed as an image display that imitates the operation target, depending on the type. Further, in the long-period display reception period, the image display may be displayed in a special mode that cannot appear in the short-period display reception period. In this case, the image display may be displayed in the special mode. When this is done, it becomes possible to suggest that a long-period display acceptance period will occur. When the image display is displayed in the special mode, the expectation (ratio) that a big hit is obtained is higher than when the common mode is displayed in the short cycle display reception period and the long cycle display reception period. It is desirable to be.

In addition, the above-mentioned image display acceptance period related to the above-mentioned production example occurs when a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is audibly output, and when a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is inaudible. It is assumed that there are both cases where it occurs after the state is changed to (4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)). As a result, it is expected that the effectability will be improved when the image display acceptance period occurs.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the 4E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.) occurs in the image display reception period, a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) occurs before the 4E reception period occurs. ) Is always in an inaudible state, so that the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) is set to an inaudible state only when a specific type of staging sound (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. I decided to make it function as something that could occur. However, instead of (or in addition to this), the short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) ) Shall be "a specific type of staging sound (specific BGM) before the short cycle display acceptance period occurs," according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the short cycle display acceptance period occurs. Is not made inaudible or inaudible, but the long-cycle display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), No. 1 In the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), the "long cycle display reception period" occurs rather than the "long cycle display reception period" depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "long cycle display reception period" occurs. There may be a case where a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible and a case where it is not made inaudible. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it is either a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" when an operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easier to recognize whether or not, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, for the "long cycle display reception period", for example, the previous fluctuation pattern in which the second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) is terminated when the second E reception period occurs. Depending on the type of, "the production sound (specific BGM) of a specific type may or may not be inaudible before the second E reception period occurs". Therefore, the 3rd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) are set to "3E reception period" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the reception period occurs. Or, the staging sound (specific BGM) of a specific type may not be made inaudible or not made inaudible before the 4E reception period occurs. That is, in this case, in the third E reception period, the production sound (specific BGM) of a specific type is audibly output regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the third E reception period occurs. In the 4E reception period, the production sound (specific BGM) of a specific type is inaudible regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the 4E reception period occurs. It will occur in the midst of it. Needless to say, in the second E reception period, even if the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the mode that appears as the display after reception is the same.

In this regard, regarding the "short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))", the short cycle display reception period. It is important that the mode (specific BGM) of the specific type of staging sound does not change according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the period occurs. In this sense, with respect to the "short cycle display acceptance period", as in the above-mentioned production example, a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is always audible at the time when the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs. Alternatively, instead of this, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible before the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, and the specific type of effect is produced. It may be possible that the sound (specific BGM) can be generated only while it is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, regarding the "short cycle display reception period", the reception period of a type that can occur only while the production sound of a specific type (specific BGM) is in an audible state and the production sound of a specific type (specific BGM) are It may include a type of reception period that can occur only while it is inaudible. Even with such a configuration, there is no change in the production sound (specific BGM) of the specific type being made inaudible or maintained in the audible state depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

In addition, during the image display reception period related to the above-mentioned production example, when the operation reception is performed, the display may be displayed after the reception in such a manner that the design for the production (decorative design SZ, etc.) can be seen overlapping from the front side. See, for example, FIG. 262 (k4)). As a result, it becomes possible to emphasize the display after reception, and it is expected to improve the staging when the operation reception is performed.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, the "short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" is decorated. There is no case where the post-reception display is performed in a manner that the symbol SZ can be seen overlapping from the front side, and the post-reception display is performed behind the symbol SZ (see FIG. 257, etc.). 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)), when the decorative symbol SZ is displayed after reception in a manner that can be seen overlapping from the front side (2E reception). (Period) and the case where the display is performed after reception on the back side of the decorative symbol SZ (3E reception period, 4E reception period) (FIGS. 262 (k4), (l4), FIG. 265, FIG. See 269 and so on). According to such a configuration, when the short cycle display reception period occurs, the display after reception is not emphasized with respect to the decorative symbol SZ, and the player has an operation opportunity under a feeling of tension. Will be able to be granted. When the long-period display reception period occurs, the display may or may not be emphasized after reception, so it is preferable to feel the tension when the player is given an operation opportunity. It will be possible to provide a certain degree of security while maintaining it.

In the second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.) related to the above-mentioned production example, when the operation reception for ending the reception period is performed, the reception is performed in such a manner that the decorative symbol SZ can be seen overlapping from the front side. Although it was decided to display after reception, even when an operation reception is performed that does not end the reception period, the display after reception may be performed in such a manner that the decorative symbol SZ can be seen overlapping from the front side. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the display is performed after reception in a manner in which the decorative symbol SZ can be seen overlapping from the front side based on the reception during the second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), the player It is possible to shorten the period until the display is hidden after the reception and the decorative symbol SZ becomes easy to see by a predetermined operation according to (FIGS. 262 (k4) and (l4)). reference). According to such a configuration, it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the decrease in the visibility of the decorative symbol SZ when the display after reception is emphasized is suitably suppressed.

Even if it is the "short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))", the decorative symbol SZ It may be possible to display after reception in a manner that the display can be seen overlapping from the front side, but in this case, the period until the display after reception is hidden and the decorative design SZ becomes easy to see is shortened. Is desirable to be impossible.

In addition, in the "long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))", the front side with respect to the decorative symbol SZ. Even when the post-reception display is performed in a manner that makes it appear to overlap with each other, it is possible to shorten the period until the post-reception display is hidden and the decorative symbol SZ becomes easy to see (for example). , 2E reception period) and cases where it is not possible (for example, 3E reception period or 4E reception period).

Further, during the image display acceptance period related to the above-mentioned effect example, when the operation is accepted, the disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (decorative pattern SZ) is executed in a predetermined mode (for example,). FIGS. 269 (g2) to (i2), etc.) and the case where the extinction EF display is executed or not executed in a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, FIGS. 269 (g3) to (i3), etc.). There is. This makes it possible to add color rendering even by displaying the extinct EF.

In addition, at least the 1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), and the 4th E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) will be prepared as the image display reception period. Then, it is possible to display the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) so as to appear in a predetermined time (period A time) unit (short cycle display acceptance period), and the 3rd E acceptance period and the 4th E are accepted. During the reception period, the periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG) is not displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time (cycle A time) unit, and is longer than the predetermined time (cycle B time). ) Made it possible to display so that it appears in units (long-cycle display acceptance period). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in staging through the length of time required for one periodic change in the image display (here, the button image BMG). , It is expected that the tension when the image display acceptance period occurs is appropriately maintained.

Further, when the operation reception is performed during the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), any one of a plurality of modes (Aspects UH1-1, Aspect UH1-2) in which a predetermined result (big hit) is obtained and the degree of expectation is different. The post-acceptance display is made feasible, and the extinct EF display is "when the post-acceptance display is executed in the most promising aspect (aspect UH1-2) among the above-mentioned plurality of aspects, FIGS. 257 (p4) to (r4). ), But when the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode (aspect UH1-1) different from the mode with high expectation among the above plurality of modes, it is different from the above mode in FIG. 257 (p3). )-(R3) will be executed (or may not be executed). " This also applies to the 5th E reception period (FIG. 270 and the like) and the 6th E reception period (FIG. 271 and the like). On the other hand, when the operation is accepted during the 4E acceptance period (FIG. 266, etc.), a plurality of embodiments (Aspects UH4-1 and UH4-2) in which the expected degree of obtaining a predetermined result (big hit) is different. The post-receipt display is made feasible in any one of them, and the disappearing EF display is described as follows: It is executed in the embodiment shown in (i3), but when the post-acceptance display is executed in an embodiment different from the highly expected aspect among the above plurality of aspects (aspect UH4-1), the aspect is different from the above aspect. It is executed (or may not be executed) in the manner shown in (g2) to (i2). " In this regard, any of a plurality of embodiments (Aspects UH3-1 and Aspect UH3-2) in which the expected degree of obtaining a predetermined result (big hit) is different when the operation is accepted during the third E acceptance period (FIG. 263, etc.). Even if the post-receipt display is made feasible, the disappearing EF display is "one aspect (FIGS. 269 (f2) to (h2) regardless of which of the above-mentioned plurality of modes the post-reception display is executed." ) And (Fig. 269 (f3) to (h3), etc.). According to such a configuration, in the short cycle display acceptance period in which the periodic change in the image display appears in a predetermined time (cycle A time) unit, the degree of expectation depends on the mode of the disappearance EF display when the operation reception is performed. From the suggestion, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity so as not to feel anxiety that it is difficult to recognize the degree of expectation even though the operation is performed. On the other hand, the long-period display acceptance period in which the periodic change in the image display is not displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time (cycle A time) unit but appears in a time (cycle B time) unit longer than the predetermined time. Then, since the expectation may be suggested or the expectation may not be suggested depending on the mode of the disappearance EF display when the operation is accepted, the tension when giving the operation opportunity is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it appears when the display after the first E reception is executed in the "low expectation mode UH1-1" based on the operation reception being performed during the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.). Based on the EF display (effect display) EKH mode and the operation reception performed during the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), the display after the 4E reception is executed in the "low expectation mode UH4-1". The EF display (effect display) EKH mode that appears in such cases is the same as each other (or the EF display may not be executed in any case) (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (r3). ) And FIGS. 269 (g2) to (i2)). That is, in this case, as a result of the operation being accepted by repeatedly pressing the button appropriately, if the display after acceptance is executed in a mode with low expectation, is the operation accepted by multiple operations? Since it is difficult to recognize whether the operation is accepted by one operation, it is suggested that the expectation is low, and it is urged to stop pressing the button appropriately. Will be expected.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the EF display (effect display) EKH mode that appears regardless of the mode of the display after the 3E reception based on the operation reception performed during the 3E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.) and the mode of EKH. EF display (effect display) EKH that appears when the display after the 4th reception is executed in "Aspect UH4-1 with high expectation" based on the operation reception being made during the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) (See FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2), FIGS. 265 (f3) to (h3), and FIGS. 269 (g3) to (i3)). That is, in this case, even if the display after the third E reception is executed in the low expectation mode UH3-1 based on the operation reception made in the third E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.), the EF display (the EF display (FIG. 263, etc.)). (Display of effect effect) Since it is possible to give an illusion that the degree of expectation is high depending on the mode of EKH, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed.

In addition, in the image display reception period related to the above-mentioned production example, "short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271)" Etc.)) ”and“ long-period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)) ” The reception is allowed multiple times.

In particular, the "short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example is the relevant. Regardless of the type of reception period, the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) multiple times (for example, the continuous hitting type). On the other hand, the "long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" is the reception period. Depending on the type (type such as display after reception and output sound after reception), the player accepts the operation (operation) until the reception period ends (while it is occurring). When it occurs as a type that is allowed only once (for example, a single push type) (3E reception period, 4E reception period) and until the reception period ends (while it occurs), the player There is a case (second E reception period) in which the reception (operation reception) of the operation (operation) by the above occurs as a type (for example, a continuous push type) that is allowed multiple times. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the operation reception is allowed a plurality of times (for example, the continuous hitting type) when the "short cycle display reception period" occurs. In addition, when the "long-period display reception period" occurs, it becomes possible to conceal whether or not the operation reception is allowed multiple times (for example, whether or not it is a continuous hit type). , You will be able to be given an operation opportunity in a tense atmosphere.

In this case, even if the reception period (valid period) of the type (for example, the continuous hitting type) in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation) multiple times (operation reception), the lottery (judgment) related to the production is performed. Depending on the result of the above, there may be a case (possibility) that the reception period (valid period) ends with only one operation reception. In short, if it is allowed multiple times (pattern), it may be a certain type of acceptance period (valid period).

Of the "long-period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))", the reception period ends. During the period (second E reception period) in which the operation means that allows the operation reception multiple times is displayed as the image display (here, the button image BMG), the operation reception is displayed. The period during which the operation means that allows the operation reception multiple times before the end of the period is not displayed as the image display (here, the button image BMG) (3E reception period, 4E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.)). )) May be displayed as an image display (aspect) that is not displayed. That is, in this case, when the long-period display acceptance period occurs, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not this is a type that is allowed multiple times (for example, a continuous push type).

Furthermore, the operation by the player in the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" In the reception period (3E reception period, 4E reception period), the reception of (operation) is displayed only as the image display (here, the button image BMG) only for the operation means that are allowed once. The image display is displayed in the short cycle display reception period (1st reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)). It is displayed as an image display corresponding to the same operation means, so that the operation means corresponding to the image display can be operated only once, and a plurality of operations (operations) are accepted (operation reception) by the player. In the reception period (second E reception period) in which the permitted operation means is displayed at least as the image display, the image display that is not displayed in the short cycle display reception period is displayed, and the operation means corresponding to the image display is displayed. May be made operable multiple times.

In addition, during the short-period display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)) related to the above-mentioned production example, the image is displayed. The auto-repeated hit function is enabled for the operation means that can be operated multiple times, but the long-period display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)) and the third E reception period (Fig. 263) are enabled. Etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)), the auto-repeated hit function is not enabled for the operation means that can be operated multiple times corresponding to the image display. According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize whether the short-period display acceptance period or the long-period display acceptance period occurs until the operation by the player is started, while making it difficult to recognize. When the operation state is maintained, it becomes possible to suggest whether the short-period display acceptance period or the long-period display acceptance period is occurring through whether or not the auto-repeated hit function is enabled. ..

In addition, the image display (here, the button image BMG) is displayed in the "short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example. When an operation is received for the operation means corresponding to (here, "operation button 410"), the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display is hidden (FIG. 253 (b). ) Etc.). That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the image display in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic change that has appeared in the image display up to that point is hidden. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the image display, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the operation reception is performed. In order to obtain such an effect, the 5E reception period (FIG. 270 and the like) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

In particular, in this case, in the "short cycle display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, the image display (here, button operation) When the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the image display up to that point is hidden (Fig.). 253 (b), etc.), "Long-cycle display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" When the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the image display (here, the button image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the image display until then. Is hidden (see FIGS. 263 (b), 266 (b), etc.) and when the periodic changes that have previously appeared in the image display are not hidden and are continued (FIG. 258 (b)) and so on. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display until then was not hidden and continued when the operation was accepted, the "long-period display acceptance period" occurred. You will be able to suggest that. In addition, when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display is hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short-period display acceptance period" or the "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize what it is.

Alternatively, the operation means corresponding to the image display (here, the button image BMG) in the "short cycle display reception period (fifth E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example (here, "operation button"). When the operation is accepted for 410 "), the periodic change that has appeared in the image display until then is not hidden and continues (see FIG. 270 (b) and the like). That is, in this case, even if the operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the image display in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic change that has appeared in the image display is not hidden. Since the operation is continued, it is expected that the time required for one periodic change in the image display can be confirmed even after the operation is accepted. In order to obtain such an effect, the first E reception period (FIG. 253 and the like) and the sixth E reception period (FIG. 271 and the like) are not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

In particular, in this case, in the "short cycle display reception period (fifth E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, the operation means corresponding to the image display (here, the button image BMG) (here, the button image BMG). When the "operation button 410") is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display is not hidden and continues (see FIG. 270 (b) and the like). In the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), third E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), fourth E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))", the image display (here, button operation) When the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display is hidden (Fig.). 263 (b), FIG. 266 (b), etc.) and the case where the periodic change that had appeared in the image display is continued without being hidden (see FIG. 258 (b)). I made it. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the "long-period display acceptance period" occurred when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display was hidden when the operation was accepted. You will be able to. In addition, when the periodic change that had appeared in the image display when the operation is accepted is not hidden and is continued, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" is set. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize whether it has occurred.

The above-mentioned "periodic change is hidden" may be hidden by "hiding the image display", or the image display continues to be displayed. The periodic change that has appeared up to now may end once and become a static display, the same periodic change may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started. , Anything that makes the periodic change (progress) that has appeared up to that point invisible to the player is sufficient.

Further, a plurality of operating means may be provided, and different operating means may be used depending on whether the periodic change is terminated when the operation is accepted and when the periodic change is continued, or the same operating means may be used. You may do so.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, first, it is possible to generate a reception allowable period in which operation reception for the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, and the operation reception is performed in the reception allowable period. When this is done, at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output can be executed based on the fact that the operation reception has been performed. In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least an image display that imitates the operation means for which the operation acceptance is set as the operation target that is allowed multiple times is displayed. , 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.), 2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)) ”.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception is performed a plurality of times only by keeping the operating means corresponding to the image display in the operated state as such a "multiple times allowable period". At least the maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) is to be prepared.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times within a limited time (a plurality of permissible period), the "image display (here, the button image BMG)" ) Corresponding to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, and the operation reception is performed multiple times. " It will be like.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, as the "multiple operation allowable period", the "operation means in which the operation reception can be permitted multiple times" is displayed as an image (here, the button operation). At least it is displayed as an image BMG), and the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operation means (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the image display in the operated state. 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) " Is displayed at least as an image display (here, button image BMG), but there are multiple operation receptions just by keeping the operation means (here, operation button 410) corresponding to the image display in the operated state. Since it was decided to prepare a "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))" that is not turned around, it is expected that the decline in the interest in pachinko will be suppressed while maintaining a moderate sense of tension. Will be done.

In addition, it occurs in the "maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example. At that time, it was decided to audibly output the reception allowable sound. According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple allowable period), if a "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, By audibly outputting the reception allowable sound, "It becomes easy to start the operation immediately after the maintenance operation allowable period occurs, and the operation is performed multiple times while the remaining time is sufficient for that amount. In addition, "the operation reception is performed multiple times just by keeping the operation means (here, the operation button 410) operated", which reduces the interest in the game. It will be expected to be suppressed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the “maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), or 6E” in which the automatic continuous striking function is enabled. In the "reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))", the reception permissible sound is audibly output when it occurs, but in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258 etc.))" in which the automatic continuous striking function is not enabled. Since the reception allowable sound is not audibly output when it occurs, the operation reception is performed multiple times just by keeping the operating means in the operated state depending on whether the reception allowable sound is audibly output. It will be possible to suggest whether or not the "automatic repeated hit function" is enabled.

In the above-mentioned production example, "maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" and "maintenance". In the operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)), "the operation means in which the operation reception can be permitted multiple times" is displayed at least as a model image display (here, button image BMG). The objects are the same as each other, but they may be different from each other.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception is performed including the case where the operation state is maintained. Each time the operation is accepted, the display mode is changed (the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden) in the image display that imitates the operation means that allows the operation reception multiple times. In the operation non-permissible period (second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the display mode does not change even if the operation is accepted (the periodic change that has appeared until then is continued). That is, in this case, the "maintenance operation allowable period" can preferably suggest that the operation reception is properly performed even when the operation is performed using the "automatic continuous striking function". As a result, it will be possible to improve the taste of games. However, if there are cases where multiple operation opportunities are provided only by such directing, there is no sense of tension despite providing multiple operation opportunities within a limited time. It is feared that it will not be born, and as a result, the interest in games will decline. In this regard, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" related to the above-mentioned production example, since the display mode does not change even if the operation reception is performed, it is recognized whether or not the operation reception is properly performed. It can be made difficult, and it is expected that the tension when providing a plurality of operation opportunities within a limited time is also suitably maintained. In order to obtain such an effect, the 5E reception period (FIG. 270 and the like) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the "multiple-time permissible period" is such that at least an image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted multiple times is displayed. , Some kind of staging sound (BGM) can be generated while being audibly output, but the staging sound (BGM) is put into an inaudible state until the end of the "multiple permissible period". Case (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)), non-audible state (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.)), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) )) And so on.

According to such a configuration, when the staging sound (BGM) that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence of the reception period is made in an inaudible state while the operation opportunity is given, a plurality of operation receptions are performed. It becomes possible to suggest that the situation is such that a "multiple permissible period" is occurring over the permissible times. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple allowed period), "just keep the operating means corresponding to the image display in the operated state". Since there are cases where the operation reception is performed multiple times, it is expected that the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the “maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), 6E reception” in which the automatic continuous striking function is enabled In the "period (Fig. 271 etc.))", the staging sound (BGM etc.) that is in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is not made in an inaudible state until the end of the "maintenance operation allowable period", but is auto. In the "maintenance operation unacceptable period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))" in which the continuous striking function is not enabled, the staging sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of its occurrence is the "maintenance operation unacceptable period". It was made inaudible by the time it was finished. According to such a configuration, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, the staging sound (BGM, etc.) that was audible at the time of the occurrence until the end of the "multiple permissible period" is not recorded. Depending on whether or not it is made audible, it is possible to suggest whether or not the "automatic continuous hitting function", in which operation reception is performed multiple times, is enabled simply by keeping the operating means in the operated state. become.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, the reception period (as an image display that imitates an operation means capable of receiving multiple operations). Even if a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) corresponding to the displayed image display (here, the button image BMG) is operated, the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is triggered by this. The output related to (specific BGM) is not terminated (for example, it is excluded from the channel allocation for outputting the specific BGM). That is, it was in an audible state at the time of occurrence based on the fact that a predetermined condition (which has nothing to do with the operation) was satisfied (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined timing has arrived). The output related to the staging sound (specific BGM) will be terminated. According to such a configuration, no matter how much the player performs the operation, the output condition of the staging sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state at the time of the reception period is not affected. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of reception period is occurring.

Here, "the staging sound (BGM, etc.) that is in an audible state at the time of occurrence of the multiple permissible period is not made in an inaudible state until the end of the multiple permissible period" is said at the time of occurrence. When there are a plurality of types of audible sound effects, it is sufficient that at least one of the sound effects is not made inaudible until the end of the multiple permissible period. In addition, "the staging sound (BGM, etc.) that is in an audible state at the time of occurrence of the multiple permissible period is made in an inaudible state by the end of the multiple permissible period" is said at the time of occurrence. When there are multiple types of audible production sounds, it means that all of these production sounds are made inaudible, that is, silent until the end of the multiple allowable period. do. However, the staging sound whose output is started after the timing when the reception period occurs may be in an audible state.

In this case, the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" may occur while the audible output of the staging sound (BGM) is reduced (suppressed). That is, it suffices if there is a staging sound (BGM or the like) that is in an audible state when the "multiple permissible period" occurs.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the “maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), 6th E reception period (FIG. 271 etc.)” in which the automatic continuous striking function is enabled )) ”And the“ maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)) ”in which the automatic continuous striking function is not enabled, the same staging sound (specific BGM) is audible at the time of their occurrence. However, the staging sounds that are audible at the time of their occurrence may be different from each other.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the "multiple times permissible period" is generated when a specific type of production sound (here, specific BGM) is audibly output, and a specific type of production. Sound (here, specific BGM) may be generated after being made inaudible. More specifically, as a "multiple permissible period" that can occur while a specific type of effect sound (here, a specific BGM) is audibly output, the operation reception is permissible multiple times among the plurality of operation means. The operation means (here, the operation button 410) that can be operated is displayed at least as the image display (here, the button image BMG), and the operation means corresponding to the image display is simply maintained in the operated state. Multiple operation means such as "maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" in which operation reception is performed multiple times. Of these, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) to which the operation reception can be allowed multiple times is displayed at least as the image display (here, the button image BMG), but the operation means corresponding to the image display is used. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))" is prepared so that the operation reception is not performed multiple times just by maintaining the operated state.

In this regard, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", a specific type of effect is produced before the maintenance operation permissible period occurs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. The sound (here, the specific BGM) is not made inaudible or inaudible, but in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", when the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs. When the production sound of a specific type (here, specific BGM) is made inaudible before the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended (here). When the maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs when the specific type of effect sound is inaudible) and when it is not made non-audible (when the specific type of effect sound is audible output, the maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs). If it occurs), there may be. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, this is the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period". Since it becomes easier to recognize which one it is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determination result (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, the "maintenance operation allowable period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" is the relevant. It is important that the mode (specific BGM) of the specific type of staging sound does not change according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the maintenance operation allowable period occurs. In this sense, with regard to the "maintenance operation allowable period", as in the above-mentioned production example, the specific type of production sound (specific BGM) must be in an audible state at the time when the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs. Alternatively, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, and the specific type of effect sound (specific) may be made inaudible. It may be possible that BGM) can occur only while it is inaudible. Alternatively, regarding the "maintenance operation allowable period", the reception period of the type that can occur only while the production sound of a specific type (specific BGM) is in an audible state and the production sound of a specific type (specific BGM) are not included. It may include a type of reception period that can occur only while it is audible. Even with such a configuration, there is no change in the production sound (specific BGM) of the specific type being made inaudible or maintained in the audible state depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

In the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))", a specific type of staging sound is used according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. Needless to say, regardless of the mode (here, the specific BGM), the same mode is displayed as the post-reception display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the image display (here, the button image BMG) is operated as the “multiple times permissible period”. At least a "maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" is prepared, in which the operation reception is performed multiple times just by continuing to maintain. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", when the operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as the image display that has appeared until then is changed (FIGS. 253 (b) and 271 (b). reference).

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times within a limited time (allowable period for a plurality of times), he / she has operated the operation means corresponding to the image display. The operation reception will be performed multiple times just by maintaining the state, "so it is expected that the decline in the game interest will be suppressed. In addition, when the operation reception is performed, the display mode as the image display that has appeared until then is changed, so that the operation reception can be performed simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in the operated state. Can be suitably suggested that is done properly.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, in the "maintenance operation permissible period" of the "multiple times permissible period", when the operation is accepted, the display mode (visual recognition) as the image display that has appeared until then is performed. However, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", even if the operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as a pachinko image display that has appeared until then is not changed. According to such a configuration, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", it is preferably suggested that the operation reception is properly performed only by maintaining the operation state, so that the automatic continuous striking function is enabled. Coupled with this, it is expected that the hobby of games will be improved. On the other hand, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed even if the operation reception is performed. It is expected that they will be encouraged to repeat the operation more positively.

In this case, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", when the operation is accepted by enabling the automatic continuous hitting function, the operation is not accepted as compared with the case where the operation is not accepted. It is desirable that the time required for periodic changes in the image display is different.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, first, an image display (here, a button image BMG), which is an image display imitating an operation means (here, an operation button 410), is displayed and an operation reception is performed. An acceptable image display acceptance period can be generated, and when an operation is accepted during the image display acceptance period, at least one of the post-acceptance display and the post-acceptance sound output is displayed based on the operation acceptance. It is made feasible. In addition, the image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that imitates the operating means.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted once is the above-mentioned image display during the image display reception period. "Specific type of image display acceptance period (3E acceptance period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E acceptance period (Fig. 266, etc.), etc.)" displayed as a display, and the operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. The image display that imitates the operation means set as is displayed at least as the image display. , 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) ”, and one operation reception is allowed in the“ specific type of image display reception period ”. When the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is set as the operation target and is the target to be displayed as the image display is operated and the operation reception is performed, the operation reception is performed based on the operation reception. , The periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden in the above-mentioned image display (here, button image BMG) corresponding to the operation means, and the operation is accepted in the "special type image display acceptance period". Is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times, and when the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the target to be displayed as an image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the operation means is used. The periodic change that had previously appeared in the corresponding image display (here, the button image BMG) can be continued.

According to such a configuration, the "specific type of image display acceptance period (operation)" depends on whether or not the periodic change that has appeared on the image display until then is hidden when the operation is accepted. It becomes possible to suggest which of "reception is allowed once)" and "special type of image display reception period (operation reception is allowed multiple times)" has occurred.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output (first E acceptance period (FIG. 253). , Etc.), the 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) and the case where the reception permissible sound is not audibly output (the 2E reception period (Fig. 258 etc.)). On top of this, when the reception allowable sound is audibly output (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)), the "special type of image display reception period (multiple times)" When the operation means that is set as the operation target that allows the operation reception multiple times in "Operation)" is operated and the operation reception is performed, the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden in the image display. (Refer to FIG. 253 (b) and FIG. 271 (b)), if the reception allowable sound is not audibly output (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)), the "special type of image display reception period (multiple times)". When the operation means that is set as the operation target that allows the operation reception multiple times in "Operation)" is operated and the operation reception is performed, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display is continued without being hidden. (See FIG. 258 (b)). According to such a configuration, when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the operation is accepted depending on whether or not the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic change that has appeared on the display up to that point is hidden (whether or not the operation reception status is properly notified). That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize that the operation is being accepted when the acceptance allowable sound is not output when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform multiple operations, and it becomes possible to play a game in a tense atmosphere. In order to obtain such an effect, the 5E reception period (FIG. 270 and the like) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

It should be noted that the operating means set as the operation target allowed multiple times may be the same or different depending on whether the periodic change is terminated or the periodic change is continued. good.

In addition, only the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted only once in the "specific type image display reception period (one operation)" is the above image display (here, the button image BMG). Even when it is displayed as, the reception allowable sound may be audible output or not audible output. However, only the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted only once in the "specific type image display reception period (one operation)" is used as the above image display (here, the button image BMG). When it is displayed, the reception allowable sound may be always output audibly. In this case, when the reception allowable sound is not audibly output, it becomes possible to recognize that multiple operations are permitted, but reception is performed. When the permissible sound is audibly output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether a plurality of operations are permitted or a single operation is permitted.

Alternatively, the 5th reception period (Fig. 270, etc.) is generated as the "special type of image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) or the 6th E reception period (Fig. 271). Etc.) may not be generated. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output (fifth E acceptance period (5E acceptance period). (Fig. 270, etc.)) and the case where the reception permissible sound is not audibly output (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)). However, regardless of whether the reception allowable sound is audibly output (fifth E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.)) or the reception permissible sound is not audibly output (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)). , Based on the operation reception performed when the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is allowed multiple times is operated in the "special type image display reception period (multiple operations)". The periodic change appearing in the image display is not hidden, and the periodic change appearing in the image display is whether or not the operation is accepted (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period). Regardless of whether it will continue as it is. In this regard, when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs and the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output (5E acceptance period (Fig. 270, etc.)), the operation is accepted. While the EF display is displayed based on (see FIG. 270 (d)), when the reception allowable sound is not audibly output (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)), the EF is performed even if the operation is accepted. The display (see FIG. 258 (d)) is hidden. According to such a configuration, when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the operation is accepted depending on whether or not the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the corresponding EF display is executed (whether or not the operation reception status is properly notified). It should be noted that the "EF display" according to this example overlaps with the display area of the image display that continues to change periodically regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted, and is larger than the image display (on the layer). ) It is an image display displayed on the front side. Therefore, when the "EF display" is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the image display that continues to change periodically, and it is possible to preferably suggest that the operation reception is properly performed. Become. That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize that the operation is being accepted when the acceptance allowable sound is not output when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform multiple operations, and it becomes possible to play a game in a tense atmosphere.

In addition, the above-mentioned "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" related to the above-mentioned production example is set until the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" ends. When the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is not made in the inaudible state (1st E reception period (see FIG. 253 (h)), 6th E reception period (see FIG. 271 (h))) and its occurrence. There is a case where the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time is changed to the inaudible state (second E reception period (see FIG. 258 (h))).

Then, while the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence has been audibly output, the operation acceptance is permitted multiple times. When the operation means (here, the operation button 410) set as the operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden in the image display corresponding to the operation means. (1st E reception period (see FIG. 253 (h)), 6th E reception period (see FIG. 271 (h))) and the cycle that has appeared in the image display corresponding to the operation means. There is a case where the target change is continued without being hidden (second E reception period (see FIG. 258 (h))). The term "when the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display corresponding to the operating means is continued without being hidden" is the second E reception period (see FIG. 258 (h)). In the above, it is assumed that the operation is accepted when the production sound is in the audible output state before the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence is made into the inaudible state.

In addition, there are multiple operation receptions while the "special type of image display reception period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence is in the non-audible state. When the operation means set as the allowable operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point on the image display corresponding to the operation means is continued without being hidden. I did it.

According to such a configuration, when the "special type image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, it is in an audible state at the time of the occurrence within the "special type image display acceptance period". When the staging sound is made inaudible, it is suggested that the periodic change that had appeared in the image display when the operation was accepted is not hidden and continues, but the "special type" When the operation is accepted while the effect sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is audibly output within the "image display acceptance period", the periodic change that has appeared in the image display until then is hidden. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not it is done.

Alternatively, the 5th reception period (Fig. 270, etc.) is generated as the "special type of image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) or the 6th E reception period (Fig. 271). Etc.) may not be generated. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" ends the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)". If the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible (5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.)), and the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of its occurrence is inaudible. (See the second E reception period (see FIG. 258 (h))). Then, in this case, regardless of whether or not the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence of the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is made into the inaudible state, the "special type" When the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is allowed multiple times is operated and the operation reception is performed in the "image display reception period (multiple operations)", the operation reception appears in the image display based on this. The periodic change that is being displayed is not hidden, and the periodic change that appears in the image display continues as it is regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period). Will be done. In this regard, the operation reception is permitted multiple times while the "special type of image display reception period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence is audibly output. When the operation means (here, the operation button 410) set as the operation target to be operated is operated and the operation reception is performed, the EF display is displayed based on the operation reception (FIG. 270). (D)), there are cases where the EF display is not displayed even if the operation is accepted (see FIG. 258 (d)). In addition, "when the EF display is not displayed even if the operation reception is performed" here means that during the second E reception period (see FIG. 258 (h)), the staging sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is heard. It is assumed that the operation is accepted when the output is in the audible state before the inaudible state is set. In addition, there are multiple operation receptions while the "special type of image display reception period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of the occurrence is in the non-audible state. When the operation means set as the allowable operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the EF display is not displayed as a trigger (FIG. 258 (d)). reference).

According to such a configuration, when the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, it is in an audible state at the time of the occurrence within the "special type of image display acceptance period". When the staging sound is made inaudible, it is suggested that the "EF display" is not displayed when the operation is accepted, but when it occurs within the "special type of image display acceptance period". Whether or not "EF display" is displayed when the operation reception is performed while the production sound that was in the audible state is audibly output (the operation reception is in the situation). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize (whether or not it properly notifies). Therefore, in the "special type of image display acceptance period (multiple operations)", when the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of its occurrence is made in the inaudible state, the operation is being accepted. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform multiple operations under the condition that it is difficult to recognize, and it becomes possible to play a game in a tense atmosphere.

In the above-mentioned production example, the production sounds that are audibly output at the time of their occurrence are the same (specific BGM) in each reception period, but different production sounds may be audibly output.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the image display acceptance period is "a type of image display acceptance period that may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output (for example, the first E acceptance period (Fig.)). 253 etc.), 2E reception period (Fig. 258 etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263 etc.)), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) "and" Occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output. It can be classified into an impossible type of image display reception period (for example, 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)), and a type of image display that can occur while a specific BGM is being audibly output. The "reception period" is the "specific type of image display reception period (3E reception)" in which only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted once is displayed as the above image display. "Period (Fig. 263, etc.))" and "Special type of image display reception" in which the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is allowed multiple times is displayed at least as the above image display. It can be further classified into a period (for example, a first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), a second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), and a sixth E reception period (FIG. 271 etc.)). Then, in the "specific type image display reception period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))", the operation reception is 1. When the operation means set as the allowable operation target and the target to be displayed as an image display is operated and the operation reception is performed, the operation means is based on the fact that the operation reception is performed. The periodic changes that had previously appeared in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the above are hidden (see, for example, FIGS. 253 (b), 263 (b), 271 (b), etc.), and the "special type" is displayed. In the image display reception period (for example, the second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)), the operation reception is set as the operation target that is allowed multiple times, and the operation is targeted to be displayed as the image display. When the means is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes previously appearing in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operating means can be continued (see, for example, FIGS. 258 to 262).

According to such a configuration, at the time when the operation reception is given while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "specific type image display reception period (operation reception is allowed once)" and the "special type" It is difficult to recognize which of the "image display reception period (operation reception is allowed multiple times)" has occurred so that the tension can be maintained appropriately, and when the operation reception is performed, the image display is displayed. Depending on whether or not the periodic change that appeared up to is hidden, "specific type of image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed once)" and "special type of image display acceptance period (operation acceptance)" Is allowed multiple times) ”can be suggested.

Further, in the "special type image display acceptance period" according to the above-mentioned production example, when the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is operated and the operation acceptance is performed, the operation is performed. "The first special type of image display acceptance period (for example, the first E acceptance period (Fig. 253, etc.), the sixth E acceptance period (for example)" that hides the periodic changes that have appeared in the image display corresponding to the means. (Fig. 271 etc.)) ”, and the“ second special type of image display acceptance period (second E acceptance period) that continues without hiding the periodic changes that have appeared in the image display corresponding to the operating means. (Fig. 258, etc.)) ”,“ 1st special type image display acceptance period (for example, 1st E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.), 6th E acceptance period (FIG. 271 etc.)) ”. Is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "first special type image display acceptance period" occurs. The "second special type image display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))" is the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the "second special type image display acceptance period" occurs. Depending on the type of, there may be a case where the specific BGM is audibly output and a case where the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output, this is "according to the operation reception". Since it can be used as a material for judging whether or not it is a "thing that hides the periodic changes that have appeared until then", it concentrates on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. Will be able to encourage. As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determination result (type of variation pattern).

When such a configuration is adopted, the "first special type of image display reception period (for example, first E reception)" that hides the periodic change that has appeared on the image display when the operation reception is performed. Regarding the period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)), it depends on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the image display reception period of the first special type occurs. It is important that the mode of the production sound of a specific type (specific BGM) does not change.

In the "second special type image display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))", the previous change that has ended when the second special type image display acceptance period occurs. It goes without saying that the same mode is displayed as the post-reception display regardless of the mode of the effect sound of the specific type (here, the specific BGM) according to the type of the pattern.

Alternatively, the 1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and the 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.) should be generated as a type of image display reception period that cannot occur while the specific BGM is audibly output. You may. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the image display acceptance period is "a type of image display acceptance period that can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output (for example, the second E acceptance period). (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)) "and" Image display reception period of a type that cannot occur while the specific BGM is audibly output (for example, 1E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)) It can be classified into (253, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)), and is a type of image that can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output. The "display acceptance period" is the "specific type of image display acceptance period (3E)" in which only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation acceptance is allowed once is displayed as the above image display. "Reception period (Fig. 263, etc.))" and "special type of image display" in which an image display that imitates an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation reception is allowed multiple times is displayed at least as the above image display. It can be further classified into a reception period (for example, a second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)). Then, in the "specific type image display acceptance period (third E acceptance period (FIG. 263, etc.))", the operation acceptance is set as an operation target that is allowed once, and is displayed as an image display. When the operated operation means is operated and the operation reception is performed, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the operation reception. (For example, see FIG. 263 (b)), and in the "special type of image display acceptance period (for example, the second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.))", the operation target is allowed to be operated multiple times. When the operation means that is set as is and is the target to be displayed as the image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the above image display corresponding to the operation means is changed. It will be possible to continue (see, for example, FIGS. 258-262).

Even with such a configuration, when the operation reception is given while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "specific type image display reception period (operation reception is allowed once)" and "special type" It is difficult to recognize which of the image display reception period (operation reception is allowed multiple times) is occurring, so that the tension is maintained appropriately, and when the operation reception is done, the image display is displayed. Depending on whether or not the periodic change that had appeared until then was hidden, the "specific type of image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed once)" and the "special type of image display acceptance period (operation)" It will be possible to suggest which of the "reception is allowed multiple times)" is occurring.

Also in this case, the "special type image display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))" is the previous time when the "special type image display acceptance period" occurs. Depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, there are cases where the specific BGM is audibly output and cases where the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. Then, "a type of image display reception period (for example, 1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), 6E reception", which cannot occur while the specific BGM is audibly output, is displayed. The period (Fig. 271 etc.)) ”is set to occur while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the reception period occurs. May be good. According to such a configuration, even if a "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern. , Since it becomes possible to infer which type the "multiple permissible period" is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. ..

Alternatively, it is decided to generate the 2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and the 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.) as the "special type of image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1st E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.). 253 etc.) and the 6th E reception period (FIG. 271 etc.) may not occur. In this regard, the second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) of the "special type of image display reception period (multiple operations)" ends when the second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) occurs. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, there are cases where the specific BGM is audibly output and cases where the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. , The 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.) of the "special type image display reception period (multiple operations)" may be configured by any of the following configurations a and b.
a. Regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that ended at the time when the reception period occurs, it occurs only while the specific BGM is in the audible state.
b. It occurs only when the specific BGM is in an inaudible state, regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the reception period occurs.

Regardless of which of the above configurations a and b is adopted, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, "the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden according to the operation reception". Since there is no such thing, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed while the operation is performed a plurality of times. However, when the operation is accepted during the 5th E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), unlike the case of the 2nd E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), the EF display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. Therefore, regardless of which of the above configurations a and b is adopted, the player can display the EF display according to the operation reception by remembering the type of the previous fluctuation pattern. It becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not (whether or not the operation reception is properly performed), and it becomes possible to play the game in a tense atmosphere.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, first, it is possible to generate a reception allowable period in which operation reception for the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, and the operation reception is performed in the reception allowable period. When this is done, at least one of the post-reception display and the post-reception sound output can be executed based on the fact that the operation reception has been performed. In addition, it is possible to display the "reception period-related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear during the reception permissible period, and as the reception permissible period, the operation reception is permitted multiple times, "multiple times". At least the "allowable period" will be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodic display" as the "multiple times allowable period". The "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.))" and the 3rd periodic display SH3 and the 4th periodic display SH4 are at least displayed as the above "reception period-related periodic display". Prepare at least a special multiple-time permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)). Then, in the "specific multiple-time permissible period", the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point in the first periodic display SH1 are hidden each time the operation is accepted that is permitted multiple times.

According to such a configuration, in the "specific multiple times allowable period", the operation is accepted by confirming the number of times that the periodic change appearing in the "first periodic display SH1" is hidden. You will be able to check the number of times.

Further, in the above-mentioned "specific multiple times permissible period (first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.))" according to the above-mentioned production example, when the reception permissible sound is generated, the reception permissible sound is audibly output and the multiple times are permissible. Every time an operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden in the "first periodic display SH1", but the "second periodic display SH2" is displayed. In, the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point were continued (see FIGS. 256 (g2), 257 (l3), and the like). In addition, in the "special multiple times permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))", the reception permissible sound is not audibly output when it occurs, and the operation reception (reception period is not terminated) that is permitted multiple times. Every time the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point are continued in both the "third periodic display SH3" and the "fourth periodic display SH4" (FIG. 261 (f2). ), FIG. 262 (i3), and the like). That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed by confirming the mode of the reception period-related periodicity display when the operation reception is performed, through the presence or absence of the audible output of the reception allowable sound. Will be able to suggest. Further, even when the audible output of the reception allowable sound is performed (when it is suggested that it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed), it is not the "first periodic display SH1". Those who mistakenly gaze at the "second periodic display SH2" will have difficulty in recognizing whether or not the operation reception has been performed properly, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately. become.

However, for the "specific multiple times permissible period" in which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are at least displayed as the above "reception period related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period", the first It may occur as the 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.) instead of the 1E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.). That is, in this case, each time an operation reception that is permitted multiple times (an operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the period that has appeared up to that point in both the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2. The target change will be hidden, and it will be possible to easily recognize whether or not the operation reception has been performed properly. However, in this case, it is desirable that the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 start displaying at the same timing as each other (see FIG. 271 (e)). Further, it is desirable that the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are performed with the same periodic time.

Further, in the "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) or 6th E reception period (FIG. 271 etc.))", an operation is performed when the first operation means (for example, operation button 410) is operated. When the reception is made, the periodic change in the "reception period related periodicity display" is hidden, and in the "special multiple times allowable period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)), the first operation means. When the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) different from the above is operated, the operation is accepted, but the periodic change in the "reception period-related periodicity display" does not change with this as an opportunity. You may.

Further, when the sixth E reception period (FIG. 271 etc.) is generated as the "specific multiple times permissible period", the time required for one periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 is performed. Be the same as each other. On the other hand, in the special multiple-time permissible period (second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the time required for one periodic change of the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 is different from each other. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest the type of the reception period that is occurring through the relationship of the time required for the periodic change in the "reception period-related periodicity display". Even in the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), the time required for one periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 may be the same.

Further, when the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) is generated as the "specific multiple times permissible period", the display timings of the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 are different from each other. On the other hand, in the special multiple times permissible period (second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the display timings of the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 are the same. , It becomes possible to suggest the type of the reception period that has occurred through the relationship of the display timing of the "reception period-related periodicity display". Even in the 6th reception period (FIG. 271 and the like), the display timings of the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 may be different from each other.

Further, when the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) is generated as the "specific multiple times permissible period", the precursor effect display ZED is performed at the time of the occurrence, and the precursor effect display ZED is the first periodic display. Of the SH1 and the second periodic display SH2, only the first periodic display SH1 is displayed in a form that makes it difficult to see. More specifically, the precursor effect display ZED is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first periodic display SH1, but it is displayed as overlapping the front side of the second periodic display SH2. It is not displayed (it is not displayed at the position overlapping with the second periodic display SH2, or it is displayed behind the second periodic display SH2). According to such a configuration, the operation reception is properly performed by paying attention to either the first periodic display SH1 or the second periodic display SH2 depending on whether or not it is difficult to visually recognize in relation to the precursor effect display ZED. It will be possible to suggest whether or not it will be easier to recognize.

In addition, even when the sixth E reception period (FIG. 271 etc.) is generated as the "specific multiple times permissible period", the precursor effect display ZED is performed at the time of the occurrence, but the precursor effect display ZED is the first periodic display. It is desirable that both SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 are displayed in a form that makes it difficult to see. That is, in this case, the precursor effect display ZED is displayed so as to overlap the front side of both the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH1.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) and 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception is permitted multiple times ( Every time an operation is accepted that does not end the acceptance period), the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden in the "1st periodic display SH1", but it is hidden in the "2nd periodic display SH2". The periodic changes that had appeared up to were continued (see FIG. 253 (e)). In addition, in the "special multiple-time permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))", even if the operation reception that is permitted multiple times (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the "third periodicity" In both the "display SH3" and the "fourth periodic display SH4", the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point are not hidden and continue (FIG. 258 (e)). reference). Then, the "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" is until the end of the "specific multiple times permissible period". The staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of its occurrence is not made in the inaudible state (see FIG. By the time the "permissible rotation period" ends, the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of its occurrence is made in the inaudible state (see FIG. 258 (h)). That is, in this case, "reception when the operation is accepted" is determined by whether or not the staging sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is made in the inaudible state until the end of the reception period (valid period). By confirming the mode of the period-related periodicity display, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the operation reception is properly performed. " In particular, when the "specific multiple times permissible period" is generated not as the 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.) but as the 1st E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.), it is in an audible state at the time of occurrence. Even if the staging sound is not made inaudible, those who mistakenly gaze at the "second periodic display SH2" instead of the "first periodic display SH1" will be asked to accept the operation. Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not it has been done properly, it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

In addition, the "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example is a specific type of production sound (here, specific). BGM) is audibly output, but for the "special multiple times permissible period (second E reception period)", a specific type of staging sound (here, specific BGM) is audibly output. There may be a case where the sound is generated in the above case, and a case where the sound is generated while the specific type of effect sound (here, the specific BGM) is not audibly output. That is, in this case, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific type of staging sound (here, the specific BGM) is not audibly output, this is the "special multiple permissible period (second E reception period)". That is, it is suggested that the mode of the "reception period-related periodic display (third periodic display SH3, fourth periodic display SH4"" does not change when the operation reception is performed. On the other hand, when a "multiple permissible period" occurs while a specific type of staging sound (here, a specific BGM) is audibly output, this is a "specific multiple permissible period" and a "special multiple permissible period". Since it becomes difficult to recognize which of these is the case, it becomes possible to encourage the user to pay close attention to whether or not the mode of the "reception period-related periodicity display" changes when the operation reception is performed.

In this regard, the "specific multiple-time permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6th E-reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" ends when the specific multiple-time permissible period occurs. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the specific type of staging sound (here, specific BGM) may or may not be inaudible before the specific multiple permissible period occurs. However, in the "special multiple permissible period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))", the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the "special multiple permissible period" occurs. When the specific type of production sound (here, specific BGM) is made inaudible (the specific type of production sound is inaudible) before the "special multiple times allowable period" occurs depending on the type. When a special multiple permissible period occurs in the state of It may be.

According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, this is the "specific multiple permissible period" and the "special multiple permissible period". Since it becomes easier to recognize which of the "periods" it is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determination result (type of variation pattern).

When such a configuration is adopted, the specific multiple-time permissible period is set for the "specific multiple-time permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))". It is important that the mode (specific BGM) of the specific type of staging sound does not change according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time of occurrence. In this sense, with respect to the "specific multiple times permissible period", as in the above-mentioned production example, a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is always audible at the time when the "specific multiple times permissible period" occurs. In place of this, a specific type of staging sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible before the "specific multiple permissible period" occurs, and is specified. It may be possible to generate the effect sound of the type (specific BGM) only while it is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, for the "specific multiple times permissible period", the reception period of the type that can occur only while the production sound of the specific type (specific BGM) is in the audible state, and the production sound of the specific type (specific BGM). May include a type of acceptance period that can only occur while the is inaudible. Even with such a configuration, there is no change in the production sound (specific BGM) of the specific type being made inaudible or maintained in the audible state depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

In the "special multiple permissible period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))", a specific type is used according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the special multiple permissible period occurs. It goes without saying that the same mode is displayed as the post-reception display regardless of the mode of the effect sound (here, the specific BGM).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, when the "specific multiple times permissible period (first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.))" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed is set. When the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed differs from each other (see FIG. 253 (e)), but a "special multiple-time permissible period (second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.))" occurs. , The timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed are the same (see FIG. 258 (e)). That is, in this case, as the reception period in which the two types of periodic display appear, either the "specific multiple-time permissible period" or the "special multi-time permissible period" occurs depending on whether or not there is a difference in the display timing. You will be able to suggest what to do.

Further, in the sixth E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) according to the above-mentioned production example, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed are the same. The timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed may be different from each other. Then, on this basis, the sixth E reception period may be generated instead of the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) as the "specific multiple times permissible period". Even with such a configuration, as a reception period in which two types of periodic display appear, a "specific multiple-time allowance period" and a "special multiple-time allowance period" and "special multiple-time allowance period" are determined depending on whether or not there is a difference in the display timings. It will be possible to suggest which of the above will occur.

Further, the first periodic display SH1 may be displayed after the second periodic display SH2, or may be displayed before the second periodic display SH2. .. When the first periodic display SH1 is displayed before the second periodic display SH2, the periodic change is not started at the time of the display, and the timing at which the second periodic display is displayed or it is displayed. After that, the periodic change may be started. When the second periodic display SH2 is displayed before the first periodic display SH1, the periodic change is not started at the time of the display, and the timing at which the first periodic display is displayed or it is displayed. After that, the periodic change may be started. The timing at which the periodic display is displayed means the timing at which at least a part of the periodic display is displayed.

However, when the second periodic display SH2 is displayed before the first periodic display SH1, the periodic change of the second periodic display SH2 is started before the first periodic display is displayed. It is desirable that the first periodic display SH1 is displayed and the periodic change is started while the second periodic display SH2 is periodically changed. That is, in this case, in the first E reception period, while the periodic change of the second periodic display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is continued is performed, the first on the side where the periodic change is hidden. Since the periodic display SH1 will be started to be displayed, the second periodic display SH2 should be used as a criterion for determining whether or not the periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 has been hidden (interrupted). Will be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the reception period (3E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.), 4E reception period) in which only the image display that imitates the operation means that the operation reception is permitted only once is displayed. (FIG. 266, etc.)), when there is only one periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) and when two periodicity displays are displayed (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display). SH7) was added. That is, in this case, when there is only one periodic display (fifth periodic display SH5), it is suggested that the operation reception is allowed only once. On the other hand, when two periodic displays are displayed (6th periodic display SH6, 7th periodic display SH7), it is recognized whether the operation reception is permitted only once or multiple times. It becomes difficult and it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity in a tense atmosphere.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, the time required for one periodic change in the sixth periodic display (period E time) and the time required for one periodic change in the third periodic display (period E time). Since they are set at the same time, it becomes more difficult to recognize whether the operation reception is allowed only once or multiple times.

However, in the 4E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.), of the 6th periodic display SH6 and the 7th periodic display SH7, the 6th periodic display SH6 is also within the 1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.). It was decided to make a periodic change in a period E time that can appear, but for the 7th periodic display SH7, a periodic change is made in a period G time that does not appear within the 1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.).

In the above-mentioned production example, the cycle time of the 5th periodic display SH5 and the 6th periodic display SH6 and the periodic time of the 3rd periodic display SH3 are the same (cycle E time), but the 1st periodic display SH The period time of is shorter than that. The period time of the first periodic display SH is set to be earlier than that of the periodic display SH4 and SH7, which may indicate that a plurality of operation receptions are allowed. I have to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, when the "specific multiple times permissible period (first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.))" occurs, the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the period thereof. Although the timing at which the periodic change is started and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and the periodic change is started are different from each other, "a special multiple-time permissible period (second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)" )) ”, The timing when the third periodic display SH3 is displayed and the periodic change is started, and the timing when the fourth periodic display SH4 is displayed and the periodic change is started. Made to be the same as each other. That is, in this case, as the reception period in which the two types of periodic display appear, the "specific multiple-time allowance period" and the "special multiple-time allowance" are allowed depending on whether or not there is a difference in the timing at which those periodic changes are started. It will be possible to suggest which of the "periods" will occur.

Further, in the sixth E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) according to the above-mentioned effect example, the timing at which the first periodic display SH1 is displayed and the periodic change is started, and the second periodic display SH2 are displayed. The timing at which the periodic change is started is the same as the timing at which the first periodic display SH1 is displayed and the periodic change is started, and the timing at which the second periodic display SH2 is displayed and the period is displayed. The timing at which the target change is started may be different from each other. Then, on this basis, the sixth E reception period may be generated instead of the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) as the "specific multiple times permissible period". Even with such a configuration, as the reception period in which the two types of periodic display appear, the "specific multiple times permissible period" and "specific multiple times permissible period" and "specific multiple times permissible period" are determined depending on whether or not there is a difference in the timing at which those periodic changes are started. It will be possible to suggest which of the "special multiple tolerance periods" will occur.

Further, even if the first periodic display SH1 is displayed after the second periodic display SH2 and its periodic change is also started after the periodic change of the second periodic display SH1. Alternatively, it may be displayed before the second periodic display SH2 and its periodic change may be started before the periodic change of the second periodic display SH1.

Further, the first periodic display SH1 is displayed before the second periodic display SH2, but the periodic change is not started at the time of the display, and the second periodic display is displayed and the period is displayed. Periodic changes may be started at or after the timing at which the target changes are started. That is, in this case, in the first E reception period, while the periodic change of the second periodic display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is continued is performed, the first on the side where the periodic change is hidden. Since the periodic change of the periodic display SH1 is started, the second periodic display SH2 is used as a criterion for determining whether or not the periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 is hidden (interrupted). Can be used as. The timing at which the periodic display is displayed means the timing at which at least a part of the periodic display is displayed.

However, between the timing when the first periodic display SH1 is displayed and the timing when the periodic change is started and the timing when the second periodic display SH2 is displayed and the timing when the periodic change is started. There is no required configuration, and it may be set as appropriate.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the first periodicity is displayed when the "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" occurs. When SH1 is displayed, while another display (here, precursor effect display ZED) is displayed, the first periodicity is behind the other display (here, precursor effect display ZED). The display starts in the form that the display SH1 appears, but the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed behind the above-mentioned other display (here, the precursor effect display ZED), and is "special multiple times permissible". When the 3rd periodic display SH3 and the 4th periodic display SH4 are displayed when the period (2nd E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)) occurs, the 3rd periodic display SH3 and the 4th periodic display SH4 will be displayed. Is no longer displayed behind any other display when the display starts. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the "specific multiple-time tolerance period" or the "special multiple-time tolerance period" occurs relatively early when the periodic display starts to be displayed. become able to. Moreover, even when the "specific multiple times permissible period" occurs, a person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodic display SH2" instead of the "first periodic display SH1" is said to be the "first periodic display SH1". It is as if a "special multiple permissible period" has occurred because the "second periodic display SH2" is not displayed behind any other display at the time when the display is started. Since there is a possibility of misrecognition, it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (FIG. 271 etc.))" occurs, the first periodic display SH1 is used. The second periodic display SH2 is displayed while another display (here, the precursor staging display ZED) that can be displayed so as to overlap the front side is displayed, and the second periodic display SH2 is displayed. The display is made so as not to be difficult to see by the other display (here, the precursor effect display ZED). However, the aspect that is not obscured by another display means that the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed behind it by any other display, for example, its display position is different from that of another display. It may be displayed so as not to overlap.

The second periodic display SH2 changes periodically even in a situation where the precursory effect display ZED is displayed. The second periodic display SH2 may be displayed before the precursor effect display ZED, or may start its periodic change before the precursor effect display ZED is displayed. You may.

In the above-mentioned production example, the first E reception period, the second E reception period, the third E reception period, and the fourth E reception period may be sequentially generated within one fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the conditions of occurrence (timing of occurrence) and the display after reception are different from each other.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (FIGS. 272 to 274) according to the above-described modification, the “special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)” is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations. It is possible to display, and even if it is displayed in any of the plurality of display modes, the periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is shown in the first display mode (here, FIG. 272 (a)) among the plurality of display modes. When it is displayed in the above-mentioned mode), it can be changed to a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272 (e)), and the second display among the plurality of display modes is described above. When displayed in an embodiment (here, the embodiment shown in FIG. 273 (a)), a display embodiment different from the second display embodiment (here, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 272 (e) and (g)). Can be changed to. Then, the "special image display" is a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272 (a)) to the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272 (e)). ), The time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" changes (see FIG. 272), but the "special image display" is the second display mode (here, FIG. 273 (here, FIG. 273). When the display mode (the mode shown in a) is changed to a display mode different from the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIGS. 273 (e) and (g)), the time required for one periodic change is reached. When no change occurs (here, the embodiment shown in FIG. 273 (e)) and when there is a change in the time required for one periodic change (here, the embodiment shown in FIG. 273 (g)). I tried to have. According to such a configuration, the "special image display" recognizes whether or not the display mode has changed depending on whether the display mode changes from the first display mode or the display mode changes from the second display mode. Since the ease of use will be different, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

Further, the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272 (a)) and the second display mode (here, FIG. 273 (a)). ), Even if it is displayed in any of the modes), it is suggested that a big hit is obtained when the display mode changes. You will be able to improve your interest.

In particular, according to the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is shown in the second display mode (here, FIG. 273 (a)). If the display mode changes while the display mode is displayed, there is no change in the time required for the periodic change for one time (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273 (e)), and the cycle for one time. There is a case where the time required for the target change occurs (here, the embodiment shown in FIG. 273 (g)), but the degree of expectation is higher when the time required for one periodic change also changes. Suggested to be higher. That is, in this case, the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" appears in the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272 (a)) among the plurality of display modes. In this case (see FIG. 272 (a)), if the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change will always change, so it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. It will be expected.

Further, according to the above-described modification (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is shown in the first display mode (here, FIG. 272 (a)). Even if it is displayed in the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273 (a)), the display mode does not change (here, FIG. 272 (c) or FIG. 273). Since the aspect (c) shown in (c) is also provided, it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained. In this case, the special image display is subsequently hidden when a predetermined timing arrives without changing the display mode.

If there is a change in the time required for the periodic change, the display mode is changed in such a way that the outer shape (form) of the "special image display" is changed, and the time required for the periodic change is changed. If not, the display mode may be changed so that the outer shape (form) of the special image display does not change.

It is desirable that the special image display is displayed as an image display that suggests the degree of expectation of the symbol variation in the execution state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is the time required for one periodic change. When displayed in the second time (here, cycle B2 hours), the time required for one periodic change is displayed in the first time (here, cycle B1 hours) different from the second time. In some cases, when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the first time, the display mode of the "special image display" can be changed, and the display can be changed. When the aspect changes, there are cases where the time required for the periodic change of the "special image display" changes and cases where the time does not change (see FIG. 273). When the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for the periodic change of the above is the second time, the display mode of the special image display is not changed (see FIG. 274). According to such a configuration, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" is the first time (here, cycle B1 hour) and the second time (here, cycle B2 hours). It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the display mode may change depending on which of the two is displayed. Further, when the display is performed in the first time (here, cycle B1 hour), when the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change also changes, and the time changes. Since there are cases where the above does not occur and the degree of expectation differs between them, it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

It should be noted that the embodiment shown in FIG. 273 (a) in the “special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)” and FIG. 274 (here, the integrated image display IG) in the “special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)”. As for the mode shown in a), the display modes may be the same as long as the time required for one periodic change is different from each other.

Further, when the time required for one periodic change is the first time (cycle B1 time shown in FIG. 273 (a)), the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" When the display mode changes and the time required for one periodic change occurs (the mode shown in FIG. 273 (g)), the changed time is shown in the second time (FIG. 274 (a)). The cycle B2 hours) may be used. At this time, the display mode may be the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 274 (a).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 272 to 274), the time required for one periodic change is the first time (period B1 time shown in FIG. 273 (a)) and the "special image". When the display mode changes while the display (here, the integrated image display IG) is displayed, the time required for one periodic change does not change (in FIG. 273 (e)). (Aspect shown) and a case where a change occurs in the time (aspect shown in FIG. 273 (g)), and it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high in either case. In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, since the increase in the degree of expectation suggested when the time required for one periodic change also occurs is larger, the display of "special image display" is displayed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the aspect changes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is the time required for one periodic change. When displayed in the first time (here, cycle B1 hour), the time required for one periodic change is displayed in a third time (here, cycle B3 hours) different from the first time. In some cases, when the display mode of the special image display changes (see, for example, FIGS. 273 (e) and (g)), the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point are hidden (for example, FIG. 273). (D)), and then the periodic change of the special image display appears (see, for example, FIGS. 273 (e) and (g)).

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) changes, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden, and then the special image display is performed. Since the periodic change of the image appears, it is expected that when the display mode of the special image display changes, it is expected to attract interest as to whether or not the time required for the periodic change also changes. become.

In particular, in the modification shown in FIG. 273, when the display mode of the "special image display" changes, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" changes (for example, FIG. 273 (for example,). Since there are cases where there is no change in the time (see, for example, FIG. 273 (g)), there are cases where the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is (even if it does not change). By hiding it (once), it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 273 (a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273 (e), or the mode shown in FIG. 273 (a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273 (g). In the case, a plurality of non-display times (first non-display) are used as the non-display time from the time when the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden until the periodic change of "special image display" is started again. Time, second non-display time) may be prepared. Then, even when the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden over any of the first non-display time and the second non-display time, the embodiment shown in FIG. 273 (e) can appear. It is desirable to have sex and the possibility of the aspects shown in FIG. 273 (g) appearing. In this respect, the expectation that a big hit will be obtained differs depending on whether the periodic change is hidden only for the first hidden time and the periodic change is hidden only for the second hidden time. It is more desirable to do. That is, in this case, if the non-display time on the side with a high degree of expectation is completed, it can be expected that the mode on the side with a higher degree of expectation (the mode shown in FIG. 273 (g)) will appear. Therefore, it is expected that the game will be improved.

Further, even if the mode does not change from the mode shown in FIG. 273 (a) (or FIG. 272 (a)), the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is temporarily hidden (FIG. FIG. 273 (b) (or see FIG. 272 (b)), the display mode of the "special image display" changes depending on the length of time that the periodic changes that have appeared so far are hidden. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not, and it becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

As described above, "hiding the periodic change" may be made to hide this by "hiding the special image display", or another image may be "special image". By displaying it so that it overlaps from the front side of "Display" so that it cannot be seen, or by temporarily ending the periodic change that has appeared until then and displaying it statically, although the display of the special image display continues. It is possible to achieve it.

Further, as a method of "restarting the periodic change", the "special image display" may be displayed in a visible state again, and at the same time, the periodic change may be started again, or the "special image display" may be displayed again. May be displayed again in a visible state and then the periodic change may be restarted later, or the periodic change may be interrupted (finished) by using the "special image display". The change may be initiated again. In this respect, even when the aspect changes from one aspect (for example, FIG. 273 (a) → (e), FIG. 273 (a) → (g), etc.) to another aspect, the “special image display” is not. If the time until the periodic change appears again is longer than the time from the display to the display of the "special image display" (the periodic change is delayed again in the form of delaying the redisplay of the "special image display"). When the time from when the "special image display" is hidden until the "special image display" is displayed and the time until the periodic change reappears are the same ("special image display"). It is desirable that there is a redisplay of "and the resumption of periodic change at the same timing). According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" changes, the display mode after the change and the periodic change can be recognized at the same time, and the display mode after the change can be recognized, but the cycle. Since there are cases where it is not possible to recognize whether or not the target change has changed, it becomes possible to suitably improve the effectability even when the same mode of change occurs.

In the above-mentioned production example (FIGS. 253 to 274), the timing at which each reception period occurs may be within the period during which the reach state is not formed, or within the period during which the reach state is formed. May be good.

[Acceptance period with special color rendering]
As illustrated and described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected staging (such as the preview staging) will be performed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect of the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol (special symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, the player is given a privilege. It will be possible to execute the jackpot game as a game and the transition to the high probability game state.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the variation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition). (When is established), it is possible to generate a reception allowable period (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then), it is possible to generate a reception allowable period (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the acceptance allowable period (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance allowance period (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance allowance period (validity period) that occurs when the symbol staging based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as an effect (display after reception, output sound after reception, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to generate a reception allowable period in which the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation), and within the reception allowable period. When the movement (operation) by the player is accepted in the above, it is possible to cause a post-reception change (display change, reception output sound, staging light emission, etc.) according to the type of the reception allowable period that has occurred. ..

Further, in the acceptance acceptance period, it can appear only when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is permitted (acceptance acceptance period) or the operation acceptance is permitted (acceptance acceptance period). The operation-related display can be displayed. As such an operation-related display, for example, an object (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player is often displayed as a simulated image display expressed as an image, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Any image display that always gives the player an operation opportunity when displayed. The "operation-related display (image display)" has a plurality of modes having different expectations, and one of the plurality of modes may be selectively displayed.

Further, in the acceptance acceptance period, it is possible to display the remaining time display suggesting the remaining time that the player is allowed to accept the operation (operation). Such a remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with the passage of time. As at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of embodiments (for example, the rate of decrease in the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operating means, etc.) are prepared, and these embodiments are prepared. It may be executed by either of. In this case, different expectations (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) may be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when the acceptance allowance period occurs, it is possible to execute a precursory effect that suggests that the player is given an action opportunity (suggests that the acceptance allowance period will occur) before this. Has been done. The precursor effect is executed by, for example, an effect display on the effect display device 1600 and an output of a corresponding effect sound.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable period (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare for it. Further, regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination, a variation pattern may be provided in which a reception allowable period (valid period) is generated at a predetermined timing before the SP reach is reached.

Further, the "operation (operation) by the player" to be detected, including the above-mentioned examples and the later-described examples, is a player such as "operation button 410" or "sword decoration body 5001". It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pushing motion or sword pulling motion) by the touch sensor, "contact motion by the player to a specific part" that is the detection target by the touch sensor, and "inside the specific space" that is the detection target by the non-contact sensor. It means that the movement by the player in the above is also included. In short, it suffices to have one or a plurality of receiving means (operation units) for receiving actions by the player (pressing action, sword pulling action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

By the way, as the acceptance allowable period (valid period) according to this embodiment, the type such as the display after reception and the output sound after reception, the presence / absence of output are different, the audible output status of BGM is different, and the reception concerned. Various types of acceptance allowance period, such as the number of times that operation acceptance is allowed differs within the allowance period (valid period), and whether or not the automatic repeated hit function or automatic button function is enabled is different. (Validity period) is prepared.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special effects during the plurality of acceptance allowance periods, so that the effectability when the acceptance allowance period occurs is enhanced. Or to maintain a good sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have all of these configurations, and for example, even if only one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, the hobby of the game is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of water, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary for obtaining further effects, or it is applicable to another configuration (). The configuration described as (preferably applied) may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment interest related to the acceptance period.

[Structure 1-E]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, even if the operation by the player is not performed, the same post-acceptance change as when the operation by the player is performed can occur. (Automatic button function). On top of this, it is possible to generate a plurality of operation permissible periods in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) are permissible. If either the operation on the first operation unit or the operation on the second operation unit is performed in the plurality of operation allowable period, a change after reception can be generated according to the type of the side on which the operation is performed. .. In addition, it is possible to display an image display that imitates the operation target by the player.

In this respect, in the above-mentioned multiple operation permissible period, the operation target may not be displayed even though the operation reception is permitted. The "first operation unit" and the "second operation unit" related to the configuration 1-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit as the "first operation unit" and the "second operation unit" related to other configurations, or may mean different operation units. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" as the operation unit having another name related to another configuration.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is not performed, the same post-acceptance change as when the operation by the player is performed may occur, and then the first It is possible to generate a plurality of operation permissible periods in which both the operation reception for the operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit can be permitted, and in the multiple operation permissible period, the operation target is the operation target even though the operation reception is permitted. The display may not be displayed. That is, in this case, even if there is a person who cannot understand the complicated directing property and cannot perform the operation properly, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-E" is adopted, at least a first multiple operation allowable period and a second multiple operation allowable period are prepared as the multiple operation allowable period, and the first plurality of operations are allowed. In the operation permissible period, both the first image display that imitates the first operation unit and the second image display that imitates the second operation unit are displayed as the image display, and in the second plurality of operation permissible period, the second image display is displayed. The 1st image display may be displayed and the 2nd image display may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, in the second plurality of operation allowable period, one of the two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) (second operation unit) in which operation reception is permitted is allowed. It is possible to provide a novel effect such that only) is concealed that it is in the reception acceptance state, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment. The "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 1-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-E. .. Therefore, it may mean the same permissible period as the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" related to the other configurations, or it means different permissible periods. May be. Further, it may mean the same "allowable period" as the allowable period of another name related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", the first operation unit on the side targeted for the image display and the second operation unit on the side not targeted for the image display are used. Of these, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) is enabled only for the operation unit on the side targeted for image display, but in the "first multiple operation allowable period", the first operation unit and the first operation unit (2) Even though all of the operation units are targeted for image display, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) may not be enabled for any of the operation units. According to such a configuration, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", the automatic reception function (automatic button function) can be enabled only for the operation unit on the side targeted for image display. As a result, it can be expected that it will be more difficult to recognize that the second operation unit was in a state where the operation can be accepted and kept secret. On the other hand, in the "first multiple operation allowable period", although the first operation unit and the second operation unit are both targeted for image display, automatic reception is performed for any of the operation units. Since the function (automatic button function) is not enabled, even when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are targeted for image display, the difficulty of playing the game becomes high, which makes the player feel nervous. It can be expected to be suitably maintained.

Further, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", "the second multiple operation allowable period occurs" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the second multiple operation allowable period occurs. The specific type of staging sound is not put into the suppressed mode or the inaudible state, or is not put into the suppressed mode or the inaudible state before the operation is performed. However, in the first plurality of operation allowable period, the first Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the multiple operation allowable period of It may be put into a state, or it may not be put into a suppressive or inaudible state. " According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "second multiple operation allowable period" are given when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easy to recognize which of these is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given.

Regarding the "second multiple operation allowable period", the mode of the specific type of staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the second multiple operation allowable period occurs. It is desirable not to. For example, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", the staging sound of a specific type may be made inaudible before the "second multiple operation allowable period" occurs. At the time when the "second plurality of operation allowable period" occurs, the effect sound of a specific type may be made audible without fail.

In addition, in order to make it easy to recognize which of the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "second multiple operation allowable period" is given when the operation opportunity is given, the "first multiple operation allowable period" is used. It is desirable that the same change occurs as a change after the reception when the operation is accepted, regardless of the mode of the production sound of the specific type according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the "first multiple operation permissible period", the display after reception is displayed so that it appears to overlap the effect symbol on the front side of the effect symbol regardless of whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated (change after reception). On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", when the second operation unit on the side that is not the target of the image display is operated, it overlaps with the staging symbol on the front side. The post-reception display (one of the changes after reception) is displayed so that it can be seen, and when the first operation unit on the side targeted for image display is operated, it appears to overlap the staging pattern behind it. The display after reception (one of the changes after reception) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation of the first operation unit on the side targeted for the image display in the "second multiple operation allowable period" is behind the effect symbol. It can be expected to suggest that there may have been an operation unit that was concealed in a state where operations could be accepted by seeing the appearance of overlapping on the side.

In addition, it is an operation that conceals that only one (second operation unit) of the two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) in which the operation reception is permitted is in the reception acceptance state. As the permissible period, apart from the second permissible period for multiple operations, a third permissible period for multiple operations may be further allowed to occur (under different generation conditions). Then, in the second multi-operation permissible period, the staging sound of a specific type is always generated after being in a suppressed mode or inaudible state before its occurrence, whereas in the third multi-operation permissible period, it is always specified. The type of effect sound may be generated while being output in a non-suppressed manner.

In this case, as for the "third multiple operation permissible period", as in the "second multiple operation permissible period", when the second operation unit on the side not targeted for the image display is operated, the staging symbol is displayed. The display after reception (one of the changes after reception) is displayed so that it can be seen overlapping on the front side of the image, and when the first operation unit on the side targeted for image display is operated, the effect symbol is displayed. The display after reception (one of the changes after reception) may be displayed so that it can be seen overlapping on the back side.

Further, regarding the "first multiple operation allowable period", "second multiple operation allowable period", and "third multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 1-E, the first operation unit and the second operation are performed. It is desirable to display different post-reception displays depending on which part is operated.

Further, regarding the "second multiple operation allowable period" and the "third multiple operation allowable period", the state in which the operation can be accepted is maintained as compared with the "first multiple operation allowable period". It is desirable to set the time short. That is, in this case, the player needs to find out within a limited time (effective time) that the operation unit (here, the second operation unit) different from the first operation unit is kept secret. It can be expected to occur and to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. On the other hand, it is too distracting to know whether or not the operation unit (here, the second operation unit) different from the first operation unit is in a concealed state, so that the operation can be performed within the effective time. Even if it cannot be done, the automatic button function is enabled and the same change after reception occurs as when the first operation unit is operated, so that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. Can be expected. Also, regarding the "first multiple operation allowable period", a relatively long time will be set as the valid period, but as a compensation, the automatic button function is not enabled, so there is a sense of tension. Can be expected to be suitably maintained.

[Structure 2-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are either. It is possible to generate an allowable multiple operation allowable period, and when either the operation for the first operation unit or the operation for the second operation unit is performed in the multiple operation allowable period, the type of the side where the operation reception is performed is selected. It is possible to display the corresponding display after reception. In addition, it is possible to display an image display that imitates the operation target by the player, and at least a predetermined plurality of operation allowable period is prepared as the type of the multiple operation allowable period.

In this respect, in a predetermined multiple operation permissible period, it is possible that only one operation reception is permissible for the first operation unit and a plurality of operation receptions are permissible for the second operation unit. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit that can allow multiple operation receptions in a predetermined multiple operation permissible period, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed. The operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted even while the display after reception is displayed. Then, when the operation is performed on the first operation unit while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit is displayed in the predetermined plurality of operation allowable period, the operation is performed. The post-reception display according to the above is displayed, and the post-reception display (post-reception display according to the operation performed on the second operation unit) that has been displayed up to that point is not displayed. I am trying to be. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "predetermined multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 2-E are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-E. It's just a name. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit and operation permissible period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "predetermined plurality of operation permissible period" related to other configurations. It may mean different operation units and operation allowable periods. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

According to such a configuration, the operation is performed on the second operation unit within a predetermined plurality of operation allowable period in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit are permitted. If an operation is performed on the first operation unit while the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed and displayed until then. Since the display after reception (display after reception according to the operation performed on the second operation unit) is hidden, it is displayed according to the operation for any of the above operation units. It will be easier to recognize whether it is displayed after reception, and it can be expected to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-E" is adopted, the first multiple operation allowable period (corresponding to the above-mentioned "predetermined multiple operation allowable period") and the second multiple operation allowable period are classified as the types of the multiple operation allowable period. It is decided to prepare at least a multiple operation allowable period, and in both the first multiple operation allowable period and the second multiple operation allowable period, the operation is performed on the second operation unit which can allow multiple operation receptions. When this is done, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the operation reception for the first operation unit may be acceptable even while the post-reception display is displayed. Then, in this case, the operation is performed on the first operation unit while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit is displayed in the "first multiple operation allowable period". Then, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-reception display (after the reception corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit) that has been displayed up to that point as a trigger of the operation is displayed. Display) is hidden, and while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit in the "second multiple operation allowable period" is displayed, the first operation unit is displayed. When the operation is performed, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-reception display (corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit) that has been displayed until then is triggered by the operation. (Display after reception) may not be hidden.

According to such a configuration, it was displayed until then when the game strategy was changed from "a state in which the second operation unit is operated a plurality of times" to "an operation on the first operation unit". When the display after reception (display after reception according to the operation performed on the second operation unit) is hidden (first multiple operation allowable period) and when it is not hidden (second) Since there is a multiple operation permissible period), it can be expected that the effectability when changing the game strategy is enhanced and the tension is appropriately maintained.

The "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 2-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-E. .. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" related to the other configurations, or mean different operation permissible periods. It may be something to do. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 3-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are permitted. A first operation that can generate a plurality of possible operation allowable periods and can appear only when the operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. The related display can be displayed, and the second operation-related display that can appear only when the operation reception for the second operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted is displayed. It is possible.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 has at least a first multiple operation allowable period and a second multiple operation allowable period as a plurality of operation allowable period, and the first multiple operation allowable period and the second multiple operation allowable period are prepared. Since both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display can be displayed during the period, it can be expected that the gaming interest is preferably maintained. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period" and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E are the same as those of the configuration 3-E. It is just a name used to explain the technical idea. Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to other configurations, respectively. It may mean that the operation unit and the operation permissible period are different from each other. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-E" is adopted, in the "first multiple operation allowable period", the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are both displayed. Make sure that the operation reception for the operation unit is acceptable and that the operation reception for the second operation unit is acceptable. On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", the operation reception to the first operation unit is permitted while only the first operation-related display is displayed among the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display. It is possible and the operation reception for the second operation unit is acceptable, but if the operation reception for the second operation unit is made under the circumstances, the operation reception for the second operation unit is related. While both the display and the second operation-related display are displayed, the operation reception for the first operation unit is acceptable, and the operation reception for the second operation unit is acceptable. You may.

According to such a configuration, only one (second operation unit) of the two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) in which operation reception is permitted is in the reception acceptance state. Even if there is an operation permissible period to keep the secret, if you try to operate the operation part on the side to be kept secret, the secret state will be canceled, so the hobby of the game is maintained favorably. Will be expected to do. In addition, as the "operation-related display", for example, an object (operation means) to be operated by a player is often displayed as an image display expressed as an image, but this is not limited to this. As described above, the image display may be such that the player is always given an operation opportunity when the image is displayed.

[Structure 4-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are permitted. A first operation that can generate a plurality of possible operation allowable periods and can appear only when the operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. The related display can be displayed, and the second operation-related display that can appear only when the operation reception for the second operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted is displayed. It is possible.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 prepares at least a specific multiple operation allowable period as a plurality of operation allowable period, and in the specific multiple operation allowable period, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, the operation is performed. As one of the changes after reception according to the above, the duplicate display after reception is performed so that both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are difficult to visually recognize. As a result, the specific plurality of operation permissible period in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit can be permitted has ended only by performing the operation for the first operation unit. It becomes possible to suggest this to the player. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 4-E are names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-E. It's just that. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit and operation permissible period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific multiple operation permissible period" related to other configurations, respectively. It may mean a different operation unit or an operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-E" is adopted, a special multiple operation allowable period is further prepared in addition to the specific multiple operation allowable period as the type of the multiple operation allowable period. When an operation is accepted for the first operation unit during the multiple operation allowable period, a special post-acceptance effect display suggesting the degree of expectation that a predetermined result is obtained is displayed as a post-acceptance change, and the first operation is performed. Of the related display and the second operation-related display, only the first operation-related display is difficult to see, and the post-acceptance duplicate display is executed. However, the post-reception duplicate display corresponding to the special multiple operation permissible period may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode (expectation degree) as the special post-reception effect display.

According to such a configuration, in the special multi-operation allowable period, the image display is different from the special post-reception effect display suggesting the degree of expectation that a predetermined result is obtained, and the operation-related display is visually recognized. Regarding the "duplicate display after reception" displayed to make it difficult, the "first operation-related display" among the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display may be displayed so as to be difficult to see. Since the "second operation-related display" is not displayed so as to be difficult to see, the special post-reception effect display is the "first operation unit" on the side where the "operation-related display" is difficult to see. It becomes possible to preferably suggest that it is caused by the operation on. On top of this, the post-reception duplicate display corresponding to a specific multiple operation permissible period is always executed in the same display mode, but the post-reception duplicate display corresponding to the special multiple operation permissible period is a special post-reception effect. Since the display mode is different depending on the display mode (expectation level), the jackpot expectation level is suitable just by looking at the "duplicate display after reception" to confirm which operation was caused. You will be able to recognize it. The "special multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 4-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special multiple operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 5-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. Then, the display is designed to imitate the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the operation permissible period for the pachinko machine 1, when the operation unit is kept in the operated state, the operation reception may be performed only once or the operation reception may be performed multiple times. Therefore, it can be expected that the pachinko game will be improved through such diverse effects.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 5-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as the type of the operation allowable period, and a plurality of operation receptions are permitted in the specific operation allowable period. As possible operation units, at least a specific period first operation unit and a specific period second operation unit may be set. Then, when the first operation unit is maintained in the operated state for a specific period, the operation reception is performed a plurality of times, but even if the second operation unit is maintained in the operated state for a specific period, the operation reception is performed a plurality of times. It may not be done.

According to such a configuration, even in an operation unit that can accept a plurality of operation receptions, the so-called automatic continuous striking function may not be enabled, so that a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained. Can be expected. The "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 5-E are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-E. It's just a name. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit and operation permissible period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", and "specific operation permissible period" related to other configurations. However, they may mean different operation units and operation permissible periods. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

In this case, as a type of operation permissible period, a special operation permissible period is further prepared in addition to the specific operation permissible period, and in the special operation permissible period, as an operation unit capable of accepting multiple operations. , The special period first operation unit and the special period second operation unit may be set at least. Then, even if either the first operation unit in the special period or the second operation unit in the special period is maintained in the operated state, the operation reception may not be performed a plurality of times.

According to such a configuration, even if there are a plurality of operation units that can accept multiple operations, the so-called automatic continuous striking function is effective for any of the operation units depending on the type of operation permissible period. Since it may not be converted, it can be expected to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. The "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 5-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

When the "configuration 5-E" is adopted, the "special period first operation unit" and the "special period second operation unit" are the "specific period first operation unit" and the "specific period second operation unit". It may be provided as the same operation unit as any of the above. For example, one of the special period first operation unit and the special period second operation unit may be the same as the specific period second operation unit. Further, the other of the special period first operation unit and the special period second operation unit may be those that are allowed to accept operations even during the specific operation allowable period.

[Structure 6-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and reception is performed when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period. Post-change can occur. In addition, it is possible to display an image display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of the operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, an operation unit that allows a plurality of operation receptions is set. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the changes after reception, the above-mentioned periodic change that has appeared on the image display of the operation unit is hidden or hidden. Since it is made difficult to see by another image display, it is suitable for the player that the operation is accepted while the image display is displayed even after the operation is performed. You will be able to suggest to. The "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 6-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 6-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and the "specific operation allowable period" is performed multiple times. An operation unit that allows the operation reception of the operation unit is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, it appears as one of the changes after the reception on the image display that imitates the operation unit. The periodic change that had been done is hidden, or the image display is hidden, and in the "special operation allowable period", an operation unit that allows multiple operation receptions is set. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point on the image display that imitates the operation unit is not hidden, and the periodic change is continued. May be good.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation unit that allows multiple operation receptions, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is not displayed on the image display that imitates the operation unit. The operation reception is properly performed because there are cases where the image display is hidden or the periodic change is not hidden and is continued. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it can be expected to maintain a favorable feeling of tension. The "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 6-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 7-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when an operation for the operation unit is performed in the operation permissible period, a change after reception is performed. Can occur. In addition, it is possible to display an image display that imitates the operation unit.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the image display can be displayed so that the periodic change appears, but the case where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit and the case where the periodic change appears. Is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by various effects.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 7-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the operation allowable period, and a plurality of "specific operation allowable periods" are used. The operation reception for the first operation unit in the specific period and the operation reception for the second operation unit in the specific period different from the first operation unit in the specific period are at least acceptable, and "special". In the "operation permissible period", the operation reception for the special period first operation unit, which allows multiple operation receptions, and the operation reception for the special period second operation unit different from the special period first operation unit. At least it may be acceptable. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period", the image display that imitates the first operation unit in the specific period is displayed so that the periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, and in the "special operation permissible period". The image display of the first operation unit during the special period may be displayed so that the periodic change appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, the time required for periodic change differs depending on the type of operation permissible period and the type of operation target, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by various effects. Will be done. The "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 7-E. "" And "Special operation permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operation unit", the "specific period second operation unit", the "special period first operation unit", the "special period second operation unit", the "specific operation allowable period" and the "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations The "special operation permissible period" may mean the same operation unit or operation permissible period, or may mean a different operation unit or operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

Further, the specific period first operation unit in the "specific operation allowable period" may be the same operation unit as the special period second operation unit in the "special operation allowable period". However, in this case, even though the first operation unit in the specific period and the second operation unit in the special period are the same operation unit, in the "specific operation allowable period", the image display that imitates the first operation unit in the specific period is displayed. It is displayed so that the periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, and in the "special operation allowable period", the image display that imitates the second operation unit of the special period is displayed in a time unit in which the periodic change is longer than the predetermined time unit. It is desirable to display the display so that it appears (the cycle time may be the same as that of the modeled image display of the first operation unit during the special period). According to such a configuration, even if the operation target (operation unit) is the same, the time required for the periodic change differs depending on the type of the generated "operation allowable period", so that the "operation" is performed. It will be possible to greatly differ the directing performance as the "allowable period" according to the type, and it can be expected that this will improve the game entertainment.

[Structure 8-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation (image display means).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 prepares at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as the types of the operation allowable period, and both the predetermined operation allowable period and the specific operation allowable period are displayed by the image display means. There is an operation unit that is subject to the above and is allowed to accept multiple operations, but when an operation is performed on the operation unit within a predetermined operation allowable period and when the operation unit is operated during a specific operation allowable period On the other hand, it is expected that the game will be improved because different sounds can be output as the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after the reception, depending on the operation. It should be noted that the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 8-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 8-E" is adopted, the operation unit is subject to display by the image display means and is allowed to accept a plurality of operations in the "predetermined operation allowable period". When the operation is performed, the output sound after the operation is output as one of the changes after the reception, whereas in the "specific operation allowable period", it is targeted for display by the image display means and is displayed multiple times. When an operation is performed on the operation unit for which operation reception is acceptable, there are cases where the post-operation output sound is output and cases where the post-operation output sound is not output as one of the changes after reception. good.

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible period", even if an operation is performed on an operation unit that is targeted for display by the image display means and is permissible for receiving a plurality of operations. Since there are cases where the output sound after the operation is output and cases where the output sound after the operation is not output, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been performed properly, and the tension is appropriately maintained. Can be expected.

[Structure 9-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 prepares at least a specific operation permissible period as a type of operation permissible period, and in the specific operation permissible period, the operation reception is only allowed and maintained in the operated state a plurality of times. If there is an operation unit that can be operated multiple times in, and the operation unit is maintained in the operated state, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after reception, is output at predetermined time intervals. When the operation unit is operated multiple times, the output sound after the operation can be output each time the operation is performed. It is expected that this will preferably suggest that the operation reception is properly performed even when the operation unit is continuously maintained in the operated state, as in the case where the operation is performed multiple times. Will be done. The "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 9-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 9-E" is adopted, at least a "specific operation allowable period" and a "special operation allowable period" are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and the "specific operation allowable period" is used. Then, there is an operation unit in which the operation reception can be performed multiple times only by allowing the operation reception multiple times and maintaining the operated state, and if the operation unit is continuously maintained in the operated state, after the reception. When a post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes, is output at predetermined time intervals and a plurality of operations are performed on the operation unit (for example, at intervals later than the predetermined time), the operation is performed. The output sound may be output after the operation each time it is performed. On the other hand, in the special operation permissible period, there is an operation unit in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times, but the operation reception is not performed multiple times even if the operation reception is maintained, and the operation unit is operated. Even if it is maintained, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after reception, is not output at predetermined time intervals, and the operation unit is notified multiple times (for example, at intervals slower than the predetermined time). Even when the operation of is performed, the output sound may or may not be output after the operation when the operation is performed.

According to such a configuration, there is an operation unit in which the so-called automatic continuous striking function is not enabled during the special operation allowable period, and even if the operation unit is operated, the output sound after the operation is performed when the operation is performed. Since there are cases where is output and cases where is not output, it can be expected that it is difficult to recognize whether the operation is properly accepted and the tension is appropriately maintained. The "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 9-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 10-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to display an image display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, in the operation allowable period of the pachinko machine 1, first, when the periodic change of the image display is displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and when the periodic change of the image display is longer than the predetermined time. Changed to be displayed so that it appears in units. Then, on this basis, there is a case where the periodic change of the image display appears in a predetermined time unit in the operation allowable period, and a time unit in which the periodic change of the image display is longer than the predetermined time unit in the operation allowable period. Regardless of whether it is displayed as appearing in, when an operation is performed on the operation unit corresponding to the image display among a plurality of operation units, the post-operation output is one of the post-acceptance changes. Since the sound can be output, it can be expected to suggest that the operation reception is properly performed.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 10-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and the "specific operation allowable period" is an image. The periodic change of the display is displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and when the operation unit corresponding to the image display is operated, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, may be output. .. On the other hand, in the "special operation allowable period", the periodic change of the image display is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, and when the operation unit corresponding to the image display is operated, the change after reception is performed. The post-operation output sound, which is one of the above, may be output, and the post-operation output sound may not be output.

According to such a configuration, when the periodic change of the image display is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is output. Since there are cases where the output sound is not output after the operation, it can be expected that a feeling of tension as to whether the operation reception has been performed properly is imparted. The "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 10-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 11-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is acceptable. Further, even if the operation for the operation unit is not performed within the operation permissible period, it is possible to execute the same processing that causes a change after reception as when the operation is performed (automatic reception execution means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period", there is an operation unit that is a target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (a target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and the operation reception can be permitted a plurality of times, and the operation unit has an operation unit. On the other hand, when the operation is performed by the player, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after reception, is output as a specific sound. On the other hand, during the special operation permissible period, there is an operation unit that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times. On the other hand, when the operation is performed by the player, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after reception, can be output as a special sound different from the above-mentioned specific sound. Through such an aspect of the output sound after the operation, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the processing is to be performed by the automatic reception execution means, so that it can be expected that the game entertainment taste is suitably maintained. The "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 11-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 11-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and the "specific operation allowable period" is automatically accepted. One of the changes after reception when the player operates the operation unit that is the target of processing by the execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times. The output sound after the operation may be output as a specific sound. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", the player is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times. When the operation is performed by, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after reception, may be output as a special sound different from the specific sound, or the post-operation output sound itself may not be output. You may. According to such a configuration, the condition for outputting the output sound after the operation differs between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, so that it can be expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

In this case, the "operation unit that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and the operation reception can be allowed multiple times" during the specific operation permissible period and the "process by the automatic reception execution means" during the special operation permissible period The "operation unit that does not have and can be allowed to be operated multiple times" may be the same operation unit or may be a different operation unit.

Further, for example, the "operation unit that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times" in the special operation allowable period is set as the operation unit that is the operation target even in the specific operation allowable period. It may be what is done. However, the "operation unit that is not the target of processing by the automatic operation reception execution means and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times" during the special operation allowable period is set as the operation unit that is the operation target even during the specific operation allowable period. If so, make sure that the post-operation output sound is output when the operation is performed, or do not even output the post-operation output sound when the operation is performed. Is desirable (not a required configuration). Regardless of which configuration is adopted (for example, even if the post-operation output sound is not output when the operation is performed), the post-operation output sound is output. Since the conditions differ between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, it can be expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

[Structure 12-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. Further, when the operation permissible period occurs, it is possible to audibly output a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is in a permissible state or the operation reception is in a permissible state. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of the operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, the operation reception for the specific period first operation unit and the operation reception for the specific period second operation unit are provided. The operation reception is at least acceptable. Then, when an operation is performed on either the specific period first operation unit or the specific period second operation unit while the reception allowable sound is audibly output in the specific operation allowable period, the operation is performed with this as an opportunity. The reception permissible sound is made inaudible. This makes it possible to preferably suggest that the operation reception is properly performed regardless of whether the first operation unit for the specific period or the second operation unit for the specific period is operated.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 12-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and the "specific operation allowable period" is a specific period. The operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit can be at least acceptable, and the reception allowable sound is audibly output for a specific period during the specific operation allowable period. When either the operation reception for the first operation unit or the operation reception for the second operation unit is performed for a specific period, the reception permissible sound may be made inaudible. On the other hand, in the "special operation allowable period", the operation reception for the first operation unit of the special period and the operation reception for the second operation unit of the special period can be at least acceptable, and the special operation allowable period. When the operation reception for the second operation unit is performed during the special period while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, the reception permissible sound is not put into an inaudible state as a trigger, and the special operation permissible sound. When an operation reception is performed for the first operation unit during the special period while the reception allowable sound is audibly output during the period, the reception allowable sound may be made in an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, the condition for making the reception allowable sound inaudible differs between the specific operation allowable period and the special operation allowable period, so that it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained. sell. The "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 12-E. , And the "special operation permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operation unit", the "specific period second operation unit", the "special period first operation unit", the "special period second operation unit", and the "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations, And may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "special operation allowable period", or may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as the operation unit and the operation allowable period of another name.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "special period first operation unit" or the "special period second operation unit" of the special operation allowable period. It may be different from any of them.

Further, the "specific period second operation unit" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "special period first operation unit" or the "special period second operation unit" of the special operation allowable period, and either of them may be used. It may be different.

Further, the special period first operation unit (or the special period second operation unit) may be capable of accepting operations even during the specific operation allowable period.

[Structure 13-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. Further, when the operation permissible period occurs, it is possible to audibly output a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is in a permissible state or the operation reception is in a permissible state. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permissible period and a predetermined operation permissible period are prepared as the types of the operation permissible period, and in the "specific operation permissible period", the operation reception for the first operation unit in the specific period is specified. The operation reception for the second operation unit during the period can be at least acceptable, and in the "predetermined operation allowable period", the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit for the predetermined period Is at least acceptable, so that the production can be advanced in a similar manner even though the types are different in the specific operation allowable period and the predetermined operation allowable period. The "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined period first operation unit", "predetermined period second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 13-E. , And the "predetermined operation permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operation unit", the "specific period second operation unit", the "predetermined period first operation unit", the "predetermined period second operation unit", and the "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations, And may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "predetermined operation allowable period", or may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as the operation unit and the operation allowable period of another name.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 13-E" is adopted, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", at least the operation reception for the first operation unit for the predetermined period and the operation reception for the second operation unit for the predetermined period are permissible. While the reception allowable sound is audibly output during the predetermined operation allowable period, either the operation reception for the first operation unit or the operation reception for the second operation unit for the predetermined period is performed. However, the reception allowable sound may not be made inaudible by taking this as an opportunity. On the other hand, in the "specific operation allowable period", the operation reception for the first operation unit in the specific period and the operation reception for the second operation unit in the specific period can be at least acceptable, and the specific operation allowable period. If the operation reception is performed for the first operation unit for a specific period while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound will not be made inaudible as a trigger, but the reception allowable sound will not be made inaudible. (2) When an operation reception is performed for the operation unit, the reception permissible sound may be made inaudible. According to such a configuration, the conditions for making the reception allowable sound inaudible differ between the predetermined operation allowable period and the specific operation allowable period, so that it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained. sell.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "predetermined period first operation unit" or the "predetermined period second operation unit" of the predetermined operation allowable period. It may be different from any of them.

Further, the "specific period second operation unit" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "predetermined period first operation unit" or the "predetermined period second operation unit" of the predetermined operation allowable period, and either of them may be used. It may be different.

Further, the first operation unit for a predetermined period (or the second operation unit for a predetermined period) may be capable of accepting operations even during a specific operation allowable period.

[Structure 14-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. The display can be displayed. Further, when the operation permissible period occurs, it is possible to audibly output a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is in a permissible state or the operation reception is in a permissible state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed by a player on an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted during the operation allowable period, a post-reception display is displayed so that the staging symbol appears to overlap the front side thereof. Since there are cases where the display is displayed and cases where the post-reception display is displayed so that it appears to overlap the production design behind it, the post-reception display is given a directing effect with the production design. It can be expected that the game will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 14-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as the type of the operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, the first of the plurality of operation units is used. Both the operation reception for the operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit are acceptable, and when the player operates the first operation unit, it appears to overlap the staging symbol on the front side. The display after reception may be displayed, and when the player operates the second operation unit, the display after reception may be displayed so that the display is overlapped on the back side of the staging symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which of the effect symbol and the post-reception display is to be prioritized depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment taste is maintained favorably. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 14-E are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 14-E. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations, or different operation units. Or an operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as the operation unit and the operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 15-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to execute a precursory effect display that suggests that an operation allowable period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as a type of the operation permissible period, and in the specific operation permissible period, the operation reception for the specific period first operation unit and the operation reception for the specific period second operation unit are prepared. The operation reception for the above can be at least acceptable, and the precursory effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the specific operation allowable period occurs, and the precursory effect display is displayed in the specific operation allowable period. If an operation is performed on either the first operation unit for a specific period or the second operation unit for a specific period during the period, the precursor effect display is hidden. That is, in this case, even if an operation is performed on either the first operation unit for a specific period or the second operation unit for a specific period while the precursor effect display is displayed, the operation reception is properly performed. It will be possible to suggest that the situation is favorable.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 15-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and the "specific operation allowable period" is a specific period. The operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit can be at least acceptable, and the precursor staging display is displayed so as to straddle the timing when the specific operation allowable period occurs. Then, when either the operation reception for the first operation unit in the specific period or the operation reception for the second operation unit in the specific period is performed while the precursor effect display is displayed in the specific operation allowable period, this is used as an opportunity. The precursor effect display may be hidden. On the other hand, in the "special operation allowable period", the operation reception for the first operation unit in the special period and the operation reception for the second operation unit in the special period can be at least acceptable. It is displayed so as to straddle the timing when the special operation allowable period occurs, but when the operation is accepted for the first operation unit in the special period while the precursor staging display is audibly output in the special operation allowable period, this is displayed. When the precursor effect display is not hidden and the operation is accepted for the second operation unit during the special operation period while the precursor effect display is displayed during the special operation allowable period. With this as an opportunity, the precursor effect display may be hidden.

According to such a configuration, the conditions for hiding the precursor staging display differ depending on the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, so that it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained. sell. It should be noted that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", and "specific operation" related to the configuration 15-E are to be noted. The "allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operation unit", the "specific period second operation unit", the "special period first operation unit", the "special period second operation unit", and the "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations, And may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "special operation allowable period", or may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as the operation unit and the operation allowable period of another name.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "special period first operation unit" or the "special period second operation unit" of the special operation allowable period. It may be different from any of them.

Further, the "specific period second operation unit" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "special period first operation unit" or the "special period second operation unit" of the special operation allowable period, and either of them may be used. It may be different.

Further, the special period first operation unit (or the special period second operation unit) may be capable of accepting operations even during the specific operation allowable period.

[Structure 16-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variable display of the staging symbol. In addition, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, a display after acceptance can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to execute a precursory effect display that suggests that an operation allowable period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the precursor effect display can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the operation allowable period occurs, and the game is played for the operation unit in which the operation reception is permitted during the operation allowable period. When an operation is performed by a person, the post-reception display is displayed so that it can be seen overlapping the front side of the staging symbol, and the post-reception display is displayed so that it can be seen overlapping the back side of the staging symbol. Since there are cases, it can be expected that the display after reception will have a directing effect with the staging design to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 16-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as the type of the operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, the first operation among the plurality of operation units is performed. Both the operation reception for the unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit are acceptable, and when the player operates the first operation unit, it appears to overlap the staging pattern on the front side. The post-reception display may be displayed, and when the player operates the second operation unit, the post-reception display may be displayed so that the second operation unit can be seen overlapping behind the effect symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which of the effect symbol and the post-reception display is to be prioritized depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment taste is maintained favorably. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 16-E are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-E. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations, or different operation units. Or an operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as the operation unit and the operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 17-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can give rise to display. In addition, it is possible to execute a precursory effect display that suggests that an operation allowable period will occur. It is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as a type of the operation permissible period, and in the specific operation permissible period, the operation unit is not operated in the specific operation permissible period. However, when a specific time elapses after the specific operation allowable period occurs, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation for the operation unit is performed is performed (the automatic button function is enabled). The precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the specific operation allowable period occurs, but is hidden at a timing before the specific operation allowable period elapses after the specific operation allowable period occurs. I made it. As a result, while the precursor effect display is displayed, the player is in a state where the automatic button function is not likely to be enabled, that is, the player is in a situation where the operation can be performed calmly. You will be able to suggest it.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 17-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and the "specific operation allowable period" is the specification. Even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, when a specific time elapses after the specific operation allowable period occurs, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation on the operation unit is performed is displayed. (The automatic button function is enabled), and the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the specific operation allowable period occurs, but after the specific operation allowable period occurs, the above It may be hidden before a specific time elapses. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", even if the operation is not performed on the operation unit during the special operation permissible period, when the special time elapses after the special operation permissible period occurs, the operation unit The same post-acceptance display as when the operation for is performed is performed (automatic button function is enabled), and the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the special operation allowable period occurs. Moreover, it is also displayed at the time when the special time has elapsed since the special operation allowable period has occurred, and when the above special time elapses without the player performing the operation after the special operation allowable period has occurred, it is a precursor. The display after reception may be started in the same state as when the operation for the operation unit is performed in the state where the effect display is not hidden but displayed.

According to such a configuration, whether or not the precursor staging display is hidden differs depending on the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period in relation to the timing when the automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, it can be expected that the tension when the operation permissible period in which the automatic button function is enabled occurs is preferably maintained. The "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 17-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to other configurations, or may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation allowable period" as the operation allowable period of another name.

In this case, the specific time and the special time may be the same time or different times.

[Structure 18-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which the operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and if the operation reception for the operation unit is performed in the operation permissible period, the operation is changed after the reception. Causes. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation unit (image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and it is possible to accept a plurality of operations in the predetermined operation allowable period. It is assumed that there is an operation unit to be displayed by the image display means. Then, during the specific operation permissible period, there is an operation unit that is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means, although it is permissible to accept multiple operations, and the operation unit is simply maintained in the operated state. Since the reception can be done multiple times (so-called automatic continuous hitting function), it is expected that the difficulty of playing due to the concealment of the operation unit to be operated will be alleviated and the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed. sell.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 18-E" is adopted, the operation unit that is allowed to accept multiple operations in the "predetermined operation allowable period" and is the target of display by the above-mentioned image display means. Therefore, even if the operation unit is maintained in the operated state, the operation reception may not be performed a plurality of times. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained not only when the operation unit to be operated is concealed but also when the operation unit to be operated is not concealed. Can be done.

Further, in the case of adopting the "configuration 18-E", in the "predetermined operation allowable period", one operation unit is permitted to receive multiple operations and is to be displayed by the above-mentioned image display means. Alternatively, there may be a plurality of the operation units, and even if the operation unit is maintained in the operated state, the operation reception may not be performed a plurality of times. On the other hand, in the "specific operation allowable period", there are at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as operation units that are not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means, although it is permissible to accept multiple operations. However, while the first operation unit can be operated multiple times simply by keeping it in the operated state, the second operation unit can be operated even if it is kept in the operated state. May not be done more than once.

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible period", it is permissible to accept multiple operations, but even if the operation unit is not the target of display by the above-mentioned image display means, the so-called automatic continuous striking function is performed. Can be expected to maintain a more favorable feeling of tension, as it may not be enabled. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 18-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 18-E. It is just a name used for this purpose. Therefore, it means the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations. It may mean a different operation unit or an operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

In this case, at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit (for example, the second operation unit) is allowed to accept a plurality of operations during a predetermined operation allowable period, and is displayed by the image display means. It may be set as an operation unit that is the target of.

[Structure 19-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which the operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and if the operation reception for the operation unit is performed in the operation permissible period, the operation is changed after the reception. Causes. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation unit (image display means). Further, when the operation reception is performed for the operation unit within the operation allowable period, the post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation reception can be output as one of the post-reception changes.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of the operation permissible period, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", the operation reception is permissible and the above-mentioned image. There is an operation unit to be displayed by the display means, and when the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation can be output. On the other hand, in the "specific operation allowable period", there is an operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is not targeted for display by the above-mentioned image display means, but even when the operation unit is operated, there is an operation unit. Since the output sound can be output after reception according to the operation, the operation is performed properly even when the operation is performed while the operation unit to be operated is kept secret. You will be able to suggest that you are in a situation.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 19-E" is adopted, there is an operation unit in which the operation reception is permissible and is not the target of display by the above-mentioned image display means in the "specific operation allowable period". When the operation unit is operated, the post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation may be output, or the post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation may not be output. That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted when the operation unit in the concealed state is operated, so that it can be expected that a feeling of tension is more preferably imparted.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 19-E", in the "predetermined operation permissible period", there is one operation unit that is permissible for operation reception and is displayed by the above-mentioned image display means. Alternatively, there may be a plurality of them, and when the operation unit is operated, an output sound may be output after reception. On the other hand, in the "specific operation allowable period", there are at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as operation units that are acceptable for operation reception but are not displayed by the image display means, and the first operation. When the operation is performed on the unit, the output sound after reception may be output, but when the operation is performed on the second operation unit, the output sound after reception may not be output. That is, in this case, in the "specific operation permissible period", when the operation unit that is not in the concealed state is operated, the output sound after reception can be output, whereas in the "predetermined operation permissible period", the first operation in the concealed state. Since the output sound is output only when the operation is performed on the first operation unit of the unit and the second operation unit, the output sound is output not only on the first operation unit but also on the second operation unit. However, it will be possible to further conceal the fact that the operation reception is permitted. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 19-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 18-E. It is just a name used for this purpose. Therefore, it means the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations. It may mean a different operation unit or an operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

In this case, the output sound after reception may be output in a different manner depending on at least one of the type as the operation allowable period and the type of the operation unit operated by the player.

Further, at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit (for example, the second operation unit) is permitted to accept operations during a predetermined operation allowable period, and is subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means. It may be set as an operation unit.

[Structure 20-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variable display of the staging symbol. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which the operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when the operation reception for the operation unit is performed in the operation permissible period, the display after reception can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit (image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of the operation permissible period, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", the operation reception is permissible and the above-mentioned image. There is an operation unit that is the target of display by the display means, and when the operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation can be displayed, and the operation is performed in the "specific operation allowable period". There is an operation unit that is acceptable for reception and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means, but even if the operation unit is operated, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the operation is properly performed even when the operation is performed while the operation unit to be operated is kept secret.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 20-E" is adopted, there is an operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means during the specific operation allowable period. When is operated, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the effect symbol on the front side, and the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed on the effect symbol. It may be displayed so that it overlaps with the back side. According to such a configuration, during the specific operation permissible period, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by giving a directing effect to the staging pattern with respect to the post-reception display when the concealed operation unit is operated. Can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 20-E" is adopted, the first operation unit is an operation unit that is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means, although the operation reception is permissible during the specific operation allowable period. And, when there is at least a second operation unit and an operation is performed on the first operation unit, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the effect symbol on the back side thereof, and the second operation unit is displayed. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be overlapped on the front side of the effect symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which of the effect symbol and the post-reception display is to be prioritized depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment taste is maintained favorably.

[Structure 21-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a plurality of operation permissible periods in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit are permissible. When either the operation for the first operation unit or the operation for the second operation unit is performed within the permissible period, it is possible to display the post-acceptance display according to the type of the side where the operation reception is performed. In addition, although it is possible to display an image display that imitates the operation target by the player (image display means), the display that imitates the operation target even though the operation reception is permitted is the image display means. It may not be done by.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first multiple operation allowable period and the second multiple operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the multiple operation allowable period, and the first multiple operation allowable period and the second plurality of operations are allowed. During the operation permissible period, it has become possible to allow only one operation reception for the first operation unit and to allow multiple operation receptions for the second operation unit. ing. Further, when an operation is performed on the "second operation unit" that can allow multiple operation receptions in the first multiple operation allowable period, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. Even while the display after reception is displayed, it is permissible to accept operations for the "first operation unit". Then, the operation is performed on the "first operation unit" while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the "second operation unit" is displayed in the first plurality of operation allowable period. Then, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-reception display that had been displayed up to that point can be hidden by the operation, so that the second operation is interrupted. It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the effect is advanced by the newly performed operation on the first operation unit side instead of the operation on the operation unit side.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 21-E" is adopted, a display imitating the first operation unit and a display imitating the second operation unit are both displayed in the "first multiple operation allowable period". In the meantime, both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit can be allowed, and at least the first operation unit among the first operation unit and the second operation unit is allowed. May allow multiple operations to be accepted. Further, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", the operation reception for the first operation unit and the second operation reception are performed while neither the display of the first operation unit nor the display of the second operation unit is displayed. Both of the operation receptions for the operation unit can be tolerated, and at least the first operation unit of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can tolerate a plurality of operation receptions. May be good. Then, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit that can allow multiple operation receptions in the "first multiple operation allowable period", the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. It is permissible to accept operations for the second operation unit while the post-reception display is displayed, and if an operation is performed for the second operation unit while the post-reception display is displayed, The post-reception display corresponding to the operation may be displayed, and the post-reception display that has been displayed up to that point may be hidden by the operation. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit that can allow multiple operation receptions in the "second multiple operation allowable period", the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. However, it is permissible to accept the operation for the second operation unit while the display after reception is displayed, and the operation is performed for the second operation unit while the display after reception is displayed. Then, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the post-reception display that has appeared up to that point may not be hidden by the operation. According to such a configuration, if an operation for the second operation unit is performed while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation for the first operation unit is displayed, the operation for the first operation unit is triggered by this. Since there are cases where the display after reception is hidden and cases where the display after reception is not hidden according to the operation for the first operation unit, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. Can be expected.

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 21-E are the configurations 21-E. It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of. Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to other configurations are used. It may mean something, or it may mean a different operation unit or an operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 22-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a plurality of operation permissible periods in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit are permissible. Further, it is possible to display the first operation-related display that can appear only when the operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. Further, it is possible to display the second operation-related display that can appear only when the operation reception for the second operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first multiple operation allowable period and the second multiple operation allowable period are prepared as the multiple operation allowable period, and the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "second multiple operation allowable period" are provided. In the "multiple operation allowable period", since both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display can be displayed, the operation reception is permitted for a plurality of operation units. However, it can be expected that the operation by the player will be smoothly promoted.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 22-E" is adopted, in the "first multiple operation allowable period", the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are both displayed. The operation reception for the operation unit or the operation reception for the second operation unit may be made. On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", the operation reception for the first operation unit or the operation reception for the second operation unit is performed while neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed. However, when an operation is accepted for the second operation unit under the relevant circumstances, the second operation-related display is displayed, and the first operation is displayed while the second operation-related display is displayed. The operation reception for the unit or the operation reception for the second operation unit may be made. According to such a configuration, the confidentiality regarding the "state in which the operation reception is permitted" in the second operation unit is eliminated by the operation on the second operation unit, and the second operation-related display is displayed. Since the operation reception for the first operation unit or the operation reception for the second operation unit can be performed, it can be expected to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 22-E", in the "second multiple operation allowable period", even if the operation is accepted for the first operation unit, the post-acceptance display suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed. The first operation-related display that can only be displayed when the operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted is displayed. You may not do it. According to such a configuration, the production performance when the operation reception is performed differs between the first operation unit and the second operation unit, which are in a concealed state, so that the hobby of the game is improved. Can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 22-E" is adopted, the operation is accepted for the second operation unit while the second operation-related display is not displayed in the "second multiple operation allowable period". In this case, the display related to the second operation may be displayed, but the display suggesting the degree of expectation may not be displayed. That is, in this case, further operations can be urged to the second operation unit while the second operation-related display is displayed.

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 22-E are the same as the configuration 22-E. It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of. Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to other configurations are used. It may mean something, or it may mean a different operation unit or an operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 23-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation (image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and both the “predetermined operation allowable period” and the “specific operation allowable period” are performed a plurality of times. The operation unit is set so that the operation reception is acceptable, but when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the "predetermined operation allowable period" and in the operation unit in the "specific operation allowable period". On the other hand, since it is possible to output a different sound as the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after reception, depending on when the operation is performed, it is possible to determine which type of operation permissible period has occurred. You will be able to suggest.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 23-E" is adopted, the "predetermined operation allowable period" is targeted for display by the above-mentioned image display means, and a plurality of operation receptions are permitted. When there is one or more operation units and an operation is performed on the operation unit, the output sound after the operation is output as one of the changes after reception, whereas in the "specific operation allowable period", the above-mentioned image is displayed. If there is one or more operation units that are not targeted for display by the display means and are allowed to accept multiple operations, and an operation is performed on the operation unit, the change after reception is 1. As a result, there may be a case where the output sound after the operation is output and a case where the output sound after the operation is not output. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation allowable period", the post-operation output sound may be output or the post-operation output sound may not be output when the operation unit that is concealed is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that a feeling of tension as to whether or not the operation is properly accepted can be maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 23-E" is adopted, the "specific operation allowable period" is not targeted for display by the above-mentioned image display means, and multiple operation receptions are permitted. There are at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as operation units, and when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, but the second operation unit When the operation is performed on the above, the output sound after the operation may not be output as one of the changes after the reception. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation allowable period", the confidentiality of the "state in which the operation reception is permitted" in the second operation unit can be further enhanced, and the entertainment of the game can be improved. It can be expected to be planned.

In this case, in the "specific operation permissible period", there may be no operation unit that is targeted for display by the image display means and that the operation reception (multiple times) is permissible.

Further, at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit (for example, the second operation unit) is targeted for display by the above-mentioned image display means in the "predetermined operation allowable period" and is operated a plurality of times. It may be used as an operation unit for which reception is acceptable.

Further, when the first operation unit is operated during the specific operation permissible period, there may be a case where a change occurs after the reception and a case where the change does not occur after the reception. According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the tension when operating the first operation unit, which is concealed, is suitably maintained in the "specific operation allowable period".

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 23-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 23-E. It is just a name used for this purpose. Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to other configurations are used. It may mean something, or it may mean a different operation unit or an operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 24-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation (image display means).

In this regard, during the operation permissible period for the pachinko machine 1, there are cases where it is permissible to accept a plurality of operations for an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the image display means. Since the operation reception can be performed multiple times if the operation is maintained, the difficulty of the game due to the concealment of the operation unit to be operated is alleviated and the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. Can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 24-E" is adopted, it is possible to allow a plurality of operation receptions for an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the above-mentioned image display means during the operation allowable period. In some cases, the operation reception may be performed a plurality of times or the operation reception may not be performed a plurality of times simply by keeping the operation unit in the operated state. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably give a feeling of tension while alleviating the difficulty of playing due to the concealment of the operation unit to be operated.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 24-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as an operation allowable period, and in the "specific operation allowable period", the above-mentioned image display means is used. There are at least the first operation unit and the second operation unit as operation units that are not displayed but are allowed to accept multiple operations, and the operation is performed when the first operation unit is maintained in the operated state. When the reception is not performed a plurality of times and the second operation unit is maintained in the operated state, the operation reception may be performed a plurality of times. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to increase the confidentiality as to whether or not the second operation unit is allowed to receive a plurality of operations in a specific operation allowable period, and the feeling of tension is preferably felt. It can be expected to be granted.

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 24-E are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 24-E. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" related to other configurations, or different operation units. Or an operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 25-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variable display of the staging symbol. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which the operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when the operation reception for the operation unit is performed in the operation permissible period, the display after reception can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period are prepared as the types of the operation allowable period, and in the "predetermined operation allowable period", the operation reception is permissible and the above-mentioned image. There is an operation unit that is the target of display by the display means, and when the operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the effect symbol on the back side of the operation unit. In the "specific operation allowable period", there is an operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means. When the operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is produced. The design can be displayed so that it overlaps the front side of the design. As a result, when the operation is performed while the operation unit to be operated is concealed, the operation is performed while the operation unit to be operated is not concealed. , It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the operation is properly performed, and it can be expected that the hobby of the game will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 25-E", in the "specific operation allowable period", the operation reception is permitted and the operation unit is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means. There are at least one operation unit and a second operation unit for a specific period, and when the first operation unit for a specific period is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible on the front side of the effect symbol, and is specified. When the second operation unit of the period is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be visible behind the effect symbol. According to such a configuration, which of the "specific period first operation unit" and the "specific period second operation unit", which is acceptable for operation reception and is not the target of display by the above-mentioned image display means, is operated. Therefore, it is possible to select which of the staging pattern and the post-reception display should be prioritized for viewing, so that it can be expected that the game entertainment taste is appropriately maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 25-E", in the "predetermined operation allowable period", the operation unit and the operation unit to which the operation reception is permissible and to be displayed by the above-mentioned image display means and the operation are performed. There is an operation unit that is acceptable for reception and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means, and an operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means is operated. The post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the staging symbol behind it, and the operation reception is acceptable and the operation unit that is not the target of the display by the above-mentioned image display means is operated. Then, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be overlapped on the front side of the effect symbol. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", the operation reception is permissible and there is no operation unit to be displayed by the above-mentioned image display means, but the operation reception is permissible and the above-mentioned image display. There are at least a specific period first operation unit and a specific period second operation unit as operation units that are not targeted for display by means, and when the specific period first operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation becomes an effect symbol. On the other hand, it is displayed so as to be visible on the front side thereof, and when the second operation unit is operated for a specific period, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible on the back side of the effect symbol. May be good. According to such a configuration, the effectability for the effect symbol when operating the operation unit in the concealed state becomes significantly different between the "predetermined operation allowable period" and the "specific operation allowable period". It can be expected to improve the interests.

The "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 25-E are the techniques of the configuration 25-E. It is just a name used to explain the idea. Therefore, it means the same operation unit and operation permissible period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" related to other configurations. It may be a thing, or it may mean a different operation unit or an operation allowable period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as the operation unit or operation allowable period of another name.

[Structure 26-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variable display of the staging symbol. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which the operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and if the operation reception for the operation unit is performed in the operation permissible period, a change occurs after the reception. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of the operation permissible period, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", the operation reception is permissible and the above-mentioned image. There is an operation unit that is the target of display by the display means, and when the operation unit is operated, the output sound after reception is output as one of the changes after reception, and the operation reception is permitted in the "specific operation allowable period". Since there is an operation unit that is possible and is not subject to display by the image display means, and when the operation unit is operated, it is possible to output a post-reception output sound as one of the post-reception changes. , It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the operation by the player is properly accepted.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 26-E" is adopted, there is an operation unit in which the operation reception is permissible and is not the target of display by the above-mentioned image display means in the "specific operation allowable period". When the operation unit is operated, there may be a case where the output sound after reception is output as one of the changes after reception, and a case where the output sound after reception is not output as one of the changes after reception. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation allowable period", the post-operation output sound may be output or the post-operation output sound may not be output when the operation unit that is concealed is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that a feeling of tension as to whether or not the operation is properly accepted can be maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 26-E", in the "specific operation allowable period", the operation reception is permitted and the operation unit is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means. There are at least one operation unit and a second operation unit for a specific period, and when the first operation unit for a specific period is operated, a change occurs after reception, but as one of them, the output sound after reception is not output, and the first operation unit for a specific period 2 When the operation unit is operated, the output sound after reception may be output as one of the changes after reception. According to such a configuration, the specific period 1st of the "specific period 1st operation unit" and the "specific period 2nd operation unit" which is acceptable for operation reception and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means. It is expected that the confidentiality of one operation unit can be further enhanced, and that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 26-E", in the "predetermined operation allowable period", the operation reception is permissible and the operation unit to be displayed by the above-mentioned image display means and the operation. There is an operation unit that is acceptable for reception and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means, and an operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means is operated. As one of the changes after reception, the output sound after reception is output, and when the operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is not the target of display by the image display means is operated, the change after reception occurs. As one of them, the output sound may not be output after reception. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", the operation reception is permissible and there is no operation unit to be displayed by the above-mentioned image display means, but the operation reception is permissible and the above-mentioned image display. There are at least a specific period first operation unit and a specific period second operation unit as operation units that are not subject to display by means, and when the specific period first operation unit is operated, changes occur after reception, but one of them is after reception. The output sound is not output, and when the second operation unit is operated for a specific period, the output sound after reception may be output as one of the changes after reception. According to such a configuration, when the operation unit is operated in the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period", the operation reception is permissible and the operation unit is not the target of the display by the above-mentioned image display means. Since the staging will be significantly different, it can be expected to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, the first operation unit for a specific period is used as "an operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned image display means" in a predetermined operation allowable period, and the second operation unit for a specific period is used. If the operation unit is used as the "operation unit that is acceptable for operation reception and is the target of display by the above-mentioned image display means" in the predetermined operation allowable period, any operation unit is concealed in the "specific operation allowable period". As a judgment as to whether or not the image is set to, the effectability in the "predetermined operation allowable period" can be used as a hint.

[Structure 27-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which operation reception for the operation unit is permissible, and when the operation is performed on the operation unit in the operation permissible period, after reception. Can make a difference. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation (image display means).

In this regard, during the operation permissible period for the pachinko machine 1, there are cases where it is permissible to accept a plurality of operations for an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the image display means. Since the operation reception can be performed multiple times if the operation is maintained, the difficulty of the game due to the concealment of the operation unit to be operated is alleviated and the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. Can be expected to do.

Further, as will be described later, during the operation permissible period, it may be permissible to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the above-mentioned image display means, and the operation unit is operated. Even if the state is maintained, there may be cases where the operation reception is performed a plurality of times and cases where the operation reception is not performed a plurality of times. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when operating an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the image display means.

In addition, as will be described later, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as the operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, although it is not targeted for display by the image display means, it is possible to accept multiple operations. There are at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as operation units, and when the first operation unit is maintained in the operated state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times and the second operation unit is operated. When the maintenance is continued, the operation reception may be performed multiple times. The number of times that the operation can be accepted when the first operation unit is continuously operated in the specific operation allowable period is when the second operation unit is continuously operated in the specific operation allowable period. The number of times the operation can be accepted may be less than the number of times the operation can be accepted. That is, in this case, in a specific operation permissible period, the first operation unit on the side where the so-called automatic continuous striking function is not enabled is required as compared with the second operation unit on the side where the so-called automatic continuous striking function is enabled. Since the number of repeated hits (the number of continuous operations) can be reduced, it can be expected to suppress the decline in the game interest.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception allowable period (reception period) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation unit occurs, the operation-related display related to the reception target (for example, the operation reception unit is imitated). The operation-related display (for example, the image display that imitates the operation receiving part) is displayed, but the integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image display is displayed. It may be displayed as an image display (see FIG. 144). Such an integrated image display occurs as a result of a notice judgment with an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. ..

The "integrated image display" is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as described as another example or a modification thereof. Therefore, details are omitted, but for example, peripheral decoration. A display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the image. Further, as the "integrated image display", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the display is performed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance acceptance period (acceptance period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. In some cases, the reception allowable sound is audibly output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptable period (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound in which the acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable reception sound" is a sound that is not output under the condition that the production has nothing to do with the allowable reception period (reception period).

By the way, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the type (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice) as a post-reception change (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.) that appears when received is received. We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception production) with different reception periods (reception production). Occurrence conditions are set for each reception period, and if any one of the generation conditions is satisfied, a reception period of a type corresponding to the satisfied generation conditions can be generated.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of operation units (for example, an operation button 410, a sword decoration body 5001 and the like) as operation units to be operated by the player. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (multiple operation allowable period) that is acceptable as a state in which not only one operation unit but also several (plural) operation units can accept operations. It is supposed to be.

First, with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277, a basic example of the effect when such a plurality of operation allowable periods occur will be described. However, the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277 is a conceptual one for facilitating the understanding of the technical features of the present application, and is not an essential configuration.

FIG. 275 shows a reception period (multiple operations) in which the “operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)” and the “operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” can be accepted as the operation unit. FIG. 276 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when an operation is performed on the “operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)” within the reception period when the permissible period) occurs. Is a reception period (multiple operation allowable period) in which "operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" and "operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" can be accepted as an operation unit. ) Is generated and an operation is performed on the "operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the reception period. FIG. 277 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content. It is a staging diagram which shows an example about the staging content when a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) occurs.

Now, as shown in FIGS. 275 (c) and 276 (c), for example, assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied at the timing T1 within the symbol variation, the peripheral control MPU1511a generates a reception period (“Fig.” The situation shown in 277 (a) "). As a result, if the player performs an operation (operation) within the reception period, a post-reception change will occur according to the operation (operation reception).

However, this reception period is a reception period in which both "operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" and "operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" can be allowed to be operated. It occurs as a multiple operation allowable period), and in the effect display device 1600, an operation-related display A for prompting an operation on the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and an operation unit B (here, an operation) are generated. The operation-related display B for prompting the operation for the button 410) is displayed (FIGS. 275 (d), (e), 276 (d), (e), 277 (a), etc.). See).

Moreover, during the reception period, the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is allowed to receive only one operation, whereas the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is plural. It is now acceptable to accept operations once.

Therefore, for example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the timing T2 (see FIG. 275) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception) is performed. A process of causing a change after reception (see FIGS. 275 (f) and 277 (b11a), (b11b)), (b12a), (b12b)) and ending the reception period itself is performed. Become. In this example, as one of the post-reception changes, the post-reception display C (corresponding to FIGS. 277 (b11a) and (b12a) and low expectation) and the post-reception display D (which correspond to FIGS. 277 (b11a) and (b12a)) and the post-reception display D (which correspond to FIGS. It corresponds to FIGS. 277 (b11b) and (b12b) and has a high expectation).

On the other hand, for example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) at the timing T3 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception) is performed. It causes a change after reception (see FIGS. 276 (f) and 277 (b11a), (b11b)), (b12a), (b12b)). At this time, in this example, the post-receipt display A1 (first aspect) is displayed as one of the post-receipt changes (see FIG. 277 (b21)). However, since the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is "a device in which a plurality of operation receptions are permitted within the reception period", the reception period is terminated based on the first operation. There is no such thing.

Then, for example, when the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is operated for the second time at the timing T4 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception) is performed. Corresponding post-acceptance changes occur (see FIGS. 276 (f) and 277 (b22)). At this time, in this example, the post-reception display A2 (second mode) is displayed as one of the post-reception changes (see FIG. 277 (b22)). However, in this example, even when the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is operated for the second time, the reception period is not terminated based on this.

Then, for example, when the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is operated for the third time at the timing T5 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception) is performed. ) (See FIG. 276 (f) and FIGS. 277 (b23a), (b23b), (b24a), (b24b)), and the process of terminating the reception period itself is performed. It will be. In this example, as one of the post-reception changes, the post-reception display C (corresponding to FIGS. 277 (b23a) and (b24a) and low expectation) and the post-reception display D (which correspond to FIGS. 277 (b23a) and (b24a)) and the post-reception display D (which correspond to FIGS. It corresponds to FIGS. 277 (b23b) and (b24b) and has a high expectation).

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 277, if it is desired to aim at destroying the enemy character with only one operation, the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) may be operated, and the enemy character may be defeated. If you want to aim at defeating the game with a plurality of operations, you can operate the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410).

Here, the effect of the operation on the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation on the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are the same (success or failure of defeat). However, for example, in the operation for the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the "effect result regarding the success or failure of the defeat of the enemy character" appears, and in the operation for the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410), the "enemy". A different display result may be displayed, such as "a production result regarding the success or failure of leaving (escape) from the battle scene with the character". Further, in this example, although the "sword decoration body 5001" is used as the operation unit A and the "operation button 410" is used as the operation unit B, it may be realized by adopting operation units opposite to each other. ..

By the way, in such a multi-operation allowable period, for example, although the operation for the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) in which a plurality of operations are permitted is started, it is worried that the final result display does not appear easily. With a feeling, in the middle of the multiple operation allowable period, switch from "operation for operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation for operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)". It is assumed that the production will be advanced, and at this time, there is a problem as to what kind of processing should be performed. Further, even if all of the plurality of operation units have a plurality of operation permissible period prepared as "an operation unit in which only one operation reception is permissible", for example, a game is played within the plurality of operation permissible period. If there is no operation by a person, there is a problem of which operation unit to enable the above-mentioned "automatic button function", and in addition, the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is used to improve the game entertainment. There are various issues such as whether to enable.

Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 including the above-mentioned "configuration 1-E" to "configuration 27-E" will be described with reference to the drawings. However, in order to realize these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to provide all of them. For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (targeted action / effect), the acceptance period (multiple operation allowable period) that can be allowed as a state in which some (multiple) operation units can accept operations is not always required. It may be one that does not occur (a reception period that allows only one operation unit to accept operations), or one that does not have an operation unit that allows multiple operation receptions. It may not be provided with an operation unit that allows only one operation reception, or it may be one in which the automatic button function and the automatic continuous striking function are not enabled. Further, with reference to FIGS. 274, these may not always be provided or may be provided for each of the above-mentioned reception periods. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above-mentioned "Structure 1-E" to "Structure 27-E" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration to be used.

First, with reference to FIGS. 278 to 295, the 1st floor reception period, the 2nd floor reception period, the 3rd floor reception period, the 4th floor reception period, and the 5th floor reception period will be described among the plurality of reception periods. And. Each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIG. 277 is prepared as a reception period different from the 1st floor reception period, the 2nd floor reception period, the 3rd floor reception period, the 4th floor reception period, and the 5th floor reception period. It may be realized as one of the 1st floor reception period, the 2nd floor reception period, the 3rd floor reception period, the 4th floor reception period, and the 5th floor reception period. good. Further, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily included in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods with reference to FIGS. 277. You may not be prepared.

FIG. 278 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the “condition 1F” is satisfied as the above-mentioned generation condition, the first floor reception period occurs, and the operation by the player is performed. FIG. 279 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the first floor reception period occurs and the operation by the player is not performed. FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the 1st floor reception period occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "1st F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the first F fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 1st floor variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 1st floor variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started. Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected "first F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 278 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "1st F variation pattern", the timing te2 has arrived in which the 1st floor time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 1F" is satisfied), "acceptance regarding changes after reception on the 1st floor (displays UA, UB after reception on the 1st floor, sound output after reception on the 1st floor, etc.)" is permitted. The first floor reception period (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 281 (b)).

Here, in the 1st floor reception period according to this embodiment, the 1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) operates once until the 1st floor reception period ends. Only reception is acceptable, and the 1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations until the 1st floor reception period ends. (Multiple operation allowable period).

That is, as described above, in such a first floor reception period (multiple operation allowable period), for example, although the operation on the first floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) in which a plurality of operations are permitted is started, The player feels uneasy that the final result display does not appear easily, and during the 1st floor acceptance period (multiple operation allowable period), "operations for the 1st floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". It is assumed that there may be a case where the production is advanced by switching from "operation to the first floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 1st floor reception period is generated, first, a precursor effect display suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player (the 1st floor reception period occurs). Is made feasible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing te1 before the first F reception period occurs, FIGS. 278 (d), 279 (d), and 281 (a). ), The execution of the "1st floor precursor effect display ZFD" is started as the precursor effect display. As shown in FIGS. 278 (d), 279 (d), and 281 (a) and 281 (b), the "1st floor precursor effect display ZFD" displays the first floor operation-related displays A and B. It is displayed so as to straddle before and after the timing.

That is, in this production example, when the first floor reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 278, 279, and 281 (b), (c), etc., the first floor operation unit A (here, the sword). "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can appear only when the operation reception for the decoration body 5001) is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. , 1F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) can only appear when the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. Display B (button image BMG) ”is displayed respectively. In this production example, the timing at which the 1st floor reception period occurs and the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed, respectively. The timing is the same, but it does not have to be the same. For example, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 1st floor precursor effect display ZFD is displayed. The display may be started before the timing when the 1st floor reception period occurs, and the display may be performed so as to straddle the timing. Alternatively, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed later than the timing when the 1st floor reception period occurs. You may.

The "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" according to this example are the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body). It is displayed as "a display imitating 5001) (an image display)" and "a display imitating the 1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) (an image display)". The displayed contents are not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are "1st floor precursor effect". While the "display ZFD" is displayed, the display is started so as to be overlapped on the back side of the "first floor precursor effect display ZFD".

Further, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. .. That is, as described above, during the 1st floor reception period, as an operation unit that can be allowed to be operated by the player, only one operation reception is allowed. ) ”And“ First F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) ”that allows multiple operation receptions are prepared.

As for the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the portion (sword decoration image SYG) of the operation receiving portion of the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is shown in the figure. When a moving image such as "displayed in the mode shown in 280 (A) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 280 (B) to (D)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is performed. The change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period 1F time A.

Regarding the "1st F operation-related display B (button image BMG)", the portion (button image BMG) of the operation receiving unit of the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is shown in FIG. 280. When a moving image such as "displayed in the mode shown in (a) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 280 (b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change. Appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 1F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 1st floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 280 and 281, the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" and the "1st floor operation unit B" (Here, the operation button 410) ”and the like, each“ operation receiving portion ”appears as a depiction of moving the movable range up and down. In this example, the period 1F time A and the period 1F time B are exemplified as the same time, but they may be set to different times. However, since the time is set longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the 3rd floor reception period described later, the "operation receiving unit" is the same in the 1st floor reception period as compared with the 3rd floor reception period. The state of slowly moving up and down in the movable range will be depicted.

When the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing te2 when the 1st floor reception period occurs. It is desirable that the periodic change is started after waiting for the timing te2 at which the 1st floor reception period occurs. That is, in this case, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed in FIG. 280 (A) until the timing te2 arrives. , (A) will be displayed in a form that maintains each of the modes shown in (a).

In this example, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are "1st floor" as shown in FIG. 281 (b). While the "precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "1st floor precursor effect display ZFD", and the periodic change is started. As shown in FIGS. 281 (a) and 281 (b), the display range of the 1st floor precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time. Therefore, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed while the 1st floor precursor effect display ZFD is displayed in this manner. Will be started.

Then, as a result of the display range of the 1st floor precursor effect display ZFD being reduced in this way, when the 1st floor precursor effect display ZFD is hidden, as shown in FIG. 281 (c), the "1st floor operation" is performed. The visibility of the "related display A (sword decorative image SYG)" and the "first F operation related display B (button operation related display BMG)" is improved. The situation shown in FIG. 281 (c) functions as an explanation screen (defeat 100 enemies) regarding the operation effect, and when this is completed, the effect shown in FIG. 281 (d) appears. become. The "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. 279 (e) and (e), unless the player accepts the operation. As shown in f), each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period 1F time A, period 1F time B) will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 278 and 281, in the timing te2A (timing shown in FIG. 281 (e)) within the reception period on the first floor, the “first floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. In this example, the operation reception is performed based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the operation reception is not limited to this, and the "operation reception based on the operation detection signal" is realized by another method. You may.

That is, in the 1st floor reception period according to this embodiment, it can be suggested whether the expectation that a big hit is obtained is high or low depending on "whether or not 100 enemies can be defeated", and the operation reception is performed. When an operation is performed on the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" that is allowed multiple times, the number of remaining enemies may decrease each time the operation is performed. The production can progress.

In this example, at the timing te2A (timing shown in FIG. 281 (e)) within the 1st floor reception period, the first operation reception is performed for the “1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 278 (i), (k) and 281 (e), "75 remaining bodies" are displayed as the display UB1 after reception on the 1st floor, and the output sound B after reception on the 1st floor is displayed. Is audible output. However, such "change B after reception on the 1st floor" is different from these staging changes (display after reception on the 1st floor, output sound after reception on the 1st floor), including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later. The staging change (for example, the staging change that changes the light emitting mode of the staging lamp) may be further performed. Alternatively, such "change B after reception on the first floor" does not necessarily have to be executed by a plurality of staging elements, and any one of the above-mentioned staging elements (for example, a staging that changes the light emitting mode of the staging lamp). It may be realized only by change).

Further, among the "change B after reception of the first floor" corresponding to the first operation reception for the "first floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the execution time of the output sound B after the reception of the first floor is the said. While the time set as the reception period is shorter, the execution time of the 1st floor post-reception display UB1 is longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation receptions for the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are the operations for the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" performed before that. It will be performed while the corresponding display UB after reception on the 1st floor is displayed.

In this example, in the timing te2B (timing shown in FIG. 281 (f)) within the reception period on the first floor, the second operation is performed on the "first floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". It is assumed that it will be broken. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 278 (i), (k) and 281 (f), "the remaining 65 bodies" is displayed as the display UB2 after the reception on the first floor, and the second operation is performed. The output sound B is audibly output after the reception on the 1st floor. Here, when the first operation is performed on the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" and on the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". The same sound is output as the output sound B after the reception of the 1st floor when the operation is performed for the second time or later, but it may be output as a different sound.

Then, in this example, at the timing te2C (timing shown in FIG. 281 (g)) within the reception period on the 1st floor, the third operation is performed on the “1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. It is supposed to be the case. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 278 (i), (k) and 281 (g), a new display (aspect) may appear as the display UB after the reception on the first floor. , No sound is newly audibly output as the output sound B after the reception on the 1st floor.

In this example, when the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the reception period on the 1st floor. It is prevented that "a new display appears as the display UB after the reception on the 1st floor, or some sound is newly audibly output as the output sound B after the reception on the 1st floor", but instead of this, the reception on the 1st floor A judgment is made when an operation is performed on the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the period, and based on the result of the judgment, a new display UB is displayed after the reception on the 1st floor. It may be possible to prevent the display from being displayed, or to prevent any sound from being audibly output as the output sound B after the reception on the 1st floor. In short, even though the operation was performed for such an event (“1st floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” within the 1st floor reception period, a new display is displayed as the 1st floor reception post-display UB. It does not appear, or any sound is newly audibly output as the output sound B after the reception on the 1st floor), as long as it occurs when the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

However, as described above, even though the operation is performed on the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 1st floor reception period, the post-reception display and reception corresponding to the operation are performed. If the post-output sound does not appear, the player feels uneasy, "Is it okay to just continue to operate the 1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)"? It will be. It is considered that such anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time for the first floor reception period decreases.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 278 and 281, the "initial game strategy (timing te2A to te2C)" aiming at the progress of the production by operating the "first F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" a plurality of times. ) ”, The player can give up and make the final production result appear with just one operation. It is supposed to be the case of switching to the target "new game strategy".

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 278 (a), (h), and (i), the display after the first floor reception corresponding to the operation reception for the "first floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is displayed. While the UB (here, "65 remaining bodies") is displayed, in the timing te2D (timing shown in FIG. 281 (h)) within the 1st floor reception period, "1st floor operation unit A (here). Then, it is assumed that the operation is performed on the sword decoration body 5001) ”.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the operation is performed on the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing te2D (timing shown in FIG. 281 (h)) within the 1st floor reception period. , Change A occurs after the reception on the 1st floor. For example, as one of the changes A after the reception on the first floor, the reception period on the first floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 278 (a) and 278 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 278 (h), (k) and 281 (h), "output after reception of the first floor" corresponding to the operation for the "first floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". The "sound A" is audibly output, and the "first floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "first floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is made difficult to see. 1F effect display EF ”is displayed.

Here, regarding the "output sound A after reception of the first floor" when the operation is performed on the "operation unit A of the first floor A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the above-mentioned "output after reception of the first floor" is described. It is audibly output as a sound different from "sound B". Further, when the operation is performed on the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" during the 1st floor reception period, the same mode as the 1st floor effect display EF (special benefits such as big hit) is always performed. (See FIG. 281 (h)), which does not suggest the degree of expectation to be given) is displayed.

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 281 (h), the 1st F effect display EF according to this effect example is "1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation-related display B (button). "Image BMG)" and the display UB after reception on the 1st floor are not hidden, and the display is started. (Here, the sword decoration body 5001) "is not only displayed so as to overlap from the front of the" 1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) "corresponding to", but also the side not being operated. The "1st F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" corresponding to the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is also displayed so as to overlap from the front. It has become.

That is, in this case, both the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are "1st floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration). It will be difficult to see by the 1st F effect display EF corresponding to the operation of "body 5001)". On the other hand, when the operation for the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed during the 1st floor reception period, the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to see is not displayed. Further, during the 1st floor reception period, the "1st floor post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation for the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is also shown in FIGS. 281 (e) to 281 (g). As such, it does not overlap with the front side of the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" or the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)".

Therefore, during the 1st floor reception period, when the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor" are triggered by this. Although it is difficult to see any of the operation-related display B (button image BMG) by the other image (1st floor effect display EF), the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated. Sometimes, this does not make it difficult to see the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" or the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". It has become. In this example, the "first F effect display EF" changes its form so that the display range becomes smaller with the passage of time.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 278 (h) and 281 (i), while the "1st floor effect display EF" is displayed, the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration)" is displayed. The 1st floor post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation for "body 5001)" is displayed. In this example, "a mode in which three decorative symbols are aligned" is displayed as the display UA after reception on the first floor, but it may be displayed in a "mode in which three decorative symbols are not aligned". You may. The display UA after receiving the 1st floor is displayed behind the "1st floor effect display EF", and when the "1st floor effect display EF" is hidden, visibility is improved. Will improve.

In this example, the "1st floor display after reception UA" is set to start displaying while the "1st floor effect display EF" is displayed, whereby the "1st floor effect display EF" is changed to the "1st floor". It was decided to display so as to straddle the period in which "post-reception display UB" is displayed and the period in which "1st floor post-reception display UA" is displayed. As a result, when the mode of "display UB after reception on the 1st floor" changes (FIGS. 281 (e) and 281 (f)), the effect is not displayed, and the effectability is caused by the operation for different operation units. Can be expected to favorably suggest that is appearing.

The "1st floor display after reception UA" may be displayed at the same timing as the "1st floor effect display EF" is displayed. However, even in this case as well, the "1st floor effect display UA" is displayed so as to overlap the "1st floor effect display EF" behind the "1st floor effect display EF", and the "1st floor effect display EF" is not displayed. When it is displayed, the visibility will be improved.

Further, during the 1st floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 278 and 281 (e) to (g), the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" was operated. Occasionally, based on this, periodic changes that have appeared up to that point in "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" (see FIG. 280). Is to be continued without being hidden (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, in the 1st floor reception period, the periodic change in the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is the "1st floor operation unit B (1st floor operation unit B). Here, before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the operation button 410) ”is performed, the display mode does not change, and those periodic changes remain. Therefore, even after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made, the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and The "1st F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period 1F time A, period 1F time B).

On the other hand, during the 1st floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 278 and 281 (h) and (i), when the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated, this is used. Based on this, the periodic changes in the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are hidden. Here, by hiding the "1st floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves, their periodic changes are hidden. It is supposed to be.

Further, in this example, while the 1st floor reception period is continued, the gauge image GG is described to decrease with the passage of time, but the description may not necessarily be performed.

Further, during the 1st floor reception period, the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the 1st floor operation unit B)" is displayed as "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" and multiple operation receptions are permitted. Even if the "operation button 410)" is kept in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (automatic repeated hits). The feature is not enabled) (see Figure 278 (b)). In this case, during the 1st floor reception period, a plurality of operations are performed on the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "1st floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". Needless to say, if the receptionist wants to be made, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "1st floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

Further, the 1st floor reception period is originally continued until the timing te3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period) as shown in FIG. 278 (c), and the timing te3 has arrived. It is terminated based on that. In this respect, the 1st floor reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 279, when the operation reception for ending the reception period is not performed until the timing te3 arrives in the 1st floor reception period, the 1st floor reception period is based on the arrival of the timing te3. Is only terminated, and the change A after reception of the 1st floor and the "1st floor operation unit B (1st floor operation unit B)" appear when the operation is performed on the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". Here, neither of the change B after the reception on the first floor, which appears when the operation is performed on the operation button 410), is executed.

When the 1st floor reception period occurs, "allowable sound C" is audibly output as the 1st floor reception allowable sound, which suggests that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. (See FIGS. 278 and 279). During the 1st floor reception period, while the "allowable sound C" is audibly output, the operation for the "1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" and the "1st floor operation unit B (here, here)" are performed. , Operation button 410) ”is not interrupted by any of the operations. However, when the reception period on the 1st floor occurs, the reception allowable sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Further, the 1st floor precursor effect display ZFD may not necessarily be executed. Further, it suffices as long as it causes some change after the reception even when the operation reception is performed within the 1st floor reception period. For example, the display after the reception on the 1st floor and the output sound after the reception on the 1st floor are not necessarily executed. You may do so.

By the way, the "acceptable reception sound" is different from the sound (precursor effect sound) output corresponding to the precursor effect display. Since the "precursor effect sound" is output in response to the precursor effect display, it is usually output in advance of the reception allowable sound. Therefore, the mode of the "predictive effect sound" changes depending on the mode of the precursor effect display, but the "acceptable reception sound" is specified (1) regardless of the mode of the precursor effect display. It can be output in an embodiment.

FIG. 282 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the “condition 2F” is satisfied as the above-mentioned generation condition, the second floor reception period occurs, and the operation by the player is performed. FIG. 283 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the second floor reception period occurs and the player does not perform the operation. 285 and 286 are diagrams showing an example of the effect when the second floor reception period occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "second F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second F fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 2nd floor variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 2nd floor variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started. Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected "second F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 282 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "second F variation pattern", the timing tf2 has arrived when the second F time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 2F" is satisfied), "acceptance regarding changes after reception on the 2nd floor (displays UA, UB after reception on the 2nd floor, sound output after reception on the 2nd floor, etc.)" is permitted. The second floor reception period (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 285 (b)).

Here, also in the second floor reception period according to this embodiment, the second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is the same as the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) described above. Only one operation reception is allowed until the 2nd floor reception period ends, and the 2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is used until the 2nd floor reception period ends. It is possible to accept multiple operations during the period (multiple operation allowable period). In this example, the "1st floor operation unit A" used in the 1st floor reception period and the "2nd floor operation unit A" used in the 2nd floor reception period are referred to as the same operation unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001). However, the operation units may be different from each other. Further, the same operation unit (here, operation button 410) is used for the "1st floor operation unit B" used in the 1st floor reception period and the "2nd floor operation unit B" used in the 2nd floor reception period, but they are mutually exclusive. It may be a different operation unit.

That is, in the second F reception period (multiple operation allowable period), for example, the operation for the second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) in which a plurality of operations are permitted is performed in the same manner as the first floor reception period described above. Although it started, the player felt uneasy that the final result display did not appear easily, and during the 2nd floor reception period (multiple operation allowable period), "2nd floor operation unit B (here, operation button) It is assumed that there may be a case where the production is advanced by switching from "operation for 410)" to "operation for the second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 2nd floor reception period is generated, first, a precursory effect display suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player (the 2nd floor reception period occurs) is executed. It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tf1 before the occurrence of the second floor reception period arrives, FIGS. 282 (d), 283 (d), and 285 (a). ), The execution of the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD" is started as the precursor effect display. As shown in FIGS. 282 (d), 283 (d), 285 (a), (b), and the like, the second F operation-related displays A and B are displayed on the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD". It is displayed so as to straddle before and after the timing.

That is, in this production example, even when the second floor reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 282, 283, and 285 (b), (c), etc., the second floor operation unit A (here, the sword). "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can appear only when the operation reception for the decoration body 5001) is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. , 2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) can only appear when the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. Display B (button image BMG) ”is displayed respectively. In this production example, the timing at which the 2nd floor reception period occurs and the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed, respectively. The timing is the same, but it does not have to be the same. For example, the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD is displayed. The display may be started before the timing when the second floor reception period occurs, and the display may be performed so as to straddle the timing. Alternatively, the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed later than the timing when the 2nd floor reception period occurs. You may.

The "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" according to this example are the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body). It is displayed as "a display imitating 5001) (an image display)" and "a display imitating the second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) (an image display)". The displayed contents are not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 285 (b), the "second floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second floor operation-related display B (button-shaped image BMG)" are the "second floor precursor effect". While the "display ZFD" is displayed, the display is started so that it can be seen overlapping behind the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD".

Further, the "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. .. That is, as described above, during the 2nd floor reception period, as the operation unit to which the player can accept the operation, only one operation reception is permitted. "The 2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) ) ”And“ Second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) ”that allows multiple operation receptions are prepared.

As for the "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the portion (sword decoration image SYG) of the operation receiving part of the second F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is shown in the figure. When a moving image such as "displayed in the mode shown in 284 (A) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 284 (B) to (D)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is made. The change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period 2F time A.

Regarding the "second F operation-related display B (button image BMG)", the portion (button image BMG) of the operation receiving unit of the second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is shown in FIG. 284. When a moving image such as "displayed in the mode shown in (a) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 284 (b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change. Appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 2F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 2nd floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 284 to 286, the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" and the "2nd floor operation unit B" (Here, the operation button 410) ”and the like, each“ operation receiving portion ”appears as a depiction of moving the movable range up and down. In this example, the period 2F time A and the period 2F time B are exemplified as the same time, but they may be set to different times. However, since the time is set longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the 3rd floor reception period described later, the 2nd floor reception period is the same as the 1st floor reception period described above, and is the same as the 3rd floor reception period. In comparison, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted as slowly moving up and down in its movable range. The cycle 2F time A and the cycle 2F time B may be set as the same time as the cycle 1F time A and the cycle 1F time B, respectively.

When the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing tf2 when the 2nd floor reception period occurs. It is desirable to wait for the timing tf2 at which the second floor reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, the "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are shown in FIG. 284 (A) until the timing tf2 arrives. , (A) will be displayed in a form that maintains each of the modes shown in (a).

In this example, the "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are "second F" as shown in FIG. 285 (b). While the "precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD", and the periodic change is started. As shown in FIGS. 285 (a) to 285 (d), the display range of the 2nd floor precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time.

Further, the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is the same as the "second floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". It is executed by both "Aspect ZFD-1" which is displayed so as to be overlapped on the front side and "Aspect ZFD-2" which is displayed so as to be overlapped on the rear side thereof. .. Therefore, the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are referred to as "mode ZFD-1" in the "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD". In the relationship of, it is displayed on the back side thereof, but in the relationship with "Aspect ZFD-2" of the "2nd F precursor effect display ZFD", it is displayed on the front side thereof. It should be noted that the aspect ZFD-2 may not necessarily be provided.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 282 to 286, the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is displayed before the timing tf2 at which the second floor reception period occurs, and the second floor is said to be displayed. It is hidden even when the timing tf3 (timing tf3 when the 2nd floor reception period ends without any operation by the player) when the set time set for the reception period elapses has arrived. The display can be continued.

However, since the display of the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD" is started, the reduction rate of the display area of the "aspect ZFD-1" is made larger than that of the "aspect ZFD-2". .. As a result, while the "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD" is being displayed (continuously), the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button)" are displayed. The visibility of "Image BMG)" will be gradually improved. The reduction rate of the display area of "Aspect ZFD-1" may be "100%", and the reduction rate of the display area of "Aspect ZFD-2" may be "0%".

By the way, in the second floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, "Brave YS" and "Wizard MT" facing the BOSS character are displayed on the staging display device 1600, respectively. The "Brave YS" is used as a character that operates in response to an operation on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", and the "Wizard MT" is the "2nd floor operation unit B". (Here, the operation button 410) ”is used as a character that operates in response to an operation.

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 2nd floor reception period, "the brave YS is BOSS based on the one-time operation reception". It is designed to provide a directing effect such as "whether or not the character can be defeated", and whether the jackpot expectation is high or low depending on the result (may be "100%" or "0%"). Can be suggested.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 2nd floor reception period, an effect such as "whether or not it is possible to withdraw (escape) from the BOSS battle" is produced. Gender is being provided. That is, when the operation for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 2nd floor reception period, the magic power value ("magic" decorative display) displayed at the lower right of the display screen is displayed. On the other hand, the filled area) can be increased, and when the magical power value is full, the wizard MT casts magic and succeeds in withdrawing from the BOSS battle (escape). Then, when the withdrawal (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is higher (may be "100%") than in the case of not succeeding.

During the 2nd floor reception period related to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "2nd floor operation-related display A", "2nd floor operation-related display B", "Brave YS", "Wizard MT", "BOSS character" However, most of them are covered with the fog expressed by the "2nd floor precursor staging display ZFD", and it is said that the whole picture cannot be recognized (a situation close to concealment). And, as described above, the fog expressed by such "second floor precursor effect display ZFD" continues to be displayed even at the timing tf3 when the set time as the second floor reception period elapses. Is.

However, as described above, since the fog expressed by the "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD" reduces its display area with the passage of time, the "2nd floor operation-related display A", The visibility of "2nd floor operation-related display B", "Brave YS", "Wizard MT", "BOSS character", etc. will be gradually improved.

In particular, in this production example, the fog represented by the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD" is represented by the fog expressed by the above-mentioned "Aspect ZFD-1" and the above-mentioned "Aspect ZFD-2". There is fog. In this regard, since the rate of decrease in the display area of the fog expressed by "Aspect ZFD-1" is set to be larger than the rate of decrease in the display area of fog expressed by "Aspect ZFD-2", the first factor is During the 2nd floor reception period, while leaving the fog expressed by the "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD" for a long time, the visibility of "2nd floor operation-related display A", "2nd floor operation-related display B", etc. Will be able to suitably improve this.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 282 and 285, at the timing tf2A (timing shown in FIG. 285 (c)) within the second floor reception period, the “second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. In this example as well, the operation reception is performed based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the operation reception is not limited to this, and the "operation reception based on the operation detection signal" should be realized by another method. You may.

In this example, at the timing tf2A (timing shown in FIG. 285 (c)) within the 2nd floor reception period, the first operation reception is performed for the “2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 282 (i), (k) and 285 (c), as one of the changes B after the reception on the 2nd floor, the "magic value (" magic "decorative display is filled with". "Depiction that the magical power value changes from" 0 "to" 1 ")" and "Depiction that the wizard MT is accumulating MP" are performed respectively (after the reception on the 2nd floor). Display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 2nd floor reception period, the output sound after reception corresponding to this is audibly output. (See FIG. 282 (k)). That is, in this case, the "Wizard MT" is secretly described as accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, when the operation is performed. Because of the low response (directability), it becomes possible to arouse anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (directability) when operating the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 2nd floor reception period may be too low, the game is a hobby. There is a concern that it will decline. Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after reception of the 2nd floor when the operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the reception period of the 2nd floor ("magic power value (" magic "). For "depiction of increasing the area filled with respect to the decorative display" and "depiction of the wizard MT accumulating MP"), behind the above-mentioned "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD". It is designed so that it will not be displayed, and when it overlaps, it will be displayed on the front side. In this production example, there are "Aspect ZFD-1" and "Aspect ZFD-2" as the "second F precursor effect display ZFD", but the first is such that they can be seen overlapping on the front side of any of them. The display UB is displayed after the reception on the 2nd floor. According to such a configuration, the operation reception itself is properly performed while the output sound is not audibly output after the reception, which arouses anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such an operation?" You will be able to better suggest that you are in a situation.

Regarding such "change B after reception on the 2nd floor", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, the effect change different from the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (for example, the light emission mode of the effect lamp is changed). It is also possible to make further changes in the effect. Alternatively, such "change B after reception on the second floor" does not necessarily have to be executed by a plurality of staging elements, and one of the above-mentioned staging elements (for example, a staging that changes the light emitting mode of the staging lamp). It may be realized only by change).

Further, the execution time of the "second floor display after reception UB" corresponding to the operation reception for the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation receptions for the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are the operations for the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" performed before that. It will be performed while the corresponding display UB after reception on the 2nd floor is displayed.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 282, at the timing tf2B (timing shown in FIG. 285 (d)) within the second floor reception period, the “second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” is used. On the other hand, it is assumed that the second operation is performed. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 282 (i), (k) and 285 (d), "magic value (" magic "decoration" is used as one of the changes B after the reception on the second floor. "Depiction in which the area filled with respect to the display) increases (magic value changes from" 1 "to" 2 ")" and "depiction in which the wizard MT is further accumulating MP" are now performed. (Display UB2 after reception on the 2nd floor). However, at this time, the output sound is not audibly output after reception as described above (see FIG. 282 (k)).

In this example, at the timing tf2C (timing shown in FIG. 286 (e)) within the reception period on the second floor, the third operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". It is assumed that it will be broken. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 282 (i), (k) and 286 (e), the output sound after reception is not audibly output, and after reception on the second floor. A new display (aspect) does not appear as a display UB.

In this example, when the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the 3rd time) within the 2nd floor reception period. "No new display will appear as the display UB after the 2nd floor reception", but instead of this, for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 2nd floor reception period The determination may be made when the operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be performed as the display UB after the reception on the second floor. In short, even though the operation was performed for such an event ("2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 2nd floor reception period, a new display is displayed as the 2nd floor reception post-display UB. (Does not appear) may occur when predetermined conditions are met.

However, as described above, even during the 2nd floor reception period, even though the operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the post-reception display and the post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation are performed. If the sound does not appear, the player feels uneasy, such as "Is it okay to just continue to operate the 2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)"? .. It is considered that such anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time for the second floor reception period decreases. In particular, during the 2nd floor reception period, when an operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the display UB after the 2nd floor reception may be displayed, but the reception is received. It is even more so uneasy to feel such anxiety because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 282, 285, and 286, the "initial game strategy (timing) aiming at the progress of the production by a plurality of operations on the" second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) ". By operating the "2nd F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" side, which allows the player to give up "tf2A to tf2C)" and make the final production result appear with only one operation. It is supposed to be a case of switching to a "new game strategy" aiming at the progress of the production.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 282 (a), (h), and (i), the display after receiving the second floor corresponding to the operation reception for the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". In the situation where UB2 (here, the depiction that the magic power value is set to "2", the depiction that the wizard MT is further accumulating MP, etc.) is displayed, at the timing tf2D within the 2nd floor reception period , It is assumed that an operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing tf2D within the second floor reception period, a change A occurs after the second floor reception. For example, as one of the changes A after the reception on the second floor, the reception period on the second floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 282 (a) and 282 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 282 (h) and 282 (k) and FIGS. 286 (f) and 286 (i), the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated according to the operation. The "output sound A after reception on the 2nd floor" is audibly output, and the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is visually recognized. The “2nd floor effect display EF” that makes it difficult is displayed, and further, the display UA after the reception of the 2nd floor is displayed.

In this respect, the second F effect display EF according to this effect example is "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation-related" as shown in FIGS. 286 (f) and 286 (i). "Display B (button image BMG)" and "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD" are both displayed in a situation where they are not hidden, and the display is started on the operated side. The "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed so as to overlap from the front. ing.

When an operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 2nd floor reception period, the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to do is not displayed.

In addition, as the "2nd floor post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation reception for the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 2nd floor reception period, the degree of expectation (big hit) is relatively high. Aspect UA-1 (FIGS. 286 (f) to (h)) having a high degree of expectation (percentage obtained) appears, and UA-2 (aspects in which a big hit is obtained) having a lower expectation than the embodiment UA-2 (aspects obtained). FIGS. 286 (i) to 286 (k)) may appear in some cases. Further, as described above, when the display UA after reception on the 2nd floor is displayed, the corresponding "output sound A after reception on the 2nd floor" is also audibly output, but the "output sound A after reception on the 2nd floor" is also expected. The output may be audible in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when the mode UA-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "second floor post-reception display UA", as shown in FIG. 286 (f), it is relatively as the "second floor post-reception display UA". The "second F effect display EF-1", which is a mode different from that when the mode UA-2 having a low expectation appears, is to be displayed.

That is, when the aspect UA-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "second F post-acceptance display UA", the first aspect EF-1 (see FIG. 286 (f)) is displayed as the second F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, appears as the "second floor display after reception UA".

On the other hand, when the mode UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "second floor post-reception display UA", as shown in FIGS. 286 (i) to 286 (k), the "second floor post-reception display UA" appears. The second F effect display EF is displayed in a mode different from that when the mode UA-1 having a relatively high expectation appears.

That is, when the mode UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "second floor display UA after reception", the second mode EF-2 (see FIG. 286 (i)) is displayed as the second floor effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2, which has a relatively low degree of expectation, appears as the "second floor display after reception UA".

Further, in the second floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "second floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. 282 and FIGS. As shown in 286, the periodic change is hidden based on the operation for the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves. It will be.

Further, in the second floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "second floor precursor staging display ZFD" is also "second floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in FIGS. 282 and 286. Is hidden based on the operation for. However, the "second floor precursor effect display ZFD" is not hidden due to the operation of the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the second F effect display EF is displayed) (see FIGS. 286 (f) and 286), "2nd F operation-related display A". (Sword decoration image SYG) ”,“ 2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG) ”, and“ 2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD ”are not hidden, and“ 2nd floor operation-related display A ”. (Sword decoration image SYG) ”is displayed so as to overlap with the back side of the second F effect display EF. After that, the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD" are displayed on the "2nd floor operation". It is supposed to be hidden based on the operation for "Part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" (see FIGS. 286 (g) and 286 (j)). However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "second floor operation-related display UA" includes such "second floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "second floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "second floor effect display". It is displayed behind both "EF" and "Decorative design SZ", which makes it difficult to see immediately after the "2nd floor reception post-display UA" is displayed (Fig.). 286 (f), (i)). However, by hiding the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", "2nd floor effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "2nd floor display after reception UA" will be gradually improved. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode even when the second F effect display EF is displayed, the "second floor post-acceptance display UA" has a high expectation of the mode UA-1 and a low expectation of the mode UA-. It is easy to recognize which of 2 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 286 (h) and 286 (k), the "second floor display after reception UA" according to this production example is displayed according to the mode of expectation UA-1 and UA-2. Will be advanced.

In addition, during the 2nd floor reception period, as shown in FIG. 282, at the time of its occurrence, either "1st permissible sound A1" or "2nd permissible sound A2" is (selectively) as the 2nd floor reception permissible sound. Can be audibly output. For example, when the 2nd floor reception period occurs and the "first permissible sound A1" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound, the jackpot is higher than when the "second permissible sound A2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It is desirable to set so as to suggest that the obtained degree of expectation (ratio) is high.

In this regard, during the 2nd floor reception period, as shown in FIG. 282 (j), while either the "first permissible sound A1" or the "second permissible sound A2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. There may be a situation where the operation is accepted, but when the operation is accepted for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the "first permissible sound" is triggered by this. The audible output of "A1" or "second permissible sound A2" is not interrupted (timing tf2A, tf2B, tf2C). However, while either the "first allowable sound A1" or the "second allowable sound A2" is audibly output as the reception allowable sound, the operation on the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed. When the reception is made, the audible output of the "first permissible sound A1" or the "second permissible sound A2" is interrupted (timing tf2D).

Further, during the 2nd floor reception period, based on the fact that the operation was performed on the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" was performed. "And" 2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG) "will be hidden, or the 2nd floor reception period will be terminated. However, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword)" is triggered by this operation no matter how many times the operation is performed. The "decorative image SYG)" and the "second floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" may not be hidden or the second floor reception period may not be terminated.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 2nd floor reception period, the magic power value (the area filled with respect to the "magic" decoration display) is When the increase is accumulated, it is possible to wait until the timing tf3 at which the second floor reception period ends arrives, and to perform a magical withdrawal effect based on the arrival of the timing tf3. In this case, even if the magic power value (the area filled with respect to the "magic" decoration display) is accumulated until the timing tf3 arrives, the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body)" If the operation reception for "5001)" is also allowed, the selection of whether or not to make a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of magically leaving is confirmed. Since you will be able to perform the above, you will be able to improve the entertainment of the game. However, in this case, when the operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the effect of magically leaving is not performed regardless of the effect result.

Alternatively, the effect determination is performed prior to generating the 2nd floor reception period, and when a special determination result is not obtained as a result of the effect determination, the "2nd floor operation unit B (2F operation unit B) is used within the 2nd floor reception period. Here, no matter how many times the operation button 410) is operated, the magic power value (the area filled with respect to the "magic" decoration display) does not accumulate until it increases (the reception period does not end). May be executed as a predetermined effect. In this case, when the operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the mode UA-2 has a relatively low expectation as the "2nd floor display after reception UA". May always appear, or the mode UA-1, which has a relatively high expectation, may appear. In this regard, if an operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the aspect UA-1 having a relatively high expectation may appear. No matter how many times the operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the magic power value cannot be accumulated until the increase. Can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is not limited to "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD", but also "No. 1". Even in relation to the "2F post-reception display UA", it is not displayed behind it, but is displayed so that it overlaps with the front side (see FIGS. 286 (f), (g), etc.). In this example, when the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the "second floor post-acceptance display UA", the aspect UA-1 is displayed on the second floor post-acceptance display UB (depiction in which the magic power value increases and the wizard MT MPs. It was decided to display it so that it could be seen overlapping behind it, but even when the aspect UA-2 is displayed as the "second floor display after reception UA", the aspect UA -2 may be displayed so as to overlap with the display UB (depiction in which the magic power value increases, depiction in which the wizard MT is accumulating MP, etc.) after the reception on the 2nd floor.

In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) appears to overlap the front side even in relation to the decorative symbol SZ. (Refer to FIG. 285 (d), FIG. 286, etc.), but in relation to the decorative symbol SZ, it may be displayed so as to be overlapped on the back side thereof.

Further, in this production example, the display UB after the reception on the 2nd floor (depiction that the magic power value increases, the depiction that the wizard MT is accumulating MP, etc.) is described in the 2nd floor reception period, "2nd floor operation unit A (here, here). , Sword decoration 5001) ”is not hidden based on this. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 282 (i) and 285, the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is "2nd floor. It means that the display is continued when the "2nd floor reception post-reception display UA" and "2nd floor effect display EF" corresponding to the operation for the "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" are started to be displayed. Of course, even when the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "2nd floor effect display EF" are hidden. The display can be continued.

However, in this case, the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (depiction that the magic power value increases, the depiction that the wizard MT is accumulating MP, etc.) is not displayed during the period when "Display UA after reception on the 2nd floor" is displayed. It is desirable to display it. As a result, while appealing that it is possible to advance the production by the operation reception (magic by the wizard) for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "2nd floor" It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the production has progressed by receiving the operation for the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, in the second floor reception period according to this embodiment, when the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated, as shown in FIGS. 282, 285, 286, and the like. Based on this, the periodic changes (see FIG. 284) that have appeared up to that point in the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are excluded. It continues without displaying (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, during the 2nd floor reception period, the periodic change in the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is the "2nd floor operation unit B (2nd floor operation unit B). Here, before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the operation button 410) ”is performed, the display mode does not change, and those periodic changes remain. Therefore, even after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made, the "second floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and The "second F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period 2F time A, period 2F time B).

On the other hand, during the 2nd floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 282 and 286, when the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated, the "2nd floor operation-related" is based on this. The periodic change in the display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the second F operation-related display B (button operation related display BMG) is hidden. Here, by hiding the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves, their periodic changes are hidden. It is supposed to be.

Further, in this example, the gauge image GG is described to decrease with the passage of time while the 2nd floor reception period is continued, but it may not always be performed.

Further, during the 2nd floor reception period, the "2nd floor operation related display B (button image BMG)" is displayed and the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, here, the operation unit B)" that allows multiple operation receptions is permitted. Even if the "operation button 410)" is kept in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (automatic repeated hits). The function is not activated) (see FIG. 282 (b)). In this case, during the 2nd floor reception period, a plurality of operations are performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "2nd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". Needless to say, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" if the reception is to be made.

Further, the 2nd floor reception period is originally continued until the timing tf3 arrives when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), as shown in FIG. 282 (c), and the timing tf3 has arrived. It is terminated based on that. In this respect, the second floor reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when the operation reception for ending the reception period is not performed until the timing tf3 arrives in the second floor reception period, the "second floor operation" is performed within the reception period. The same post-acceptance change A as when the operation was performed on the "part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" can occur based on the arrival of the timing tf3. That is, in this case, the effect corresponding to the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in which the operation is required multiple times within the 2nd floor reception period and the so-called automatic continuous striking function is not enabled is a game. It can be expected that the tension will be maintained favorably because the person will not be able to enjoy it unless he / she operates it.

Even when the timing tf3 arrives without the end of the 2nd floor reception period even though the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated during the 2nd floor reception period. The same post-reception change A as when the operation was performed on the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the reception period will occur based on the arrival of the timing tf3. .. That is, in this case, while the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled and after reception. Change A will occur.

FIG. 287 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the “condition 3F” is satisfied as the above-mentioned generation condition, the third floor reception period occurs, and the operation by the player is performed. FIG. 288 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the third floor reception period occurs and the operation by the player is not performed. FIGS. 290 and 291 are diagrams showing an example of the effect when the third floor reception period occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the change pattern determination is performed, and as a result, the "third floor change pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the third F fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect description according to the 3rd floor variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 3rd floor variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started. Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected "third floor variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 287 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "third floor variation pattern", the timing tg2 has arrived when the third floor time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 3F" is satisfied), "acceptance regarding changes after reception on the 3rd floor (displays UA, UB after reception on the 3rd floor, sound output after reception on the 3rd floor, etc.)" is permitted. The 3rd floor reception period (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 291 (b)).

Here, the 3rd floor reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) and the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286). Both the 3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the 3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are operated a plurality of times until the 3rd floor reception period ends. Acceptance is acceptable (multiple operation allowable period). In this example, the "3rd floor operation unit A" used in the 3rd floor reception period is used as the "1st floor operation unit A" used in the 1st floor reception period, and the "2nd floor operation unit A" used in the 2nd floor reception period. The same operation unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is used, but the operation units may be different from each other. Further, the "3rd floor operation unit B" used in the 3rd floor reception period is referred to as the "1st floor operation unit B" used in the 1st floor reception period, the "2nd floor operation unit B" used in the 2nd floor reception period, and the like. Although the same operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is used, they may be different operation units.

And even in such a 3rd floor reception period (multiple operation allowable period), for example, the 3rd floor operation unit in which a plurality of operations are permitted is the same as the 1st floor reception period and the 2nd floor reception period described above. Although the operation for B (here, the operation button 410) was started, the player felt uneasy that the final result display did not appear easily, and during the 3rd floor reception period (multiple operation allowable period), the player felt uneasy. There may be a case where the production is advanced by switching from "operation on the 3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on the 3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)". Is supposed to be.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 3rd floor reception period is generated, first, a precursory effect display suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player (the 3rd floor reception period occurs) is executed. It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tg1 before the occurrence of the third floor reception period arrives, FIGS. 287 (d), 288 (d), and 290 (a). ), The execution of the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" is started as the precursor effect display. As shown in FIGS. 287 (d), 288 (d), 290 (a), (b), and the like, the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" displays the third floor operation-related displays A and B. It is displayed so as to straddle before and after the timing.

That is, in this production example, even when the third floor reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 287, 288, and 290 (b), (c), etc., the third floor operation unit A (here, the sword). "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can appear only when the operation reception for the decoration body 5001) is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. , The operation reception for the 3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, or the operation reception can only appear when the operation reception is permitted. Display B (button image BMG) ”is displayed respectively. In this production example, the timing at which the 3rd floor reception period occurs and the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed, respectively. The timing is the same, but it does not have to be the same. For example, the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD is displayed. The display may be started before the timing when the 3rd floor reception period occurs, and the display may be performed so as to straddle the timing. Alternatively, the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed later than the timing when the 3rd floor reception period occurs. You may.

The "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" according to this example are the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body). It is displayed as "display that imitates 5001) (image display)" and "display that imitates 3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) (image display)". The displayed contents are not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 290 (b), the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button-shaped image BMG)" are the "third floor precursor effect". While the "display ZFD" is displayed, the display is started so as to be overlapped on the back side of the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD".

Further, the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. .. That is, as described above, during the 3rd floor reception period, as an operation unit that allows the player to accept operations, the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" that allows multiple operation receptions is permitted. ", And at least a" third floor operation unit B (here, an operation button 410) "that allows a plurality of operation receptions are prepared.

As for the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the portion (sword decoration image SYG) of the operation receiving part of the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is shown in the figure. When a moving image such as "displayed in the mode shown in 289 (A) and then sequentially displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 289 (B)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is predetermined. It appears repeatedly in a form that requires a period of 3F time A.

Regarding the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", the portion (button image BMG) of the operation receiving unit of the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is shown in FIG. 289. When a moving image such as "displayed in the mode shown in (a) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 289 (b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change. Appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 3F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 3rd floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, the “3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)” and the “3rd floor operation unit B” (Here, the operation button 410) ”and the like, each“ operation receiving portion ”appears as a depiction of moving the movable range up and down. In this example, the "cycle 3F time A (see FIGS. 289 (A) and (B))" is referred to as the "cycle 1F time A" and "cycle 1F time B" in the above-mentioned 1st floor reception period, and the above-mentioned second floor. It is set as a shorter time than "cycle 2F time A", "cycle 2F time B", "cycle 3F time B (see FIGS. 289 (a) to (d))" in the reception period. Therefore, in the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" in the 3rd floor reception period, the "operation receiving unit" moves up and down earlier than the above-mentioned 1st floor reception period and 2nd floor reception period. The state of movement will be depicted. In this case, the "3rd floor operation unit A" corresponding to the "3rd floor operation-related display A" in the 3rd floor reception period is the "1st floor operation" corresponding to the "1st floor operation-related display A" in the 1st floor reception period. It is provided as the same operation unit (here, sword decoration body 5001) as the "part A" and the "second floor operation unit A" corresponding to the "second floor operation-related display A" during the second floor reception period. It is desirable to make the time required for the periodic change different from each other even though the image is displayed for the same operation unit.

When the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing tg2 when the 3rd floor reception period occurs. It is desirable to wait for the timing tg2 at which the 3rd floor reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are shown in FIG. 289 (A) until the timing tg2 arrives. , (A) will be displayed in a form that maintains each of the modes shown in (a).

In this example, the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are "third floor" as shown in FIG. 290 (b). While the "precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed, the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD", and the periodic change is started. In this example, the display range of the 3rd floor precursor staging display ZED is reduced with the passage of time, as shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (e).

The "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is the same as the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". It is composed only of "aspects" that are displayed so as to overlap with each other on the front side, and "aspects" that are displayed so as to be overlapped on the rear side thereof are not executed. As shown in FIGS. 287 to 291 and the like, the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is displayed before the timing tg2 when the third floor reception period occurs, and the third floor reception period is concerned. The timing tg3 (timing tg3 at which the 3rd floor reception period ends without any operation by the player) when the set time set for the above elapses is hidden before the arrival. ..

By the way, in the third floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 the "hero YS" and "witch MT" facing the BOSS character are displayed on the staging display device 1600, respectively. "Brave YS" is used as a character that operates in response to an operation on "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)", and "Wizard MT" is used as "3rd floor operation unit B". (Here, the operation button 410) ”is used as a character that operates in response to an operation.

More specifically, when the operation for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed within the 3rd floor reception period, the hero YS makes a BOSS character based on the multiple operation receptions. It is designed to provide a directing effect such as "whether it can be defeated", and the result suggests whether the jackpot expectation is high or low (may be "100%" or "0%"). Can be done.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor reception period, an effect such as "whether or not it is possible to withdraw (escape) from the BOSS battle" is produced. Gender is being provided. That is, when the operation for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 3rd floor reception period, the magic power value ("magic" decorative display) displayed at the lower right of the display screen is displayed. On the other hand, the filled area) can be increased, and when the magical power value is full, the wizard MT casts magic and succeeds in withdrawing from the BOSS battle (escape). Then, when the withdrawal (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is higher (may be "100%") than in the case of not succeeding.

During the 3rd floor reception period related to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "3rd floor operation-related display A", "3rd floor operation-related display B", "Brave YS", "Wizard MT", "BOSS character" However, most of them are covered with lightning expressed by the "3rd floor precursor staging display ZFD", and it is said that the whole picture cannot be recognized. However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD", the lightning expressed by the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" related to this effect example has passed the set time as the 3rd floor reception period. It is supposed to be hidden before the timing tg3. Further, since the display area of the lightning represented by the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" is reduced with the passage of time, the "3rd floor operation-related display A" and the "3rd floor operation-related display" The visibility of "Display B", "Brave YS", "Wizard MT", "BOSS character", etc. is gradually improved from the stage before the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" is hidden. It will be done.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 287 and 290, at the timing tg2A (timing shown in FIG. 290 (c)) within the reception period on the third floor, the “third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. In this example as well, the operation reception is performed based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the operation reception is not limited to this, and the "operation reception based on the operation detection signal" should be realized by another method. You may.

In this example, at the timing tg2A (timing shown in FIG. 290 (c)) within the 3rd floor reception period, the first operation reception is performed for the “3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 287 (i), (k) and 290 (c), as one of the changes B after the reception on the 3rd floor, the "magic value (" magic "decorative display is filled with". "Depiction that the magical power value changes from" 0 "to" 1 ")" and "Depiction that the wizard MT is accumulating MP" are performed respectively (after the reception on the 3rd floor). Display UB1).

In this example, when the operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor reception period, the reception corresponding to the operation is performed as in the case of the 2nd floor reception period. The post-output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 287 (k)). That is, in this case, the "Wizard MT" is secretly described as accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, when the operation is performed. Because of the low response (directability), it becomes possible to arouse anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (directability) when operating the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor reception period may be too low, the game is a hobby. There is a concern that it will decline. Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the reception of the 3rd floor (“magic value increases”) when the operation is performed on the “3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” within the reception period of the 3rd floor. Regarding "depiction" and "depiction of the wizard MT accumulating MP", etc.), make sure that it is not displayed behind the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" mentioned above, and when it overlaps, it is on the front side. It is supposed to be displayed in.

Regarding such "change B after reception on the 3rd floor", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, the effect change different from the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor (for example, the light emission mode of the effect lamp is changed). It is also possible to make further changes in the effect. Alternatively, such "change B after reception on the 3rd floor" does not necessarily have to be executed by a plurality of staging elements, and any one of the above-mentioned staging elements (for example, a staging that changes the light emitting mode of the staging lamp). It may be realized only by change).

Further, the execution time of the "3rd floor display after reception UB" corresponding to the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation receptions for the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are the operations for the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" performed before that. It will be done while the corresponding display UB after reception on the 3rd floor is displayed.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 287, at the timing tg2B (timing shown in FIG. 290 (d)) within the 3rd floor reception period, the “3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” is used. On the other hand, it is assumed that the second operation is performed. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 287 (i), (k) and 290 (d), "magic value (" magic "decoration" is used as one of the changes B after the reception on the 3rd floor. "Depiction in which the area filled with respect to the display) increases (magic value changes from" 1 "to" 2 ")" and "depiction in which the wizard MT is further accumulating MP" are now performed. (Display UB2 after reception on the 3rd floor). However, at this time, the output sound is not audibly output after reception as described above (see FIG. 287 (k)).

Then, in this example, at the timing tg2C (timing shown in FIG. 290 (e)) within the reception period on the 3rd floor, the third operation is performed on the “3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. It is supposed to be the case. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 287 (i), (k) and 290 (e), the output sound after reception is not audibly output, and after reception on the third floor. A new display (aspect) does not appear as a display UB.

In this example, when the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the reception period on the 3rd floor. "No new display will appear as the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor", but instead of this, for "3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the reception period on the 3rd floor. The determination may be made when the operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be performed as the display UB after the reception on the 3rd floor. In short, even though the operation was performed for such an event ("3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor reception period, a new display is displayed as the 3rd floor reception post-display UB. (Does not appear) may occur when predetermined conditions are met.

However, as described above, even during the reception period on the 3rd floor, even though the operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the post-reception display and the post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation are performed. If the sound does not appear, the player feels uneasy, such as "Is it okay to just continue to operate the 3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)"? .. It is considered that such anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time for the 3rd floor reception period decreases. In particular, during the reception period on the 3rd floor, when an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the display UB after the reception on the 3rd floor may be displayed, but the reception is performed. It is even more so uneasy to feel such anxiety because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 287, 290 and 291 the "initial game strategy (timing)" aiming at the progress of the production by a plurality of operations on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". When the player gives up "tg2A to tg2C)" and switches to a "new game strategy" aiming at the progress of the production by operating the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" multiple times. It is supposed to be.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a), (h), and (i), the display after the reception of the third floor corresponding to the operation reception for the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is displayed. While UB2 (here, the depiction that the magic power value is set to "2", the depiction that the wizard MT is further accumulating MP, etc.) is displayed, the timing tg2D within the 3rd floor reception period ( At the timing shown in FIG. 291 (f), it is assumed that the first operation reception is performed for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, the first operation reception is performed for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing tg2D (timing shown in FIG. 291 (f)) within the 3rd floor reception period. If this is done, change A may occur after the reception on the 3rd floor, as shown in FIGS. 287 and 291 (f).

As such a change A after reception on the 3rd floor, for example, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) to (k) and 291 (f), "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)". The "3rd floor output sound after reception A1" corresponding to the first operation for "" is audibly output, and the "3rd floor operation-related display" corresponding to the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed. The "third floor effect display EF1" that makes it difficult to visually recognize "A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, and further, the display UA1 after the reception on the third floor is displayed. Here, as the display UA1 after the reception on the 3rd floor, "a depiction in which the hero YS attacks and the HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 75% remaining" is performed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 287 (i) and 287 (j), when the first operation for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed, the "audible output state" is performed. Regarding the "3rd floor reception allowable sound" and "3rd floor reception post-display UB that was in the displayed state", the first operation for "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" When there is a reception, it is not made inaudible or invisible as a trigger, and the execution state is continued.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 287 (e), when the first operation for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed, "a state in which a periodic change is performed". Regarding the 3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was in, the first operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" was triggered by this. The periodic change is hidden. At this time, although it is difficult to see by the "3rd floor effect display EF1", the display of the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself has been continued and has been performed until then. Only the periodic change is finished once. It should be noted that the periodic change once terminated in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Therefore, the "third floor effect display EF1" corresponding to the first operation reception for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is the "third floor" as shown in FIG. 291 (f). "Operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd floor operation-related display B (button operation image BMG)" are both displayed while they are displayed, and the "operated side" The "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed so as to be overlapped from the front.

When an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3rd floor reception period, the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to do is not displayed.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a), (h), and (i), after the reception corresponding to the previous operation reception for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". Change A is occurring in various situations, and the display after reception of the 3rd floor UB2 (here, the magic power value is "2") corresponding to the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". While the depictions shown in the above and the depictions of the wizard MT accumulating more MPs are still displayed, the timings tg2E and tg2F during the 3rd floor reception period (Fig. 291 (g), (h) ), It is assumed that the second and third operation receptions for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" are performed.

In this pachinko machine 1, at the timings tg2E and tg2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291 (g) and (h)) within the 3rd floor reception period, the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is used. On the other hand, when the second and third operation receptions are made, as in the case where the first operation reception is made for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", FIGS. 287 and 291. As shown in (g) and (h), change A may occur after the reception on the 3rd floor.

In particular, regarding the "output sound A1 after receiving the 3rd floor" and the "3rd floor effect display EF1", the same mode appears when the first operation reception is performed and when the second and third operation reception is performed. It has become possible. It should be noted that the periodic change in the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated in the previous operation reception is maintained in the terminated state when the second and third operation reception is performed. It may be set to be present, or the end state may be canceled and restarted, but when the operation is accepted for the second or third time, the end state of the periodic change reoccurs with this as an opportunity. It will be. That is, in this case, the periodic change once terminated in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation reception is performed for the second and third times.

In this regard, the "3rd floor display after reception UA" is basically the same as when the first operation reception is performed for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" (3rd floor display after reception UA1). The same is true. However, when the second operation reception is made, "a depiction that the hero YS attacks and the HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 50% remaining (3rd floor display after reception UA2)" is performed (Fig. 291 (g). )) When the third operation is accepted, "The hero YS attacks and the HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 25% remaining (3rd floor display after reception UA3)" etc. ( (See FIG. 291 (h)), progress as a production can be seen.

In the 3rd floor reception period according to this example, each time the operation for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed, the effect as "3rd floor reception post-display UA1" (BOSS character). HP reduction) was made to progress. However, even when an operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" such that the display is advanced with a predetermined probability based on the result of the determination, the display is displayed. It may or may not be progressed. However, if an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" during the 3rd floor reception period, the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is used. Unlike the case where the operation is performed, the "3rd floor output sound A1" is audibly output, the "3rd floor effect display EF1" is displayed, and the "3rd floor is displayed" even when the display does not progress. The periodic change in the operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is terminated.

And in this example, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a), (h), and (i), the reception corresponding to the third operation reception for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". The post-change A is occurring in various ways, and the 3rd floor post-acceptance display UB2 (here, the magic power value is "2") corresponding to the operation acceptance for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". In the situation where the depiction of "" and the depiction of the wizard MT accumulating more MP) are still displayed, at the timing tg2G (see Fig. 291 (i)) during the 3rd floor reception period. , It is assumed that the fourth operation reception is performed for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, when the fourth operation reception is made to the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing tg2G within the third floor reception period, the change A after the reception on the third floor. Can occur. For example, as one of the changes A after the reception on the 3rd floor, the reception period on the 3rd floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 287 (a) and 287 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 287 (h) and 287 (k) and 291 (f) and (l), the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated according to the operation. The "output sound A2 after reception on the 3rd floor" is audibly output, and the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is visually recognized. The “3rd floor effect display EF2” that makes it difficult is displayed, and further, the display UA4 after the reception on the 3rd floor is displayed.

In this regard, the 3rd floor effect display EF2 according to this effect example has "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd floor operation-related display B (button)" as shown in FIG. 291 (i). "Image BMG)" is started to be displayed while none of them are hidden, and the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" on the operated side is started. ) ”Is displayed so that it can be seen overlapping from the front of the“ 3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) ”.

When an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3rd floor reception period, the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to do is not displayed.

In addition, the "3rd floor post-reception display UA4" corresponding to the 4th operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 3rd floor reception period is relatively expected. Aspect UA4-1 (FIG. 291 (i)-(k)) with a high (ratio of big hits) appears, and a mode UA4 with a lower expectation (ratio of big hits) than that aspect. -2 (FIGS. 291 (l) to (n)) may appear in some cases. Further, as described above, when the display UA4 after reception on the 3rd floor is displayed, the corresponding "output sound A2 after reception on the 3rd floor" is also audibly output, but the "output sound A2 after reception on the 3rd floor" is also expected. The output may be audible in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when the mode UA4-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "3rd floor post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291 (i), it is relatively as the "3rd floor post-reception display UA4". It is intended to display the "third floor effect display EF2-1", which is a mode different from the mode in which the mode UA4-2 having a low degree of expectation appears.

That is, when the mode UA4-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "display UA after receiving the third floor", the first mode EF2-1 (see FIG. 291 (i)) is displayed as the third floor effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA4-1 having a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "3rd floor post-acceptance display UA4".

On the other hand, when the mode UA4-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "3rd floor post-reception display UA4", it is relative as the "3rd floor post-reception display UA4" as shown in FIG. 291 (l). The "third floor effect display EF2-2", which is a mode different from the mode in which the mode UA4-1 having a high degree of expectation appears, is to be displayed.

That is, when the aspect UA4-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "third floor display after reception UA4", the second aspect EF2-2 (see FIG. 291 (l)) is displayed as the third floor effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "3rd floor post-acceptance display UA4". The third F effect display EF2 is displayed as an image display different from the third F effect display EF1 in both the first aspect EF2-1 and the second aspect EF2-2.

Further, in the third floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. 287 and FIGS. As shown in 291, the periodic change is hidden based on the fourth operation reception for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves. It will be.

In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the 3rd floor effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIGS. 291 (i) and 291), "3rd floor operation-related display A". (Sword decoration image SYG) ”and“ 3rd F operation-related display B (button image BMG) ”are not hidden, and“ 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) ”is relevant. 3rd F effect display It is displayed so that it overlaps with the back side of EF2. After that, the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are replaced with the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". ) ”(See FIGS. 291 (j) and 291 (m)). However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "3rd floor operation-related display UA4" includes such "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "3rd floor effect display". It is displayed behind any of the "EF2", which makes it difficult to see immediately after the "3rd floor reception post-display UA4" is displayed (FIGS. 291 (i), (FIG. 291), (FIG. 291), l)). However, by hiding the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", "3rd floor effect display EF2", etc. The visibility of the "third reception post-display UA4" will be gradually improved. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode while the "third floor effect display EF2" is displayed, the "third floor post-acceptance display UA4" has a high degree of expectation UA4-1 and a low degree of expectation. It is easy to recognize which of UA4-2 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 286 (k) and 286 (n), the "third floor post-acceptance display UA4" according to this production example is displayed according to the mode of expectation UA4-1 and UA4-2. Will be advanced.

In addition, during the 3rd floor reception period, as shown in FIG. 287, at the time of its occurrence, either "1st permissible sound B1" or "2nd permissible sound B2" is (selectively) as the 3rd floor reception permissible sound. Can be audibly output. For example, when the "first permissible sound B1" is audibly output as the third floor permissible sound when the third floor reception period occurs, the "second permissible sound B2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It is desirable to set it so that it is suggested that the degree of expectation (ratio) that a big hit is obtained is high. The first permissible sound B1 may be the same as or different from the above-mentioned "first permissible sound A1". Further, the second permissible sound B2 may be the same as or different from the above-mentioned "second permissible sound A2". Further, the 3rd floor reception permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output in any of a plurality of modes (plural permissible sounds), but is output only in one mode (one permissible sound). There may be.

In this regard, during the 3rd floor reception period, as shown in FIG. 287 (j), a situation may occur in which the operation reception is performed while the 3rd floor reception allowable sound is audibly output. When the operation reception for the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made, the audible output of the third floor reception allowable sound is not interrupted (timing tg2A, tg2B, tg2C). ).

In this regard, when the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is made while the 3rd floor reception allowable sound is audibly output, the 3rd floor reception allowable sound is triggered by this. The audible output of is interrupted (timing tg2G). However, during the 3rd floor reception period, even if the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed while the 3rd floor reception allowable sound is audibly output. Since there are both cases where the audible output of the 3rd floor reception allowable sound is interrupted (timing tg2G) and the case where the audible output of the 3rd floor reception allowable sound is not interrupted (timing tg2D, tg2E, tg2F). It can be expected that the tension when the operation is performed on the “3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)” during the 3rd floor reception period is suitably maintained.

Further, during the 3rd floor reception period, based on the fact that the operation was performed on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" was performed. "And" 3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG) "will be hidden, or the 3rd floor reception period will be terminated. However, when an operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the "third floor operation-related display A (sword)" is triggered by this operation no matter how many times the operation is performed. The "decorative image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" may not be hidden or the third floor reception period may not be terminated.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor reception period, the magic power value (the area filled with respect to the "magic" decoration display) is When the increase is accumulated, it is possible to wait until the timing tg3 at which the 3rd floor reception period ends arrives, and to perform a magical withdrawal effect based on the arrival of the timing tg3. In this case, even if the magic power value is accumulated until the increase, the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is permitted until the timing tg3 arrives. By doing so, it will be possible to challenge the BOSS character to make multiple attacks while the effect of magically leaving is confirmed, so it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Will be able to. However, when the display UA4 after the reception on the 3rd floor is displayed as a result of performing the attacks a plurality of times in this way (when the reception period on the 3rd floor ends), the effect of magically leaving is no longer performed.

Alternatively, the effect determination is performed prior to generating the 3rd floor reception period, and when a special determination result is not obtained as a result of the effect determination, the "3rd floor operation unit B (3rd floor operation unit B) is used within the 3rd floor reception period. Here, no matter how many times the operation button 410) is operated, the magical power value does not accumulate until it increases (the reception period does not end), so that it is executed as a predetermined effect. May be good. In this case, when the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated for the fourth time, the "third floor display after reception UA4" has a relatively low expectation. UA4-2 may always appear, or UA4-1 having a relatively high expectation may appear. In this regard, if an operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the mode UA4-1 having a relatively high expectation may appear. No matter how many times the operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the magic power value cannot be accumulated until the increase. Can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is not limited to "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD", but also "No. 1". Even in relation to the "3F post-reception display UA", it is not displayed on the back side of the display, but is displayed so as to overlap the front side thereof (see FIGS. 291 (f) to (n) and the like). In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) appears to overlap the front side even in relation to the decorative symbol SZ. (Refer to FIG. 290, FIG. 291 and the like), but in relation to the decorative symbol SZ, it may be displayed so as to be overlapped on the back side thereof.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after the reception on the 3rd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of the wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is described in the 3rd floor reception period as "3rd floor operation unit A (here, here). , Sword decoration 5001) ”is not hidden based on this. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 287 (i) and 291. It means that the display is continued when the "3rd floor reception post-reception display UA4" and the "3rd floor effect display EF" corresponding to the operation for the "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" are started to be displayed. Of course, even when the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd floor operation-related display B (button magic image BMG)", and "3rd floor effect display EF" are hidden. The display can be continued.

However, in this case, the display UB after the reception on the 3rd floor (depiction that the magic power value increases, the depiction that the wizard MT is accumulating MP, etc.) is not displayed during the period when "Display UA4 after reception on the 3rd floor" is displayed. It is desirable to display it. As a result, while appealing that it is possible to advance the production by the operation reception (magic by the wizard) for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "3rd floor" It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the production has progressed by receiving the operation for the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, in the third floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 287, 290, 291 and the like, when the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated. Based on this, the periodic changes (see FIG. 289) that have appeared up to that point in the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are excluded. It continues without displaying (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, during the 3rd floor reception period, the periodic change in the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is the "3rd floor operation unit B (3rd floor operation unit B). Here, before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the operation button 410) ”is performed, the display mode does not change, and those periodic changes remain. Therefore, even after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made, the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and The "third floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period 3F time A, period 3F time B).

On the other hand, during the 3rd floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 287 and 291 when the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated, the "3rd floor operation-related" is based on this. The periodic changes in "Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are hidden. Here, at the first to third operation receptions for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "third floor operation-related display" are displayed. "B (button image BMG)" itself does not hide, but hides (ends) those periodic changes, but it is the fourth time for "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)". At the operation reception desk, by hiding the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves, those periodic changes are hidden. It is supposed to be displayed.

Further, in this example, while the reception period on the 3rd floor is continued, the gauge image GG is described to decrease with the passage of time, but it may not always be performed.

Further, during the 3rd floor reception period, the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is displayed and the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, here, the operation reception unit B)" that allows multiple operation receptions is permitted. Even if the "operation button 410)" is kept in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (automatic repeated hits). The function is not activated) (see FIG. 287 (b)). In this case, during the reception period on the 3rd floor, a plurality of operations are performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". Needless to say, if the receptionist wants to be made, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

However, during the 3rd floor reception period, the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed and the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, here, the operation reception unit A)" that allows multiple operation receptions is permitted. When the "sword decoration body 5001)" is kept in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (the automatic continuous striking function is enabled and the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals. (See FIG. 287 (a)). In this production example, it is assumed that the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state from the timing tg2D (the situation shown in FIG. 291 (f)). As a result, the operation is accepted at predetermined time intervals (timing tg2E, tg2F, tg2G).

Further, the 3rd floor reception period is originally continued until the timing tg3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period) as shown in FIG. 287 (c), and the timing tg3 has arrived. It is terminated based on that. In this respect, the 3rd floor reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 288, the operation reception that ends the reception period until the timing tg3 arrives in the 3rd floor reception period (here, "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration)" If the 4th operation reception for "body 5001)" is not performed, the operation reception for ending the reception period by the operation for "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" within the reception period. (Here, the same post-reception change A as when the fourth operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed) may occur based on the arrival of the timing tg3. It has become like. That is, in this case, the effect corresponding to the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in which the operation is required multiple times within the 3rd floor reception period and the so-called automatic continuous striking function is not enabled is a game. It can be expected that the tension will be maintained favorably because the person will not be able to enjoy it unless he / she operates it.

Even when the timing tg3 arrives without the end of the 3rd floor reception period even though the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated during the 3rd floor reception period. The same post-reception change A as when the operation was performed on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the reception period will occur based on the arrival of the timing tg3. .. That is, in this case, while the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled and after reception. Change A will occur.

In the 3rd floor reception period according to this example, when the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the 4th time). "Operation reception to end the reception period" was made so that the display UA4 after reception on the 3rd floor was displayed. A judgment is made when an operation is performed on the "decorative body 5001)", and based on the result of the judgment, "operation reception for ending the reception period" is performed and the display UA4 after reception on the 3rd floor is displayed. Or, "operation reception that does not end the reception period" may be performed so that any one of UA1 to UA1 to 3 displayed after reception on the 3rd floor is displayed. The point is that when an operation is performed on such an event ("3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" within the 3rd floor reception period, "operation reception for ending the reception period" is triggered by this. ”Will be done) as long as it occurs when the predetermined conditions are met.

Further, the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is hidden before the timing tg3 arrives. In this regard, the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is displayed on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed. Even if the operation is performed, it will not be hidden. However, regarding the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD", the operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" while the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed. When it is done, there are both cases where it is hidden as a trigger and cases where it is not hidden as a trigger. For example, while the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed, an operation reception is performed in which the 3rd floor reception period is terminated by an operation on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". At that time, the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" is hidden, but the operation on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" does not end the reception period on the 3rd floor. When the operation is accepted, the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" may not be hidden.

FIGS. 292 and 293 are time charts showing an example of the production content when the “condition 4F” is satisfied as the above-mentioned generation condition, the 4th floor reception period occurs, and the operation by the player is performed.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "4th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 4th F fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect description according to the 4th floor variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 4th floor variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started. Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected "4th F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 292 (a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "4th floor variation pattern", the timing th2 has arrived when the 4th floor time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "Condition 4F" is satisfied), "acceptance regarding changes after reception on the 4th floor (displays UA, UB after reception on the 4th floor, sound output after reception on the 4th floor, etc.)" is permitted. The above 4th floor reception period (valid period) can be generated.

Here, the 4th floor reception period according to this embodiment includes the above-mentioned 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), and the 3rd floor reception period. Unlike (see FIGS. 287 to 291), both the 4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the 4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are the first. Only one operation reception is allowed until the 4th floor reception period ends (multiple operation permission period). In this example, the "4th floor operation unit A" used in the 4th floor reception period is used as the "1st floor operation unit A" used in the 1st floor reception period, and the "2nd floor operation unit A" used in the 2nd floor reception period. , And the same operation unit (here, sword decoration body 5001) as the "3rd floor operation unit A" used in the 3rd floor reception period, but they may be different operation units. Further, the "4th floor operation unit B" used in the 4th floor reception period is replaced with the "1st floor operation unit B" used in the 1st floor reception period, the "2nd floor operation unit B" used in the 2nd floor reception period, and the like. The same operation unit (here, the operation button 410) as the "3rd floor operation unit B" used in the 3rd floor reception period is used, but the operation units may be different from each other.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 4th floor reception period is generated, first, a precursory effect display suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player (the 4th floor reception period occurs) is executed. It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing th1 before the occurrence of the 4th floor reception period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 292 (d) and 293 (d), As the above-mentioned precursor effect display, the "4th floor precursor effect display" is started to be executed. As shown in FIGS. 292 (d) and 292 (d), this "fourth floor precursor effect display" is displayed so as to straddle before and after the timing at which the fourth floor operation-related displays A and B are displayed. .. Although not shown in the illustration, the "4th floor precursor effect display" is executed as a mode different from the "1st floor precursor effect display" and the "2nd floor precursor effect display", and is referred to as "3rd floor precursor effect display". It is desirable to carry out in the same manner. However, the "4th floor precursor effect display" may be executed in a mode different from that of the "3rd floor precursor effect display".

That is, in this production example, even when the 4th floor reception period occurs, operation reception for the 4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is permitted as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293. "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and 4th floor operation unit B (here, operation) that can appear only when the state is reached or the operation reception is permitted. The "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" that can appear only when the operation reception for the button 410) is permitted or the operation reception is permitted is displayed. Each is to be displayed. In this production example, the timing at which the 4th floor reception period occurs and the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed, respectively. The timing is the same, but it does not have to be the same. For example, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 4th floor precursor effect display ZFD is displayed. The display may be started before the timing when the 4th floor reception period occurs, and the display may be performed so as to straddle the timing. Alternatively, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed later than the timing when the 4th floor reception period occurs. You may.

The "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" according to this example are the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body). It is displayed as "display that imitates 5001) (image display)" and "display that imitates 4th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) (image display)". The displayed contents are not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are the same while the "4th floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed. The display is started so that it can be seen overlapping behind the "4th floor precursor effect display ZFD".

Further, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. .. That is, as described above, during the 4th floor reception period, the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is permitted to accept only one operation as an operation unit that allows the player to accept the operation. ) ”And“ 4th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) ”that allows only one operation reception.

As for the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the portion (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is the first. When a moving image such as "displayed in one mode and then sequentially displayed in several other modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change requires a predetermined period 4F time A. It is designed to appear repeatedly.

Regarding the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", the portion (button image BMG) of the operation receiving unit of the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is the second". When a moving image such as "displayed in a mode and then sequentially displayed in several other modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period 4F time B. It is supposed to appear.

According to these configurations, during the 4th floor reception period, each "4th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)", "4th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" and the like The "operation receiving part" will appear as a depiction of moving up and down the movable range. In this example, "cycle 4F time A" and "cycle 4F time B" are set as longer times than "cycle 3F time A" in the above-mentioned third floor reception period. Therefore, in the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" in the 4th floor reception period, the "operation receiving unit" slowly moves up and down in the movable range as compared with the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period. Will be portrayed. In this case, the "4th floor operation unit A" corresponding to the "4th floor operation-related display A" in the 4th floor reception period is the "3rd floor operation" corresponding to the "3rd floor operation-related display A" in the 3rd floor reception period. It is provided as the same operation unit as "Part A" (here, the sword decoration body 5001), so that the time required for the periodic change is different from each other even though the image is displayed for the same operation unit. It is desirable to be able to do it. The cycle 4F time A may be set as the same time as the cycle 1F time A or the cycle 2F time A.

When the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing th2 when the 4th floor reception period occurs. It is desirable to wait for the timing th2 when the 4th floor reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are the above-mentioned "first" until the timing th2 arrives. It will be displayed in the form of maintaining the "aspect" and the "second aspect" respectively.

In this example, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed while the "4th floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed. The display is started in the form of appearing behind the "4th floor precursor effect display", and its periodic change is started. In this example, the display range of the 4th floor precursor staging display ZED is reduced with the passage of time.

The "4th floor precursor effect display" according to this example is in front of the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". It is composed only of "aspects" that are displayed so as to overlap with each other on the side, and "aspects" that are displayed so as to be overlapped on the rear side thereof are not executed. As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the "4th floor precursor effect display" according to this example is started to be displayed before the timing th2 when the 4th floor reception period occurs, and during the 4th floor reception period. On the other hand, the timing th3 at which the set time elapses (the timing th3 at which the 4th floor reception period ends without any operation by the player) is hidden before the arrival.

Although not shown in the figure, for example, if an operation is performed on the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 4th floor reception period, the hero will be BOSS based on the one-time operation reception. It is designed to provide a directing effect such as "whether or not the character can be defeated", and whether the jackpot expectation is high or low depending on the result (may be "100%" or "0%"). May be suggested. However, it is desirable that the production content is described as different from other reception periods (for example, the type of BOSS character is different).

On the other hand, if the operation for "4th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed within the 4th floor reception period, "based on the one-time operation reception, the witch magically leaves the BOSS battle. "Whether or not you can (escape)" is provided, and depending on the result, whether the jackpot expectation is high or low ("100%" or "0%" may be used. ) May be suggested.

During the 4th floor reception period related to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "4th floor operation-related display A", "4th floor operation-related display B", "hero", "witch", "BOSS character", etc. , Most of them are covered by the "4th floor precursor staging display", and it is said that the whole picture cannot be recognized. However, the "4th floor precursor effect display" according to this effect example is different from the case of the above-mentioned "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD", and is before the timing th3 when the set time as the 4th floor reception period elapses. It is supposed to be hidden in. Further, since the display area of the "4th floor precursor effect display" is reduced with the passage of time, the "4th floor operation-related display A", the "4th floor operation-related display B", and the "4th floor operation-related display B" are also used. The visibility of "Brave", "Wizard", "BOSS character", etc. will be gradually improved from the stage before the "4th floor precursor effect display" is hidden.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 292, it is assumed that the operation is received for the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing th2A within the 4th floor reception period. .. In this example as well, the operation reception is performed based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the operation reception is not limited to this, and the "operation reception based on the operation detection signal" should be realized by another method. You may.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing th2A within the 4th floor reception period, a change B after the reception on the 4th floor occurs. For example, as one of the changes B after the reception on the 4th floor, the reception period on the 4th floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 292 (b) and 292 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 292 (i) and 292 (k), the "fourth floor after reception output sound B" corresponding to the operation for the "fourth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output. At the same time, the "4th floor effect display EF" is displayed, and further, the "4th floor display after reception UB" is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 292 (g), the 4th floor effect display EF according to this effect example is "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th floor operation-related display B (button). Both "Image BMG)" and "4th floor precursor effect display" are started to be displayed in a situation where they are not hidden. Moreover, in this example, the front of the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" on the non-operated side. It is displayed so as to overlap with each other, making it difficult to visually recognize the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)".

In addition, as the "4th floor post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation reception for the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 4th floor reception period, the degree of expectation (big hit is obtained) is relatively high. Aspect UB-1 with a high proportion) appears, and an embodiment UB-2 (see FIG. 292 (i)) with a lower expectation (ratio at which a jackpot is obtained) than the embodiment appears. There are now. Further, as described above, when the display UB after reception on the 4th floor is displayed, the corresponding "output sound B after reception on the 4th floor" is also audibly output, but the "output sound B after reception on the 4th floor" is also expected. The output may be audible in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when the mode UB-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "4th floor post-reception display UB", the mode UB-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor post-reception display UB". The "4th F effect display EF-1", which is a mode different from that of the above, is to be displayed.

That is, when the aspect UB-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "4th floor display UB after reception", the first aspect EF-1 (see FIG. 292 (g)) is displayed as the 4th floor effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UB-1 having a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "4th floor post-acceptance display UB".

On the other hand, when the mode UB-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor post-reception display UB", the mode UB-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "4th floor post-reception display UB". The 4th floor effect display EF is displayed in a different manner from the case.

That is, when the aspect UB-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor display UB after reception", the second aspect EF-2 (see FIG. 292 (g)) is displayed as the 4th floor effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UB-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor post-acceptance display UB".

Further, in the 4th floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are shown in FIG. 292. The periodic change is hidden based on the operation for the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves. It will be.

Further, in the 4th floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "4th floor precursor staging display" is also based on the operation for the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 292. Is hidden.

In this example, when the operation is immediately received for the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" (the situation where the 4th floor effect display EF is displayed), the "4th floor operation" is performed. The related display A (sword decoration image SYG), the 4th floor operation related display B (button image BMG), and the 4th floor precursor effect display are not hidden, and are not hidden, and are related to the 4th floor operation. The display A (sword decoration image SYG) ”is displayed so as to overlap with the back side of the 4th floor effect display EF. After that, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and the "4th floor precursor effect display" are displayed on the "4th floor operation unit". B (here, the operation button 410) ”is set to be hidden based on the operation. However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "4th floor operation-related display UB" includes such "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "4th floor effect display". It is displayed behind any of the "EFs", which makes it difficult to visually recognize the "4th floor after reception display UB" immediately after it is displayed. However, by hiding the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", "4th floor effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "display UB after reception on the 4th floor" will be gradually improved. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode even when the 4th floor effect display EF is displayed, the “4th floor post-acceptance display UB” has a high degree of expectation UB-1 and a low degree of expectation UB-. It is easy to recognize which of 2 is displayed.

Then, the "4th floor post-acceptance display UB" according to this production example will advance the display content according to the modes UB-1 and UB-2 of the degree of expectation.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 293, it is assumed that the operation reception is performed for the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing th2B within the 4th floor reception period. ing. In this example as well, the operation reception is performed based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the operation reception is not limited to this, and the "operation reception based on the operation detection signal" should be realized by another method. You may.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing th2B within the 4th floor reception period, a change A occurs after the reception on the 4th floor. For example, as one of the changes A after the reception on the 4th floor, the reception period on the 4th floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 293 (a) and 293 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 293 (h) and 293 (k), the "4th floor after reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation for the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is audible output. At the same time, the "4th floor effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed. It is displayed, and further, the display UA after the reception on the 4th floor is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 293 (g), the 4th floor effect display EF according to this effect example is "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th floor operation-related display B (button). Both "Image BMG)" and "4th floor precursor effect display" are started to be displayed in a situation where they are not hidden.

In addition, as the "4th floor post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation reception for the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 4th floor reception period, the degree of expectation (big hit) is relatively high. Aspect UA-1 with a high percentage obtained) appears, and a mode UA-2 (see FIG. 293 (h)) with a lower expectation (ratio at which a jackpot is obtained) appears. There is now. Further, as described above, when the display UA after reception on the 4th floor is displayed, the corresponding "output sound A after reception on the 4th floor" is also audibly output, but the "output sound A after reception on the 4th floor" is also expected. The output may be audible in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when the aspect UA-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "4th floor post-acceptance display UA", the aspect UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor post-acceptance display UA". The "4th F effect display EF-1", which is a mode different from that of the above, is to be displayed.

That is, when the mode UA-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "display UA after receiving the 4th floor", the mode 1 EF-1 (see FIG. 293 (g)) is displayed as the 4th floor effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, appears as the "4th floor post-acceptance display UA".

On the other hand, when the mode UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor post-reception display UA", the mode UA-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "4th floor post-reception display UA". The 4th floor effect display EF is displayed in a different manner from the case.

That is, when the aspect UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor display after reception UA", the second aspect EF-2 (see FIG. 293 (g)) is displayed as the 4th floor effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "4th floor post-acceptance display UA".

According to such a 4th floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292 (g) and 293 (g), an operation is performed on the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". In the case where the operation is performed on the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the same mode as the 4th floor effect display EF (mode UA-1, mode UA-) is used. 2) will appear, but it can be said that this is a configuration different from any of the above-mentioned 1st to 3rd floor reception periods.

Further, in the 4th floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are shown in FIG. 293. Therefore, the periodic change is hidden based on the operation for the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves. It will be.

Further, during the 4th floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "4th floor precursor staging display" is also operated with respect to the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in FIG. 293. It is hidden based on.

In this example, when the operation is immediately received for the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" (the situation where the 4th floor effect display EF is displayed), the "4th floor" is displayed. "Operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "4th floor precursor effect display EF" are not hidden, and "4th floor" The operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) ”is displayed so as to overlap with the back side of the 4th floor effect display EF. After that, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and the "4th floor precursor effect display EF" are displayed on the "4th floor operation". It is supposed to be hidden based on the operation for "Part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)". However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "4th floor operation-related display UA" includes such "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "4th floor effect display". It is displayed behind any of the "EFs", which makes it difficult to see immediately after the "4th floor reception post-display UA" is displayed. However, by hiding the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", "4th floor effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "4th floor display after reception UA" will be gradually improved. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode even when the 4th floor effect display EF is displayed, the “4th floor post-acceptance display UA” has a high degree of expectation UA-1 and a low degree of expectation UA-. It is easy to recognize which of 2 is displayed.

Then, the "4th floor post-acceptance display UA" according to this production example will advance the display content according to the modes UA-1 and UA-2 of the degree of expectation.

In addition, during the 4th floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, either "1st allowable sound C1" or "2nd allowable sound C2" is selected as the 4th floor reception allowable sound when the sound is generated. Can be audibly output. For example, when the 4th floor reception period occurs and the "first allowable sound C1" is audibly output as the reception allowable sound, the jackpot is higher than when the "second allowable sound C2" is audibly output as the reception allowable sound. It is desirable to set so as to suggest that the obtained degree of expectation (ratio) is high.

The "first allowable sound C1" as the 4th floor acceptance allowable sound is preferably a sound that is not audibly output as the 2nd floor acceptance allowable sound or the 3rd floor acceptance allowable sound. On the other hand, the "second allowable sound C2" as the 4th floor acceptance allowable sound may be output as the same sound as the "first allowable sound A2" of the 2nd floor acceptance allowable sound. Further, the "second allowable sound C2" as the 4th floor acceptance allowable sound may be output as the same sound as the "second allowable sound B2" of the 3rd floor acceptance allowable sound.

In this regard, in the 4th floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292 (j) and 293 (j), either "first permissible sound C1" or "second permissible sound C2" is audible as the reception permissible sound. Although it is possible that an operation is accepted while the sound is being output, the "4th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" and the "4th floor operation unit B (here, here, sword decoration body 5001)" can occur. Regardless of which of the operation buttons 410) ”, the audible output of the 4th floor acceptance allowable sound (1st allowable sound A1 and 2nd allowable sound A2) is interrupted. Yes (timing th2A, th2B).

Further, during the 4th floor reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, "4th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" and "4th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". No matter which of the above, the operation is accepted, the "4th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are triggered by this. Is hidden or the 4th floor reception period is terminated.

Further, the 4th floor reception period is originally continued until the timing th3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period) as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, and the timing th3 has arrived. It is terminated based on that. In this respect, the 4th floor reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated. More specifically, if the operation reception for ending the reception period is not performed until the timing th3 arrives in the 4th floor reception period, "4th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration)" is performed within the reception period. The same post-acceptance change A as when the operation was performed on the body 5001) ”can occur based on the arrival of the timing th3.

FIG. 294 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the “condition 5F” is satisfied as the above-mentioned generation condition, the 5th floor reception period occurs, and the operation by the player is performed.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "fifth F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 5th F fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 5th floor variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 5th floor variation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at the time of non-reach, etc.), etc.) is started. Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected "fifth F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 294, within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "fifth F variation pattern", based on the arrival of the timing ti2 in which the fifth F time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the satisfaction of "Condition 5F"), "Acceptance regarding changes after reception on the 5th floor (displays UA, UB after reception on the 5th floor, sound output after reception on the 5th floor, etc.)" is permitted. The 5th floor reception period (valid period) can be generated.

Here, the 5th floor reception period according to this embodiment has basically the same configuration as the above-mentioned 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286). Therefore, during the 5th floor reception period, the 5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can only accept one operation until the 5th floor reception period ends. The 5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept a plurality of operations until the 5th floor reception period ends (multiple operations are allowed). period). The "5th floor operation unit A" and "5th floor operation unit B" used in the 5th floor reception period are the same as the "2nd floor operation unit A" and "2nd floor operation unit B" used in the 2nd floor reception period, respectively. It is desirable to use it as an operation unit. However, this is not mandatory.

That is, in the 5th floor reception period (multiple operation allowable period), as in the above-mentioned 2nd floor reception period, for example, an operation on the 5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) in which a plurality of operations are permitted is performed. Although it started, the player felt uneasy that the final result display did not appear easily, and during the 5th floor reception period (multiple operation allowable period), "5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button) It is assumed that there may be a case where the production is advanced by switching from "operation for 410)" to "operation for the 5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 5th floor reception period is generated, first, a precursory effect display suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player (the 5th floor reception period occurs) is executed. It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing ti1 before the 5th floor reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 294 (a), the above-mentioned precursor effect display is ". The 5th floor precursor effect display ”is started to be executed. As shown in FIG. 294 (d), this "fifth floor precursor effect display" is displayed so as to straddle before and after the timing at which the fifth floor operation-related displays A and B are displayed. The "fifth floor precursor effect display" is executed as a mode (type) different from the "first floor precursor effect display" and the "second floor precursor effect display". Further, it may be executed in the same manner as the "3rd floor precursor effect display" or the "4th floor precursor effect display". However, the "fifth floor precursor effect display" may be executed in the same mode as the "second floor precursor effect display", or may be executed in a mode different from the "third floor precursor effect display".

That is, in this production example, even when the 5th floor reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 294 and the like, the operation reception for the 5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is permitted. Or, the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can appear only when the operation reception is permitted, and the fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410). The "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" that can appear only when the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted is displayed. It has become a thing. In this production example, the timing at which the 5th floor reception period occurs and the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed, respectively. The timing is the same, but it does not have to be the same. For example, the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed later than the timing at which the fifth floor precursor effect display is displayed, and the second The display may be started before the timing when the 5th floor reception period occurs, and the display may be performed so as to straddle the timing. Alternatively, the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed later than the timing when the 5th floor reception period occurs. You may.

The "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" according to this example are the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body). It is displayed as "a display imitating 5001) (an image display)" and "a display imitating the 5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) (an image display)". The displayed contents are not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are the "fifth floor precursor effect display" while the "fifth floor precursor effect display" is displayed. The display is started so that it can be seen overlapping behind the "5th floor precursor effect display".

Further, the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. .. That is, as described above, during the 5th floor reception period, as the operation unit to which the player can accept the operation, only one operation reception is permitted. "The 5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) ) ”And“ 5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) ”that allows multiple operation receptions are prepared.

As for the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the portion (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving portion of the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is predetermined. When a moving image such as "displayed in a mode and then sequentially displayed in several modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period 5F time A. It has become.

Further, regarding the "fifth F operation-related display B (button image BMG)", the portion (button image BMG) in which the operation receiving portion of the "fifth F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is imitated" is a specific embodiment. When a moving image such as "displayed in, and then sequentially displayed in several modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5F time B. It has become.

According to these configurations, during the 5th floor reception period, each "5th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)", "5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" and the like The "operation receiving part" will appear as a depiction of moving up and down the movable range. In this example, the period 5F time A and the period 5F time B are exemplified as the same time, but they may be set to different times. However, since the time is set longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period, the 5th floor reception period is the same as the above-mentioned 2nd floor reception period and the 3rd floor reception period. In comparison, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted as slowly moving up and down in its movable range. It is desirable that the cycle 5F time A and the cycle 5F time B are set as the same times as the cycle 2F time A and the cycle 2F time B, respectively.

When the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing ti2 when the 5th floor reception period occurs. It is desirable to wait for the timing ti2 when the 5th floor reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, the "fifth F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" have the above-mentioned predetermined embodiments until the timing ti2 arrives. It will be displayed in a form that maintains each specific mode.

And in this example as well, the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" are displayed while the "fifth floor precursor effect display" is displayed. The display is started in the form of appearing behind the "5th floor precursor effect display", and its periodic change is started. The display range of the 5th floor precursor staging display is reduced with the passage of time.

However, the "fifth floor precursor effect display" according to this example is different from the "second floor precursor effect display", and is different from the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button operation). For "Image BMG)", it is composed only of "Aspects" that appear to overlap on the front side of them, and "Aspects" that appear to overlap on the rear side of them are not executed. It has become. As shown in FIG. 294 and the like, the "fifth floor precursor effect display" according to this example is started to be displayed before the timing ti2 when the fifth floor reception period occurs, and is set for the fifth floor reception period. The timing ti3 at which the set time elapses (the timing ti3 at which the 5th floor reception period ends without any operation by the player) is hidden before the arrival.

By the way, in the 5th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as in the 2nd floor reception period described above, the "hero" and the "witch" facing the BOSS character are displayed on the staging display device 1600, respectively. The "hero" is used as a character that operates in response to an operation on the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", and the "witch" is the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button)". It has come to be used as a character that operates in response to an operation for "410)". However, it is desirable that the production content is different from other reception periods including the 2nd floor reception period (for example, the type of BOSS character is different).

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 5th floor reception period, the "hero is a BOSS character based on the one-time operation reception". "Whether or not you can defeat" is provided, and depending on the result, whether the jackpot expectation is high or low (may be "100%" or "0%") Can be suggested.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th floor reception period, an effect such as "whether or not it is possible to withdraw (escape) from the BOSS battle" is produced. Gender is being provided. That is, when the operation for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 5th floor reception period, the magic power value ("magic" decorative display) displayed at the lower right of the display screen is displayed. On the other hand, the filled area) can be increased, and when the magical power value is full, the wizard casts magic and succeeds in withdrawing from the BOSS battle (escape). Then, when the withdrawal (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is higher (may be "100%") than in the case of not succeeding.

During the 5th floor reception period related to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "5th floor operation-related display A", "5th floor operation-related display B", "hero", "witch", "BOSS character", etc. , Most of them are covered by the "5th floor precursor staging display", and it is said that the whole picture cannot be recognized.

However, the "fifth floor precursor effect display" according to this example is different from the case of the above-mentioned "second floor precursor effect display", and is not before the timing ti3 when the set time as the fifth floor reception period elapses. It is supposed to be displayed. Further, since the display area of the "fifth floor precursor effect display" is reduced with the passage of time, the "fifth floor operation-related display A", the "fifth floor operation-related display B", and the "fifth floor operation-related display B" are also used. The visibility of "Brave", "Wizard", "BOSS character", etc. will be gradually improved from the stage before the "5th floor precursor effect display" is hidden.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 294, in the timing ti2A within the 5th floor reception period, the first operation reception (the reception period is not terminated) for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". It is assumed that the operation is accepted). In this example as well, the operation reception is performed based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the operation reception is not limited to this, and the "operation reception based on the operation detection signal" should be realized by another method. You may.

In this example, in the timing ti2A within the 5th floor reception period, when the first operation reception is performed for the “5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”, FIGS. 294 (i), ( As shown in k), as one of the changes B after reception on the 5th floor, the "magic value (the area filled with respect to the" magic "decorative display) has increased (the magic value has changed from" 0 "to" 1 ". "Depiction that changes)" and "Depiction that the wizard MT is accumulating MP" are performed respectively (display UB1 after reception on the 5th floor). The 5th floor post-reception display UB1 may be executed in the same mode (same production image) as the above-mentioned "2nd floor post-reception display UB1".

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th floor reception period, the output sound after reception corresponding to this is audibly output. (See FIG. 294 (k)). That is, in this case, the BOSS character is depicted as a "witch" secretly accumulating MP, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, when the operation is performed, Since the response (directability) is low, it becomes possible to arouse anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (directability) when operating the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th floor reception period may be too low, the game is a hobby. There is a concern that it will decline. Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after reception of the 5th floor (“magic value increases”) when the operation is performed on the “5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” within the reception period of the 5th floor. Regarding "depiction" and "depiction of the wizard MT accumulating MP", etc.), make sure that it is not displayed behind the "5th floor precursor effect display" mentioned above, and when it overlaps, it is on the front side. It is supposed to be displayed. According to such a configuration, the operation reception itself is properly performed while the output sound is not audibly output after the reception, which arouses anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such an operation?" You will be able to better suggest that you are in a situation.

Regarding such "change B after reception on the 5th floor", the effect change different from the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (for example, the light emission mode of the effect lamp is changed) including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later. It is also possible to make further changes in the effect. Alternatively, such "change B after reception on the 5th floor" does not necessarily have to be executed by a plurality of staging elements, and any one of the above-mentioned staging elements (for example, a staging that changes the light emitting mode of the staging lamp). It may be realized only by change).

Further, the execution time of the "fifth floor after reception display UB" corresponding to the operation reception for the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation receptions for the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are the operations for the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" performed before that. It will be performed while the corresponding display UB after reception on the 5th floor is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 294, when the second operation is performed on the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing ti2B within the fifth floor reception period. Is assumed. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 294 (i) and 294 (k), as one of the changes B after the reception on the 5th floor, the "magic value (" magic "decorative display is filled with". The depiction that the area) increases (the magic power value changes from "1" to "2") and "the depiction that the wizard MT is further accumulating MP" are performed respectively (reception on the 5th floor). Rear display UB2). The 5th floor post-reception display UB2 may also be executed in the same mode (same production image) as the above-mentioned "2nd floor post-reception display UB2". However, at this time, the output sound is not audibly output after reception as described above (see FIG. 294 (k)).

In this example, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing ti2C within the fifth floor reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 294 (i) and 294 (k), the output sound after reception is not audibly output, and a new display is displayed as the 5th floor post-reception display UB. (Aspect) does not appear.

In this example, when the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the 5th floor reception period. "No new display will appear as the display UB after reception on the 5th floor", but instead of this, for "5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the reception period on the 5th floor. The determination may be made when the operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be performed as the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor. In short, even though the operation was performed for such an event ("5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 5th floor reception period, a new display is displayed as the 5th floor reception post-display UB. (Does not appear) may occur when predetermined conditions are met.

However, as described above, even during the 5th floor reception period, the post-reception display and the post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation are performed even though the operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". If the sound does not appear, the player feels uneasy, such as "Is it okay to just continue to operate the 5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)"? .. It is considered that such anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time for the 5th floor reception period decreases. In particular, during the 5th floor reception period, when an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the display UB after the 5th floor reception may be displayed, but the reception is received. It is even more so uneasy to feel such anxiety because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 294, the "initial game strategy (timing ti2A to ti2C)" aiming at the progress of the production by operating the "fifth operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" a plurality of times is performed. A "new" aiming at the progress of the production by operating the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" side, which allows the player to give up and make the final production result appear with only one operation. It is supposed to be the case of switching to "a game strategy".

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 294, the 5th floor post-acceptance display UB2 (here, the magic power value is “2”” corresponding to the operation reception for the “5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. In the situation where the depiction is displayed and the depiction that the wizard MT is further accumulating MP, etc.), in the timing ti2D within the 5th floor reception period, "5th floor operation unit A (here, here, It is assumed that an operation is performed on the sword decoration body 5001) ”.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing ti2D within the fifth floor reception period, a change A after the fifth floor reception occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the reception on the 5th floor, first, the reception period on the 5th floor is terminated based on the operation. In addition, the "5th floor after reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is audibly output, and the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword)" is audibly output. The "5th floor effect display EF" that makes it difficult to see the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "decorative body 5001)" is displayed, and the 5th floor display after reception UA is displayed. ..

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 294, the 5th floor effect display EF according to this effect example is the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image). "BMG)" is started to be displayed while none of them are hidden, and "5th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" on the operated side. The "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the above is displayed so as to overlap from the front.

When an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5th floor reception period, the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to do is not displayed.

In addition, as the "5th floor post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 5th floor reception period, the degree of expectation (big hit) is relatively high. There are cases where the aspect UA-1 having a high degree of acquisition (ratio obtained) appears, and there are cases where an aspect UA-2 having a lower degree of expectation (ratio of obtaining a big hit) appears than the aspect (ratio obtained). See FIG. 294 (h)). It is desirable that the 5th floor post-reception display UA is not executed in the same mode (same production image) as the above-mentioned "5th floor post-reception display UA". Further, as described above, when the display UA after reception on the 5th floor is displayed, the corresponding "output sound A after reception on the 5th floor" is also audibly output, but the "output sound A after reception on the 5th floor" is also expected. The output may be audible in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when the mode UA-1 having a relatively high expectation appears as the "5th floor post-reception display UA", and the mode UA-2 having a relatively low expectation appears as the "5th floor post-reception display UA". In some cases, the same mode is displayed as the "fifth effect display EF". That is, in this case, even if the aspect of the "fifth F effect display EF" is confirmed, the aspect of the "fifth floor after reception display UA" cannot be recognized.

In this case, the "fifth effect display EF" is the same as the mode EF-1 and the mode EF-2 of the "second F effect display EF" on the side with the lower expectation. It may be displayed with. Further, such a "fifth effect display EF" is displayed in the same mode as the mode EF-1 and the mode EF-2 of the "third F effect display EF" on the side with the lower expectation. It may be displayed in the same mode as the mode EF-1 and the mode EF-2 of the "4th F effect display EF" on the side with the lower expectation. good.

Further, in the 5th floor reception period according to this embodiment, the “5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and the “5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)” are shown in FIG. 294. Therefore, the periodic change is hidden based on the operation for the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves. It will be.

Further, in the 5th floor reception period according to this embodiment, the "5th floor precursor effect display" is also omitted from the illustration, but while the "5th floor precursor effect display" is displayed, the "5th floor operation unit A" is displayed. (Here, the sword decoration body 5001) ”is hidden based on the operation. However, the "fifth floor precursor effect display" is not hidden due to the operation of the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

In this example, when the operation for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed while the "5th floor precursor effect display" is displayed (not shown), the operation reception is performed. When the situation is immediately after the setting (the situation where the 5th floor effect display EF is displayed), "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". , And "5th floor precursor effect display" are not hidden, and "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" appears to overlap behind the 5th floor effect display EF. Is displayed. After that, the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and the "fifth floor precursor effect display" are displayed on the "fifth floor operation unit". It is supposed to be hidden based on the operation for "A (here, sword decoration body 5001)". However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "5th floor operation-related display UA" includes such "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", and "5th floor effect display". It is displayed behind any of the "EFs", which makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5th floor after reception display UA" immediately after it is displayed. However, by hiding the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)", "5th floor effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "5th floor display after reception UA" will be gradually improved. However, as described above, even if the aspect is confirmed while the 5th F effect display EF is displayed, the "5th floor post-acceptance display UA" has a high degree of expectation UA-1 and a low degree of expectation UA-. It is not possible to recognize which of the two is displayed.

In addition, during the 5th floor reception period, as shown in FIG. 294, the 5th floor reception permissible sound may be audibly output when the sound is generated. However, when the 5th floor reception period occurs, only one mode can be audibly output as the 5th floor reception allowable sound, and the expectation (ratio) that a big hit is obtained is not suggested. It has been made.

In this regard, during the 5th floor reception period, as shown in FIG. 294 (j), a situation may occur in which the operation reception is performed while the 5th floor reception allowable sound is audibly output. When the operation reception for the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made, the audible output of the fifth floor reception allowable sound is not interrupted (timing ti2A, ti2B, ti2C). Moreover, in the 5th floor reception period, even when the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is made while the 5th floor reception period is being audibly output, the operation reception is triggered by this. The audible output of the 5th floor permissible sound is not interrupted (timing ti2D).

Further, during the 5th floor reception period, based on the fact that the operation was performed on the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" was performed. "And" 5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG) "will be hidden, or the 5th floor reception period will be terminated. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the "fifth floor operation-related display A" is triggered by this operation no matter how many times the operation is performed. (Sword decoration image SYG) "and" 5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG) "may not be hidden or the 5th floor reception period may not be terminated.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th floor reception period, the magic power value (the area filled with respect to the "magic" decoration display) is When the increase is accumulated, it is possible to wait until the timing ti3 at which the 5th floor reception period ends arrives, and to perform a magical withdrawal effect based on the arrival of the timing ti3. In this case, even if the magical power value is accumulated until the timing ti3 arrives, the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is permitted. By doing so, it will be possible to select whether or not to make a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of magically leaving is confirmed. You will be able to improve. However, in this case, when the operation for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed, the effect of magically leaving is not performed regardless of the effect result.

Alternatively, the effect determination is performed prior to generating the 5th floor reception period, and when a special determination result is not obtained as a result of the effect determination, the "5th floor operation unit B (5th floor operation unit B) is used within the 5th floor reception period. Here, no matter how many times the operation button 410) is operated, the magical power value does not accumulate until it increases (the reception period does not end), so that it is executed as a predetermined effect. May be good. In this case, when the operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the "5th floor display after reception UA" is used, and the degree of expectation is relatively low UA-2. May always appear, or the mode UA-1, which has a relatively high expectation, may appear. In this regard, if an operation is performed on the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the mode UA-1 having a relatively high expectation may appear. No matter how many times the operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the magic power value cannot be accumulated until the increase. Can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.) is not limited to "5th floor precursor effect display", but also "5th floor reception". Even in relation to the "rear display UA", it is not displayed on the back side thereof, but is displayed so as to overlap the front side thereof. In this example, when the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the "5th floor post-reception display UA", the 5th floor post-reception display UB (depiction in which the magic power value increases or the wizard MPs) is displayed. It was decided to display it so that it would appear to overlap the back side of the stored depiction, etc.), but even when the aspect UA-2 is displayed as the "5th floor post-reception display UA", the aspect UA- 2 may be displayed so as to overlap with the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor (depiction in which the magic power value increases, depiction in which the wizard is accumulating MP, etc.).

In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.) can be seen overlapping on the front side even in relation to the decorative design. Although it was decided to display it, in relation to the decorative pattern, it may be displayed so that it can be seen overlapping behind it.

Further, in this production example, the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of the wizard accumulating MP, etc.) is described in the 5th floor reception period as "5th floor operation unit A (here, here, depiction). When the operation for "Sword decoration body 5001)" is performed, it is prevented from being hidden based on this. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 294 (i) and the like, the 5th floor display UB (depiction in which the magic power value increases, depiction in which the witch is accumulating MP, etc.) is referred to as "5th floor operation unit A ( Here, the display is continued at the time when the "5th floor after reception display UA" and the "5th floor effect display EF" corresponding to the operation for the "sword decoration body 5001)" are started, and the "first" is continued. The display continues even when the 5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), the 5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG), and the 5th floor effect display EF are hidden. It will be.

However, in this case, the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (depiction of increasing magic power value, depiction of the wizard accumulating MP, etc.) will not be displayed during the period when "Display UA after reception on the 5th floor" is displayed. It is desirable to make it in the state of. As a result, while appealing that it is possible to advance the production by the operation reception (magic by the wizard) for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "5th floor". It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the production has progressed by receiving the operation for the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, in the 5th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 294 and the like, when the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated, the "5th floor" is based on this. Hide (end, interrupt, cycle switching, etc.) the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point in the operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG). It is supposed to continue without. That is, in the 5th floor reception period, the periodic change in the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is the "5th floor operation unit B (5th floor operation unit B). Here, before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the operation button 410) ”is performed, the display mode does not change, and those periodic changes remain. Therefore, even after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made, the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and The "fifth operation-related display B (button image BMG)" will continue to progress with each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period 5F time A, period 5F time B).

On the other hand, during the 5th floor reception period, as shown in FIG. 294, when the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated, the "5th floor operation-related display A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated. The periodic change in "sword decoration image SYG)" and "fifth F operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is hidden. Here, by hiding the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "fifth floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" themselves, their periodic changes are hidden. It is supposed to be.

Further, in this example, while the 5th floor reception period is continued, the gauge image GG is described to decrease with the passage of time, but it may not always be performed.

Further, in the 5th floor reception period, the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" is displayed, and the "5th floor operation unit B (here, here, the operation reception unit B)" that allows multiple operation receptions is permitted. Even if the "operation button 410)" is kept in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (automatic repeated hits). The function is not activated) (see FIG. 294 (b)). In this case, during the 5th floor reception period, a plurality of operations are performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)". Needless to say, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" if the reception is to be made.

Further, the 5th floor reception period is originally continued until the timing ti3 arrives when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), as shown in FIG. 294 (c), and the timing ti3 has arrived. It is terminated based on that. In this respect, the 5th floor reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, if the operation reception for ending the reception period is not performed until the timing ti3 arrives in the 5th floor reception period, even if the timing ti3 arrives, the "5th floor operation unit A (here, here)" is received in the 5th floor reception period. , Sword decoration 5001) ”or“ 5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) ”is not executed in the same manner as when the operation is performed.

By the way, in each of the above-mentioned 1st floor reception period to 5th floor reception period, operation opportunities are given to each of the two types of operation units (operation reception is permitted), and in the staging display device 1600, these two are given. Display related to the operation unit of each type (image display) is performed respectively. However, in any of the 1st floor reception period to the 5th floor reception period, it suffices as long as the operation opportunity is given to at least two types of operation units (operation reception is permitted), and three or more types are required. Operation opportunities may be given to each of the operation units of the above (operation reception is permitted).

In addition, as a type of such "reception period in which operation opportunities can be granted (operation reception is permitted) to at least two types of operation units",
-While the reception period is occurring, the operation opportunity is given by preventing the display (image display) related to the operation unit to which the operation opportunity is given (operation reception is allowed). It may be possible to further prepare a confidentiality reception period having a directing effect of concealing the state.

When such a confidentiality reception period is provided, for example, separately from the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) (or instead of the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)). In the 1st floor reception period, neither the "1st floor operation-related display A" nor the "1st floor operation-related display B" may be displayed, and the other configurations may have the same reception period. .. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of each other's effects (post-reception display, precursor effect display, reception allowable sound, etc.) as post-reception effects may be executed as different types from each other.

In addition, apart from the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) (or instead of the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)), in the 2nd floor reception period, "2nd floor operation-related" Neither the display A nor the second F operation-related display B may be displayed, and the other configurations may have the same reception period. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of each other's effects (post-reception display, precursor effect display, reception allowable sound, etc.) as post-reception effects may be executed as different types from each other.

In addition, apart from the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) (or instead of the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)), in the 3rd floor reception period, "3rd floor operation-related" Neither the display A nor the third floor operation-related display B may be displayed, and the other configurations may have the same reception period. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of each other's effects (post-reception display, precursor effect display, reception allowable sound, etc.) as post-reception effects may be executed as different types from each other.

Also, apart from the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293) (or instead of the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)), in the 4th floor reception period, "4th floor operation-related" Neither the display A nor the 4th floor operation-related display B may be displayed, and the other configurations may have the same reception period. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of each other's effects (post-reception display, precursor effect display, reception allowable sound, etc.) as post-reception effects may be executed as different types from each other.

In addition, apart from the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294) (or instead of the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294)), in the 5th floor reception period, "5th floor operation-related display A" and "5th floor operation-related display A" and "No. 5F Operation-related display B ”may not be displayed, and the other configurations may have the same reception period. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of each other's effects (post-reception display, precursor effect display, reception allowable sound, etc.) as post-reception effects may be executed as different types from each other.

Furthermore, when the confidentiality acceptance period is provided, the method is not limited to the method of concealing both of the two types of operation units.
For example, regarding the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) described below is replaced with a modified example of the 2nd floor reception period. It may be generated as. Further, regarding the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), instead of this, the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) described below is a modified example of the 3rd floor reception period. It may be generated as. Further, regarding the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), instead of this, the 8th floor reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) described below is a modified example of the 4th floor reception period. It may be generated as. Further, regarding the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), instead of this, the 9th floor reception period (see FIG. 301) described below is generated as a modification of the 5th floor reception period. May be good.

Further, in order to realize each of the inventions (confidentiality acceptance period) described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below, and each of the above-mentioned acceptances with reference to FIGS. 294. These may not always be provided for the period, or only the necessary types of the reception period may be provided.

FIGS. 295 and 296 are time charts showing an example of the production content when the "condition 2F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "sixth floor reception period" occurs as a modification of the second floor reception period. .. It should be noted that the example of the effect in the fluctuation pattern in which the "6th floor reception period" occurs is omitted from the illustration because there are many overlaps with the case where the above-mentioned second floor reception period occurs (see FIGS. 285 and 286). At the same time, basically, only the differences (changed points) from the "second floor reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "6th floor reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "2nd floor reception period" occurs.

That is, in the 6th floor reception period as well as the 2nd floor reception period described above, the 2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) operates once until the 6th floor reception period ends. Only reception is acceptable, and the 2nd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations until the end of the 6th floor reception period. (Multiple operation allowable period). Further, the other examples relating to these "second floor operation unit A" and "second floor operation unit B" can be appropriately applied as in the case of the above-mentioned second floor reception period.

However, in the "6th floor reception period", when the "6th floor reception period" occurs, the "2nd floor operation-related display A" corresponding to the 2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 295 (f) and 296 (f), the "second F operation-related display B" corresponding to the second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. It is different from the above-mentioned "second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)" in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, of the plurality of operation units (2nd floor operation unit A, 2nd floor operation unit B) in which operation reception is permitted, only a part of the operation units "is in a state where operation reception is permitted". It is now possible to keep the fact that it is in secret, and to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to this, and to maintain the tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 6th floor reception period is different from the above-mentioned 2nd floor reception period in that "2nd floor operation-related display A" is displayed and "2nd floor operation-related display B" is not displayed, but other configurations are used. And the contents of the production are the same as the above-mentioned 2nd floor reception period. Therefore, even when the 6th floor reception period occurs, the production is basically advanced according to the contents shown in FIGS. 285 and 286.

That is, the effect example when the "6th floor reception period" occurs is the "second floor operation-related display B (button image) when compared with the effect example (second floor reception period) shown in FIGS. 285 and 286. The only difference is that "Image BMG)" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same. Another example applicable to the configuration related to the 2nd floor reception period is the 6th floor reception period. The same applies to such a configuration (a configuration other than the second F operation-related display B).

Therefore, when the "6th floor reception period" occurs, first, the "2nd floor precursor staging display ZFD" is displayed at the timing when the 2nd floor operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 295. It is displayed so as to straddle the front and back.

Further, the "second F precursor effect display ZFD" is executed by both "aspect ZFD-1" and "aspect ZFD-2", and "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)". "What kind of mode is displayed, under what conditions it is hidden, and" 2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) "is displayed with periodic changes. The points are also as described above during the reception period on the second floor.

Further, in this production example, when the first operation for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 6th floor reception period, it is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned 2nd floor reception period (Fig.). 285 (c)), and with this as an opportunity, the display UB1 after the reception on the second floor is displayed. At this time, the same applies to the fact that the output sound is not audibly output after reception. However, in this production example, if the operation for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 6th floor reception period, the display UB1 after the reception of the 2nd floor is displayed in addition to the display. The "second F operation-related display B" is displayed when the operation is performed (see FIG. 295 (f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the timing tf2A, but the timing tf2A arrives. Until then, the "second F operation-related display B" is not displayed (in the situation shown in FIGS. 285 (a) and 285 (b), the "second F operation-related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing tf2A, the "second F operation-related display B" is displayed as an opportunity. (In the situation shown after FIG. 285 (c), "second F operation-related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is concealed at the time of occurrence of the "6th floor reception period" that the operation reception for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is acceptable. sell. However, the concealed state will be released once the operation reception for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made even once in the "6th floor reception period", so that a feeling of tension is felt. It can be expected that the hobby of the game will be improved while maintaining the suitable condition.

Here, such "second floor operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 even in the "sixth floor reception period". However, it is a condition that the display mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 284 to 286) that should be displayed when the reception period occurs is in the middle of the "6th floor reception period" and the operation is received. If it appears as, there is a concern that the player will remember the negative emotion of "intentionally hidden" and the game entertainment will decline.

Therefore, in the "sixth floor reception period" related to this production example, the "second floor operation-related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 284 to 286, but the "second floor operation-related display B" is displayed. Is displayed in a mode different from the modes shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 and the like. For example, the "2nd F operation-related display B" is not displayed as a model of the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and is displayed as a display image different from this. May be good. Further, regarding the "second F operation-related display B", the display may not show a periodic change. However, none of these is an indispensable configuration, and even if an operation reception is made for the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "6th floor reception period", the "6th floor reception period" is used as an opportunity to "receive". The 2nd floor operation-related display B ”may not be displayed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing tf2B within the sixth floor reception period. There is. In this case, also in the 6th floor reception period, as in the case of the 2nd floor reception period described above (see FIG. 285 (d)), the display after the 2nd floor reception UB2 is based on the second operation. Is displayed (see FIG. 295 (i)). At this time, the same applies to the fact that the output sound is not audibly output after reception (see FIG. 295 (k)).

In this regard, in the 6th floor reception period related to this production example, the display mode of the "2nd floor operation-related display B" does not change based on the second operation, and up to that point. The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 295 (e)).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing tf2C within the sixth floor reception period. There is. In this case, also in the 6th floor reception period, as in the case of the 2nd floor reception period described above (see FIG. 286 (e)), when the third operation is performed, FIGS. 286 (e) and FIG. As shown in 295 (i) and (k), not only the output sound after reception is not audibly output, but also a new display (aspect) does not appear as the display UB after reception on the second floor. Also in this example, even though the operation is performed for such an event (“2nd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” within the 6th floor reception period, the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor is new. The display does not appear) as long as it occurs when the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 295 (a), (h), and (i), the "second floor reception" corresponding to the operation reception for the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is thus performed. In the situation where "rear display UB2" and "2nd floor operation related display B" are displayed, "2nd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed at the timing tf2D within the 6th floor reception period. It is assumed that the operation is performed for.

Even in the 6th floor reception period, if an operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing tf2D, a change A occurs after the 2nd floor reception. That is, as one of the changes A after the reception on the 2nd floor, the reception period on the 6th floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 295 (a) and 295 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 286 (f) and 286 (i) and FIGS. 295 (h) and 295 (k), the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated according to the operation. The "output sound A after reception on the 2nd floor" is audibly output, and the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is visually recognized. The “2nd floor effect display EF” that makes it difficult is displayed, and further, the display UA after the reception of the 2nd floor is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 286 (f), (i) and 295, even when the operation is immediately received during the 6th floor reception period (the situation where the 2nd floor effect display EF is displayed). , "2nd floor operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd floor operation related display B", and "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD" are not hidden, and "2nd floor operation related display" The display A (sword decoration image SYG) ”is displayed so as to overlap with the back side of the second F effect display EF. After that, the "2nd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd floor operation-related display B", and "2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD" are displayed on the "2nd floor operation unit A (here, here, sword decoration image SYG)". It is supposed to be hidden based on the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) (see FIGS. 286 (g) and 286 (j)). However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "2nd floor reception period", the "2nd floor operation-related display B" that appears in the middle of the "6th floor reception period" and on condition that the operation is accepted is the first. 2F Display after reception UB2 may be hidden at the same timing (same conditions). That is, in this case, the display UA after the reception on the 2nd floor is hidden within the displayed period.

In addition, the "2nd floor operation-related display B" that appears in the middle of the "6th floor reception period" and on condition that the operation is accepted is different from the case of the above-mentioned "2nd floor reception period", and other In relation to the display image of the above, it may be displayed in the same manner as the display UB after the reception on the second floor. That is, in this case, the second F operation-related display B is not displayed on the back side of the above-mentioned "second F precursor effect display ZFD" and "second F effect display EF", and when they overlap, it is on the front side thereof. It will be displayed. Further, it may be displayed on the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. When such a configuration is adopted, the 2nd F operation-related display B is different from the 2nd F operation-related display A in relation to the above-mentioned “2F precursor effect display ZFD” and “2nd F effect display EF”. It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "2nd floor acceptance allowable sound", "whether or not the automatic continuous hitting function is enabled", "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled", etc. related to the 6th floor reception period, the above-mentioned 2nd floor reception period It is the same as the case of. However, in the 6th floor reception period, if there is no operation on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", as shown in FIG. 296, the "2nd floor" is within the 6th floor reception period. Needless to say, "operation-related display B" is not displayed.

FIGS. 297 and 298 are time charts showing an example of the production content when the "condition 3F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "7th floor reception period" occurs as a modification of the 3rd floor reception period. .. It should be noted that the production example in the fluctuation pattern in which the "7th floor reception period" occurs is omitted from the illustration because there are many overlaps with the case where the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period occurs (see FIGS. 290 and 291). At the same time, basically, only the differences (changed points) from the "3rd floor reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "7th floor reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as the case where the "3rd floor reception period" occurs.

That is, even in the 7th floor reception period, as in the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period, the 3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the 3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are both. Before the end of the 7th floor reception period, it is permissible to accept multiple operations (multiple operation permissible period). Further, the other examples relating to these "third floor operation unit A" and "third floor operation unit B" can be appropriately applied as in the case of the above-mentioned third floor reception period.

However, in the "7th floor reception period", when the "7th floor reception period" occurs, the "3rd floor operation-related display A" corresponding to the above 3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 297 (f) and 298 (f), the "third floor operation-related display B" corresponding to the third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. It is different from the above-mentioned "third floor reception period (see FIGS. 290 and 291)" in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, of the plurality of operation units (3rd floor operation unit A, 3rd floor operation unit B) in which operation reception is permitted, only a part of the operation units "is in a state where operation reception is permitted". It is now possible to keep the fact that it is in secret, and to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to this, and to maintain the tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 7th floor reception period is different from the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period in that "3rd floor operation-related display A" is displayed and "3rd floor operation-related display B" is not displayed. And the contents of the production are the same as the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period. Therefore, even when the 7th floor reception period occurs, the production is basically advanced according to the contents shown in FIGS. 290 and 291.

That is, the effect example when the "7th floor reception period" occurs is the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button image) when compared with the effect example (3rd floor reception period) shown in FIGS. 290 and 291. The only difference is that "Image BMG)" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same. Another example applicable to the configuration related to the 3rd floor reception period is the 7th floor reception period. The same applies to such a configuration (a configuration other than the third floor operation-related display B).

Therefore, when the "7th floor reception period" occurs, first, the "3rd floor precursor staging display ZFD" is displayed at the timing when the 3rd floor operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291. It is displayed so as to straddle the front and back.

In addition, how the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed with respect to the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and under what conditions are hidden. The points such as what kind of periodic change the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, and the like are also as described above in the 3rd floor reception period.

Further, in this production example, when the first operation for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 7th floor reception period, it is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period (Fig.). (Refer to 290 (c)), and with this as an opportunity, the display UB1 after the reception on the 3rd floor is displayed. At this time, the same applies to the fact that the output sound is not audibly output after reception. However, in this production example, if the operation for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 7th floor reception period, the display UB1 after the reception on the 3rd floor is displayed in addition to the display. The "third floor operation-related display B" is displayed when the operation is performed (see FIG. 297 (f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the timing tg2A, but the timing tg2A arrives. Until then, the "third floor operation-related display B" is not displayed (in the situation shown in FIGS. 290 (a) and 290 (b), the "third floor operation-related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing tg2A, the "third floor operation-related display B" is displayed as an opportunity. (In the situation shown after FIG. 290 (c), the "third floor operation-related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is concealed at the time of occurrence of the "7th floor reception period" that the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is acceptable. sell. However, the concealed state will be released once the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made even once in the "7th floor reception period", so that a feeling of tension is felt. It can be expected that the hobby of the game will be improved while maintaining the suitable condition.

Here, such "third floor operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 even in the "seventh floor reception period". However, it is a condition that the display mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 289 to 291) that should be displayed when the reception period occurs is in the middle of the "7th floor reception period" and the operation is received. If it appears as, there is a concern that the player will remember the negative emotion of "intentionally hidden" and the game entertainment will decline.

Therefore, in the "7th floor reception period" related to this production example, the "third floor operation-related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 and the like, but the "third floor operation-related display B" is displayed. Is displayed in a mode different from the modes shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 and the like. For example, the "third floor operation-related display B" is not displayed as a model of the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and is displayed as a display image different from this. May be good. Further, with respect to the "third floor operation-related display B", it is possible that no periodic change appears in the display. However, none of these is an indispensable configuration, and even if an operation reception is performed for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "7th floor reception period", " The 3rd floor operation-related display B "may not be displayed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing tg2B within the seventh floor reception period. There is. In this case, also in the 7th floor reception period, as in the case of the 3rd floor reception period described above (see FIG. 290 (d)), the display after the 3rd floor reception UB2 is based on the second operation. Is displayed (see FIG. 297 (i)). At this time, the same applies to the fact that the output sound is not audibly output after reception (see FIG. 297 (k)).

In this regard, during the 7th floor reception period related to this production example, the display mode of the "3rd floor operation-related display B" does not change based on the second operation, and until then. The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 297 (e)).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing tg2C within the seventh floor reception period. There is. In this case, also in the 7th floor reception period, as in the case of the 3rd floor reception period described above (see FIG. 290 (e)), when the third operation is performed, FIGS. 290 (e) and FIG. As shown in 297 (i) and (k), not only the output sound after reception is not audibly output, but also a new display (aspect) does not appear as the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor. Also in this example, even though the operation is performed for such an event (“3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” within the 7th floor reception period, the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor is new. The display does not appear) as long as it occurs when the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 297 (a), (h), and (i), the "third floor reception" corresponding to the operation reception for the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is thus performed. In the situation where "rear display UB2" and "3rd floor operation related display B" are displayed, "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed at the timing tg2D within the 7th floor reception period. It is assumed that the operation is performed for.

Even in the 7th floor reception period, if the first operation reception is made to the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing tg2D, the change A after the reception on the 3rd floor may occur. That is, as the change A after the reception on the 3rd floor, for example, as shown in FIGS. 297 (g) to (k) and 291 (f), the “3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)”. The "3rd floor output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation is audibly output, and the "3rd floor operation-related display A" corresponding to the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is output. (Sword decoration image SYG) ”is displayed on the“ 3rd floor effect display EF1 ”that makes it difficult to see, and further, the display UA1 after the reception on the 3rd floor is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, "the 3rd floor reception allowable sound that was in the audible output state", "the 3rd floor reception post-reception display UB that was in the displayed state", and "periodic change". The third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), the third floor effect display EF1 and the like, which were in the state of being performed, are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned third floor reception period.

In addition, during the 7th floor reception period related to this production example, the first operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" was made for the "3rd floor operation-related display B". The display mode does not change based on the above, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point is continued (see FIG. 297 (e)).

Further, also in this example, as shown in FIGS. 297 (a), (h), and (i), the reception corresponding to the previous operation reception for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". The post-change A is occurring in various ways, and the 3rd floor post-acceptance display UB2 corresponding to the operation acceptance for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed. Among them, at the timings tg2E and tg2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291 (g) and (h)) within the 7th floor reception period, the second time for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". And it is assumed that the third operation reception is done respectively.

The second and third times for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timings tg2E and tg2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291 (g) and (h)) during the 7th floor reception period. 291 (g), (h) and 297, as in the case of the first operation reception for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", even when the operation reception is performed. As shown in, change A may occur after the reception on the 3rd floor.

In particular, regarding the "output sound A1 after receiving the 3rd floor" and the "3rd floor effect display EF1", the same mode appears depending on whether the first operation reception is performed or the second or third operation reception is performed. It has become possible. It should be noted that the periodic change in the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated in the previous operation reception is maintained in the terminated state when the second and third operation reception is performed. It may be set to be present, or the end state may be canceled and restarted, but when the operation is accepted for the second or third time, the end state of the periodic change reoccurs with this as an opportunity. It will be. That is, in this case, the periodic change once terminated in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation reception is performed for the second and third times.

In this regard, the "3rd floor display after reception UA" is basically the same as when the first operation reception is performed for the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" (3rd floor display after reception UA1). The same is true. However, even in the 7th floor reception period related to this example, when the second operation reception is done, "The hero YS attacks and the HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 50% remaining (display after the 3rd floor reception). When "UA2)" is performed (see Fig. 291 (g)) and the third operation is accepted, "Brave YS attacks and the HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 25% remaining (3rd floor). "Post-reception display UA3)" has been performed (see FIG. 291 (h)), and progress has been made as a production. That is, the effect of such "display after reception on the 3rd floor UA1" is the same as in the case of the reception period on the 3rd floor described above, and another example thereof can be appropriately applied.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, the "3rd floor reception allowable sound that was in the audible output state", the "3rd floor reception permissible sound that was in the displayed state", and the "cycle". The third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), the third floor effect display EF1 and the like, which were in a state of being changed, are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned third floor reception period.

In addition, during the 7th floor reception period related to this production example, for the "3rd floor operation-related display B", the second and third operation receptions are made for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". The display mode does not change based on the fact, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point is continued (see FIG. 297 (e)).

And in this example as well, as shown in FIGS. 297 (a), (h), and (i), the reception corresponding to the third operation reception for the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". The post-change A is occurring in various ways, and the 3rd floor post-acceptance display UB2 corresponding to the operation acceptance for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed. Among them, it is assumed that the fourth operation reception for "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is performed at the timing tg2G (see FIG. 291 (i)) within the 7th floor reception period. is doing.

When the fourth operation reception is made to the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing tg2G within the 7th floor reception period, a change A may occur after the reception on the third floor. That is, as one of the changes A after the reception on the 3rd floor, the reception period on the 7th floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 297 (a) and 297 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 291 (i) and 291 (l) and FIGS. 297 (h) and 297 (k), the "third floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated according to the operation. The "output sound A after reception on the 3rd floor" is audibly output, and the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is visually recognized. The difficult "3rd floor effect display EF" is displayed, and further, the display UA after the reception on the 3rd floor is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 291 (i), (l) and 297, even when the operation is immediately received during the 7th floor reception period (the situation where the 3rd floor effect display EF is displayed). , "3rd floor operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd floor operation related display B", and "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" are not hidden, and "3rd floor operation related display" The display A (sword decoration image SYG) ”is displayed so as to overlap with the back side of the third F effect display EF. After that, the "third floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "third floor operation-related display B", and the "third floor precursor effect display ZFD" are displayed on the "third floor operation unit A (here, here, sword decoration image SYG)". It is supposed to be hidden based on the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) (see FIGS. 286 (l) and (m)). However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "3rd floor reception period", the "3rd floor operation-related display B" that appears in the middle of the "7th floor reception period" and on condition that the operation is accepted is the first. The display may be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the display UB2 after the reception on the 3rd floor. That is, in this case, the display UA4 after the reception on the 3rd floor is hidden within the displayed period.

In addition, the "3rd floor operation-related display B" that appears in the middle of the "7th floor reception period" and on condition that the operation is accepted is different from the case of the above-mentioned "3rd floor reception period", and other In relation to the display image of, it may be displayed in the same manner as the display UB after the reception on the 3rd floor. That is, in this case, the 3rd floor operation-related display B is not displayed on the back side of the above-mentioned "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" or "3rd floor effect display EF", and when it overlaps, it is on the front side thereof. It will be displayed. Further, it may be displayed on the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. When such a configuration is adopted, the 3rd floor operation-related display B is different from the 3rd floor operation-related display A in relation to the above-mentioned “3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD” and “3rd floor effect display EF”. It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "3rd floor acceptance allowable sound", "whether or not the automatic continuous hitting function is enabled", "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled", etc. related to the 7th floor reception period, the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period It is the same as the case of. However, in the 7th floor reception period, if there is no operation on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", as shown in FIG. 298, the "3rd floor" is within the 7th floor reception period. Needless to say, "operation-related display B" is not displayed.

FIGS. 299 and 300 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the "condition 4F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "4th floor reception period" occurs as a modification of the 4th floor reception period. .. It should be noted that the production example in the fluctuation pattern in which the "8th floor reception period" occurs basically overlaps with the case where the above-mentioned 4th floor reception period occurs (see FIGS. 292 and 293). , Only the differences (changes) from the "4th floor reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "8th floor reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as the case where the "4th floor reception period" occurs.

That is, in the 8th floor reception period as well as the 4th floor reception period described above, both the 4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the 4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are the same. Until the end of the 8th floor reception period, only one operation reception is acceptable (multiple operation acceptance period). Further, the other examples relating to these "4th floor operation unit A" and "4th floor operation unit B" can be appropriately applied as in the case of the above-mentioned 4th floor reception period.

However, in the "4th floor reception period", when the "4th floor reception period" occurs, the "4th floor operation-related display A" corresponding to the 4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 299 (f) and 300 (f), the "fourth floor operation-related display B" corresponding to the fourth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. It is different from the above-mentioned "4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)" in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, of the plurality of operation units (4th floor operation unit A and 4th floor operation unit B) in which operation reception is permitted, only a part of the operation units "is in a state where operation reception is permitted". It is now possible to keep the fact that it is in secret, and to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to this, and to maintain the tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 8th floor reception period is different from the above-mentioned 4th floor reception period in that "4th floor operation-related display A" is displayed and "4th floor operation-related display B" is not displayed, but other configurations are used. And the contents of the production are the same as the 4th floor reception period mentioned above. Therefore, even when the 8th floor reception period occurs, basically, when the 4th floor reception period occurs, the production is advanced with the contents as described above.

That is, the effect example when the "8th floor reception period" occurs is the "4th floor operation-related display B (button image) when compared with the effect example shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 (4th floor reception period). The only difference is that "Image BMG)" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same. Another example applicable to the configuration related to the 4th floor reception period is the 8th floor reception period. The same applies to such a configuration (a configuration other than the 4th floor operation-related display B).

However, in the 8th floor reception period, unlike the 6th floor reception period and the 7th floor reception period described above, even if an operation is performed on the 4th floor operation unit B within the 8th floor reception period, " The 4th floor operation-related display B ”is not displayed.

In addition, the "4th floor acceptance allowable sound" and "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled" related to the 8th floor reception period are the same as in the case of the 4th floor reception period described above.

FIGS. 301 and 302 are time charts showing an example of the production content when the "condition 5F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "9th floor reception period" occurs as a modification of the 5th floor reception period. .. As for the production example in the fluctuation pattern in which the "9th floor reception period" occurs, since there are many parts that overlap with the case where the above-mentioned 5th floor reception period occurs (see FIG. 294), basically, the "first" is used. Only the differences (changes) from the "5F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "9th floor reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as the case where the "5th floor reception period" occurs.

That is, in the 9th floor reception period as well as the 5th floor reception period described above, the 5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) operates once until the 9th floor reception period ends. Only reception is acceptable, and the 5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations until the end of the 9th floor reception period. (Multiple operation allowable period). Further, the other examples relating to these "fifth floor operation unit A" and "fifth floor operation unit B" can be appropriately applied as in the case of the above-mentioned fifth floor reception period.

However, in the "9th floor reception period", when the "9th floor reception period" occurs, the "fifth floor operation-related display A" corresponding to the above 5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 301 (f) and 302 (f), the "fifth floor operation-related display B" corresponding to the fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. It is different from the above-mentioned "fifth floor reception period (see FIG. 294)" in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, of the plurality of operation units (5th floor operation unit A and 5th floor operation unit B) in which operation reception is permitted, only a part of the operation units "is in a state where operation reception is permitted". It is now possible to keep the fact that it is in secret, and to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to this, and to maintain the tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 9th floor reception period is different from the above-mentioned 5th floor reception period in that "5th floor operation-related display A" is displayed and "5th floor operation-related display B" is not displayed, but other configurations are used. And the contents of the production are the same as the above-mentioned 5th floor reception period. Therefore, even when the 9th floor reception period occurs, the production is basically advanced with the contents as described above (5th floor reception period) with reference to FIG. 294.

That is, the effect example when the "9th floor reception period" occurs is the "5th floor operation-related display B (button image BMG)" when compared with the effect example (5th floor reception period) shown in FIG. 294. The only difference is that "" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same. Another example applicable to the configuration for the 5th floor reception period is the configuration for the 9th floor reception period ( It is also applicable to the configuration other than the 5th floor operation-related display B).

Therefore, when the "9th floor reception period" occurs, first, before and after the timing at which the "5th floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed on the 2nd floor operation-related display A as shown in FIGS. 301 and 302. It is displayed so as to straddle.

In addition, how the "fifth floor precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed with respect to the "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and under what conditions are hidden. The point that "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes is also as described above in the 5th floor reception period.

Further, in this production example, when the first operation for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 9th floor reception period, this is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned 5th floor reception period. The display UB1 is displayed after the reception on the 5th floor. At this time, the same applies to the fact that the output sound is not audibly output after reception. However, in this production example, if the operation for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 9th floor reception period, the display UB1 after the reception on the 5th floor is displayed in addition to the display. The "fifth F operation-related display B" is displayed when the operation is performed (see FIG. 301 (f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the operation is performed on the "fifth F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the timing ti2A, but the timing ti2A arrives. Until then, "5th floor operation-related display B" is not displayed. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "fifth F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the timing ti2A, the "fifth F operation-related display B" is displayed as an opportunity. There is.

According to such a configuration, it is concealed at the time of occurrence of the "9th floor reception period" that the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is acceptable. sell. However, the concealed state will be released once the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made even once in the "9th floor reception period", so that a feeling of tension is felt. It can be expected that the hobby of the game will be improved while maintaining the suitable condition.

Here, such a "fifth floor operation-related display B" may be displayed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "fifth floor reception period" in the "9th floor reception period". However, if the display mode that should normally be displayed when the reception period occurs may appear on the condition that the operation reception is in the middle of the "9th floor reception period", until then. There is a concern that the player will remember the negative emotion of "intentionally hidden" and the game interest will decline.

Therefore, in the "9th floor reception period" related to this production example, the "fifth floor operation-related display A" is displayed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "fifth floor reception period", but the "fifth floor operation-related display B". Is displayed in a mode different from the modes shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 and the like. For example, it may not be displayed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "fifth floor reception period", and may be displayed as a display image different from this. Further, with respect to the "fifth F operation-related display B", it is possible that no periodic change appears in the display. However, none of these is an indispensable configuration, and even if the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is made in the "9th floor reception period", the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is triggered by this. The 5th floor operation-related display B "may not be displayed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing ti2B within the 9th floor reception period. There is. In this case, also in the 9th floor reception period, the 5th floor post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation being performed, as in the case of the 5th floor reception period described above. At this time, the same applies to the fact that the output sound is not audibly output after reception.

In this regard, in the 9th floor reception period related to this production example, the display mode of the "5th floor operation-related display B" does not change based on the second operation, and up to that point. The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 301 (f)).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing ti2C within the 9th floor reception period. There is. In this case, even in the 9th floor reception period, as in the case of the 5th floor reception period described above, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 301 (i) and 301 (k), after reception. Not only the output sound is not audibly output, but also a new display (aspect) does not appear as the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor. Also in this example, even though the operation is performed for such an event (“5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” within the 9th floor reception period, it is new as the 5th floor reception post-display UB. The display does not appear) as long as it occurs when the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a), (h), and (i), the "fifth floor reception" corresponding to the operation reception for the "fifth floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is thus performed. In the situation where "rear display UB2" and "5th floor operation related display B" are displayed, "5th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed at the timing ti2D within the 9th floor reception period. It is assumed that the operation is performed for.

Even in the 9th floor reception period, if an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing ti2D, a change A occurs after the 5th floor reception. That is, as one of the changes A after the reception on the 5th floor, the reception period on the 9th floor is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (c)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 301 (h) and 301 (k), the “5th floor output sound A after reception” corresponding to the operation for the “5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)” is audible output. At the same time, the "5th floor effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed. It is displayed, and further, the display UA after the reception on the 5th floor is displayed.

Further, even when the situation is immediately after the operation reception is performed during the 9th floor reception period (the situation where the 5th floor effect display EF is displayed), as shown in FIG. 301, the “5th floor operation-related display A (sword”) is also displayed. "Decorative image SYG)", "5th floor operation-related display B", and "5th floor precursor effect display ZFD" are not hidden, and "5th floor operation-related display A (sword decorative image SYG)" is , It is displayed so as to overlap with the back side of the 5th F effect display EF. After that, such "fifth floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "fifth floor operation-related display B", and "fifth floor precursor effect display ZFD" are displayed on the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, here, sword decoration image SYG)". It is supposed to be hidden based on the operation for the sword decoration body 5001). However, this may be hidden from the time when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "5th floor reception period", the "5th floor operation-related display B" that appears in the middle of the "9th floor reception period" and on condition that the operation is accepted is the first. The display may be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the display UB2 after reception on the 5th floor. That is, in this case, the display UA after the reception on the 5th floor is hidden within the displayed period.

In addition, the "5th floor operation-related display B" that appears in the middle of the "9th floor reception period" and on condition that the operation is accepted is different from the case of the above-mentioned "5th floor reception period", and other In relation to the display image of the above, it may be displayed in the same manner as the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor. That is, in this case, the 5th floor operation-related display B is not displayed on the back side of the above-mentioned "5th floor precursor effect display ZFD" and "5th floor effect display EF", and when they overlap, it is on the front side thereof. It will be displayed. Further, it may be displayed on the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. When such a configuration is adopted, the 5th floor operation-related display B is different from the 5th floor operation-related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "5th floor precursor effect display ZFD" and "5th floor effect display EF". It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "5th floor acceptance allowable sound", "whether or not the automatic continuous hitting function is enabled", "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled", etc. related to the 9th floor reception period, the above-mentioned 5th floor reception period It is the same as the case of. However, in the 9th floor reception period, if there is no operation on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", as shown in FIG. 302, the "5th floor" is within the 9th floor reception period. Needless to say, "operation-related display B" is not displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 302, it is described as an example when the automatic button function is not enabled.

As shown in FIG. 301, even in the 9th floor reception period, as in the above-mentioned 5th floor reception period, during the output period of the “5th floor reception allowable sound”, the “5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001). ) ”And“ 5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) ”, the output of the“ 5th floor reception allowable sound ”is not interrupted. ..

In each reception period related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, a precursor effect display suggesting that an operation opportunity is soon given to the player in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, and a reception target (operation reception). It is possible to display an operation-related display (image display) that suggests a part, etc., and a remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period. However, as described above, each of these configurations does not necessarily have to be provided, and only an appropriate configuration among these configurations may be provided. Further, the operation-related display (image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display, but it is not always the case. It is not limited, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

In addition, as a method for hiding the periodic change based on the operation reception being performed within the reception period (or a part of the reception period) related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification, each of the above-mentioned methods is described. Not limited to the configuration, for example, the periodic change of the operation-related display on the layer continues, but the periodic change of the operation-related display is performed by displaying another image (for example, effect display) in front of the image. You may adopt a method that makes it invisible, or change the operation-related display to a periodic change that is different from the periodic change that has been continued until then (for example, change the cycle time). The periodic change that has continued up to that point may be hidden, or the display of the operation-related display itself may be terminated.

In addition, the periodic change of the 3rd floor operation-related display A is hidden based on the reception period related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification (the operation reception is performed within the 3rd floor reception period and the 7th floor reception period). Later, as a method for resuming the periodic change (timing tg2D, tg2E, tg2F, tg2G), the periodic change does not necessarily have to be restarted from the beginning, and may be restarted from the middle of the periodic change. ..

During the 3rd floor reception period and the 7th floor reception period, operation reception was performed until a specific number of operations (third time) were received for "5th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)". Based on this, it was decided not to end the reception period, but to end the reception period based on the fact that the operation reception was performed a specific number of times (third time). However, it is decided to determine whether or not to end the acceptance period based on the fact that the operation acceptance has been made, and to terminate the acceptance period based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained by the determination. You may.

Further, in the 3rd floor reception period and the 7th floor reception period, regardless of whether the "low expectation mode" or the "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the "5th floor operation unit A (here, here," Based on the fact that the predetermined conditions (for example, the number of operations, the determination, etc.) are satisfied by the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001), the reception period is terminated and the display after reception is displayed. However, it is possible that certain conditions (for example, the number of operations, determination, etc.) may be satisfied when the operation is accepted for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". It may be limited to the case where the "high expectation mode" is executed as a post-display. That is, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, how much the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated during the reception period. Even if the reception is made, the condition for ending the reception period will not be satisfied based on this, and the "low expectation mode" will be displayed after the reception based on the timing when the reception period ends. May be executed. Alternatively, only when the "specific mode" is executed as the display after the reception, the reception period is terminated based on the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". When the "specific mode" is not executed as the display after the reception, the reception period may not be terminated based on the operation reception for the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". That is, in this case, when the timing for the end of the reception period arrives, no post-reception display is executed.

Further, each reception period related to the above-mentioned production example and its modification may be any combination and may be sequentially generated within one variation pattern.

In addition, the post-reception display does not necessarily indicate the degree of expectation that a big hit will be obtained. For example, it may occur as a reception period as to whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated within the execution period of the jackpot game, and may be executed as a display after the reception, and what is the expectation degree suggestion regarding the game? It may occur as a reception period in a mere mini-game that has nothing to do with it, and may be executed as a display after the reception. Therefore, the acceptance period for the above-mentioned production example and its modification does not necessarily have to occur within the period during which the symbol variation is executed.

In addition, it is not necessary to provide all of the reception period for the above-mentioned production example and its modification. Of the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production example and the modification thereof, two or more reception periods may be provided in an appropriate combination, or only one arbitrary reception period may be provided.

During the 4th floor reception period and the 8th floor reception period, when the "4th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated and the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" The same post-reception change (post-reception display, etc.) may occur when is operated.

The 4th floor reception period and the 8th floor reception period may be generated as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned reception periods, first, a plurality of operations in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) can be permitted are permitted. A permissible period can be generated, and when either the operation for the first operation unit or the operation for the second operation unit is performed in the multiple operation permissible period, the post-acceptance display according to the type of the side where the operation reception is performed is displayed. It can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display an image display that imitates the operation target by the player, and at least the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is prepared as the type of the plurality of operation allowable periods.

In this regard, during the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), only one operation reception is permitted for the 1st operation unit (1st floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It is possible, and the second operation unit (the first floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) can be allowed to receive a plurality of operations, and a plurality of operations can be accepted during the first floor reception period. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) for which the operation reception is acceptable, the 1st floor post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the 1st floor is displayed. Even while the display UB after reception is displayed, the operation reception for the 1st floor operation unit A is permitted. Then, the display UB after reception on the first floor corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) during the reception period on the first floor (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is displayed. When an operation is performed on the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) in the meantime (timing te2D), the 1st floor post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the operation is used as an opportunity. The display UB after reception on the 1st floor (display after reception corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410)) that has been displayed up to is hidden (. (H), (i), FIGS. 279 (g), (h), and the like).

According to such a configuration, the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are both permitted in the first floor reception period (for example). In FIGS. 278 to 281), the first operation unit is displayed while the 1st floor post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed. When an operation is performed on (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the display UA after reception on the 1st floor corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the display after reception on the 1st floor, which has been displayed until then, is displayed. Since the UB is hidden, it becomes easier to recognize which of the above-mentioned operation units is displayed according to the operation after the reception, and it can be expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the plurality of operation permissible period, the “first multi-operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)” related to the above configuration 2-E). And the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the sixth floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 2-E). ", And in both the" first multiple operation allowable period "and the" second multiple operation allowable period "related to the above configuration 2-E, it is possible that multiple operation receptions are acceptable. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit (1st floor operation unit B, 2nd floor operation unit B, etc., both of which are operation buttons 410), a post-acceptance display (after reception on the 1st floor) corresponding to the operation is performed. The display UB, the display UB after the reception on the second floor, etc.) is displayed (see FIGS. 281 (e), (f), 285 (c), (d), etc.), but the display after reception is displayed. It is said that the operation reception for the first operation unit (1st floor operation unit A, 2nd floor operation unit A, etc., for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is acceptable even while the operation is accepted once. Has been done.

In this case, the operation is performed on the second operation unit (the first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) in the "first plurality of operation allowable period" according to the configuration 2-E. If an operation is performed on the first operation unit (the first floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) while the corresponding 1st floor reception post-display UB is displayed, the first operation unit corresponding to the operation is performed. The display UA after reception on the 1st floor is displayed, and the display UB after reception on the 1st floor, which has been displayed until then, is hidden by the operation (FIGS. 278 (i) and 281 (h). reference).

On the other hand, the operation was performed on the second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) in the "second plurality of operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 2-E. If an operation is performed on the first operation unit (the second floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) while the corresponding display UB on the second floor is displayed, the first operation unit corresponding to the operation is performed. The display UA after reception on the 2nd floor is displayed, and the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor, which has been displayed until then, is not hidden by the operation (FIGS. 282 (i) and 286 (f)). ~ (K)).

According to such a configuration, the operation from the "state in which the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is operated a plurality of times" to the "operation on the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)". The display after reception (display after reception according to the operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, operation button 410)) that was displayed until then when the game strategy was changed to "is hidden. Since there are cases where it is set to (1F-A multiple operation allowable period) and cases where it is not hidden (1F-B multiple operation allowable period), the effectability when changing the game strategy is improved. It can be expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

In this case, the "first plurality of operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 2-E and the "second" related to the above configuration 2-E. (For example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)) "in the second operation unit (1st floor operation). Unit B, 2nd floor operation unit B, etc., for example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410), they are the same as the post-reception display (1st floor post-reception display UB, 2nd floor post-reception display UB). It is desirable to make the display (increase in magic power value, etc.) appear. That is, in this case, the game strategy changes from "a state in which the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is operated a plurality of times" to "an operation on the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)". It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the display after reception (second operation unit (for example, operation button 410)) that was displayed until then when changing is hidden, which makes you feel nervous. It can be expected to be suitably maintained.

Further, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 2-E). In ", the" second multiple operation allowable period "occurs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the" second multiple operation allowable period "related to the configuration 2-E occurs. The specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible (or suppressed) or not made inaudible (or suppressed) before (for example, the specific type of production sound is non-audible). The reception period occurs after the sound is always audible), but in the "first multiple operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 2-E. , The "first multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 2-E according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "first multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 2-E occurs. When the specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is set to the inaudible state (or suppression) and when it is not set to the non-audible state (or suppression) (the specific type of production sound is in the audible state) before the occurrence of If there is a reception period in the above). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the operation opportunity is given, the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "first multiple operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 2-E are given. Since it becomes easy to recognize which of the "second multiple operation allowable periods", it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even when the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

Further, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 2-E). In ", the display after reception of the 2nd floor UA and the effect display EF of the 2nd floor is displayed after reception when the operation is performed on the second operation unit (second floor operation unit B or the like, for example, the operation button 410). (Display UB after reception on the 2nd floor) will be displayed behind it. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to see the display UA after reception on the 2nd floor until the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor is hidden, thereby changing the game strategy on the way. It will be possible to have the disadvantages of time.

The reception period for the above-mentioned production example includes the reception period in which the automatic button function is enabled, but in the reception period in which the automatic button function is enabled, the second operation unit (second floor). While the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation for the operation unit B, the 3rd floor operation unit B, the 4th floor operation unit B, or the 5th floor operation unit B) is displayed, the 1st operation unit (2nd floor operation unit) is displayed. When the automatic button function is enabled for A, the 3rd floor operation unit A, the 4th floor operation unit A, or the 5th floor operation unit A), the second operation unit (2nd floor operation) is triggered by this. It is desirable that the post-acceptance display corresponding to any operation of the unit B, the 3rd floor operation unit B, the 4th floor operation unit B, and the 5th floor operation unit B) is not hidden.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation permissible periods in which the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) can be permitted are set. An operation-related display that can occur and can appear only when the operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted, or for the second operation unit. It is possible to display an operation-related display that can appear only when the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the multiple operation allowable period is referred to as "the first multiple operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 3-E). , "Second multiple operation permissible period (for example, second floor acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), sixth floor acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to the above configuration 3-E. In the "first multiple operation allowable period" and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 3-E, the first floor operation-related displays A and B and the second floor operation-related display A are prepared. Since ， B can be displayed, it can be expected that the game entertainment is appropriately maintained.

Further, in the "first plurality of operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 3-E, the first operation unit (first floor operation unit A) is used. For example, the first F operation-related display A corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) and the first F operation-related display B corresponding to the second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) are either. Is also displayed, the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is acceptable, and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is acceptable. Make sure you are in the state of being.
On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation allowable period (for example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296))" according to the configuration 3-E, the first operation unit (second floor operation unit A). The second F operation-related display A corresponding to, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed, but the operation-related display corresponding to the second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410). While the display is not displayed, the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is acceptable, and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is acceptable. I made it in the state of being. However, when an operation is received for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) under the situation, the second F operation-related display B corresponding to the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed. I decided to display it. That is, in this case, the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is acceptable while the second F operation-related displays A and B are both displayed, and the second operation unit (for example, for example). , The operation reception for the operation button 410) will be shifted to an acceptable state.

According to such a configuration, only one (second operation unit) of the two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) in which operation reception is permitted is in the reception acceptance state. Even if the "second multiple operation allowable period (for example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)" related to the above configuration 3-E occurs, the side to be concealed When the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) of the above is tried to operate, the concealed state is canceled, so that it is expected that the game entertainment taste is appropriately maintained. In addition, as the "operation-related display", for example, an object (operation means) to be operated by a player is often displayed as an image display expressed as an image, but this is not limited to this. As described above, the image display may be such that the player is always given an operation opportunity when the image is displayed.

In this case, the "first plurality of operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 3-E and the "second" related to the above configuration 3-E. (For example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)) ”means the operation-related display (for example, the 1st floor operation-related display) corresponding to the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410). B, the same image display may be displayed as the second F operation-related display B).

Further, when the second floor operation-related display B is displayed within the "second multiple operation allowable period (for example, the sixth floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296))" related to the above configuration 3-E. It is desirable that the second F operation-related display B is not hidden until the "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E ends.

Further, when the "second plurality of operation allowable period (for example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)" related to the above configuration 3-E occurs, the "second multiple operation allowable period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)" is related to the configuration 3-E. Even if the operation is accepted for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) (a little) before the timing when the "second multiple operation allowable period" occurs, the second F operation-related display is triggered by this. B may be displayed. That is, in this case, in the "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E, as in the "first multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E, the first operation is performed from the time when the valid period occurs. While both the operation-related display corresponding to the unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation-related display corresponding to the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are displayed, the first operation unit (for example) , The operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001) or the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) can be performed.

Further, the second operation unit is (slightly) before the timing when the "second plurality of operation allowable period (for example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)" related to the above configuration 3-E occurs. When an operation is accepted for (for example, the operation button 410), in the "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E, the second operation-related displays A and B are displayed until the end of the period. It is desirable that both are displayed.

Further, the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is provided within the “second plurality of operation allowable period (for example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296))” related to the above configuration 3-E. When the operation is performed, the second operation-related display B may be displayed in the above-mentioned case (see FIG. 295 (f)) triggered by the operation, and the second operation-related display B may not be displayed. You may. According to such a configuration, a feeling of tension when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) within the "second plurality of operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 3-E is suitably maintained. Can be expected to do.

It should be noted that the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) within the "second plurality of operation allowable period (for example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296))" according to the above configuration 3-E. When the operation is performed but the second operation-related display B is not displayed as a trigger, for example, the second operation is performed by preventing the operation itself for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) from being accepted. The related display B may not be displayed, or the operation itself is accepted for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410), but the second operation related display B is displayed without satisfying the predetermined conditions. It may not be done.

Further, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the sixth floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 3-E). In "", the "second multiple operation" related to the configuration 3-E is performed according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E occurs. A specific type of staging sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible (or suppressed) or not made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "allowable period" occurs (for example,). The reception period occurs after the production sound of a specific type is always made inaudible), but the "first multiple operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (FIGS. 278 to 281)" according to the above configuration 3-E. (Refer to), etc.) ”,“ Configuration 3-E When the specific type of staging sound (specific BGM) is put into an inaudible state (or suppressed) and when it is not put into an inaudible state (or suppressed) before the "first multiple operation allowable period" occurs (specific). If the reception period occurs while the type of production sound is audible), there may be. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "first multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easy to recognize which of the two multiple operation allowable periods ”, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even when the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation permissible periods in which the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) can be permitted are set. An operation-related display that can occur and can appear only when the operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted or the operation reception is permitted, or for the second operation unit. It is possible to display an operation-related display that can appear only when the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the "specific multiple operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 4-E and the above configuration 4-E are used. At least such a "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, a second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), a sixth floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" is prepared. Then, in the "special multiple operation allowable period (second floor reception period, sixth floor reception period)" according to the above configuration 4-E, the first operation unit (second floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is subjected to. When the operation is accepted, the 2nd floor post-acceptance display UA, which suggests the degree of expectation that a big hit has been obtained, is displayed as a post-acceptance change, and the 2nd floor operation-related display A is difficult to see. EF is executed. In this respect, the 1st F effect display corresponding to the "specific multiple operation allowable period (1st F reception period)" according to the above configuration 4-E is always executed in the same display mode, but the above configuration 4-E is applied. The 2nd floor effect display EF corresponding to the "special multiple operation allowable period (2nd floor reception period, 6th floor reception period)" is displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode as the 2nd floor post-receipt display UA (modes UA1, UA2). I tried to be done.

According to such a "second F effect display EF", the "special multiple operation allowable period (for example, the second F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)" or the sixth F reception period according to the above configuration 4-E. (See FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) ”, it is possible to preferably suggest that the“ operation-related display ”appears due to an operation on the“ first operation unit ”on the side where it is difficult to see. become able to. Further, the jackpot expectation can be suitably recognized only by looking at the aspect of the "second F effect display EF" in order to confirm which operation is caused.

Further, in the "specific plurality of operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 4-E, the first operation unit (first floor operation unit A) is used. For example, when an operation is performed on the sword decoration body 5001), as one of the changes after reception according to the operation, both the 1st floor operation-related displays A and B become difficult to see, "1st floor effect display EF". ”Is executed. As a result, the operation reception for the first operation unit (the first F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (the second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) are performed. However, the "specific multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 4-E, which is permissible in any case, is only an operation on the first operation unit (the first F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It becomes possible to suitably suggest to the player that the situation has been completed (the situation in which the operation reception for the second operation unit is not allowed).

When the "special multiple operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 4-E is the "second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)", the second floor operation is performed for the "second floor effect display EF". Of the related displays A and B, it is desirable that only the second F operation related display A is displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, when the "special multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 4-E is the "sixth floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)", it is also the second operation unit (second floor operation unit, for example. , Operation button 410) is used as an opportunity to display the second floor operation-related display B. In this regard, even when the "second F effect display EF" is displayed when the second F operation-related display B is displayed, the second F operation-related display A is used for the "second F effect display EF". , B, it is desirable that only the 2nd F operation-related display A is displayed so as to be difficult to see.

Further, the "special multiple operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)" related to the above configuration 4-E). The "second F effect display EF" corresponding to the above may be displayed at a position overlapping the second F operation-related display A on the front side thereof, and may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the second F operation-related display B. However, although it overlaps with the second F operation-related display B, it may be displayed behind it.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the "specific plurality of operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 4-E, and the above configuration 4-E are applied. Apart from the "special multiple operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)"), the above configuration 4-E The "predetermined plurality of operation permissible period (for example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.)" is provided. Then, in the "predetermined plurality of operation permissible period" according to the configuration 4-E, the first operation unit (fifth F operation unit A) is the same as the "special multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 4-E. For example, when the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001) is made, the 5th floor post-reception display UA suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed as a change after the reception, and the 5th floor operation-related display A becomes difficult to see. 5F Effect display EF is displayed.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the “predetermined plurality of operation allowable period (for example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294)” or the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302) related to the above configuration 4-E. ) Etc.) ”, the“ 5th F effect display EF ”is always executed in the same display mode, and the display mode is the“ special multiple operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd F reception period) according to the above configuration 4-E. (Refer to FIGS. 282 to 286), or the same as one of the display modes of the "second floor effect display EF" corresponding to the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296). I have to.

For example, when the aspect EF-2 that appears when the expectation is low is made to appear as the "fifth F effect display EF", even if the aspect EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF", this is the case. It will be possible to make the player aware of the possibility that it is displayed as "5th floor effect display EF" and that the possibility that the highly expected mode UA2 will appear as the display UA after receiving the 5th floor. Therefore, it can be expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment when the aspect EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF" is suppressed.

Alternatively, when the aspect EF-1 that appears when high expectations are made to appear as the "fifth F effect display EF", the aspect EF-1 should always appear when the "fifth F effect display EF" is displayed. It can be expected that the hobby of the game will be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Then, the display is designed to imitate the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the reception period related to the above-mentioned production example, there are a plurality of operation receptions when the operation reception is performed only once when the operation unit is maintained in the operated state (when the so-called automatic repeated hitting is not enabled). Since there are cases where it is repeated (when so-called automatic repeated hits are enabled), it can be expected that the game entertainment will be improved through such various staging.

More specifically, as the type of the reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the 7th floor reception period (FIG. 297 to 297) related to the above configuration 5-E. (See FIG. 298), etc.) ”is prepared at least. Then, in the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 5-E, the first operation unit (third floor operation unit A is the third floor operation unit A, for example, a sword decoration) as an operation unit that can accept a plurality of operations. The operation reception for the body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (third floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period are in an acceptable state. Then, in the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 5-E, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 297 (a) and (b), the first operation unit (first operation unit) in the specific period (first). It is the 3rd floor operation unit A, for example, when the sword decoration body 5001) is continuously maintained in the operated state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (although the automatic continuous striking function is enabled), but the second operation unit for a specific period. (It is the 3rd floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, but the operation reception is not performed a plurality of times (the automatic continuous striking function is not enabled).

According to such a configuration, even in an operation unit that can accept a plurality of operation receptions, the so-called automatic continuous striking function may not be enabled, so that a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained. Can be expected.

Further, although not described in the above-mentioned production example, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)” and the 7th floor reception period (FIG. 297) related to the above configuration 5-E. -See FIG. 298)) ", a" special operation permissible period "related to the above configuration 5-E may be further prepared.

For example, during the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), not only the 1st floor operation unit B (for example, the operation button 410) but also the 1st floor operation unit A (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). The "special operation" according to the above-described configuration 5-E is provided as an "operation unit capable of allowing multiple operation receptions", and the modified first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is provided. It may be generated as an "allowable period". That is, in this case, in the "special operation allowable period (transformed first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 5-E, the special period first operation unit (first F operation unit A) Yes, for example, the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) during the special period are in an acceptable state a plurality of times. Will be. On top of this, in the "special operation allowable period (deformed first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 5-E, the special period first operation unit (first floor operation unit A) For example, no matter which of the sword decoration body 5001) and the second operation unit (1st floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state for a special period, a plurality of operation receptions are received. It will be prevented from being turned (the auto repeated hit function is not enabled).

According to such a configuration, even if there are a plurality of operation units that can accept multiple operations, the so-called automatic continuous striking function is effective for any of the operation units depending on the type of operation permissible period. It can be expected that the tension is suitably maintained because it may not be converted.

Further, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 7th floor acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 to 298)" related to the above configuration 5-E and the "special operation allowable period (modified)" related to the above configuration 5-E. In any of the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.), multiple operation receptions are permitted, and the operation target is displayed as an image display (3rd floor). There are operation-related displays A and 1F operation-related displays A and B), but it is related to the above configuration 5-E that the operation reception is performed multiple times when the operation unit is continuously maintained in the operated state. Only when the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 to 298)) is used, the special operation permissible period (transformed 1st floor reception period (FIG. 278 to FIG. In the case of (see FIG. 281) etc.), it will not be done.

Further, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 7th floor acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 to 298)" related to the configuration 5-E, the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 5-E occurs. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time of It is not performed, suppressed, or not made inaudible (for example, the reception period occurs after the production sound of a specific type is made inaudible), but the above configuration 5-E is applied. In the "special operation allowable period (transformed 1st floor acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)", the previous time when the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 5-E occurs, the previous period has ended. Depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, "a case where a specific type of staging sound (specific BGM) is put into an inaudible state (or suppressed) before the" special operation allowable period "related to the configuration 5-E occurs" , There may be a case where the non-audible state (or suppression) is not set (a case where a reception period occurs while a specific type of staging sound is in an audible state). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 5-E when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easier to recognize which one is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even when the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to display an image display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the 7th floor reception period (for example, the 7th floor reception period) (See FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) ”is prepared at least. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 6-E, an operation unit (third floor operation unit A, for example, a sword decoration body 5001) that allows a plurality of operation receptions is set. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is not displayed on the display (3rd floor operation-related display A) that imitates the operation unit as one of the changes after reception. Or made it difficult to see by another image display. Therefore, it is suitably suggested to the player that the operation is being accepted while displaying the display (3rd floor operation-related display A) that imitates the target even after the operation is performed. You will be able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the 7th floor reception period (FIG. 291) related to the above configuration 6-E are used. (See 297 and FIG. 298)) ”and“ special operation permissible period (for example, 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) ”) related to the above configuration 6-E. There is. In the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 6-E, there is an operation unit (third floor operation unit A, for example, a sword decoration body 5001) that allows a plurality of operation receptions. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the changes after reception, is the periodic change that has appeared up to that point hidden on the display (3rd floor operation-related display A) that imitates the operation unit? , Or the image display is hidden, and in the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 6-E, the operation unit (the first floor operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B where a plurality of operation receptions are permissible) is permitted. , Operation button 410) is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is not displayed on the display (1st floor operation-related display B) that imitates the operation unit. The periodic change was made to continue.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation unit that allows multiple operation receptions, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden in the display that imitates the operation unit. Or, when the display imitating the operation unit is hidden (see FIG. 287 and FIG. 297), and when the periodic change is not hidden and continues (see FIG. 278). It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception is properly performed, and it can be expected that the tension is appropriately maintained.

The "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 6-E is not the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), but the above-mentioned "transformed first floor reception period (FIG. 278 to FIG. 281). It may be generated as (see 281) etc.) ”. As described above, in the modified 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the operation reception for the special period 1st operation unit (the 1st floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the special period The operation reception for the second operation unit (the first floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is in an acceptable state a plurality of times. In this case, regardless of whether the special period 1st operation unit or the special period 2nd operation unit is operated, the periodic changes of the 1st floor operation-related displays A and B are not hidden and are continued. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)" related to the above configuration 6-E), the specific period first operation unit (third floor). The operation unit A, for example, the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (the third floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period can be allowed. Of those operation units, only the first operation unit (third floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) for a specific period is the display target of the image display (third floor operation-related display A), and the specific period. Of the first operation unit (third floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the second operation unit for a specific period (third floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410), at least the first operation for a specific period. The department is allowed to accept multiple operations. On the other hand, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 6-E, the special period 1st operation unit (1st floor operation unit A) Yes, for example, both the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (the first floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for the special period can be allowed, and the operation reception of the operation unit can be permitted. Both are the display targets of the image display (1st floor operation-related displays A and B), and the special period 1st operation unit (1st floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the special period 2nd. Of the operation units (first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410), at least the second operation unit during the special period is allowed to accept a plurality of operations.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the first operation unit (third floor) during the specific operation period in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)" related to the above configuration 6-E). The operation unit A, for example, when an operation is received for the sword decoration body 5001), as one of the changes after the reception, a display (3F operation-related display A) that imitates the first operation unit during the specific period. The periodic changes that had appeared up to that point were hidden, or the imitation display itself was hidden. Further, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 6-E, the special period second operation unit (first floor operation unit B, for example. , Operation button 410), the periodic change that has appeared up to that point on the display (1F operation-related display B) that imitates the second operation unit during the special period is not hidden. The periodic change is continued, but when the operation is accepted for the first operation unit (the first F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) in the special period, the first operation unit in the special period is imitated. The periodic changes that have appeared up to that point are hidden in the display and the display that imitates the second operation unit during the special period, or the image display is hidden respectively.

According to such a configuration, the "displayability of the periodic change appearing in the image display" when the operation unit is operated differs depending on the type of the reception period, so that a feeling of tension is preferable. Can be expected to be maintained at.

Further, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 6-E occurs, "rather than the" specific operation allowable period "related to the configuration 6-E occurs. There is no previous "statement of a particular type of effect sound being suppressed or inaudible, or not suppressed or inaudible" (for example, after the specific type of effect sound is always in an inaudible state). The reception period occurs), but in the "special operation allowable period (1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), modified 1st floor reception period, etc.)" pertaining to the above configuration 6-E, the configuration 6 -Specified before the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 6-E occurs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "special operation allowable period" related to E occurs. When the type of effect sound (specific BGM) is set to the non-audible state (or suppression) and when it is not set to the non-audible state (or suppression) (the reception period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in the audible state). If) and there may be. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 6-E when the operation opportunity is given are given. Since it becomes easier to recognize which one is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even when the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation for the operation unit is performed during the reception period, a change may occur after reception. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the display (operation-related display) that imitates the operation unit can be displayed so that the periodic change appears, but the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit. (3rd floor operation-related display A displayed in the 3rd floor reception period, 7th floor reception period, etc.) and the case where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (described above). In each of the production examples, there is an operation-related display of all types with periodic changes, except for the operation-related display A on the 3rd floor. Be expected.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as the reception period (operation allowable period), the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)” and the 7th floor related to the above configurations 7-E. At least the "reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)" and the "special operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)") related to the above configuration 7-E. I will prepare it. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the first operation unit (third floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) in which a plurality of operation receptions are permissible is allowed. ) And the operation reception for the second operation unit (third floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period different from the specific period first operation unit are at least acceptable. In the "special operation permissible period" related to 7-E, the operation reception for the first operation unit (the first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is a special period in which a plurality of operation receptions are permissible. The operation reception for the special period second operation unit (the first F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) different from the special period first operation unit may be at least acceptable. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the display (here, the 3rd floor operation-related display A) that imitates the first operation unit in the specific period is changed in a predetermined time unit. In the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the display that imitates the first operation unit of the special period (here, the first floor operation-related display B) is displayed periodically. The change is displayed so that it appears in a time unit longer than the above predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, the time required for periodic change differs depending on the type of reception period and the type of operation target, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by various effects. To.

Further, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. related to the above configurations 7-E). Specific period The first operation unit (third floor operation unit A) is a special period in the “special operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)” related to the above configuration 7-E). It may be the same operation unit as the second operation unit (1st floor operation unit A). Further, in this case, although the first operation unit in the specific period and the second operation unit in the special period are the same operation unit, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the third floor reception period (FIG. 287 to FIG. 287)” related to the above configurations 7-E. (See FIG. 291) and the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) ”, the periodic change of the display (3rd floor operation-related display A) that imitates the 1st operation unit during a specific period is changed. It is displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and in the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the second operation unit (the first floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is modeled during the special period. The display (1st F operation-related display A) is displayed so that the periodic change appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (may be the same cycle time as the 1st F operation-related display B). You may. According to such a configuration, even if the operation target (operation unit) is the same, the time required for the periodic change differs depending on the type of the generated "reception period", so that the "reception period" It will be possible to greatly differ the directing performance as "" according to the type, and it can be expected that this will improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)" related to the above configurations 7-E, the specific period is the first operation unit (third floor operation unit A). For example, for the sword decoration body 5001), a display (third floor operation-related display A) imitating this is displayed so that its periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, but the second operation unit (third floor operation) for a specific period is displayed. Part B, for example, the display imitating the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the “special operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (FIGS. 278 to 281)” according to the above configuration 7-E is not displayed. (See), etc.) ”, a display (1st floor operation-related display B) that imitates the special period 1st operation unit (1st floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) and a special period 2nd operation unit (1st floor operation unit B). It is the 1F operation unit A, and for example, in any of the displays (1F operation-related display A) imitating the sword decoration body 5001), those periodic changes appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. I decided to display it. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change appears in the predetermined time, it can be suggested that there is an operation unit that is concealed that the operation reception is in an acceptable state. become.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)" and the 8th floor reception period (FIG. 299 and FIG. 300) related to the above configurations 7-E are shown. (See), 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.), etc. 2F operation-related display A, 4th floor operation-related display A, 5th floor operation-related display A) Even though the periodic change appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, the operation reception is acceptable. There is an operation unit that keeps something secret. That is, in this case, when the periodic change appears in the predetermined time, it is suggested that there is an operation unit that is concealed that the operation reception is in an acceptable state, whereas the periodic change When is appearing in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, when there is an operation unit that is concealed that the operation reception is in an acceptable state (for example, the 6th floor reception period or the 8th floor reception period). , 9th floor reception period, etc.) and non-existent cases (for example, 1st floor reception period), so it can be expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

In the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 1st floor reception period)" related to the above configuration 7-E, the display (1st floor operation-related display B) that imitates the special period 1st operation unit and the special period 1st. The time required for the periodic change may be the same or different from the display (1F operation-related display A) in which the operation unit is imitated.

In the above-mentioned production example, even when the same operation unit is displayed, the operation is performed depending on whether the periodic change appears in the predetermined time or in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. The mode as a dynamic display (stroke amount when moving up and down, etc.) that appears in the display itself that imitates the part may be different.

Further, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. related to the above configuration 7-E). , "Specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 7-E occurs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 7-E occurs. There is no such thing as "the specific type of production sound is put into the suppressed or inaudible state, or is not put into the suppressed mode or the inaudible state" (for example, the specific type of production sound is always in the inaudible state). However, the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 7-E has ended when the "special operation permissible period" related to the configuration 7-E occurs. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the production sound (specific BGM) of a specific type is put into an inaudible state (or suppressed) before the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 7-E occurs. There may be cases where the sound is not audible (or suppressed) (when a reception period occurs while a specific type of staging sound is audible). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation" related to the above configuration 7-E when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easier to recognize which of the "allowable periods" it is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even when the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

The above-mentioned "transformed 1st floor reception period" may be applied to the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st floor reception period)" according to the above configuration 7-E.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation (image display means).

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the reception period, the “predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)” and the 7th floor reception period (for example, FIG. (See FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) ”and“ a specific operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) ”) related to the above configuration 8-E shall be prepared at least. There is. Further, in both the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configurations 8-E, the operation unit is subject to display by the image display means and is capable of accepting a plurality of operations. Although there are (3rd floor operation unit A and 1st floor operation unit B), an operation was performed on the operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) within the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 8-E. Post-reception output, which is one of the post-reception changes, depending on the case and the case where the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) is operated in the "specific operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 8-E. Since different sounds can be output as sounds, it is expected to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) that is targeted for display by the image display means and allows multiple operation receptions, it is regarded as one of the post-reception changes after reception. While the output sound is output, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 8-E, the display by the image display means is performed. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is targeted and allows multiple operation receptions, the post-reception output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes and the reception. There may be cases where the post-output sound is not output.

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 8-E, the display target by the image display means is used. Even if an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is set to and allows multiple operation receptions, the output sound after reception is output and the output sound after reception is not output. Since there are cases, it can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been performed properly, and the tension will be maintained appropriately.

It should be noted that, within the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 8-E, the image is displayed by the image display means and is displayed a plurality of times. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) for which operation reception is acceptable, but the output sound is not output after reception as a trigger, for example, it is a display target by the image display means. By preventing the operation itself from being accepted for the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that allows multiple operation receptions, the output sound may not be output after reception, or the image may be displayed. Although the operation itself is accepted for the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is the target of display by means and allows multiple operation receptions, the output sound after reception does not satisfy the predetermined conditions. May not be output.

Further, within the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", the display is made by the image display means and a plurality of operation receptions are permissible. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) but the output sound is not output after reception, for example, "a specific operation allowable period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (FIG. 278 to FIG. 278)" is used. It is desirable that the event can occur even when the first operation is performed in "(see FIG. 281), etc.)". In addition, it is desirable that the event can occur regardless of the length of time that has passed since the last operation reception. Further, even if the output sound is not output after reception, some change may occur after reception.

Further, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" and "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 8-E, the operation unit (No. 1) which is targeted for display by the image display means and allows a plurality of operation receptions. The 3rd floor operation unit A and the 1st floor operation unit B) may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

Further, when the "predetermined operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 8-E occurs as the above "7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", it is displayed by the image display means. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is subject to the above and allows multiple operation receptions, the operation reception is permitted when the output sound is always output after reception. It becomes possible to suggest that there is an operation unit whose state is concealed. On the other hand, in the "specific operation allowable period" in which there is no concealed operation unit, the output sound may or may not be output after reception, so there is no concealment effect. Can be expected to enhance its staging.

Further, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "predetermined operation permissible period" related to the configuration 8-E occurs, "rather than the" predetermined operation permissible period "related to the configuration 8-E occurs. There is no previous "statement of a particular type of effect sound being suppressed or inaudible, or not suppressed or inaudible" (for example, after the specific type of effect sound is always in an inaudible state). The reception period is generated), but in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 8-E, the "specific operation" related to the configuration 8-E is specified. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "operation allowable period" occurs, "a specific type of staging sound (specification) before the occurrence of the" specific operation allowable period "related to the configuration 8-E" There are cases where BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) and cases where it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (when a reception period occurs while a specific type of staging sound is in an audible state). You may do it. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 8-E when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easier to recognize which one is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even when the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

The above-mentioned "transformed 1st floor reception period" may be applied to the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 1st floor reception period)" according to the above configuration 8-E.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation (image display means). In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the 7th floor reception period (for example, the 7th floor reception period) (See FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) ”and“ special operation permissible period (for example, 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) ”) related to the above configuration 9-E shall be prepared at least. There is.

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. There is an operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) in which the operation reception can be performed multiple times simply by allowing the operation reception multiple times and maintaining the operated state, and the operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) is operated. When the state is maintained, the post-reception output sound A, which is one of the post-reception changes A, is output at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of post-reception output sounds A are output to the operation unit (for example, at intervals later than the predetermined time). When each operation is performed, the output sound A is output after reception each time the operation is performed.

Further, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configurations 9-E, the operation reception is permitted a plurality of times, but the operation is maintained. There is an operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) in which the operation reception is not performed multiple times even if the operation unit is continued, and even if the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) is maintained in the operated state, the change B after reception is performed. One post-acceptance output sound B is not output at predetermined time intervals, and the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) is operated a plurality of times (for example, at intervals later than the predetermined time). Is performed, the output sound B may or may not be output after reception when the operation is performed.

According to such a configuration, the so-called automatic continuous striking function is not enabled in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configurations 9-E). Even if there is a unit (1st floor operation unit B) and the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) is operated, the output sound B may or may not be output after reception when the operation is performed. Since there are cases, it can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the operation is properly accepted and the tension will be maintained favorably.

Further, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configurations 9-E, etc. The operation reception is allowed multiple times and the operation reception can be performed multiple times only by keeping the operated state. For example, the operation unit (operation reception is permitted multiple times, but the operation reception is not performed multiple times even if the operation is maintained in the operated state, etc.) in the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281). The 1st floor operation unit B) "may be the same operation unit or may be a different operation unit.

Further, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configurations 9-E, etc. The operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) in which the operation reception can be performed multiple times simply by allowing the operation reception multiple times and maintaining the operated state is the "special operation allowable period (3rd floor operation unit A)" according to the above configuration 9-E. For example, it may be set as an operation unit (for example, the 1st floor operation unit A) to be operated even in the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281).

Further, the "operation reception is permitted a plurality of times, but is maintained in the operated state" in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configurations 9-E. The "operation unit (1st floor operation unit B)" in which the operation reception is not performed a plurality of times even if the operation is continued is the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (FIGS. 287 to 291)" according to the above configuration 9-E. (See) and the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)) ”may also be set as the operation unit (for example, the 3rd floor operation unit B) to be operated.

However, the operation unit (1st floor operation) in which the operation reception is not performed multiple times even if the operation reception is permitted multiple times but the operation state is maintained in the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 9-E. When "Part B)" is set as an operation unit (for example, the third floor operation unit B) that is also an operation target even in the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 9-E, the operation unit is also the same. Regardless of the above configuration 9-E, "in the specific operation allowable period, even if the output sound after the operation is output when the operation is performed, it will not be output (FIGS. 287 (k) and 297 (k). reference).

Further, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. According to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 9-E occurs, "rather than the" specific operation allowable period "related to the configuration 9-E occurs. There is no previous "statement of a particular type of effect sound being suppressed or inaudible, or not suppressed or inaudible" (for example, after the specific type of effect sound is always in an inaudible state). The reception period occurs), but in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 9-E, the "specification" related to the configuration 9-E is applied. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "operation allowable period" occurs, "a specific type of staging sound (specification) before the" special operation allowable period "related to the configuration 9-E occurs" There are cases where BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) and cases where it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (when a reception period occurs while a specific type of staging sound is in an audible state). You may do it. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 9-E when the operation opportunity is given are given. Since it becomes easier to recognize which one is, it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even when the mode of the staging sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

The above-mentioned "transformed 1st floor reception period" may be applied to the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st floor reception period)" according to the above configuration 9-E.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation so that a periodic change appears.

In this regard, in the reception period related to the above-mentioned production example, first, when the periodic change of the display that imitates the operation target to which the operation reception is permissible appears in a predetermined time unit (3rd floor reception period or the first). When the 3rd floor operation-related display A) displayed on the 7th floor reception period and the periodic change of the display imitating the operation target are displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (each of the above-mentioned effects). In the example, there is an operation-related display that is not the 3rd floor operation-related display A). Then, when the periodic change of the display that imitates the operation target is displayed in a predetermined time unit during the reception period (the 3rd floor operation-related display displayed in the 3rd floor reception period, the 7th floor reception period, etc.). A) and the case where the periodic change in the reception period is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the operation-related display is not the 3rd floor operation-related display A). In any case, when an operation is performed on the operation unit corresponding to the display that imitates the operation target among the plurality of operation units, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, can be output. Therefore, it can be expected to suggest that the operation reception is properly performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the 7th floor reception period (FIG. 291) related to the above configurations 10-E are used. (See 297 and FIG. 298)) ”and“ special operation permissible period (for example, 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) ”) related to the above configuration 10-E. There is. In this regard, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. , The operation unit (3rd floor operation unit) corresponding to the display (3rd floor operation-related display A) is displayed so that the periodic change of the display (3rd floor operation-related display A) that imitates the operation target appears in a predetermined time unit. When A) is operated, the output sound after reception, which is one of the changes after reception, is output. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 10-E), the operation target is imitated (1st floor operation-related display B). ) Is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, and when the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) corresponding to the display (1st floor operation-related display B) that imitates the operation target is operated. There are cases where the post-reception output sound B, which is one of the post-reception changes B, is output (timing te2A, te2B) and cases where the post-reception output sound B is not output (timing te2C).

According to such a configuration, when the periodic change of the display imitating the operation target is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is produced. Since there are cases where the output sound is output and cases where the output sound is not output after the reception, it can be expected to preferably give a feeling of tension as to whether the operation reception has been performed properly.

Further, in this case, the third floor operation unit A of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 10-E and the first floor operation unit B of the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 10-E are the same operation unit. It may be a different operation unit.

Regarding the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) It is desirable to set it as a longer valid time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the operation unit (for example, the first F operation unit B) is operated, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is not output (for example, timing te2C). It is in a state where a normal game is being performed, and does not occur in a state where a notification sound is being output based on some abnormality detection. For example, even if the operation unit (for example, the 1st floor operation unit B) is operated while only the "BGM output based on the start of the symbol variation" is audibly output as the sound, the sound changes after reception. The case where the output sound is not output after reception (for example, timing te2C), which is one of the above, can occur, and the case where the operation unit (for example, the 1st floor operation unit B) is operated while no sound is output. However, there may be a case where the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is not output (for example, timing te2C).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates an operation target that can be accepted for operation so that a periodic change appears. In addition, even if the operation unit is not operated during the reception period, it is possible to execute the same post-reception change process (automatic button function) as when the operation was performed (automatic reception execution). means).

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, first, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the third floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the seventh floor reception related to the above configurations 11-E are used. A period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) and the like and a special operation permissible period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)) related to the above configuration 11-E are prepared at least. It is supposed to be.

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)", etc. There is an operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times, and the operation unit (3rd floor operation). When the player operates the part A), the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes A, is output as aspects A1 and A2 (see FIG. 287 (k)).

On the other hand, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configurations 11-E, the processing target by the automatic reception execution means (automatic button function is There is an operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is not an object to be activated and the operation reception can be allowed multiple times, and the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) is operated by the player. In this case, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes B, is output as a sound different from the above aspects A1 and A2 (post-reception output sound B) (see FIG. 278 (k)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) is set through the mode of the output sound after reception. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment taste is maintained favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)” and the 7th floor reception period (FIG. 297 and FIG. 298) related to the above configurations 11-E. (See), etc.) ”, for the operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times. When the operation is performed by the player, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is output (see FIG. 287 (k)). However, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 11-E, the processing target by the automatic reception execution means (automatic button function is enabled). When an operation is performed by the player on the operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is not the target) and the operation reception can be permitted multiple times, the output sound after reception is one of the changes after reception. Is output in a mode different from the above aspects A1 and A2 (see timings te2A and te2B shown in FIG. 278 (k)), and the output sound itself after reception is not output (FIG. 278 (k)). (See timing te2C shown in). According to such a configuration, the condition for outputting the output sound after reception is different between the "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configurations 11-E, which causes a feeling of tension. It can be expected to be suitably maintained.

In this case, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc." related to the above configurations 11-E). "Operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and can be allowed to receive operations multiple times" and "Special operation allowable period (for example, first)" related to the above configurations 11-E. 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) "is the same as" operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and can allow operation reception multiple times. It may be an operation unit or a different operation unit.

Further, for example, the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 11-E is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and the operation reception. The operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that can be allowed multiple times includes the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the first 7F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) ”may also be set as an operation unit (for example, the third floor operation unit B) to be operated. However, the "operation unit (1st floor operation unit B) that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and the operation reception can be permitted a plurality of times" in the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 11-E is described above. If the operation unit (for example, the 3rd floor operation unit B) is set as the operation target even in the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 11-E, the output sound after reception is heard when the operation is performed. It is desirable to make sure that it is output, or that the output sound is not output after reception when the operation is performed (not a mandatory configuration). Regardless of which configuration is adopted (for example, even if the output sound after reception is not output when the operation is performed), the output sound after reception is output. Since the conditions differ between the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 11-E, it can be expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Further, when the reception period occurs, it is possible to audibly output a reception allowable sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)" and the 8th floor reception period (for example, the 8th floor reception period) (See FIGS. 299 and 300), etc.) ”, and the“ special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)) and the 6th floor reception period (FIG. 295) related to the above configuration 12-E. And (see Fig. 296), etc.) ”.

Then, in the above-mentioned production example, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)” and the 8th floor reception period (FIG. 299 and FIG. 300) related to the above configuration 12-E (See), etc.) ”, the operation reception for the first operation unit (4th floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) for the specific period and the second operation unit (4th floor operation unit B, for example) for the specific period. , The operation reception for the operation button 410) can be at least acceptable, and during the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 12-E, the reception allowable sound is audibly output for a specific period. Either the operation reception for the first operation unit (4th floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) or the operation reception for the second operation unit (4th floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period. When it is turned down, the reception allowable sound is made inaudible (FIG. 292 (k), FIG. 293 (k), FIG. 299 (k), FIG. 300 (k)). See etc.). The reception allowable sound may be output so as to straddle the timing th2 at which the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 12-E occurs, or may be output at the timing th2 or later. You may.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned production example, the "special operation allowable period (for example, the second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)" and the sixth floor reception period (FIG. 295 and FIG. (See FIG. 296), etc.) ”, the operation reception for the special period first operation unit (second floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the special period second operation unit (second floor operation unit B). For example, the operation reception for the operation button 410) can be at least acceptable, and while the reception permissible sound is audibly output in the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 12-E. When an operation reception is performed for the second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) during the special period, the reception allowable sound is not made inaudible (FIG. 282). The timing tf2A, tf2B, tf2C) shown in the above, and the special period 1st operation unit (in the 2nd floor operation unit A) while the reception allowable sound is audibly output in the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 12-E. Yes, for example, when the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001) is made, the reception allowable sound is made inaudible (timing tf2D shown in FIG. 282). The reception allowable sound may be output so as to straddle the timing tf2 at which the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 12-E occurs, or may be output at the timing th2 or later. You may.

According to such a configuration, the condition that the reception permissible sound is made inaudible is the "special operation permissible period (for example, the second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)) in the above configuration 12-E. , 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.), and "special operation allowable period (for example, 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)" related to the above configuration 12-E, and the first Since it will be different depending on the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), it can be expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

In this case, the specific period 1st operation unit (4th floor operation unit A) of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 12-E is the special period of the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 12-E. It may be the same as or different from the 1 operation unit (2nd floor operation unit A).

Further, the specific period second operation unit (4th floor operation unit B) of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 12-E is the special period first operation of the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 12-E. It may be the same as or different from the second operation unit (second F operation unit A) or the second operation unit (second F operation unit B) for a special period.

Further, the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A) and the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B) of the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 12-E are the above configuration 12-E. The operation reception may be permitted even in the "specific operation allowable period".

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the “special operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)” and the 6th floor reception period (FIG. 295 and FIG. 296) related to the above configuration 12-E. (See), etc.) ”, the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, operation buttons). Of 410), the first operation unit of the special period is targeted for the activation of the automatic button function, and the second operation unit of the special period is not targeted for the activation of the automatic button function. That is, in this case, the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) on the side where a plurality of operations are required is triggered by the player's own operation. After the reception, you will not be able to see the contents of the change. Therefore, low-difficulty games (one operation is sufficient, and even if there is no operation, changes can be confirmed after reception when there is an operation) and high-difficulty games (multiple operations). Is required, and if there is no operation, it will not be possible to confirm the change after reception when there is an operation), so it will be possible to provide both at the same time. It can be expected to increase.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the “special operation allowable period (for example, the second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)” and the sixth floor reception period (FIGS. 295 and 296) related to the above configuration 12-E. (See), etc.) ”, the reception allowable sound is set to be inaudible until the timing tf3 at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives. As a result, it becomes possible to suggest that the timing for enabling the automatic button function has not yet arrived while the reception allowable sound is being output, so that the player's own operation opportunity is not deprived. It will be possible to enjoy the game with a sense of security.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Further, when the reception period occurs, it is possible to audibly output a reception allowable sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of the reception period, the “predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294)” and the 9th floor reception period (FIG. 301 and FIG. (See FIG. 302), etc.) ”, and the“ specific operation permissible period (for example, the second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)) and the sixth floor reception period (FIGS. 295 and 296) related to the above configuration 13-E. (See), etc.) ”and at least.

Then, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.)" related to the above configuration 13-E, the predetermined period is the first. The operation reception for the 1 operation unit (the 5th floor operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (the 5th floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a predetermined period. At least it can be acceptable. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, in the “predetermined operation allowable period” related to the configuration 13-E, the first operation unit (5th floor operation unit A) is subjected to the predetermined period while the reception allowable sound is audibly output. Regardless of whether the operation reception or the operation reception for the 2nd operation unit (5th floor operation unit B) is performed for a predetermined period, the reception allowable sound is not made inaudible. (See FIGS. 294 (j), (k) and FIGS. 301 (j), (k)).

On the other hand, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc." related to the above configuration 13-E). Then, the operation reception for the first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) for the specific period and the operation reception for the second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for the specific period The operation reception can be at least acceptable. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 13-E, the first operation unit (second floor operation unit A) is subjected to the specific period while the reception allowable sound is audibly output. When the operation reception is performed, the reception allowable sound is not made inaudible as a trigger, but when the operation reception for the second operation unit (2nd floor operation unit B) is performed for a specific period, this is performed. As an opportunity, the permissible reception sound is made inaudible (see FIGS. 282 (j), (k) and 295 (j), (k)). According to such a configuration, the conditions for making the reception allowable sound inaudible differ between the predetermined operation allowable period and the specific operation allowable period, so that it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained. sell.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 13-E is the "predetermined period first operation unit" of the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 13-E. Alternatively, it may be the same as or different from the “second operation unit for a predetermined period”.

Further, the "specific period second operation unit" of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 13-E is the "predetermined period first operation unit" or the "predetermined period first operation unit" of the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 13-E. It may be the same as the "second operation unit for a predetermined period", or it may be different from any of them.

Further, the predetermined period first operation unit (or the predetermined period second operation unit) may be capable of accepting operations even in the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 13-E.

Further, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 13-E, etc. The permissible sound is the same as the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302)", etc. It may be possible to output in an embodiment.

In particular, in the case where the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the configuration 13-E always appears in the same mode as the 5th F effect display F, and then the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 13-E occurs. Is output in a mode in which it can be output even in the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 13-E, and in a mode in which it is not output in the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 13-E. It is desirable to have some cases.

For example, when the aspect EF-2 that appears when the expectation is low is made to appear as the "fifth F effect display EF (always the same aspect)", the aspect EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF". Even so, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that this is displayed as the "5th floor effect display EF", and further the possibility that the highly expected mode UA2 will appear as the display UA after the reception on the 5th floor. Therefore, it can be expected that the deterioration of the game interest when the aspect EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF" can be suppressed.

Alternatively, when the aspect EF-1 that appears when high expectations are made to appear as the "fifth F effect display EF (always the same aspect)", the aspect EF-is always displayed when the "fifth F effect display EF" is displayed. Since it becomes possible to make 1 appear, it can be expected to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a display after reception is displayed. sell. Further, when the reception period occurs, it is possible to audibly output a reception allowable sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, as the reception period, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)” and the 6th floor reception period (FIG. 295) related to the above configuration 14-E are used. And (see FIG. 296), etc.) ”, and in the“ specific operation allowable period ”related to the configuration 14-E, the first operation unit (second floor operation unit B, which is the second floor operation unit B) among the plurality of operation units. For example, both the operation reception for the operation button 410) and the operation reception for the second operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) are acceptable, and the first operation unit (second F operation) is acceptable. When the player operates the part B), the display UB after the reception on the second floor is displayed so that the decorative symbol SZ can be seen overlapping on the front side (FIGS. 285 (c), (d), etc.). (Refer to), when the player operates the second operation unit (second floor operation unit A), the display UA after reception of the second floor is displayed so that the decorative symbol SZ can be seen overlapping behind it. It was decided (see FIG. 286 (g) and the like). According to such a configuration, depending on whether the first operation unit (second floor operation unit B) or the second operation unit (second floor operation unit A) is operated, either the decorative symbol SZ or the post-acceptance display is displayed. Since it is possible to select whether or not the user wants to see the game with priority, it can be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)” and the 6th floor reception period (FIG. 295 and FIG. 296) related to the above configuration 14-E. (See), etc.) ”, when the operation is performed on the first operation unit (second floor operation unit B) and when the operation is performed on the second operation unit (second floor operation unit A). Then, different display modes (UA, UB) are displayed as the display after reception. With such a configuration, not only the problem of visibility as a post-reception display but also the content of the production can be taken into consideration to force the selection of which post-reception display you want to see, so that the performance is higher. Will be expected to be provided.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)” and the 6th floor reception period (FIG. 295 and FIG. In (see 296), etc.) ”, when the player operates the first operation unit (second floor operation unit B) while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the display after reception is the reception. While the audible output of the permissible sound is continued, it is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol SZ on the front side. On the other hand, when the player operates the second operation unit (second floor operation unit A) while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound becomes inaudible. After the reception, the display is displayed so that it overlaps with the decorative symbol SZ on the back side. According to such a configuration, when the display after reception is selected to be prioritized among the decorative symbol SZ and the display after reception, the audible output of the reception allowable sound is continued as a compensation, and the operation is performed by this. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the reception is in a situation, it can be expected that the tension is appropriately maintained. Further, in order to avoid this, if the audible output of the reception allowable sound is interrupted based on the operation reception, the compensation is that the display after reception is difficult to see due to the decorative symbol SZ. However, it can be expected to maintain a favorable feeling of tension.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, when the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 14-E is realized as the "sixth floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)", the reception allowable sound is audible. When the player operates the first operation unit (second floor operation unit B) on the side that is not the display target (confidential) side of the display that imitates the operation target in the output, the display after reception is displayed. While the audible output of the reception allowable sound is being continued, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed so as to be overlapped on the front side thereof. On the other hand, the player operates the second operation unit (second floor operation unit A) on the side to be displayed, which is a display targeting the operation target while the reception allowable sound is audibly output. When this is done, the reception allowable sound is made inaudible, and the display after reception is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol SZ on the back side. According to such a configuration, even if the player operates the first operation unit (second floor operation unit B) on the (confidential) side, the audible output of the reception allowable sound is interrupted by this as an opportunity. Since it is not done, it becomes possible to add a staging element regarding concealment as to whether or not the operation reception is properly performed. However, instead, since the display after reception is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol SZ on the front side, the first operation unit (second floor operation unit B) on the (confidential) side is displayed. ) Can be expected to be provided as special information to assist in determining whether or not the operation reception is properly performed when the operation is performed by the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a precursory effect display that suggests that an operation allowable period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, as the reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)" and the 8th floor reception period (FIG. 299) related to the above configuration 15-E are used. And (see FIG. 300), etc.) ”, and the“ special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)) and the 6th floor reception period (FIG. 295 and FIG. See 296)) ”and at least.

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 8th floor reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300)", etc. Operation reception for the first operation unit (4th floor operation unit A, for example, sword decoration body 5001) for a specific period and operation reception for the second operation unit (4th floor operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) for a specific period. Is at least acceptable, and the precursor staging display is displayed so as to straddle the timing th2 at which the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 15-E occurs, and the configuration 15-E. While the precursor effect display is displayed in the "specific operation allowable period", the operation reception for the specific period 1st operation unit (4th floor operation unit A) and the operation reception for the specific period 2nd operation unit (4th floor operation unit B) are performed. When any of the operation receptions is made, the precursor effect display is hidden (FIG. 292 (d), FIG. 293 (d), FIG. 299 (d), and the like. (See FIG. 300 (d) and the like).

On the other hand, the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc." related to the above configuration 15-E). Then, the operation reception for the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation reception for the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) are performed. The operation reception can be at least acceptable, and the precursor staging display is displayed so as to straddle the timing tf2 at which the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 15-E occurs. When the operation is accepted for the special period 1st operation unit (2nd floor operation unit A) while the precursor effect display is audibly output in the "special operation allowable period" related to 15-E, the precursor is triggered by this. The effect display is not hidden, and while the precursor effect display is displayed in the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 15-E, the special period second operation unit (second F operation) is displayed. When the operation reception for the part B) is made, the precursor effect display is hidden (see FIGS. 282 (d), 295 (d), etc.). According to such a configuration, the conditions for hiding the precursor staging display differ depending on the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 15-E. It can be expected that the feeling is maintained suitably.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 15-E is the "special period first operation unit" of the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 15-E. Alternatively, it may be the same as or different from the “special period second operation unit”.

Further, the "specific period second operation unit" of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 15-E is the "special period first operation unit" or "special period first operation unit" of the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 15-E. It may be the same as the "special period second operation unit", or it may be different from any of them.

Further, the "special period first operation unit (or special period second operation unit)" according to the above configuration 15-E can be allowed to accept operations even in the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 15-E. May be.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 15-E is realized as the 8th floor reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), the side that is kept secret Even when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (4th floor operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) in the specific period, the first operation unit (4th floor operation unit A, for example) in the specific period , The 4th floor effect display is displayed so that it can be seen overlapping from the front of the 4th floor operation-related display A corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001). It is A, and it can be suitably suggested that the operation reception of the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed, for example.

In the above-mentioned effect example, the 4th floor precursor effect display may be displayed as the same image display as the 5th floor precursor effect display. Further, the 4th floor precursor effect display may be displayed as the same image display as the 3rd floor precursor effect display.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ. Further, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a display after reception can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to execute a precursory effect display that suggests that a reception period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the precursor effect display can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the operation permissible period occurs, and the operation unit is allowed to accept the operation during the operation permissible period. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation, the post-reception display is displayed so that the decorative symbol SZ appears to overlap the front side thereof (for example, the second floor post-reception display UB2 shown in FIG. 286 (e), etc.). ) And the case where the post-reception display is displayed so that it appears to overlap the decorative symbol SZ on the back side (for example, the second floor post-reception display UA1 shown in FIG. 286 (g)). Therefore, it can be expected that the display after reception will be enhanced with the decorative design SZ to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as the types of the reception period, the specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)) and the 5th floor reception period (FIG. 294) related to the above configuration 16-E are shown. (See), 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.).

Then, in the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 16-E, the first operation unit among the plurality of operation units (for example, when the specific operation allowable period is realized as the second floor reception period, the "second floor operation unit" Corresponds to "B" and corresponds to the operation reception for the operation button 410) and the second operation unit (for example, when the specific operation allowable period is realized as the second floor reception period, it corresponds to the "second floor operation unit A" and is a sword decoration. Any operation reception for the body 5001 or the like is allowed, and when the player operates the first operation unit (for example, the second floor operation unit B), the decorative symbol SZ is placed in front of the operation reception unit. The display after reception (for example, the display after reception UB on the 2nd floor) is displayed so as to overlap each other (see, for example, FIG. 286 (e)), and the second operation unit (for example, the operation unit A on the 2nd floor) is displayed. When the operation by the player is performed, the display after reception (for example, the display after reception UA on the 2nd floor) is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol SZ on the back side thereof (for example, FIG. 286 (g). ) Etc.). According to such a configuration, the decorative symbol SZ and the display after reception are displayed depending on whether the first operation unit (for example, the second F operation unit B) or the second operation unit (for example, the second F operation unit A) is operated. Since it is possible to select which of the above is prioritized and what one is desired to be viewed, it can be expected that the game entertainment is preferably maintained.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 16-E, an operation was performed on the first operation unit (for example, the second floor operation unit B and the operation button 410). Depending on the case and the case where the operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the second floor operation unit A and the sword decoration body 5001), the display mode after reception is different (for example, after the reception on the second floor). Display UA, UB) is displayed. With such a configuration, not only the problem of visibility as a post-reception display but also the content of the production can be taken into consideration to force the selection of which post-reception display you want to see, so that the performance is higher. Will be expected to be provided.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 16-E, the operation for the first operation unit (for example, the second floor operation unit B and the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation units is performed. Both the reception and the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the second floor operation unit A and the sword decoration body 5001) are acceptable, and the first operation unit (for example, the precursor effect display is displayed). For example, when the player operates the operation button 410) on the 2nd floor operation unit B, the display after reception is decorated while the precursor effect display is not hidden and is displayed. It is displayed so as to overlap the symbol SZ and the precursor effect display on the front side (see, for example, FIG. 286 (e)), and while the precursor effect display is displayed, the second operation unit (for example, the second floor). When the player operates the operation unit A (sword decoration body 5001 etc.), the precursor effect display is hidden as a trigger, and the display after reception is behind the decorative symbol SZ. (For example, see FIGS. 286 (f) and 286 (g)).

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 16-E, when the first operation unit is operated, the precursory effect display is not hidden, but the operation is supported. Since the post-reception display is displayed so as to overlap the precursor effect display from the front, its visibility is ensured. On the other hand, when the second operation unit is operated, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol SZ on the back side thereof, but the precursor effect display is triggered by this. Since it is hidden, its visibility is ensured. Since the visibility of the display after reception is ensured through such different methods when the first operation unit is operated and when the second operation unit is operated, it is possible to greatly differ the directing performance from each other. It is possible, and it can be expected that the effectability when prompting the selection as to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is to be operated is enhanced.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation allowable period) in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a post-reception display is generated. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a precursory effect display that suggests that a reception period will occur. It is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is acceptable.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, as the types of the reception period, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)” and the 4th floor reception period (FIG. 292) related to the above configurations 17-E are used. And FIG. 293), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), or the 8th floor reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), etc. It was decided to prepare at least an allowable period (for example, a 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), a 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.).

Then, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)", the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), and the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. (See FIGS. 297 and 298) or the 8th floor reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300)) ”, the operation unit is not operated during the“ specific operation allowable period ”related to the configuration 17-E. Even in this case, when the specific time (set effective time) elapses after the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs, the same post-acceptance as when the operation for the operation unit is performed is performed. The display is performed (the automatic button function is enabled). In this regard, the precursory effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the "specific operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs, but the specific time elapses after the specific operation allowable period occurs. It was decided to hide it at the timing before it was done.

On the other hand, the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc." related to the above configurations 17-E). Then, even if the operation unit is not operated in the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E, the special time after the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs. When (the set valid time) has elapsed, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation for the operation unit is performed is performed (the automatic button function is enabled). In this regard, the precursory effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs, and the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs. It is also displayed when the special time (set valid time) has elapsed since then, and the above special operation is not performed by the player after the "special operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E has occurred. When the time (set effective time) has elapsed, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation for the operation unit is performed is started with the precursor effect display not hidden but displayed. I did it.

According to such a configuration, the relationship between the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E and the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E and the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled. Since the timing at which the precursor staging display is hidden is different, it can be expected that the tension when the operation permissible period in which the automatic button function is enabled occurs is suitably maintained.

In this case, the above-mentioned "specific time" and "special time" may be the same time or different times.

Further, the precursor staging display is displayed corresponding to the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 17-E and the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 17-E. Depending on the case, it may be displayed in the same mode or may be displayed in a different mode.

Further, in the above-mentioned staging example, as the type of reception period, apart from the "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 17-E, the "predetermined operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 17-E. (For example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.) ”.

In this regard, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.)" related to the above configurations 17-E, the said. If no operation is performed on the operation unit within the "predetermined operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation on the operation unit is performed is performed (the automatic button function is enabled). It is designed to never happen. In this respect, the precursory effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the "predetermined operation allowable period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs, but the precursory effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the "predetermined operation allowable period" occurs. It was decided that the display would be hidden at a timing (shorter time lapse) before the lapse of either the specific time or the special time after the occurrence of the "predetermined operation allowable period" (FIG. 294 (d), FIG. See FIGS. 301 (d) and 302 (d)).

According to such a configuration, if the precursor effect display is hidden in the middle of the reception period, the automatic button function may be enabled or the automatic button function may not be enabled. Therefore, it can be expected that the player is encouraged to perform the operation as soon as possible. In addition, if the acceptance period is not terminated while the precursor effect display is displayed (“specific operation allowable period” for configuration 17-E, “predetermined operation allowable period” for configuration 17-E), the acceptance period Is terminated (“special operation allowable period” for configuration 17-E), but the automatic button function is always enabled even if the acceptance period is terminated. Therefore, as a player, he / she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

As described above, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294) and the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302) may be subject to the activation of the automatic button function. In this case, the time when the precursor effect display is displayed is set as the above-mentioned specific time (set effective time), and these reception periods are realized as the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E. It will be.

Further, in the reception period related to the above-mentioned production example, when the post-reception display is not newly displayed and the post-reception output sound is not newly output when the operation unit is operated (for example, the timing te2C shown in FIG. 278 or , The timing tf2C shown in FIGS. 282 and 295, the timing tg2C shown in FIGS. 287 and 297, the timing ti2C shown in FIGS. 294 and 301, etc.), but in this case, the operation reception itself is performed. It may be omitted, or the operation reception itself may be present, but the predetermined conditions may not be satisfied, the post-reception display may not be newly displayed, and the post-reception output sound may not be newly output. In addition, if there is an operation reception itself, but the predetermined conditions are not met, the post-reception display is not newly displayed, and the post-reception output sound is not newly output, a new post-reception display or post-reception output is performed. Aside from the new output of the sound, some post-acceptance changes (for example, the time it takes for the post-acceptance display that was displayed at the time of operation to be hidden) should occur. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), and the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293). (See), the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), and the 8th floor reception period. During the period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) and the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), when the operation reception is performed while the precursor effect display is displayed, " In some cases, the "display that imitates the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "precursor effect display" are hidden. In this case, in the above-mentioned effect example, the "effect display EF" is displayed in a state where the "display that imitates the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "precursor effect display" are not hidden but are displayed respectively. Was displayed first. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the "effect display EF" is displayed on the front side of the "display that imitates the operation target (operation-related display)" so as to make it difficult to see. However, at this time, it may be displayed on the front side of the "precursor effect display" so as to make it difficult to see. According to such a configuration, even after the operation reception is performed, the operation reception is properly performed while leaving the display of "display that imitates the operation target (operation-related display)" and "precursor effect display". You will be able to better suggest that you are in a situation. Further, in this case, the precursory effect display is not hidden even when the post-reception display is displayed, and the post-reception display should be displayed behind the precursory effect display. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the 2nd floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), and the 4th floor reception period (FIG. 292 and 293). (See), the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294), the 6th floor reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), and the 8th floor reception period. During the period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) and the 9th floor reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), the operation reception is performed when the precursor effect display is displayed, and the operation reception causes the precursor effect. When the display and the display that imitates the operation target (operation-related display) are hidden, it is difficult to visually recognize the operation-related display before the precursor effect display and the operation-related display are hidden. However, it is desirable that the effect display be displayed so as to overlap the front side of the effect display so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the precursor effect display. At this time, the precursor effect display is not hidden even when the post-reception display is displayed, and is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the post-reception display so as to make it difficult to see. It is desirable to do so.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various embodiments are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible to improve and change the design.

When a plurality of operation units for which operation reception is acceptable are prepared during the reception period for the above-mentioned production example, the operation units may be provided as different operation units from each other. It may be provided as different parts in one operation unit.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the display that imitates the operation unit may be an image display in which the relevant part is expressed as at least an image, and a portion different from the operation unit is also expressed in the same image display. It may be the one that exists.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, depending on the type of reception period, when the reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound is output in any of a plurality of modes in which the expectation degree (expectation degree for granting benefits such as big hits) is different. In some cases, in the reception period of the type in which the reception permissible sound is output in such an embodiment, when an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the reception permissible sound is being output, this is an opportunity. As a result, the reception allowable sound may be made inaudible (not an essential configuration). That is, in this case, if the operation is performed at an early stage after the reception period occurs, there is a risk that the expectation information provided by the reception permissible sound cannot be recognized at an early stage, so that the reception period occurs. It can be expected to suppress performing rough games such as repeated hitting operations from before.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, depending on the type of the reception period, the reception permissible sound may always be output in the same manner when the reception period occurs, but the reception permissible sound is output in such a mode. In the reception period of the type, when an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the reception allowable sound is being output, the reception allowable sound becomes inaudible as a trigger, and the reception The permissible sound may not be inaudible in some cases (not a required configuration). That is, in this case, if the reception permissible sound is not made inaudible, it can be recognized that the reception permissible sound is not a type of reception permissible sound that suggests the degree of expectation when the operation is mistakenly performed early. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games. In addition, when the reception permissible sound is made inaudible, it is not a type of reception permissible sound that suggests the degree of expectation in the first place, so there is no demerit by operating it early, but the player side has the degree of expectation. Since it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the sound is acceptable for acceptance of the suggested type, it is expected that even with such an acceptable sound for acceptance of this type, it will be possible to suppress the above-mentioned miscellaneous games. sell.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, a display such as "auto button is being set" may be displayed, but the display may not necessarily be performed. In particular, when it is realized as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic effect function can always be enabled and the process itself such as "setting to the effect state" is not installed, instead of the pachinko machine 1 set in the automatic effect mode. It is desirable not to display "Auto button is being set". In the pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with the process itself such as "setting to the effect state", the valid period in which the automatic effect function is played and the automatic effect function are set according to the type of operation reception effect that the player is allowed to operate. A valid period that is not played may occur.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "image" may be an image that urges the player to operate, and is not necessarily an operation target, for example, an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down. It does not have to be displayed as an image imitating the operating means.

In addition, when the automatic effect function is adopted in each of the above-mentioned effect examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation reception within the operation valid period is set to any timing as long as it is within the operation valid period. It may be. In order to appropriately give the player an operation opportunity, the operation is performed when the operation is not detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after half or more of the operation validity period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when the operation is not detected until the timing when the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and the post-operation effect is produced based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden and maintained even after the valid period ends, the operation is targeted at the timing when the valid period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). This is expected to prevent the player from misrecognizing the bar display, such as "Isn't the valid period continuing?", Even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously. Become so.

When "period" or "time" is described in each of the above-mentioned production examples, they may be the minimum control unit "period" or "time", for example, a period for one frame or the like. It means including time.

Even if the image of the operation receiving part to be operated and the peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery thereof are individually prepared as image data and displayed as an integrated image in which each image data is combined. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (c)), and this case. In some cases, "special button image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (d)). However, when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144 (a) and 144 (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving unit), and the "special button" is displayed. When "Image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 144 (b) and (d)), the second operation means (second operation receiving unit) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving unit) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

In each of the above-mentioned explanatory examples, as the member (operation means) prepared as an operation target, a member (button or the like) that requires a pressing operation (pressing operation) or a member (sword) that requires an insertion / removal operation (sword). In addition to decoration (decoration, etc.), it may be realized as something that requires player movement such as non-contact or touch (proximity sensor, etc.).

The peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decorative portion actually provided on the peripheral edge of the "operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given", but at least a part of the peripheral decorative portion is imitated. It does not have to be, and there may be a part that imitates the peripheral decoration part.

Regarding the second validity period in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", and the validity period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, It is not a finite one in which a predetermined set time is set, and may be infinitely continued as long as a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is not satisfied.

When displaying the specific image TG within the valid period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

For the "automatic reception effect" described in FIGS. 144 and later, any of the realization methods related to the "automatic reception effect" exemplified earlier may be adopted. Any of the above-mentioned realization methods may be adopted for how the simulated image and the gauge image are displayed at the time of the automatic reception effect. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception effect occurs, the type of the effect state at the time of the occurrence, the type of the reception effect (post-operation effect) itself, or the reception effect. Depending on the conditions in which the above occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed is executed (the "automatic effect function" is enabled) even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period. If there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the post-operation effect may not be executed (the "automatic effect function" may not be enabled). The timing at which the automatic effect function is activated may be a predetermined timing within the valid period, a timing at which the valid period ends, or a timing at which a short time has passed since the valid period ended. May be.

The reception period exemplified in each of the above-mentioned production examples (for example, the reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. 194 to 199, the reception periods F and G, etc.) does not necessarily correspond to the result of the jackpot determination (production determination). It does not have to occur within the pattern. For example, during the period when the symbol change is not executed (for example, the period when the jackpot game is executed, various interval periods, etc.), not during the period when the symbol change is executed (predetermined conditions are set. It may occur (based on the establishment). In this case, "x seconds after the start of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 190 is applied to the symbol fluctuation of y seconds shorter than x seconds, and "from the start of fluctuation" after the symbol fluctuation of y seconds ends. The timing of "x seconds later" may arrive, and the reception period D may be generated at that timing. According to such a configuration, since the reception period D occurs after the symbol change is stopped while the hold is "0", the player who intends to stop the game can be retained. become. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the fluctuation stop" instead of "x seconds after the fluctuation start".

Further, the reception period exemplified in each of the above-mentioned production examples (for example, the reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. 194 to 199, the reception periods F and G, etc.) is set in advance as the end condition of the reception period. It is not always necessary to set it as "the time value has passed", and the acceptance period is set when the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when 10 game balls are accepted in the big winning opening). It may be terminated.

At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (b), the operation target display (model image display) and the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) are hidden and cannot be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 212 (a). It may be in a state.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the extinction EF effect (disappearance effect image, etc.) is a post-reception effect (conversation notice that suggests the degree of expectation depending on which conversation appears, and whether the movable body operates. It is commonly used for multiple reception periods with different types of movable effects that suggest the degree of expectation depending on whether or not it appears, cut-in notice that suggests the degree of expectation depending on which mode the cut-in display appears, etc.) It is possible (it can be executed in the same production mode), and it is possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed (the reception period has ended). In other words, the post-reception production is different depending on the type of reception period, so when you look at the production content, is this done within the reception period, or the reception period has ended? It is difficult to recognize whether it is being done along with it. In this regard, regardless of the type of reception period, by preparing an extinct EF production in which a common (same) production mode can appear when the reception period ends, the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed and the post-reception production is performed. Can be suitably suggested that is in the running state. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), it may be sufficient that an extinction EF effect (such as an extinction effect image) common to a plurality of types of post-acceptance effects is executed, and for example, a specific type of post-acceptance effect occurs. A dedicated extinction EF effect that can be executed only occasionally may be prepared.

In addition, each reception period (for example, 1E reception period, 2E reception period, 3E reception period, 4E reception period, 5E reception period, 6E reception period, etc.) related to each of the above-mentioned production examples and variations thereof, etc. ) May include those that occur within the variable period of the decorative symbol and those that do not occur within the variable period of the decorative symbol.

Further, the above-mentioned first periodic display SH1 and third periodic display SH3 may be displayed as "periodic changes in the image display imitating the operating means" displayed within the reception period. .. That is, in this case, the first periodic display SH1 and the third periodic display SH3 are synonymous with the image display (button image BMGa).

In addition, the matters described as "desirable" in each of the above-mentioned production examples, modification examples, and writings, etc., only describe the further action and effect when the same configuration is provided, and the same configuration is described. Needless to say, it is not always necessary to prepare.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

Claims (1)

Multiple operation units targeted for operation by the player,
Judgment means to make a judgment and
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and a privilege granting means.
It is possible to generate an operation permissible display period in which the operation acceptance for the operation unit is permitted , and the image display that imitates the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted is displayed with periodic changes. An operation permissible display period execution means that can cause a change after reception when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the display period.
Equipped with
As the type of the operation permissible display period, a specific operation permissible display period and a special operation permissible display period are prepared .
In the specific operation permissible display period , there is an operation unit that allows a plurality of operation receptions and is displayed as the image display , and the operation reception is made to the operation unit in the specific operation permissible display period. Then , based on the fact that the operation reception has been made, as one of the changes after the reception, it is possible to hide the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display that imitates the operation unit. And
In the special operation permissible display period, there is an operation unit that allows a plurality of operation receptions and is displayed as the image display, and the operation reception is performed to the operation unit in the special operation permissible display period. And, based on the fact that the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the image display that imitates the operation unit is not hidden, and the periodic change can be continued. ,
The special operation permissible display period is generated based on the establishment of a special condition, but is generated when the generation condition is satisfied after the production sound of a specific type is made inaudible, and the specific type. There are both cases where the production sound of is not inaudible but is output audibly, and the generation condition is satisfied.
moreover,
In the special operation allowable display period, when the previous symbol variation ending at the time when the period occurs is executed in the first variation pattern, the effect sound of the specific type is in an inaudible state. When the previous symbol variation that occurs in the above and ends at the time when the period occurs is executed in the second variation pattern, it occurs in the audible output of the specific type of effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images